The
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Ernst Hkinrich Haickei, in 1874
From Rolschc (1906).
By permission
of
Macrae Smith Company.
C f3
The
Classification
of
LOWER ORGANISMS
By
HERBERT FAULKNER COPELAND
\
PACIFIC
^,kfi^..^
^.,
BOOKS
PALO ALTO, CALIFORNIA
Copyright 1956 by Herbert F. Copeland
Library of Congress Catalog Card
Number 56-7944
Published by
PACIFIC
BOOKS
Palo Alto, California
Printed and
bound
in the
United States of America
CONTENTS
Chapter
I.
II.
III.
Page
Introduction
An Essay on Nomenclature
1
6
Kingdom Mychota
Phylum Archezoa
Class
1.
12
17
Schizophyta
18
Order 1. Schizosporea
Order 2. Actinomycetalea
Order 3. Caulobacterialea
Class 2. Myxoschizomycetes
Order 1. Myxobactralea
Order 2. Spirochaetalea
Class
3.
Archiplastidea
Order 1.
Order 2.
Order 3.
Order 4.
IV.
V.
Rhodobacteria
31
Sphaerotilalea
33
33
Coccogonea
Gloiophycea
Kingdom Protoctista
33
37
Phylum Rhodophyta
Class
1.
40
Bangialea
41
Order Bangiacea
41
Heterocarpea
Order 1. Cryptospermea
Order 2. Sphaerococcoidea
Class
4.
Furccllariea
44
47
47
49
50
5.
Coeloblastea
51
6.
Floridea
51
2.
Order
Order
Order
Order
VI.
18
24
25
27
27
28
29
3.
Gelidialea
Phylum Phaeophyta
Class
1.
Order
Order
Order
Order
Order
Class
2.
1.
Ochromonadalea
53
55
57
2.
Silicoflagellata
61
3.
Vaucheriacea
63
4.
Choanoflagellata
67
5.
Hyphochytrialea
69
69
73
74
76
77
80
Heterokonta
Bacillariacea
Order 1. Disciformia
Order 2. Diatomea
Class 3. Oomycetes
Order 1. Saprolegnina
Order 2. Peronosporina
Order 3. Lagenidialea
Class 4. Melanophycea
Order 1 Phaeozoosporea
Order 2. Sphacelarialea
Order 3. Dictyotea
Order 4. Sporochnoidea
81
82
86
86
86
87
.
V
ly
Chapter
Page
Orders. Cutlerialea
Order 6. Laminariea
Order 7. Fucoidea
VII.
88
89
91
Phylum Pyrrhophyta
1.
Cryptomonadalea
2.
Adiniferidea
3.
Cystoflagellata
94
95
96
98
99
4. Cilioflagellata
102
Class Mastigophora
Order
Order
Order
Order
Order
VIII.
Astoma
Phylum Opisthokonta
105
5.
110
Class Archimycetes
Order
Order
IX.
Monoblepharidalea
Ill
2.
Chytridinea
113
Phylum Inophyta
119
Zygomycetes
Order 1. Mucorina
Order 2. Entomophthorinea
Class 2. Ascomycetes
Order 1. Endomycetalea
Order 2. Mucedines
Order 3. Perisporiacea
Order 4. Phacidialea
Order 5. Cupulata
Order 6. Exoascalea
Order 7. Sclerocarpa
Order 8. Laboulbenialea
121
3. Hyphomycetes
Order 1. Phomatalea
Order 2. Melanconialea
Order 3. Nematothecia
140
Class
1.
Class
Class
X.
Ill
1.
4.
....
121
124
125
129
130
131
133
134
137
137
140
141
141
141
142
Basidiomycetes
Order 1. Protobasidiomycetes
Order 2. Hypodermia
Order 3. Ustilaginea
Order 4. Tremcllina
Order 5. Dacryomycetalea
Order 6. Fungi
Order 7. Dermatocarpa
Phylum Protoplasta
Class 1. Zoomastigoda
Order 1. Rhizoflagellata
Order 2. Polymastigida
Order 3. Trichomonadina
Order 4. Hypcrmastiglna
Class 2. Mycetozoa
Order 1. Enteridiea
Order 2. Exosporea
vi
146
147
149
149
150
150
152
157
157
158
163
166
168
171
171
177
Chapter
Page
Order 3. Phytomyxida
Class 3. Rhizopoda
Order 1. Monosomatia
Order 2. Miliolidea
Order 3. Foraminifera
Order 4. Globigerinidea
Order 5. Nummulidnidea
.
Class
4.
Heliozoa
Order 1.
Order 2.
Order 3.
Order 4.
Orders.
Class
XI.
5.
1.
XII.
2.
1.
Class
2.
.
185
187
188
Acantharia
195
Monopylaria
198
Phaeosphaeria
Sarkodina
198
200
201
Sporozoa
Neosporidia
205
206
207
209
211
211
214
215
215
216
218
219
219
221
222
223
228
228
229
230
233
233
235
235
237
238
Infusoria
Order 1.
Order 2.
Order 3.
Order 4.
Order 5.
185
.
190
194
Order 1. Phaenocystes
Order 2. Actinomyxida
Order 3. Cryptocystes
Phylum Ciliophora
Class
183
Radiolaria
Order 1. Oligosporea
Order 2. Polysporea
Order 3. Gymnosporidiida
Order 4. Dolichocystida
Orders. Schizogregarinida
Order 6. Monocystidea
Order 7. Polycystidea
Order 8. Haplosporidiidea
Class
179
189
Radioflagellata
Order 1. Nuda
Order 2. Lampramoebae
Phylum Fungilli
Class
177
Opalinalea
Holotricha
Heterotricha
Hypotricha
Stomatoda
Tentaculifera
Order Suctoria
List of Nomenclatural Novelties
Bibliography
Index
271
VII
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Portrait of Ernst Heinrich Haeckel
Frontispiece
Figure
Page
1.
Structure of cells of blue-green algae
2.
Photographs of Escherichia coli
Caulobacterialea; Myxobactralea; Cristispira Veneris
Coccogonea; Gloiophycea
Bangialea
Nuclear phenomena in Polysiphonia violacea
Heterocarpea
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
13
.
Ochromonadalea
Ochromonadalea;
10.
Vaucheriacea
11.
Choanoflagellata
12.
Hyphochytrialea
13.
Bacillariacea
14.
Oomycetes
.
15
.
26
32
42
45
48
54
56
64
68
70
72
78
84
90
92
97
104
106
108
114
116
122
Silicoflagellata
17.
nuclear division in Stypocaulon
Familiar kelps of Pacific North America
Microscopic reproductive structures of Laminaria yezoensis
18.
Cryptomonadalea
15. Stages of
16.
19. Cystoflagellata;
Cilioflagellata
21.
Astoma
Astoma
22.
Monoblepharidalea
23.
Chytridinea
24.
Zygomycetes
Ascomycetes
Ascomycetes
Mycosphaerella personata
20.
25.
26.
27.
...
132
136
138
144
Basidiomycetes
29. Fruits of Agaricacea
153
30. Rhizoflagellata
160
28.
33.
Trichomonadina
Hypermastigina
Mycetozoa
34.
Ceratiomyxafruticulosa
31. Polymastigida;
164
32.
170
176
178
"Tretomphalus"
Rhizopoda
35. Life cycle of
36. Shells of
i.
e.,
Discorbis or
Cymbalo por a
39.
Monopylaria; Phaeosphaeria
Chaos Protheus
40. Sarkodina
41. Life cycle of Goussia
42.
43.
cycle of
44. Infusoria, order
45.
Schuhergi
Plasmodium; Babesia bigemina
Life cycle of Myxoceros Blennius
LUe
.
.
180
184
37. Radioflagellata
38. Radiolaria; Acantharia;
.
Hypotricha
Tokophrya Lemnarum
ix
192
196
200
204
208
212
220
232
234
Chapter
I
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this work is to persuade the community of biologists that the accepted primary classification of living things as two kingdoms, plants and animals,
should be abandoned; that the kingdoms of plants and animals are to be given definite
and that the organisms excluded from them are to be organized as two other
The names of the additional kingdoms, as fixed by generally accepted
principles of nomenclature, appear to be respectively Mychota and Protoctista.
These ideas originated, so far as I am concerned, in the instruction of Edwin
Bingham Copeland, my father, who, when I was scarcely of high school age, admitted
me to his college course in elementary botany. He thought it right to teach freshmen
the fundamental principles of classification. These include the following:
The kinds of organisms constitute a system of groups; the groups and the system
exist in nature, and are to be discovered by man, not devised or constructed. The
system is of a definite and peculiar pattern. By every feature of this pattern, we are
inductively convinced that the kinds of organisms, the groups, and the system are
limits,
kingdoms.
products of evolution. It is this system that is properly designated the natural system
or the natural classification of organisms. It is only by metaphor or ellipsis that these
terms can be applied to systems formulated by men and published in books.
Men
organisms which may be called the taxowhich men have constructed it is to
serve as an index to all that is known about organisms. This system is subject to certain conventions which experience has shown to be expedient. Among natural groups,
there are intergradations; taxonomic groups are conceived as sharply limited. Natural
groups are not of definite grades; taxonomic groups are assigned to grades. When we
have developed a
nomic system.
Its
classification of
function
—the purpose
—
for
and Filicineae are classes, we are expressing a fact of human convenThe names assigned to groups are obviously conventional.
Since the taxonomic system represents knowledge, and since knowledge is advancing, this system is inherently subject to change. It is the right and duty of every
person who thinks that the taxonomic system can be improved to propose to change
it. A salutary convention requires that proposals in taxonomy be unequivocal: one
proposes a change by publishing it as in effect; it comes actually into effect in the
degree that the generality of students of classification accept it. The changes which
are accepted are those which appear to make the taxonomic system, within its conven-
say that Pisces
ience, not a fact of nature.
tions, a better representation of
taxonomic system are related
the natural system. Different presentations of the
to the natural
system as pictures of a
tree,
by
artists of
different degrees of skill or of different schools, are related to the actual tree; the
taxonomic system
is
a conventionalized representation of the natural system so far as
known.
These statements are intended to make several points. First, as a personal matter,
advancement of knowledge of natural classification, and corresponding improvement
of the taxonomic system, have been my purpose during the greater part of a normal
lifetime. Secondly, I have pursued this purpose, and continue to pursue it, under the
guidance of principles which all students of classification will accept (perhaps with
variations in the words in which they are stated). In the third place, I have tried to
answer the question which scientists other than students of classification, and likewise
the laity, are always asking us: why can one not leave accepted classification undis-
the natural system
is
2
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
turbed? One proposes changes in order to express what one supposes to be improved
knowledge of the kinds of organisms which belong together as facts of nature. If here
I place bacteria in a different kingdom from plants, and Infusoria in a different kingdom from animals, it is because I believe that everyone will have a better understanding of each of these four groups if he does not think of any two of them as belonging
to the same kingdom.
The course of evolution believed to have produced those features of the natural
system to which the present work gives taxonomic expression is next to be described.
Life originated on this earth, by natural processes, under conditions other than
those of the present, once only. These are the opinions of Oparin ( 1938) 1, and appear
sound, although some of the details which he suggested may not be. When the crust
of the earth first became cool, it was covered by an atmosphere of ammonia, water
vapor, and methane, and by an ocean containing the gases in the atmosphere above
it and minerals dissolved from the crust. This is to state the hypotheses that organic
matter in the form of methane is older than life; and that whereas conditions on the
face of the earth tend now to cause oxidation, they tended originally to cause reduction. In a medium of the nature of the supposed primitive ocean, spontanous chemical
changes will occur and produce organic compounds of considerable complexity: this
has repeatedly been demonstrated by experiment. To convert a solution of ammonia,
methane, and minerals into protoplasm, Oparin postulates a very long series of
changes, producing successively more complicated compounds and mixtures, and requiring perhaps hundreds of millions of years. The changes are conceived as accidents; they are supposed to have been probable accidents, like throwing a seven at dice,
not events which could only very rarely occur by accident, like throwing twenty sevens
in succession. By supposing that some of these processes used up the m.aterials necessary for them, Oparin provides an explanation of the single origin of life: we are
confident that all life is of one origin, because all protoplasm is of the same general
nature, and all life consists of essentially the same processes. The course of events
described would have yielded, as the original form of life, anaerobic saprophytes; this
is
in
harmony with
The
the fact that anaerobic energesis
is
in a sense the basic
metabolic
would scarcely have possessed nuclei: Oparin's
theories indicate, as the most primitive form of life which has been able to survive,
the anaerobic bacteria. The anaerobic bacteria are indeed very far removed from any
lifeless things; their protoplasm and their metabolism are fundamentally the same
process.
original organisms
as ours.
Life requires energy. Under anaerobic conditions, an organism can obtain energy
by converting sugars to alcohol, but it can not use alcohol as a source of energy. This
example means that anaerobic energesis yields energy in strictly limited quantity and
produces incompletely oxidized compounds. So long as all life was anaerobic, it was
engaged in converting the organic matter upon which it depended into forms which
it could not use; life under these conditions, at least if they persisted for any great
period of time, was surely very sluggish. A further scries of changes in the metabolic
system, occurring accidentally in certain organisms and preserved by natural selection, brought photosynthesis into existence. The purple bacteria are believed to represent stages in the evolution of photosynthesis, which exists in its fully developed
form, involving the release of elemental oxygen, in the blue-green algae.
^
Once photo-
Dates in parentheses are references to works which have been consulted and
the bibliography.
listed in
Introduction
[
3
was established in certain organisms, aerobic energesis became possible both
and to others. This made possible a manner of life more vigorously active
than before. The inconsiderable groups of autotrophic bacteria the organisms which
live by oxidizing inorganic matter
appear to be secondary developments dependent
upon the existence of photosynthesis.
The organisms whose origin has been suggested thus far the ordinary bacteria,
anaerobic and aerobic, the autotrophic bacteria, the purple bacteria, and the bluegreen algae are relatively simple in structure and function; all consist of minute
physiologically independent cells. The first step in the evolution of more complex
organisms was the evolution of the nucleus.
Morphologically, the nucleus is a part of a protoplast which is set apart by a membrane and which originates ordinarily by division of a pre-existent nucleus in the
manner called mitosis. In this process, a definite number of definite chromosomes
appear and undergo equal division. The nucleus exercises control over the protoplast
in which it lies. Its controlling action depends upon the chromosomes which go into
it, and mitosis has the effect that all nuclei which are derived from one original nucleus strictly by normal processes of mitosis are identical in the controlling effects
which they exert. Thus the nucleus serves for the precise transmission of a complicated heredity. Beside mitosis, there are two other processes two only meiosis and
karyogamy, by which nuclei may produce other normal and enduringly viable nuclei.
synthesis
to these
—
—
—
—
—
—
In a sequence of generations of individuals sexually produced, these processes occur
one at one point in each cycle of sexual i-eproductlon. Mendelian
heredity is produced by changes, in the sets of chromosomes (or parts of chromosomes) in individual nuclei, which occur during meiosis and karyogamy. The role of
the nucleus in sexual reproduction is one of its essential characters: the nucleus is realternately, each
lated to sexual reproduction, including
The
did:
it
Mendelian heredity,
as structure to function.
existence of organisms without nuclei shows that the nucleus evolved after life
did not evolve at the same time as protoplasm.
the nucleus and of
its
The
essential uniformity of
association with sexual reproduction shows that these things
evolved only once, and together. There are a very few organisms, as Porphyridium
and Prasiola, in which the presence or absence of nuclei is not certain; there is accordingly scant evidence for speculation as to the manner of this evolution. As to the
tim.e, we know only that microfossils representing nucleate organisms occur in the
uppermost
strata of the Proterozoic era.
By making
has
made
possible the precise transmission of a complicated heredity, the nucleus
possible the
development of complexities of structure and function exceed-
ing by far anything occurring in non-nucleate organisms. It appears that as soon as
the nucleus was in existence, organisms provided with
many
characters
and gave
rise to
many
it
entered upon evolution in
distinguishable groups.
Among
these groups,
those which consist respectively of the typical plants and the typical animals are the
however, neither any a priori reason, nor any evidence from nature,
must naturally belong to one or the
other of these two. Several other groups, in general much less considerable than these,
are thoroughly distinct and appear equally ancient.
E. B. Copeland understood the history of life very much as it has just been presented. In his teaching, he treated the bacteria and blue-green algae as standing entirely apart both from plants and from animals, and pointed out several other groups
which are not as a matter of nature either plants or animals. It was his opinion that
these groups should be treated as a series of minor kingdoms; he excused himself
greatest.
There
is,
for a belief that all groups of nucleate organisms
4
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
from the attempt to formulate a definite and comprehensive system. This teaching
was the original stimulus which has led to the present work. I bear witness that E. B.
Copeland taught these things in 1914; he did not publish them until he had ceased
to teach (1927).
when the teaching of elementary botany was first fully my own
came to the conclusion that the establishment of several kingdoms
In the year 1926,
responsibility, I
of nucleate organisms in addition to plants and animals
these organisms are to be treated as one kingdom. This
is
is
not feasible; that
all
of
one of the few points of
originality which I claim for my work. It is true that the kingdom thus described is
not very different from the third kingdom which various early authors proposed and
which Haeckel (1866) named Protista. Haeckel, however, in his varied presentations
kingdom Protista, included always the bacteria. By setting apart the bacteria
and blue-green algae as yet another kingdom, one meets, at least in part, the objection
to the "third kingdom" that it is heterogeneous beyond what can be tolerated.
It has been necessary to meet also the objection that the "third kingdom" substitutes, for an acknowledgedly vague boundary between plants and animals, two vague
boundaries: it has been necessary to recognize characters by which sharp definition
can be given to plants and animals. It is my contention that these characters have
long been known. The kingdom of plants, as the taxonomic representation of a
natural group, is to be defined by the system of chloroplast pigments described by
Willstatter and Stoll (1913), and also by the production of certain carbohydrates
which occur only sporadically elsewhere. The kingdom of animals is defined by embryonic development through the stages called blastula and gastrula, as pointed out
by Haeckel (1872). It is believed that no organisms exhibit both of these sets of
characters; the "third kingdom" includes the nucleate organisms which exhibit
neither. The kingdoms of plants and animals as here defined are essentially those
which are traditionally and popularly accepted. They include all the creatures which
Linnaeus listed as plants and animals, with the exceptions of forms of which he knew
little, and which he listed superficially at the ends of his treatments of the respective
of the
kingdoms.
Of
kingdoms without exhave come into existence by evolution
through a line of organisms which exhibited its characters imperfectly. For another,
evolution can erase what it has created; it is proper to include in a group organisms
which have by degeneration lost its formal characters. These things are true of all
taxonomic groups.
In due form, then, the system of kingdoms here maintained is as follows:
Kingdom I. Mychota. Organisms without nuclei; the bacteria and blue-green
course, the definitions are not warranted to describe the
ception. For one thing, each
is
supposed
to
algae.
Kingdom
II.
Protoctista. Nucleate organisms not of the characters of plants and
animals; the protozoa, the red and
Kingdom
brown
algae,
and the
fungi.
occur chloroplasts, being plastids
of a bright green color, containing the pigments chlorophyll a, chlorophyll h, carotin,
and xanthophyll, and no others; and which produce sucrose, true starch, and true
III.
Plantae. Organisms
in
whose
cells
cellulose.
Kingdom IV. Animalia. Multicellular organisms which pass during development
through the stages called blastula and gastrula; typically predatory, and accordingly
consisting of unwalled cells and attaining high complexity of structure and function.
This system has twice been given brief publication (1938, 1947). I am glad to say
Introduction
[
5
that Barkley (1939, 1949) and Rothmaler (1948) maintain a system of kingdoms
which differs from this in a single significant detail.
Assuming that this system is tenable as a matter of reason, it will nevertheless not
be accepted among taxonomists unless they have some knowledge of what it means
in detail. No person is called upon to recognize the kingdoms Mychota and Protoctista until
work
systems of their subordinate groups are available.
consists of such systems.
Complete systems
The bulk
of the present
of divisions or phyla, classes,
and
orders are presented. Groups of lower rank are presented in part, as examples. As a
matter of facility, the groups of lower rank are presented more fully in the smaller or
known groups than
in the larger or more obscure.
preparation of this work has taken more than ten years. In the course of it I
have received much help. Among those who have answered queries, or who have in
various drafts scrutinized the whole work or parts of it for faults of every degree of
better
The
significance, are Dr. G. M. Smith of Stanford University; Dr. A. S. Campbell of St.
Mary's College; Dr. Herbert Graham, formerly of Mills College; Dr. Lee Bonar, Dr.
G. L. Papenfuss, and Dr. H. L. Mason of the University of California at Berkeley;
Dr. E. R. Noble of the University of California at Santa Barbara; and Dr. H. C. Day
of Sacramento Junior College. The counsel of E. B. Copeland has not been withheld.
It is a matter of grief that two distinguished zoologists of the University of California,
Dr. S. F. Light and Dr. Harold Kirby, have passed away during the long course of
this work; as have two colleagues who were my closest friends, Dr. H. J. Child and
Dr. C. C. Wright.
The portrait of Haeckel which is my frontispiece is used by permission of Macrae
Smith Company, Philadelphia. Two figures of Chrysocapsa are used by permission
of the Cambridge University Press. Numerous figures have been taken from the
Archiv filr Protistenkunde with the gracious permission of Prof. Dr. Max Hartmann.
We do well to realize our indebtedness to libraries and librarians. To a great extent,
this work has been made possible by the unstinted hospitality of the Biology Library
of the University of California at Berkeley.
Two statements appear regularly in prefaces; they are of truths which are strongly
impressed upon authors. In the first place, those who have given help have made the
work better; the author alone is responsible for deficiencies. The foregoing list of
good friends and good scholars does not claim them as proponents of the thesis of
this work.
In the second place, the work is not offered as perfect or nearly so. The scholar in
a strictly limited field may become master of the available knowledge. One who attempts studies in a broad field realizes that he is dealing with many subjects of which
others know far more than he; that he has not wrung dry the existing literature; that
some of the problems which puzzle him will be solved if he will wait a little longer.
His colleagues have a right to raise these matters as criticisms. But surely, it is not
desired that studies in broad fields be never attempted or indefinitely delayed.
A
matter which
is
particularly likely to arouse criticism
are here applied to the groups.
The
is
principles according to
are set forth in the following chapter. I beg
my colleagues,
that of the
which
this
in dealing
names which
has been done
with
this
chapter
and with the names subsequently applied, not to imagine that I have acted without
grave thought. I have decided, that as in classification, so also in nomenclature, I
should set before the community of biologists an experiment in the application of
principles; among which principles there are surely some whose strict application
will be to the good of our science.
Chapter
II
AN ESSAY ON NOMENCLATURE
Whoever
a system of groups finds himself under the necessity of making
The kingdoms have received more names than one
and so have nearly all of the major groups within them: it has here been
sets forth
responsible decisions as to names.
(Table
1 ),
necessary to decide as to the validity and application of the
names
Flagellata
Mastigophora, Rhodophyceae and Florideae, Rhizopoda and Sarcodina, and
others.
TABLE
1.
Names Applied by Various Authors to the Kingdoms
OF Systems of Four Kingdoms
Authors
Kingdoms
and
many
An
The
Essay on Nomenclature
[
7
most part a condensation of an earlier edition
that the name of a genus of bacteria
is to be changed if it had previously been used either among plants or among Protozoa.
Since there is an earlier Phytomonas among flagellates, bacteriologists have given a
new name to the bacterium Phytomonas. The avoidance of homonyms which they
desire will not, however, be attained: no zoologist will allow a new name for the
flagellate Klebsiella on account of an earlier Klebsiella among bacteria.
The grounds upon which these things are treated as wrong are provided by a
passage in the botanical laws of 1867 which is believed to define the legitimate
authority of congresses and codes:
"Les regies de la nomenclature ne pouvent etre ni arbitraires ni imposees. Elles
doivent etre bassees sur des motifs assez clairs et assez forts pour que chacun les
bacteriological code
is
for the
of the botanical code. It includes the
comprenne
dispose a
et soit
les
odd feature
accepter."
implied by this statement that principles, appealing to the reason and found
sound by the trial of experience, were in existence when it was written; and this is
It is
the truth.
of
By
common
pret
it,
this
law,
statement, the legitimate powers of congresses are those of courts
which avoid the
and apply
it.
explicit
making of law, but discover the law,
Congresses and codes
may
legitimately (a)
inter-
state explicitly
corollaries of the principles when they are not obvious; and (b) determine arbitrarily
matters which are necessarily determined arbitrarily, not being within the range of
principle.
when
One would
not in theory deny a power (c) to validate breaches of principle
on necessity; but its use by botanical con-
these are of an expedience verging
produce a roll of exceptions of twice the bulk of the text of the code leads
doubt the expedience of this admission. It has been through failure to recognize the legitimate limits of their powers
through a conception that their powers
are sovereign or plenary
that international congresses have come to enact codes
conflicting with each other and giving incomplete satisfaction in themselves.
Under these circumstances, a nomenclature of superior legitimacy can be applied
in groups treated as removed from the jurisdiction of the codes. Not without diffidence, this assumption is extended to the bacteria; it will be agreed that the nomenclatural practice applied to the bacteria must be the same as that which is applied
gresses to
one
to
—
—
to the blue-green algae.
Here one attempts a brief formulation of those principles, appealing to reason
and proven sound in practice, to which all nomenclature must conform.
1. Scientific names are words of the Latin language. They are not "of Latin form"
or "construed as Latin"; they are Latin. This is to treat Latin as a living language and
scientific names as subject to the rules of its grammar. They are not code-designations, nor words of any language or none, as chemical names are.
2. The name of a group of the kind called a genus is a proper noun in the singular.
Linnaeus replaced all generic names which were adjectives; all of us his successors
should do likewise.
3. The names of groups of genera are proper nouns, or adjectives used as proper
nouns, in the plural.
The
foregoing principles are of pre-Linnaean origin; beginning with his
work (1735), Linnaeus took them
first sig-
For the principle next to be
stated, authority is the practice of Linnaeus in later works (1753 and subsequently)
4. The name of a species consists of the name of the genus to which it belongs followed by one epithet, ordinarily an adjective, occasionally a noun in apposition or
nificant
in the genitive.
for granted.
8
The
]
A
fifth
Classification of
Lower Organisms
principle represents Linnaean practices as subsequently modified:
Named
taxonomic groups are necessarily of certain fixed ranks called categories,
There are seven principal categories, specified as follows. Every individual
organism belongs to a group conceived as the single kind and called a species. Every
species belongs to a genus; every genus to a family; every family to an order; every
order to a class; every class to a division or phylum; ever)' division or phylum to a
kingdom. These conventions have the effect that the groups of each principal category
embrace the entire range of the kinds of organisms.
The categories of genera and species come down from classic antiquity. Linnaeus
originated orders; he originated classes in the sense of named definite groups; and it
appears that he is responsible for kingdoms: the writer knows of no earlier authority
for the traditional three kingdoms of nature. The category next below that of kingdoms has been variously called; originally it was emhranchements (Cuvier, 1812).
The history of the category of families is somewhat involved. It originated in the
work of Adanson (1763); in the following year, Linnaeus (1764) treated the groups
which Adanson had called families as natural orders. Botanists for a long time held
that families and orders are the same thing. Zoological practice gradually made fam5.
i.e., lists.
ilies
is
a separate category. Authority for the
list
of seven principal categories as given
Agassiz (1857).
Nothing prevents the assignment of groups to categories other than these, to suband the like. These may be called subordinate categories. The groups
of any subordinate category embrace only fragments of the range of kinds of
classes, tribes,
organisms.
The work
of Linnaeus was largely innovation,
and he did not have the face
to de-
clare binding the generally accepted rule of priority. Definite authority for the rule
de Candolle (1813). As currently applied, it may be stated as follows:
6. The valid name of a group is its oldest published name, conforming to the rules,
and not previously applied in the same kingdom.
As corollaries of the rule of priority, when groups are combined, the oldest name
of any of them must be applied to the whole, and when a group is divided, its name
must be retained for one of the parts. The part to which the original name is to be
applied is determined by the method of types, formulated by Strickland and his asis
sociates (1843)
When
:
is divided, its name must be applied to the portion which includes
whatever part of it the original author would have regarded as typical. The part thus
specified is the nomcnclatural type of the group.
In the application of these principles to the naming of the groups of Mychota and
Protoctista, the following practices appear expedient.
A name is applied by publication in such fashion that the community of biologists
may reasonably be held responsible for knowing of its existence and recognizing the
entity to which it is to be applied. This means that it is to be printed in a technical
book or journal and defined in a language for which the generality of biologists will
not require an interpreter, namely Latin, English, French, or German. Any regulation
more detailed than this is an excuse for breaches of priority. Definition is not necessarily by description: nearly all of the Linnaean genera of plants were established
by the listing of species in the Species Plantarum.
When two or more groups published in the same work at the same time are to be
combined, their names are of equal priority. The choice of one of their names by the
first author who combines them is binding.
7.
a group
An
Essay on Nomenclature
[
9
A
type as specified in the original publication of a group, or as implied by the inis unchangeable. Linnaeus and his immediate
successors had no conception of the device of types, and it is practically impossible
clusion of a single subordinate group,
to
be certain of the elements which they would have regarded as typical in some of
their groups. It remains necessary that the type system be applied to these groups. In
some
of them,
it
may be
expedient that international authority, proceeding with due
An individual scholar will do better to call what he
supposes to be the type of a group by a difTerent term, namely standard (Sprague,
caution, declare types arbitrarily.
1926) the standard of a group is a supposed type which remains open to debate. The
framers of codes have undertaken to make binding the choice of a type by the first
author who divides a group. On various occasions, however, this action has been
demonstrably mistaken.
Certain venerable names, as Vermes and Algae as used by Linnaeus, were applied
:
organisms among which the selection of a
standard would be purely arbitrary. Such names are called nomina confusa, and are
to be abandoned.
to altogether miscellaneous collections of
from the principle of the binomial nomenclature of species that no genus
one or more of its species are designated by binomial names. It follows also that in works in which the nomenclature of species is not definitely binomial
no names are of any standing. Hence, the point of time from which priority is effective
is that of the introduction of binomial nomenclature, namely 1753. The enactment of
other starting points for the nomenclature of particular groups is pretended law
which is not law, like the pretended laws of American states which attempt to regulate interstate commerce under the appearance of doing something else.
The original spelling of names, so far as it is tolerable Latin, is not to be changed.
Errors of gender or number, obvious mistakes of spelling, and misprints, are to be
corrected. Good Latin is written without diacritical marks: a German Umlaut in a
name as published is corrected by inserting an e; accents, cedilles, and other barbarisms are dropped. The codes err in prescribing changes in spelling beyond those
which are here admitted. If they should establish uniformity in the future, it would
be at the expense of divergence from the most respected works of the past.
It follows
is
named
until
names in the nominative, in ap1
names of persons, places, or organisms in the
names of persons.
Transfer of groups from one kingdom to another does not warrant any meddling
with names. When a group is transferred from one kingdom to another, its valid name
in the former
its oldest name not previously used in the kingdom in which it was
Specific epithets are capitalized
if
they are
(
)
position with the generic names; (2)
genitive; (3) adjectives derived from
—
originally published
Names
—has
priority
from the date of
its
original publication.
Some are proper nouns; the
remainder are adjectives used as proper nouns, agreeing in gender with the names of
the kingdoms in which they are included; either expressing characters of the groups
which they designate, or consisting of generic names modified by terminations signifying "resembling" or "of the group of." Plurals of generic names are not tenable
(de Candolle, 1813) Ericae means the species of the genus Erica; it does not mean,
and can not be used to designate, the genus together with its allies. Names consisting
of words other than generic names modified by terminations signifying "resembling"
or "of the group of" are not tenable, because they are nonsense: the name Coniferinae, applied by Engler to a class, is an adjective with an additional adjectival termiof groups higher than genera are in the plural.
:
nation superimposed.
—
10
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
A name
once applied in any principal category may not be transferred to another,
be of a form barred in the former and prescribed in the latter. The main
clause of this statement is a consequence of the rule of priority. The exception is a
concession to the practice of using names with uniform endings in certain categories.
unless
it
Names
of groups not of principal categories do not have priority as against
names
applied in principal categories. This practice, which denies to names in subordinate
by the fact that groups in these catewhich they occur; one is not
in reason responsible for being aware of their names in groups outside of ones own
categories the full sanction of priority,
is
justified
gories are of concern only to specialists in the groups in
specialty.
had names with the uniform ending -aceae from
which the category of families was distinguished from that of
orders. Such names were applied to algae, liverworts, and mosses by Rabenhorst
(1863) and to higher plants by Braun (in Ascherson, 1864). They are adjectives in
the feminine, agreeing with the name of the kingdom Plantae. It is altogether expedient that names of this form be held obligatory throughout the kingdom of plants.
A uniform termination for names of families of animals has been in use for many
years, but these names are not equally positively sound both grammatically and by
priority. There has been a strong tendency to apply uniform terminations to the names
of groups of other categories. So far as concerns groups of subordinate categories
suborders, subfamilies, and so forth
this practice appears expedient; these groups
being of concern only to experts in the groups in which they occur, it is as well that
Almost
all
families of plants have
the point of time at
—
code designations rather than names. In attempting to put this practice into effect, some zoologists have made the mistake of
applying the same adjective in different genders to different groups; they have not
realized that Amoebida is the same word as Amoebidae. Meanwhile, uniform termitheir designations be of the nature of
nations for
of priority,
The
in use
neuter
names
is
of phyla, classes,
something of an
terminations of ordinal
and
orders, beside involving wholesale violation
insult to the intelligence.
names
in -ales
and of family names
in -aceae, currently
among the Mychota, are here changed to -alea and -acea to
name of the kingdom. A change of the gender of an adjective
agree with the
does not create
new word, and the original authorities for the names will stand. Accordingly:
The name of an order of Mychota, if based on that of a genus, must bear the termination -alea. Names of this form are valid in no other category of this kingdom, and
may be reapplied to orders. They have priority and authority by publication explicitly
a
as orders.
Such names do not supersede older ordinal names not based on names of
genera.
Mychota is formed of the stem of a generic name (not
name, but never a later homonym) by adding the termination
-acea. Names of this form are not valid in any other categor)', and may be reapplied
to families. They have priority and authority by publication explicitly as families.
The names of families of Protoctista, unlike those of Mychota, of plants, and of
animals, do not have by priority prevalently a uniform termination. Many of the
oldest were first named in -ina. Those of flagellates and myxomycetes have double
sets of names, respectively in -aceae and -idae, in current use. It is not expedient to
impose uniform terminations on the names of these groups, at least not in the present
The name
of a family of
necessarily a valid
work. Accordingly:
Each group of Protoctista is called by its oldest name of tenable form in the correct category, barring any previously used in other principal categories, irrespective
An
of termination. All
names which
Essay on Nomenclature
[ 1
are adjectives are used in the neuter, but ascribed to
the original authors.
The
practices described have resulted in the use of
strange, producing
lists
many names which
which are undeniably heterogeneous.
A
will
seem
friendly critic notes
an example of these things the Hst of classes, Heterokonta, Bacillariacea, Oomyand Melanophycea, on page 55. It will be realized that the three among these
names which are adjectives must be in the feminine if the groups are construed as
Plantae, neuter if Protoctista. Taking this fact into account, these are actually the
first names, not previously used in other principal categories, applied to these groups
as classes. What other names could one use? Everyone will know what groups are
intended. Would any person understand them better if new names had been created
by applying a uniform termination to the old roots?
Enough about nomenclature. We should begin to deal with organisms.
as
cetes,
Chapter
III
KINGDOM MYCHOTA
Kingdom
I.
MYCHOTA
Enderlein
Stamm Moneres Haeckel Gen. Morph. 2: xxii 1866), in part.
ScHizoPHYTAE Cohn in Beitr. Biol. Pfl. 1, Heft 3: 201 (1875).
Class ScHizoPHYTA or Protophyta McNab in Jour, of Bot. 15 340
(
not sec( 1877 )
Protophyta Endlicher (1836).
Kingdoms Protophyta and Protozoa Haeckel Syst. Phylog. 1: 90 (1894), in part;
not Protophyta Endlicher nor class Protozoa Goldfuss (1818).
Subdivision Schizophyta Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil,
;
:
tion Protophyta nor cohors
Abt. la: iii (1900).
Division Schizophyta Wettstein Handb. Syst. Bot.
1
:
56
(
1901
).
Phylum Protophyta Schaffner in Ohio Naturalist 9: 446 (1909), in part.
Kingdom Mychota Enderlein Bakt.-Cyclog. 236 (1925).
Kingdom Monera Copeland f. in Quart. Rev. Biol. 13: 385 (1938).
Kingdom Anucleobionta Rothmaler in Biol. Zentralbl. 67: 248 (1948).
Organisms without
nuclei.
The common name
of
Mychota
in general
is
chlorophyll together with other pigments which
bacteria, but those
make
which contain
the green color impure are
called blue-green algae.
The
cells of
Mychota
are always separate or physiologically independent: multi-
cellular bodies with distinct tissues
do not occur. The
cells are of
various shapes; most
often they are cylindrical, being of diameters from a fraction of one micron to a few
microns, rarely more. Except in the groups of myxobacteria and spirochaets, they
are walled; the thickness of the walls
may
is
of the order of 0.02^ (Knasyi, 1944).
The
compounds of slightly
oxidized polysaccharides with sulfate, calcium, and magnesium (Kylin, 1943). These
compounds are readily rendered gelatinous by hydration or hydrolysis, and the cells
are often imbedded in gelatinous layers called sheaths or capsules.
In describing the Mychota as lacking nuclei, one commits himself to one side of a
walls
contain cellulose, but consist chiefly of pectates,
controversy of
many
years duration. Because of the greater size of the cells of the
blue-green algae, the facts are
more
easily ascertained in this
group than in the proper
bacteria.
The
blue-green algae (Gardner, 1906; Swellengrebel, 1910; Haupt, 1923)
and inner parts which are not sharply distinct. Pigments occur
in a dissolved or colloidal condition in the outer part, which contains also granules
of stored food. The granules are not carbohydrate, although a form of glycogen discells of
are divided into outer
from that of higher organisms has been extracted (Gardner; Kylin, 1943). The
some of which stain like chromatin, while
others ("red granules of Biitschli") are stained red by methylene blue. Cell division
tinct
inner part contains rods and granules,
is
by constriction. Olive (1904) interpreted the inner part of the
continually in process of mitosis, and accordingly without a
nucleus
It is true that
one may recognize series of corresponding granules.
and granules of the interior are divided
random. Haupt expressed the impropriety of calling any part of these cells a
in series of disk-shaped cells
Where
at
cell as a
membrane.
the cells are
nucleus.
more
elongate, the rods
Kingdom Mychota
[13
Recent studies of typical bacteria by conventional microtechnical methods (Robinow, 1942, 1949; Tulasne and Vendrely, 1947) and by the electron microscope (Hillier, Mudd, and Smith, 1949) have made it possible to recognize the essential identity
The protoplast conouter part, considered as a substance, may be
of the structure of their cells with those of the blue-green algae.
of outer
sists
and inner
parts.
The
called ectoplasm (Knasyi, 1930),
the central body (Biitschli, 1890).
than one
fifth of
the radius of the
inner, considered as a body, may be called
The ectoplasm is very thin, occupying usually less
cell. The spiral bands which have often been seen
and the
%
Bi^i
Z#
)ii-i'Ss;.-
"ji;-^
Irx
••;i©\
^->
'l-i"
V^
.?..
fw
^vWfe
Fig.
1.-
— Structure
Gardner (1906).
a slide
.^,.'^»
;
4m
of cells of blue-green algae,
prepared by Dr. P. Maheshwari, x 1,000.
Haupt (1923) x
a,
Symploca Muscorum after
C, Lyngbya sp. from
Anabacna circinnalis after
b, Oscillatoria Princeps after Olive (1904).
d,
2,000.
and which Swellengrebel ( 1906) mistook for a nucleus, are thickenings of the ectoplasm. Specific stains for nucleoprotein (chromatin), as Feulgen
or Giemsa, usually color uniformly the entire central body. If the cells are exposed to
in cells of bacteria,
hydrochloric acid, a part of the nucleoprotein, containing ribonucleic acid, dissolves.
The remainder, containing desoxyribonucleic acid, persists in the form, basically, of
a single fairly large granule in each cell. In rod-shaped bacteria, this granule appears
and may redivide,
De Lamater and Hunter
usually to divide by constriction before the cell begins to divide,
so that the cell
may
contain two dumb-bell shaped bodies.
(1951) succeeded in a partial de-staining of the dumb-bell shaped bodies and interpreted them as dividing nuclei containing centrosomes and definite numbers of
chromosomes; typical chromosomes, however, are never as small as the bodies they
describe,
and are not imbedded
in bodies of nucleoprotein
from which they can be
distinguished only by the most refined technique. Enderlein (1916) observed in rod-
shaped bacteria
series of granules of
which some
at least are identical with the
dumb-
14
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
shaped bodies. He named these granules mychits. It might be held that the
mychit is a chromosome, and the central body of bacteria a nucleus of a single
chromosome, if it were not true that the blue-green algae contain comparable bodies
of variable form and indefinite number.
Many bacteria swim by means of flagella. The diameter of the flagella, as revealed
Their positions and lengths were
by the electron microscope, is of the order of 0.02
made known, before the invention of the electron microscope, by the technique of
Loeffler (1889), which consists essentially of depositing upon them a heavy layer
of tannic acid. By the absence or presence and arrangement of flagella, bacteria are
classified as of four types: atrichous, without flagella; monotrichous, with one flagellum at one end; lophotrichous, with a tuft of flagella at one end; peritrichous, with
bell
[J..
flagella
on the
sides.
Myxobacteria, spirochaets, and such blue-green algae as are sheathless filaments,
are capable of bending movements (some spirochaets, observed with the electron
microscope, are found also to have flagella at the ends of the cells). Spirochaets swim
vigorously; in myxobacteria and blue-green algae, the bending movements are a matter of slow writhing. Filaments and cells of blue-green algae are capable also of a
moderately rapid gliding movement. The mechanism of this movement has been
the subject of much speculation, reviewed by Burkholder ( 1934), but remains uncertain. The appearance of the movement is as though it were caused by local secretion
of substances affecting surface tension.
by constriction of the cells, each into two
in schizo- (Greek axi^co, to split).
Henrici (1928) studied the changes undergone by bacteria during multiplication. As
the cells become numerous, decreasing the food supply and producing substances
harmful to themselves, they begin to attain greater length before dividing. Subsequently there is a gradual transition to enlarged and distorted forms called involution
forms, which divide irregularly, cutting off minute fragments. These observations
suggest the idea that the involution forms are the true normal forms of bacteria, the
so-called normal forms being a temporary stage adapted to rapid multiplication
under favorable conditions.
In many rod-shaped bacteria, when conditions cease to be ideal, the protoplasts
produce within themselves walled bodies of dehydrated protoplasm called spores
(endospores). In general, each cell produces only one spore. No experiment has
definitely shown how long these spores can remain alive; it is surely a matter of cen-
The normal reproduction
equal daughter
turies,
cells;
of
whence
Mychota
is
the various
names
doubtfully of millenia.
Lohnis and Smith (1916, 1923) observed of Azotobactcr that numbers of protoplasts might escape from their walls and unite in a common mass, which they named
the symplasm. The existence of this stage has never been confirmed by other authorities. If
the
symplasm
exists, it is a
device for achieving the effect which nucleate or-
ganisms attain by sexual reproduction, that
is,
combination of the heredity of
differ-
ent lines of ancestry.
Tliat Mychota can actually combine characters from different linos of ancestry
was first demonstrated beyond question by Tatum and Ledcrberg (1947). They
mixed cultures of pairs of varieties of Escherichia coli, differing in two or more
physiological characters, and isolated from the mixtures races having characters derived from both components. Further Mork, reviewed by Ledcrberg and Tatum
(1953), has abundantly demonstrated phenomena analogous to typical sexual
reproduction.
Kingdom Myrhola
[15
'9^
^ V*
^
^^ m^
••%
W 9m
^
w%
#^., li.^
— Photographs
Robinow, reproduced by
show the ectoplasm, in which
there are thickenings which tend to be spiral; right, stained to show the large repeatedly dividing granule in the central body. About x 2,000. By courtesy of Dr.
Robinow and of the Society of .\merican Bacteriologists.
Fig. 2.
Hillier,
of Escherichia coli by Dr. C. F.
Mudd, and Smith (1949);
left,
stained to
Kingdom Mychota
The metabolic
ficial list
[17
Mychota are remarkably diverse. The most superwould include the following: (a) anaerobic parasites
facultatively aerobic parasites and saprophytes; (c) the vinegar
systems of the
of physiological types
and saprophytes;
(b)
known organisms which, while
bacteria, being apparently the only
requiring organic
matter, are incapable of anaerobic energesis; (d) the autotrophic bacteria, the only
organisms which maintain life by oxidation of inorganic matter; (e) organisms living
by incomplete photosynthesis; and (f) organisms capable of typical photosynthesis.
Geologically, the
Mychota
and certain other formations
Archeozoic rocks estimated as more
are ancient. Iron deposits
believed to have been produced by
them occur
in
than a billion years old.
More than five thousand names have been applied to species of bacteria, but in
the attempt to distinguish them, only about fifteen hundred are enumerated (Ber-
Manual, 6th ed., 1948).
than one thousand.
gey's
The
species of blue-green algae are probably fewer
The classification of this group is inescapably highly tentative. The morphology
simple and not highly varied; the physiological characters likewise appear simple,
but are highly varied, including many which are not known in other groups. The
is
Mychota makes it probable that many groups which appear to belong together consist actually of parallel developments. The undoubted antiquity of
the apparent main groups would lead one to place them in the category of divisions
antiquity of the
or phyla; but
it is
not expedient to
make many
would produce too many divisions of
The kingdom is accordingly treated as a
this
divisions of a
group of 2500 species:
a single class or classes of a single order.
single
phylum, and
its
main
divisions as
classes.
Phylum
ARCHEZOA
Haeckel
Archephyta and Archezoa Haeckel Syst. Phylog. 1:90 (1894); not Phylum
Archephyta Haeckel (1866).
Phylum Myxophyceae Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 279 (1907).
Phyla Dimychota and Monomychota Enderlein Bakt.-Cyclog. 236 (1925).
Bacteriophyta and Cyanophyta Steinecke (1931).
Stamme Cyanophyta and Schizomycophyta Pascher in Beih. bot. Centralbl. 48,
Abt. 2: 330 (1931).
Divisions Cyanophyta and Schizomycetae Stanier and van Niel in Jour. Bact. 42:
464 (1941).
Characters of the kingdom.
Archezoa is Haeckel's name, at the point cited, for the bacteria. The name had
been applied othervv^ise by Perty (1852), but not in a principal category. It will not
be considered inappropriate, if it be remembered that the meaning of zoe is as much
yhylB.
life
as animal.
The
conventional division of the group into two classes, bacteria and blue-green
not perfectly natural. All of the recognized blue-green algae belong together;
but the recognized bacteria are a wide miscellany, some of them belonging with the
blue-green algae. Here three classes are recognized.
algae,
1.
is
Cells without internal pigment, heterotrophic
or living by chemosynthesis; not usually pro-
ducing filaments with prominent sheaths.
18
The
]
2.
Cells
with
firm
Classification of
walls,
Lower Organisms
non-motile
or
motile by means of flagella
2.
means
of changes of shape, also
1.
Schizophyta.
Class
2.
Myxoschizomycetes.
Class
3.
some-
times by flagella
1.
Class
Cells with thin walls or none, motile by
Cells mostly with internal pigment, living by
photosynthesis or chemosynthesis, exceptionally heterotrophic; often
producing filaments
with prominent sheaths
Class
1.
SCHIZOPHYTA
(Cohn)
Archiplastidea.
McNab
Schizomycetes Nageli ex Caspary in Bot. Zeit. 15: 760 (1857).
Class Schizophyta or Protophyta McNab in Jour, of Bot. 15: 340 (1877).
Class Schizomycetes Winter in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland 1, Abt,
1:
33 (1879).
Class Schizomycetae SchafTncr in Ohio Naturalist 9: 447 (1909).
Classes Holocyclomor pha and Hemicyclomorpha Enderlein Bakt.-Cyclog. 236
(1925).
Dependent or chemosynthetic Mychota, with walled cells, without photosynthetic
pigments and not producing sheathed filaments.
This class includes as orders the typical bacteria and two minor groups.
1.
Cells solitary or loosely gathered into clusters
or filaments, spherical, rod-shaped, or spiral,
not differentiated along the axis
1.
into cells
1.
Order
1.
Schizosporea.
Order
2.
Actinomycetalea.
Order
3.
Caulobacterialea.
Consisting of branched filaments not divided
Cells attached by
stalks,
free ends differentiated
the attached and
Schizosporea [Schizosporeae] Cohn in Hedwigia 11: 17 (1872).
Schizomycetes (Nageli) McNab in Jour, of Bot. 15: 340 (1877).
Eubacteria Schroter 1886.
Haplobacteriacei Fischer in Jahrb. wiss. Bot. 27: 139 (1895).
Orders Cephalotrichinae and Peritrichinae Orla-Jensen in Centralbl. Bkt. Abt.
Order 1.
Order
Order
Order
2,22: 334,344 (1909).
Order Eubacteriales Buchanan in Jour. Bact. 2: 162 (1917).
Mychota whose cells in the typical condition are without internal pigment, walled,
of the form of rods, spheres, or spirals, not differentiated along the axis. As this is a
numerous group, likely with advancing knowledge to require division, it will be well
to provide it with a nomenclatural standard, and to suggest as such Cohn's principal
discovery among bacteria, namely Bacillus sublilis.
These are the typical bacteria. As originally described by Leeuwcnhoeck (1677),
they were taken to be a few kinds of "animacules" distinguished only by extremely
size. Only after many years were they shown to be numerous and varied, and
highly important as causes of diseases and of other natural phenomena.
small
The natural classification of the typical bacteria has been hard to discern. The
characters by which groups can be distinguished include forms of cells and of clusters
of cells; absence or presence and arrangement of flagella; non-formation or formation
Kingdom
My c hot a
[
19
and the peculiar character called Gram reaction.
Gram, 1884, consists of staining successively
with gentian violet and iodine. It gives an intense blue-black color. From some bacteria, this color is washed out by alcohol; others retain it; the former are said to be
Gram negative, the latter Gram positive. In practice one applies successively gentian
violet, iodine, alcohol, and safranine, the last being a red dye whose function is to
make the Gram negative bacteria visible. The substance stained by gentian violet
of endospores; metabolic products;
The method
of staining invented by
is believed to be lipoid, such as occurs in all cells. The Gram positive
believed to consist in a relatively low isoelectric point, a capacity, that is,
plus iodine
quality
to
is
combine with anions
in a relatively acid
medium. This
quality
lies in
the ectoplasm
of the cells and disappears in aging cultures.
The
is
Manual (1923, 1925, 1930, 1934, 1939, 1948)
among Americans) as standard. The following system of thirteen
classification given in Bergey's
accepted (at least
families
is
a moderate rearrangement of the Bergeyan system, with certain ideas or
and Stanier
( 1925), Pribram (1929)
names from Enderlein (1917, 1925), Buchanan
andvanNiel (1941).
1.
Gram
positive,
which are
with
exceptions
many
of
intracellular parasites; atrichous or
peritrichous.
2.
Spheres dividing in more planes than
one.
3.
3.
2.
Gram
Gram
positive
gens in animals
Rods, or spheres dividing in one plane.
3.
Gram
2.
Micrococcacea.
Family
2.
Neisseriacea.
Atrichous.
5.
Not
5.
Intracellular parasites
intracellular parasites.
4. Peritrichous
1.
1.
Not producing endospores.
4.
3.
Family
negative; intracellular patho-
.
Family 3. Corynebacteriacea.
Family 4. Rickettsiacea.
Family 5. Kurthiacea
Family 6. Bacillacea.
.
Producing endospores
negative.
Atrichous or peritrichous, requiring comparatively complicated organic food.
3. Not plant pathogens.
4.
Not
fixing nitrogen.
Capable of growth on ordinary media
Family 7. Achromobacteriacea.
5. Requiring special media;
minute atrichous pathogens. Family 8. Pasteurellacea.
4. Fixing nitrogen
Family 10. Azotobacteriacea.
Plant pathogens
Family 9. Rhizobiacea.
5.
3.
2.
Atrichous, monotrichous, or lophotrichous;
the atrichous representatives,
many
and
can survive with organic
foods simpler than carbohydrates, or
with none.
3. Mostly requiring at least
carboothers,
hydrates
Family
11.
Spirillacea.
:
20
The
]
3.
Not requiring carbohydrates.
4.
Oxidizing
acid,
4.
and
1.
alcohol
to
acetic
acetic acid to
and
H2O
Not
as above;
strictly
Family
Lower Organisms
Classification of
CO2
Family
12.
Acetobacteriacea.
Family
13.
Nitrobagteriacea.
many examples
autotrophic
Micrococcacea [Micrococcaceae] Pribram
in Jour. Bact. 18:
370, 385
(1929). Family Coccaceae Zopf 1884; but the genus Coccus is a scale insect. Gram
positive spheres producing packets or irregular masses. Micrococcus, saprophytic or
parasitic,
producing irregular masses of
cells;
the pathogenic species have been treated
as a separate genus Staphylococcus. Sarcina, saprophytic or
commensal spheres pro-
ducing packets.
Family 2. Neisseriacea [Neisseriaceae] Prevot ex Bergey et al. Manual ed. 5 278
(1938). Family Neisseriacees Prevot in Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. ser. 10, 15: 119 (1933).
Obligate parasites, the Gram negative spherical cells occurring chiefly in pairs within
:
leucocytes in the lesions of disease. Neisseria gonorrhoeae, the gonococcus; A^. ]Veichselbaumii Trevisan {N. intracellularis, N. meningitidis, Auctt.), the meningococcus.
Family 3. Corynebacteriacea [Corynebacteriaceae] Lehmann and Neumann 1907.
Family Corynebacteriidae Enderlein in Sitzber. Gess. naturf. Freunde Berlin (1917)
314. Family Lactobacillaceae Winslow et al. in Jour. Bact. 2: 561 (1917). Family
Lactobacteriaceae Orla-Jensen 1921. Family Leptotrichaceae Pribram in Jour. Bact.
18: 372 (1929), not family Leptotrichacei Schroter 1886. Gram positive rods, or
spheres dividing in one plane and producing chains, non-motile.
Streptococcus, spheres in chains; saprophytes in milk, involved in the making of
and serious pathogens causing, for example,
and pneumonia.
Diplococcus, spheres usually in pairs, encapsulated. D. pneumoniae occurs in many
immunologically distinct races which are the usual causes of pneumonia.
butter and cheese; and commensals
abscesses, septicemia, erysipelas,
Lactobacillus, rods, microaerophilic, producing lactic acid. In milk, involved in
making
and cheese; in the oral cavity, being the usual agent of dental
and Buchbinder, 1929); common in sewage.
Leptotrichia, rods which become exceptionally long before dividing. Oral cavity
of man and beasts.
Corynebacterium, rods, becoming club-shaped, staining in a banded pattern. The
the
of butter
caries (Rosebury, Linton,
type species is the agent of diphtheria, C. diphthcriae; the genus includes also many
harmless commensals important only as making diagnosis difficult. The cells divide
in an exceptional fashion, by breaking violently from one side to the other near one
end; the cut-off end swings around beside the main body and proceeds to grow.
Repeated division in this manner produces clusters of parallel cells (Park, \V'iliiams,
and Krumweide, 1924).
Family 4. Rickettsiacea [Rickettsiaceae] Pinkerton 1936. Families Bartonellaceae
Gieszszykiewicz 1939 and Chlamydozoaceae Moshkovsky 1945. Minute obligate intracellular parasites of varied form,
commonly Gram
negative but with
Gram
positive
granules.
There have been many observations of bodies of the characters stated, but a satisthem is not yet possible. Howard Taylor Ricketts showed
that Rocky Mountain spotted fever is transmitted by the tick Dcrmocentor, and
factory classification of
observed, in the cells of diseased tissues, minute irregularly staining bodies; in 1910,
Kingdo7n Mychota
[21
he contracted it and died. Stanislas
Prowazek, called into the Austrian military medical service in 1914, began to study
typhus, which is transmitted by lice; observed similar intracellular bodies; contracted
typhus, and died in February, 1915 (Hartmann, 1915). The cause of Rocky Mountain
spotted fever is Rickettsia Rickettsii, and that of typhus. is R. Prowazekii. Several
other species are known. By serological methods, Anigstein (1927) showed that
R. Melophagi is closely related to Corynebacterium.
In cases of the disease of the west slope of the Andes called verruga peruana,
in the course of further studies of the disease,
Oroya Fever, or Carrion's disease, there occur intracellular bodies named Bartonella
bacillijormis. Noguchi and others (192H) completed the demonstration that the
disease is transmitted by biting flies of the genus Phlebotoyniis.
construed Bartonella as a sporozoan.
Good
authority has
Students of flagellates, Sarkodina, and Infusoria have occasionally observed in
the cytoplasm or nuclei of these organisms minute bodies multiplying to form considerable masses. These parasites have generally been construed as chytrids, but have
little in common with proper chytrids. The genus Caryococcus Dangeard includes at
them.
Kurthiacea, fam. nov.
least a part of
Family
5.
Gram
positive peritrichous rods, not producing
endospores. Kurthia, harmless; Listeria Pirie ex
408 (1948), pathogenic
Family 6. BaciUacea
in sheep
Murray
in Bergey's
Manual 6th
ed.
and man.
[Bacillacei] Fischer in Jahrb. wiss. Bot. 27: 139 (1895).
spore-forming rods, always Gram positive, mostly peritrichous, very numerous in
species, common, and important.
Bacillus Cohn 1872, is one of the oldest generic names of rod-shaped bacteria
The
which can be
can be definitely applied because the type species
The genus has been used to include
rods in general or at random. Defined as aerobic spore-formers, as proposed by
Buchanan, 1917, it is a thoroughly natural group. As treated in the fifth edition of
Bergey's Manual, it included nearly 150 duly distinguished species; in the sixth
edition, this number is cut to thirty-three. The great majority are saprophytic. Exdefinitely applied:
it
B. subtilis was so described as to be recognizable.
ceptions, important pathogens, are B. anthracis; and B. alvei and other species causing
foulbrood of bees.
The anaerobic spore-formers constitute the genus Clostridium. The type species
wa? discovered and named three times in different connections. As an anaerobe
involved in the fermentations which give butter its flavor, it is C. butyricum PrazmowAs an organisms whose cells contain granules staining like starch, it is Bacillus
Amylobacter van Tieghem. It has the property of fixing nitrogen; discovered in this
ski.
(1902) it was named C. Pastorianum. The species of
Clostridium, as of Bacillus, are numerous. They are primarily saprophytic, but many
species produce powerful toxins and are serious pathogens. Examples are C. tetani;
C. botulinum; and C. septicum and a whole roll of other species, causing various
capacity by Winogradsky
forms of gangrene, occasion for the study and distinction of which was found during
World War
I.
Achromobacteriacea [Achromobacteriaceae] Breed 1945. Family Bacin Jour, of Bot. 15: 340 (1877), based on a generic name which
must be abandoned as a nomen conjusum. Family Enterobacteriaceae Rahn 1937, not
based on a generic name. Gram negative rods which lack the dictinctive characters
Family
teriaceae
7.
McNab
of the families subsequently to be treated.
22
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
The nine genera listed first occur normally in animals, mostly in the gut and
mostly as commensals; exceptions are important pathogens. Most of them produce
acid, and many of them produce gas, from sugar. These genera are the traditional
colon-typhoid-dysentery group.
Escherichia coli, the colon bacillus, and Aerohacter aerogenes, the gas bacillus, are
common commensals which produce
acid and gas from dextrose and lactose.
standard method of testing waters for contamination
presence of these organisms.
Klebsiella also produces acid
tract.
The
cells are
and gas from
is
essentially a test for
sugars. It inhabits
heavily capsulated and non-motile.
The
The
the
the respiratory
type species K.
pneumo-
an important pathogen, the pneumobacillus of Friedlander.
Proteus vulgaris (this is at least the third genus to bear the name Proteus, but the
first in this kingdom) produces acid and gas from dextrose but not lactose, and
liquefies gelatine. It is usually isolated from spoiled meat.
Salmonella is distinguished from Proteus by non-liquefaction of gelatine. Many
of its species are harmless commensals; others cause paratyphoid fevers. Immunological study of cultures of Salmonella from cases of disease and from waters have resulted in the distinction of fully 150 races, mostly unnamed and identifiable only by
immunological reactions. Eberthella includes motile rods producing acid but not
gas from sugars, and belonging to the same immunological system as the various
races of Salmonella. Eberthella typhi causes typhoid fever.
Shigella is distinguished from Eberthella by non-motility. The Shiga bacillus,
niae
is
S. dystenteriae,
is
the cause of dystentery.
numerous group of acid-producing gut bacteria, motile or nonfrom the foregoing as strictly anaerobic.
Alcaligenes fecalis, an apparently harmless organism isolated from intestinal contents, does not produce acid from sugars; grown in milk, it produces an alkaline
Bacteroides
is
a
motile, generally harmless.^ distinguished
reaction.
and are capable
which produce
an extracellular red pigment are Serratia (one of the oldest generic names for bacteria); those which produce yellow pigment are Flavobacterium; those which produce
blue, black, or violet growths are Chromobacterium. Cultures which lack the distinc-
Numerous
races of bacteria
which have been
isolated
from
soil
of attacking cellulose are assigned to the genus Cellulomonas. Bacteria
above named genera (most such cultures have been
from water) are called Achromohacter.
Family 8. Pasteurellacea nom. nov. Family Parvobacteriaceae Rahn; there is no
corresponding generic name. Minute non-motile Gram negative rods, pathogenic,
requiring special media for cultivation. Pasteurclla avicida is the cause of chicken
cholera, upon which Pasteur made important studies. Of greater direct importance
to man is Pasteurella pestis, the cause of plague. Hemophilus includes the agents
of whooping cough, soft chancre, and conjunctivitis. Brucella includes the organisms
which cause Malta fever, undulant fever. Bang's disease, contagious abortion. Pfeiftive characters of all of the
isolated
ferella mallei
is
the cause of glanders.
in Jour. Bact. 36: 321 (1938). Gram
negative rods, atrichous or peritrichous, parasites on plants. Cultured in the presence
of sugars, these organisms produce acid; they are evident allies of the colon group.
Family
9.
Rhizobiacea [Rhizobiaceae] Conn
Erwinia commemorates Erwin F. Smith, the discoverer of many bacteria pathogenic
Typical species cause blights, wilts, or dry necroses. The discovery by
Burrill, 1882, of Erwinia amylovora, the cause of the fire blight of pears, should
to plants.
Kingdom Mychota
[
23
have prevented the formulation of a theory, once entertained, that all bacteria
require neutral media, and are accordingly incapable of causing diseases of plants.
The species of Pectobacterium, as P. carotovorum, cause rots. Those of Agrobacterium cause galls; A. tumefaciens causes crown gall of many plants.
Rhizobium includes the species which produce little galls ("nodules") on the
roots of plants and which benefit their hosts by fixing nitrogen. The best known
hosts of Rhizobium are plants of the family Leguminosae; the relationship between
Leguminosae and Rhizobium is a classic example of symbiosis. There are several or
many species of Rhizobium, scarcely distinguishable morphologically, but living on
different groups of legumes. The race which was first recognized and isolated, R.
Leguminosarum Frank 1890 [Schinzia Leguminosarum Frank 1879; Bacillus Radicicola Beijerinck 1888) is that which attacks plants of the pea tribe. Bewley and Hutchinson (1920) accounted for the variety of forms which Rhizobium can assume. In
the roots of plants it occurs as involution forms. In culture, it is a peritrichous rod,
but the flagella are often reduced to one, and it has been confused with the monotrichous bacteria (Conn and Wolfe, 1938).
Family 10. Azotobacteriacea [Azotobacteriaceae] Bergey, Breed, and Murray in
Bergey's Manual 5th ed., preprint, v and 71 (1938). These are the organisms which
were originally isolated by Beijerinck (1901) by inoculating with garden soil shallow
layers of a nitrogen-free nutrient solution containing mannite. The commonest species,
Azotobacter Chroococcum, is usually seen as ellipsoid cells, as much as \\x thick and
7[J. long, solitary, with peritrichous flagella, or forming non-motile clusters imbedded
in a heavy capsule. Beijerinck observed the occurrence of globular involution forms
as much as 15^ in diameter. Lohnis and Smith (1916) made a thorough study of
variations in form, and reported a remarkable variety of other stages, including the
symplasm.
The Pasteurellacea and Rhizobiacea are apparently reasonably close allies of
the Achromobacteriacea. The Azotobacteriacea stand somewhat apart. The remaining families of the present order are more definitely distinct, being marked by monotrichous or lophotrichous flagella.
Migula 1894. Family Pseudomonadaceae
555 (1917). Rods and spirals, Gram negative, monotrichous or lophotrichous; not producing much acetic acid, and mostly heterotrophic.
Pseudomonas is a numerous genus of rods which may or may not produce a fluorescent pigment soluble in water; they do not produce a yellow pigment which is inFamily
Winslow
11.
Spirillacea [Spirillaceae]
et al. in Jour. Bact. 2:
soluble in water.
The
original species, P. aeruginosa,
was
isolated
from pus,
in
which
produces a blue-green discoloration; it is by itself weakly if at all pathogenic.
Other species have been isolated from fresh and salt waters and brines; the bacteria
which produce phosphorescence on salt fish are of this genus. Many further species
arc: pathogenic to plants, producing chiefly leaf spots.
Phytomonas Bergey et al. 1923 {Xanthomonas Dowson 1948) includes numerous
plant pathogens which in culture produce an insoluble yellow pigment; among them
are the causes of cabbage rot, walnut blight, and leaf spots on many plants.
Pacinia Trevisan 1885 includes monotrichous curved rods. The type species P.
it
cholerae-asiaticae
is
the cause of Asiatic cholera.
Among numerous
other species
the majority are harmless saprophytes in waters. Recent authorities have treated the
cholera organism as the type of the genus Vibrio Miiller (1773); their action is an intolerable falsification of the usage of a full century preceding the discovery of the
cholera organism.
24
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Spirillum includes the typical spirals, lophotrichous, a small number of species of
harmless saprophytes in foul waters.
Thiospira includes large lophotrichous spirals, colorless, containing granules of
sulfur. They are believed to live by chemosynthesis.
Family 12. Acetobacteriacea [Acetobacteriaceae] Bergey, Breed, and Murray
1938. As gross objects, growths of Acetobacter aceti Beijerinck have been known since
prehistoric times. With included yeasts they constitute mother of vinegar (the old
names Mycoderma mesentericum Persoon, Ulvina aceti Kiitzing, and Umbina aceti
Nageli designated the combination of bacteria and yeasts, and it seems proper to
reject them).
Free-swimming
cells
with polar flagella have been observed; ordinarily
the cells appear as rods in chains, heavily encapsulated, or as involution forms.
The
organic food required by Acetobacter
to acetic acid, or acetic acid,
which
processes are strictly aerobic: to
it,
one
is
make
is
alternatively alcohol,
which
is
oxidized
oxidized to carbon dioxide and water. These
vinegar, one exposes wine to air; to preserve
seals the vessels.
Family 13. Nitrobacteriacea [Nitrobacteriaceae] Buchanan in Jour. Bact. 2: 349
(1917). Organisms oxidizing the simplest organic compounds; or facultatively capable of chemosynthesis; or living strictly by chemosynthesis and strictly aerobic: mostly
Gram
negative monotrichous or atrichous rods.
is capable of oxidizing methane; Carboxidomonas of oxidizing
carbon monoxide; Hydrogenomonas, of oxidizing elemental hydrogen. Thiobacillus
Methanomonas
includes organisms which oxidize hydrogen sulfide or elemental sulfur.
Winogradsky had discovered chemosynthesis in the course of studies of Beggiatoa
and other sulfur-oxidizing organisms before he undertook
to isolate bacteria
which
cause nitrification, that is, the natural production of nitrates in soil and waters.
He achieved success (1890) by inoculating, with soil or sewage, media which contained salts of ammonia but no food; he saw the nitrifying organisms first as minute
motile rods which he named Nitromonas. Further study and the use of solid media
showed that nitrification takes place in two stages and is the work of several kinds of
organisms. Winogradsky distinguished Nitrosomonas europaea and N. javaneyisis,
monotrichous rods from different regions as indicated, oxidizing ammonia to nitrites;
Nitrosococcus, non-motile spheres from South Amerca, effecting the same oxidation
and Nitrobacter, non-motile rods oxidizing nitrites to nitrates.
Subsequent authors have validated Winogradsky's names by creating the combinations Nitrosococcus nitrosus and Nitrobacter VVinogradskyi. Subsequently, Winograd-
as Nitrosomonas;
sky discovered yet other bacteria capable of the
The
presence of nitrifying bacteria
is
same
oxidations.
necessary for the normal growth of most
crops. So active are the nitrifying bacteria that no more than traces of ammonia and
nitrites are found in normal soils, and so avidly do plants absorb nitrates that these
accumulate only
Order
2.
in fallow fields.
Actinomycetalea [Actinomycetales] Buchanan
in
Jour. Bact. 2:
162
(1917).
Organisms which
consist typically of slender filaments not divided
into
cells,
but which are capable of producing conidia, that is, minute spherical or elongate
bodies cut off by constriction from the ends of the filaments, or of breaking up into
cells of the form of regular or irregular rods. Non-motile; Gram positive or Gram
negative; often of the staining character called acid
The
order
may
be treated as a single family.
fast.
Kingdom Mychota
[
25
Family Mycobacteriacea [Mycobacteriaceae] Chester 1907. Family ActinomyceBuchanan in Jour. Bact. 3: 403 (1918). Family Streptomycetaceae Waksman
and Henrici 1943. Characters of the order. Three genera require discussion.
Streptomyces Waksman and Henrici 1943. The original name of this genus is
Streptothrix Cohn (1875); there is an older genus Streptothrix among plants, and
the numerous species of the present genus have generally been included in Actinomyces. Cultures are readily isolated from air or soil. They appear as slowly growing
colonies which may at first be of various colors and have shiny surfaces. Their texture
is tough; a blunt needle will more often tear a colony from the medium than penetrate it. As the colonies grow, they become truncate; the exposed surfaces become
white and powdery; pigments, black, brown, red, or yellow, in various races, are
produced, and discolor the medium. The toughness of the colonies is a consequence
of their structure, of myriad crooked branching filaments about 1|J. in diameter,
without joints; the white and powdery surface is produced by myriad conidia released
in basipetal succession. The cultures are of an odor which may be described as that
of earth under the first rain after drouth: undoubtedly, this familiar odor is that of
Streptomyces in the soil. Drechsler (1919), from careful study of several species of
Streptomyces, concluded that they are fungi; their filaments are, however, much
finer than those of fungi, and no definite nuclei have been seen.
Certain species of Streptomyces cause a scabbiness of potatoes. Except for this, the
genus was for a long time regarded as quite unimportant. When the capacity of the
fungus Penicillium notatum to inhibit the growth of bacteria had been observed,
and had led to the discovery of the drug penicillin, Waksman, the leading authority
on the classification of Actinomycetalea, sought comparable drugs produced by
Streptomyces, and had the great success of discovering streptomycin.
Actinomyces Bovis Harz 1877 is one of several species of the same general nature
as Streptothrix which are pathogenic to animals. It causes lumpy jaw of cattle.
Mycobacterium Lehmann and Neumann 1896 is typified by M. tuberculosis, the
agent of one of the most important diseases of man, supposed originally to have
attacked cattle, and to have spread around the world with European cattle. It is a
chronic disease, destroying the tissues slowly and producing a nugatory sort of immunity which makes it possible to test for the disease, but does not check it. The
cells are recognized in sputum and in diseased tissues by the acid fast reaction: the
dye carbol fuchsin must be applied hot in order to color them; once it has done so,
it does not wash out in acid alcohol. It is cultivated with difficulty. The growth is
dry, powdery, wrinkled, with an odor described as sickening-sweet. It consists of
branching filaments which break up readily into rod-shaped or irregular fragments.
Lesions of leprosy contain acid fast organisms named Mycobacterium leprae. Gay
(1935) has discussed the results of attempts to cultivate this species. They have
yielded either "diphtheroid" cells or a "streptothrix." He concludes that most of
the reports are of the same organism reacting variously to various conditions.
taceae
Order
3.
Caulobacterialea [Caulobacteriales] Henrici and Johnson in Jour. Bact.
29: 4 (1935).
Aquatic bacteria, the cells of most examples secreting gelatinous matter in such a
as to produce stalks. Henrici and Johnson provided a system of four families,
five genera, and nine species. Stanier and van Niel (1941) rejected the group as
artificial, placing some of the genera among Eubacteria and leaving others unplaced.
The order may be maintained for the accommodation of the latter and divided into
two families.
manner
The
26]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
m
—
Caulobacterialea after Henrici and Johnson (1935) x 2,000: a,
Caulobacter vibrioides; c, Caulobacter sp.; d, Pasteuria sp.; e, Blastocaulis sp. f. Various stages of Cytophaga Hutchinsonii [Spirochaeta cytophaga) after
Hutchinson and Clayton ( 1919). g-k, Myxobactralea after Thaxtcr (1892), the cells
3
Fig.
a-e,
Nevskia
sp.; b,
X 1,000,
in the fruits x 200.
des.
I,
m, Dividing
and fruit of Chondromyccs crocatus; i, fruit
and spores, and fruit, of Myxococcus coralloi
g, h, Cells
of C. aurantiacus; j,k, vegetative cells
cells of Cristispira
Veneris after Dobell (1911) x 2,000.
Kingdom Mychota
Family
1.
[
Leptotrichacea [Leptotrichacei] Schroter 1886. The
cells
27
not elongated
in the direction of the axis of the stalk.
Didymohelix ferruginea (Ehrenberg) Griffith (first named, and usually listed,
under Gallionella, which is a misspelling of the name of a genus of diatoms) occurs
in waters containing iron. Older authors described it as consisting of paired filaments,
less than 1^ in diameter, colored bright yellow with imbedded iron oxide, and coiled
about each other. In fact, the supposed paired filaments are the margins of a single
twisted band, which is not itself an organism but the stalk secreted by a terminal
cell. Spirophyllum Ellis is either the same species or a closely related larger one.
Leptothrix Kiitzing Phyc. Gen. 198 ( 1843) was inadequately described; the species
which was first named, and which is accepted as the type, was L. ochracea. It is believed that this name properly designates the masses of ochraceous matter seen in
iron springs. Under the microscope, this matter is seen to consist of fine yellow
filaments, straight and unbranched. Ellis (1916) described them as consisting of a
cylinder of protoplasm, not divided into cells, enclosed in a sheath. Almost surely,
these structures, generally recognized as of the same nature as Didymohelix, are likewise stalks secreted by minute terminal cells.
Siderocapsa Molisch and Sideromonas Cholodny, described as minute spheres or
rods imbedded in capsules colored by ferric oxide and attached to plants in waters
containing iron, are perhaps to be interpreted as stalkless members of the present
group.
Nevskia Famintzin, forming minute gelatinous colonies floating on water, does not
accumulate iron.
Family 2. Caulobacteriacea [Caulobacteriaceae] Henrici and Johnson 1. c. (1935).
The
cells
elongated in the direction of the long axes of the stalks. Caulobacter, PasBlastocaulis, colorless saprophytes in waters or parasites in aquatic
and
teuria,
animacules.
Class 2.
MYXOSCHIZOMYCETES
Myxoschizomycetae
Class
Class Polyyangidae
Jahn
Schaffner
Schaffner in Ohio Naturalist 9: 447 (1909).
Beitr. bot. Protistol. 1: 65 (1924).
Class Spirochaetae Stanier and van Niel in Jour. Bact. 42
459 ( 1941 )
Mychota, the elongate cells with thin walls or none,
capable of bending movements and sluggishly or actively motile. In many examples
:
Parasitic or saprophytic
there
is
a resting stage: the cell contracts generally, so as to diminish the surface,
a definite wall. The structure so produced is a spore of the type called
an arthrospore or chlamydospore.
The two orders Myxobactralea and Spirochaetalea have not previously been
combined to form a separate class. A certain species which Hutchinson and Clayton
(1919) described as a spirochaet, Spirochaeta cytophaga, has subsequently been
found to be a myxobacterium. The hint of relationship thus conveyed is confirmed
by the whole character of both groups, as may be seen from the discussions of them
by Stanier and van Niel (1941) and Knasyi (1944).
and deposits
Order 1. Myxobactralea [Myxobactrales] Clements Gen. Fung. 8 (1909).
Order Myxobacteriaceae Thaxter in Bot. Gaz. 17: 389 (1892).
Order Myxobacteriales Buchanan in Jour. Bact. 2: 163 (1917).
The
cells
not definitely of spiral form, sluggishly motile. In typical examples, the
28
The
]
cells
Classification of
Lower Organisms
occur in swarms imbedded in slime; the entire mass moves concertedly, and
is
eventually converted into macroscopically visible fruiting bodies.
The group was first recognized by Thaxter. He took note that the fruiting bodies
of Chondromyces had already been described by Berkeley and Curtis as those of a
gasteromycete, and learned subsequently that Polyangium Link, also described as
of the puffball group, is an older name for his Myxobacter. The swarms of cells live
in air on damp substrata (commonly the feces of various kinds of animals), moving
across
them and
As a
digesting
fairly easy.
and absorbing food
as they proceed.
Labratory culture
is
reaction, apparently, to exhaustion of the available food, the cells
change into chlamydospores; the masses of spores held together by dried slime are
called cysts. These may be borne on simple or branched stalks built up from the
slime as a preliminary to the formation of the cysts and spores. The group is of
essentially no economic importance.
The accepted classification is that of Jahn (1924); to the four families which he
recognized, one more has been prefixed for the accommodation of the genus
Cytophaga.
family 1. Cytophagacea [Cytophagacae] Stanier 1940. The chlamydospores
formed sporadically by individual cells, not in cysts. Cytophaga Hutchinsonii Winogradsky [Spirochaeta cytophaga Hutchinson and Clayton) is one of several species
discovered as active fermenters of cellulose.
The
slenderly spindle-shaped cells are
and produce ellipsoid chlamydospores resembling yeasts.
Family 2. Archangiacea [Archangiacae] Jahn op. cit. 66. Spores elongate in irregularly extensive masses, not in cysts. Archangium, Stelangium.
Family 3. Sorangiacea [Sorangiaceae] Jahn op. cit. 73. Spores elongate, the
cysts angular, in masses, not stalked. Sorangium.
Family 4. Myxobacteriacea [Myxobacteriaceae] (Thaxter) E. F. Smith 1905.
Family Polyangiaceac Jahn op. cit. 75. Spores elongate, in distinct rounded cysts,
clustered or solitary, sessile or borne on simple or branched stalks. Polyangium
Link 1795 [Myxobacter Thaxter 1892), Stelangium, Melitangium, Podangium,
Chondromyces.
Family 5. Myxococcacea [Myxococcaceae] Jahn op. cit. 83. Spores spherical;
cysts indefinite or definite. Myxococcus, Chondrococcus, Angiococcus.
sluggishly motile,
Order
2.
Spirochaetalea [Spirochaetales] Buchanan in Jour. Bact. 2: 163 (1917).
Cells solitary, spiral in shape, actively motile.
The first known species of this group was Spirochaeta plicatilis, observed in foul
waters by Ehrenberg (1838). The next was the species now known as Borrelia recurrentis (Lebert) Bergey et al., observed in the blood of relapsing fever patients by
Obermeier, 1873.
During the last years of the nineteenth century, many attempts to identify the
agent of syphilis by standard bacteriological methods were unsuccessful. The German
government directed Schaudinn and Hoff'mann to continue this work. Fritz Schaudinn, 1871-1906 (Stokes, 1931), had attained distinction as a student of pathogenic
protozoa. Within a few weeks, by the microscopic examination of lesions, he attained
where the bacteriologists had failed, and discovered Treponema pallidum
(Schaudinn and Hoffmann, 1905).
Spirochaets were first cultivated by Noguchi; few others have been successful in
this difficult practice. It requires a medium of aseptic, not sterilized, animal material, under more or less anaerobic conditions. Each species requires its peculiar
variant of the conditions, to which it is quite sensitive.
success
Kingdom Mychota
Spirochaeta
plicatilis
and other saprophytic
[
29
with certain species
species, together
which are parasitic or commensal
in other animals may be extremely small. It is chiefly by study of the larger species
that the structure is known. The internal structure is septate. Dobell (1911) found
in Cristispira, at the margin of each septum, a whorl of granules staining like chromatin, and interpreted these granules collectively as a nucleus. Noguchi (in Jordan and
Falk, 1928) saw in the interior of the smaller species no chambered structure, but a
parasitic in mollusks, are fairly large.
The
species
lengthwise rod. This has been interpreted as a nucleus, as a locomotor or skeletal
structure, or as an artifact. The electron microscope has shown actual flagella at the
Treponema pallidum. Reproduction is normally by transverse diviDuring division, the daughter cells may coil about one another, giving
a false appearance of lengthwise division. Gross (1913) observed that Cristispira is
capable of breaking up into cylindrical Stdhchen corresponding to the chambers.
The discovery of Treponema by an eminent protozoologist; the character of
spirochaetal diseases, several of which are spread by biting insects, and produce only
that nugatory immunity which makes diagnosis possible but does not check the
disease; and the supposed lengthwise division of the cells; led to the hypothesis that
the spirochaets are protozoa. Dobell was surely correct in dismissing this hypothesis,
insisting that the spirochaets are neither protozoa nor typical bacteria, but a group
ends of
cells of
sion into two.
sui generis.
The
larger
Family
1.
and smaller spirochaets are reasonably treated
as separate families.
Spirochaetacea [Spirochaetaceae] Swellengrebel 1907. The
cells
com-
paratively large, 80-500(1 long. Spirochaeta, Saprospira, Cristispira.
Family
2.
Treponematacea [Treponemataceae] Robinson
(1948). Family Treponemidae Schaudinn 1905.
The
cells
in Bergey Man. 6th ed.
4-15^ long.
Treponema Schaudinn. The cells comparatively loosely coiled. T. pallidum, the
agent of syphillis. T. pertenue, the agent of yaws. T. macrodentium and T. microdentium, harmless commensals in the mouth.
Borrelia Swellengrebel is doubtfully distinct from the foregoing; Noguchi reduced
it. B. recurrentis and other species cause relapsing fevers. B. Vincenti causes Vincent's
angina (trench mouth). The fusiform cells always found associated with it and
supposed to be ordinary bacteria of a genus Fusiformis or Fusobacterium may be its
chlamydospores.
Leptospira Noguchi. The cells tightly coiled. L. icterohaemorrhagiae is the agent
of infectious jaundice. L. icteroides, isolated by Noguchi in South America, supposedly from cases of yellow fever,
yellow fever
fever that
is
caused by a virus.
Noguchi
lost his life
Class 3.
by
is
It
perhaps the same thing: it is now known that
in pursuing in Africa his study of yellow
was
this disease (Flexner, 1929; Eckstein,
1931).
ARCHSPLASTIDEA Bessey
Myxophykea Wallroth 1853.
Myxophyceae Stizenberger 1860.
Division (of Class Algen) Pkycochromaceae and order
Krytog.-Fl. Sachsen 1: 56' (1863).
Cyanophyceae Sachs Lehrb. Bot. ed. 4: 248 (1874).
Gloiophyceae Rabenhorst
OrAtx Cyanophyceae or Pkycochromaceae yicNdLhm]o\iT.
Schizophyceae
Kryptog.-Fl.
Cohn
2,
oi'Qot. 15:
340 (1877).
1879, not suborder Schizophyceae Rabenhorst Deutschland's
Abt. 2: 16 (1847).
—
.
30
The
]
Classificatio7i of
Order Schizophyceae Schenck
Lower Organisms
in Strasburger et al. Lehrb. Bot. 1894.
Class Schizophyceae Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt.
la: iii (1900).
Class Archiplastideae Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 279 (1907).
Class Cyanophyceae Schaffner in Ohio Naturalist 9: 446 (1909).
Class
Myxophyceae G. M. Smith (1918).
Myxophyceae Setchell and Gardner
Subclass
part
1:
in Univ. California Publ. Bot. 8,
3 (1919).
Cyanophyta Steinke
(
193 1
)
Stamm Cyanophyta
Pascher in Beih. Bot. Centralbl. 48, Abt. 2: 330 (1931).
Mychota most of which live by phytosynthesis of primitive or typical character,
many of them, and most of the saprophytic and chemosynthetic organisms included
with them, being of the form of sheathed filaments.
This is primarily the group of the blue-green algae. Blue-green algae are familiar
things as forming dark scums in water and on wet surfaces. Rabenhorst (1863) appears first to have recognized them as a group definitely distinct from green algae;
he named most of the recognized families. Revisions by Thuret (1875), Bomet and
Flahault (1886-1888), and Gomont (1892) failed to provide a satisfactory system
of the group; Kirchner's revision (in Engler and Prantl, 1898) is the accepted system.
One
of the important contributions of
Cohn was
his suggestion that the bacteria
He emphasized
this view by mingling the
genera of the two groups in two new groups, "tribes," named in effect slime-formers
and thread-formers (1875). In this he went too far; but some of the arrangements
which he suggested appear natural. Beggiatoa, the type of order Thiobacteria of
Migula, appears to be a variant of the common blue-green alga Oscillatoria, differing
from it in living by chemosynthesis. Most of the so-called iron bacteria, family
Chlamydobacteriaceae of Migula, fall readily into scattered places among the bluegreen algae. Only the genus Sphaerotilus remains at loose ends. It is credibly reported
and blue-green algae belong
to
produce
A
cells
together.
swimming by means
variety of purple bacteria
do this.
which contain a red pigment
of flagella; no proper blue-green algae
—bacteria,
that
is,
have been discovered from time to time. Engelmarm (1888) observed that they swim
toward the light, and convinced himself that they live by photosynthesis. Van Niel
confirmed this, and showed that photosynthesis is in this group of a peculiar character;
it requires the presence of reducing agents and does not release oxygen. This type of
photosynthesis appears, in fact, to represent a stage of the evolution of typical photosynthesis; the group in which it occurs appears to represent the ancestry of the
typical blue-green algae.
The
poorly
known green
bacteria appear to belong with
the purple bacteria.
Various members of this class have been proved capable of
and ZoBell, 1951; Williams and Burris, 1952).
Four orders may be distinguished:
1.
fixing nitrogen (Sisler
Possessing a red ("purple") intracellular
pigment, or a green pigment not masked by
others
l.With green pigment masked by
Order
1
Order
2.
.
Rhodobacteria.
others, or
colorless.
2.
Producing
cells
with
flagella;
non-pig-
mented sheathed filaments not accumulating
ferrugineous matter
Sphaerottlalea.
Kingdom Mychota
2.
Never producing
3.
cells
Cells dividing in
with
[
31
flagella.
more planes than
one, growing to full size before redividing; unicellular or colonial, not
filamentous
3.
Cells
dividing in one plane,
accordingly
producing
Order
3.
Coccogonea.
Order
4.
Gloiophycea.
and
filaments;
exceptional examples reproducing
by budding (unequal division) or
by repeated division into minute
spores
1. Rhodobaeteria Molisch Purourbakterien 27 (1907).
Rods, spheres, and spirals, solitary or colonial, with red or green pigment, performing in the presence of light and reducing substances a sort of photosynthesis in
which no oxygen is released.
These organisms have generally been included in Thiobacteria, but do not include
Beggiatoa, the type of that order. Molisch divided them into two families, Thiorhodaceae, aerobic, accumulating granules of sulfur, and Athiorhodaceae, microaerophilic or anaerobic, not accumulating granules of sulfur. The green bacteria are to be
placed as a third family. The names originally applied to the families are not tenable.
Family 1. Chromatiacea (Migula) nomen familiare novum. Subfamily ChroMATiACEAE Migula. Family Rhodobacteriaceae Migula; Family Thiorhodaceae
Molisch; the family does not include genera with corresponding names. Purple bac-
Order
accumulating granules of sulfur. Chromatium Perty includes the organism of foul waters which was originally named Monas Okenii. It is a plump rod,
often bent, sometimes exceeding \0\Ji in length, monotrichous or lophotrichous. There
are a dozen other genera, rods, spheres, and spirals [Thio spirillum., which belongs
here, is to be distinguished alike from Spirillum, Thiospira, and Rho do spirillum),
solitary or colonial, motile or non-motile. Most of them were discovered by Winoteria, aerobic,
gradsky.
Rhodobacillacea nom. nov. Family Athiorhodaceae Molisch. Molisch
genus Rhodobacterium, but the name Rhodobacteriaceae had
already been applied by Migula to the preceding family. Purple bacteria, anaerobic,
not accumulating granules of sulfur. Molisch discovered all known members of the
present family. The method of culture was to place a mass of organic matter, for
example an egg, in the bottom of a cylinder of water (the original account specified
water of the River Moldau), cover the surface with oil, place in a north window, and
wait several weeks. This method yielded organisms which were assigned to seven
genera. Those of spiral form are Rhodospirillum. All others are by van Niel treated
as a single genus, which may be called Rhodobacillus Molisch {Rhodopseudomonas
van Niel).
Family 3. Chlorobiacea nom. nov. Family Chlorobacteriaceae Geitler and Pascher
ex van Niel in Bergey's Manual ed. 6: 869 (1948). Geitler and Pascher (in Pascher
Siisswasserfl. Deutschland, 1925) did not place this group in a definite category
and name it unequivocally: they called it Cyanochloridinae or Chlorobacteriaceae.
Minute spherical or elongate cells with a green pigment different from typical
chlorophyll, anaerobic, non-motile, producing irregular or regular gelatinous colonies.
Chlorobium, Pelodictyon, Clathro Moris, with a half a dozen known species. Certain
Family
named
2.
in this family a
—
The
32]
Fig. 4.
Coccogonea:
phycea:
d, Oscillatoria
a,
Classification of
Chroococcus
splendida; e,
sp.; b, C,
m, Clonothrix
and Gardner 1919);
after Setchell
X 1,000.
1,
(
Achromatiuni oxalijerum.
Phormidium
sp.; f,
Beggiatoa
sp.; g,
\,
fusca after
o,
Gloio-
Chamae-
Cylidrospcrmum majus; j, ChlarnydoKolk (1938); n, Dermocarpa protea
Crenothrix polyspora after Kolk 1938). All
siphon incrustans; h, Anabaena inacqualis;
thrix ochracea; k,
Lower Organisms
(
Kingdom Mychota
[33
organisms of this group, occurring in symbiotic combinations with larger bacteria or
with protozoa, have been named as additional genera; one of these is Chlorobacterium
Lauterborn, but the name is a later homonym.
Order 2. Sphaerotilalea nom. nov.
Order Desmobactcrialcs Pribram in Jour. Bact. 18: 376 (1929); there is no corresponding generic name.
Cells colorless, elongate, in sheathed filaments which branch freely in the manner
called "false": the cells divide strictly in one plane; those at a distance from the tip
may
so multiply as to
break the continuity of the series by pushing a growing point
The cells may escape from the filaments, become lophotri-
laterally out of the sheath.
swarm spores. There is a single family:
Family Sphaerotilacea [Sphaerotilaceae] Pribram 1. c. There is probably only
one species, Sphaerotilus natans Kiitzing {Cladothrix dichotoma Cohn). It is found
as minute gelatinous colonies fioating on stagnant water; cells 2-4^ in diameter.
chous, and function as
Order
3.
Coccogonea [Coccogoneae] (Thuret) Campbell Univ. Textb. Bot. 84
(1902).
Tribe Chroococcaceac [Coccogoneae) Thuret in Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot.
1: 377 (1875).
Subclass Coccogoneae Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pfianzenfam.
Abt. la:
(1900).
Order Coccogonales Atkinson 1903.
Orders Chroococcales and Entophysalidales Geitler in Pascher et
ser.
6,
I Teil,
iii
al.
Siisswasserfl.
Deutschland 12: 52, 120 (1925).
Cells solitary or colonial, not filamentous, never flagellate; mostly of blue-green
and living by photosynthesis.
Kirchner (in Engler and Prantl, 1898) placed here two families, Chroococcaceac
and Chamaesiphonaceae, but the second belongs to the following order. A proper
second family includes the colorless organisms of genus Achromatium.
Family 1. Chroococcacea [Chroococcaceac] (Nageli) Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl.
Sachsen 1:69 (1863). Order Chroococcaceac Nageli Gatt. einzell. Alg. 44 (1849).
Unicellular or colonial blue-green algae. Chroococcus, Gloeocapsa, Merismopedia,
Coelosphaerium, Gomphosphaeria, etc., occur as plankton or as masses on damp
surfaces or the bottoms of bodies of water. Certain species occur as symbionts or
color
parasites within the cells of the green algae Glaucocystis
sulting bodies, having the color
and Gloeochaete. The
of blue-green algae with the structure
re-
of green
algae, resisted classification until Geitler (1923) explained their nature.
Family 2. Achromatiacea [Achromatiaceae] Buchanan. Cells solitary, large, ellipsoidal,
without
flagella,
non-pigmented;
protoplasm alveolar,
with or without
granules of sulfur in the alveoli. Half a dozen species have been described; Bersa
(1920) was probably correct in reducing all to the original one, Achromatium
oxaliferum Schewiakoff. It occurs on mud under still waters rich in organic matter.
Order
4.
Gloiophycea [Gloiophyceae] Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Sachsen
(1863).
Tribe Nostochineae {Hormonogoneae) Thuret in Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot.
1:
377 (1875).
1
:
ser.
56
6,
34
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Family Hormogoneae Bomet and Flahault
in
Ann.
Sci.
Nat. Bot.
ser. 7, 3
(1886).
Subclass Hormogoneae Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam.
337
:
I Teil,
Abt. la: iii(1900).
Order Hormogoneae Campbell Univ. Textb. Bot. 84 (1902).
Order Hormogonales Atkinson 1905.
Blue-green algae whose cells divide predominantly in one plane, so that filaments
are produced, together with related colorless organisms.
So
far as cell division is strictly in
the type called "false":
it
one plane, any branching of the filaments
occurs by breaks in the continuity of the series of
followed by the outgrowth, beside the original
some members
series, of
the newly formed
is
of
cells,
tips.
In
of the group, however, the cells are not strictly confined to division in
is possible. There are a few apparwhich cell division takes place freely in all planes.
Many of these algae produce spores of the type called arthrospores by the direct
conversion of normal cells into thick-walled resting spores. Many (almost but not
quite exactly the same ones which produce arthrospores) produce peculiarly differentiated cells called heterocysts (the word means "different cells"). These are enlarged thick-walled cells with colorless contents; their most obvious function is to
one plane, with the result that "true" branching
ently derived examples in
furnish breaking points for the filaments.
They
arthrospores; they have been seen to germinate
Ten
1.
families
may be
are believed to be variants of the
and give
rise to
normal filaments.
distinguished as follows:
Cells dividing strictly in one plane; branch-
ing none or of the "false" type.
2.
The
filaments not branching nor taper-
ing nor producing spores or heterocysts.
3.
Filaments elongate.
4. Pigmented, blue-green
organisms accumu4. Colorless
lating sulfur
Filaments reduced to single cells
which reproduce by budding
Filaments branching or tapering, or producing spores or heterocysts, or showing
Family
1.
Oscillatoriacea.
Family
2.
Beggiatoacea.
Family
3.
Chamaesiphonacea.
Family
4.
Nostocacea.
Family
5.
Scytonematacea.
3.
2.
several of these characters.
3.
Filaments not tapering.
4. Filaments not branching
4. Filaments branching.
5. Blue-green
algae mostly
producing heterocysts
5.
Minute
without heterocysts
Filaments tapering
Cells dividing in more planes than one, usually after a preliminary filamentous phase.
2. Pigmented, blue-green.
3. Producing extensive filaments with
3.
1.
colorless filaments
heterocysts
Family 6. Chlamydotrichacea.
Family 7. Rivulariacea.
Family
8.
Sirosiphonacea.
Kingdom Mychota
3.
Filaments more or less reduced, reproducing by minute spores (gonidia) formed by repeated division
Family
in all planes
2.
[35
Colorless;
filamentous,
9.
Pleurocapsacea.
reproducing by
Family 10. Crenotrichacea.
gonidia
1. Oscillatoriacea [Oscillatoriaceae] Harvey 1858. Blue-green algae consisting of unbranched filaments, not tapering, without spores or heterocysts; mostly
actively motile by mechanisms as yet unknown. In the commonest genus, Oscillatoria,
Family
the filaments are straight
and lack
sheaths.
Lyngbya and Phormidium produce
sheathed filaments, in the latter genus very slender. Microculeus and Hydrocoleum
have more than one filament in each sheath. In Arthrospira and Spirulina the filaments are coiled; those of Spirulina are not visibly septate, and are said to be unicellular.
Family
2.
Beggiatoacea [Beggiatoaceae] Migula 1895. Beggiatoa Trevisan includes
slender colorless filaments, actively writhing, containing granules of sulfur, found
in foul waters and sulfur springs. The species were originally included in Oscillatoria.
Winogradsky (1887) showed that they live by chemosyn thesis, and discovered the
related genera Thiothrix and Thioploca. From the time of these discoveries, these
organisms were construed as bacteria of an order Thiobacteria. Under the current
hypri thesis that chemosynthesis
is
a derived character,
we
are free to believe that the
was the natural one.
Family 3. Chamaesiphonacea [Chamaesiphonaceae] Borzi 1882. Order Chamaesipkonales Smith Freshw. Alg. 74 (1933). The only genus is Chamaesiphon, minute
organisms epiphytic on freshwater plants. The ellipsoid cells are attached at one
end and are enclosed in tenuous sheaths. They reproduce by transverse division, which
cuts loose small cells from the free ends. By the time two or three such cells are
produced, the sheath is ruptured at the free end, and the small cells drift away to
repi educe the organism elsewhere.
Family 4. Nostocacea [Nostocaceae] (Nageli) Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Sachsen
1: 95 (1863). Order Nostocaceae Nageli 1847. Of this family the most familiar genus
position originally assigned to the species of Beggiatoa
is
Nostoc, seen as gelatinous bodies, usually globular, green, blue-green, yellow, or
brown, of sizes from barely visible to the naked eye up to 10 cm. or more in diameter,
in fresh water or on damp earth. Under the microscope, these bodies or colonies are
seen to consist of myriad crooked and tangled filaments of bead-like cells imbedded
in a gelatinous matrix. Heterocysts are always,
and spores
usually, present.
water one finds filaments of much the same structure as those of Nostoc,
but comparatively short, straight, and free or at least not in definite colonies, these
represent the genus Anabaena. Filaments floating on water, with cylindrical spores
not confined to the ends of the filaments, are Aphanizomenon. Filaments each with
one heterocyst and one spore at one end are Cylindrospermum.
Family 5. Scytonematacea [Scytonemataceae] Rabenhorst op. cit. 106. Members
of this family produce heavily sheathed filaments like those of Lyngbya, with the
If in
difference that heterocysts are usually present.
filament
may produce
The
multiplication of the cells of a
the result that the cell next to a heterocyst
is
driven out of line
and forced obliquely through the sheath. With further growth, the file of cells ending
in one which was forced out of line may appear to be the main axis of a system of
branches, while the original summit of the filament appears to be a lateral branch.
The
description of "false" branching thus given applies particularly to Tolypothrix.
36
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
In Scytonema, the pressure of multiplying cells causes waves of the filament to break
through the sheath and produce branches in pairs. Plectonema branches
like Tolypothrix but has no heterocysts.
Family 6. Chlamydotrichacea [Chlamydotrichaceae] Pribram in Jour. Bact. 18:
377 (1929). Aquatic organisms consisting of colorless cylindrical cells in sheathed
filaments, without heterocysts but exhibiting false branching, the sheaths of young
filaments thin and colorless, those of older ones thick and yellow to brown. Chlamydothrix ochracea Migula was intended as a new name for Leptothrix ochracea Kiitzing,
but the entity to which it is believed to apply is totally different from the one to which
the latter name was applied above. Chlamydothrix is a filament of definite cells
about 1 ^ in diameter. The only other definitely characterized species of this family is
Clonothrix fusca Roze, the cells about 2^ in diameter, those near the tips of the filaments dividing repeatedly (always in one plane) to produce spherical non-motile
laterally
gonidia (Kolk, 1.938).
Family
Fdvulariacea [Rivulariaceae] Rabenhorst op.
7.
cit.
101.
The
filaments
include heterocysts and exhibit the false branching of Tolypothrix; the outgrowth
of the filament below each heterocyst gives to the original terminal part the appear-
ance of a branch of which the heterocyst is the basal cell. The ends of the filaments
colorless. In Calothrix the filaments are mostly solitary; in
other genera they remain together in gelatinous colonies. Rivularia is without spores;
in Glocotrichia there is a large cylindrical spore next to each heterocyst.
Family 8. Sirosiphonacea [Sirosiphonaceae] Rabenhorst op. cit. 114. Family
Stigonemataceae Kirchner 1898. This family takes its name from the ancient generic
name Sirosiphon Kiitzing 1843, which turned out to be identical with Stigonema
Agardh 1824. The cells divide at first in one plane and produce filaments. Presently
they exhibit a capacity to divide in other planes, and may produce true branches or
multiseriate filaments or both. Heterocysts and spc^es are generally produced.
Family 9. Pleurocapsacea [Pleurocapsaceae] Geitler in Pascher et al. SiisswasserFl. Deutschland 12: 124 (1925). This group was formerly included in Chamaesi-
become attenuate and
phonacea, but it appears probable that Chamae siphon is related to Oscillatoria, and
the present group to Stigonema. Most of the Pleurocapsacea are marine, epiphytic
on seaweeds. Their apparently typical behavior, as exemplified by Hyella and
Radaisia, consists of the production of branching filaments whose terminal eel's become enlarged, after which their contents undergo division in many planes to produce
numerous minute spores called gonidia. In Pleurocapsa and Xenococcus there is no
filamentous phase; the gonidium gives rise to a cluster of cells all of which produce
gonidia. In
Dermocarpa
the gonidium gives rise to a single vegetative cell which
divides only to produce gonidia.
Crenotrichacea [Crenotrichaceae] Hansgirg. This family includes the
Cohn, one of the traditional iron bacteria.
There is every appearance that it is a colorless variant of the Pleurocapsacea. A germinating gonidium gives rise to an unbranched filament of cells, about 2^ in diameter,
in a sheath which is at first thin and colorless, later becoming thicker and discolored
by ferric oxide. Some cells may burst from the free end of the sheath as macrogonidia.
Others may begin to divide lengthwise. These may at first grow before re-dividing,
and may swell the sheath to a fusiform or trumpet-like shape. By further division
they produce numerous microgonidia, which may sift out of the sheath or be released by its decay.
Such are the Mychota, the organisms which may properly be characterized as
Family
single
10.
known
species Crenothrix polyspora
lacking nuclei.
Chapter IV
KINGDOM PROTOCTISTA
Kingdom
PROTOCTISTA Hogg
!l.
Regne Psycho diaire, Psychodies, Bory de Saint Vincent
Diet. Class Hist. Nat. 8:
246 (1825), 14: 329 (1828).
Kingdom Protozoa Owen Palaeontology 5 (1860), not
class
Protozoa Goldfuss
(1818).
Regnum Primigenium
seu Protoctista
Hogg
in
Edinburgh
New
Philos. Jour. n.s.
12: 223 (1860).
Kingdom Acrita or Protozoa Owen Palaeontology ed
Kingdom Primalia Wilson and Cassin in Proc. Acad.
2: 6 (1861).
Nat.
Sci.
Philadelphia 1863:
117 (1864).
Kingdom
Kingdom
Morph. 2: xix (1866).
Protobionta Rothmaler in Biol. Centralbl. 67: 243 (1948).
Nucleate organisms other than Plantae and Animalia: the marine algae and the
fungi and protozoa. Amiba diffluens may be construed as the standard.
Protista Haeckel Gen.
The name
Protista, of Haeckel,
is
the most familiar
among
those which have been
not the earliest. Among followers of Cuvier, the animal kingdom consisted necessarily of four branches. Presumapplied to the kingdom here to be discussed, but
ably,
it
was
this tradition that
induced
Owen
it is
to refer the Infusoria
and Amorphozoa
A year
later, Owen puban alternative name for this kingdom; but Hogg had already published modifications of two of Owen's names, Protoctista and Amorphoctista(KTi^co,to establish,
create), for the reason that names in -zoa appeared inappropiiate to groups excluded
from the animal kingdom.
The limits here given to the kingdom Protoctista were proposed by the present
(sponges) to a separate kingdom, which he called Protozoa.
lished
author (1938, 1947). They have been accepted, with exception in a single significant
and Rothmaler (1948).
point, by Barkley (1939, 1949)
It is
assumed that the evolutionary origin of the Protoctista consisted of the evoluall nuclei are essentially the same thing. Kofoid
tionary origin of the nucleus, and that
(1923) insisted that enduringly viable nuclei originate among protozoa, as among
and animals, regularly by mitosis, never by binary or multipe fragmentation,
nor by aggregation of stainable granules. He did not recognize the nucleus as essentially a device for sexual reproduction. Several considerable groups of protozoa, howplants
which Kofoid listed as not known to reproduce sexually, have been found to
do so. Here, then, it is maintained that all nuclei, in this kingdom as among plants
and animals, are the same thing; and that the nucleus is essentially a device for sexual
reproduction, that is, for processes of reproduction which involve always one act of
meiosis and one of karyogamy, and which produce Mendelian heredity as an effect.
Photosynthesis is believed to have evolved only cnce. As it occurs both among nonnucleate and nucleate organisms, the nucleus is believed to have evolved in organisms
living by this function. The closest approach between non-nucleate and nucleate organisms is believed to be between the blue-green algae and the primitive red algae
(Smith, 1933; Tilden, 1933). Thus it appears that the original nucleate organisms
were not capable of swimming by means of flagella. Flagella appear to have evolved
in unicellular nucleate photosynthetic organisms as a device for dissemination (Besever,
38
The
]
The
Classification of
Lower Organisms
organisms are not homologous with those of
much more complicated structure.
The origin of flagella was apparently associated with a simplification of the system
of photosynthetic pigments, by the loss of chromoproteins, leaving systems of chlorophylls and carotinoids. The association of these two courses of evolution may have
been merely coincidental; Tilden suggested the idea that the loss of chromoproteins
may have been occasioned by increasing illumination of the waters of the face of the
sey,
1905).
flagella of nucleate
bacteria; they are
much
larger
and
of
earth.
Organisms of the body type of
solitary
tinoid pigments but not chromoproteins,
walled
cells,
having chlorophylls and caro-
and producing
flagellate reproductive cells,
have undergone radiating evolution, producing a wide variety of types of
organisms, distinguished by different specific chlorophylls and carotinoids, different
types of flagella, and different specific metabolic products. The types of flagella occurring in nucleate organisms are here particularly to be noted.
appear
to
Loeffler (1889), in the original publication of the standard
method
of staining the
remarked that he had applied this method also to certain larger
found that the flagellum of Manas bears numerous lateral appendages,
flagella of bacteria,
organisms.
He
and that the
method
cilia
of a certain infusorian bear solitary terminal appendages. Loeffler's
is difficult,
and has not been much used. Fischer (1894) used it and coined
and Peitschengeisseln, designating structures of the respective
terms, Flimmergeisseln
types seen by Loeffler. Petersen (1929), having applied Loeffler's method to a reasonable variety of flagellates, introduced refinements of terminology. Flagella of the
type of the larger flagellum of Monas (the organism bears also a minute simple flagellum) became allseitswendige Flimynergeisseln; those of Euglena, which bear a single
file of appengages, became einseitswendige Flimmergeisseln.
Deflandre 1934) devised a different method for seeing the appendages on flagella,
and substituted, for the Teutonisms just quoted, French terms based on Greek. These
may be Anglicised as follows. ( 1 ) The acroneme flagellum bears a single terminal
appendage. The flagellum without appendages is said to be simple; so far as it appears among nucleate organisms, it appears to be a variant of the acroneme type.
(2) The pantoneme flagellum bears appendages on all sides. (3) The pantacroneme
flagellum bears both terminal and lateral appendages. It is a rarity, known only in
the collared monads, and may be supposed to be a variant of the pantoneme type.
(
The stichoneme flagellum bears a single file of appendages.
The point in which Barkley and Rothmaler take exception to
(4)
kingdom
the limits here given
kingdom the green algae. In
the present work, scant attention is given to organisms whose plastids are bright
green, containing chlorophylls a and b, carotin, and xanthophyll, and no other pigments; whose motile stages have acroneme flagella, more than one (usually two),
and equal; and which produce essentially pure cellulose, true starch, and sucrose.
These organisms represent the undoubted evolutionary origin of the higher plants;
a classification which attempts to represent nature includes them necessarily in the
to
Protoctista
is this,
that they include in this
plant kingdom.
Rothmaler
up a system of only four phyla, being the red organisms, basically
which are typically yellow to brown, having pantoneme flagella; those with acroneme flagella, including the green algae; and the euglcnid group,
which have stichoneme flagella. The non-pigmented Protoctista were distributed
among these groups. The system appears unsound by the fact that large blocks of
non-pigmented organisms are placed where only portions of them belong.
without
set
flagella; those
Kingdom
Protoctista
[
39
In the present work, a less symmetrical system of phyla is offered. Its basis is an
ingenuous system of red algae, brown algae, fungi, and the four traditional groups of
protozoa; this has been radically modified in view of the great accumulation of
knowledge subsequent to the formulation of these groups. The phylum Pyrrhophyta
as here limited is tentative; the phylum Protoplasta, marked only by negative characters, amounts to a dumping ground for groups whose relationships are altogether
obscure.
1.
Living by photosynthesis, which takes place
in plastids
containing red or blue chromo-
protein pigments; never producing flagellate
cells
1.
Phylum
1.
Rhodophyta.
Phylum
2.
Phaeophyta.
Phylum
3.
Pyrrhophyta.
Phylum
4.
Opisthokonta.
Phylum
5.
Inophyta.
Phylum
6.
Protoplasta.
Phylum
7.
Fungilli.
.Phylum
8.
Ciuophora.
Without chromoprotein pigments.
2.
photosynthesis,
living
by
brown, yellow, or green in color.
3. Producing flagellate cells each with
one pantoneme or pantacroneme
flagellum, often with additional
Typically
acroneme
flagella
Producing flagellate cells whose flagella are never pantoneme or pantacroneme, often stichoneme
Dependent; motile cells with acroneme
flagella or cilia, or amoeboid, or none.
3. Not producing cilia, i. e., structures
3.
2.
acroneme flagella,
numerous and widely distributed
on the surfaces of the cells.
of the nature of
walled in the vegetative
4. Cells
condition.
5.
Producing
motile
cells
with single posterior flagella; bodies mostly with
tapering rhizoids
5.
Producing no motile
cells;
bodies filamentous
not walled in the vegeta-
4. Cells
tive condition.
5.
Mostly predatory,
flagel-
amoeboid or with
flagellate or amoeboid stages
late or
5. Parasitic in
animals, pro-
ducing flagellate
cells
as rare exceptions
3.
With
cilia
only
.
V
PHYLUM RHODOPHYTA
Chapter
Phylum
1.
RHODOPHYTA
Wettstein
Order Floridees Lamouroux in Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris 20: 115 1813)
Florideae C. Agardh Synops. Alg. Scand. xiii (1817).
Order pLORroEAE C. Agardh Syst. Alg. xxxiii (1824).
Division (of order Algae) Rhodospermeae Harvey in Mackay Fl. Hibern. 160
(
(1836).
Heterocarpeae Kiitzing Phyc. Gen. 369 (1843).
J. Agardh Sp. Alg. 1: v (1848).
Rhodophyceae Ruprecht in Middendorff Sibirische Reise 1, Part 2: 200 (1851).
Stamm Florideae Haeckel Gen. Morph. 2: xxxiv (1866).
Phylum RHODOPHYTA Wettstein Handb. syst. Bot. 1: 182 (1901).
Division Rhodophyceae Engler Syllab. ed 3: 18 fl903).
Phylum Carpophyceae Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 291 (1907).
Phylum Rhodophycophyta Papenfuss in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 73: 218 (1946).
Definitely nucleate organisms {Porphyridium and Prasiola doubtfully so); with
few exceptions living by photosynthetic processes involving red and blue pigments
(phycocyanin and phycoerythrin) as well as green and yellow (chlorophylls a and d
and carotinoids); not producing true starch, and producing cellulose only in small
quantity, the cells walled chiefly with modified carbohydrates which tend to become
Class
Class Florideae
gelatinous; never producing flagellum-bearing cells, but sometimes producing cells
which move
in water without the use of definite organelles.
Tilden (1933) and Smith (1933) are authority for placing the red algae next to
the blue-green algae, thus suggesting the inference that they include the most primitive of nucleate organisms.
The resemblances between
blue-green and red
algae
are in the following points. Both groups possess, along with the chlorophylls and
carotinoids usual in photosynthetic organisms, other pigments, both blue and red. To
these pigments as found in both groups, the
same names, phycocyanin and phycoery-
however, the same chemical species (Kylin, 1930).
Neither group produces true starch; carbohydrate is stored as substances of the
general nature of dextrin or glycogen (occuring in the red algae as solid granules
called floridcan starch). Both groups produce cellulose only in scant quantities
thrin, are applied; they are not,
(Miwa, 1940; Kylin, 1943); the cell walls consist chiefly of materials, of the general
nature of carbohydrates, which tend to become gelatinous. They share the negative
character of never producing flagella, and the positive one of producing cells which
call move actively upon surfaces, without motor organelles, by a mechanism as yet
unknown (Roscnvinge, 1927).
The phylum is divisible into two
1.
classes:
Cells of
most examples each with one central
plastid,
without
protoplasmic
interconnec-
tions, in aggregates of indefinite extent or or-
ganized as filaments or thalli with intercalary
growth; zygotes producing spores directly by
division
Class
1.
Bangialea.
Phylum Rhodophyta
1.
with
Cells
protoplasmic
[41
interconnections,
containing except in the lowest examples several parietal plastids, organized as filaments
with apical growth, the filaments usually
massed
as thalloid bodies; zygotes giving rise
Class
to spores indirectly
Class
1.
BANGIALEA
2.
Heterocarpea.
(Engler) Wettstein
Algarum 4: 4 (1897).
Subclass Bangiales Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam.
Subclass Bangioideae de Toni Sylloge
I
Teil, Abt. 2
ix (1897).
Class Bangiales Wettstein
Handb. syst. Bot. 1: 187 (1901).
Class Bangioideae and orders Bangiales and Rhodochaetales Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 291 (1907).
Class Bangieae SchaflFner in
Ohio Naturalist
Protoflorideae Rosenvinge in
Mem.
9: 448 (1909).
Acad. Roy. Sci. Lett. Danemark,
ser.
7,
Sciences 7: 55 (1909).
Abtheilung (of Stamm Rhodophyta) Bangiineae Pascher in Beih. bot. Centralbl.
48, Abt. 2: 328 (1931).
Subclass Protoflorideae Smith Freshw. Algae 120 (1933).
Red algae (exceptionally green or of other colors), the cells with solitary central
plastids (exceptionally with multiple parietal plastids), lacking protoplasmic interconnections, in irregular colonial masses or forming filaments or thalli with intercalary
growth; the zygote produced in sexual reproduction dividing to produce spores
directly.
The group is of one order,
known species is about eighty.
five
families, about fifteen genera;
the
number
of
Order Bangiacea [Bangiaceae] Nageli 1847.
Characters of the class.
1. Cells forming irregular aggregates
1. Cells forming filaments or thalli.
2.
2.
Vegetative cells becoming spores without dividing
Vegetative cells undergoing division to
Family
1.
Porphyridiacea.
Family
2.
Rhodochaetacea.
produce spores.
Family 3. Porphyrea.
3. Organisms red, purplish, etc
Family 4. Schizogoniacea.
3. Organisms green
Family 5. Compsopogonacea.
2. Spores formed solitary in special cells
Family 1. Porphyridiacea [Porphyridiaceae] Kylin in Kungl. Fysiog. Sallsk.
Forhandl. 7, no. 10: 4 (1937). Order Porphyridiales Kylin 1. c. The only well known
species is Porphyridium cruentum (C. Agardh) Nageli (1849). It is widely distributed in damp climates, forming extensive red patches like blood on damp earth or
stone. The spherical cells are reported as varying widely in diameter (5-24^), and
Geitler (1932) and Kylin (1937) have distinguished additional species.
Porphyridium has been classified among blue-green, red, and green algae. Lewis
and Zirkle (1920) found in each cell a central red plastid, occupying most of its
volume, and having rays extending to the cell membrane. Within the plastid there is
The
42]
—
Classification of
Lower Organisms
x 1/2. b-g, Porphyra tenera after Ishikawa
produce sperms; d, sperms; e, fertilization;
i.e., cells produced by division of the zygote; g, stages of nuclear
division x 2,000.
h, i, Porphyra umbilicaris after Dangeard ( 1927); h, fertilization;
i, stages of nuclear division x 2,000.
All figures x 1,000 except as noted.
Fig. 5.
a,
Porphyra
(1921); b, cells;
f, "carpospores,"
c,
laciniata, thallus
cell
dividing to
Phylum Rhodophyta
L
43
a moderately large stainable granule; outside the plastid, a single additional granule
can usually be found. When a cell is to divide, the granules break up into considrable numljers of smaller ones, some of which become organized as a system of strands
forming an irregular network on the surface of the plastid. The protoplast, the
network, and the plastid undergo constriction; the processes by which the daughter
cells return to the original structure were not clearly seen. Interpretation of these
is difficult. It is possible that the granule outside of the plastid is a
nucleus of the type of those which have been observed in Bangia and Porphyra.
Family 2. Rhodochaetacea [Rhodochaetaceae] Schmitz in Engler and Prantl Nat.
Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. 2: 317 (1896). Family Goniotrichaceae Smith Freshw.
observations
Algae 121 (1933). Branching filaments, sometimes becoming multiseriate by lengthcells capable of escaping and functioning as spores.
Sexual reproduction unknown. Asterocystis, uncommon, in fresh water; the remaining genera marine, epiphytic on other algae. Goniotrichum. Rhodochaete and Goniotrichopsis, the cells with numerous plastids.
Family 3. Porphyrea [Porphyreae] Kutzing (1843). Family Porphyraceae Rabenhorst 1868. Family Bangiaceae (Nageli) Schmitz (in Engler and Prantl, 1896).
Filaments or thalli of a red or purple color; the cells, in producing spores, may release their protoplasts as wholes or may undergo division into many. Rosenvinge
wise division, the vegetative
(1927) observed the active motion of these spores.
The most important genus is Porphyra; the individuals are thalli up to several
centimeters in diameter, on rocks or other algae in ocean water along coasts. They
are called purple lavers, tsu'ai, amanori; they are used as food, for making soup or in
condiments, and are extensively cultivated in Japan (Tseng, 1944). Bangia is either
freshwater or marine; in structure it differs from Porphyra in having filementous
bodies, uniseriate or pluriseriate.
During nuclear division in Porphyra tenera as described by Ishikawa (1921), polar
appendages form at both ends of the nucleus, which becomes elongate and appears
to consist of three strands. The strands break transversely, and each set of three fuses
into a mass. Dangeard (1927), dealing with Porphyra umbilicaris and Bangia fuscopurpurea, observed nuclei 5^ in diameter, each consisting of a karyosome, that is, a
mass of chromatin, lying in a clear space surrounded by a membrane. In mitosis, the
membrane and the unstained matter disappear. Polar appendages grow out from the
karyosome, and their tips become cut off as granules which may be regarded as centrosomes. The remainder of the karysome becomes organized as two masses, evidently
chromosomes, connected to the centrosomes by fibers. Each chromosome divides into
two; the daughter chromosomes move to the centrosomes and fuse with them to form
karyosomes about which new membranes appear. This description represents a
defi-
nite, if primitive, process of mitosis.
Sexual reproduction, here where we first encounter it, involves differentiated gaNaked sperms, indistinguishable from spores, move to the surface of other
cells which function as eggs. A strand of protoplasm grows through the gelatinous
wall of the egg from the sperm to the egg protoplast, and the protoplast of the sperm
migrates through the passage thus formed. The zygote divides two or three times,
producing spores. During the first two divisions, the two masses of chromatin which
metes.
appear are somewhat different in appearance from the vegetative chromosomes
(Dangeard, op. cit.); it may be supposed that these masses are tetrads and diads, and
that the divisions are meiotic. Evidently, this
in
which
all cells
is
except the zygotes are haploid.
a
life
cycle of the primitive type,
44
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Family 4. Schizogoniacea [Schizogoniaceae] Chodat. Family Prasiolaceae West.
Family Blastosporaceae Wille. Filamemous or thallose algae, freshwater or marine,
of the structure of Porphyrea, but of a green color; sexual reproduction unknown.
Kylin (1930) found the pigmentation to be that of green algae rather than of red.
Copeland (1955) was unable to discern nuclei. The sole genus Prasiola {Schizogonium represents a stage of development) is of about fifteen species. Setchell and
Gardner (1920) and Ishikawa (1921) suggested the place in Bangiacea here given to
this
group.
Family
5.
Compsopogonacea [Compsopogonaceae] Schmitz
in Engler
and Prantl
Nat. Pflenzenfam. I Teil, Abt. 2: 318 (1896). Family Erythrotrichiaceae Smith
Freshw. Algae 122 (1933). Filaments, unbranched or branched, uniseriate or pluriseriate, or thalli. Spore-formation is accomplished by the division of a vegetative cell,
by an oblique wall, into two unequal cells; the protoplast of the smaller is released as
a spore. Rosenvinge observed the spores of Erythrotrichia cornea to
140[i per minute. Sexual reproduction
Erythrocladia.
Compsopogon,
is
much
as in
in fresh water, the cells
Class 2.
HETEROCARPEA
move
as far as
Porphyrea. Erythrotrichia.
with numerous parietal plastids.
Kutzing
Heterocarpeae Kiitzing Phyc. Gen. 369 (1843).
v ( 1848).
J. Agardh Sp. Alg. 1
Subclass Florideae Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam.
Class
Class Florideae (C. Agardh)
:
I Teil,
Abt. 2:
ix
(1897).
Subclass Euflorideae de Toni Sylloge
Algarum
4: 4 (1897).
Abtheilung (of Stamm Rhodophyta) Floridineae Pascher in Beih. bot. Centralbl.
48, Abt." 2: 328 (1931).
As this is the type group of phylum Rhodophyta, most of the synonymy of that
name applies to this one also.
Red algae whose bodies consist essentially of filaments growing apically, the cells
with protoplasmic interconnections, the plastids (except in some of the lowest examples) of the form of multiple parietal disks; the filaments commonly compacted
into cylindrical or thallose bodies; zygotes not dividing to
form spores
directly, pro-
ducing spores by budding or indirectly by processes of growth of various degrees of
complexity.
In undertaking to describe the varied, and often highly complicated, reproductive
processes of the typical red algae, one notes that these organisms occur as haploid
individuals, and that the majority occur as distinct male and female haploid individ-
Sperms (commonly called spermatia) are minute naked protoplasts released
from small cells commonly occurring in patches on the surfaces of thalli. The egg
is called a carpogonium (Schmitz, 1883). It is the terminal cell of a specialized filament, the carpogonial filament, and bears a filiform terminal extension, the trichogyne (Bornet and Thuret, 1867), whose function is to receive the sperms. The
cell, often diflferentiatcd, from which the carpogonial filament grows, is the support-
uals.
ing cell [Trugzelle).
In the more primitive members of the
mass of
cells called the cystocarp.
as spores called carpospores.
the original ones.
first
The
The
the zygote gives rise by budding to a
cystocarp release their protoplasts
These on germination produce haploid individuals
zygote nucleus
divisions arc meiotic.
class,
cells of the
is
the only diploid nucleus in the
like
life cycle; its
Phylum Rhodophyta
[45
In more advanced examples, the first step of development after fertilization conof the establishment of protoplasmic contact between the zygote and other cells.
These may be adjacent cells, reached directly, or distant cells, reached by the outgrowth of connecting filaments from the zygotes. In the generality of the group, the
cells with which contact is made give rise to cystocarps producing carpospores; in
this situation, the cells in question are called auxiliary cells. In some examples, the
connecting filaments, after making contact with cells called nurse cells, themselves
give rise to the cystocarps. The carpospores, in all of these more advanced examples,
sists
The
give rise to diploid individuals.
diploid individuals are of the
same vegetative
'ymW''^- :^^>^^
^^y
i^
•«!»
—Nuclear phenomena
Fig. 6
a, b, c.
Stages of mitosis,
in Polysiphonia violacea after
d, e. Stages of
homeotypic
Yamanouchi (1906).
division.
structure as the haploid individuals, but do not produce spermatia, carpogonia, or
cystocarps. Certain cells,
sets of four spores
commonly
scattered
which are accordingly called
and imbedded
in the body,
produce
tetraspores; these give rise to haploid
individuals.
This account means that these algae occur typically in somata of four types: male
and female haploid individuals; cystocarps, being a preliminary, parasitic, multiplicative phase of the diploid stage (Janet named this stage the carposporophyte; Drew,
1954); and free-living diploid individuals, reproducing by tetraspores. The production of carpospores and tetraspores by different individuals of identical vegetative
structure explains the oldest name applied to this class, namely Heterocarpea.
Understanding of the life cycle of typical Heterocarpea has been reached only by
labor and after a certain amount of confusion. The first significant observations
were by Bornet and Thuret (1867). Schmitz (1883) showed that the zygote makes
much
protoplasmic contact with other cells. He supposed that the contact of the zygote
with an auxiliary cell is a second sexual fusion {Copulation) following upon proper
46
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Oltmanns (1898) disproved this: he showed that the nuclei of auxiliary
and that the nuclei of carpospores are derived entirely from zygote
nuclei. Yamanouchi (1906) showed that the chromosome number of carposporic
individuals of Polysiphonia violacea is 10, and that that of tetrasporic individuals is
20; and reported much more of the cytology. Centrosomes appear de novo during the
earlier stages of mitosis, and fade out and disappear during the later stages. The
mitotic spindle is formed, and the chromosomes take their place upon it, within an
intact nuclear membrane, which fades out in later stages. In meiosis, which produces
the nuclei of tetraspores, the tetrads and diads divide within the original nuclear
membrane, which becomes tetrahedrally lobcd, and then disappears except where
the haploid groups of chromosomes lie against it, with the result that the membranes
of the tetraspore nuclei are partly old and partly new.
There are some 2500 species of Heterocarpea, including comparatively few in
fresh water, but the majority of the marine algae. Many of them are beautiful; their
variety and beauty contribute to the pleasure which people find on coasts. Experfertilization.
cells are inert,
ienced naturalists can identify
many genera by
gross structure, but the systems of
orders and families based on gross structure, such as those of Kiitzing (1843) and
J.
Agardh (1851-1863), have been found artificial and abandoned. A proper respect
for the principles of nomenclature makes it necessary, however, to apply many of the
names used in these systems. Schmitz applied his morphological studies to a classificaEngler ( 1897) made these groups
( 1889)
Subsequent scholars have found this system sound in principle, but
necessary, on the basis of studies of additional examples (for example,
tion of the typical red algae as four groups
;
definitely orders.
have found it
by Kylin, 1923,
1924, 1925,
1928,
1932; Papenfuss,
1930,
number
The
lished
currently recognized to
following key to the orders
six.
is
a rather considerable modification of those pub-
by Kylin (1932) and Smith (1944).
l.All
free-living
individuals
haploid;
tetra-
spores not produced, or produced as carpospores.
1.
1926;
least four orders
have been proposed but reductions have decreased
in addition to those of Engler
the
1944; Sjostedt,
and genera. At
Svedelius, 1942) radically to rearrange the families
.
Order
1.
Cryptospermea.
Order
2.
Sphaerococcoidea.
Order
3.
Gelidialea.
Order
4.
Furcellariea.
Order
5.
Coeloblastea.
Free-living individuals of two types, the one
producing gametes (the zygotes giving rise
to carpospores), the other producing tetraspores.
2.
Without specialized auxiliary
nurse
cells,
cells
or
the lower cells of the carpo-
gonial filaments, or normal vegetative
serving as auxiliary cells
cells,
2.
With
specialized nurse cells, the carpo-
spores produced from filaments which
have made contact with these
2.
With
which
3.
specialized
auxiliary
cells
from
the carpogonia develop.
The
auxiliary cells being intercalary
cells in specialized filaments
homol-
ogous with the carpogonial filaments.
3.
The
auxiliary cells terminal in
.
.
.
fila-
ments which grow from the supporting cells of
ments before
the
carpogonial
fertilization
fila-
Phylum Rhodophyta
3.
The
[
47
auxiliary cells originating after
fertilization as
porting
cells
branches of the supthe carpogonial
of
Order
filaments
6.
FLORroEA.
Order 1. Cryptospermea [Cryptospermeae] Kiitzing Phyc. Gen. 321 (1843).
Order Periblasteae Kutzing op. cit. 387, in part.
Orders
elmint hoc lade ae J. Agardh Sp. Alg. 2: 410 (1851), Chaetangieae op.
cit. 456 (1851), and Wrangelieae op. cit. 701 (1863).
Order Batrachospermaceae'R.ahtnhovstKxy^X.og.-Yl.^dichstn 1: 278 (1863).
Nemalioninae Schmitz in Flora 72: 438 (1889).
Order Nemalionales Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt.
H
2: ix (1897).
Heterocarpea normally without diploid bodies, the carpogonium arising from the
zygote or from an adjacent cell serving as an auxiliary cell, the carpospores producing haploid bodies like the original ones. Certain genera which are exceptional to
these characters are noted below. Batrachospermum may be regarded as the standard
genus.
In
all
recent literature, this order
The forms
is
mere
called Nemalionales. Eight families are rec-
Rhodochorton, and
(Family Chantransiaceae Auctt., but Chantransia DC. as originally published included no members of
this family; Papenfuss, 1945). In the remainder of the order, the filaments are
differentiated, or, with or without differentiation, organized as bodies of definite
form, simply cylindrical, branched, or flattened. Fresh-water examples (the only
fresh-water Heterocarpea) include Batrachospermum, Lemanea, and Thorea. These
organisms are not red, but bluish, green, or brown. Marine examples include Nemalion
and Cumagloia.
ognized.
others,
consisting of
filaments, Acrochaetium,
are family Acrochaetiacea [Acrochaetiaceae] Fritsch
In Liagora tetrasporifera and certain other species tetraspores are produced in the
place of carpospores. Within this genus, then, there has been a change in the time of
meiosis (which could be established, presumably, by a single mutation) from im-
mediately after fertilization to the end of the cystocarp stage.
Galaxaura is a genus of tropical marine algae which are calcified, which is to say
that they deposit much calcium carbonate in the tissues; they were originally classified as corals.
They have
certained their
and tetrasporic stages. Svedelius (1942) asCarpospore-bearing filaments arise both from the zygote
distinct sexual
life cycle.
and from other cells, previously undifferentiated, which serve as auxiliary cells. The
genus has the structure of the present order, and is to be placed here, in spite of exhibiting in unspecialized
form the
life
cycle of the following orders.
Order 2. Sphaerococcoidea [Sphaeroccoideae] J. Agardh Sp. Alg. 2: 577 (1852).
Family Gigartineae Kiitzing (1843).
Orders Gigartineae and Chaetangieae J. Agardh op. cit. 229, 456 (1851).
Gigartininae Schmitz in Flora 72: 440 (1889).
Order Gigartinales Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt.
2: X (1897).
Order Nemastomatales Kylin in Kgl. Fysiog. Sallsk. Handl. n. f. 36, no. 9 39
:
(1925).
Order Sphaerococcales Sjostedt in Kgl. Fysiog. Sallsk. Handl. n.
75 (1926).
f.
37, no. 4:
48]
The
Classification of
Lower Organisms
(Legend on bottom
of
page 49)
Phylum Rhodophyta
This order, in
one.
The
all
recent literature called Gigartinales,
bodies are generally erect; they
may be
[
is
a
49
numerous and varied
unbranched
cylindrical or flattened,
some examples, Haliarachnion, Rhodophyllis, Sebdenia, the zygote
sends out extensive filaments, which make contact with unspecialized cells scattered
in the body. In other examples, the zygote makes contact with a lower cell of the
or branched. In
cells with which contact is made are auxiliary
produce carpospores, and the carpospores produce tetrasporic individuals. Certain species of Phyllophora, Gymnogongrus, and
Ahnfeldtia are exceptional in producing tetraspores in the place of carpospores; these
species have no free-Uving tetrasporic generation. In these organisms, as contrasted
with Liagora tetrasporifera, it is believed that this type of Ufe cycle has been established by reduction of a longer one.
Kylin (1932) assigned twenty families to this order. Gracilaria is a minor source
of agar agar. Gigartina mammilosa and Chondrus crispus (Irish moss or carageen)
are well known as yielding a jelly, carageenin, resembling but distinct from agar agar
carpogonial filament. In either case, the
cells
and give
rise to cystocarps; these
(Tseng, 1945).
Various abnormal growths on red algae have been found to be parasitic red algae,
almost always on hosts closely related to themselves (Setchell, 1914). To the present
order belong Gardneriella and its host Agardhiella; Plocamiocolax and its host Plocamium; Gracilariophila and its host Gracilaria (Wilson, 1910).
Order
3.
Gelidialea [Gelidiales] Kylin in Kgl. Svensk. Vetensk.-Akad. Handl.
132 (1923).
63, no. 11:
Family Gelidieae Kiitzing (1843).
Order Gelidieae J. Agardh Sp. Alg. 2: 464 (1851).
Heterocarpea in which the zygote sends out a single elongate filament which makes
contact successively with several chains of nurse cells and gives rise to carpospores;
bodies consisting of branched filaments, the ultimate tips of the lateral branches
compacted into a firm layer covering a branching body, cylindrical or flattened; the
surface adjacent to the masses of carpospores pushed out and punctured by pores
through which the spores escape.
There is a single family Gelidiea [Gelidieae] Kiitzing ( Family Gelidiaceae Schmitz
and Hauptfleisch). Such economic importance as the red algae possess lies chiefly in
—
Fig. 7
b, c, d^ production of sperms;
a, Thallus of Nemalion multifidum x 1.
beginning of production of carpospores; and cluster of carpospores of Nemalion
multifidum after Bornet and Thuret (1867). e, Thallus of Chondrus crispus x 1.
{, Reproduction of Dudresnaya purpurifera (order Furcellariea or Cryptonemiales)
after Bornet and Thuret, op. cit.
The trichogyne, whose free end with attached
sperms is seen above, is irregularly twisted below; it leads to the egg (carpogonium);
connecting filaments, growing from cells below the egg, make contact with auxiliary
cells at the
summits
of specialized filaments; each auxiliary cell gives rise to a cluster
Thallus of Delesseria sinuosa x 1. h^ Longitudinal section of
conceptacle of Polysiphonia nigrescens x 500, after KyUn (1923). The zygote z is
the fourth and terminal cell of the carpogonial filament whose connection with the
supporting cell b is not shown; the auxiliary cell a has grown from the supporting
of carpospores.
g,
cell after fertilization.
50
The
]
this family,
This
Classification of
and particularly
Lower Organisms
in the genus Gelidium. It
is
the chief source of agar agar.
the principal material of the cell walls of Gelidium. It
is
essentially of chains of galactose units,
is
a jelly consisting
and has the property, that having been melted
by heat, it does not again become solid until cooled to a much lower temperature.
Algae containing it have long been used as foods in the orient. Brought into laboratory use by Koch, it has become a necessity in routine bacteriological work. The chief
source
is Japan.
Kylin construed
this
order as relatively primitive; but
involving specialized nurse
cells,
appear
less
its
reproductive processes,
primitive than those of the Sphaerococ-
The production of elongate connecting filaments is shared with certain
examples both of the preceding order and of the following, and the Gelidialea are
probably derived by specialization from one or the other.
coidea.
4. Furcellariea [Furcellarieae] Greville Alg. Brit. 66 (1830).
Orders Spongocarpeae and Gastrocarpcae Greville op. cit. 68, 157 (1830).
Order Epiblasteae Kiitzing Phyc. Gen. 382 (1843).
Orders Cryptonemeae, Dumontieae, Squamarieae, and Corallineae J. Agardh Sp.
Alg. 2: 'l55, 346, 385 (1851), 506 (1852).
Cryptoneminae Schmitz in Flora 72: 452 (1889).
Order Cryptonemiales Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil,
Order
Abt. 2: xi (1897).
individuals are crustose or thallose, the thalli cylindrical or flattened, unbranched or branched. On the two or three types of individuals of each species, the
The
reproductive structures
may be
scattered or clustered
on the surfaces or gathered
in
specialized pits called conceptacles.
The
cialized filaments; other filaments,
homologous with these but abortive, bear the
eggs are as usual the terminal cells of spe-
auxiliary cells. After fertilization, the zygote
with a lower
cell of the
same
filaments.
may
Under
or
may
not establish connection
either circumstance,
it
sends out
fila-
ments which establish connection with the auxiliary cells, and these send out filaments
which bear the carpospores. In less specialized examples, the filaments growing from
the zygote may extend widely through the body; a single one, branching, may reach
many
auxiliary cells.
( 1932) placed nine families here.
family Corallinea [Corallineae] Kiitzing (family Corallinaceae Hauck) is one
of the more specialized. The eggs, and subsequently the carpospores, are clustered in
conceptacles. In each conceptacle the zygotes, the filaments from them, and the
Kylin
The
whose margrow the filaments which bear the carpospores. Members of this family have the
property of accumulating and depositing calcareous material, and were originally
classified as corals. In modern usage, the term coral means certain lower animals;
but the coralline algae are associated with them in coral reefs, being indeed, according to Setchell (1926) and other authorities, responsible for the building of the reefs.
Fossil coralline algae are known from the Ordovician.
The parasite Callocolax and its host CallophylUs belong to this order; Coreocolax,
auxiliary cells, unite eventually in a single large multinucleate cell from
gins
belonging to
The
this order, attacks species of
order Floridea.
numerous group, rather unspecialized, varied almost to the
extent of a miscellany. They are related to the Sphaerococcoidea, and are believed
to represent the ancestry of the two following orders, and possibly also of the
Furcellariea are a
Gelidialea.
Phylum Rho do phyta
[51
Order 5. Coeloblastea [Coeloblasteae] Kutzing Phyc. Gen. 438 (1843).
Order Rhodymenieae J. Agardh Sp. Alg. 2: 337 (1851).
Rhodymeninae Schmitz in Flora 72: 442 (1889).
Order Rhodymeniales Engler in Engler and Prantl. Nat. Pfllanzenfam.
I Teil,
Abt. 2: X (1897).
Heterocarpea producing auxiliary cells terminally on brief filaments which grow
from the supporting cells of the carpogonial filaments before fertilization; cystocarps
enclosed in cup- or vase-like pericarps; the thalli (cylindrical or flattened, branched
or unbranched) usually hollow. Champia may be regarded as the standard genus.
In various red algae, the germinating carpospore or tetraspore gives rise to a globe
of cells which grows to produce the thallus (Kylin, 1917). In the present group the
sporeling is particularly blastula-like. Its upper layer of cells becomes a ring of apical
cells, of definite number, distinguishing the group from others which grow by apical
cells either of a single filament or of a fascicle of indefinite number. The apical cells
are indeed homologous with the apical cells of filaments, but the cells derived from
them are arranged in a three-dimensional pattern as in the tissues of higher organisms;
it is
only in the reproductive structures that the filamentous structure remains evident.
The
order thus limited by Kylin (1932) is a specialized group including only the
two families Rhodymeniacea [Rhodymeniaceae] Hauck and Champiea [Champieae]
Kiitzing. The latter family is the more specialized; the hollow thalli are partitioned
by transverse septa and the supporting cells produce usually just two auxiliary cells.
In many examples of this family, after fertilization and the fusion of the zygote with
the auxiliary cells, the latter proceed to unite with further neighboring cells to produce a massive coenocyte from which the brief carpospore-bearing filaments arise.
The resulting structure is deceptively similar to that which occurs in the Corallinea.
The parasite Faucheocolax and its host Fauchea belong to this order.
Order 6. Floridea [Florideae] C. Agardh Syst. Alg. xxxiii (1824).
Order Floridees Lamouroux in Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris 20: 115 (1813).
Section Florideae C. Agardh Synops. Alg. Scand. xiii (1817).
Orders Trichoblasteae, Axonoblasteae, and Platynoblasteae Kiitzing Phyc. Gen.
370,413,442 (1843).
Orders Ceramieae, Spyridicae, Chondrieae, and Rhodomeleae J. Agardh Sp.
Alg. vol. 2 (1851-1863).
Ceramiales Oltmanns Morph. u. Biol. Alg. 1: 683 (1904).
Order Ceramiales Kylin in Kgl. Svensk. Vetensk.-Akad. Handl. 63, no.
11
:
132
(1923).
The
Lamouroux included the whole group of red algae organized as
Chondriis Stackhouse and the new genera Claudea, Delesseria, and
Gelidium. Lamouroux listed first Claudea and Delesseria, belonging to the present
order, to which the name is accordingly applied.
This order is characterized by specialized strict patterns in the development of the
feniale reproductive structures. The carpogonial filament is always of four cells. The
supporting cell initiates, in definite patterns, brief additional filaments. After fertiliFloridees of
four genera,
one more cell adjacent to the zygote, and this becomes the auxiliary cell. The spore-bearing structures developed from it are naked
in the more primitive examples; in most, they are protected by pericarps, which, in
some examples, begin to develop before fertilization.
There are four families, all numerous in species: Ceramiea (Harvey) Kutzing,
zation, the supporting cell cuts off
52
]
The
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Dasyea Kiitzirxg, Delesseriea Kutzing, and Polysiphoniea Kiitzing [Rhodomelaceae
Hauck). The Ceramiea are mostly filaments, uniseriate or becoming pluriseriate by
lengthwise divisions. In
though consisting
many members
of the other families the bodies are thallose,
essentially of filaments
produced
in
definite patterns.
In
many
Delesseriea the branches of the thalli simulate leaves of higher plants.
Gonimophyllum is parasitic on Botryoglossum; both are Delesseriea. Various
species of Janczewskia, a genus of Polysiphoniea, attack Laurencia, Chondria, and
other members of the same family. This was the first genus of parasitic red algae to
be recognized as such, by Solms-Laubach (1877).
Such are the red algae. The Bangialea appear to represent the transition between
the organisms which lack nuclei and the generality of nucleate organisms. The
Heterocarpea appear to be a specialized offshoot, leading to no other group.
Chapter VI
PHYLUM PHAEOPHYTA
Phylum
2.
PHAEOPHYTA
Wettstein
FucoroEAE C. Agardh Synops Alg. Scand. ix (1817).
Orders Diatomeae and Fucoideae C. Agardh Syst. Alg. xii, xxxv (1824).
Stamme Diatomea and Fucoideae Haeckel Gen. Morph. 2: xxv, xxxv (1866).
Stamme Zygophyta in part and Phaeophyta Wettstein Handb. syst. Bot. 1: 71,
171 (1901).
Divisions Zygophyceae in part and Phaeophyceae Engler Syllab. ed. 3:
8,
15
(1903).
Chysophyta, with subordinate groups Chrysophyceae, Bacillariales, and Heterokontae, Pascher in Ber. deutschen bot. Gess. 32: 158 (1914).
Stamm Chrysophyta Pascher in Siisswasserfl. Deutschland 11: 17 (1925).
Phyla Chrysophycophyta and Phaeophycophyta Papenfuss in Bull. Torrey Bot.
Club 73: 218 (1946).
Organisms typically living by photosynthesis, without chromoprotein pigments,
the plastids containing chlorophylls a and c, carotin, and various xanthophylls. Lutein
(the xanthophyll of typical plants) may be present but is usually exceeded in quantity
by flavoxanthin, violoxanthin, isofucoxanthin, or fucoxanthin, particularly the last.
The xanthophylls occur usually in quantity sufficient to give the organisms a yellow
or brown color. True starch is not produced. Many examples contain granules of a
white solid called leucosin, presumably a carbohydrate, which does not give a blue
color with iodine. The cells are usually enclosed in walls consisting of cellulose together with larger quantities of other carbohydrates or oxidized or esterized carbo-
hydrates. Silica or calcium carbonate
may be
deposited.
Methanol
extracts of the
contain fucosterol, a sterol distinct from the sitosterol of typical plants. Flagellate cells are usually produced; these bear one pantoneme or pantacroneme flagellum,
and usually, in addition, one acroneme or simple flagellum. Exceptional examples,
cells
non-pigmented or without
flagellate stages, are rather
ard genus of the phylum
Fucus L.
The chemical
numerous. The obvious stand-
characters are stated on the authority chiefly of Carter, Heilbron,
and Lythgoe (1939),
lation, positively
is
Miwa
known
(1940), and Tseng (1945). The character of the flagelfew examples, is stated by authority of Petersen
of rather
(1929), Vlk (1931, 1939), Couch (1938, 1941), Longest [1946), Manton (1952),
and Ferris (1954).
These characters bind together an assemblage of organisms which is in some respects original herel. Engler (1897), West (1904), and Smith (1918, 1920) included
the chrysomonad flagellates in the group of brown algae. Pascher (1914) combined
as or!e group the chrysomonads, the diatoms, and the exceptional green algae called
Heierokontae. Later (1927, 1930), he included also the colorless flagellates of family
Moiiadina. He did not associate this group with the brown algae, and subsequent
authors have in general followed him. Kylin ( 1933 ) however, considered the diatoms
to be the closest allies of the brown algae, both groups being descended from the
brown flagellates. Almost certainly, he was correct. Couch showed that the paired
unlike flagella of the typical Oomycetes are respectively pantoneme and acroneme,
,
iManton (1952) recognized
this
group, but omitted nomenclatural formalities.
—
The
54]
Classification of
Ochromonadalea:
Fig. 8.
colony; b, zoospores.
C-f,
a, b,
Lower Organisms
Chrysocapsa paludosa after West (1904);
Phaeocystis globosa after ScherlTel (1900);
c,
a,
a
a colony
X 50; d, a cell with two plastids, a mass of leucosin forming on a mound of protoplasm projecting into the central vacuole; e, production of zoospores; f, a zoospore.
i, Cell of
g, h. Cell and statospore of Ochromonas granularis after Doflein (1922).
k, A very
Monas sp. j. Two cells of Brehmiella Chrysohydra after Pascher ( 1928)
young colony of Dendromonas virgaria after Stein (1878). 1, Colony of Ccphalo.
m. Cells of Epipyxis utriculus
after Stein, op. cit.
Colony of Synura Uvella. x 1,000 except as noted.
thamnium Cyclopum
op.
cit.
n.
after Stein,
Phylum Phaeophyta
and distinguished these fungi from practically
all
[
55
others by the presence of cellulose
in their walls.
The phylum
1.
thus assembled may be organized as four
Miscellaneous groups, mostly small and relaatively unspecialized, of varied
body type; not
of the characters of the following groups
1.
Comparatively
numerous
classes.
and
Class
1.
Heterokonta.
Class
2.
Bacillariacea.
Class
3.
Oomycetes.
Melanophycea.
specialized
groups.
2.
Unicellular brown organisms with shells
of silica consisting of two parts
2.
Organisms of fungal or chytrid body
types producing swimming spores with
paired unlike
2.
fiagella
Filamentous and thallose brown algae
Class
1
.
Class 4.
HETEROKONTA
Luther
Class Flagellata or Mastigophora Auctt., in part.
Class
Heterokontae Luther
3, no. 13:
in
Bihang Svensk. Vetensk.-Akad. Handl.
24, part
19 (1899).
Subclass Chrysomonadineae Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam.
I Teil,
Abt. la: iv (1900).
Class Silicoflagellatae (Borgert)
Lemmermann in Ber. deutschen bot. Gess. 19:
254 (1901).
Phylum Siphonophyceae and class Vaucherioideae Bessey in Univ. Nebraska
Studies?: 285, 286 (1907).
Chrysophyceae and Heterokontae Pascher in Ber. deutschen bot. Gess. 32: 158
(1914).
classes Chrysomonadineae , RhizoChrysosphaerineae, Chrysotrichineae, Heterochloridineae, Rhizochloridineae, Heterocapsineae, Heterococcineae, Heterotrichineae, and Heterosiphoneae Pascher in Beih. bot. Centralbl. 42, Abt. 2:
Divisions Chrysophyceae
chrysidineae,
and Heterokontae, and
Chrysocapsineae,
323,324 (1931).
Classes Ebriaceae, Silico flagellata, and Coccolithophoridae Deflandre, and Chrys-
omonarfina Hollande in Grasse Traite Zool. 1, fasc. 1: 407,425,438, 471 (1952).
Class Phytomastigophorea Hall Protozoology 117 (1953), in part.
Phaeophyta which lack the distinctive characters of the remaining three classes.
Luther named the group on the occasion of
genus may be regarded as the type.
The chrysomonad
his discovery of Chlorosaccus,
flagellates are the core of this class
the five orders into which
it is
and
of the
first
and
this
two among
divided. In the classification of these two orders, three
novelties will be noted.
(a) Pascher (1913)
made
of the
chrysomonad
flagellates three orders character-
unequal flageila, paired equal flagella, and solitary
fiagella. Petersen (1929) found that the supposedly equal fiagella of Synura are
actually unlike, being respectively pantoneme and acroneme. Here, accordingly,
Pascher's first two orders are combined.
(b) Pascher made separate classes or orders of groups related to the chrysomonad
flagellates but of distinct body type, as palmelloid, chlorococcoid, filamentous, or
ized respectively by paired
—
The
56]
Fig. 9.
Classification of
Ochromonadalea
Conrad (1926).
h,
:
a,
Lower Organisms
Mallomonas
roseola, based
Syracosphaera Quadricornu;
c,
on Stein (1878) and
Calyptosphaera
insignis; d, Cal-
Colony and zoospore
g, Part of the thallose growth of Hydrurus
h, Cell, and i, j, statosporos of Chromulina Pascheri after Hofeneder
foetidus.
(1913). k, 1, Skeletons of Dictyocha Fibula and Distephanus Speculum from diatomaceous earth at Lompoc, California, m, Rhizochrysis Scherffeli after Doflein
ciconus vitreus; after Schiller (1925).
of Epichrysis after Pascher (1925).
(1916).
Mix
1,000.
Silicoflagei.lata:
e, f,
Phylum Phaeophyta
[57
amoeboid. By Pascher's own principle of the repeated evolution of body types,
these groups are surely artificial. Here most of them are broken up and their members distributed between the two chrysomonad orders according to whether the
flagella of their motile stages are paired or single. It is not possible to divide by this
character ameboid forms not known to produce flagellate stages; these are lumped
in the second order.
fc)
Since flagella appear to have evolved as a device for the dissemination of
pigmented organisms, examples whose vegetative state is that of clusters
unicellular
of non-motile cells are placed in each order before those which are flagellate in
the vegetative condition.
The two chrysomonad orders are particularly characterized by production of
They are further characterized by production of resting cells of a type
leucosin.
called statospores. This occurs by the deposition within the protoplast of a globular
impregnated with silica, punctured by a single pore, and often marked on the
outer surface by warts, spines, or ridges, of definite pattern. The external protoplasm
migrates through the pore to the interior of the shell, and the pore is then closed
by deposition of a silicified plug.
shell
The group which
typical Heterokonta.
is
treated as the third order of the present class includes the
Compared with
impression of a markedly distinct
typical green algae, these organisms give the
placed next to the chrysomonads, they
appear scarcely entitled to this rank. Their name is the oldest applicable to the
present class, and is accordingly so applied. If it appear expedient to maintain the
typical Heterokonta as a distinct class, the remainder of the present one will be
called Chrysomonadinea [Chrysomonadineae] (Engler) Pascher.
Of including the choanoflagellates and anisochytrids in the present class as additional orders, one may say that it is not contrary to current knowledge.
1. Mostly pigmented; non-pigmented examples
mostly producing motile cells with two
class;
fiagella.
2.
Brown or
3.
colorless.
Producing
motile
cells
flagella (exceptionally
3.
Producing
motile
cells
flagellum; or without
late
with two
Order
more)
with
known
2.
1.
Ochromonadalea.
flagel-
stages
Green
Non-pigmented, producing motile
1.
one
cells
Order
Order
2.
Silicoflagellata.
3.
Vaucheriacea.
Order
4.
Choanoflagellata.
Order
5.
Hyphochytrialea.
with
one flagellum.
2.
Predatory,
flagellate
in
the vegetative
condition, each cell bearing a collar-like
protoplasmic ridge
2.
Parasitic or saprophytic, the vegetative
cells
Order
1.
non-motile, walled
Ochromonadalea [Ochromonadales] Pascher
Siisswasserfl.
Deutschland
2: 10,51 (1913).
Suborder Monadina Biitschli in Bronn KI. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1 810 (1884).
Order Isochrysidales Pascher op. cit. 10, 42.
Order Syracosphaerinae Schiller in Arch. Prot. 51: 108 (1925).
:
The
58]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Orders Heliolithae and Orthlithinae Deflandre in Grasse Traite Zool. 1, fasc.
1: 452, 457 (1952).
Brown or colorless Heterokonta, the swimming cells of typical examples with
two flagella which are respectively pantoneme and acroneme. In the exceptional
family Trimastigida there are a pair of equal flagella and a third flagellum shorter
or longer than these; the detailed structure of the flagella of this family is unknown.
Cells of pigmented types contain usually one or two lateral band-shaped plastids.
Details of nuclear division are
known
chiefly
by the observations of Doflein (1918,
1922) on Ochromonas. The flagella spring from a granule which may be identified as
a blepharoplast, near which lies the nucleus. The blepharoplast is connected through
two stainable strands (rhizoplasts) to two granules, recognizable as centrosomes, on
the two sides of the nucleus.
with
The
spindle forms within the intact nuclear
The chromosome number appears
membrane
be about 4.
The nuclear membrane presently disappears. At metaphase, the rhizoplasts are found
to lead to separate blepharoplasts, each bearing two flagella. Sexual processes are
scarcely known in this group. Schiller (1926) observed in Dinobryon the division of
its
poles at the centrosomes.
to
two which are released to swim and conjugate in pairs.
This order is believed to represent the direct ancestry of the two following, and
calls into
brown
Not filamentous.
also of the typical
1.
2.
algae.
Flagellate stages with a pair of equal
and a third which
flagella
is
shorter or
longer
2.
Flagellate
two
with
stages
Family
1.
Trimastigida.
Family
2.
Chrysocapsacea.
Family
3.
Monadina.
Family
Family
4.
Syncryptida.
Dinobryina.
unequal
flagella.
3.
Without calcareous structures
at-
tached to the cell walls.
4. Cells not enclosed in loricae,
i.
e.,
5.
open
Not
shells.
flagellate in the vege-
tative condition
5.
Flagellate
in
the vegeta-
forming
free-swimming circular or
tive condition, not
globular colonies
5.
Free-swimming circular or
globular colonies
4.
3.
Cells enclosed in loricae
With
calcareous
structures
5.
at-
Family 6. Hymenomonadacea.
tached to the cell walls
Family 7. Phaeothamnionacea.
1. Filamentous
Family 1. Trimastigida [Trimastigidae] Kent Man. Inf. 1: 307 (1880). Family
Trimastigaceae Senn in Engler and Prantl. Nat. Pflanzcnfam. I Teil, .\bt. la: 141
(1900). Family Prymncsiidae Hall Protozoology 127 (1953). Organisms producing
swimming
cells with a pair of equal flagella and a third flagellum longer or shorter
than these. With a vegetative stage as globular non-motile colonies as large as pinheads, of pigmented cells; marine: Phacocystis. Motile solitary cells, pigmented:
Prymncsium, Chrysochromidina; Platychrysis with an amoeboid stage. Motile
solitary cells, not pigmented: Dallingeria, Trimastix, Macromastix.
Phylum Phaeophyta
Family
2.
Chrysocapsacea [Chrysocapsaceae] Pascher
[
in Siisswasserfl.
59
Deutschland
85 (1913). Family Chrysocapsidae Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 156 (1913). Nonmotile cells with brown plastids (usually two), imbedded in gelatinous matter and
2:
forming colonial aggregates, the protoplasts sometimes escaping as zoospores with
two flagella. Chrysocapsa Pascher, in fresh water, the colonies few-celled. Phaeosphaera West and West, the colonies more extensive.
Family 3. Monadina Ehrenberg Infusionsthierrhen 1 (1838). Family Monades
Goldfuss ( 1818), the mere plural of a generic name. Family Dendromonadina Stein
Org. Inf. 3, I Halfte: x (1878). Family Monadidae Kent (1880). Family Heteromonadina Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1: 815 (1884). Family Chrysomonadaceae Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. 2: 570
(1897), not family Chrysomonadina Stein. Family Ochromonadaceae Senn in
Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. la: 163 (1900). Family Ochromonadidae Doflein. Pigmented or colorless Ochromonadalea, flagellate in the
vegetative condition, not forming circular or globular free-swimming colonies, nor
loricate, nor bearing calcareous structures on the cell walls (these being the distinctions respectively of the three following families).
Ochromonas is considered to be in its normal condition when it occurs as solitary
swimming cells; it occurs also as gelatinous colonies like those of Chrysocapsa.
Stylochrysalis consists of O chromonas-like cells attached by a stalk at the end away
from the
flagella. Chrysodendron is similar but colonial, the cells attached by branched
Brehmiella Pascher (1928) may occur as free-swimming Ochromonas-Vikt
cells, or these may become attached by the end away from tlie flagella and develop
a whorl of pseudopodia at the free end. Pseudopodia are a device for predatory nutrition, here occurring in an organism which is capable also of photosynthesis. Heterochromonas includes organisms of the structure of Ochromonas but without plastids, being presumably saprophytic, and containing only a pigmented speck by which it is supposed that the direction of light is perceived. The historical generic name Monas
O. F. Miiller, as restricted in application by scholars up to Ehrenberg and as applied
ever since, designates totally non-pigmented cells, saprophytic or predatory, freestalks.
swimming
Ochromonas
like
nates cells of
Monas
Kent desigThere are believed to be several
was in some member of it that Loeffler
or attached like Stylochrysalis [Physomonas
in the attached condition).
group remains poorly known. It
observed the pantoneme character of flagella. Dendromonas consists of
similar cells forming colonies like those of Chrysodendron. In Cephalothamnium
Stein, Monas-\ikc cells are gathered in capitate clusters on stout stalks. Anthophysis
Bory is an organism which Leeuwenhoeck had described as a microscopic water
plant: it consists of Monas-Vikt cells at the ends of branching stalks colored yellow
species, but the
(1889)
first
by deposits of
generic
names
iron.
just
The comparatively
unfamiliar original spellings of the two
( 1946). The name Uvella Bory
mentioned were restored by Kudo
appears to represent small clusters of cells of Cephalothamnium or Anthophysis
which have broken loose to swim free.
Family 3. Syncryptida [Syncryptidae] Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 156 (1913). Family
Isochrysidaceae Pascher in Siisswasserfl. Deutschland 2: 43 (1913), not based on a
generic name. Family Isochrysidae Calkins Biol. Prot. 262 (1926). Families Synuraceae and Syncryptaceae Smith Freshw. Algae (1933). Ochromonas-Vike cells forming
circular or globular free-swimming colonies. Flagella markedly unequal, colonies
circular: Cyclonexis; colonies globular: Uroglena, Uroglenopsis. Flagella apparently
equal: Syncrypta, Synura.
60
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Family 4. Dinobryina Ehrenberg Infusionsthierchen 122 (1838). Family Dinohryaceae Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. 2: 570 (1897).
Pigmented or
loricae,
that
Ochromonas or Monas, sheltered in
transparent open shells, solitary or colonial. The pigmented
colorless cells of the characters of
is,
in
examples have generally been referred to Ochromonadaceae (or whatever), the
to Monadidae (or whatever). Pigmented, solitary, flagella markedly
unequal: Epipyxis, Stylo pyxis; flagella apparently equal: Chry so pyxis Stein {Derepyxis Stokes). Pigmented, forming branching colonies: Dinobryon, Hyalobryon.
Poteriochromonas Scherffel resembles Stylopyxis, but the protoplast can project
pseudopodia from its lorica, thus supplementing photosynthesis by predatory nutrition. Non-pigmented, solitary, flagella markedly unequal: Stokesiella; flagella apprrently equal: Diplomita. Non-pigmented cells in colonies quite of the character
of those of Dinobryon: Stylobryon.
Family 5. Hymenomonadacea [Hymenomonadaceae] Senn in Engler and Prantl
Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. la: 159 (1900). Family Coccolithophoridae Lohman
in Arch. Prot. 1: 127 (1902). Family Hymenomonadidae Doflein. Family Coccolithidae Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 157 (1913). Order Syracosphaerinae and family
Pontosphaeraceae Schiller in Arch. Prot. 51: 8 (1925). Families Syracosphaeraceae,
Halopappaceae, Deutschlandiaceae, and Coccolithaceae Kampter. Family Thoracosphaeracee Schiller in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland ed. 2, 10, Abt. 2: 156
(1930). Y3imi\it5 Syracosphaeridae, Calcisolenidae, Thoracosphaeridae, and Braadrudosphaeridae Deflandre in Grasse Trait6 Zool. 1, fasc. 1: 452, 457, 458 (1952).
Family Discoasteridae Tan Sin Hok. Suborder Coccolithina Hall Protozoology 130
(1953). Solitary cells with one or two brown plastids, usually with two apparently
equal flagella, having a thin cell wall from which project bodies of calcium carbonate
colorless
(coccoliths) of definite form.
More than twenty genera and
nearly 150 species have been described (Lohman;
Kamptner, 1940). Neither the number of species nor the variety of form
appears to warrant making more than one family of the group. Nearly all examples
are marine. In Pontosphaera, Calyptosphaera, and allied genera, the coccoliths are
disks or hemispheres, sometimes umbonate and sometimes marked by one or more
pits. In Syracosphaera the coccoliths, or a few of them near the insertion of the
flagella, bear horn-like projections. In Najadea, Halopappus, and Calciconus, each
Schiller;
cell
bears a whorl or elongate bristles. Cells of Calcisolenia are fusiform, without
with an armor of two layers of spiral bands of calcareous matter. In Hymenomonas and Coccolithus Swartz 1894 [Coccosphaera Wallich 1877, non Perty 1852;
flagella,
Coccolithophora Lohman 1902) the coccoliths are punctured and accordingly ringshaped; Hymenomonas difi"ers from most of the group in occurring in fresh water. In
Discosphaera and Rhabdosphaera the punctured calcareous bodies are drawn out to
the form of tubes, spools, or trumpets.
These obscure organisms are not without importance. They occur in all oceans,
being most abundant in gulfs, such as the Adriatic, where the salinity is diminished
by rivers (Schiller, 1925). According to Bernard (1947) turbidity in the Mediterranean depends chiefly on this group. Coccoliths are abundant in the ooze on the
bottoms of oceans. They occur as fossils as far back as the Cambrian, being particularly abundant in certain Cretaceous deposits.
Family 6. Phaeothamnionacea [Phaeothamnionaccae] Pascher in Siisswasserfl.
Deutschland2: 113 ( 1913). Family Chrysotrichaceae Fascher (1914). Family Nematochrysidaceae Pascher (1925). Brown organisms, minute, marine, epiphytic, filamen-
Phylum Phaeophyta
[
reproducing by zoospores bearing paired unequal
tous,
flagella.
61
Nematochrysis, the
filaments unbranched; Phaeothamnio7i, the filaments branched. These organisms are
believed to represent the transition between the Chrysocapsacea and the typical
brown algae.
There is a family Amphimonadidae or Amphimonadaceae of unwalled colorless
flagellates with paired supposedly equal flagella. They appear to belong to the
kingdom of plants, in the neighborhood of Chlamydomonas and Polytoma. If, however, future study shows their flagella actually to be respectively pantoneme and
acroneme, they are to be placed
Order
2.
in the present order.
Silicoflagellata Borgert in Zeit. wiss. Zool. 51: 661
(1891).
Chromomonadina Klebs in Zeit. wiss. Zool. 55: 394 (1893).
Order Chromomonadina Blochmann Mikr. Tierwelt ed. 2. Abt.
Subclass Chrysomonadineae Engler in Engler and
ITeil, Abt.'la: iv (1900).
I: 57 (1895).
Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam.
Order Chrysomonadales Engler Syllab. ed. 3: 7 (1903).
Chrysomonadinae; Euchrysomonadinae with order Chromulinales; Chrysocapsinae; and Rhizochrysidinae Pascher in Siisswasserfl. Deutschland Heft 2
,
(1913).
Chrysomonadales, Chrysocapsales, Chrysosphaerales, and Chrysotrichales Pascher in Ber. deutschen bot. Gess. 32: 158 (1914).
Order Chrysomonadina Doflein Lehrb. Prot. ed. 4: 401 (1916).
Order Chrysomonadida Calkins Biol. Prot. 258 (1926).
Classes Chrysomonadineae Rhizochrysidineae, Chrysocapsineae, Chrysosphaerineae, and Chrysotrichineae Pascher in Beih. bot. Centralbl. 48, Abt. 2: 323
,
(1931).
Suborders Euchrysomonadina, Silicoflagellina, Rhizochrysidina, and Chrysocapsina Hall Protozoology 125, 128, 130, 132 (1953).
Organisms of much the character of Ochromonadalea, but producing flagellate
stages with a
single flagellum,
or not producing flagellate stages.
The
detailed
structure of the flagella has seemingly never been determined. Statospores are
known
produced by Chromulina, Mallonionas, and (of somewhat exceptional character) by Hy drums. Sexual reproduction has not been observed. Mitosis, with an
intranuclear spindle and numerous chromosomes, was observed by Doflein (1916)
to be
in Rhizochrysis.
This order
is
supposed to represent the direct ancestry of orders Choanoflagellata
and Hyphochytrialea.
amoeboid
1. Neither
2. Not flagellate
nor
in
truly
filamentous.
the vegetative condi-
tion.
3.
3.
Microscopic colonies
Macroscopic gelatinous
simulating filaments
2.
Family
1.
Chrysosphaeracea.
Family
2.
Hydruragea.
Family
3.
Chrysomonadina.
colonies
Flagellate in the vegetative condition.
3.
Without prominent
siliceous struc-
tures
3.
With
siliceous scales usually bearing
bristles
3.
With
siliceous internal skeletons
Family
Family
4.
5.
Mallomonadinea.
Actiniscea.
62
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Amoeboid
Family 6. Chrysamoebida.
Filamentous
Family 7. Thallochrysidacea.
Family 1. Chrysosphaeracea [Chr>'Sosphaeraceae] Pascher in Arch. Prot. 52: 562
(1925). Family Naegelliellaceae Pascher op. cit. 561. Family Nagelliellidae Hall
Protozoology 133 (1953). Non-motile brown cells, either capable of repeated division
into two, thus forming aggregates of indefinite number, or else undergoing multiple
division and producing colonies of definite number of cells; mostly known to produce
uniflagellate zoospores. Chrysosphaera, Epichrysis, Chrysospora, Gloeochrysis, Nae1.
1.
and other genera.
Family 2. Hydruracea [Hydruraceae] West British Freshw. Algae 45 (1904).
Hydrurina Klebs in Zeit. wiss. Zool. 55: 420 (1893). Family Hydruridae Poche in
gelliella,
Arch. Prot. 30:
158 (1913). Like Chrysosphaeracea, but the colonies dendroid,
becoming macroscopic; producing tetrahedral zoospores and
spheroidal resting cells bearing a unilateral crest. Hydrurus foetidus, in mountain
growing
at the tips,
streams.
Family 3. Chrysomonadina Stein Org. Inf. 3, I Halfte: x (1878). Family
Chrysomonadidac Kent Man. Inf. (1880). Family Chromulinaceae Engler in Engler
and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. 2: 570 (1897). Family Chromulinidae
Doflein. Brown flagellates with a single anterior flagellum, sometimes producing
siliceous granules but without more extensive siliceous structures. Free-swimming,
walled: Chrysococcus, Microglena. Naked: Chromulina, the type genus of Chrysomonadina, the generic name Chrysomonas being a synonym. Organisms of this genus
are rather freely capable of producing pseudopodia and supplementing photosynthetic
by predatism, or, alternatively, of producing gelatinous aggregates of
walled non-motile cells (Hofender, 1913; Gicklhom, 1922). Chrysapsis differs from
nutrition
Chromulina
having in each cell a single plastid in the form of a network. Solitary
producing pseudopodia only occasionally: Lepo chromulina. Bearing
whorls of permanent pseudopodia: Cyrtophora, Pedinella, Palatinella (Pascher,
attached
in
cells,
1928).
Mallomonadinea Diesing in Sitzber. Akad. Wiss. Wien Math.-Nat. CI.
304 (1866). Family Mallomonadidae Kent (1880). Brown uniflagellate
free-swimming cells with an armor of siliceous scales usually bearing bristles. MalloFamily
4.
52, Abt. 1:
m.onas, solitary cells, the bristle-bearing scales circular. Conradiella, the scales of the
form of
long
rings about the body. Chrysosphaerella, spherical colonies, each cell with
two
bristles.
Family 5. Actiniscea [Actinisceae] Kiitzing Phyc. Germ 117 (1845). Family
Dictyochidae Wallich. Class Silicoflagellata (Borgert), orders Siphonotestales and
Stereotestales, and families Dictyochaceae and Ebriaccae Lemmermann in Ber.
deutschen bot. Gcss. 19: 254-268 ( 1901 ). Division (?) Silicoflagellatac Engler. Family
SiHcoflagellidae Calkins Biol. Prot. 263 (1926). Famihes Ebriopsidae, Ditripodiidae,
Ammodochidae, and Ebriidae Deflandre in Grasse Traite Zool. 1, fasc. 1: 421, 423,
424 (1952). Solitary brown uniflagellate cells with a continuous internal skeleton of
silica. Marine, commonest in colder oceans.
The skeletons are not subject to decay and are found as micro fossils in chalk
and diatomaceous earth. They have been reported from the Silurian and are commonest in certain Cretaceous deposits. Ehrcnbcrg described several fossil species,
classifying them as diatoms. The living forms, subsequently discovered, include
apparently the same species.
Gemeinhardt (in Rabcnhorst, 1930) accounted for the structure of the cells.
Phylum Phaeophyta
[
63
They are approximately of radial symmetry, the axis being shorter than the diameter.
The skeleton is completely imbedded in protoplasm. It may be a mere ring; or the
ring may bear radially projecting spines; or it may be the margin of a more or less
complicated basket-shaped network coaxial with the cell. Numerous brown plastids
lie near the surface of the protoplast. There is no cell wall. The double cells, like
cells lying face to face, which have occasionally been seen, are not stages of
conjugation, but of cell division, in which one daughter cell retains the original
skeleton while the other develops a new skeleton in the position of a mirror image
two
of the original one.
Lemmermann and Gemeinhardt
accounted for only six genera and twenty-four
Gemeinhardt recognized numerous varieties, and it is probable that the
number of species has been underestimated. Mesocaena, the skeleton a mere ring,
smooth or spiny; Dictyocha, Distephanus, Cannopilus, the skeleton more or less
species, but
netted.
Family 6. Chrysamoebida [Chrysamoebidae] Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 157 (1913).
Families Rhizochrysidaceae , Chrysarachniaceae, and Myxochrysidaceae Pascher in
Beih. Bot. Centralbl. 48, Abt. 2: 323 (1931). Family Rhizochrysididae Hollande in
547 (1952). Families Rhizochrysidae and MyxochryAmoeboid organisms with brown plastids
of the form of one or two parietal films in each cell. Rhizaster, an attached organism
resembling Cyrtophora and Pedinella but lacking the flagellum. Chrysocrinus, attached to algae, the protoplast covered by a dome-shaped shell punctured by many
pores through which project the slender psudopodia. Chrysamoeba, a freely moving
cell usually with one flagellum; Rhizochrysis, similar, without the flagellum. Myxochrysis, a large multinucleate form. Chrysarachnion, the cells clustered and linked
together by strands of protoplasm. Lagynion, having an attached vase-shaped lorica
from which projects usually a single slender pseudopodium. Chrysothylakion, with
a retort-shaped lorica from which project many slender pseudopodia, branching
and anastomosing. Only the plastids distinguish these organisms from various genera
classified as Rhizopoda, Heliozoa, or Sarkodina.
Family 7. Thallochrysidacea [Thallochrysidaceae] Pascher (1925). Brown organisms producing definite filaments of walled cells and reproducing by anteriorly
Grasse Traite Zool.
1,
fasc. 1:
sidae Hall Protozoology 130, 132 (1953).
uniflagellate zoospores.
T hall ochry sis.
Phaeodermatium.
Vaucheriacea [Vaucheriaceae] Nageli Gatt. einzell. Alg. 40 (1849).
orders Chloromonadales and Confervales Luther in
Bihang Svensk. Vetensk.-Akad. Handl. 24, part 3, no. 13: 19 (1899). Not
Chloromonadina Klebs (1893); not order Confervoidea C. Agardh (1824).
Vaucheriales Bohlin Grona Algernas 25 (1901).
Order Vaucheriales Clements Gen. Fung. 14 (1909).
Orders Heterochloridales, Heterocapsales, Heterococcales, Heterotrichales, and
Order
3.
Class
Heterokontae and
H
eter osiphonales Va.s.ch.tr mlitdwigizbZ: 10-21 (1912).
Division Heterokontae, Classes Heterochloridineae, Rhizochloridineae, Hetero-
capsineae, Heterococcineae, Heterotrichineae , and Heterosiphoneae,
ders Rhizochloridales
and Botrydiales Pascher
in Beih. bot.
and
or-
Centralbl. 48,
Abt. 2: 324 (1931).
Class
Xanthomonadina with orders Heterochloridea and Rhizo chloride a De-
flandre in Grasse Traite Zool.
1,
fasc. 1:
212, 217, 220 (1952).
Order Heterochlorida Hall Protozoology 133 (1953).
—
The
64]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Organisms producing motile cells with paired unequal flagella which Vlk (1931)
found to be respectively pantoneme and acroneme, differing from Ochromonadalea
in being of a green or yellow-green color, and in being mostly of algal body type,
i. e., walled and non-motile. The cell wall consists usually of two parts which become
separate when the cell divides; the two parts are believed to be distantly homologous
with the wall and pRig of the statospores of Ochromonadalea and Silicoflagellata
(Pascher, 1932). The storage products are oil and sometimes leucosin.
As this is the group to which the class name Heterokontae was first applied, it is
f-'^y-'v'^^^;
• >i%'X°-^'^^
Chlorosaccus fluidus, cells of the colony and zooChlorarnoeba heteromorpha x 1,000 after Bohlin
(1897). e, f, g. Cell, empty cell, and zoospores of Characiopsis gibba x 1,000 after
Pascher (1912). h, Dioxys Incus after Pascher (1932). i, j, k, Cell, edge of cell,
and statospore of Pseudotetraedron neglectum x 1,000 after Pascher (1912). 1, Spim. End of a filament of Tribonema bombycina x 1,000.
rodiscus fulvus x 1,000.
o. Filament of Vaucheria
n, Antheridium and oogonia of Vaucheria Gardneri x 100.
Fig. 10.
Vaucheriacea:
spores, after
Luther (1899).
sessilis
x 100.
a, b^
c, d^
Phylum Phaeophyta
[
65
the type group of the class. As established by Luther, the class consisted of the new
genus Chlorosaccus together with a few genera of flagellates ( Vacuolaria was included
in error) and a few transferred from the group of typical green algae. From time to
time, other green algae have been transferred, and it has become evident that the
group is a fairly extensive one. Green organisms can be recognized as belonging here
by a negative reaction to the iodine test for starch, and by the fact that they give a
b'uish color when heated with hydrochloric acid, instead of a yellow one, as typical
green algae do: the difference depends upon differences in the complement of
photosynthetic pigments. Bohlin (1901) placed Vaucheria here; most authors have
not followed him, but Smith (1950) has done so. This genus brings with itself the
oldest name for the group as an order.
Mitosis in Vaucheria was described by Hanatschek (1932) and Gross (1937). The
spindle is intranuclear; Hanatschek saw centrosomes at the poles. The conjugation of
equal free-swimming gametes was observed in Tribonema and several other genera by
ScherfFel (1901), and in Botrydium by Rosenberg (1930). Vaucheria was one of the
organisms by study of which the nature of fertilization was discovered (Pringsheim,
1855). Hanatschek and Gross found that the first two divisions of the nucleus of
the zygote are meiotic: the
This order
is
soma
is
haploid.
believed to represent the direct ancestry of the two following classes,
and Oomycetes.
Pascher (1912, 1925) arranged the green Heterokonta in subordinate groups
parallel to those of the typical green algae; and, as the main groups of green algae
are treated as orders, he treated these groups also as orders (in 1931 as classes).
They are scarcely entitled to such rank: too many of the classes or orders are of
single families, and too many of the families are of one or two genera. Here, then,
Pascher's classes and orders are suppressed and several of his families are reduced.
1. Not truly filamentous nor producing rhizoids.
Bacillariacea
2.
The
3.
cells walled.
Cells regularly dividing into two,
forming gelatinous colonies; occasionally producing small numbers
of zoospores.
4.
4.
The
colonies globular or Irreg-
ular,
becoming macroscopic
The
colonies dendroid, micro-
scopic
3.
Family
1.
Chlorosagcacea.
Family
2.
Mischococgacea.
Family
Family
Family
Family
Family
3.
4.
Chlorotheciacea.
Botryococcagea.
5.
Stipitogogcacea.
6.
Chloramoebacea.
Cells normally undergoing division
into several.
4.
4.
2.
2.
The
The
Producing zoospores
Producing no motile
cells
cells loricate
cells
amoeboid
7. Tribonematagea.
Filaments of uninucleate cells
1. Cells becoming highly multinucleate, formFamily 8. Phyllosiphonacea.
ing filaments or at least producing rhizoids
Family 1. Chlorosaccacea [Chlorosaccaceae] Smith Freshw. Algae 145 (1933).
Family Heterocapsaceae Pascher in Hedwigia 53: 13 (1912); there is no correspond1.
ing generic
name. Gelatinous aggregates of
cells
which may divide, causing the
:.
The
66]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
aggregate to grow to macroscopic dimensions; or
may produce
one, two, or four
zoospores. Chlorosaccus Luther, the standard genus of class Heterokonta.
Family 2. Mischococcacea [Mischococcaceae] Pascher in Hedwigia 53 14 ( 1912).
Microscopic colonies of globular cells joined by dichotomously branching gelatinous
strands. Mischococcus.
Family 3. Chlorotheciacea [Chlorotheciaceae] Luther in Bihang Svensk. Vetensk:
Akad. Handl.
24, part 3, no. 13: 19 (1899). Families Chlorobotrydiaceae and Sciadiaccae Pascher in Hedwigia 53: 17 (1912). Family Halosphaeraceae Pascher
(1925). Family Ophiocytiaceae Auctt. Cells solitary, free or attached, capable of
reproduction by division to form multiple zoospores, in some examples capable
alternatively of producing multiple
minute non-motile
the parent. Large free multinucleate
cells,
more
cells of the
same form
as
or less globular: Botrydiopsis, Leu-
venia. Smaller cells, elongate, curved or coiled: Characiopsis, Spirodiscus. Spirodiscus
fuluus Ehrenberg in Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1830: 65 (1832) {nomen nudum) and
Infusionsthierchen 86 (1838), whose identity has been a standing puzzle to bac-
an older name of Ophiocytium parvidum (Perty) A.
antedates the generic name Ophiocytium Nageli (1849);
new combinations are required for the dozen additional species of this genus. The
teriological systematists,
is
Braun (Copeland, 1954).
It
cells
attached: some species of Characiopsis; Perionella; Dioxys.
Family
4.
Botryococcacea [Botryococcaceae] Pascher in Hedwigia 53: 13 (1912).
by production of non-motile cells.
Solitary or colonial cells reproducing strictly
Botryococcus. Pseudotetraedron.
Family 5. Stipitococcacea [Stipitococcaceae] Pascher in Beih. bot. Centralbl. 48,
Abt. 2: 324 (1931). Family Stipitochioridae Deflandre in Grasse Trate Zool. 1, fasc.
1:
221 (1952).
tached
Amoeboid
cells
with green plastids, partially enclosed in loricae
at-
to objects in water. Stipitococcus.
Family 6. Chloramoebacea [Chloramoebaceae] Luther in Bihang Svensk. Vetensk.Akad. Handl. 24, part 3, no. 13: 19 (1899). Family Chloramoebidae Poche in Arch.
Prot. 30: 155 (1913). Families Heterochloridaceae and Rhizochloridaceae Pascher
Siisswasserfl. Deutschland 11: 22, 26 (1925). Y^.miWts Heterochloridae, Rhizochloridae, Chlorarachnidae and Myxochloridae Deflandre in Grasse Traite Zool. 1, fasc. 1
217-222 (1952). Amoeboid organisms with green plastids, without loricae, sometimes swimming by means of paired unequal flagella. Chloramoeba, Chlorochromonas, Rhizochloris.
Family 7. Tribonematacea [Tribonemataceae] Pascher in Hedwigia 53 19 ( 1912)
Family Confervaceae Luther (1899). Family Monociliaceae Smith Freshw. Algae
160 (1933). Green Heterokonta producing filaments of uninucleate cells. The Linnaean genus Conferva included a great variety of growths in water. Definite groups
were separated from it, one after another, until the residue was a natural group; but
this residue cannot be assumed to be the type of Conferva L.; that name is to be
abandoned as a nomen confusum. The remnant in question has become two genera,
Tribonema Derbes and Solier, 1858, and Bumilleria Borzi, 1895. They are unbranched
:
common in freshwater pools. From typical green algae of similar appearance they are distinguished in the first place by the presence in each cell of several
disk-shaped plastids without pyrenoids or with obscure ones. The cell walls, when
treated with sulfuric acid, can be seen to consist of two parts like a barrel sawed
across the middle. A broken filament ends always with a broken half wall. Monocilia,
an unfamiliar alga isolated from soil, difi^ers in producing branching filaments.
filaments,
Phylum Phaeophyta
[
67
Family 8. Phyllosiphonacea [Phyllosiphonaceae] Wille in Engler and Prantl. Nat.
Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. 2: 125 (1890). Family Vaucheriaceae (Nageli) Areschoug
(1850), preoccupied by order Vaucheriaceae Nageli. Family Botrydiaceae Luther
(1899). Heterokonta whose bodies are highly multinucleate single cells, filamentous
or anchored by filamentous rhizoids. Botrydium is found on damp soil as dark green
sometimes as much as 2 mm. in diameter, anchored by much-branched colorVaucheria is a familiar alga on damp earth or in fresh water. It consists
of irregularly branching filaments, green where exposed to light, colorless where
growing downward and serving as rhizoids. The reproductive cells are cut off by
walls. The end of an aerial filament, cut off in this fashion, may as a whole act as a
spore. In water, the protoplast of such a cell may escape as an exceptionally large
zoospore with as many pairs of flagella as the nuclei within it. Antheridia are brief
branches, each releasing many minute sperms each with two unequal flagella.
Oogonia are globular cells, multinucleate during development, but containing only
one functional nucleus when mature. Phyllosiphon is of much the same structure as
globes,
less rhizoids.
Vaucheria, but
is
parasitic in seed plants, particularly Araceae. It reproduces, ap-
parently, only by the breaking
up
of the protoplast to produce minute non-flagellate
spores.
Order 4. ChoanoflageUata [Choano-Flagellata] Kent Man. Inf. 1: 36 (1880).
Order Bicoecidea Grasse and Deflandre in Grasse Traite Zool. 1, fasc. 1: 599
(1952).
Non-pigmented
flagellates, usually attached,
each
cell
of the type called pantacroneme, with lateral appendages
bearing a single flagellum
and a terminal whip-lash;
the cell bearing also a protoplasmic collar, usually surrounding the base of the flagellum. The collar is a means of nutrition. Bacteria and other scraps of organic matter,
driven against
it
by the beating of the flagellum, adhere and are carried to the interior
of the cell by flow of the cytoplasm of
which
it
consists.
probable that the pantacroneme flagellum is a variant of the pantoneme
flagellum, and that this order belongs naturally in class Heterokonta. It may have
evolved from Silicoflagellata; or it may be that the collar is a modified flagellum,
and that the group evolved from order Ochromonadalea.
Most authors have recognized more than one family of choanoflagellates, but
genera are not very numerous and one family seems sufficient to accommodate them.
Family Bicoekida Stein Org. Inf. 3, I Halfte: x (1878). Family CraspedornonaIt
is
dina Stein
idae
Kent
1. c.
op.
Families Bikoecidae, Codonosigidae, Salpingoecidac, and PhalansteriFamilies Codonoecina and Bikoecina Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord.
cit.
1: 814, 815 (1884). Families Bicoecaceae, Craspedoynonadaceae, and
Phalanasteriaceae Senn in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. la: 121,
123, 129 (1900). Family Gymnocraspedidae Grasse Traite Zool. 1, fasc. 1: 590
Thierreichs
(1952). Characters of the order. Cells naked, solitary: Monosiga; colonial: CodoJames-Clark [Codonosiga Stein), Sphaeroeca. Cells imbedded in gelatinous
matter, the collars contracted: Phalanseterium. Loricate: Salpingoeca, Bicosoeca,
siga
Poteriodendron.
choanoflagellates were discovered by James-Clark (1866, 1868), who made at
same time the discovery that certain internal cavities of sponges are lined by
minute cells (choanocytes) of the same structure as the choanoflagellates. From
these observations he drew the conclusion that sponges are a sort of flagellates distinguished by the production of exceptionally large and elaborate colonies. Kent
The
the
—
The
68]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
described Proterospongia Haeckeli as a colonial organism of amoeboid and choanoflagellate cells in a common matrix; he regarded it as a transitional form, important
as evidence of the evolution of sponges from choanoflagellates. According to
Duboscq
and Tuzet 1937) it is no organism, but a stage in the development of an individual
sponge from one which has been damaged. In spite of this, the hypothesis that the
choanoflagellates represent the evolutionary origin of the sponges, and accordingly
of the entire animal kingdom, continues to appear tenable.
(
Fig. 11.
Choanoflagellata
:
a, b,
Monosiga
c X 500, the remainder x
1,000.
Phalanasterium digitatum;
Foteriodendron petiolatum.
spp.; c^
A, Salpingoeca ampullacea; e, Salpingoeca Clarkii;
i,
c-f after Stein (1878).
Phylum Phaeophyta
Order
5.
[
69
Hyphochytrialea [Hyphochytriales] Bessey Morph. and Tax. Fungi 69
(1950).
Order Anisochytridiales Karling in American Jour. Bot. 30: 641 (1943), not
based on a generic name.
Non-pigmented organisms with walled cells, parasitic or saprophytic, the protoplasm with numerous granules not of a shining appearance, producing zoospores
with single anterior pantoneme flagella.
The naked zoospores come to rest upon appropriate hosts or substrata. Ordinarily,
in parasitic species, the protoplast of the zoospore makes its way to the interior of a
cell of the host. It swells and develops a thin wall. The resulting structure may be
called a center. In most members of the group, the center gives rise to a system of
slender rhizoids; in some species, these give rise to further centers like the original
one. Karling studied the cytology particularly in Anisolpidium. There are repeated
simultaneous mitoses in the growing centers. Resting nuclei contain conspicuous
karyosomes. Dividing ones show about five chromosomes in an intranuclear spindle
which ends sharply in centrosomes. Eventually, in the usual course of events, each
center produces an exit tube to the exterior. Its contents are released by deliquescence of the tip of the exit tube. Either before this or afterward, the mass of protoplasm undergoes cleavage into uninucleate protoplasts which generate flagella. Sometimes, instead of discharging their contents, the centers are converted into resting
spores by the secretion of thick walls (this has been observed in only a few of the
The resting spores germinate by producing exit tubes and discharging
zoospores as ordinary centers do.
species).
may be called the chytrid body
body type were formerly assembled as a taxonomic group
typified by the genus Chytridium. Couch, however, showed that these organisms
form three groups distinguished by fundamental differences in type of flagellation.
The present group is here given a place implying relationship to order Silicoflagellata.
The body
type which has just been described
type; organisms of this
Karling (1943) accounted for fourteen species. He provided three families; only
one is here maintained.
Family Hyphochytriacea [Hyphochytriaceae] Fischer in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl.
Deutschland 1, Abt. 4:131 (1892). Families Anisolpidiaceae and Rhizidiomycetaceae
Kailing in American Jour. Bot. 30: 641, 643 (1943). Characters of the order.
Without rhizoids: Anisolpidium on brown algae; Roesia on Lemna; Cystochytrium
on roots of Veronica. With rhizoids from a single center: Rhizidiomyces and Latr ostium on green algae, aquatic fungi, and the empty exoskeletons of insects. With
multiple centers: Hyphochytrium and Catenariopsis, on fungi and other hosts.
Class 2.
BACILLARIACEA Engler and
PrantI
Homalogonata Lyngbye Tent. Hydrog. Danicae 177 (1819).
Order Diatomeae C. Agardh Syst. Alg. xii (1824).
Division (of order ^/gae) Diatomaceae Harvey in Mackay Fl. Hibem. 166 (1836).
Family Bacillaria Ehrenberg Infusionsthierchen 136 (1838).
Series (of class Algae) Diatomaceae Harvey Man. British Alg. 15 (1841).
Abtheilung (of cldiS,?, Isocarpeae) Diatomaceae Kiitzing Phyc. Germ. 54 (1845).
Stamm Diatomea Haeckel Gen. Morph. 2: xxv (1866).
Division (of class Algae) Diatomaceae Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Sachsen 1: 1
(1863).
—
The
70]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Hyphochytrialea:
a-e^ Anisolpidium Ectocarpii; a-c, individuals deEctocarpus; d, mitotic figures x 2,000; e^ cell of Ectocarpus filled
by a mature individual discharging spores, f, g, Rhizidiomyccs apuphysatus; f, zooFig.
12.
veloping in
cells of
spore; g, oogonium of Achlya parasitized by three individuals,
h, i, j^ llyphochytrium catenoides; h, zoospore; i, young individual; j, mature individual with filaments, sporangia, and zoospores in various stages of development. All after Karling
(1943, 1944, 1939). x 1,000 except as noted.
Phylum Phaeophyta
[71
Class Bacillariaceae Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. II Teil;
Subdivision and class Bacillariales Engler Syllab. 6 (1892).
1
(1889).
Hauptclasse Diatomeae Haeckel Syst. Phylog. 1: 90 (1894).
Subclass Bacillariales Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. Teil
la:
I,
Abt.
V (1900).
Class Bacillarieae Wettstein Handb.
syst. Bot. 1: 74 (1901).
Class Bacillarioideae Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 283 (1907).
Class Diatomeae Schaffner in Ohio Naturalist 9: 447 (1909).
Abteilung Bacillariophyta Engler.
Ahteilung (of Stamm Chrysophyta) Diatomeae Pascher in Beih. bot. Centralbl.
48, Abt. 2: 324 (1931).
Class Bacillariophyceae Auctt.
Unicellular (occasionally filamentous or colonial) organisms without flagella in
the vegetative condition, each cell with one, two, or more plastids, brown, varying to
yellow or exceptionally to bluish or colorless, and bearing a siliceous shell of two
parts.
Globules of
oil
and granules
of something called volutin (the "red granules
of Biitschli," apparently protein) are present. Other granules in
some examples are
said to be of leucosin.
These organisms, the diatoms, are very common. There are some 5300 species.
Microscopic examination of the bottoms of fresh water ponds reveals usually more of
diatoms than of any other kind of organisms. Diatoms are frequent prey of many kinds
of predators, from amoebas to whales. In using fish-liver oils as a source of vitamin
D, man adds himself to a long chain of predators of which it is believed that diatoms
are the usual ultimate prey.
The shells of diatoms are not subject to decay. In certain places which were in
the geologic past arms of the sea, there are enormous deposits of diatom shells in
The oldest deposits are of the Cretaceous age. Thus it apmodern offshoot, no more ancient than the flowering plants.
Diatomaceous earth is mined for various uses. It is an effective insulating material,
and was the inert material first used in connection with nitroglycerine in the manu-
the
form of a white
earth.
pears that diatoms are a
facture of dynamite.
The two parts of the shell of a diatom are called valves. They fit one over the
other "like the parts of a pill box" (ZoBell, 1941, objects to this traditional simile,
on the ground that in current language a pillbox is a concrete structure with loopholes). The shells consist basically of something of the nature of pectin heavily imThe
appear markedly
bottom view is
called valve view, and that which is in effect side view is called girdle view. When a
cell divides, each of the daughter cells receives one of the valves and generates an
additional valve fitting within it. Diatoms in culture undergo a gradual diminution
in size; there is an old hypothesis that this is caused by the fact that one of each pair
of sister cells receives a slighly smaller valve than the other.
Lauterborn (1896) described mitosis in Surirella and other diatoms. He found a
centrosome, with radiating strands, near the nucleus. At the beginning of mitosis,
the centrosome generates a disk-shaped structure which enters the nucleus and grows
in such fashion as to become a cylinder extending through it. The cylinder is recognizably a spindle, but the chromosomes, instead of appearing within it, form a ringshaped mass about its middle and divide into two ring-shaped masses which move
pregnated with
silica
and
characteristically sculptured.
different in different aspects:
along
it
to its extremities.
The
the aspect which
nuclear
is
membrane
cells
in effect top or
ceases to be recognizable early in
—
The
Fig. 13.
Bacillariacea
Classification of
:
a,
Mclosira
Lower Organisms
sp.,
a living cell
and an empty one.
b, c.
d, e. Sections of a valve of PinnuGirdle and valve views of cell of Cyclotella sp.
laria sp., highly magnified, after Otto Miillcr (1896); d, about half-way between the
middle and the end, e^ near the end. f, g, Girdle and valve views of Synedra sp.
j, k, Girdle and valve views
m, Girdle and valve views of Gomphonema sp. (the former shown, o. Girdle and valve views
ing the gelatinous stalk by which the cell is attached),
of Cymbella sp.
p, q, Surirella saxonica after Karsten (1900); p, two cells joined
before conjugation; q, zygote; x 250. r, s, Girdle and valve views of Cocconeis sp.
X 1,000 except as noted.
h,
i.
Girdle and valve views of Rhoicosphenia curvata.
of Navicula sp.
1^
Phylum Phaeophyta
[
73
the process, but the nuclear cavity remains distinct until the chromosomes have
reached the ends of the spindle. The nuclear sap and the spindle are then absorbed
by the cytoplasm, but not until the spindle has budded off a new centrosome from
each end.
Subsequent authors, as Karsten (1900), Geitler (1927), Iyengar and Subrahmanyan (1942, 1944), and Subrahmanyan (1947), have not seen as full a series of stages
as Lauterbom did. They have found centrosomes in at least some diatoms, and have
confirmed the point that the spindle is a cylinder which is surrounded by the
chromosomes instead of including them.
The same authors have described sexual processes in Surirella, Cymbella, Cocconeis, Cyclotella, and Navicula. In Surirella saxonica as described by Karsten, pairs
of the wedge-shaped cells become attached by little bodies of slime at the narrow
ends. Each nucleus divides twice, producing four, of which three are digested by the
cytoplasm. The two protoplasts then move in amoeboid fashion out of their shells
and they and their nuclei unite. The zygote protoplast grows to a size much greater
than that of the parent cells and secretes a membrane which becomes silicified. The
is called an auxospore.
In most kinds of diatoms, each cell produces two gametes. In some, the cells pair
and proceed to produce auxospores individually, without conjugation. Karsten supsposed the latter examples to represent a stage in the evolution of sexual reproduction under some zwingender Nothwendigkeit: much more probably, they are products of degeneration. In Cyclotella, Iyengar and Subrahmanyan found the production of auxospores to involve autogamous karyogamy: the nucleus of a solitary cell
undergoes meiosis; two of the haploid nuclei are digested, and the two which remain
fuse with each other. It is evident that all diatoms are diploid in the vegetative
resulting cell
condition.
The
to the
filamentous green Heterokonta Tribonema and Bumilleria are closely similar
diatom Melosira, and it may reasonably be supposed that they represent the
evolutionary origin of the group.
Diatoms are preserved for study by violent methods which destroy the protoplasts,
and the classification is based strictly on characters of the shells. So uniform is the
group that Schiitt (in Engler and Prantl, 1896) treated it as a single family. He provided an elaborate subsidiary classification involving two main groups. Subsequent
scholars have found his system essentially sound as a representation of nature, but
have raised the main groups to the rank of orders and the minor ones in corresponding degree.
Order 1. Disciformia [Disciformes] Kiitzing Phyc. Germ. 112 (1845).
Order Appendiculatae Kiitzing 1. c.
Centricae Schiitt in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. lb: 57
(1896).
Order Centricae Campbell Univ. Textb. Bot. 90 (1902).
Order Eupodiscales Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 284 (1907).
Diatoms basically of radial symmetry, which, however, is often distorted; not
motile in the vegetative condition; plastids numerous in the cells.
These are the more primitive diatoms. The majority are marine. Three types of
reproductive cells are known to be produced by them.
Occasionally, in mass catches of material from the ocean, diatoms are found
whose protoplasts have undergone repeated division within the shell and produced
74
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
little naked protoplasts. These protoplasts are said to bear flagella; whether
one or two, equal or unequal, is not certainly known. They are supposed to escape
and function as zoospores, but Karsten (1904), on rather scant evidence, supposed
them to be gametes.
A protoplast may contract and form a shell within its former shell. The new shell
consists like the old one of two parts, one fitting within the other. The outer shell is
usually more or less elaborately sculptured, while the inner is smooth. It is supposed
that the outer shell is deposited between outer and inner masses of protoplasm, and
that the entire protoplast then withdraws to the interior and deposits the inner shell
in the opening. It is in this manner that the statospores of chrysomonads are formed.
The resting cells of diatoms as just described are believed to be homologous with
them, and are called by the same term.
As a third manner of producing a reproductive cell, a protoplast may expand, force
apart the valves of its shell, and deposit an enlarged shell about itself. The resulting
spore is called an auxospore. As noted, Iyengar and Subrahmanyan found the pro-
numerous
duction of auxospores in Cyclotclla to involve sexual processes.
Schiitt divided the Centricae into three groups with names in -oideae (presumably subfamilies) and these into nine groups with names in -eae (presumably tribes).
Subsequent authorities have made of
Schiitt's
The minimum
families
tenable
number
of
groups a varying number of families.
corresponding to Schutt's
is three,
subfamilies.
Family 1. Coscinodiscea [Coscinodisceae] Kiitzing Phyc. Germ. 112 (1845).
Family Melosireae Kiitzing op. cit. 66. Families Melosiraceae and Coscinodiscaceae
West British Freshw. Alg. 274, 276 (1904). Melosira, in fresh water, the shells feebly
silicified, the cells joined end to end in filaments. Cyclotclla, separate drum-shaped
cells in fresh
water. Coscinodiscus, the cells disk-shaped. Triceratium, cells of the
form of 3-, 4-, or 5-sided prisms with abbreviated axes.
Family 2. Rhizosoleniacea [Rhizosoleniaceae] West British Freshw. Alg. 278
(1904). The cells, circular or elliptic in cross section, becoming elongate by intercalation of ring-shaped bands of wall between the valves. Rhizosolenia. Corethron.
Family 3. Biddulphiea [Biddulphieae] Kutzing Phyc. Germ. 115 (1845). Families
Biddulphiaceae and Chaetoceraceae Auctt. Cells laterally compressed, elliptic in
valve view, oblong or rhombic in girdle view. Cells of Biddulphia, solitary or colonial,
are familar as epiphytes on marine algae. Chaetoceros, the cells with a long spine at
each corner, frequently united valve to valve in filaments, abundant in subpolar
oceans.
2. Diatomea [Diatomeae] C. Agardh Syst. Alg. xii (1824).
Tribe Striatae with orders Astomaticae and Stomaticae, and tribe Vittatae also
with orders Astomaticae and Stomaticae, Kutzing Phyc. Germ. ( 1845).
Pennatae Schiitt in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. lb: 101
Order
(1896).
Order Pennatae Campbell Univ. Textb. Bot. 90 1902).
Order Naviculales Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 284 1907).
Diatoms basically of isobilateral symmetry, occasionally so skewed as to be
(
(
dorsi-
ventral or asymmetric; valves usually punctured by a longitudinal cleft called the
raphe, or bearing a marking of some sort, called the pseudoraphe, in the same position; exhibiting, when possessed of a true raphe, a gliding motion; cells usually with
two
plastids.
Phylum Phaeophyta
The motion
of the pennate diatoms
[
75
upon
surfaces, with frequent redepends upon the flow of a
stream of exposed protoplasm. This is the opinion of Max Schultze (1865), Otto
Miiller (1889, 1896), and Lauterborn (1896); there have been other hypotheses.
Miiller showed that the true raphe, without which the motion does not occur, is an
actual opening. The raphe is not a simple crack; it enters the wall obliquely and
bends at a sharp angle to come from another oblique direction to the interior. Its
proportions vary along its length, and it is interrupted at the middle of the valve by
a knob, the central granule, projecting inward from the valve.
The pennate diatoms do not produce flagellate cells nor statospores, but they produce auxospores, usually by sexual processes. The majority inhabit fresh water.
Eleven families are currently recognized.
is
a gliding
versal, in either direction of the long axis of the cell. It
a. Without raphes.
Family 1. Fragilariea [Fragilarieae] (Harvey) Kutzing Phyc. Germ. 62 (1845).
Family Fragilariaceae West British Freshw. Alg. 285 (1904). Cells symmetrical with
respect to three planes, without internal partitions. Fragilaria. Synedra.
Family
West
op.
2.
cit.
Tabellariea [Tabellarieae] Kutzing op. cit. 110. Family Tahellariaceae
281. Cells symmetrical with respect to three planes, with longitudinal
internal partitions. Tabellaria.
Family 3. Bacillaria Ehrenberg Infusionsthierchen 136 (1838). Family Diatomaceae West op. cit. 284. Cells symmetrical with regard to three planes, with transverse internal partitions, solitary, or joined valve to valve in ribbons, or corner to
comer
Diatoma.
Meridiea [Meridieae] Kutzing op. cit. 61. Family Meridionaceae West
283. Cells symmetrical with regard to two planes, wedge-shaped both in valve
in zig-zag chains.
Family
op.
cit.
and
4.
in girdle view, with transverse internal partitions, often joined valve to valve
in fan-shaped colonies
which are sometimes
so
extended as
to
produce
spiral fila-
ments. Meridion.
b. With raphes, the valves of each cell alike.
Naviculea [Naviculeae] Kiitzing op. cit. 90. Family Naviculaceae Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Sachsen 1: 33 (1863). This is the most numerous family of
diatoms. In most of the genera the cells are narrowly rectangular in girdle view,
narrowly elliptic in valve view, being of the shape of flat-bottomed boats. Navicula,
Pinnularia, etc. In other genera, as Gyrosigma and Pleurosigma, the cells are so
skewed as to be sigmoid in valve view.
Family 6. Gomphonemea [Gomphonemeae] Kiitzing op. cit. 87. Family Gomphonemaceae West op. cit. 297. Cells wedge-shaped. Gomphonema.
Family 7. Cymbellea [Cymbelleae] (Harvey) Kiitzing op. cit. 84. Family Cocconemaceae West op. cit. 298. Cells with two planes of symmetry, in valve view crescentshaped or approximately so. Cymbella. Rhopalodia.
Family 8. Eunotiea [Eunotieae] Kiitzing op. cit. 57. Family Eunotiaceae West op.
cit. 287. Cells curved as in the preceding family, the raphes reduced to brief clefts
Family
5.
near the ends of the valves. Eunotia.
Family 9. Nitzschiacea [Nitzschiaceae] West op. cit. 301. Cells asymmetric in
valve view, the raphe along one margin. Nitzschia. Hantschia.
Family 10. Surirellea [Surirelleae] Kiitzing op. cit. 70. Family Surirellaceae West
op.
cit.
c.
303.
Each
The two
cell
with two marginal raphes. Surirella.
valves of each cell unlike, one with a raphe, one with a pseudoraphe.
76
The
]
Family
Classification of
Achnanthea [Achnantheae]
11.
thaceae and Cocconeidaceae West op.
Lower Organisms
Kiitzing op.
cit.
cit.
81.
Families Achnan-
289, 290. Achnanthes, Rhoicosphenia,
Cocconeis.
Class 3.
Class
OoMYCETEs Winter
in
OOMYCETES
Winter
Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland
1,
Abt. 1: 32
1
(1889), in
(1879).
Phycomyceten de Bary Vergl. Morph. Pilze 142 1884), in part.
Class Phycojnycetes Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. II Teil:
(
part.
Reihe Oomycetes Fischer
in
Rabenhorst Kryptog.-FI. Deutschland
1,
Abt. 4: 310
(1892).
Stamm Phykomycophyta
Pascher in Beih. bot. Centralbl. 48, Abt. 2: 330 (1931),
in part.
Sparrow Aquatic Phycomycetes 487 (1943).
Organisms of fungal or chytrid body type, that is, non-pigmented saprophytes or
parasites whose bodies are walled filaments or cells with or without rhizoids; the
walls consisting partially of cellulose; reproducing asexually by zoospores with
paired unlike flagella which are, so far as is known, respectively pantoneme and
acroneme, and usually sexually by fertilization, the eggs being distinct cells within
the oogonia. The regularly cited example and evident standard genus of the group
Biflagellatae
is
Saprolegnia.
Conventional botanical classification recognizes within the group of Fungi a subnamed Phycomycetes, which is in turn divided into Oomycetes and
Zygomycetes, the former including the chytrids. This arrangement suggests an evolutionary series, originating perhaps among non-pigmented flagellates, and leading
through chytrids, typical Oomycetes, and Zygomycetes to the typical fungi. It does
not now appear tenable. Couch (1939) pointed out differences between Oomycetes
and Zygomycetes which make any direct connection between them appear quite
improbable; and his observations on flagella showed that only a small minority among
organisms of chytrid body type have anything to do with the proper Oomycetes.
ordinate group
There is an old hypothesis (Sachs, 1874) that Vauchcria may represent the direct
ancestry of Saprolegnia. This hypothesis could not be taken seriously while Saprolegnia and its allies were known to produce heterokont zoospores, while Vaucheria
was supposed
to
be a typical isokont green alga.
Now
it
implies that in the present group the fungal body type
again appears probable. It
more primitive than the
is
chytrid.
The Oomycetes may be organized
l.Of fungal body
type,
i.e.,
as three orders.
consisting of
fila-
ments.
2.
Essentially aquatic
2.
Mostly not aquatic, parasitic on higher
plants
1.
Of
chytrid
body
type,
i.e.,
Order
1.
Saprolegnina.
Order
2.
Peronosporina.
Order
3.
LAGENroiALEA.
the cells not elong-
ated to filamentous form, though sometimes
proliferating or producing rhizoids
Phylum Phaeophyta
[
77
Order 1. Saprolegnina [Saprolengninae] Fischer in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl.
Deutschlandl,Abt.4: 311 (1892).
Order Eremospermeae and suborder Mycophyceae Kiitzing Phyc. Gen. 146
(1843), in part.
Order Oosporeae Cohn in Hedwigia 11: 18 (1872), in part.
Order Oomycetes and suborder Saprolegniineae Engler Syllab. 24 (1892).
Order Saprolegniineae Campbell Univ. Textb. Bot. 153 (1902).
Order Siphonomycetae Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 286 (1907).
Order Saprolegniales Auctt.
Order L^p^omzfa/^?^- Kanouse in American Jour. Bot. 14: 295 (1927).
Aquatic Oomycetes, filamentous, saprophytic or facultatively
parasitic, the zoo-
swimming) or giving evidence of an
names Eremospermeae and Oosporeae
designated miscellaneous collections of groups in which this one was listed at or near
the beginning. Either one, if taken up, would be applied here, but it seems better to
treat them as nomina confusa.
spores diplanetic (exhibiting two periods of
ancestral diplanetic condition. The old ordinal
1.
1.
Filaments not constricted
Filaments constricted at intervals.
2. Filaments not differentiated into basal
and reproductive parts
2.
Family
1.
Saprolegniea.
Family
2.
Leptomitea.
Filaments differentiated into basal and
Family 3. Rhipidiacea.
Saprolegniea [Saprolegnieae] Kiitzing Phyc. Gen. 157 (1843). Family
18 (1872). Aquatic Oomycetes consisting of
Saprolegniaceae Cohn in Hedwigia 11
branching filaments of essentially uniform diameter without crosswalls other than
reproductive parts
Family
1.
:
those which set apart differentiated reproductive structures.
Coker (1923)
parasitic on
fishes or saprophytic on organic remains in water or soil. In almost any body of soil
or of fresh water they may be found by "baiting," in former practice with dead flies,
These well-known organisms are called water molds. According
there are about eighty definitely recognizable species.
currently with
hemp
to
They may be
seeds.
Mitosis has rarely "been observed in the vegetative filaments, the nuclei being very
minute. Eggs are produced in large globular multinucleate oogonia borne at the ends
of filaments. The nuclei in the developing oogonia become enlarged and undergo a
Couch, 1932). The sharp-pointed
formed within the nuclear membrane. The
membrane disappears toward the end of the mitotic process, and a nucleolus, which
single flare of concurrent mitoses (Davis, 1903;
spindles, ending in centrosomes, are
has persisted to this stage, undergoes solution in the cytoplasm. The chromosome
numbers (Ziegler, 1953) are 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7.
Within each oogonium there appear one or a few minute bodies called coenocentra.
One nucleus becomes associated with each coenocentrum; all others break down and
disappear.
Each surviving nucleus with the cytoplasm associated with
organized as an egg.
of the oogonium;
side of
When
when
it
becomes
several eggs are produced, they share all of the cytoplasm
only one egg
is
produced, some of the cytoplasm
is left
out-
it.
Sperms are produced in small multinucleate antheridia borne at the tips of filaments in contact with oogonia. Typically, each individual bears both oogonia and
antheridia. Some species are capable of self-fertilization; others exist as two kinds
of individuals, each capable of fertilizing the other; some occur as distinct male and
—
The
78]
,^t*SJi
Classification of
'
•ITi''!'
Lower Organisms
nVgi 'Villi
Oomycetes: a. Filaments and sporangia of Dictyuchus sp. x 50.
Zoospores of the second stage of swimming, of Achlya caroliniana and Saprod^ Oogonia and antheridia of Dictyuchus
legnia ferax, after Couch (1941) x 1,000.
X 400. e, f, g, Saprolegnia mixta after Davis (1903) e, developing oogonium with
numerous nuclei x 500; f, metaphase of nuclear division x 2,000; g, developing
oogonium in which most of the nuclei have undergone degeneration; a few have
become associated with coenocentra, and the cytoplasm is undergoing cleavage to
produce eggs about these.
Fig.
14.
b, C,
:
Phylum Phaeophyta
[
79
female individuals. Parthenogenesis (reproduction by eggs which have not been
fertilized) is rather common in this group. There are no swimming sperms: nuclei
from the antheridia reach the eggs through fertilization tubes, or by migration through
the periplasm.
Ziegler found that the
first nuclear divisions of the nucleus of the zygote are
except the zygotes are haploid.
The organs of asexual reproduction are cylindrical sporangia terminal on the filaments. Within these the multinucleate protoplasts undergo cleavage into minute
uninucleate spores. It is chiefly by details of the behavior of the sporangia and spores
meiotic:
all cells
(the latter diplanetic, monoplanetic, or not
swimming at all) that the dozen genera
the character of zoospores which are not directly
infective; they undergo encystment, and the cysts release infective zoospores. During
the first stage of swimming, the spores are pear-shaped, with the nucleus drawn out
are distinguished. Diplanetism
is
into a beak toward the
narrow anterior end, where the flagella are attached. Spores released from cysts for a second period of swimming are bean-shaped, with the flagella
attached laterally, each connected through a separate rhizoplast to the nucleus, which
some distance from the cell membrane (Cotner, 1930). No explanation of
this behavior, whether by phylogeny, genetics, physiology, or competitive advantage,
is known. The apparent trend of evolution is to eliminate it. Monoplanetic spores
in the present group are usually released from the sporangia as naked protoplasts
lies at
which undergo encystment and emerge subsequently
as flagellate spores of the second
form.
Saprolegnia releases diplanetic spores through circular pores in the tips of sporangia
which the spores are formed in several rows; new sporangia develop within empty
old ones. Organisms which differ from Saprolegnia only in producing new sporangia
beside, instead of within, the old ones, were formerly assigned to Achlya, but are now
called Isoachlya. Leptolegnia differs from Saprolegnia and Isoachlya in forming
in
spores in a single row. In Achlya proper, the spores are discharged without flagella,
and swim only once. In Thraustotheca the monoplanetic spores are rebreakdown of the distal part of the sporangium. In Dictyuchus
the spores become encysted before discharge; their protoplasts escape in the form of
secondary swarmers through individual pores in the wall of the sporangium. Salvin
(1942) found that cultures while growing release into the medium substances which
affect the type of sporangium produced, so that a given culture may be while young
of the character of Achlya, and later of the character of Thraustotheca or Dictyuchus.
Family 2. Leptomitea [Leptomiteae] Kiitzing Phyc. Gen. 150 (1843). Family
Leptomitaceae Schroter in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Tail, Abt. 1 101
(1893). Oomycetes consisting of filaments which are constricted at intervals, but
are not differentiated into a basal cell and reproductive branches. In sewage or on
to encyst
leased by irregular
:
organic matter decaying in water. Leptomitus, Apodachlya, Apodachlyella, with
some seven known
species.
The numbers
of species
and degree of
distinction of this
family and the following do not appear to justify the proposed establishment of a
separate order for them.
Family 3. Rhipidiacea [Rhipidiaceae] Sparrow in Mycologia 34: 116 (1942).
Saprophytes resembling the Leptomitea, the body differentiated into a main part, the
basal cell, rhizoids of limited growth, and slender branches bearing the reproductive
structures. Sapromyces, Araiospora, Rhipidium, Mindeniella, with perhaps a dozen
known
species.
80
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Order 2. Peronosporina [Peronosporinae] Fischer in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl.
Deutschlandl,Abt.4: 383 (1892).
Suborder Peronosporineae Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil,
Abt.
(1897).
1: iv
Order Peronosporineae Campbell Univ. Textb. Bot. 155 (1902).
Order Peronosporales Auctt.
Mostly parasites on terrestrial plants, but including also aquatic parasites and a
few saprophytes, the bodies filamentous, reproducing sexually by fertilization, the
eggs solitary in the oogonia, reproducing asexually chiefly by conidia, that
is, by airfrom the ends of the filaments. The conidia are homologous with
the sporangia of the Saprolegnina they germinate in most examples by release of
zoospores (which show no signs of diplanetism), but in the more highly evolved
examples they give rise to filaments. Ferris (1954) found the zoospores of Phytophthora to bear the paired flagella, respectively pantoneme and acroneme, which are
born
cells cut off
:
typical of Phaeophyta.
In the multinucleate oogonia of most members of the group, single flares of mitoses
The sharp-pointed spindles, described in some accounts as ending in centrosomes, are formed within the persistent nuclear membrane, which undergoes constriction during the final stages of mitosis. A coenocentrum appears (this structure
occur.
was first described as occurring in Albugo, by Stevens, 1899); in general, one nucleus
becomes associated with it, and is thus selected as the egg nucleus, the remaining
nuclei being cast out to undergo disolution in a body of periplasm. The antheridium
develops in contact with the oogonium, and fertilization is accomplished by the
growth of a fertilization tube through the periplasm to the egg (Davis, 1900; Stevens,
1899,1901,1902).
In Albugo Bliti and A. Tragopogonis, Stevens observed two flares of simultaneous
mitoses in the oogonium and antheridium. If this phenomenon were general in the
group one would confidently identify it as meiosis. The single coenocentrum attracts
many nuclei; the fertilization tube delivers a large number of sperm nuclei; thus
multiple karyogamy occurs within a single
peculiar zygote, containing
genetically uniform,
This order
is
a
is
is
many
cell.
The
further history of the resulting
nuclei which are not by any evident necessity
unknown.
evidently a specialized offshoot of the preceding.
good example
of a transition group;
many
The
family Pythiacea
authorities have assigned
it
to the pre-
ceding order.
1.
Producing
solitary
globular
sporangia
or
conidia at the ends of scarcely specialized
filaments; mostly aquatic
1.
Family
1.
Pythiacea.
Family
2.
Albuginacea.
Producing conidia usually in clusters at the
(conidioends of specialized filaments
phores) parasites on land plants.
the
2. Conidiophores brief, unbranched,
;
conidia in chains
2.
Conidiophores elongate, usually branched, the conidia solitary or clustered, not
Family 3. Peronosporacea.
Pythiacea [Pythiaccae] Schroter in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam.
I Teil, Abt. 1: 104 (1893). Aquatic parasites and saprophytes releasing zoospores
from globular reproductive structures terminal on the filaments, together with parain chains
Family
1.
Phylum Phaeophyta
sites
attacking land plants under moist conditions.
as sporangia
if
formed
in water, as conidia
if
[81
The
formed
reproductive structures act
in air.
Pythium, saprophytic on
plant remains in water or parasitic on algae or higher plants, includes some forty
species (Matthews, 1931). The few other genera include perhaps a dozen species.
Zoophagus produces specialized branches which serve as traps for rotifers which are
parasitized and killed.
Family 2. Albuginacea [Albuginaceae] Schroter op. cit. 110. Parasites of higher
plants, called white rusts, the masses of conidia which push up and burst through the
epidetmis being of a white color. Albugo.
Family
Peronosporacea [Peronosporaceae] Cohn
3.
Parasites of higher plants, called
in
Hedwigia
downy mildews. The ovoid
solitary or in clusters, not in chains,
11:
18 (1872).
conidia are produced
on elongate conidiophores, usually branched,
projecting through the stomata of the hosts. This numerous group includes the
agents of some of the most important diseases of cultivated plants. Plasmopara
downy mildew
cola, causing
of potatoes
Order
which produced the
many
attacking
3.
viti-
of grapes. Phytophthora injestans, the cause of the blight
Irish
famine of 1846. Peronospora, the many species
kinds of plants.
Lagenidialea [Lagenidiales] Karling
in
American Jour.
Bot. 26:
518
(1939).
Suborder Ancylistineae Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil,
Abt. 1 iv ( 1897), for the most part, not as to the type genus Ancylistes.
:
Order Ancylistales Auctt., in part.
Oomycetes of chytrid body type, parasites consisting of walled cells which are
more or less isodiametric, sometimes proliferating or producing rhizoids, but not
forming extensive branched filaments. The cells become multinucleate. Mitotic
figures of Olpidiopsis as described by Barrett (1912) and McLarty (1941) are quite
as in the preceding orders, with sharp-pointed intranuclear spindles apparently with
centrosomes at the poles. In the usual course of events, each cell develops an exit
tube to the exterior of the host, and the protoplast becomes divided into uninucleate
cells which escape as unequally biflagellate zoospores. Fertilization, by the migration
of the protoplast of one cell into another, has been observed; the zygote becomes a
thick-walled resting spore.
1.
Internal parasites without rhizoids.
2.
The
3.
3.
2.
The
3.
cells
not proliferating.
The zoospores diplanetic
The zoospores not diplanetic
Family
Family
1.
Ectrogellacea.
2.
Olpidiopsidacea.
Family
3.
Sirolpidiacea.
cells proliferating.
Marine
Fresh-water
Family 4. Lagenidiacea.
1. External parasites with rhizoids
Family 5. Thrau stock ytriacea.
Family 1. Ectrogellacea [Ectrogellaceae] Scherffel in Arch. Prot. 52: 6 (1925).
Ectrogella, Eurychasma, Eurychasmidium, Aphanomycopsis, with about a dozen
3.
known
diatoms and red and brown algae.
Olpidiopsidacea [Olpidiopsidaceae] Sparrow in Mycologia 34: 116
(1942). Olpidiopsis and a few other genera, with some thirty known species, attacking water molds, green algae, red algae, and other aquatic organisms.
Family 3. Sirolpidiacea [Sirolpidiaceae] Sparrow 1. c. Sirolpidium and Pontisma,
each with one species, attacking marine algae, respectively green and red.
species, attacking
Family
2.
:
82
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Lagenidiacea [Lagenidiaceae] Schroter in Engler and Prantl Nat.
Abt. 1 89 (1893). Lagenidium, Myzocytium, and Lagenocystis^,
with some twenty known species, attacking green algae, rotifers, pollen which has
fallen into water, and the roots of grasses.
Family 5. Thraustochytriacea [Thraustochytriaceae] Sparrow op. cit. 115. The
single species Thraustochytrium proliferum Sparrow was found as solitary cells external on certain marine green algae and red algae which are penetrated by means
of branching rhizoids. Reproduction is by release of naked protoplasts which become
Family
4.
Pfianzenfam.
I Teil,
:
laterally biflagellate after a period of rest.
Class 4.
MELANOPHYCEA
(Ruprecht) Rabenhorst
Order Fucacees Lamouroux in Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris 20: 28 (1813).
FucoiDEAE C. Agardh Synops. Alg. Scand. ix (1817).
Order Fucoideae C. Agardh Syst. Alg. xxxv (1824).
Division (of order Algae) Melanospermeae Harvey in Mackay Fl. Hibern. 157
(1836).
Melanospermeae Harvey Man. British Alg. 1 (1841).
Order Pycnospermeae and tribe Angiospermeae Kiitzing Phyc. Gen. 333, 349
Series (of order Algae)
(1843).
Class Fucoideae J.
Agardh Sp. Alg.
1
:
1
(1848).
Melanophyceae Ruprecht in Middendorff Sibir. Reise 1, part 2: 200 (1851).
Class Melanophyceae Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Sachsen 1: 275 (1863).
Stamm
Fucoideae Haeckel Gen. Morph. 2: xxxv (1866).
Phaeophyceae Hauck in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland
Series {Reihe)
2:
282 (1885).
Class Phaeophyceae Engler and Prantl Nat. Pfianzenfam.
H
Teil: 1 (1889),
Class Dictyotales Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pfianzenfam. I Teil, Abt. 2
ix(1897).
Classes Phaeosporeae, Tetrasporeae, and Cyclosporeae Bessey in Univ. Nebraska
Studies 7: 288, 290 (1907).
Dictyoteae Schaffner in Ohio Naturalist 9: 448 (1909).
CXdiSS
Subclass Melanophyceae Setchell and Gardner in Univ. California Publ. Bot. 8:
387 (1925).
Classes Isogeneratae, Heterogeneratae (with subclasses Haplostichinae
stichinae)
7: 91
and Cyclosporeae Kylin
in
Kungl. Fysiog.
Sallsk.
Handl.
n.
and Polyf.
44, no.
(1933).
Filamentous or thallosc Phaeophyta, yellow to brown in color and living by photoproducing reproductive cells with paired unequal flagella.
These are the typical brown algae. They are almost exclusively marine, being
abundant along with red and green algae on most coasts, and particularly abundant
farther toward the poles than the red and green groups. The lower brown algae are
branched filaments of microscopic dimensions, commonly epiphytic on other algae.
More highly developed examples are thallosc and anchored to rocks. Some of these,
particularly the ones whose English name is kelp, reach great sizes and considerable
elaboration of structure. Papenfuss (in Smith, 1951) gives the number of genera as
about 240, and that of known species as about fifteen hundred.
synthesis,
^Lagenocystis nom. nov. Lagena Vanterpool and Ledingham in Canadian
Jour Res. 2: 192 (1930), non Parker and Jones 1859. L. radicicola (Vanterpool and Ledingham) comb. nov.
Phylum Phaeophyta
The
cells are
[
83
walled chiefly with readily hydrolyzable modified polysaccharides.
mannose units. A polysaccharide of the sugar fucose, with a sulfate radicle to each sugar unit, is also present.
A small percentage of cellulose is present, apparently as the immediate investment
Algin, the soda extract of kelps, consists of chains of oxidized
of each protoplast.
A glycogen- or dextrin-like
1940; Tseng, 1945).
The
dextrosan, laminarin,
and
plastids contain chlorophylls a
is
stored
c (Strain, in
(Miwa,
Franck
and Loomis, 1949) and carotin; xanthophyll is also present in the more primitive
examples. In all examples, there is an additional carotinoid called fucoxanthin, which
produces the brown color. The analytic process of separating the pigments yields
also a sterol, fucosterol, not found in green plants; but this substance, and fucoxanthin,
are found in chrysomonads, green Heterokonta, and diatoms (Carter, Heilbron, and
Lythgoe, 1939).
Cytological study of a considerable variety of brown algae (Swingle, 1897; Farmer
and Williams, 1896; Mottier, 1898, 1900; Simons, 1906; Yamanouchi, 1909, 1912;
McKay, 1933) has shown that the spindle and chromosomes appear within an intact
nuclear membrane which disappears during the later stages of division. A centrosome,
usually with radiating rays,
membrane
each pole of the
Swingle found the
centrosome to be a permanent structure, dividing as a preliminary to each division
of the nucleus. In the generality of brown algae, the centrosomes appear de novo as
is
present outside of the
spindle. In Stypocaulon, a comparatively primitive
brown
at
alga,
division begins.
Swimming
cells are
produced by primitive brown algae as spores and as morpholomost advanced brown algae, such cells are
gically undifferentiated gametes; in the
produced only
as sperms.
The
flagella are attached laterally.
the longer except in order Fucoidea (Kylin, 1916).
The
anterior flagellum
(1946) found in
Ectocarpus that the anterior flagellum is pantoneme, and the posterior one acroneme.
The swimming cells are without walls, and contain, beside the nucleus, usually one
plastid and a light-sentitive speck, the stigma or eyespot. They are quite small. No
system of structures linking the nuclei, centrosomes, and flagella has been discovered.
is
Longest
Thuret (1850) discovered that most brown algae produce swimming cells from
two different sorts, which he named (1855) respectively plurilocular
sporangia and unilocular sporangia. The difference between them is this. In the
developing plurilocular structure, each division of the nucleus is followed by division
of the protoplast and deposition of a wall, with the result that the swimming cells
emerge from separate walled spaces. In the unilocular structure, the nucleus divides
repeatedly before the protoplast divides; the protoplast then undergoes cleavage to
produce swimming cells which emerge from a single walled space. A number of
studies (Clint. 1927; Higgins, 1931; Knight, 1923, 1929) have shown that the first
two nuclear divisions in the unilocular structure are normally meiotic. Unilocular
structures occur normally only on diploid individuals and release haploid swimming
cells. A few exceptional species, however, are known to bear unilocular structures
which produce swimming cells without the intervention of meiosis.
In Ectocarpus siliculosus as studied by Berthold (1881) at Naples, the swimming
cells from unilocular structures are spores which give rise to haploid individuals. In
the same species as studied in the Irish Sea by Knight (1929), they were found to
act as gametes, conjugating and giving rise to diploid individuals. Diploid and haploid individuals of Ectocarpus are alike, and E. siliculosus may be said to have a
facultatively complete homologous life cycle. The haploid individuals produce plurilocular reproductive structures; the swarmers from these act either as spores, restructures of
The
84]
Fig. 15.
— Stages
Classification of
Lower Organisms
of nuclear division in Stypocaulon x 1,000 after Swingle (1897).
Phylum Phaeophyta
[
85
producing the haploid stage, or as gametes, initiating the diploid stage. The diploid
individuals produce both plurilocular and unilocular reproductive structures. The
swarmers from the former are spores, reproducing the diploid body. The swarmers
from the
latter act either as spores, giving rise to
haploid individuals, or as gametes,
reproducing the diploid body.
It is believed that the brown algae arose by evolution from order Ochromonadalea.
Filamentous organisms with a facultatively complete homolgous life cycle, as just
described, are believed to be primitive among them such organisms appear to be the
starting point of evolution in many features. The filaments have become differentiated
and woven into thalli, and thalli of tridimensionally placed cells have been produced.
The haploid and diploid stages have become differentiated. The plurilocular and
unilocular structures have undergone specialization. Even in the most primitive
brown algae, there is a physiological differentiation of gametes; this has evolved into
extreme morphological differentiation. Every one of these evolutionary changes ap:
pears to have occurred in more than one line of descent; research
ing intermediate examples and rather free parallel evolution.
is
constantly reveal-
Conservative classification, such as that of Fritsch (1945), recognizes as orders a
comparatively primitive miscellany followed by a series of small derived groups
marked by distinctive specializations. Features of the life cycle, as applied to classification by Taylor (1922), Oltmanns (1922), Svedelius (1929) and Kylin (1933),
are not reliable as marks of natural groups. Kylin provided three classes (one of
them divided into two subclasses) and twelve orders. His system appears to provide
an excessive number of subdivisions of high category within a moderately small group
exhibiting no very profound evolutionary gaps. Tentatively, the seven orders dis-
may be recognized.
Producing spores, that is, cells which germinate without syngamy.
tinguished as follows
1.
2.
All spores bearing flagella.
3.
Having an alternation of haploid
and diploid stages which are alike,
both being filamentous; or else completely lacking
4.
4.
The
The
one of these
stages.
filaments uniseriate
seriate
3.
Not
4.
1.
Phaeozoosporea.
Order
2.
Sphacelarialea.
Order
5.
Cutlerialea.
Order
4.
SpoROCHNoroEA.
Order
Order
6.
3.
Laminariea.
Dictyotea.
as above.
Haploid stage
thallose, not dis-
developed
than the diploid stage
tinctly
4.
Order
filaments becoming pluri-
less
highly
Haploid stage filamentous, distinctly less highly developed
than the diploid stage.
5. Diploid stage filamentous;
or,
if
partially
or
com-
pletely thallose, the thal-
5.
2.
lose part with apical growth
Diploid stage thallose, its
growth intercalary
Producing large non-motile spores
:
86
The
]
1.
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Producing no spores; all individuals diploid
and reproducing exclusively sexually
Order
7.
FucoroEA.
1. Phaeozoosporea [Phaeozoosporeae] Hauck in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl.
Deutschland 2: 312 (1885).
Order Syntamiidae Areschoug in Act. Reg. Soc. Upsala 14: 387 ( 1850) in part;
a nomen confusum.
Order Ectocarpeae J. Agardh Sp. Alg. 1: 6 (1848), preoccupied by family
EcTOCARPEAE KUtzing (1843).
Section (of Algae Zoosporeac) Phaeosporeae Thuret in Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot.
Order
,
14: 233 (1850).
Phaeosporeae Wettstein Handb. syst. Bot. 1: 173 (1901).
Ectocarpales Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 288 (1907).
Phaeosporales and suborder Ectocarpineae Taylor in Bot Gaz. 74: 435,
ser. 3,
Order
Order
Order
436
(1922).
Microscopic brown algae of the form of undifferentiated uniseriate branching filaments, mostly with distinct haploid and diploid stages (exceptionally lacking the
former), the stages distinguishable only by the limitation of unilocular reproductive
structures to the diploid stage, the gametes morphologically uniform.
The order is typified by Ectocarpus, which is by coincidence also the theoretical
ancestral type of the brown algae, the living organism which supposedly represents
the evolutionary origin of the group. Recent systems of classification limit this order,
formerly construed as extensive, to this genus and a few others, as Pylaiella and Streblonema, which make up the family Ectocarpea [Ectocarpeae] Kiitzing (family Ectocarpaceae Cohn).
Order
9
2.
Sphacelarialea [Sphacelariales] (Oltmanns) Engler and Gilg Syllab. ed.
u. 10:
27 (1924).
Order Sphacelarieae J. Agardh Sp. Alg. 1: 27 (1848), preoccupied by family
Sphagelarieae Kiitzing (1843).
Sphacelariales Oltmanns Morph. u. Biol. Alg. ed. 2, 2: 2 (1922).
Brown algae distinguished from the Ectocarpea only by features of the vegetative
structure, namely that the filaments have large apical cells, and that the cells cut off
from them divide lengthwise without increasing considerably in thickness, with the
result that the filaments consist of tiers of cells. The life cycle is the same as in Ectocarpea. Family Sphacelariea [Sphacelarieae] Kiitzing (family Sphacelariaceae Cohn)
includes Sphacelaria and Stypocaulon.
A
few other families have been segregated.
Order
3. Dictyotea [Dictyoteae] Greville Alg. Brit. 46 (1830).
Tribe Dictyoteae Harvey in Mackay Fl. Hibern. 159 (1836).
Family Dictyoteae Kiitzing Phyc. Gen. 337 (1843).
Order Dictyotaceae Hauck in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland 2:
(1885).
Class Dictyotales Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam.
(1897).
Akinetosporeae Oltmanns
I Teil,
302
Abt. 2
ix
Morph
u. Biol. Alg. 1:
473 (1904).
Order Tilopteridales and Class Tetrasporeae with order Dictyotales Bessey
Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 290 (1907).
Scries Aplanosporeae Setchell and Gardner in Univ. California Publ. Bot.
649 (1925).
in
8:
Phylum Phaeophyta
[
87
Filamentous or thallose brown algae with haploid and diploid stages equally developed, producing large spores without flagella, solitary or few in the sporangia.
Here are placed two families, Tilopteridea and Dictyotacea.
Family Tilopteridea [Tilopterideae] Cohn
only from European coasts.
They
They
is
a small group,
apparently
known
are evidently closely related to the Ectocarpea.
which may become
consist of branching filaments
pluriseriate. In
Haplospora
more so), the haploid stage
minute swimming cells of the structure
(poorly known; but Tilopteris and other genera are even
bears both plurilocular structures, releasing
usual in
brown
algae,
and unilocular
structures
uninucleate protoplasts without flagella.
structures
is
which release
inferred that the
their contents as single
diploid stage bears only unilocular
their contents as single quadrinucleate non-motile spores. It
swimming
that the protoplasts released
eggs, capable,
which release
The
cells from the plurilocular structures are sperms, and
from the unilocular structures on haploid bodies are
however, of reproducing the haploid stage
if
not fertilized; further,
that the nuclei of the quadrinucleate spores released by diploid individuals are hap-
and become on germination the nuclei of
loid,
The
as
many
cells of the
haploid body.
Tilopteridea are believed to represent the evolutionary transition between
Ectocarpea and the following family.
Family Dictyotacea [Dictyotaceae] (Hauck)
genera, Dictyota, Zonaria, Padina,
etc.,
Kjellmann includes about twenty
with about one hundred species which are
commonest on the coasts of warmer oceans. They are thalli of moderate size, erect
and dichotomously branched or appressed and fan-shaped. They grow by the division
of a single apical cell or a row of apical cells in each branch. The cells multiplying
behind the apical cells become differentiated into two tissues, superficial small cells
rich in plastids and internal larger ones with fewer plastids, forming in different
species single or multiple layers of cells.
The Hfe cycle has been
Haupt (1932). There are
studied by Mottier (1898, 1900), Williams (1898), and
distinct male haploid individuals, female haploid indivi-
and diploid individuals, all of the same vegetative structure. The males produce sperms from clusters of densely packed plurilocular antheridia. The females
produce eggs solitary in large oogonia solitary or clustered on the thalli. The eggs
are without flagella. The diploid individuals produce unilocular sporangia of much
the same structure as the oogonia. In Zonaria, each sporangium produces eight nonmotile spores; in Dictyota, each one produces four.
duals,
Order 4. Sporochnoidea [Sporochnoideae] Greville Alg. Brit. 36 (1830).
Order Chordarieae Greville op. cit. 44.
Order Chordariaceae Haeckel Gen. Morph. 2: xxxv (1866).
Orders Desmarestiales and Chordariales Setchell and Gardner in Univ. California Publ. Bot. 8: 554, 570 (1925).
Order Sporochnales Sauvageau
Brown
in
Compt. Rend. 182: 364 (1926).
algae producing motile spores, the haploid stage reduced to scant undiffer-
when thallose with apical
formal characters of the order: it has a haploid
stage of the same structure as the diploid. This is a rather miscellaneous assemblage,
rather arbitrarily separated from Phaeozoosporea on the one hand and from Laminentiated filaments, the diploid stage filamentous or thallose,
growth. Ralfsia
ariea
on the
is
an exception
to the
other.
The haploid body
of the
form
of a short-lived
body of a few undifferentiated
ments, like a reduced Ectocarpus, bearing gametangia reduced to single
cells,
fila-
has
88
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
been demonstrated by Kylin ( 1933, 1934, 1937) in a wide variety ot genera, as Ascocyclus, Desmotrichum, Mesogloia, Eudesme, Leathesia, and Stilophora. In the more
primitive examples, the gametes are not visibly differentiated; in more advanced
ones, as Carpomitra and Desmarestia, different haploid bodies produce respectively
smaller sperms and larger eggs, the latter non-motile.
There is a series of families, Ralfsiacea, Myrionematacea, Myriogloiacea, Mesogloiacea, and others, in which the diploid body consists of filaments differentiated
into different types. In the simplest of these, the germinating zygote produces in the
first place a minute thallus-like plate, generally epiphytic on other algae, one cell
thick, and consisting obviously of branched filaments of limited growth. From this
plate grow erect filaments. Some of these are simply cylindrical and appear nutritive
in function; others are attenuate, and may function in protection or in absorbing
materials from the water; yet others bear the reproductive structures, unilocular or
plurilocular or both.
In the more advanced families, the diploid body, after passing through a Ralfsiaor Myrionema-Vike stage, may produce a compacted column of filaments with a
terminal plate of apical cells. Besides adding cells to the column, the apical plate
gives rise to a fascicle of attenuate hairs projecting forward. Members of the families
Chordariacea, Sporochnea, and Desmarestiacea produce cylindrical or flattened
thallose bodies of tridimensionally placed cells differentiated into an outer layer of
small actively photosynthetic cells and an inner mass of nearly colorless cells. Superficial hairs,
growing
in intercalary fashion,
may become
few,
and growth may become
restricted to a single apical cell.
By
differences in the detailed
guished two orders
among
manner
of growth, Setchell
and Gardner
the thalloid forms just mentioned. It
is
distin-
evident, however,
that the thallose structure (and, likewise, differentiation of gametes) has developed
repeatedly and independently in the present group.
possible to divide
it
Knowledge which would make
into several recognizably natural orders
is
it
not yet available.
Cutlerialea [Cutlcriales] Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 289
Order
5.
Brown
algae producing motile spores, the haploid and diploid bodies being macro-
(
1907).
scopically visible thalli, alike or different.
This is a small group, of one family, Cutleriacea, with two genera, Zanardinia
and Cutlcria, known chiefly from the Mediterranean. In Zanardinia, both haploid
and diploid bodies are erect and rather freely branched. In Cutlcria, the haploid
bodies are of this description, while the diploid bodies are appressed and fan-shaped.
The distinct diploid bodies of Cutlcria were originally named as a different genus,
Aglaozonia. Falkenberg (1879) first showed that Cutlcria and Aglaozonia arc stages
of the same thing; Yamanouchi showed that they are respectively a haploid stage
with 24 chromosomes and a diploid stage with 48.
The growing margins of the thalli consist of laterally compacted filaments growing by the divisions of a band of mcristematic cells which produce free hairs in the
distal direction and a continuous body of cells in the proximal direction. The latter
cells are capable of further division, and produce a body several cells thick, with
small cells rich in plastids on the surface and larger ones with fewer plastids in the
interior.
Haploid individuals bear clusters of stalked plurilocular structures of two types,
almost always on different individuals, the larger ones consisting of fewer cells which
release eggs, the smaller of more numerous cells which release sperms. Both kinds of
Phylum Phaeophyta
[
89
gametes are flagellum-bearing cells of the type usual in brown algae. The eggs are
capable of germination without fertilization, reproducing the haploid stage. Diploid
individuals bear clusters of unilocular sporangia.
It is only in the life cycle that the Cutlerialea are decidedly different from higher
Sporochnoidea such as Desmarestia. Their evolutionary origin is explicable by the
hypothesis of a single mutation which enabled the haploid stage to exhibit the comparatively complicated morphology of the diploid stage, instead of being rudimentary
as in all Sporochnoidea except Ralfsia (and the exceptional life cycle of Ralfsia
would be explained by a similar mutation in some primitive example of Sporochnoidea, such as Myrionema)
Older 6. Laminariea [Laminarieae] Greville Alg. Brit. 24 (1830).
Order Pycnospermeae Kiitzing Phyc. Gen. 333 (1843).
Order Laminariaceae Haeckel Gen. Morph. 2: xxxv (1866).
Laminariales Oltmanns Morph. u. Biol. Alg. ed. 2, 2: 2 (1922).
Order Laminariales Engler and Gilg Syllab. ed. 9 u. 10: 27 1924).
Order Dictyosiphonales Setchell and Gardner in Univ. California Publ. Bot.
(
8:
586 (1925).
Order Punctariales Kylin
in
Kungl. Fysiog, Sallsk. Hand!,
n.
f.
44, no. 7
:
93
(1933).
Brown
algae with motile spores, the haploid stages reduced to microscopic dimengrowing in intercalary fashion.
sions, the diploid stages thallose,
This numerous group, like the preceding small one, is evidently a specialized offshoot from order Sporochnoidea. The familiar examples are the kelps, whose large
diploid bodies are differentiated into definite members. Kylin considered his order
Punctariales to represent the transition to the kelps.
They
are thallose, without dif-
members, but their microscopic and reproductive characters, as observed in Soranthera by Angst (1926, 1927), tend to confirm Kylin's opinion, and
they are accordingly included in the same order with the kelps. Papenfuss (1947)
pointed it out that the Punctariales of Kylin are essentially the same group as the
Dictyosiphonales of Setchell and Gardner.
Sauvageau (1915) first showed that the reproduction of kelps is sexual. The
grossly visible individuals produce zoospores; these, on germination, produce microscopic filamentous haploid individuals, generally of distinct sexes, releasing gametes
from unicellular gametangia. The eggs are without flagella, and it is characteristic
of them that in emerging from the oogonia they become attached at the opening
(Kylin, 1916, 1933; Myers, 1928; McKay, 1933; Kanda, 1936; Hollenberg, 1939).
The same things are true in Soranthera, except that the eggs, although much larger
ferentiation of
than the sperms, are also
The
flagellate.
visible bodies of kelps consist of three kinds of
members, holdfasts (hapteres),
being stout root-like growths by which the individuals are anchored to rocks, and
stalks and blades comparable to stems and leaves. Growth is most active at the summits of the stalks. The histology is the same in all members (A. I. Smith, 1939).
There is a superficial photosynthetic tissue of small cells rich in
fasts and stalks, this tissue is meristematic, adding cells to the
plastids;
on the hold-
within and inwith fewer plastids.
tissue
creasing the thickness. Internally there is a cortex of larger cells
In the center there is a medulla containing trumpet fibers, filaments
whose cells are
expanded where they meet and marked by pit-pairs. In the trumpet fibers of Nereocystis there are actual perforations from cell to cell. The trumpet fibers are not quite
The
90]
—
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Familiar kelps of Pacific North America: a, Egregia Menziesii; h, NereoLuetkeana; c, Macrocystis pyrifera; d, Postelsia palmaeformis. All approximately X /aFig. 16.
cystis
Phylum Phaeophyta
[91
perfectly analogous to the sieve tubes of higher plants; the nuclei remain alive.
The
minute zoospores are produced in unilocular sporangia. These occur on the surface
of the body in dense masses, intermingled with, and protected while young by, specialized sterile hairs.
Individuals of Laminaria consist simply of hapteres, a stalk, and one or more
terminal blades. In various other genera, growth occurs in such fashion as to cause
the blades to split at the base. With further growth, the splits extend to the margins
of the blades and increase their number, while intercalary growth at the transitions
between the stalks and the blades produces elongation and branching of the stalks.
Early explorers described the stalks of Macrocystis pyrifera as reaching prodigious
hundreds of meters, and these accounts have been repeated in
and Crandall (1915) found a maximum
length of somewhat less than fifty meters. The stalks are dichotomously branched
to a moderate extent and bear series of blades, each with a pear-shaped pneumatocyst or float at the base. The stalks of Nereocystis Luetkeana also were said to be
lengths, matters of
textbooks
down
to recent times. Frye, Rigg,
extremely long, but the recent observers did not find them to attain fifty meters. They
are unbranched and bear a single large float from which spring several blades which
may exceed four meters in length. This great organism is an annual, growing and
dying within a year. Postelsia palmaeformis, called the sea palm, grows on rocks exposed to surf. It has erect stalks some 30 cm. tall bearing many pendant linear blades.
Egregia Menziesii has flattened stalks many meters long with fringes of floats and
blades along the margins. Laminaria is widely distributed. Macrocystis occurs on the
northwest coast of North America and in southern oceans. The other kelps which
have
bef:n
On
mentioned are confined to the northwest coast of North America.
where they occur, kelps are used as fertilizer. They have been used com-
coasts
mercially as sources of potash, as
much
1-3%
as
of the fresh weight being
K
as
K2O
(Cameron, 1915); they have been used also as sources of iodine. These uses are not
economic at most times.
Setchell and Gardner divided the proper kelps, of which there are about one
hundred species, into four families. The groups of less elaborate structure which appear properly to be placed in the same order are treated by Papenfuss (under Dictyosiphonales) as six families.
Order 7. Fucoidea [Fucoideae] C. Agardh Syst. Alg. xxxv (1824).
FucoiDEAE C. Agardh Synops. Alg. Scand. ix (1817).
Tribe Angiospermeae Kiitzing Phyc. Gen. 349 (1843).
Order Cyclosporeae Areschoug in Act. Roy. Soc. Upsala 13: 248 (1847).
Order Fucaceae J. Agardh Sp. Alg. 1 180 1848).
Order Sargassaceae Haeckel Gen. Morph. 2: xxxv (1866).
Order Fucales Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 290 (1907).
Order Cyclosporales and suborder Fucineae Taylor in Bot. Gaz. 74: 439 (1922).
:
(
Class Cyclosporeae Kylin in Kungl. Fysiog. Sallsk. Handl. n.
f. 44, no. 7:
91
(1933).
Thallose brown algae, producing no spores, diploid in all stages except the gametes;
the latter being sperms, whose posterior flagellum is longer than the anterior one,
and non-motile eggs. The genus Fucus L. is to be construed as the type genus of order
Fucoidea, class Melanophycea, and phylum Phaeophyta.
Two
families are usually recognized
Fucea [Fuceae]
(others have been segregated). In family
Kiitzing (family Fucaceae Cohn), called the rockweeds, the bodies
The
92]
are
dichotomously branching
flat
there
Classification of
thalli.
Lower Organisms
In family Sargassea [Sargasseae] Kiitzing
Growth is by division
a differentiation of holdfasts, stalks, blades, and floats.
is
of a single apical cell in each branch or
member. There are the usual two tissues, a
and an inner tissue of larger cells which
superficial photosynthetic tissue of small cells
pull apart to produce a spongy or fibrous mass.
The gametangia are borne, mixed with sterile hairs, in pits called conceptacles.
These are clustered, in the Fucea near the tips of branches which have ceased to
grow (these tips are swollen, and are called receptacles), in the Sargassea on special
branches. Rarely, oogonia and antheridia occur in the same conceptacles; not infrequently, they occur in different conceptacles on the same individuals; commonly, they
occur on different individuals. Male and female conceptacles may be distinguished
by color, the male being orange-yellow, the female of the same dark color as the thalli.
Male conceptacles are full of branching hairs bearing minute antheridia. In each
antheridium, the original single nucleus undergoes six successive simultaneous divisions, producing sixty-four nuclei. These become the nuclei of sperms. Female conceptacles contain fewer, larger, oogonia, in which the nuclei divide three times, pro-
—
FiG. 17.
Microscopic reproductive structures of Laminaria yezoensis after Kanda
1938) a, male haploid individual releasing sperms; b, sperm; C, zoospore; d, female
haploid individual of three cells; e, female individual with an egg extnided from the
(
:
oogonium and attached
in the
individuals attached at the
mouth
f,
female individual with two young diploid
All x 1,000.
mouths of oogonia.
Phylum Phaeophyta
[
93
In Fucus, these become the nuclei of as many eggs. In other genera,
is reduced by degeneration of some of them, or of some
of the nuclei before cell division. In Sargassum, Kunieda (1928) found each oogonium to produce a single egg in which seven nuclei undergo dissolution while one re-
ducing
the
eight.
number
mains
of functional eggs
to function.
The
first two nuclear divisions in each gametangium are meiotic. Farmer and
Williams (1896) and Strasburger (1897) showed that the bodies are diploid; Yamanouchi (1909) first gave a full account of the meiotic process. The haploid chromosome number of Fucus vesiculosus is 32. In Sargassum Horneri Kunieda found it to
be 16.
By
a swelling of colloidal material in the conceptacles, the gametangia are forced
out into the water, where they burst and release the gametes. Fucus was one of the
first organisms in which syngamy was observed. Thuret (1855) saw multitudes of
sperms swarm about the eggs, and showed that without sperms the eggs would not
develop. This much had already been observed in frogs and certain fishes; the discovery that the essential process is the union of just one sperm with the egg was not
made until later. The growing zygotes give rise directly to diploid thalli.
The gametangia of the Fucoidea appear to be homologous with the unilocular
sporangia of other brown algae. In the gametangia, as in unilocular sporangia, the
meiotic divisions are followed by a few divisions of the haploid nuclei: the Fucoidea
are not quite perfect examples of the reduction of the haplod stage to the gametes
only. As to which other brown algae may have provided their evolutionary origin,
there is no very satisfactory hypothesis; Sporochnus shows certain resemblances.
Chapter VII
PHYLUM PYRRHOPHYTA
Phylum
3.
PYRRHOPHYTA
Pascher
Order Astoma Siebold in Siebold and Stannius Lehrb. vergl. Anat.
Order Phytozoidea Perty Kennt. kleinst. Lebensf. 161 (1852).
1:
10 (1848).
Cohn in Zeit. wiss. Zool. 4: 275 (1853).
Orders Flagellata and Cilio-flagellata Claparede and Lachmann Etudes Infus.
Flagellata
1:
73 (1858).
Suborder Mastigophora Diesing in Sitzber. Akad. Wiss. Wein Math. -Nat. CI.
52, Abt. 1: 294 (1866).
Stdmme Flagellata and Noctilucae Haeckel Gen. Morph. 2: xxv, xxvi (1866).
Man. Inf. 1: 27, 211 (1880).
Mastigophora and orders Flagellata, Dinoflagellata, and Cystoflagellata
Butschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1, Abt. 2, Inhalt (1887).
Class Peridineae Wettstein Handb. syst. Bot. 1: 71 (1901).
Class Flagellata Kent
Class
Divisions Flagellatae and Dinoflagellatae Engler Syllab. ed. 3: 6, 8 (1903).
Pyrrhophyta, Eugleninae, and Chloromonadinae Pascher in Ber. deutschen Bot.
Gess. 32: 158 (1914).
Stdmme Pyrrhophyta and Euglenophyta, and Abteilungen Cryptophyceae, Desmokontae, and Dinophyceae, Pascher in Beih. bot. Centralbl. 48, Abt. 2: 325,
326 (1931).
Division Pyrrhophyta G.
Protistes trichocystiferes
M. Smith Freshw. Algae 10 (1933).
ou progastreades Chadefaud in Ann. Protistol. 5: 323
(1936).
Phyla Pyrrhophycophyta and Euglenophycophyta Papenfuss in Bull. Torrey Bot.
Club 73: 218 (1946).
Unicellular or colonial organisms, typically with brown or green plastids, flagellate, the flagella solitary or more than one and unequal, the cells marked by grooves
or pits and sometimes containing trichocysts, i. e., minute structures which lie close
membrane and
The organisms included
to the cell
eject thread-like bodies
when
stimulated.
here are the ones conventionally treated as four orders of
pigmented flagellates, cryptomonads, dinoflagellates, euglenids, and chloromonads.
These groups include organisms of the same varied body types, algal, amoeboid, and
chytrid, that occur in other groups in which the flagellate body type is construed
as typical. Peridinium may be considered to be the type of the phylum.
Deflandre (1934) designated as stichoneme [stichonemate) the type of flagcllum
single file of appendages, and which had been discovered by Fischer
(1894) in Euglena. Petersen (1929) reobserved the stichoneme flagellum of Etiglena,
and found it also in other euglenids, Phacus and Trachelomonas. Deflandre found
that one flagellum is stichoneme in various further euglenids (but not in all), and
also in the dinoflagcllate Glenodinium. This is the only report of a stichoneme flagel-
which bears a
lum outside of the euglenid group. The fine structure of the flagella of cryptomonads
and chloromonads has not been determined.
In some cryptomonads, as Chilomonas, the cells contain granules which stain
blue with iodine; if these are not starch, one knows not what to call them. Dinoflagellates produce a so-called starch which gives a reddish color with iodine, and
many of them have walls of a so-called cellulose which gives a reddish color with
Phylum Pyrrhophyta
zinc chlor-iodide.
The
[
95
euglenids store granules of a white solid believed not to be
and called paramylum.
The plastids of cryptomonads and
starch
green, yellow, brown, bluish, or red.
a and
dinoflagellates are of various colors, oflF-color
Those of
dinoflagellates contain chlorophylls
an exceptional chlorophyll which occurs also in Tribonema.
Euglenids and chloromonads are typically of the same bright green color as typical
plants,
e;
the latter
is
and the euglenids are known to have the same chlorophylls, a and
Franck and Loomis, 1949).
b,
as
typical plants (Strain, in
The groups here brought together exhibit family resemblances in details of the
mitotic process, so far as these are known. The nuclear membrane usually persists
through the process. In many examples the chromosomes appear to be present at all
and are quite numerous, elongate, and of the appearance of strings of beads.
In mitosis, quite as one would assume, they divide lengthwise; the point had been
disputed, and was established by Hall (1923, 1925, 1937) and Hall and Powell
(1928). There is a neuromotor apparatus consisting of a centrosome at or near the
nuclear membrane together with one or more rhizoplasts connecting it to as many
blepharoplasts at the bases of the flagella. No spindle has been seen, unless the
peculiar structure, seen in Noctiluca outside of and next to the dividing nucleus, is
such. The centrosomes may lie at the sides of the dividing nucleus instead of at its
ends. In the euglenids and some dinoflagellates the nucleus contains a nucleolus-like
body which does not disappear during mitosis, but divides as the chromosomes do.
times,
There are few reports of sexual processes in this group.
Pascher (1914) united the crytomonads and dinoflagellates in a group which
he named Pyrrhophyta. He and those who follow him leave the euglenids as an isolated group. Tilden (1933) placed the four groups of flagellates with which we are
here concerned in division Chrysophyceae, while leaving the Phaeophyceae as a
distinct division. Her arrangement does not appear to be contrary to nature: the
cryptomonads are apparently not very far removed from the chrysomonads. The
different arrangement here maintained, by which the brown algae instead of the
cryptomonads and so forth are placed in the same phylum with the chrysomonads, is
believed to have the advantage that that phylum as least is well marked by character.
Chadefaud (1936) proposed a group consisting of the four groups of flagellates
here under consideration together with the Infusoria: this on the ground that the
Infusoria also have deeply indented cells containing trichocysts. He did not give
to his proposed group a place in the taxonomic system by assigning it to a category
name: he called it by the French common names protistes
and progastreades. He suggested two ideas: that if a cell marked
by a considerable indentation should become divided into many cells forming two
layers, respectively superficial and against the indentation, the resulting structure
would be a gastrula; and that the gastrula, and, in fact, the kingdom of animals,
might have come into existence in this fashion. Perhaps because of novelty, these
ideas seem far-fetched. So far as it concerns flagellates, Chadefaud's grouping appears
sound and has been followed in giving limits to the present phylum.
and giving
it
a Latin
trichocystiferes
The phylum
is
treated as a single class.
Class
MASTSGOPHORA
(Diesing) Bu'tschli
Classes Cryptomonadineae , Rhizocryptineae, Cryptocapsineae, Cryptococcineae,
Desmomonadineae, Desmocapsineae, Dinoflagellatae, Rhizodininae, Dinocap-
The
96 ]
Lower Organisms
Classification of
Dinococcineae, Dinotrichineae, Euglenineae, and Euglenocapsineae
Pascher in Beih. bot. Centralbl. 48, Abt. 2: 325, 326 (1931).
Classes Chloromonadina, Euglenoidina, and Cryptomonadina Hollande in Grasse
Traite Zool. 1, fasc. 1: 227, 238, 285 (1952).
Further synonymy as of the name of the phylum.
Characters of the phylum.
sineae,
There are about one thousand known species. Clearly, thirteen classes for their
accommodation, as proposed by Pascher, are excessive; perhaps one goes too far
in the other direction in making the entire group a single class. The type of the
class is the euglenid Astasia. This is true because the family Astasiaea was listed
first in the earliest appearance of the traditional group Flagellata or Mastigophora
in due taxonomic form, as order Astoma Siebold, If the euglenids are set apart,
taking with them the class name Mastigophora, the remaining larger class will be
called Peridinea [Peridineae] Wettstein.
The traditional four orders are tenably natural; but that of dinoflagellates includes
about four-fifths of the species, while the chloromonad group is very inconsiderable.
The system will be more convenient if the former order is divided into three, and if
the latter is included in the euglenid order. The resulting five orders are distinguished
as follows:
1.
if present brown, olive, or the
normally two.
Flagella at the anterior end of the cell,
not moving in longitudinal and trans-
Pigmentation
like;
2.
flagella
verse grooves.
3.
Not walled
in the flagellate
con-
not markedly
dif-
flagella
dition,
or not differentiated
as anterior and circumferential
Usually walled in the flagellate
ferentiated,
3.
.Order
1
.
Cryptomonadalea.
condition; flagella respectively anterior
2.
and circumferential
longitudinal and circumferential,
in
2.
Adiniferidea.
Order
3.
Cystoflagellata.
Order
4.
Cilioflagellata.
Order
5.
Astoma.
moving
impressed upon the cells.
Not walled in the flagellate con-
grooves
3.
dition
3.
Flagellate cells with a wall usually
of articulated plates
1.
Order
Flagella attached laterally, respectively
Pigmentation
if
present
typically
bright
green, flagella normally solitary, sometimes
two or more
7 (1903).
1. Cryptomonadalea [Cryptomonadales] Engler Syllab. ed. 3:
Subclass Cryptomonadineae Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam.
Order
ITeil, Abt. la: iv (1900).
Cryptophyceae, including Phaeocapsales and Cryptococcales, Pascher in Ber.
deutschen bot. Gess. 32: 158 (1914).
Order Cryptomonadinae Pascher Siisswassei-fl. Deutschland 1: 28 (1914).
Order Cryptomonadina Doflein Lehrb. Prot. ed. 4: 417 (1916).
Phylum Pyrrhophyta
[97
Order Cryptomonadida Calkins Biol. Prot. 265 (1926).
Orders Cryptocapsales and Cryptococcales Pascher in Beih.
bot. Centralbl 48,
Abt. 2: 325 (1931).
Solitary (exceptionally colonial)
cells, usually with one or two plastids of various
observed in the motile condition, then naked, of dorsiventral (exceptionally isobilateral) symmetry, with two anterior flagella which are not markedly
differentiated or not respectively anterior and circumferential.
The resting nucleus contains a karyosome, i. e., a globule which occupies most of
colors, usually
t
t>.>.
—
c, Chib, Rhodomonas baltica after Kylin ( 1935 )
Fig. 18.
a, Cryptomonas sp.
lomonas Parmecium. d, Cyathomonas sp. e, Sennia sp. f. Vegetative cell, and
All x 1,000.
g, zoospore of Paradinium Pouchetii after Chatton (1920).
its
.
volume and contains most
have observed
of the chromatin.
details of mitosis.
membrane and form
intact nuclear
right angles to the axis of the cell.
Dangeard (1910) and Belar (1916)
The numerous chromosomes appear
a disk- or
No
drum-shaped
figure with
within an
its
axis at
granule more massive than the chromosomes
and divides with them.
About thirty species are known. They may be treated
persists
1.
Flagellate
cells
elongate,
with one
as five families.
plane
of symmetry.
2.
Not
parasitic, flagella not
markedly
dif-
ferentiated.
3.
Non-motile
in
the vegetative con-
dition
3.
Flagellate
dition
in
the
vegetative
Family
1.
Cryptococcacea.
Family
2.
Cryptomonadina.
con-
98
The
]
3.
Amoeboid
Classification of
Lower Organisms
vegetative
con-
amoeboid organisms, the
flag-
in
the
Family
dition
2.
Parasitic
of
ella
swimming
stages
3.
Paramoebida.
respectively
anterior and trailing
Family 4. Paradinida.
Family 5. Nephroselmidacea.
Family 1. Cryptococcacea [Cryptococcaceae] Pascher in Beih. Bot. Centralbl. 48,
Abt. 2: 325 (1931). YdimWy Phaeocapsaceae West British Freshw. Alg. 48 (1904),
in part; Phaeocapsa is a chrysomonad. Family Phaeoplakaceae Pascher 1. c. Solitary
or clustered cells, non-motile in the vegetative condition, reproducing by flagellate
cells of cryptomonad type. Phaeococcus, Cryptococcus, Phaeoplax. Chrysidella includes yellowish cells called zooxanthellae, internally symbiotic in Radiolaria, Rhizopoda, sponges, coelenterates, and rotifers. It is believed that the supposed zoospores
of various amoeboid organisms are actually flagellate reproductive cells of Chrysi1.
Flagellate cells with two planes of
symmetry
della escaping at certain stages of the life cycles of their hosts.
Family 2. Cryptomonadina Ehrenberg Infusionsthierchen 38 (1838). Family
Chilomonadidae Kent Man. Inf. 1: 423 (1880). Family Cryptomonadaceae Engler
Syllab. ed. 3: 7 (1903). Family Chilomonadaceae Lemmermann 1909. Family
Cryptomonadidae Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 159 (1913). Flagellate in the vegetative
condition, the two flagella not markedly differentiated, springing from the anterior
end of the cells, usually from the mouth of a pit lined by granules of some sort.
Cryptomonas and Cryptochrysis have brown or yellow plastids; Chromomonas and
Cyanomonas have blue ones; Rhodomonas has red ones. Chilomonas is a colorless
saprophyte familiar in infusions. The colorless Cyathomonas, also from infusions,
was shown by tJlehla (1911) to be related to Chilomonas.
Family 3. Paramoebida [Paramoebidae] Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 173 (1913).
Schaudinn (1896) discovered the sole known species, Paramoeba Eilhardi, in an
aquarium of sea water. It is an amoeboid organism with the peculiarity that each
cell contains beside the nucleus an additional body which divides when the nucleus
does. The cell may form about itself a shell of debris, and within this may undergo
division into many cells which escape as pigmented swarmers resembling cells of
Cryptomonas.
Family 4. Paradinida [Paradinidae] Chatton in Arch Zool. Exp. Gen. 59: 444
(1920). The sole known species, Paradinium Poucheti, is a parasite in the body
cavity of copepods. The amoeboid cells are linked together by slender pseudopodia
so as to form a network. The reproductive cells have a shorter anterior flagellum
and a longer trailing flagellum.
Family 5. Nephroselmidacea [Nephroselmidaceac] Pascher Siisswasserfl. Deutschland 2: 'llO (1913). Family Nephroselmidae Calkins Biol. Prot. 267 (1926). Cells
isobilateral. Cells disk-shaped, the flagella on the margin: Scnnia. Cells laterally
extended, bean- or kidney-shaped, the indentation anterior and bearing the flagella:
Protochrysis, Nephroselmis.
Order
2.
Adiniferidea Kofoid and Swczy
in
Mem.
Univ. California 5:
108
(1921).
Suborder Adinida Blitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thicrreichs 1: 1001 (1885).
Suborder Prorocentrinea Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 160 (1913).
Desmokontae, including Desmomonadales and Desmocapsales, Pascher in Ber.
deutschen bot. Gess. 32:
158 (1914).
Phylum Pyrrhophyta
Division Desmokontae; classes
[
99
Desmomonadineae and Desmocapsineae; and
orders Desmomonadales, Prorocentrales, and Desmocapsales Pascher in Beih.
bot. Centralbl. 48, Abt. 2: 325 (1931).
Suborder Prorocentrina Hall Protozoology 142 (1953).
Solitary cells, mostly flagellate in the vegetative condition, the flagellate stages
naked or bearing a close wall of two valves, with two flagella at the anterior
end, one extending forward while the other is bent circumferentially and causes the
cell to whirl while swimming.
either
The few known organisms
of this group
Family Adinida Bergh
Morph. Jahrb.
may be
treated as a single family.
273 (1882). Family Prorocentrinen
Stein Org. Inf. 3, II Halfte: 8 (1883). Family Prorocentrina Butschli in Bronn Kl.
u. Ord. Thierreichs 1: 1002 (1885). Family Prorocentraceae Schiitt in Engler and
Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. lb: 6 (1896). Prorocentridae Kofoid in Bull.
in
7:
Mas. Comp. Zool. Harvard 50: 164 (1907). Family Prorocentridae Poche in Arch.
Prot. 30:
160 (1913). Desmocapsa, Haplodiniuni, Desmomastix, Pleuromonas,
Exuviaella, Prorocentrum; minute brown organisms, mostly marine.
Order
3.
CystoflageUata (Haeckel) Butschli in Bronn Kl.
Abt.
u.
Ord. Thierreichs
Inhalt (1887).
Tribe [group of families] Gymnodinioidae Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 161 (1913).
Classes Rhizodininae, Dinocapsineae, Dinococcineae, and Dinotrichineae; orders
1,
2,
Gymnodiniales, Rhizodiniales, Dinocapsales, Dinococcales, and Dinotrichales
Pascher in Beih. bot. Centralbl. 48, Abt. 2 326 ( 193 1 )
Suborders Gymnodinina, Dinocapsina, and Dinococcina Hall Protozoology 143,
147, 149 (1953).
Haeckel ( 1866) made of Noctiluca alone a phylum under the name of Noctilucae.
:
He had
phylar
the carelessness, as
name Myxocystoda
it
appears, to publish in the
same work the synonymous
diagram. In 1873 he used a
third name, CystoflageUata, and Biitschli took this up; in the text of the Klassen
und Ordnungen ambiguously as an Unterabtheilung or Ordnung, in the table of
contents definitely as an order. Allman (1872) had shown that Noctiluca belongs to
the present group. Biitschli did not agree with this opinion, but it is evidently correct,
and Haeckel's name becomes the valid one for the order to which Noctiluca belongs
Typical members of the present order are naked motile cells with brown plastids.
The two flagella are attached near the equator of the cell. One of them extends in a
posterior direction, in a groove called the sulcus. The other extends horizontally about
the cell (generally to the right, in the reversed image seen in the microscope), lying
in a groove called the girdle. The part of the cell anterior to the girdle is called the
epicone, the part posterior to it, the hypocone. From the typical structure as thus
described, there are, as will be seen, many deviations.
The species, of which more than three hundred are known, may be treated as nine
as a label in a phylogenetic
families.
1.
Relatively unspecialized; having stages freely
propelled by two flagella, with a single girdle,
tentacles, and unspecialized eyespots or
no
none; not parasitic;
2.
commonly pigmented.
Walled and non-motile
in the vegeta-
tive condition
2.
Flagellate
in
the
vegetative
condition
Family
Family
1.
Phytodiniacea.
2.
Gymnodiniacea.
100
1.
The
]
Not
as above,
Classification of
Lower Organisms
always without photosynthetic
pigments.
2.
Amoeboid
2.
Flagellate or free-floating.
3.
With multiplied
Family
3.
Dinamoebidina.
Family
4.
PoLYKRiKroA.
Family
5.
Pouchetiida.
Family
6.
Protodiniferida.
without
girdles,
tentacles or specialized light-sensitive organelles
3.
With one
4.
girdle or none.
Cells
more or
less
isodiamet-
ric.
5.
With prominent
sitive
light-sen-
organelles,
some-
times with tentacles
5.
Without
light-sensitive or-
ganelles, with tentacles.
6.
Not exceptionally
large
6.
Reaching exceptional
sizes, to
1
mm.
in di-
ameter
Cells dome-shaped
Family 7. Noctilucida.
Family 8. Lepodiscida.
2. Parasitic
Family 9. Blastodinida.
Family 1 Phytodiniacea [Phytodiniaceae] Schilling in Pascher Siisswasserfl.
Deutschland 3: 61 (1913). Family Phytodinidae Calkins Biol. Prot. 277 (1926).
Dinocapsales, Dinocapsaceae, Dinococcales, Dinotrichales, and Dinotrichaceae
Pascher in Ber. deutschen bot. Gess. 32: 158 (1914). Orders Dinocapsales, Dinococcales, and Dinotrichales, and families Gloeodiniaceae, Hypnodiniaceae, Dinotrichaceae, and Dinocloniaceae Pascher in Beih. bot. Centralbl. 48, Abt. 2: 326
(1931). Organisms with numerous yellow to brown plastids, walled and non-motile
in the vegetative condition, reproducing by gymnodinioid zoospores. Some fifty
species are known; it is only recently that Thompson (1949) has found several of
these in America. Cells multiplying in a gelatinous matrix: Gloeodinium. Cells
solitary, dividing into several which escape usually in the flagellate condition; with
smooth ellipsoid walls: Phytodinium, Stylodinium; anvil-shaped, stalked and with
two horns: Racihorskya; tetrahedral, with horns at each comer: Tetradinium; with
a ring of about six horns: Dinastridium. Tending to produce filaments; marine:
Dinothrix, Dinoclonium.
Family 2. Gymnodiniacea [Gymnodiniaceae] Schiitt in Engler and Prantl Nat.
Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. lb: 2 (1896). Subfamily Gymnodinida Bergh in Morph.
Jahrb. 7: 274 (1882). Gymnodinidae Kofoid in Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard
50: 164 (1907). Family Gymnodiniidae Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 162 (1913). The
typical unarmored dinoflagellates, free-swimming, with sulcus and girdle, without
4.
.
tentacles or a conspicuous light-sensitive organelle,
commonly with photosynthetic
pigments.
The genus which is most numerous in species is Gymnodinium Stein. It includes
both pigmented and non-pigmcnted species, mostly marine, occasional in fresh water,
the girdles nearly equatorial and forming nearly complete circles. The cells readily
become encysted, and the cysts may grow to large sizes, reaching diameters of 0.5 mm.
These cysts have been taken for a distinct genus Pyrocystis. Observed in darkness,
Phylum Pyrrhophyta
the protoplasm in the cysts
is
seen to
[
become luminous
101
in response to disturbance of
the agents of phosphorescence at sea. In Gymnodinium
Lunula the protoplast of each large globular cyst undergoes division into several
the
medium; they
are
among
which do not immediately become
protoplasts
crescent-shaped, deposits a cell wall, and
is
flagellate;
each of them becomes
released by dissolution of the wall of the
cyst. In the crescent-shaped cysts, the protoplasts divide into several which
develop flagella and escape as typical gymnodinioid cells.
In Hemidinium the girdle forms less than a complete circle; in Amphidinium, the
girdle is close to the anterior end of the cell; in Gyrodinium, it forms a steep left
spiral; in Cochliodinium it forms a left spiral of more than one and one half turns.
Family 3. Dinamoebidina nom. nov. Order Rhizodiniales and family Amoehodi-
parent
niaceae Pascher (1931), not based on generic names. Non-pigmented amoeboid
organisms producing crescent-shaped cysts which germinate by releasing gymnodinioid zoospores. Dinamoebidium varians Pascher (1916; originally Dinamoeba, but
there is an earlier genus of this name, and the author changed it).
Family 4. Polykrikida [Polykrikidae] Kofoid and Swezy in Mem. Univ. California
5: 395 (1921). Family Polydinida Butschli (1885), not based on a generic name.
is a single genus Polykrikos, of only three known species. They are colorless
predatory organisms of such a structure as might be produced if a cell of Gymnodinium were repeatedly to enter upon division and fail to complete it. Each elongate
cell bears a single extended sulcus and a series of girdles; with each girdle are asso-
There
ciated the usual two differentiated flagella.
The
Of
nuclei there are usually half as
many
contain structures called nematocysts, whose development
and structure was studied by Chatton (1914). Each nematocyst consists of a conical
wall, with a peculiar operculum at the broad end, surrounding a minute cavity
as of girdles.
cells
containing fluid and a coiled thread. Nematocysts are supposed to be homologous
with trichocysts, and to contribute to protection, or to the capture of prey; the points
They occur only in this family and the following.
Pouchetiida [Pouchetiidae] Kofoid and Swezy in Mem. Univ. of Califcrnia 5: 414 (1921). Each of the gymnodinioid cells contains a light-sensitive apparatus, the ocellus, consisting of a pigmented area and of one or more transparent
globes, of unknown composition, serving as lenses. Most species have nematocysts.
Protopsis, Pouchetia, etc.; Erythropsis, in warm seas, with a prominent tentacle.
Family 6. Protodiniferida [Protodiniferidae] Kofoid and Swezy in Mem. Univ.
California 5:111 (1921). Family Pronoctilucidae Lebour Dinofl. Northern Seas 10
(1925). Predatory organisms, the cells subglobular, without ocellus or nematocysts,
but with a tentacle. Pronoctiluca Fabre-Domergue 1889 {Protodinifer Kofoid and
seem not
Family
fully established.
5.
Swezy 1921);
0.v}'rr/iw Dujardin.
Description of the neuromotor apparatus and process of division in Oxyrrhis
marina by Hall (1925) provides part of the authority for, and is in good conformity
to, the remarks on mitosis included above in the description of the phylum. The
nucleus contains a prominent internal body (endosome) which does not contain the
material of the chromosomes and does not disappear during mitosis. A centrosome,
close outside the nuclear membrane, is connected by two rhizoplasts to blepharo-
plasts at the bases of the flagella.
When
a cell
the daughter centrosomes do not necessarily
the
to divide, the
centrosome divides;
the poles of the nucleus where
chromosomes assemble. Each daughter centrosome appears to generate one
and flagellum to complete the neuromotor apparatus of a
In due course, the endosome, nucleus, and cell undergo constriction.
rhizoplast, blepharoplast,
eel].
is
lie at
102
The
]
Family
7.
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Inf. 1: 396 (1880). The single
and Swezy (1921; usually known
Noctilucida [Noctilucidae] Kent Man.
species Noctiluca scintillans (Mackartney) Kofoid
as A^. miliaris Suriray ) is a predatory marine organism, the subglobular cells reaching
dimensions exceeding 1 mm., luminescent when stimulated and accordingly contributing to phosphorescence at sea. Each cell is marked by an extensive depression
representing the sulcus; the girdle
tions as a cytostome.
is
obsolete.
A tooth in the sulcus
A
part of the area of the sulcus func-
represents the transverse flagellum. Present
are a longitudinal flagellum, minute in proportion to the
cell,
and a prominent
tentacle.
Mitosis in Noctiluca has been studied by Calkins (1899), van Goor (1918), and
Pratje (1921). Adjacent to the nucleus there is a body of differentiated cytoplasm,
as large as the nucleus, called by Calkins the attraction sphere. Before mitosis, the
and flagellum are absorbed. The attraction sphere becomes elongate and
becomes converted into fibers. The nucleus becomes appressed to,
and curved about, the bundle of fibers, and the numerous elongate chromosomes
assemble against this. The two curved margins of the nucleus draw apart along the
bundle of fibers, appearing to draw the daughter chromosomes with them. Division is
completed by constriction of the nucleus and disappearance of the fibers, leaving a
tentacle
its
central part
daughter attraction sphere in association with each daughter nucleus. This peculiar
mitotic process is probably of no phylogenetic significance, being, like the organism
in which it occurs, an aberrant by-product of evolution.
Nuclear division may be followed by division of the cell into two, the entire
process requiring from twelve to twenty-four hours. Alternatively, the nucleus may
divide repeatedly, each division requiring from three to four hours; the numerous
budded off from the cell in small uniflagellate spores. Ischikawa
1891 ) saw conjugation of pairs of cells, and van Goor stated that this is a preliminary
to the production of spores; Pratje, on the other hand, could find no evidence of
conjugation. The spores are believed to give rise by direct growth to cells like the
nuclei produced are
(
original one.
Family
8.
Leptodiscida [Leptodiscidae] Kofoid 1905. Large dome-shaped preda-
tory marine organisms with small flagella or none. Leptodiscus R. Hertwig (1877)
was placed by
Biitschli in
order Cystoflagellata as the sole genus in addition to
a comparatively recent discovery of Kofoid.
Blastodinida [Blastodinidae] Chatton in Arch. Zool. Exp. Gen. 59:
Noctiluca; Craspedotella
is
Family 9.
442 (1920). Ordre Blastodinides Chatton in Compt. Rend. 143: 981 (1906). Families Apodinidae, Haplozoonidae, Oodinidae, and Syndinidae Chatton op. cit (1920).
Dinoflagellates which are parasitic chiefly in copepods and tunicates, also in other
animals and in diatoms. As a general rule, after the parasite has grown to a certain
size, and a multiplication of nuclei has taken place, a part of the protoplast undergoes
division to form gymnodinioid zoospores, while the remainder resumes growth in
the host. Schizodinium, Blastodinium, Apodinium, Chytriodinium, etc.
Order 4. CiUoflagellata Claparede and Lachman Etudes Inf.
Family Peridinaea Ehrcnbcrg Infusionsthierchcn 249 (1838).
Family Dinifera Bergh in MoVph. Jahrb. 7: 273 (1882).
Order Dinoflagellata BiitschU in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs
394
1:
1,
(1858).
Abt. 2: Inhalt
(1887).
Subclass Peridiniales Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam.
lb: V (1896).
I Teil,
Abt.
Phylum Pyrrhophyta
Class Peridineae Wettstein
Handb.
syst.
[103
Bot. 1: 71
(1901).
Division Dinoflagellata Engler Syllab. ed. 3: 8 (1903).
Dinophyceae and Dinoflagellatae Pascher
in Ber.
deutschen bot. Gess. 32: 158
(1914).
Order Diniferidea and tribe [group of families] Peridinioidae Kofoid and Swezy
in Mem. Univ. California 5
106, 107 ( 1921 )
Order Dinoflagellida Calkins Biol. Prot. 267 (1926).
Division Dinophyceae, Class Dinoflagellatae, and order Peridiniales Pascher in
:
Beih. bot. Centralbl. 48. Abt. 2: 326(1931).
Suborder Peridinina Hall Protozoology 144 (1953).
This order is very close to the preceding; its members are distinguished only by
the presence, while the cells are in the flagellate condition, of cell walls, consisting in
most examples of separable
plates.
The name
Cilioflagellata
is
evidence of an early
for a whorl of
This name and most of its synonyms were published as applying both to the
preceding order and this. For almost all of these names the type or obvious standard
example is Peridinium, with the effect that the names belong to the present order.
There are about five hundred species, prevalently marine. Five families may be
error of observation: the circumferential flagellum
was mistaken
cilia.
recognized.
Peridinaea Ehrenberg Infusionsthierchen 249 (1838). Family PeridinInf. 1: 441 (1880). Family Peridiniaceae Schiitt in Engler and
Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. lb: 9 (1896). Ceratiidae Kofoid in Bull. Mus.
Comp. Zool. Harvard 50: 164 (1907). The typical dinoflagellates, of numerous
genera and species. The distinctions among them are largely matters of the detailed
arrangement of the plates making up the walls. Glenodinium, the plates scarcely
distinguishable. Peridinium, Goniodoma, Goniaulax, Ceratium, Oxytocum, etc. The
cells of certain species in various genera are ornamented with prominent horns; in
Ceratium especially the epitheca is drawn out into one long horn, and the hypotheca
into one, two, or three. Goniaulax becomes abundant at certain seasons, is eaten by
shellfish, and renders them poisonous.
The neuromotor apparatus (much as in Menoidium) and the process of nuclear
and cell division in Ceratium Hirundinella were described by Entz (1921) and Hall
(1925). Many nuclei lack the endosome; if present, it disappears during mitosis, as
does also the nuclear membrane. The daughter centrosomes lie at the sides of the
blunt-ended mitotic figure. When nuclear division is complete, the protoplast expands and then becomes constricted in such fashion that each daughter cell receives
certain plates of the wall; each daughter cell then secretes the plates which it lacks.
Zederbauer (1904) reported conjugation in Ceratium. He saw an elongate protoplast with each of its ends covered by a complete cell wall. Dividing cells are of
Family
idae
1.
Kent Man.
quite different appearance.
Families Ptychodiscida, Cladopyxida, and Amphilothida of Kofoid (1907, the
in the feminine; explicitly made families by Poche, 1913) are minor segregates
from Peridinaea.
names
Family 5. Dinophysida (Bergh) Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1:
1009 (1885). Subfamily Dinophysida Bergh in Morph. Jahrb. 7: 273 (1882). The
limits of the plates obscure; girdle near the anterior end; sulcus and girdle bordered
by prominent flanges. Strictly marine, mostly in warmer oceans. Dinophysis, Oxyphysis, Amphisolenia, Triposolenia, etc.
The
104]
—
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Fig. 19,
b, Gytnnoa, Tetradinium javanicum x 1,000 after Thompson (1949).
dinium striatum x 500 after Kofoid & Swezy (1921). C, Gymnodiniian Lunula,
flagellate cells forming in a cyst x 500, after Kofoid & Swezy op. cit.
d, e, f, Dinamoehidium varians; amoeboid vegetative cell, cyst, and production of gymnodinioid
zoospores x 1,000 after Pascher (1916). g, Noctiluca scintillans x 100 after Allman
(1872). h, Peridinium cinctum x 1,000. i, Triposolcnia Ambulatrix x 500 after
Kofoid (1907). j, Amphisolcnia laticincta after Kofoid, op. cit.
Phylum Pyrrhophyta
Order 5.
Order
Order
Order
[
Astoma
105
Siebold in Siebold and Stannius Lehrb. vergl. Anat. 1 10 ( 1848)
Phytozoidea Perty Kennt. kleinst. Lebensf. 161 (1852), in part.
Flagellata Claparede and Lachmann Etudes Inf. 1: 73 (1858), in part.
Flagellato-Eustomata Kent Man. Inf. 1: 36 (1880).
Suborder Euglenoidina Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1 818 ( 1884).
Abtheilung (suborder) Chloromonadina Klebs in Zeit. wiss. Zool. 55: 391
:
:
(1893).
Order Euglenoidina Blochmann Mikr. Tierwelt 1, ed. 2: 50 (1895).
Subclasses Chloromonadineae and Euglenineae Engler in Engler and Prantl
Nat. Pflanzenfam.
I
Teil, Abt. la: v, vi (1900).
Orders Euglenales and Chloromonadales Engler Syllab. ed. 3: 7 (1903).
Orders Eugleninae and Chloromonadinae Pascher Siisswasserfl. Deutschland
1
29 (1914).
Orders Euglenida and Chloromonadida Calkins Biol. Prot. 283, 285 (1926).
Mostly solitary flagellate cells of fresh water, unwalled and capable of contraction
and writhing movement; the anterior end of each cell (in the flagellate condition)
penetrated by a pit, the reservoir or cytopharynx, into which contractile vacuoles
open; having one flagellum, or two, usually unequal, or more, one flagellum of each
being stichoneme; mostly producing a solid storage product, not staining
blue with iodine, called paramylum.
cell usually
Jahn (1946) reviewed this group. He recognized four families, to which one
more, to include the chloromonads, is to be added.
1. Producing paramylum.
2. Flagellum with a swelling near the base,
usually single but formed of two parts
which join below the
swelling;
cells
mostly pigmented.
3. Non-motile and walled in the vege-
Family
tative condition
3.
Flagellate
in
the
vegetative
1
.
Colaciacea.
con-
Family 2. Euglenida.
dition
Flagellum not swollen and usually not
forked near the base; cells not pigmented.
3. Cells without internal rod-shaped
Family 3. Astasiaea.
structures; flagella stichoneme
3. Cells with internal rod-shaped structures; flagella acroneme or simple
Family 4. ANisoNEMroA.
1. Not producing paramylum, storing oil
Family 5. Coelomonadina.
Family 1. Colaciacea [Colaciaceae] Smith Freshw. Alg. 617 (1933). Family
Colaciidae Jahn in Quart. Rev. Biol. 21: 264 (1946). Euglenoid organisms which
are walled and non-motile in the vegetative condition. There is a single genus
Colacium, producing dendroid colonies.
Family 2. Euglenida Stein Org. Inf. 3, I Halfte: x (1878). Family Euglenina
Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1: 820 (1884). Family Euglenaceae
Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. 2: 570 (1897). Solitary
motile cells, mostly with abundant green plastids, the flagella with swellings near the
base, mostly solitary and forked below the swelling. Jahn recognized twelve genera.
Eutreptia has two flagella; Euglenamorpha has three. Members of the latter genus
2.
—
The
106]
Fig. 20.
a.,
Classification of
Colacium Arbuscula
d, Euglena acus.
glena Spirogyra.
siella alligata after
Pascher (1931).
Lower Organisms
after Stein (1878).
Phacus sp.
All x 1,000.
e,
f,
b^ Euglena viridis.
Trachelomonas sp.
EuKleb-
c,
g,
Phylum Pyrrhophyta
[
107
are entozoic in frog tadpoles; some of them are non-pigmented. Three genera having
the typical single flagella are among the most familiar of flagellates. Euglena has
fusiform to cylindrical cells freely capable of writhing changes in shape. Phacus has
flattened cells with a rigid membrane. In Trachelomonas, the protoplast lies loose
in a rigid lorica
which
is
often ornamented with spines; variations in the form and
ornamentation of the lorica have
made
it
possible to distinguish a large
number
of
species.
There are accounts of mitosis in Euglena by Keuten (1895), Baker (1926), Rat(1927) and Hall and Jahn (1929). All observers have seen within the nucleus
a large globule which divides as the nucleus does and appears to guide the separating
chromosomes. Keuten applied to it the term nucleolo-centrosome; the implications
of this term are not confidently to be accepted, and the body will better be called by
the neutral term endosome. RatclifTe's account of mitosis in Euglena Spirogyra is the
most detailed. It appears that division is initiated when the endosome buds oflE a
small granule which migrates to a position just within the nuclear membrane and
divides. The resulting granules may be regarded as centrosomes. The nucleus moves
forward within the cell and comes into contact with the cell membrane at the bottom
of the reservoir. Each centrosome appears to generate, just within the cell membrane,
a granule recognizable as a blepharoplast; the nucleus then withdraws from the cell
membrane, but the centrosomes remain connected to the blepharoplasts by rhizocliffe
plasts.
a
new
The
flagellum, already split at the base, divides throughout its length into two;
flagellum-base grows out from each blepharoplast and becomes fused to one
of the halves of the old one not far
from the base of the
latter.
Meanwhile, withm
the intact nuclear membrane, the chromosomes and endosome are dividing. The
centrosomes are at the sides of the dividing nucleus. No spindle has been recognized.
is completed by constriction of the membrane. The cell divides by
which proceeds longitudinally from the anterior end. The centrosomes
and rhizoplasts disappear, to be replaced during the next division by new ones.
Hall and Hall and Schoenborn (in several papers, 1938, 1939) have reported
experiments on nutrition in Euglena. All species are capable of photosynthesis. Some
of them, surprisingly, have lost the capacity to synthesize amino acids which usually
accompanies photosynthesis; and there are transitional species in which some individuals possess the capacity to make amino acids and others do not, evidently as
Nuclear division
constriction
heritable characters.
Astasiaea Ehrenberg Infusionsthierchen 100 (1838). Family Astasiidae
375 ( 1880) Family Astasiina Biitschli in Bronn. Kl. u. Ord. Thier1
reichs 1 826 ( 1884) Family Astasiaceae Senn in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam.
I Teil, Abt. la: 177 (1900). Colorless organisms. Deflandre found the flagella stichoneme, as to the single flagella of Astasia and Menoidium, and as to one of the two
flagella of Distigma. Hall and Jahn (1929) found the flagella not swollen near the
Family
3.
Kent Man.
:
base.
The
Inf.
.
:
.
internal rod-shaped structures
which characterize the following family are
absent.
Belar (1915) described mitosis in Astasia, and Hall (1923) described it in
Menoidium. There is a blepharoplast at the base of the flagellum, and some preparations show a rhizoplast connecting this to a centrosome immediately outside the
nuclear membrane. The blepharoplast divides during the early stages of mitosis, and
The daughter centrosomes mark the loci
toward which the dividing chromosomes move. The chromosome number appears to
be 12. A dividing endosome like that of Euglena is present.
the flagellum appears to divide lengthwise.
108]
The
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Scytomonas pusilla Stein {Copromonas subtilis Dobell) occurs in the
and toads. When cast out with the feces, it exhibits conjugation
of frogs
liminary to encystment (Dobell, 1908).
Family 4. Anisonemida [Anisonemidae] Kent
Man.
Inf. 1:
intestines
as a pre-
429 (1880). Families
Pernamina and Anisonemina Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1 824, 828
(1884). Family Peranemaceae Senn in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil,
Abt. la: 178 (1900). Family Heteronemidae Calkins Biol. Prot. 285 (1926). Each
cell of these colorless organisms bears one conspicuous anterior flagellum; most of
them bear also a less conspicuous trailing flagellum. The trailing flagellum of Peranema is grown fast to the cell membrane, and is detected only with difficulty (Hall,
:
b, c. Stages of mitosis in Menoidium incurvum
Fig. 21.— a, Menoidium incurvum.
X 2,000 after Hall (1923). d, e, Peranema trichophorum. i, Stage of division in
Peranema trichophorum after Hall (1934). g, Anisoncma truncatum. h, Entosipon sulcatum, i-m, Vacuolaria viridis: i, cell; j, neuromotor apparatus after Fott
(1935); k-m, stages of mitosis x 2,000 after Fott, op cit. x 1,000 except as noted.
Phylum Pyrrhophyta
[
109
1934). Deflandre was unable to find appendages on the flagella of members of this
As in other members of the order, the flagella spring from a deep anterior pit
in the cell; in this family, the pit is a functional cytopharynx (Hall, 1933). The cytofamily.
plasm of Peranema contains three
brief rods, the pharyngeal rods or Staborgane,
lying near the cytopharynx; their function
is unknown. Each cell of Urceolus, of
Anisonema, and of Heteronema contains a single conspicuous rod extending the length
of the body. Hall and Powell (1928) and Hall (1934) described the mitotic process
in Peranema, which is much as in Menoidium.
Family Coelomonadina Butschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreachs 1 819 (1884).
Family Vacuolariaceae Luther in Bihang Svensk. Vetensk-Akad. Handl. 24, part 3,
no. 13: 19 (1889). Family Chloromonadaceae Engler Syllab. ed 3: 7 (1903). Family
Thaumatonemidae Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 155 (1913). Family Chloromonadidae
:
HoUande
in Grasse Traite Zool.
Hollande op.
cit.
flagella springing
1,
fasc. 1:
235 (1952); family Thaumatomonadidae
686. Unicellular organisms, mostly green, with two diiTerentiated
from a large
reservoir,
producing globules of
oil
but no solid storage
product. Klebs apologized for erecting the grossere Abtheilung Chloromonadina for
the single genus Vacuolaria, and in fact, this genus differs from other
members
of the
present order only in one conspicuous character, the failure to produce paramylum.
Fott (1935) studied the cytology of Vacuolaria.
rhizoplast extends into the cytoplasm, but fails to
From
come
the base of each flagellum, a
into contact with the nucleus.
Several granules or swellings, not definitely identifiable as blepharoplasts or centrosomes, are distributed along the length of each rhizoplast. In mitosis, which takes
place within an intact nuclear membrane, the numerous subglobular chromosomes
figure much as in Chilomonas. Genera believed to be allied to
Vacuolaria include the green flagellate Goniostomum; Chysophaeum Lewis and
Bryan (1941), a marine organism forming non-motile yellow dendroid colonies of
m.acroscopic dimensions; and the colorless flagellate Thaumatomastix Lauterborn
form a blunt-ended
(originally
name).
named Thaumatonema, but
there
is
among
plants an older genus of this
:
Chapter
VHI
PHYLUM OPISTHOKONTA
Phylum
4.
OPISTHOKONTA, phylum novum
Chytridieae de Bary in Bot. Zeit. 16, Beil. 96 (1858).
Family Chytridieen de Bary and Woronin (1864).
Family Chytridiaceae Cohn in Hedwigia 11: 18 (1872).
Chytridineae Schroter in Engler and Frantl Nat. Pflanzenfam.
I Teil,
Abt.
1
62 (1892).
Series (Reihe) Archimycetes (Chytridinae) A. Fischer in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland 1, Abt. 4: 11 (1892).
Suborders Chrytidiineae and Monoblepharidineae Engler in Engler and Prantl
Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. 1: iii, iv (1897).
Order Chytridineae Campbell Univ. Textb. Bot. 152 (1902).
Classes Archimycetae and Monoblepharideae Schaff'ner in Ohio Naturalist 9:
447,449 (1909).
Class Archimycetes Gaiimann Vergl. Morph. Pilze 15 (1926).
Uniflagellatae Sparrow Aq. Phyc. 21 (1943).
Parasites and saprophytes of simple structure (filamentous, of uniform diameter
or tapering; or unicellular, with or without rhizoids,
growths), with
cell walls of chitin,
i.
e.
tapering filamentous out-
containing no cellulose; producing motile cells
with solitary posterior acroneme flagella. Type, Chytridium Olla Braun. From
KOVT6q^oar.
6tt[o9ioc;, rearward, and
Chytrid is the English form of the generic name Chytridium, from Greek )(UTp(<;,
a jug. Braun (1856) applied this name to a colorless unicellular organism found
attached to green algae whose cells are penetrated by rhizoids which draw food from
them and kill them. By chytrids we mean organisms of body types of the general
nature of that of Chytridium. All such organisms were formerly treated as a single
taxonomic group. Couch (1938, 1941) showed that the organisms of chytrid body
type form three markedly distinct groups distinguished by types of flagellation. The
proper chytrids, those which legitimately constitute a taxonomic group, are marked
by swimming cells with solitary posterior acroneme flagella, and further by lack of
cellulose in the cell walls. The group thus marked includes, beside organisms of
chytrid body type, a few organisms of the filamentous body type of the typical fungi.
The cytoplasm of members of this group is described as peculiarly lustrous and
as containing shining globules. In mitosis (seen repeatedly, as by Dangeard, 1900,
Stevens and Stevens, 1903, Wager, 1913, and Karling, 1937), the sharp-pointed
spindle forms within the intact nuclear membrane. Some observers have seen centrosomes at the poles. The nuclear membrane disappears toward the end of the process.
The formation of motile cells (zoospores and sometimes gametes) occurs in enlarged cells. In these cells there are repeated simultaneous nuclear divisions. After
the last of these, uninucleate protoplasts, each one containing, ordinarily, one of the
above-mentioned shining globules, are separated by cleavage. On each of these
protoplasts a flagellum grows from the cell membrane at the point nearest that part
of the nucleus which represents a pole of the previous mitotic spindle. Among the
Blastocladiacea, the nucleus lies against the cell membrane and the flagellum appears
to spring from a granule within it (Cotner, 1930; Hatch, 1935). Similarly, in Clado-
Phylum Opisthokonta
[111
chytrium, it appeared to Karling (1937) that the nucleolus generates the flagellum.
Within the developing swimming cell a body of granules assembles and produces a
"cap," prominent in stained material, on the anterior side of the nucleus, that is, on
the side away from the flagellum.
Nowakowski (1876) observed sexual processes in Polyphagus, and Scherffel
(1925) observed them in many other chytrids. Sexual processes were known in
Monoblepharis from the discovery of this genus, and have been studied in detail in
Allomyces by Emerson (1939, 1941) and Emerson and Wilson (1949).
The group thus characterized is of fewer than three hundred known species. One
takes no satisfaction in making it a phylum, but feels constrained to do so by its
isolation. Note has been taken that other groups including organisms of chytrid
body type, as Hyphochytrialea, Lagenidialea, and Phytomyxida, have nothing to do
with the proper chytrids. Furthermore, it will not do to thrust the proper chytrids
in with the groups of colorless flagellate and amoeboid organisms treated below as
phylum Protoplasta. One does not trust that group as natural, but it has a morpological continuity which would be defaced by the addition of this one.
Vischer, 1945, coined the name Opistokonten for organisms whose motile cells
have posterior flagella. Gams (1947) listed as such the green organisms Pedilomonas
and Chlorochytridion; the choanoflagellates; the proper chytrids; the Sporozoa (the
whole group by virtue of such examples as have flagellate stages); and the proper
animals. He inferred that these groups make up a major natural group derived
from the lowest green algae. This interesting hypothesis must as yet be treated as
far-fetched. Pedilomonas is scarcely known; it was described by Korschikoff, 1923,
as a green flagellate of somewhat the appearance of a Chlamydomonas lacking one of
its flagella. The flagella of the choanoflagellates are pantacroneme instead of acroneme. There remains a striking resemblance between the motile cells of the proper
chytrids and the sperms of animals. The nuclear cap of the former is quite similar,
in development and structure, to the beak of the latter.
The Opisthokonta are reasonably treated as a single class.
Class
Synonymy
ARCHIMYCETES
(A.
Fischer) SchaflFner
of the phylum.
Characters of the phylum.
Previous authors have arranged these organisms in a sequence from strictly unicellular forms to typically filamentous forms. In the following treatment, this sequence
seems reasonis reversed. The course of the evolution of the group is unknown, and it
Oomycetes.
The class
among
the
as
sequence
same
the
in
types
the
body
able to place
and Chytridinea,
is treated as two orders, Monoblepharidalea, essentially filamentous,
unicellular or producing filaments
Order
1.
which taper or are swollen
Monoblepharidalea [Monoblepharidales] Sparrow
at intervals.
in
Mycologia 34: 115
(1942).
Suborder Monoblepharidineae Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam.
I Teil,
Abt.
(1897).
Blastocladiincae Petersen in Bot. Tidsskr. 29: 357 (1909).
1: iv
Order Blastocladiales Sparrow
1.
c.
Opisthokonta whose bodies consist of filaments of uniform diameter, or are of
types apparently immediately derived from this. Saprophytes in fresh water or soil,
chiefly on vegetable remains. There are two families.
112
The
]
Family
1.
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Monoblepharidacea [Monoblepharidaceae] A. Fischer in Rabenhorst
1, Abt. 4: 378 (1892). Gonapodiineae and Gonapodiaceae
Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland
Petersen in Bot. Tidsskr. 29: 357 (1909). Producing extensive coenocytic filaments,
non-septate but with false septa of cytoplasm, anchored by rhizoids, reproducing
asexually by zoospores produced in sporangia which are usually terminal on the
produced in smaller antheridia and larger oogonia which are
more familiar forms terminal and subterminal on the filaments, the branches
commonly proliferating below them, the eggs without flagella.
filaments, the gametes
in the
The species, about a dozen, form three genera. In Monoblepharis, the zygote,
being the entire protoplast of the oogonium, moves out of the oogonium through a
terminal pore, becomes attached in the opening, and develops a thick wall. In
Monoblepharella the zygote, retaining the flagellum of the sperm, swims for a time
before becoming encysted. Gonapodya resembles Monoblepharella (Johns and Benjamin, 1954). Myrioblepharis Thaxter is believed not to be an organism; it is described as something
which might be produced
if
sporangia of Monoblepharis were
parasitized by an infusorian.
Family
2.
Blastocladiacea [Blastocladiaceae] Petersen in Bot. Tidsskr. 29: 357
(1909). Coenocytic filaments, in some examples of a false appearance of septation,
of the body type of the Rhipidiacea, i. e., differentiated into a basal cell anchored
by rhizoids and distal branches bearing reproductive structures, sometimes so re-
duced that the basal
cell bears,
or
is itself,
the reproductive structure; the reproduc-
tive structures including thin-walled zoosporangia, thick-walled resting spores
which
germinate by releasing zoospores, and gametangia; the gametes morphologically
uniform or larger and smaller, all bearing flagella.
These organisms are not familiar, although they are readily isolated by baiting
pond water, or tap water to which soil has been added, with hemp seeds or pieces of
fruit. There are four genera, Allomyces, Blastocladia, Blastocladiella, and Sphaerocladia, with about twenty-five known species. Allomyces is of interest for varied life
cycles, and Blastocladia for a peculiar type of metabolism.
The first known species of Allomyces, A. Arbuscula, was discovered by Butler
(1911) on dead flies in water in India. The individuals are of the appearance of
minuscule shrubs, the branches divided by pseudosepta punctured in the middle and
ending in series of varicolored reproductive structures. Ordinary sporangia are
colorless, resting spores are brown, mature antheridia are pink, and mature oogonia
dull gray. Kniep (1929), in discovering the second species, A. javanicus, found that
the individuals are of two types, one bearing sporangia and resting spores, the other
oogonia and antheridia. Thus this organism has a complete life cycle of morphologically homologous haploid and diploid individuals. Kniep supposed that meiosis
occurs in the resting spores, and Emerson and Wilson (1949) established the point.
The chromosome number (n) oi A. Arbuscula is 7; that of A. javanicus var. macrogynus and of A. cystogenes is 14.
The life cycle of A. Arbuscula is the same as that of A. javanicus. In A. cystogenes,
the haploid stage consists merely of the zoospores from the resting spores; these
become encysted and germinate by releasing isogametes. Thus this species has a life
cycle essentially of the advanced type characteristic of animals. There are further
species of Allomyces in which a sexual cycle is believed not to occur.
In Blastocladia the basal cell bears directly multiple reproductive structures.
Organisms of this genus are less easily cultured than Allomyces; they require several
vitamins of the B group (Cantino, 1948). They tolerate oxygen, but do not require it.
Phylum Opisthokonta
They
[113
convert sugars to lactic and succinic acids, producing no CO2; the acids,
if
not
neutralized, check the growth of cultures
(Emerson and Cantino, 1948; Cantino,
1949). Blastocladia appears to have lost the capacity to carry on the aerobic stages of
energesis, thus reverting to the type of metabolism characteristic of the supposedly
most primitive bacteria.
In Blastocladiella, the basal
cell
bears a single reproductive structure. DiflFerent
same three types of life cycle which occur in Allomyces (Couch and
WhiflFen, 1942). In Sphacrodadia the vegetative body is reduced to the unicellular
condition which is characteristic of the following order rather than of this. The life
cycle is of the complete homologous type.
species have the
Order
2.
Chytridinea [Chytridineae] (Schroter)
Campbell Univ. Textb. Bot.
152 (1902).
Orders Myxochytridinae and My cocky tridinae A. Fischer in Rabenhorst Kryptog. Fl. Deutschland 1, Abt. 4: 20, 72 (1892), not based on generic names.
Order Chytridiales Auctt.
Further synonymy as of the name of the phylum.
Opisthokonta which consist entirely or largely of more or less isodiametric bodies
called centers: the centers may send out filaments more slender than themselves,
generating at their ends further centers; or may be capable only of producing rhizoids,
i.
e.,
tapering absorptive filaments; or
The
higher plants.
They
may be by
commonly thought
chytrids are
themselves complete individuals.
of as prevalently parasitic
on algae and
attack also rotifers, insects, nematodes, and other minute animals;
some
parasitize other chytrids (Karling, 1942, 1948). It is probable, however, that
the majority of the group are saprophytic on organic remains. Some have been
cultured with no other organic food than cellulose (Haskins, 1939); new forms
have been discovered by baiting with, and culturing on, chitin (Karling, 1945;
Hanson, 1946) or keratin (Karling, 1946, 1947).
The
settling
following varieties of vegetative structure may be noted, (a) A zoospore,
upon the surface of an appropriate host or substratum, may penetrate this
by means of a walled filament which develops a terminal center; the center then
sends out rhizoids, and also filaments which generate further centers, (b) Development may be as above except that only one center is formed. The body thus described
is
of the Entophlyctis type of
Sparrow (1943).
the single center, penetrating
body
is
its
of the Chytridium type
of the Rhizidium type
if it is
if
(c)
The
zoospore
may
host or substratum only by rhizoids.
the center
not. (d)
The
is
itself
The
become
resulting
in contact with the host or substratum,
protoplast of the zoospore
may
migrate
and there become a center without rhizoids; the
of the Olpidium type. To the varied bodies thus described, the
into the protoplast of the host
resulting
body
is
following terminology
Pluricentric, with
is
more
applicable:
centers than one;
mono centric, with
a single center.
Intramatrical, the center developing within the substratum or host; alternatively,
in a host, endobiotic.
Extramatrical or epibiotic, contrary to the foregoing.
Eucarpic, the center not constituting the entire body; holocarpic, the center constituting the entire body.
The center regularly remains uninucleate during the vegetative phases and then
becomes the seat of successive simultaneous nuclear division, of cleavage, and of the
maturation of zoospores. Thus it is converted into a sporangium. In many forms, the
—
The
114]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
M
a-f,
o noble pharella Taylori x 1,000 after
germinating spore producing a filament and a rhizoid; b, sporangium releasing spores; c, empty antheridium and sperm uniting with egg; d, sperms
escaping from antheridium and zygote escaping from oogonium; e, swimming zygote;
g-i, Allomyces javanicus x 100 after Kniep (1929); g, asexual
f. encysted zygote,
Fig.
22.
Monoblepharidalea:
Springer (1945);
a,
(Continued bottom
p.
115)
Phylum Opisthokonta
[115
proximal part of the system of rhizoids develops a large swelling called the aposporangium as an outgrowth. In
these circumstances, the center is sometimes called an apophysis, but were better
called a presporangium. The sporangium discharges its spores, usually, through one
or more tubes which grow forth from it. The tube may open through a difTerentiated
cap, the operculum; the production of opercula appears to mark a natural subordi-
physis. In other forms, the center generates the
nate group.
Syngamy occurs in different chytrids in most of the possible fashions, by union of
swimming cells, by the union of a swimming cell with a stationary one,
or by the establishment of contact by growth. The zygote regularly becomes a thick-
like or unlike
walled resting spore (asexual resting spores are also of frequent occurrence). Resting
spores germinate by producing zoospores. Meiosis has not been observed, but is believed to occur during the first nuclear divisions in the germinating zygote; the life
cycle is apparently of the primitive type, in which all cells except the zygote are
haploid {Phy so derma, or at least some of its species, is believed to be exceptional).
Sparrow (1943) recognized nine families. One of these does not appear tenable;
the remainder are distinguished as follows:
1.
Sporangia not opening through opercula.
2. Eucarpic, i. e., producing rhizoids and
sometimes other filaments, the centers
not constituting the entire body.
3.
Pluricentric
3.
Monocentric.
4.
Germinating
ing
the
as
a
Family
2.
Phlyctidiacea.
Family
3.
Rhizidiacea.
Family
4.
Synchytriacea.
Family
5.
Achlyogetonacea.
Family
6.
Olpidiacea.
Zoospores themselves becoming centers, and subsequently
sporangia or presporangia
2.
Cladochytriacea.
distinct
body
4.
1.
generat-
spores
center
Family
without rhizoids, the
individual consisting entirely of one or
Holocarpic,
more
i.
e.,
centers.
becoming
presporangia,
3.
Centers
3.
each one generating a cluster of
sporangia
Centers proliferating, giving rise to
linear series of sporangia
Each center becoming one spor-
3.
angium
individual with light sporangia and dark resting cells with pitted walls; h, branch of
sexual individual, the oogonia larger and darker than the antheridia; i, gametes.
j-m, Allomyces Arbuscula after Hatch (1935); j, k, gametes, x 1,000; 1, m, mitotic
n-r, Blastocladiella cystogena, x 500, after Couch
figures in the gametangia, x 2,000.
and WhifFen (1942); n, individual producing a resting spore; O, resting spore germ-
numerous naked protoplasts; these become flagellate zoospores,
which subsequently encyst; q, the protoplast of each cyst divides to produce four
gametes; r, young zygote with the flagella of both gametes.
inating by release of
p,
—
The
116]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
'
B^^
Polyphagus Euglenae attacking cells of Euglena,
X 400, after Nowakowski (1876); in figure b, two individuals have made contact
and a zygote is developing at the point of junction; c, sporangium, d-i, Olpidium
Allomycetos attacking Alomyces anomalus, x 1,000, after Karling (1948); d, e, zoofiG.
spores;
23.
f,
Chytridinea:
a-c,
sporangium of the host beset with many parasites; g, h, resting
and resting cells of the parasite;
host containing respectively sporangia
tion of resting cell.
cells of the
i,
germina-
Phylum Opisthokonta
1.
[117
Sporangia opening through opercula.
Family 7. Nowakowskiellacea.
Pluricentric
Family 8. Chytridiacea.
Monocentric
Family 1. Cladochytriacea [Cladochytriaceae] Schroter in Engler and Prantl Nat.
Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. 1: 80 (1892). Family Hyphochytriaceae [Cladochytriaceae) A. Fischer in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland 1, Abt. 4: 131 (1892), in
part. Family Physodermataceae Sparrow Aq. Phyc. 304 (1943). Pluricentric chytrids,
the sporangia not operculate. The members of this family are of the same body type
2.
2.
(designated by Karling, 1931, the rhizo mycelium) as the anisochytrid Hyphochy-
trium and the Nowakowskiellacea of the present order. In most Cladochytriacea the
rhizomycelium includes pairs of swollen cells ("turbinate organs") which give a false
appearance of conjugation. There are some forty known species, mostly of two
genera, Cladochytrium, saprophytic in vegetable remains, and Physoderma (including
Urophlyctis), parasitic in higher plants. Sparrow (1946, 1947) discovered in certain
species of Physoderma an alternation of morphologically distinguishable generations,
both on the same hosts; the generations are presumably haploid and diploid, but this
has not been established by observation of syngamy and meiosis. Polychytrium grows
well only on chitin (Ajello, 1948).
Family 2. Phlyctidiacea [Phlyctidiaceae] Sparrow in Mycologia 34: 114 (1942).
Family Sporochytriaceae [Rhizidiaceae, Polyphagaceae) subfamily Metasporeae A.
Fischer in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland 1, Abt. 4: 85 (1892). Monocentric
eucarpic chytrids, the centers developed at the ends of filaments which grow from the
zoospores, sporangia without opercula.
These are the most familiar chytrids. There are more than one hundred species.
are parasitic, on blue-green and green algae, diatoms, pollen grains, nematodes,
and other minute fresh-water life; others are saprophytic, on cellulose, chitin, or
keratin. Rhizophidium, the most numerous genus; Phlyctidium, Phlyctorhiza, Ento-
Many
phlyctis, Diplophlyctis, Loborhiza, etc.
Rhizidiacea [Rhizidiaceae] Schroter in Engler and Prantl Nat. PflanzenAbt. 1: 75 (1892). Family Sporochytriaceae [Rhizidiaceae, Polyphagaceae) A. Fischer in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland 1, Abt. 4: 85 (1892)
and subfamily Orthosporeae op. cit. 124. Monocentric eucarpic chytrids, the zoospores
enlarging and becoming centers, which in turn become sporangia or presporangia; the
Family
fam.
3.
I Teil,
sporangia without opercula.
A
moderate number of
species, parasitic
on blue-green
or green algae, flagellates, or diatoms; or chitinophilous, saprophytic in the shed
insects. Rhizidium, Siphonaria, Asterophlyctis, Polyphagus, etc.
Polyphargus Euglenae Nowakowski (1876) is a classic example. The centers lie free
in the water, parasitizing cysts of Euglena through freely branching and widely
spreading rhizoids. Most centers act as presporangia. Syngamy occurs when a rhizoid
from one center makes contact with another center. The protoplasm of the latter
exoskeletons of
migrates into the tip of the rhizoid, which swells and becomes a resting spore.
Family 4. Synchytriacea [Synchytriaceae] Schroter op. cit. 71. Family Merolpidiaceae [Synchytriaceae) A. Fischer op. cit. 45. Holocarpic chytrids, the intramatrical cell unwalled in the vegetative condition, becoming a presporangium or a
resting spore, either of which gives rise to a cluster of sporangia. Synchytrium,
on higher plants; Micromycopsis on Conjugatae.
5. Achlyogetonacea [Achlyogetonaceae] Sparrow in Mycologia 34: 114
(1942). Chytrids without rhizoids, the intramatrical center proliferating and producing a linear series of centers, each of which becomes a sporangium without an
parasitic
Family
The
118]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
operculum. Achlyogeton, in green algae, diatoms, and nematodes; of very much the
appearance of certain Lagenidialea.
Family 6. Olpidiacea [Olpidiaceae] Schroter op. cit. 67. Family Monolpidiaceae
[Olpidiaceae) A. Fischer op. cit. 20. Holocarpic chytrids, each individual a single
intramatrical parasitic center, naked until the reproductive phase, when it becomes
a sporangium without an operculum. Olpidium, attacking blue-green and green algae,
diatoms, flagellates, Allomyces, Vampyrella, rotifers, and nematodes. Rozella, attacking Oomycetes and producing spiny resting spores, has been confused with certain
Lagenidialea. The genera Sphaerita and Nucleophaga of Dangeard, including
intracellular parasites of amoebas and Infusoria, have been placed in this family;
it seems more probable that they should be placed among bacteria of family Rickettsiacea.
Family
7.
Nowakowskiellacea [Nowakowskiellaceae] Sparrow
in
Mycologia 34:
115 (1942). Family Megachytriaceae Sparrow Aq. Phyc. 378 (1943). Pluricentric
chytrids, the sporangia with opercula. A moderate number of saprophytes on material
and higher plants. Nowakowskiella, Megachytrium, etc. Zygochytrium
was described by Sorokin, 1874, as living on decaying insects, producing multiple
operculate sporangia, and exhibiting a conjugation of filaments to produce zygotes
much like those of Zygomycetes. It has apparently not been reobserved.
Family 8. Chytridiacea [Chytridiaceae] Cohn in Hedwigia 11: 18 (1872). Family
Chytridieen de Bary and Woronin in Berichte Verhandl. Naturf. Gess. Freiburg 3
(Heft 2) 46 1864). Monocentric eucarpic chytrids, the sporangia operculate. Some
fifty species, the majority parasitic on fresh water algae. Chytridium, etc. Catenochy-
of green algae
:
(
tridium, saprophytic in cast-off exoskeletons of insects.
Chapter IX
PHYLUM INOPHYTA
Phylum
5.
INOPHYTA
Haeckel
Order Fungi L. Sp. PI. 1 1 7 1 (1 753 )
Hysterophyta Link, 1808.
Classes Fungi and Lichencs Bartling Ord. Nat. 4 (1830).
Regnum Mycetoideum
Fries Syst. Myc. 1: Ivi (1832).
Class Lichenes and section Hysterophyta with class Fungi Endlicher Gen. PI. 11,
16 (1836).
Stamm Inophyta Haeckel
Gen. Morph. 2: xxxvi (1866).
Subdivision Fungi Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. II Teil: 1 (1889).
Division Eumycetes Engler Syllab. ed. 3: 25 (1903).
Phylum Carpomyceteae Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 249 (1907).
Stamm Mycophyta Pascher in Beih. bot. Centralbl. 48, Abt. 2: 330 ( 1931 ).
Kingdom Mycetalia Conard Plants of Iowa iv (1939).
Phylum Eumycophyta Tippo
in Chron. Bot. 7: 205 (1942).
and saprophytes without flagellate stages, the bodies filamentous, the
w;,lls containing no cellulose.
This group represents the conventional division or subdivision Fungi of the
kingdom of plants, excluding, of course, the bacteria, Oomycetes, chytrids, and
Mycetozoa. The name Fungi, used as a scientific name, is properly to be applied,
by authority of Linnaeus, to an order. Agaricus campestris L. will be recognized
as the standard species of the phylum and of the order.
Those who study Inophyta are accustomed to use, for soma and filament respectively, the terms mycelium and hypha. The walls of the hyphae are believed to consist
Parasites
of pectic material.
A
small percentage of chitin
is
usually present (Schmidt, 1936);
(Thomas, 1928; Nabel, 1939; Castle, 1945). The organism
Basidiobolus, having hyphae walled with cellulose, is tentatively retained among
cellulose
is
totally absent
Inophyta as an exception.
The
multiplication and dissemination of those organisms
types, scattered in the air.
them
Most Inophyta produce two
or
is
by spores, of various
more kinds
of spores,
some
produced within cases
are called endospores, and the cases sporangia. Other spores are produced externally,
commonly by constriction of the ends of hyphae. Spores thus produced are called
conidia, and the hyphae or other structures which bear them, conidiophores. Spores
are commonly produced not directly on the mycelium but on macroscopic structures
of various types, all of which may be called by the familiar term fruit. The common
mushroom as we see it is a fruit; it is the temporary spore-producing structure of
an organism whose soma consists of filaments living saprophytically in the soil
of
asexually, others as features of a sexual cycle. Spores
below.
expedient to mention at this point the growths called lichens, which are
taxonomic group, either subordinate to Fungi or of the
It is
traditionally treated as a
same rank. Lichens are gelatinous or
color,
posts.
common
an impure green
trees, or fence
microscope, in the hands of de Bary and others, showed that they consist
of two types, colorless filaments like those of Inophyta, and pigmented
The
of cells
thallose growths, usually of
everywhere, terrestrial or epiphytic, as on stones,
—
The
120]
Lower Organisms
Classification of
character of those of certain algae. De Bary (in Hofmeister, 1866)
concluded that some lichens are not organisms but combinations of totally diverse
organisms. Presently (1868) he was convinced by the work of Schwendener, soon
(1868) published under his own name, ".
dass die Flechten sammt und senders
keine selbststiindigen Pflanzen seien, sondern Pilze aus der Abtheilung der Ascomyceten, denen die fraglichen Algen
deren Selbststandigkeit ich also nicht bezweifle
ah Nahrpflanzen dienen." In 1879 de Bary coined the term symbiosis to designate
the association of different kinds of organisms. In de Bary's usage the term included
parasitism; in general usage, it means association to mutual advantage. The lichens
cells of quite the
.
.
—
are a classic example of symbiosis.
Clearly, the group of lichens
known
to
is not to be maintained; the algal components are
have natural places among algae, and the inophyte components are to be
among Inophyta, almost all in various orders of
Ascomycetes. This has already been done by Clements (1909) and Clements
and Shear ( 1931 ). The numerous names which students of lichens have given to them
assigned to their natural places
class
are to be applied to the inophyte components.
Another
common example
furnished by at least
without killing them
(Kelley, 1950). They occur mostly on roots. Frank (1885) coined the term mycorhiza
to designate the combination of roots and inophytes; it will be more convenient to
hold that this term designates the inophyte component of the combination. Such
mycorhizae as cover the growing tips of roots are helpful to their hosts by serving as
some
of those
which
live
of symbiosis involving inophytes
on or
is
in the tissues of higher plants
agents of absorption.
Jones (1951) estimated the number of species of Inophyta as 40,000. This
surely an extreme underestimate.
is
Martin (1951) gives reason for believing the num-
ber to be about as great as that of flowering plants, of the order of 300,000.
The early classifications of "fungi," as by Persoon (1801) and Fries (1821-1832),
were based on gross characters. They presented, along with recognizable groups
whose names are to be applied in order of priority, others which were mere random
assemblages, and whose names are to be abandoned as nomina confusa. De Bary (in
Hofmeister, 1866; 1884), having applied comparatively modern methods, established
a dozen groups (under German names). These, so far as they are retained in the
present phylum, have been assembled as three classes distinguished by details of the
sexual cycle. A fourth class, acknowledgedly artificial, is maintained for the accomodation of the numerous and important fungi whose sexual cycles are unknown. The
termination -mycetes, of the names of the classes and also of various subordinate
groups, is the Greek ^uKr]T£q, the plural of (auKT^c;, a mold or mildew. The termi-
nation -mycetae which some authors have used
1.
is
a solecism.
Reproducing sexually, or by apomictic processes clearly of sexual origin.
2.
The
becoming a thick-walled
none or inconsiderable
The zygote not becoming a thick-walled
zygote
resting cell; fruits
2.
Class
1.
Zygomycetes.
Class
2.
Ascomycetes.
resting cell; mostly producing fruits.
3.
The
zygotes giving
directly,
each
to
rise,
usually in-
sporangia called
typically
containing
spores called ascospores
asci,
eight
Phylum Inophyta
3.
The
[121
zygotes giving rise indirectly to
conidiophores called basidia, each
bearing
typically
four
conidia
called basidiospores
1.
Not known
Class
1.
to
reproduce sexually
ZYGOMYCETES
Class
4.
Basidiomycetes.
Class
3.
Hyphomycetes.
(Sachs ex Bennett and Thistleton-Dyer)
Winter
Zygomyceten Sachs Lehrb. Bot. ed. 4: 248 (1874).
Zygomycetes Bennett and Thistleton-Dyer in Sachs Textb. Bot. English
(1875).
Class Zygomycetes Winter in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland
1,
ed.
Abt.
847
1:
32 (1879).
Order Zygomycetes Engler Syllab. 23 (1892).
Class Zygomyceteae Schaffner in
Ohio Naturalist 9: 449 ( 1909).
Inophyta whose zygotes are thick-walled resting cells, in germination giving rise to
spores indistinguishable from those produced asexually; hyphae usually without crosswalls; mostly not producing fruits. The standard species is Mucor Mucedo L.
Among the Inophyta as here limited, the Zygomycetes appear to be primitive (an
alternative hypothesis, that certain Ascomycetes are primitive, will be discussed below). Traditionally, the Zygomycetes are associated with the Oomycetes. The association is probably mistaken, being based merely on similarity of body form: the
Zygomycetes are terrestrial instead of aquatic, produce no flagellate cells, have no
cellulose in their cell walls (except in Basidiobolus) and do not produce female
gametes by the cutting out of cells within a cell. In later editions of Engler's Syllabus
(1924), one finds most of the chytrids included among the Zygomycetes, instead of
in their conventional place among the Oomycetes. The hypothesis thus suggested,
that the Opisthokonta may represent the ancestry of the Inophyta, is attractive, but
not to present knowledge supported by convincing evidence. Class Zygomycetes and
phylum Inophyta must as yet be regarded as of unknown origin and treated as isolated.
There are some 500 known species of Zygomycetes. They form two orders. The
bulk of the group, and the typical examples, are order Mucorina. A minority,
distinguished by parasitism and by explosively discharged conidia, are order
Entomophthorinea.
,
1. Mucorina [Mucorini] Fries Syst. Myc. 3: 296 (1832).
Suborder Mucorineae Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam.
Order
Abt.
Order
Order
Order
Order
1: iv
I Teil,
(1897).
Mucorineae Campbell Univ. Textb. Bot. 158 (1902).
Spirogyrales (presumably in part only) Clements Gen. Fung. 12 (1909).
Mucorales Smith Crypt. Bot. 1 405 (1938).
Zoopagales Bessey Morph. and Tax. Fungi 117 (1950).
:
The typical Zygomycetes, mostly saprophytic, not producing explosively discharged conidia [Piloholus produces explosively discharged sporangia).
The asexual reproductive structures of the supposedly primitive Mucorina, as
Mucor and Rhizopus, are solitary globular sporangia terminal on erect hyphae. In
the developing sporangium, a dome-shaped basal sterile area, the columella, is set
apart by cleavage followed by deposition of a wall. The protoplasm above the
—
122]
'I'hc Classification of
Zygomycetes:
Lower Organisms
sporangia x 50; b-d, pregaZygote of Phycomyccs nitens
f, g, Conidiophore with young conidia, and mature conidia,
after Blakeslcc
1904).
h, i, Conjugation of Synceof Syncephalis pycnosperma after Thaxtcr (1897).
phalis nodosa after Thaxter, op. cit.
j, Sporangium of Synccphalastrum raccmosum
k, Sporangium of Flaplospoiangium lignicola after Martin
after Thaxter, op. cit.
(1937), x 1,000.
Fig. 24.
a-d,
Rhizopus nigricans;
mctes, suspensors and gametes, and zygote x 200.
(
e.
a,
Phylum Inophyta
[
123
columella undergoes cleavage to form spores, which may remain plurinucleate
(Swingle, 1903). Other members of the order exhibit transitions (apparently two
distinct series of transitions) from sporangia as just described to typical conidia.
Syngamy occurs when the tips of pairs of hyphae meet and are cut off by crosswalls
to act as multinucleate gametes. The process is regarded as conjugation, although
the gametes of a pair are usually not of the same size. Conjugation does not occur
most Zygomycetes, between branches from hyphae of two mating
and minus (the distinction of mating types is not identical
with the differentiation of sexes). Zygomycetes were the first group reproducing by
conjugation in which a distinction of mating types was discovered; the discovery was
by Blakeslee (1904).
Syngamy is preceded by a flare of mitoses in the gametes. The mitotic figures are
sharp-pointed, as though centrosomes were present; the haploid chromosome number
appears to be 2. The process is not meiotic (Moreau, 1913). After these divisions,
the walls between the gametes break down and the nuclei unite in pairs. Unpaired
nuclei, presumably contributed in excess by one gamete or the other, undergo dissolution (Keene, 1914, 1919). Ordinarily, the zygote enlarges and becomes a thickwalled resting spore; in some examples, the resting spore forms as an outgrowth on
what was one of the gametes. In Phycomyces, Absidia, and Syncephalis, the hyphae
which have produced the gametes, and to which the zygote remains attached, .send
out branches which form a layer about the zygote. These branches might be interpreted as making up fruits. Endogone produces definite fruits of considerable size.
A zygote germinates by production of a hypha bearing a sporangium (Blakeslee,
at
random,
but, in
types, designated plus
1906). Meiosis
is
believed to occur in the course of germination.
While Mucorina in general are saprophytic, some of them are parasitic on others,
Piptocephalis and Chaetocladhim on Mucor, and Parasitella on Absidia. Drechsler
(1935, 1937) discovered a number of organisms apparently of this group parasitizing
amoebas and nematodes in the soil.
The Mucorina may be treated as five families.
1. Not producing macroscopic fruits.
2. Not parasitic on amoebas or nematodes.
3. All spores produced in sporangia
with columellae
3.
Not
4.
Family
1.
Mucoracea.
Family
2.
Piptocephalidacea.
as above.
Producing
sporangia
or
else
conidia as outgrowths from a
homologous with a
sporangium, solitary on an unbranched stalk
Sporangia or conidia solitary
and terminal on branches of a
branched sporangiophore or
knob,
4.
if
sporangia,
conidiophore;
produced, without columellae
Family 3. Mortierellacea.
Family 4. Zoopagacea.
Family 5. Endogonacea.
1. Producing macroscopic fruits
Family 1. Mucoracea [Mucoraceae] Cohn in Hedwigia 11: 17 (1872). Mucorina
whose spores are produced exclusively in sporangia with columellae solitary on unbranched sporangiophores. Mucor L., typified by M. Mucedo, is now limited to a
2.
Parasitic
on amoebas or nematodes
The
124]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
small group mostly saprophytic on manure. Pilobolus, another coprophilous genus,
is distinguished by sporangiophores which become swollen at the summit, bend
toward the light, and discharge the sporangia violently to a distance of several meters.
Rhizopus nigricans, the common black bread mold; Phycomyces, Ahsidia, Sporodinia,
Zygorhynchus.
Family 2. Piptocephalidacea [Piptocephalidaceae] Schroter in Engler and Prantl
Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. 1: 132 (1893). Family Choanephoraceae Schroter op.
cit. 131. Mucorina producing sporangia without columellae, or conidia, in compact
clusters terminal on unbranched stalks. Blakesleea, transitional between the preceding
family and this, may produce solitary sporangia with columellae, or else, as outgrowths from the primordia of sporangia, clusters of minuscule sporangia without
columellae. Cunninghamella, producing heads of globular conidia; Syncephalastrum,
with clustered cylindrical sporangia; Syncephalis and Piptocephalis, producuig
clustered chains of conidia.
Mortierellacea [Mortierellaceae] Schroter op. cit. 130. Family Chaetocit. 131. Mucorina whose sporangiophores or conidiophores
are branched, the sporangia (without columellae) or conidia solitary and terminal
on the branches. Thamnidium, Chaetocladium, Mortierclla, Haplosporangium.
Family 4. Zoopagacea [Zoopagaceae] Drechsler in Mycologia 27: 37 (1935). Mucorina parasitic in amoebas or nematodes, producing conidia. The hosts of Zoopagacea inhabit the soil and are infected by contact with hyphae or conidia. From the point
Family
3.
cladiaceae Schroter op.
hypha grows into the host and gives rise to a mycelium; this is in some
examples reduced to a single coiled cell. The host being killed, the parasite sends
out hyphae which may produce conidia, usually in chains, or else may conjugate and
produce zygotes. Endocochlus, Cochlonema, Bdellospora, Zoopage, Acaulopage,
of contact, a
Stylopage.
Family
5.
Endogonacea [Endogonaceae] Paoletti in Saccardo Sylloge Fungorum
Endogonei Fries. Mucorina saprophytic in soil or wood, producing
8: 905 (1889).
macroscopic subterranean fruits. The fruits may reach a diameter of 2 cm. Within
them, the tips of hyphae are cut off by crosswalls, and develop either into sporangia
without columellae or into gametes.
Order
2.
Entomophthorinea [Entomophthorineae]
(Engler)
Campbell Univ.
Textb. Bot 161 (1902).
Suborder Entomophthorineae Engler
Abt.
in
Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzen-
(1897).
Order Entomophthorales Smith Crypt. Bot. 1: 408 (1938).
Zygomycetes, mostly parasitic, producing explosively discharged conidia [Massospora, while clearly belonging to the group, is an exception to the stated character).
fam.
I Teil,
1:
iv
These organisms, although of the general nature of ordinary Inophyta, exhibit
markedly distinguishing the two families from the generality
of Inophyta and from each other. The position here given to them is the customary
cytological characters
one;
it is
doubtful that
it is
natural.
Entomophthoracea [Entomophthoraceac] Berlese and de Toni in Saccardo Sylloge 7: 280 (1888). Most species are parasitic in the bodies of insects,
whose tissues they replace. The hyphae become divided by crosswalls, and the multinucleate cells thus produced tend to round up and become separate. A well-nourished
cell may send forth a hypha which reaches the outer air and whose tip is cut off and
discharged in the direction of the light. Martin (1925) and Couch (1939) described
Family
1.
Phylum Inophyta
the
mechanism
[
125
The conidiophore ends in a columella projecting into
The columella develops a double wall. Increasing pressure
of discharge.
the base of the conidium.
within the conidium causes a sudden eversion of the wall on the side of the conidium,
and this movement throws the conidium forth to a distance of perhaps 1 mm. Conidia which come down on unfavorable substrata may form and discharge secondary
conidia.
Adjacent
them or
as
cells
may
conjugate, the thick-walled zygote forming either in one of
Many examples produce thick-walled
an outgrowth from one of them.
resting spores without conjugation.
The
Olive (1906) described the nuclei and the process of mitosis in Empusa.
resting nuclei are fairly large, 7-9 [I in diameter. In the course of division,
two
stain-
with strands of chromatin radiating from them. These
becomes dumb-bell shaped. The nuclear membrane
remains intact and division is completed by its constriction. As Olive remarked, the
process is much as in Euglena.
Entomophthora, Empusa, and Massospora attack insects; the first produces zygotes,
while the other two produce asexual resting spores; Massospora does not discharge
the conidia violently. Conidiobolus and Delacroixia are saprophytic. Completoria
attacks the prothallia of ferns. Ancylistes, a parasite in the green alga Closterium,
resistant granules are seen,
move
apart, while the nucleus
was formerly included among chytrids or Oomycetes. Berdan (1938) showed that it
belongs here; it produces conidia and zygotes quite of the character of the present
group, and does not produce zoospores.
Family 2. Basidiobolacea [Basidiobolaceae] Engler and Gilg Syllab. ed. 9 u. 10:
45 (1924). Basidiobolus ranarum Eidam (1886) occurs in the intestinal contents of
frogs and toads as uninucleate cells, solitary or in brief filaments, walled with cellulose. In manure the filaments develop into a scant branching mycelium. The protoplasm gathers in the ends of erect hyphae which are cut off as conidia and discharged.
Conjugation occurs between adjacent cells of a filament. It is preceded by a single
nuclear division in each gamete (Fairchild, 1897). In this process, the nuclear membrane disappears and the numerous minute chromosomes are found in a blunt-ended
spindle without centrosomes. Each gamete form a papilla; one of the two nuclei
enters the papilla, whose contents, after being cut oft by a wall, die and disappear.
The gametes and their nuclei unite and the zygote secretes a thick wall.
Class 2.
ASCOMYCETES
(Sachs ex Bennett and Thistleton-Dyer)
Winter
11: 17 (1872).
Order .4jco5porgag Cohn in
Ascomyceten Sachs Lehrb. Bot. ed. 4: 249 (1874).
AscoMYCETES Bennett and Thistleton-Dyer in Sachs Textb. Bot. English
Hedwigia
(1875).
Class AscoMYCETES Winter in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland
1,
Abt.
(1879).
Class Ascosporeae Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 295 (1907).
Class Ascomycetae Schaffner in Ohio Naturalist 9: 449 (1909).
Inophyta which produce, as a feature of the sexual cycle, sporangia called
which the
manner
spores, called ascospores, typically eight in
of cell division called free cell formation,
a part of the cytoplasm.
i.e.,
847
ed.
1
:
32
asci, in
number, are delimited by the
in such fashion as to exclude
The
126]
The hyphae
of
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Ascomycetes are septate and the
most often uninucleate.
cells
Most Ascomycetes produce, beside the ascospores, conidia of one type or another.
A mycelium may produce a mass of densely woven hyphae with conidia on the surface; such a mass is called an acervulus or sporodochium. Either a mycelium or an
acervulus or sporodochium may send up spore-bearing columns called coremia.
Many Ascomycetes produce, either directly from the mycelium or from special
structures consisting of interwoven hyphae, globular or flask-shaped structures which
produce conidia internally and release them through a pore. These structures are
called pycnidia, and the spores pycniospores. In many examples, the pycniospores
are capable of functioning as sperms; so far as this
is
true, the
pycnidia
may
alter-
and the pycniospores spermatia.
a mass may go into a resting condition, becoming thick-walled,
natively be called spermagonia,
Hyphae woven
into
hard, and usually dark in color.
The
resulting structure
is
a sclerotium. If a structure
of the general nature of an acervulus, sporodochium, or sclerotium gives rise either
to pycnidia or to fruits bearing asci,
As
it is
called a stroma.
and ascospores, Dangeard (1893, 1894, 1907) reached definitely the
conclusion that they are essentially sexual products. There had been earlier observations, beginning with de Bary, 1863, that there are meetings, coilings together, and
fusions of hyphae as a preliminary to the production of asci. Many ascomycetes are
of two mating types; this was first discovered of Glomerella, by Edgerton (1914). As
Dodge (1939) remarks, the mating types are not sexes; in forms producing recognizable male and female reproductive structures, each mating type may produce both.
In Ascomycetes which may be regarded as primitive, difTerentiated male and female cells are produced. The male cell or antheridium is ordinarily terminal on a
to asci
hypha. The female cell (constituting, together with other differentiated cells of the
same hypha, if any are present, the ascogonium) may be terminal; more often it bears
an elongate cell, or a chain of cells, called the trichogyne, and having the function
of reaching the antheridium. In some Ascomycetes, antheridia are produced, but syngamy does not take place; the egg is binucleate or multinucleate, and the nuclei
within it take the part of gamete nuclei in further development. There are others in
which no antheridia are produced. Hansen and Snyder (1943) found, in Hypornyces
Solani var. Cucurbitae, that "any part of the living thallus, ascospores, conidia or
bits of the mycelium could act as the male fertilizing agent." There are forms in
which fusions take place between undifferentiated hyphal cells; and yet others in
which it appears that the paired nuclei involved in sexual processes arise by divisions
of a single nucleus originally present in a spore.
In some Ascomycetes, syngamy is followed immediately by karyogamy, and the
zygote develops directly into a single ascus. In the overwhelming majority of the
group, asci are produced indirectly, and there is no fusion of nuclei until this takes
The zygote sends out hyphae called ascogenous hyphae, recognizably different
from the vegetative ones. The cells of the ascogenous hyphae arc binucleate; or,
arising from a multinucleate zygote, become binucleate by the establishment of
crosswalls. The two nuclei of each cell divide concurrently and the cell walls are so
place.
This effect is achieved in the
formation by a peculiar process called crozier formation. The terminal cell of the ascogenous hypha becomes bent to the form of a hook;
the nuclei divide concurrently, and cell walls appear between the daughter nuclei of
each pair; the middle cell of the row of three thus produced remains binucleate and
becomes an ascus. The uninucleate terminal and basal cells lie side by side, and may
placed that each
cell receives nuclei of different origin.
final cell division before ascus
Phylum Inophyta
[127
fuse to form a binucleate cell
grow
forth
The
and give
stage
rise to
which may become an additional
more asci than one.
ascus, or else
may
two nuclei of different origin is called the
Ascomycetes ,and also of Basdiomycetes: among
Inophyta, it is a normal and familiar thing. To a concept of cytology founded on
studies overlooking the Inophyta, it would appear an extreme anomaly, almost an
impossibility. It has the appearance of a rather awkward device for making cells
genetically and physiologically diploid while the nuclei remain haploid. In most
Ascomycetes it is a brief stage, but there are some, as Taphrina, whose mycelium
consisting of cells with
dikaryophase.
It is characteristic of
consists prevalently of binucleate cells.
The
was first described by Harper (1895,
from studies of Peziza, Sphacrotheca, Erysiphe, and Pyronema. The two
nuclei in the primordium of the ascus unite into one. The fusion nucleus divides
three tim.es, each time in much the same manner. A centrosome with astral rays is
present at the nuclear membrane, apparently outside. It divides, and a spindle forms,
inside the intact nuclear membrane, between the daughter centrosomes. The chromosomes appear and divide. As they move toward the poles of the spindle, the nuclear
detailed behavior of nuclei in the ascus
1897, 1900)
membrane
collapses or dissolves,
leaving the spindle
free in the cytoplasm.
The
mass of chromatin at each pole of the spindle shreds out into a nuclear network,
duly surrounded by a nuclear membrane and usually containing a nucleolus.
Haploid chromosome numbers of Ascomycetes (all of which have been observed in
the ascus) include the following:
Ascoidea rubescens,
Eremascus
fide
alhus, fide
G/om^r(?//<z, fide
Walker (1935)
De Lamater
et al.
2
6
(1953)
Lucas (1946)
HypornycesSolaniv:xr.Cucurbitae,fi.dtY{.\r?,ch.{\9'^9)
....
4
4
Lachnea scutellata,^dt^ro\\'n {\9\\)
Neurospora crassa, fide McClintock (1945)
5
Peziza do miciliana,^dt
8
{\921)
Phyllactinia corylea, fide Colson (1938)
Pyronema confiuens\?Lr. igiieum, ^dtV>ro\vn {\9\b)
Taphrina deformans, fide Martin (1940)
?)c\\n\iz
7
10
5
4
Harper, when the third division in the ascus is complete, each of
the eight nuclei produced by it thrusts forths its centrosome upon a beak. The astral
rays of the centrosomes become recurved in the cytoplasm about the nucleus, and
grow and multiply until they are converted into a smooth membrane, outside of
which a wall is deposited. Most observers have not seen so much detail. Brown (1911)
According
to
and Dodge (1937) describe the
cell membrane of the ascus, apparently under the
influence of the centrosome of each nucleus, as cutting into the cytoplasm in an ellip-
Taphrina (Martin, 1940), the cytoplasm of the spores is delimited
simply by accumulation about the nuclei. By whatever process the ascospores are cut
out. some of the cytoplasm of the ascus is excluded and left without nuclei. Harper
(1899) proposed to limit the older term free cell formation to processes which have
this effect; he observed that the occurrence of such processes distinguishes asci from
the sporangia of Oomycetes and Zygomycetes, in which spores are cut out by cleavage.
soid pattern. In
Harper believed that a fusion of nuclei follows immediately the fusion of gametes;
karyogamy observed in the ascus is a uniting of diploid nuclei, producing
tetraploid nuclei; and that the characteristic three nuclear divisions in the ascus are
necessary for reduction of the chromosome number from tetraploid to haploid. These
that the
The
128]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
hypotheses, long accepted as possible, were disproved by genetic studies by Betts and
Meyer (1939) and Keitt and Langford (1941). In the asci of many species, the
lie in a single series in which their order is determined by the divisions which
produce their nuclei. By refined technique, the spores from a single ascus may be
identified, separated, and cultivated. It is then observed that the mycelia grown from
the first four spores may differ in some particular character from those grown from
the second four spores; those from the first pair of spores may differ from those from
the second; but those from two members of any of the pairs, first, second, third or
fourth, are always alike. These observations mean that the first two divisions in the
ascus constitute the meiotic process, the third being mitotic. Lucas (1946) obtained
cytological evidence refined enough to confirm this conclusion.
Asci are almost always produced in fruits, which may be called ascocarps. The
ascocarp aside from the asci arises usually from vegetative hyphae; in the Ascomycetes regarded as primitive, it does not begin to develop until after fertilization, but
in the higher ones it may develop in advance of fertilization and become the seat
spores
of this process.
There are several types of ascocarps, among which three are most familiar. A
small ascocarp completely enclosing the asci is a cleistothecium. Cleistothecia were
formerly included under the term perithecium; that term will better be limited
which are globular or vase-like, opening through a single pore, the
from the pycnidia already described in producing ascospores
instead of conidia. A fruit in which the asci form a broad layer which is typically
fully exposed at maturity, the whole being ordinarily of the form of a disk or cup,
larger than a cleistothecium or perithecium, is an apothecium.
to small fruits
ostiole,
and
differing
Asci produced in perithecia or apothecia usually discharge the ascospores vioThe mechanism of discharge is apparently simply turgidity. Some asci show
no visible adaptations for the discharge of spores; others have lids (opercula)
lently.
whose position determines the direction of discharge. Certain large apothecia can
throw the spores to a distance of 10-20 cm.; the discharge is so governed by temperature and humidity as to occur in gently moving rather than in still air. By blowing
across these apothecia one can make them throw out a visible cloud of spores.
Heald and Walton (1914) reviewed many older observations of violent discharge by
perithecia, the oldest by Pringsheim on Sphaeria Scirpi, 1858. Rankin, 1913, found
that each ascus in turn breaks loose, comes up to the ostiole, projects through it,
throws out its spores, and collapses to make room for another. Weimer (1920) found
that the perithecia of Pleurage curvicolla bend toward the light and throw the spores
to a maximum distance of 45 cm., which is apparently the record.
There is a widely entertained hypothesis that the Ascomycetes evolved from the
red algae. It appears to have developed from a piece of classification by Sachs
(1874), who proposed a class Carposporeen, to consist of the red algae, certain higher
green algae, and the Ascomycetes and Basidiomycetes. A number of resemblances
support it. Both red algae and Ascomycetes include many parasites; both lack
flagellate cells; both have differentiated gametes, the egg bearing a trichogyne; in
both, fertilization leads to further development before spores are produced. In
addition to these genuine resemblances, an imaginary one was influential, namely
the double fertilization ascribed to the red algae by Schmitz and to the Ascomycetes
by Harper. Numerous as these resemblances are, they are not now believed to indicate
formulated the counter-argument. The Ascomycetes
resemble the Mucorina in nutrition, in producing no flagellate cells, and in multi-
relationship. Atkinson (1915)
Phylum Inophyta
[
129
nucleate gametes. The germination of the zygote of the Mucorina, by the production
of a hypha bearing a sporangium, resembles the production of ascogenous hyphae by
the zygotes of Ascomycetes. Two principal changes would convert Mucorina into
Ascomycetes: the zygote should cease to be a resting spore, and cell division within
the sporangium should be by free cell formation. This could happen if the centrosomes of the ultimate nuclei of the sporangia were in control of cleavage, and if
these nuclei were so far separated that considerable areas of cell membrane would
lie beyond the influence of the centrosomes, with the effect that the cell membrane,
furrowing in to delimit a spore around each nucleus, would leave some of the cytoplasm outside of all of the spores. The organisms listed below as the first order of
Ascomycetes, Endomycetalea, are but poorly known, yet seem genuinely to represent
the transition from Mucorina to typical Ascomycetes.
It is not yet possible to formulate a system of orders of Ascomycetes with the
expectation that it will not be found to require much amendment^. The following
will serve tentatively; excellent contemporary authority makes several orders each
of the ones listed fourth, fifth, and seventh.
l.Ascus developed directly from the zygote
(or apomictically from an unfertilized cell);
Order 1. Endomycetalea.
not producing fruits
l.The zygote giving rise to filaments of cells
with more than one nucleus, these producing
the
asci.
2.
Producing
3.
The
4.
fruits.
fruits cleistothecia.
Asci
scattered
in
the
fruits;
mostly saprophytes with
4.
3.
branched conidiophores
Asci in one cluster, or solitary,
in the fruits; mostly parasites
with unbranched conidiophores
The fruits, originally closed, open-
Order
2.
Mucedines.
Order
3.
Perisporiacea.
ing by irregular pores or regular or
Order 4. Phacidialea.
Order 5. Cupulata.
irregular clefts
The fruits apothecia
3. The fruits perithecia.
3.
4.
Producing a normal mycelium
on insects, the mycel-
Order
7.
Sclerocarpa.
Order
8.
Laboulbenialea.
Order
6.
Exoascalea.
4. Parasitic
2.
Order
ium reduced
Not producing fruits, the asci
rectly from the mycelium
1.
arising di-
Endomycetalea [Endomycetales] Gaumann Vergl. Morph.
Pilze
135
(1926).
Subclass Hemiasci Engler Syllab. 26 (1892).
ILuttrell (1951) has presented a
3
complete reorganization of the class. He sets apart
in which the ripe ascus exudes
major subordinate group Bitunicatae five orders
vesicle and discharges the spores from this.
as a
130
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Subclass Hemiasci or Hemiasceae, with suborder (Unterreihe) Hemiascineae,
and suborder Protoascineae of subclass Euasci, Engler in Engler and Prantl
Nat. Pflanzelfam. I Teil, Abt. 1 iv (1897), the names not based on those of
:
genera.
Order Protoascineae Campbell Univ. Textb. Bot. 165 (1902).
Order Hemiascalcs Engler Syllab. ed. 3: 28 (1903).
Ascomycetes whose asci develop directly from the zygotes. Two families may be
recognized.
Family
1.
Endomycetacea [Endomycetaceae] Schroter
in
Engler and Prantl Nat.
154 (1894). Family Ascoideaceae Schroter op. cit. 145.
Mostly saprophytes, the uninucleate or multinucleate cells of the filaments tending
to round up, become separate, and function as conidia; the zygotes, produced by
syngamy of scarcely differentiated cells, enlarging and becoming asci of 4, 8, or
Pflanzenfam.
many
I
Teil, Abt. 1:
spores cut out by free cell formation. Dipodascus, Eremascus,
The
Endomyces,
apparently produced asexually (Walker, 1935).
The genus Protomyces requires mention. It is a parasite on higher plants, producing
walled resting spores which germinate by producing a sporangium of many spores.
It is chytrid-like, but its spores are non-motile. Its proper place in classification has
Ascoidea.
asci of the last are
been a puzzle.
Family 2. Saccharomycetacea [Saccharomycetaceae] (Rees) Schroter op. cit. 153.
CXa^?, znd iarm\y Saccharomycetes y<! inter m Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland 1,
Abt. 1: (1879). Unicellular, reproducing by budding, i.e., by production upon
the cells of outpocketings which are pinched off as additional cells, or by a sexual
cycle in which endospores are produced, usually by fours.
These are the organisms which are in English called yeasts. The common breadand beer-yeast called Sac char omyces cerevisiae has a good claim to be considered,
economically, the most important of all "fungi." Its metabolism, in which dextrose
is converted to alcohol and carbon dioxide, gives a superficial appearance of simplicity, and has attracted much study, contributing much to an understanding of the
for a long time
genuine intricacy of energesis.
In addition to agents of fermentation, this family includes pathogens causing
chronic infections of animals. These have been treated as a genus Torula, Torulopsis,
Blastodenna, or Cryptococcus. They have not been observed to produce endospores.
Order 2. Mucedines Fries Syst. Myc. 3: 380 (1832).
Order Gyjnnoascaceae Winter in Rabenhorst Kryptog-Fl. Deutschland
1,
Abt.
I
Teil,
2: 3 (1887).
Suborder Plectascineae Engler
Abt. 1: V (1897).
in
Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam.
Order Plectascineae Campbell Univ. Textb. Bot. 169 (1902).
Order Aspergilliales Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 304 (1907).
Order Gymnascales Clemens Gen. Fung. 93 (1909).
Order Plcctascales Gaumann Vergl. Morph. Pilze 164 (1926).
Ascomycetes producing cleistothecia in which the asci are scattered; mostly
saprophytic and producing branched conidiophores.
The name Mucedines means molds. Under this name Fries listed twelve genera,
with Aspergillus Link and Penicillium Link first. The former is the evident standard
genus of the order. Both genera are very common and numerous in species. They arc
readily recognized under the microscope by the forms of their clusters of conidia.
Phylum Inophyta
The conidiophore
[131
of Aspergillus ends in a globular swelling
from which spring many
radiating rows of conidia, with the efTect that the entire mass, yellow, brown, black,
pink, or red in color,
is globular. Penicillium has a branching conidiophore bearing
rows of conidia in a broom-like mass. The masses are usually blue or green, and are
familiar on cheese, jam, bread, cardboard, oranges, or almost any organic material.
making of genuine Camemand Roquefort cheeses. The genus has become best known for the production by
P. notatum of the drug penicillin. In 1929, Dr. Alexander Fleming of London noticed
that a mycelium of this species, growing as a contaminant on a plate of bacteria,
interfered with the growth of the latter. This observation led to the discovery of a
substance clinically useful against actinomycetes, spheres, and Gram positive rods,
but not against Gram negative rods. Production was for several years very scant, and
the drug expensive accordingly; in the early 1940's, as a war measure, the United
Particular species of Penicilliuni are involved in the
bert
States financed large scale production along with the appropriate scientific study
(Elder, 1944; Committee on Medical Research, Washington, and the Medical Re-
search Council, London, 1945). Several forms of penicillin have been recognized;
they differ in the radicle
in the formula CgHnOiSNiR. The structural formula is
R
believed to be as follows (Editorial Board of the
Penicillin,
Monograph on
RCONH — CH — CH — S — C
I
OC
The
of
the Chemistry of
1947):
I
N
(CH3)2
I
CH COOH.
sexual reproduction of Aspergillus and Penicillium involves the syngamy
differentiated cells.
The
zygote sends out ascogenous hyphae which bud
scattered asci; the neighboring cells send out
hyphae which become woven
oflF
into a
minute firm-walled cleistothecium enclosing them.
Link, who named Aspergillus and Penicillium., gave to the ascocarp-producing
stage of Aspergillus the name Eurotium. There is a rule of botanical nomenclature
which allows only a tentative status to names given to the conidium-producing
stages of inophytes. Thom and his associates (1926, 1945), in presenting a workable
system of the species of Aspergillus, remarked that "It is better to forget Eurotium
along with the technicality."
This order includes a variety of other molds: Gymnoascus, producing only a
hyphae about the asci; Ctenomyces, on feathers, recognized by comblike outgrowths from the loosely woven ascocarps; Monascus, its name a misnomer,
the minute fruit containing many asci; Onygena, saprophytic on horns and hoofs,
producing puffball-like fruits as much as 1 cm. high; Elaphomyces, forming a
mycorrhiza on roots of conifers and producing hypogaeous fruits as large as walnuts.
loose weft of
Order 3. Perisporiacea [Perisporiaceae] Fries Syst. Myc. 3: 220 (1829).
Order Perisporia Fries op. cit. 1: xlviii (1832).
Suborder Perisporiaceae Winter in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland
1,
Abt. 2: 21 (1887).
Subsuborder [Underordnung) Perisporiales Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat.
Pflanzenfam. I Teil, 1: v'(1897).
Order Perisporiales Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 295 (1907).
Ascomycetes producing cleistothecia containing a compact cluster of asci or a
solitary ascus; mostly parasites producing unbranched conidiophores.
—
132]
The
Classification of
Lower Organisms
25.
Ascomycetes: a-e, Dipodascus albidus after Juel (1902), x 1,000;
gametes; b, syngamy; c, development of ascus; d, e, lower and upper parts of a
f, Erysiphe graminis, haustorium penetrating an epidermal cell of
mature ascus.
g-k, Cleistothecia of
a grass and conidiophore bearing a chain of conidia x 500.
Fig.
a,
Perisporiacea x 100: g, of Erysiphe sp.; h, of Microsphaera
of Uncinula sp.; k, of Phyllactinia sp.
j,
sp.;
i,
of Podosphaera sp.;
Phylum Inophyta
The more
They
familiar Perisporiacea are those of family Erysiphea
[
133
[Erysipheae]
mycelium on the
surface and sending brief haustoria into the epidermal cells. They produce abundant
conidia in erect unbranched chains; this habit explains the common name of powdery
mildews. Harper's important studies of the morphology of Ascomycetes were in large
part made on powdery mildews. The gametes are uninucleate and unite directly, the
egg bearing no trichogyne; the ascogenous hyphae are brief; each minute black
globular cleistothecium bears an equatorial whorl of appendages of a form characteristic of the genus. In Erysiphe and Sphaerotheca iS. pannosa is the common rose
mildew), the fruits bear unbranched sinuous appendages like vegetative hyphae; the
Winter.
are parasites on plants, mostly producing a white
fruit of Erysiphe contains several asci, while that of Sphaerotheca contains one. In
Microsphaera {M. Alni is the powdery mildew of lilac) and Podosphaera, the appendages are dichotomously forked near the tip; the fruit of Microsphaera contains
several asci, that of Podosphaera only one. The appendages of Uncinula are hooked
at the tip. Those of Phyllactinia are like sharp spikes with bulbous bases.
Other Perisporiacea, parasitic or saprophytic on plant material, are comparatively poorly known. The fruits may bear appendages of other characters than those
of the Erysiphea, or none, and may be characteristically clustered or borne in
stromata. In some examples the fruits have no definite dehiscence mechanism; in
others they open by deliquescence or by a separation of plates. Some open by a
single pore, and appear transitional to those of order Sclerocarpa; some open by a
cleft, or by lobes separated by radiating clefts, and appear transitional to those of
order Phacidialea.
Order
4.
Phacidialea [Phacidiales] Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7:
298
(1907).
Phacidiacei Fries Syst. Myc. 1: li (1832).
Order Hysteriaceae and suborders (of order Discomycetes) Phacidiaceae,
Stictideae, and Tryblidieae Rehm in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutsch-
land 1, Abt. 3: 1, 60, 112, 191 (1896); the ordinal name preoccupied by
family Hysteriaceae Saccardo.
Suborders Phacidiineae and Hysteriineae Engier in Engler and Prantl Nat.
Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. 1 v 1897)
Orders Graphidiales and Hysteriales Bessey op. cit. 298, 303.
:
(
Order Hemisphaeriales Theissen in Ann. Myc. 11: 468 (1913).
Order Microthyriales Clements and Shear Gen. Fung. ed. 2: 94 (1931),
Ascomycetes producing fruits which are not typical cleistothecia, apothecia, or
perithecia.
This group is here used as a catch-all for three or more distinct groups, which
appear to form cross-connections among orders Perisporiacea, Cupulata, and Sclerocarpa. This appearance suggests the probability that the present group, and the
usually accepted orders assembled under it, are not natural, but represent parallel
developments from several sources. The present groups include moderately numerous
ordinary parasites and saprophytes, together with great numbers of lichen-formers.
Only the latter are common and familiar in temperate countries. There has been little
study of the morphology.
The
a.
which appear tenable are distinguished as follows:
and flattened, usually releasing the spores through one or more
pores or clefts (Order Hemisphaeriales Theissen, Microthyriales Clements
and Shear).
families
Fruits minute
The
134]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Family Microthyriacea [Microthyriaceae] Lindau (in Engler and Prantl, 1897).
on plants, surfaces of the fruits marked by radiating ridges.
Family Micropeltidacea [Micropeltidaceae] Clements and Shear (1931). Family
Hemisphaeriaceae Theissen (1913), not based on a generic name. Like the foreParasitic
going, but the surface of the fruit not radiate or radiate only at the margin.
Family Trichothyriacea [Trichothyriaceae] Theissen and Sydow. Parasitic on
mycelium a pseudoparenchymatous layer, asci pendant within the
fruits from the apparent summit.
b. Fruits elongate, hard, dark, opening by a narrow cleft (suborder Hysteruneae
inophytes, the
Engler).
Family Hysteriacea [Hysteriaceae] Saccardo Sylloge
721 (1883). Parasitic on
2:
higher plants or saprophytic.
Family Graphidiacea [Graphidiaceae] Clements (1909).
lichens or parasites on lichens, largely tropical
and
An enormous
group of
chiefly crustose, the openings
of the fruits forming dark lines.
c.
Fruits not as above, mostly with a roundish area of asci exposed by the
irregular or stellate shattering of a superficial layer;
if
long and narrow, not
hard and dark (Suborder PHACiDnNEAE Engler).
Family Phacidiea [Phacidieae] Saccardo Sylloge 8: 705 (1889). Phacidiaceae
Saccardo (1889). Family Phacidiaceae Lindau (in Engler and Prantl, 1896). The
dark fruits thin and weak laterally and below.
Family Tryblidacea [Tryblidaceae] Rehm (in Rabenhorst, 1896). The dark fruits
hard and thick laterally and below.
Family Stictea [Sticteae] Saccardo Sylloge 8: 647 (1889). Stictaceae Saccardo
(1889). Family Stictidaceae Lindau (1896). Fruits light-colored or white. Higgins
(1914) found that the agents of the shot-hole disease of plums and cherries, which,
on the basis of non-fruiting stages, have been called Cylindrosporium Pruni, produce
on fallen leaves ascocarps distinguishable as three species of the genus Coccomyces
of the present family.
Order 5. Cupulata [Cupulati] Fries Syst. Myc. 1 2 (1821 ).
Order Mitrati Fries 1. c; order Uterini Fries op. cit. 1 liii (1832).
Family Discomycetes Fries Epicrisis 1 (1836).
Orders Discomycetes and Tuberaceae Winter in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl.
:
:
Deutschland 1, Abt. 2: 3 (1887).
Suborders Helevellincae, Pczizineae, and Tuherineae Engler in Engler and
Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. 1: v (1897).
Orders Helevellincae, Pezizineae, and Tuberineae Campbell Univ. Textb. Bot.
166, 167, 168 (1902).
Orders Pezizales, Discolichcnes, Helvellales, and Tuberales Bessey in Univ.
Nebraska Studies 7: 299, 300, 303, 304 (1907).
This order includes primarily the cup fungi, the inophytes which produce cupor disk-shaped fruits bearing a single hiyer of closely packed asci on the inner or
upper surface. There has been much study of some of them, notably of Pyronema, by
Harper, Dangeard, Claussen, and Brown. The disk-shaped flesh-colored apothecia of
Pyronema, 1-3 mm. in diameter, are found particularly on damp charcoal. The
mycelium produces difTcrentiatcd multinucleate antheridia and ascogonia, the latter
bearing one-celled multinucleate trichogynes. After syngamy, or sometimes without
it, but always to the best of our knowledge without any fusion of nuclei, the ascogonia
Phylum Inophyta
send out branching filaments which become septate
[
in
135
such fashion that the ultimate
are binucleate. These cells form croziers and produce asci. During the development of the ascogenous hyphae, other hyphae, more slender, grow up from the
cells
vegetative mycelium; these produce a disk of undifferentiated cells below the layer
and send up
sterile hairs (paraphyses) among them.
(1926) divided the families of this group into two series by the
presence or absence of a differentiated operculum at the summit of the ascus. The
names being put into neuter form, and family Tuberacea being added, the lists are
of asci,
Gaumann
as follows:
Inoperculata
:
Patellariacea,
Dermateacea,
Bulgariacea,
Cyttariacea,
Mollisi-
acea, Helotiacea, Geoglossacea, Tuberacea.
Operculata: Rhizinacea, Pyronemacea, Ascobolacea, Fezizacea, Helvellacea.
Along with these, Clements and Shear (1931) list eight families of lichen-formers,
some of them very numerous.
Families Pezizacea and Ascobolacea include the ordinary cup fungi. They are
mostly saprophytes in soil or on manure, and do not usually produce conidia. Peziza
was listed by Fries first in order Cupulata; it is the evident standard genus of the order.
Families Dermateacea and Helotiacea include many parasites on plants. One of
the Helotiacea is Sclerotinia cinerea, the agent of the brown rot of stone fruits.
As an active parasite it produces conidia of a type which, if the fruits were unknown,
would place it in the genus Monilia. These spread the disease rapidly. The killed
fruits fall and the organism lives in them as a saprophyte, replacing their tissues
with a hard black mass of hyphae, a sclerotium. This survives the winter and in
spring sends up stalked white apothecia.
The Helvellacea have been treated as a separate order, but are not sufficiently
numerous and distinct to justify this treatment. They are saprophytes in soil, producing large stalked apothecia bearing an extensive layer of asci which is everted
and wrinkled. The most familiar genera are Elvella and Morchella. The fruits are
edible, indeed delicious; they should be boiled briefly, then creamed and served on
toast. When found in abundance they should be preserved by drying for use throughout the year.
The Tuberacea, the truffles, also usually treated as a distinct order, produce
underground fruits which appear to be apothecia distorted and rolled into balls.
They are associated with particular species of trees on which the mycelia are believed to live as mycorhizae (Dangeard, 1894). The asci commonly contain reduced
numbers of spores. The fruits are prized by gourmands.
The relationships of the Cupulata are a puzzle. Pyronema could be interpreted
as representing an evolutionary transition from the order Mucedines to this. Certain
parasitic cup fungi produce minute apothecia, hard, dark, and nearly closed, suggesting a transition
to
order Sclerocarpa.
Some
species,
particularly
among
the
and lichen-formers, seem to intergrade with order Phacidialea, and thence
again both to Mucedines and Sclerocarpa. The operculate asci which mark a part of
the group occur also in other orders. Thus there is among Ascomycetes an appearance
parasites
of reticulate relationships,
such as reputable naturalists of the past supposed to
many groups. The appearance is of course illusory; sufficient study of other
groups has made it possible to distinguish the resemblances among them which indicate relationship from those which are results of parallel evolution. The study of the
exist in
Ascomycetes has not yet been carried
this far.
—
The
136]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Lachnca scutellata after Brown (1911) x 1,000;
karyogamy; d, fusion nucleus; e-i, stages of mciosis;
1, Apothecia x 2, and m, ascus x 250, of
j, k, early stages of free cell formation.
Lamprospora leiocarpa. n, Apothecia x 2, and O, ascus x 250, of Aleuria rutilans.
q, Fruit x 1, and r, ascus x 250, of MorV, Apothecia of Sclcrotinia cinerea x 2.
s-x, Taphrina deformans after Martin (1940) x 1,000; s, growth on
chella conica.
surface of an infected leaf; t, karyogamy; u, mitosis; V, homeotypic anaphase in the
ascus; w^ development of ascospores; x^ germination.
Fig.
a, b,
26.
Ascomycetes:
formation of crozicr;
a-k,
C,
Phylum Inophyta
[137
305 ( 1907)
6. Exoascalea [Exoascales] Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7
Suborder Protodiscineae Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil,
Abt. 1: V (1897), not based on a generic name.
Order Protodiscineae Campbell Univ. Textb. Bot. 166 (1902).
Order Agyriales Clements and Shear Gen. Fung. ed. 2: 141 (1931), in part.
Ascomycetes parasitic on plants, producing no fruits but a broad layer of asci
directly on the mycelium.
The leaves of the hosts of these parasites become swollen and distorted; the
diseases recognized by these symptoms are called curly-leaf diseases. The most
familiar is the curly-leaf of peaches, caused by Taphrina {Exoascus) deformans.
Many others are known. The agents of all of these diseases may be regarded as a
single family Exoascacea [Exoascaceae] Schroter (in Engler and Prantl, 1894), and
all are commonly treated as a single genus, Taphrina Fries, typified by T. aurea on
poplar trees; there are differences among them which might well be treated as of
Order
:
generic rank.
Clements and Shear associated the curly-leaf parasites with a collection of saprophytes producing small and undifferentiated disk-like or indefinite fruits, as Pyronema, Ascocorticium, and Agyrium; and offended against the principles of nomenclature by re-naming the order Agyriales. It is probable that something of the nature
Agyrium may represent the transition from order Cupulata to this one.
Martin (1940) described the cytology of Taphrina deformans. The mycelium
grows between the cells of the host, not penetrating them. It is a dikaryophase
mycelium, the cells binucleate, the nuclei dividing concurrently, cell division occurring in such fashion as to separate the daughter nuclei of each pair. In preparation for
reproduction, hyphae of short round cells form a single layer between the epidermis
and the cuticle of the host. In each cell of these hyphae, the nuclei unite and then
divide. The division is mitotic, the fusion nuclei and the daughter nuclei having
each eight chromosomes. The cell divides, by a wall parallel to the surface of the
leaf, into two. The daughter cell which lies against the tissues of the host dies,
and its wall becomes empty; the other cell grows and bursts through the cuticle of
the host and becomes an ascus. Its nucleus divides three times; the first two divisions
are the meiotic process, and the chromosome number is reduced to four. Cytoplasm
accumulates around each of the resulting eight nuclei and is presently cut out by a
membrane and a wall. No centrosome is evident at any stage of the process. The
spores germinate by sending out buds, as yeasts form buds; sometimes they do this
before being discharged from the ascus. So far as Martin could determine, the
binucleate condition of the mycelium is established by division of the nucleus of
the spore from which it grows.
of
Order 7. Sclerocarpa [SclerocarpiJ Persoon Syst. Meth. Fung, xii (1801).
Order Pyrenomycetes Fries Syst. Myc. 2:312 (1822); order Uterini, suborder
Pyrenomycetes Fries op. cit. 1: li (1832).
Family Pyrenomycetes Fries Epicrisis 1 (1836).
Order Pyrenomycetes, suborders Hypocreaceae, Sphaeriaceae, and Dothideaceae,
Winter in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland 1, Abt. 2: 18, 82, 152, 893
(1887).
{Unterreihe) Pyrenomycetineae, sub-suborders [Unterordnungen)
Hypocreales, Dothideales, and Sphaeriales Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat.
Suborder
Pflanzenfam.
I Teil,
Abt.
1: v, vi
(1897).
—
138
The
Classification of
Lower Organis?ns
Order Pyrcnomycetales Bessey
in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 295 (1907).
Orders Hypocreales, Sphaeriales, and Dothideales Gaumann Vergl. Morph.
Pilze 222, 253, 284 (1926).
Ascomycetes producing, from a normal mycelium, perithecia, i. e., small fruits
of the shape of a small globe or flask opening through a single pore, the ostiole.
Sphaeria, which Persoon and Fries listed first under the names which they respectively used, is the evident standard genus; but this genus has become broken up and
lost in the work of subsequent scholars.
This order includes very many species and is by the generality of authority
divided into three. Forms whose perithecia are borne directly on the m.ycelium,
together with those whose perithecia are borne in or on but distinct from a dark
Fig. 27.
Mycosphaerella personata after Higgins (1929), x 1,000; a, conidiophorcs and conidia of Ccrcospora type, b, longitudinal section of pycnidium;
C, primordium of perithccium with ascogonoium bearing a trichogyne; d, e, ascogenous hyphae; f, crozier formation; g, longitudinal section of mature peridiecium.
Phylum
Iiiophyta
[
139
stroma, are assigned to order Sphaeriales. Forms with perithecia in or on a brightly
colored stroma are Hypocreales. Those whose perithecia are cavities with a wall
indistinguishable from a dark stroma are Dothideales. These groups are not confidently acceptable as natural: the stromatic Sphaeriales (Wehmeyer, 1926), the
Hypocreales, and the Dothideales appear each to include more than one line of
descent from Sphaeriales with solitary perithecia.
As a general rule, each perithecium develops in consequence of a separate act of
fertilization, of a differentiated
ascogonium, either by an antheridium, a spermatium,
or otherwise.
Gaumann
are to be
ales,.
recognized fourteen families in the present group or groups. To these
a great number of lichen-formers, properly Sphaeriales and Hypocre-
added
but construed as a single family Verrucariacea; and a smaller number, repre-
senting the Dothideales, and called Mycoporacea.
Exmples include the following:
Among
Sphaeriales with solitary perithecia, Mycosphaerella is a genus of more
than one thousand parasites on plants, mostly inconspicuous, causing leaf spots.
Their conidia are of various types, Septoria, Phleospora, Ramularia, Cercospora.
Venturia, another numerous genus, includes V. inaequalis, causing apple scab; its
conidia are of a type called Fusicladium.
Four species of Neurospora were discovered by Shear and Dodge (1927) as the
fruiting stages of a red mold on bread called Monilia sitophila. Genetic study of
this genus particularly by Tatum, Beadle, and their associates (Ryan, Beadle, and
Tatum, 1943; McClintock, 1945; Beadle and Tatum, 1945; Tatum and Bell, 1946;
Mitchell and Houlahan, 1946; Tatum, Barratt, Fries, and Bonner, 1950) has yielded
results of the highest theoretical significance. Normal cultures require no other
food than minerals, carbohydrate, and a single vitamin, biotin (Butler, Robbins,
and Dodge, 1941). Either spontaneously or under violent treatment (with x-rays,
mustard gas) the cultures give rise to many mutations,
behaving as Mendelian recessives, each consisting of the inability to synthesize
some one vitamin or amino acid. These observations mean that life in its aspect of
metabolism consists of unit chemical processes, each controlled by a specific enzyme,
each enzyme being dependent upon a specific area in a specific chromosome.
Among stromatic Sphaeriales, Glomerella, with conidial stages identified as
Gloeosporium or Colletotrichum, attacks many plants; G. cingulata causes the bitter
rot of apples. Valsa, Diatrype, and Diaporthe are numerous in species. Endothia
parasitica causes the chestnut blight, destructive in the eastern United States.
Xylaria, Daldinia, and other genera are saprophytic on wood; the former produces
black fruits, club-shaped or branched; the latter, fruits of the form of black knobs
ultra-violet radiations, or
which may reach the
Among
size of golf balls.
Hypocreales, Nectria cinnabarina
is
common
as a saprophyte
twigs of poplar. It produces small wart-like red stromata which bear
first
on dead
conidia,
then perithecia. Claviceps purpurea causes a disease of rye; it produces conidia of
various types, and converts the grains of rye into sclerotia. These bodies are called
ergot; they are extremely poisonous, sometimes dangerously so, because they may
be ground with the grain. They are used in medicine. After lying in the earth through
the winter, the sclerotia send up fruits of the form of a stalk bearing a knob consisting
of radiating perithecia. Cordyceps kills subterranean larvae or pupae of insects and
then sends up a stalk bearing an elongate head of
many
perithecia.
140
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
The Dothideales include Plowrightia morhosa, the agent of the black knot of
plums. Diseased twigs become swollen and covered with a black stroma which bears,
according to the season, conidia of various types or else perithecia.
Order 8. Laboulbenialea [Laboulbeniales] Engler Syllab. ed. 3: 42 (1903).
Order Laboulbeniaceae Thaxter, the name (ascribed to Peyritsch) preoccupied
by family Laboulbeniaceae Berlese in Saccardo Sylloge 8: 909 (1889).
Suborder Laboulbeniineae Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam.
I Teil, Abt.
1:
vi
(1897).
Class LabouJbeniomycctes Engler Syllab.
1.
c.
Ohio Naturalist
9: 450 (1909).
on insects, the mycelium scant or reduced to a single cell, producing
antheridia which discharge spermatia into the air and small numbers of perithecia.
These organisms have the appearance of excep^^ional setae on their hosts, which
are not usually seriously injured by them. They were first mentioned in a note by
the entomologist Rouget, 1850; Montagne and Robin, in Robin's book on parasitic
plants, 1853, gave the first names, Laboulbenia Rougetii and L. Guerinii, the generic
name honoring the entomologist Laboulbene. Only a few scholars, notably Thaxter
(1896, 1908, 1924, 1926, 1931) have given much attention to this group; they have
distinguished well over a thousand species, forming three families and about fifty
Class Laboulbenieae Schaffner in
Parasites
genera.
Many Laboulbenialea occur as two forms, male and hermaphrodite. A male individual produces a series of flask-shaped antheridia, each of which discharges into
the air, one at a time, a series of globular naked sperms. A hermaphrodite individual
produces first a series of antheridia
A perithecium consists of a wall, of
order and pattern, surrounding an
protrudes from the perithecium and
fascicle of asci
as described
a definite
and then one or more
of cells produced
number
perithecia.
in definite
egg which bears a trichogyne; the trichogyne
receives the sperms. The zygote gives rise to a
which crowd aside and destroy the inner
cells of the
charge the ascospores (usually eight in the ascus, and divided into two
wall and discells)
through
the ostiole.
Those who would
link the
Ascomycetes with the red algae entertain the hypothesis
that the Laboulbenialea represent the transition. This hypothesis
The Laboulbenialea
appear
to
have evolved from Sphaeriales with
Class
Classes
is
surely mistaken.
are a highly specialized group, not a link between others.
3.
HYPHOMYCETES
Hyphomycetes and Coniomycctes
They
solitary perithecia.
Fries
Fries Syst.
Myc.
Families Hyphomycetes and Coniomycctes Fries Epicrisis
1
3: 261, 455 (1832).
(1836).
Fungi imperfecti or Deuteromycetes Auctt.
Inophyta of which the structures involved in sexual reproduction are unknown.
It has been noted that a particular genus of Ascomycetes may produce conidia
of more types than one, as Sclcrotinia produces types called Monilia and Botrytis,
and Glomerella produces types called Gloeosporium. and Colletotrichum. The same
type may be produced by many genera; the Monilia type recurs in Neurospora,
which does not belong to the same order as Sclerotinia. Collecting naturalists, and
plant pathologists in the pursuit of their duties, are constantly encountering conidial
stages whose assignment to an order of Ascomycetes is impossible. It is an obvious
Phylum Inophyta
[
141
practical necessity that a register of these observations be kept. The register is provided by the present group, one which is named, defined, and assigned to the category
of classes, and divided into named orders, families, and genera under which specimens
may be identified as of species old or new. Class, orders, families, and genera are
known not to be valid taxonomic groups; many of the ostensible species are known,
and most of the rest are believed, to be stages of organisms which would in other
stages have other names. Almost all of them are Ascomycetes; Zygomycetes and
Basidiomycetes do not usually occur in unidentifiable stages.
The ascus-bearing stages are constantly being discovered. When this happens, the
species is re-named in its proper place among Ascomycetes. Theoretically, it loses
its place in the list of imperfect fungi; practically, it retains it, because the next
is most likely to try
Hyphomycetes is as follows:
collector or plant pathologst
The system
of
to find
it
there.
1. Phomatalea [Phomatales] Clements Gen. Fung. 121 (1909).
Sphaeropsideae Saccardo Sylloge 8: xvi (1889).
Order Sphaeropsidales Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil
Abt. 1**: v (1900), not based on a generic name.
Order Phomales Clements and Shear Gen. Fung. ed. 2: 175 (1931).
Producing pycnidia. The four families correspond with as many groups of Ascomy-
Order
cetes.
Family 1. Phomatacea [Phomataceae] Clements Gen. Fung. 121 (1909). Family
Sphaerioideae or Sphaerioidaceae Saccardo; but Sphaeria belongs to order Sclerocarpa. Family Phomaceae Clements and Shear (1931). Pycnidia hard and black as
in Sphaeriales and Dothideales. Phoma, Ascochyta, Diplodia, Septoria, each of
many
species.
Clements Gen. Fung. 128 (1909). Family
2. Zythiacea [Zythiaceae]
Nectrioideae or Nectrioidaceae Saccardo; but Nectria belongs to order Sclerocarpa.
Pycnidia in brightly colored stromata as of Hysteriales.
Family 3. Leptostromatacea [Leptostromataceae] Saccardo Sylloge 3: 625 (1884).
Family
Pycnidia in shield-like stromata, like the fruits of Microthyriacea.
Family 4. Discellacea [Discellaceae] Clements and Shear Gen. Fung. ed. 2: 192
(1931). Family Excipulaceae Saccardo; but Excipula is a cup fungus. Pycnidia wide
open
like the fruits of Phacidiea.
Melanconialea [Melanconiales] Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. PflanI Teil, Abt. 1**: v (1900).
The conidia borne on a stroma but not in pycnidia.
Family Melanconiacea [Melanconiaceae] (Saccardo, without category) Lindau
in Engler and Prantl op. cit. 398, the single very numerous family: Gloeosporium;
Coryneum, C. Beijerinckii, the shot-hole of almonds; Pestallozia.
Order
2.
zenfam.
Order 3. Nematothecia [Nematothecii] Persoon Synops. Meth. Fung, xix (1801).
Orders Dematiei, Sepedoniei, Tubercularini, and Stilhosporei Fries Syst. Myc. Order
Hyphomycetes (Fries) Auctt. Order Moniliales Clements Gen. Fung. 138 (1909).
Conidia directly on the mycelium, or none.
Family 1. Tuberculariea [Tubercularieae] Saccardo Sylloge 4: 635 (1886).
Tuberculariaceae Saccardo (1889). Family Tuherculariaceae Lindau (1900).
Scarcely distinct from Melanconiacea, the conidia on a mass of interwoven hyphae
The
142
]
less
compact than
Classification of
Lower Organisms
enormous number of species producing as
Snyder and Hansen (1941, 1945) find that
a stroma. Fusarium, an
conidia crescent-shaped rows of
cells.
the fruiting stages are species of Hypomyces, Nectria, Gibberella, or Calonectria,
all
Hypocreales.
Family 2. Stilbellacea [Stilbellaceae] Bessey Morph. and Tax. Fungi 584 (1950).
Family .Siz/^e'a^ Saccardo Sylloge 4: 563 1886). .S^z/foacfflP Saccardo 1889). Family
Stilbaceae Lindau (1900); Bessey observed that the type of the genus Stilbum does
not belong to this family. Mostly molds producing coremia.
Family 3. Dematiea [Dematieae] Saccardo Sylloge 4: 235 (1886). Dematiaceae
Saccardo (1889). Family Dematiaceae Lindau (1900). Dark-colored parasites, as
Helminthosporium, Cladosporium, and Cercospora, or molds, as Alternaria.
Family 4. Moniliacea [Moniliaceae] Clements Gen. Fung. 138 (1909). Mucedineae
Persoon, family Mucedineae or Mucedinaceae Saccardo, not based on a generic
name. White or brightly colored parasites or molds, as Oidium, with colorless spores
in chains, Monilia, Botrytis, etc. The parasites on animals which have been referred
to Monilia are currently called Candida.
Family (?') 5. Sterile mycelia. Many mycorhizae must be left here. Rhizoctonia,
dark net-like masses of hyphae occurring as parasites or saprophytes. Trichophyton,
parasitic on the skins of man and animals, causing ringworm, athlete's foot, etc.
(
Class 4.
(
BASSDIOMYCETES (Sachs ex Bennett and
Thistleton-Dyer)
Winter
Order Basidiosporeae and subordinate group Basidiomycetae Cohn
in
Hedwigia
17 (1872).
11:
Basidiomyceten Sachs Lehrb. Bot. ed. 4: 249 (1874).
Basidiomycetes Bennett and Thistleton-Dyer in Sachs Textb. Bot. English ed.
847 (1875).
Class Basidiomycetes Winter in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland 1, Abt.
1:
72 (1884).
Classes Teliosporeae and Basidiosporeae Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7
:
305,
:
450
306 (1907).
Classes Teliosporeae
and Basidiomycetae Schaffner
in
Ohio Naturalist 9
(1909).
Inophyta which produce, as a feature of the sexual cycle, conidiophores called
basidia, each producing typically four conidia called basidiospores.
Germinating basidiospores give
nuclei.
Syngamy occurs among
rise
to
mycelia of
cells of these
cells
with
solitary
haploid
mycelia, usually simply by contact of
cells; the rusts produce differentiated sperms in spermagonia resembling the pycnidia of Ascomycetes. In some species any haploid hypha may
conjugate with any; in some there are two mating types, and in some four. Raper
(1953) has studied the interesting genetics of the mating types.
The cell produced by .syngamy remains undifferentiated, but gives rise, by concurrent division of its nuclei, to a dikaryote mycelium. The nuclei are minute, and
mitosis has rarely been seen. The nuclear divisions are often followed by a peculiar
manner of cell division, comparable to the crozier formation of Ascomycetes, and
producing structures called clamp connections.
Either the original haploid mycelium or the dikaryophase may produce conidia
without nuclear change. Such reproduction is familiar among the rusts, rather un-
vmdifTerontiated
familiar
among
other Basidiomycetes.
Phylum Inophyta
[
143
Only the dikaryophase produces the specialized conidiophores called basidia,
which are regularly the seat of karyogamy and meiosis. There is a considerable
variety of types of basidia.
Van Tieghem
(1893) originated the terminology apto
it, and Linder (1940)
plicable to these; Martin (1938) has attempted to refine
simplify
it.
Frequently, the seat of meiosis
is
a thick-walled resting spore or
difTerentiated cell called a probasidium,
an otherwise
upon which the proper basidium develops,
an outgrowth. A basidium arising in this fashion is commonly
elongate and divided into four cells each of which produces a basidiospore. Such a
hypha-like basidium may be called a promycelium or a phragmobasidium; the latter
term is applicable also to an elongate four-celled basidium which does not arise
after meiosis, as
from a probasidium. In a few Basidiomycetes, the basidium is divided into four cells
by longitudinal walls; such basidia are called cruciate basidia. In the familiar
Basidiomycetes the basidium does not become divided by walls and is called a holobasidium or autobasidium. Gaumann 1926) distinguished two types of holobasidia:
(
which the spindles of the dividing nuclei lie at various levels
and in various directions, and which frequently produces more than four nuclei;
and the chiastobasidium, in which the spindles lie transversely near the summit,
and which regularly produces just four nuclei. Dodge, translating Gaumann (1928),
denies much importance to this distinction.
The meiotic divisions have repeatedly been studied. Apparent centrosomes have
been seen at the poles of the spindles (Lewis, 1906; Lander, 1933), but not by most
microtechnical methods (Savile, 1939; Ritchie, 1941). The chromosomes gather as
usual at the middle of the spindle and divide. The nuclear membrane becomes indistinct, but the nuclear sap remains distinct from the cytoplasm nearly until the
completion of division; it then disappears, leaving the groups of daughter chromothe stichobasidium, in
somes connected by a spindle of the appearance of a dark streak in the cytoplasm.
Ob:;erved haploid chromosome numbers include the following:
Coleosporium, fideMoxczM (1914)
Coleosporium Vernoniae, fide Olive (1949)
Coj&rmuj, fide Yokes (1931)
Eocronartium, fide Fitzpatrick (1918)
&;frffa, fide Whelden (1935)
Gymnosporangium, fide Stevens (1930)
Melampsora, fide Savile (1939)
Myxomycidium flavum, fide Martin (1938)
Puccinia, fide Savile (1939)
Transchelia, fide Savile (1939)
Russula, fide Ritchie (1941)
Scleroderma, fide Lander (1933)
f/romycg'^, fide Savile (1939)
2
8
4
4
4
2
4
8
4
4
4
2
4
some at least of the reports of a chromosome number of 2
misinterpreted observations of one pair of choromosomes
from
may have resulted
behind another.
Normally, only the two meiotic divisions, producing four nuclei, occur in the
Savile suggests that
basidium; exceptionally, there are further, mitotic, divisions, resulting in more than
four spores on the basidium. The basidiospores are usually borne on slender stalks
called sterigmata. Sterigmata and spores are formed by evagination of the wall of
the basidium; the nuclei migrate through the sterigmata into the spores.
—
The
144]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Basidiomygetes a. Two germinating basidiosporcs of Agariciis campcsproduce mycelia which anastomose freely, the cells becoming plurinucleate,
after Hein ( 1930) x 500.
b, c. Young and older basidia of Cystobasidium sebaceum,
d-g, Eocronartium muscicola after P'itzpatrick (1918); d, fusafter Martin (1939).
ion nucleus; e, homeotypic division in the basidium; f, four-celled basidium; g, production of basidiospore. h^ i^ i, Basidia of Ustilago Heujlcri, U. Hurdei, and Tille(Continued bottom p. 145)
Fig. 28.
:
tris
,
Phylum Inophyta
[
145
Most basidia discharge the spores actively, to a distance of a fraction of a millimeter. Buller (1929) observed that just before a spore is cast off a minute droplet
of liquid appears at the summit of the sterigma. This occurs in precisely the same
fashion in mushrooms, rusts, certain smuts, and the yeast-like organism Sporoholomyces. Buller inferred that the force which discharges the spore is surface tension
in the droplet.
The
fruits of
Basidiomycetes are evidently adapted to the feebleness
mechanism by which the spores are discharged. If the fruits are cup-like,
they open laterally or downward. The basidia of mushrooms stand horizontally on
gills which are commonly less than one millimeter apart, allowing the spores to
fall from between them without touching them.
The groups of Ascomycetes and Basidiomycetes are evidently related. Morels and
mushrooms, truffles and puffballs, taste alike. The technical scholar will be con-
of the
vinced that the groups are related by the occurrence in both of a dikaryophase
stage, a character too strongly in contrast with those of the generality of organisms
to be a probable product of parallel evolution. Gaumann quotes an old opinion of
Vuillemin (1893), "qu'une baside est un asque dont chaque cellule-fille avant de
passer a I'etat de spore, fait saillie au dehors et se transforme en une sorte de conidie
pour mieux s'adapter au transport par la vent." In dealing with the Zygomycetes,
Gaumann emphasized the apparent evolution of conidia from endospores by evagination of the walls of the sporangia. Largely, as
Vuillemin's hypothesis has
it
seems, by
Gaumann's
influence,
become generally accepted.
Gaumann was disposed to derive the Basidiomycetes from something like Ascocortkiiim, and began his account of several of the groups of Basidiomycetes with
forms having scant flat fruits, or having basidia which spring directly from the
substratum or host. Linder (1940) suggested a derivation from Cupulata or Sclerocarpa having operculate asci. He took note that many such asci open by producing a
vescicle, bounded by the stretched inner wall of the ascus, into which the ascospores pass. This led to the conclusion that the Basidiomycetes producing probasidia
are the lowest, and to this extent his reasoning appears cogent.
the rusts as the lowest Basidiomycetes,
which seems
He went on
to identify
far-fetched, the rusts
being
distinctly a specialized group.
The generally accepted groups of Basidiomycetes are those which were set forth
by Engler (1897, 1900), as follows:
Subclass HEMiBAsron, having basidia bearing indefinite numbers of spores; the
smuts.
Subclass EuBAsron, the basidia bearing definite numbers of spores.
Order {Reihe) Protobasidigmycetes, the basidia divided into
cells.
Suborder {Unterreihe or Ordnung) ^uricularhneae, the basidia divided
by transverse walls.
Sub-suborder [Unter ordnung) Uredinales, the rusts.
k, 1, Basidia of Patouillardina cinerea after Martin
( 1924)
(1935). m, Basidium of Sebacina sublilacina after Martin (1934). n, Basidium
o, p, younger and older basidia of Tulasof Protodontia Uda after Martin ( 1932).
q-t, Development of the basidium of
nella phaerospora, after Martin (1939).
tia Tritici, after Sartoris
.
Bodman (1938). u-x, Russula emetica after Ritchie
(1941); binucleate primordium of basidium, fusion nucleus, homeotypic division,
development of basidiospores. y, z, Basidia of Lycogalopsis Solmsii after Martin
Guepinia Spathularia, after
(1939).
X 1,000 except
as noted.
146
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Sub-suborder Auriculariales.
Suborder Tremellineae, the basidia divided by longitudinal walls.
(At this point should appear Reihe Autobasidiomycetes, to include eight
Unterreihen of ordinary Basidiomycetes. The name Autobasidiomycetes
does not appear in the table of contents, the text, or the index of the
Natilrlichen Pflanzenfamilien; it was published in Engler's Syllabus, 1892).
Rearranging these groups according to current opinion, and suppressing the subsidiary categories, one arrives at the following system of orders:
1. Producing probasidia or transversely divided
basidia, usually both.
2.
Probasidia, if formed, terminal on the
hyphae.
3. Mostly saprophytic and producing
Order
1.
Protobasidiomycetes,
Order
2.
Hypodermia.
Order
3.
Ustilaginea.
gitudinally
Order
4.
Tremellina.
Without probasidia, the basidia undivided.
2. Fruits gelatinous, basidia producing only
two spores on stout sterigmata
Order
5.
Dacryomygetalea.
.Order
6.
Fungi.
Order
7.
Dermatocarpa.
gelatinous fruits
3. Parasitic,
mostly
not
producing
fruits; the rusts
2.
Probasidia produced by rounding up and
deposition of
thiclc
walls by the gener-
mycelium
Without probasidia, the basidia divided
ality of the cells of the
1.
1.
2.
Not
3.
lon-
as above.
Basidia in a layer which forms with-
out protection or becomes exposed.
3.
.
formed in closed fruits
which do not open to expose them
Basidia
as a single layer
Protobasidiomycetes Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I
Abt 1**: iii (1900).
Suborder Auriculariineae and sub-suborder Auriculariales Engler 1. c.
Order Auricularineac Campbell Univ. Textb. Bot. 175 (1902).
Order Auriculariales Bcssey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 309 (1907).
Basidiomycetes mostly producing probasidia, th.^ basidia divided by transverse
walls, mostly saprophytic and producing gelatinous fruits.
This order includes the family Auriculariacea [Auriculariaceae] Lindau in Engler
and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. 1**: 83 (1900), from which two or three
others have been segregated; about fifteen genera and about 125 species.
Martin (1943) has discussed the name of the genus Auricularia and of its type
species. The organism in question is surely the Jew's ear, Tretnella Auricula L.; the
genus Auricularia Bulliard 1795 can have nothing else as a type. The right name
of the species is Auricularia Auricula (L. ) Underwood 1902. It is a saprophyte on
logs and sticks, producing flattened brown gelatinous fruits a few centimeters in
diameter, vaguely resembling human ears. There are no probasidia. Hyphae growing
toward the surfaces of the fruits produce a palisade of elongate basidia. Each basidium becomes divided by transverse walls into four cells, and each of these sends out
Order
1.
Teil,
Phylum Inophyta
[
147
an elongate sterigma which bears a curved basidiospore. The organism
produces also conidia, either from the mycelium, the fruits, or directly from the
to the surface
basidiospores.
A
series of
unfamiliar other genera, Platygloca, Cystobasidium, Septobasidium,
have been studied notably by Martin (1934, 1937, 1939, 1942). Jola and
Eocronartium are parasites on mosses. All of these genera produce probasidia, from
which four-celled phragmobasidia arise, as a layer near the surfaces of the fruits.
Most of them produce also conidia.
etc.,
2. Hypodermia [Hypodermii] Fries Syst. Myc. 3: 460 (1832).
Uredinees Brongniart in Bory de Saint Vincent Diet. Class. Hist. Nat. 16: 471
(1830).
Order Uredineae Winter in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland 1, Abt. 1:
74 (1884).
Sub-suborder Uredinales Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil,
Order
Abt. 1**:
iii
(1900).
Order Uredinales Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 306 (1907).
Order Pucciniales Clements and Shear Gen. Fung. ed. 2: 147 (1931).
The rusts: parasitic Basidiomycetes, the haploid and dikaryote mycelia usually
attacking different hosts; the dikaryote mycelium producing probasidia, these not
usually compacted into fruits, usually heavily walled and serving as resting spores,
becoming or giving rise to four-celled phragmobasidia.
The
typical reproductive structure of the haploid stage
is
the aecium, a cup-shaped
which releases spores called aeciospores; this stage is accordingly called the
stage, and its host the aecial host. In addition to aecia, this stage usually pro-
structure
aecial
duces pycnidia or spermagonia.
mycelium are
then,
is
The
typical reproductive structures of the dikaryote
clusters (telia) of spores called teliospores or teleutospores; this stage,
the telial stage,
and
its
The telial stage usually
The teliospore, or rather
host the telial host.
beside the teliospores, others called uredospores.
produces,
(since the
teliospore commonly consists of two or more cells) each cell of the teliospore, is a
probasidium, producing a promycelium which bears four basidiospores. These statements mean that a normal rust produces spores of five kinds. Rusts producing different kinds of spores were formerly supposed to be different genera; such were the
Aecidium, Uredo, and Puccinia of Persoon, who, however, remarked of Uredo linearis, "vereor, ne junior plantula Pucciniae graminis modo sit." De Bary first proved
that
Aecidium Berberis
is
yet another stage of Puccinia graminis.
by syngamy among cells of the aecial
Phragmidium violaceum, Blackman observed this to take place between
different cells of the same hypha. Christman (1905) and Moreau (1914), studying
other species of Phragmidium, observed fusion to take place between tips of different
hyphae. Craigie, 1927, showed that Puccinia graminis occurs in two mating types,
and that the fertilizing elements are pycniospores or spermatia. De Bary (1884) had
suggested that this is the truth; his suggestion waited some forty years to be confirmed.
The dikaryophase
is
initiated, of course,
stage. In
much
The
pycniospores are carried out of
make protoplasmic
connection with paraphyses growing from pycnidia of the opposte mating type. The
binucleate uredospores arise from a dikaryote mycelium, but the cup-shaped wall of
Allen (1930) has described
of the detail.
the pycnidium in exuding fluid, and are carried by insects; they
the aecium
is
produced by the haploid mycelium.
148
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
The first-formed reproductive structures of the dikaryote mycelium on the telial
host are usually uredospores, which remain binucleate and have the function of
spreading the infection of the telial host.
Teliospores may be compacted into palisade-like masses which break through the
epidermis of the host; the masses may be gelatinous and yellow, like fruits of
Auriculariacea. In other genera, the teliospores are gathered into hard, microscopic-
columns, and in yet others they break through the epidermis in masses not
compacted, each teliospore on a separate stalk. The teliospores of Phragynidium are
ally stout
chains of several probasidia; those of the
many
species of Pucciriia are chains reduced
two probasidia; those of Ravcnelia are globular
clusters of probasidia. Almost
always, the teliospores are thick-walled; outside of the tropics, they have the function
of overwintering. Each probasidium contains two nuclei. These unite as a preliminary
to
was first observed by Sappin-Troufi^y (in Dangeard and SappinThereafter the probasidium gives rise to the four-celled promycelium.
to germination: this
Troufi'y, 1893).
The
young
life
cycle thus described
structure
not perfectly stable. Aeciospores, uredospores, and
and are genetically identical. Spores of the
and behavior of any of these types may be produced by processes which
normally lead
amy
is
teliospores are alike dikaryote,
to another.
Thus
in Puccinia
Malvaccaruvi, the hollyhock
rust,
syng-
leads directly to the production of teliospores on the host of the haploid mycel-
ium; spermagonia, aecia, and uredosori are not produced.
Four families of rusts may be recognized (various authorities make fewer or more).
There are about five thousand species.
Family 1. Melampsoracea [Melampsoraceae] Dietel in Engler and Prantl Nat.
Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. 1**: 38 (1900). Teliospores forming a single compact
layer and germinating by producing promycelia. The aecial stages are mostly on
conifers. Some have telial stages on ferns, and FauU (1929) regards these as most
primitive; others attack a variety of flowering plants.
Family 2. Coleosporiacea [Coleosporiaceae] Auctt. The teliospores themselves
becoming basidia by transverse division. In some examples, as Gallowaya, they are
thin-walled.
Family 3. Cronartiacea [Cronartiaceae] Auctt. The teliospores compacted into
columns. Cronartium, with aecial stages on pines; C. ribicola, the important white
pine blister rust, its telial stage on gooseberries and currants.
Family 4. Uredinacea [Uredinaceae] Cohn in Hedwigia 11: 17 (1872). Family
Pucciniaceae Dietel op. cit. 48. The bulk of the rusts, producing teliospores on individual stalks. Hemileia vastatrix, the coffee rust; Phragmidium spp., autoecious (attacking a single host) on Rosaceae; Gymnosporangium, the aecial stage on junipers,
the telial (with no uredospores) on plants of the apple tribe; Puccinia, a great number of species. The races which attack barberry and grasses are all called Puccinia
graminis; but there are morphologically distinguishable strains on wheat, rye, oats,
timothy, Agrostis, and blue grass. Leading an active sexual life and capable of mutation, these strains are subdivisible into large numbers of races distinguished by capacity to attack different races of hosts. Given a specimen of rust on wheat, one determines by
it
trial
belongs.
upon
The
seedlings of ten varieties of
wheat
to
which of 189 numbered races
races occur characteristically in different wheat-growing areas. If one
breeds wheat for resistance to rust, there is good probability of success against the
races occurring locally; but some other race is likely to move into the area (Stakman,
1947).
Phylum Inophyla
Order
3.
[
149
Ustilaginea [Ustilagineae] (Tulasne and Tulasne) Winter in Rabenhorst
Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland
1,
Abt.
Ustilagineae Tulasne and Tulasne
1:
in
73 (1884).
Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot.
ser. 3, 7:
73 (1847).
Subclass Hemibasidii Engler Syllab. 26 (1892).
Order Ustilaginales Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 306 (1907).
The smuts:
parasitic Basidiomycetes completing their development on a single
dikaryophase mycelium breaking up into thick-walled black spores, these
functioning as probasidia, the basidia usually bearing more than four basidiospores.
In the apparently more primitive smuts, the promycelia are four-celled phragmobasidia. The haploid nuclei divide before passing into the basidiospores, with the
effect that each cell of the promycelium buds off a series of basidiospores. In other
examples the promycelia do not become divided by walls, but are of the character of
holobasidia. The basidiospores of some species are capable of budding like yeasts.
In some species, they are capable of syngamy with each other, and in some they send
out hyphae which bear conidia of characteristic form. In many species, syngamy has
not been observed, but is beheved to take place between vegetative hyphae. Hybridization, and mutation, particularly in the capacity to attack particular races of hosts,
host, the
take place freely in smuts, which are accordingly well fitted to cope with the efforts
of plant breeders.
The smuts are believed to be somewhat degenerate descendants of the rusts.
There are two families, about thirty genera, about six hundred species.
Family 1. Ustilaginacea [Ustilaginaceae] Cohn in Hedwigia 11: 17 (1872). The
basidia divided by transverse walls. Ustilago, on grasses and other plants.
Family 2. Tilletiacea [Tilletiaceae] Dietel in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam.
I Teil, Abt. 1** 15 ( 1900) The basidia not divided by walls. Tilletia, on grains, etc.
Tuburcinia, Doassansia, the resting spores produced in globular masses.
:
.
Order 4. Tremellina [Tremellinae] Fries Syst. Myc. 1: 2 (1821); 2: 207 (1822).
Order Tremellinei Fries Hymen. Eur, 1 (1874).
Order Tremellineae Winter in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland 1, Abt. 1
74 (1884).
Suborder Tremellineae Engler
Abt. 1**:
in
Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam.
I Teil,
(1900).
Order Tremellales Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 309 (1907).
Order Tulasnellales Gaumann Vergl. Morph. Pilze 487 (1926).
iii
Saprophytic Basidiomycetes producing gelatinous
fruits
bearing a layer of basidia
which typically become divided into four cells by longitudinal walls. Each cell produces a long stout sterigma which reaches the surface of the fruit and bears a spore.
The mycelia, the young fruits, or the basidiospores may bear conidia.
The number of species is perhaps one hundred. Nearly all belong to family Tremellacea [Tremellaceae] Cohn in Hedwigia 11: 17 (1872). Martin (1935, 1937,
1939) has given much study to this group. It is clearly related to the Protobasidiomycetes; Patouillardina, having basidia divided by oblique walls, is clearly transitional. Tremella, Sebacina, Tremellodendron, Hyaloria.
Tulasnella differs from the generality of Tremellina in producing holobasidia of
a peculiar type, with bulbous sterigmata (Lindau interpreted the sterigmata as basi-
diospores borne without sterigmata and not released, but producing conidia;
be that
the holobasidia of this
more sound than
it
may
supposed that
genus are derived from the cruciate basidia of proper Tremel-
this interpretation
is
the obvious one). It
is
150
lina
The
]
by a
Lower Organisms
Classification of
line of descent separate
from those which have produced the holobasidia of
By leaving Tulasnella in order Tremellina, we spare
one more insignificant order.
other groups.
nition of
Order
5.
ourselves the recog-
Dacryomycetalea [Dacryomycetales] Gaumann Vergl. Morph.
Pilze
490
(1926).
Suborder Dacryomycetineae Engler
Engler and PrantI Nat. Pflanzenfam.
in
ITeil, Abt. 1**: iv (1900).
Saprophytic Basidiomycetes producing small gelatinous
fruits
bearing holobasidia
which two of the nuclei produced by meiosis undergo degeneration, while two
pass into the basidiospores by way of stout sterigmata which give the basidium the
form of a Y. Conidia are produced either from the mycelium, from the young fruits,
or from the basidiospores.
There is a single family Dacryomycetacea [Dacryomycetaceae] Hennings in Engler
and PrantI Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. 1**: 96 (1900). Dacryomyces, Dacryomiin
tra,
Guepinia.
Bodman
(
1938) observed the details of the cytological processes in the
basidia.
This insignificant order,
sidered,
is
and the two great orders next
like Tulasnella
to
be con-
evidently derived from Protobasidiomycetes, through Tremellina, by loss
of septa in the basidia; the peculiarities of
its
basidia suggest an independent origin.
Order 6. Fungi L. Sp. PI. 1171 (1753).
Order Hynienothecii Persoon Syst. Meth. Fung, xvi (1801).
Class Hymenomycetes and orders Pilcati and Clavati Fries
Syst.
Myc.
1:
1,
2
(1821').
Yzmily Hymenomycetes Fries Espicrisis 1 (1836).
Family Agaricaceae Cohn in Hedwigia 11: 17 (1872).
Order Hymenomycetes Winter in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland
1,
Abt.
74 (1884).
Suborders Exobasidiineae and Hymenomycetineae Engler in Engler and PrantI
Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt.'l**: iv (1900).
1:
Orders Hymenomycetales and Exohasidiales Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies
7: 307, 308 (1907).
Order A^aricalcs Clements Gen. Fung. 102 (1909).
Orders Cantharellales, Polyporales, and Agaricales Gaumann Vergl. Morph.
Pilze495, 503, 519 (1926).
Basidiomycetes producing holobasidia in a layer which is or becomes exposed to
the air, usually on fruits which are woody, leathery, or fleshy, rather than waxy or
gelatinous.
The layer of
hymenium
basidia
is
called the
hymenium. In the lowest members
of the group,
on the mycelium, on the surface of the host or
substratum; in higher examples, it is formed on the surface of more or less complicated fruits; in the highest, it is formed in closed fruits which open to expose it. The
area of the hymenium, and the number of basidia it can bear, is increased when it is
not smooth, but thrown into teeth, ridges, plates, or other projections. Families have
been distinguished chiefly on the basis of the form of the hymenium. The system is not
the
is
formed
directly
reliably entirely natural; Overholts (1929)
pointed out various microscopic details
which promise to contribute to a more natural system. Among these are cystidia,
swollen cells imbedded in the hymenium and projecting from it; in some examples at
Phylum Inophyta
[151
they are sterile basidia and serve to hold apart the ridges bearing the hymenium.
Other microscopic features are setae, similar to cystidia but hard, dark, and pointed;
slender hairs called paraphyses; latex ducts; and crystalline inclusions.
There are some fifteen thousand species. The following famiHes are for the most
least,
part the conventionally accepted ones.
Family
1.
Pflanzenfam.
sniall
Exobasidiacea [Exobasidiaceae] Hennings
I Teil,
Abt. 1**: 103 (1900).
The
in
Engler and Prantl Nat.
basidia directly on the mycelium.
A
group, mostly parasitic on plants. Exohasidium.
Family 2. Thelephoracea [Thelephoraceae] (Saccardo) Hennings (1900). Order
Thelephorei Fries Hymen. Eur. 1 ( 1874) FamHy Thelephorei Winter ( 1884) Thelephoraceae Saccardo Sylloge 8: xiii (1889). Fruits of various form, gelatinous, fleshy
.
.
or leathery, the hymenium covering the surface generally except where it faces upward. Corticium, saprophytic, the fruit a mere appressed layer; Stereum, leathery
shelf-like extensions from decaying sticks and logs: these genera seem to lead into
Lnmily Polyporacea. Cora, a tropical variant of Stereum, is the only lichen-forming
basidiomycete. Thelephora, Craterellus, the fruits club-, funnel-, or cup-like.
Family
Clavariacea
[Clavariaceae] (Saccardo) Hennings (1900). Order
(1874). Family Clavariei Winter (1884). Clavariaceae Saccardo
(1889). Fruits fleshy, club-like or branched; stag-horn fungi. Clavaria, generally
3.
Clavariei Fries
edible.
Family
4.
Fries (1874).
ium on
Hydnacea [Hydnaceae] (Saccardo) Hennings (1900). Order Hydnei
Family //yi/n^i Winter (1884). Hydnaceae Saccardo (1889). Hymen-
the surface of downward-pointing teeth. Fruits assigned to the genus
Hydnum
may be
massive or variously branched or mushroom-shaped, leathery or fleshy; the
fleshy examples are edible. Fruits of Irpex are little leathery brackets projecting from
sticks and logs, distinguished from Stereum or Polystictus by the masses of fine teeth
projecting below.
Family 5. Polyporacea [Polyporaceae] (Saccardo) Hennings (1900). Order PolyporeiYries (1874). Family Polyporei Winter (1884). Polyporaceae Saccardo (1889).
The hymenium lining vertical tubes open below. These are mostly woody or leathery
shelf fungi, mostly saprophytic on wood, numerous and varied in detail. Cooke ( 1940)
recognized forty-six genera in North America. Polyporus, Fames, Polystictus. In Dacdalea, the pores are not cylinders but slits; this genus leads into Lenzites, in which the
hymenium
is
borne on radiating
plates,
and which
ing green
when
bruised.
These
conventionally stationed in
is
Agaricacea. Boletus has stout fleshy mushroom-shaped
fruits are unattractive,
yellow to brown, turn-
fruits,
but some species are eaten;
others are supposed to be poisonous.
Family
6.
Agaricacea [Agaricaceae] Cohn
in
Hedwigia
Agaricini Fries (1874). Family Agaricini Winter (1884).
plates, radiating from a center, called gills.
These are the Fungi whose
fruits are called
11:
17
(1872). Order
The hymenium on
mushrooms or
are mostly mushroom-shaped, sometimes shelf-like; the texture
toadstools.
is
vertical
The
fruits
usually fleshy, vary-
ing to leathery on the one hand, and on the other to deliquescent, i.e., becoming
converted after maturity into black fluid. There has been much study of the development of the fruits (Levine (1922) and Hein (1930) give extensive bibliographies).
This occurs in any of several different fashions, leading to recognizable differences in
the mature structure. For the identification of agarics, many mushroom books are
available.
Any
interested person, noting the details of structure
which
result
from
the different courses of development, together with the color of the spores (of one
152
The
]
Classification of
of five classes, white, pink to red, light
Lower Organisms
brown
to rust color,
dark brown or purple, or
black), will find identification reasonably easy. Popular interest in agarics
cerned, of course, with the edible and poisonous.
is
con-
Many amateur mycophagists need
to
be convinced that there is no single test for poisonous agarics except the final one.
One who encounters an unfamiliar species may chew and eat a small scrap of it; if
it is tasty and without bad after-effects, one may collect and eat the same species
when one again recognizes it by its technical characters. At the present point, it is
expedient to mention only a few examples.
Deliquescent agarics with black spores are called inky caps and constitute the genus
Coprinus. All are edible; they should be fried in butter and served on toast.
Fruits of Agaricus campestris, the field mushroom, are rather large, white or gray
on top, the stalk marked by a ring but no cup, the gills pink when young, dark brown
to nearly black
when mature. Anything
Fruits of Pleurotus have
of this character
an excentric or
is
safely edible.
lateral stalk, or none,
bracket-like, fleshy, with white spores. All species are edible.
being shelf- or
The most
familiar
is
mushroom, P. ostreatus, producing large white to gray fruits on dead
trees, commonly on poplars.
Fruits of Amanita are marked by cup and ring, and bear white spores. Some species
the oyster
are
known
to
be edible; others, as the
fly agaric,
A. muscaria, recognized by a red cap
flecked with white, are extremely poisonous.
7. Podaxacea [Podaxaceae] Fischer in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam.
Abt. 1**: 332 (1900). Gyrophragmium produces fruits much like those of
Agaricus, but coming up only to ground level, and drying and shattering irregularly
instead of opening like mushrooms. The gills are quite evident in immature fruits.
Podaxon is similar, but does not form definite gills. These organisms are convention-
Family
I Teil,
ally
stationed in the next order, but their obvious natural position
is
next
to
Agaricacea.
Order 7. Dermatocarpa [Dermatocarpi] Persoon Syst. Meth. Fung, xiii (1801).
Order Lytothccii Persoon op. cit. xv.
Class Gasteromycetes and orders Angiogastres and Trichospermi Fries Syst. Myc.
2: 275, 276 (1822).
Family Gasteromycetes Fries Epicrisis 1 (1836)
Order Gasteromycetes Winter in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl. Deutschland
1,
Abt.
1:864(1884).
Suborders Phallineae, Hymenogastrineae, Lycoperdineae, Nidulariineae, and
Plectobasidiineae Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanznfam. I Teil, Abt.
1**: iv (1900).
Orders Phallineae, Lycoperdineae, and Nidularineae Campbell Univ. Textb.
Bot. 186, 187, 188 (1902).
Orders Hymenogastrales, Phallales, Lycoperdales, Nidulariales, and Sclcrodermatales Bessey in Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 306-307 (1907).
Orders Plectobasidiales and Gasteromycetes Gaumann Vergl. Morph. Pilze 537,
544(1926).
Basidiomycetes producing holobasidia enclosed in fruits, not forming a continuous
layer or not exposed as such, not discharging the spores directly into the air, sterig-
mata more or
less suppressed.
Distinguished by negative characters, this order may be suspected of being artificial;
but Engler's attempt to correct this produced orders which were small and numerous
I'lixUnu Innfihytd
—
[
153
Fig. 29.
Fruits of Agaricacea: upper left, Coprinus atramcntarius; upper right,
Galera tenera; below, Agaricus campestris. Photographs by the late Dr.
J. J. McCabe,
by courtesy of the Department of Botany, University of California.
Phylum Inophyta
an unsatisfactory degree, and
to
to
some
[
155
of which the suspicion of artificiality con-
tinued to attach.
Dodge, translating Gaumann (1928), took account of the course of development
whose fruits are characteristically produced underground. The roll of families which appear tenable is as follows.
A. Fruits typically formed underground.
Family 1. Rhizopogonacea [Rhizopogonaceae] Dodge in Gaumann Comp. Morph.
Fungi 469 (1928).
Family 2. Sclerodermea [Sclerodermei] Winter in Rabenhorst Kryptog.-Fl.
Deutschland 1, Abt. 1: 865 (1884). Family Sclerodermataceae Fischer in Engler
and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. 1**: 334 (1900).
Family 3. Hydnangiacea [Hydnangiaceae] Dodge in Gaumann op. cit. 485.
Family 4. Hymenogastrea [Hymenogastrei] Winter in Rabenhorst op. cit. 865.
Family Hymenogastraccae de Toni in Saccardo Sylloge 7: 154 (1888).
Family 5. Hysterangiacea [Hysterangiaceae] Fischer in Engler and Prantl op. cit.
of the fruits in rearranging those families
304.
B. Fruits appearing
Family
are the
on the surface of the ground.
Lycoperdacea [Lycoperdaceae] Cohn in Hedwigia
6.
common puffballs,
11: 17
Lycoperdon, Bovista, Calvatia, Lycogalopsis,
(
1872)
.
These
The
conglobular fruits become disorganized, leaving a mass of spores
m.ixed with fibers (modified hyphae constituting a capillitium), enclosed in one or
more continuous layers of tissue (peridia) which open usually through one stellate
pore at the summit. Geaster has a double peridium. The outer peridium becomes
split by meridional clefts from the apex nearly to the base, and the lobes curl back
tents of the
in
damp
more or
etc.
less
weather, exposing the inner peridium with its terminal pore. The appearance
damp condition explains the common name, earth star, and the
of the fruit in the
name of the same meaning.
Family 7. Tulostomea [Tulostomei] Winter in Rabenhorst op. cit. 866. Family
Tulostomataceae Fischer in Engler and Prantl op. cit. 342. Tulostoma produces at
ground level puffball-like fruits which are found to stand upon buried stalks some
scentific
centimeters long.
The
basidia bear the spores scattered along the sides instead of in
a crown at the summit. This
is probably a minor deviation from the condition in
ordinary puffballs, and not a token of independent origin.
Family 8. Nidulariea [Nidulariei] Winter in Rabenhorst 1. c. Family Nidulariaceae
de Toni in Saccardo Sylloge 7: 28 (1888). The bird's nest fungi, Nidularia, Cyathus,
etc., with small fruits growing on sticks or earth, the outer peridium opening and
exposing several peridioles.
Sphaerobolacea [Sphaerobolaceae] Fischer in Engler and Prantl op.
on wood, produces minute puffball-like fruits
which discharge mechanically a globular mass of spores.
Family 10. Clathracea [Clathraceae] Fischer in Engler and Prantl op. cit. 280.
Closely related and transitional to the following family.
Family 11. Phalloidea [Phalloidei] Winter in Rabenhorst 1. c. Family Phallaceae
Family
cit.
9.
346. Sphaerobolus, a saprophyte
Fischer in Engler and Prantl op. cit. 289. The stinkhorns. Phallus, Dictyophora,
Mutinus, etc. These organisms produce highly specialized fruits. A fruit is first seen
as a white globe, as large as a marble or a golf-ball, at ground level. It has a leathery
peridium containing certain structures imbedded in gelatinous matter: there is a
firm thimble-shaped structure upon whose surface the basidia develop; below or
within this there is a body of the form of a hollow cylinder of spongy structure. When
156
]
The
Classification of
Lower Organisms
the spores are ripe, the spongy body grows, so to speak, by unfolding, and becomes,
it
may
be within an hour, a stalk as much as 15 cm. tall. This happens usually during
is not commonly observed. The growing stalk carries the
the night or at dawn, and
basidium-bearing structure into the air, bursting the peridium, which remains as a
cup about the base, and exposing the spores in a mass of jelly which is of an odor
repulsive to man but attractive to carrion-seeking insects. The latter are used as
agents of dissemination.
X
PHYLUM PROTOPLASTA
Chapter
Phylum
6.
PROTOPLASTA Haeckel
Stdmme Protoplasta and Myxomycetes Haeckel Gen. Morph.
2:
xxiv, xxvi
(1866).
Subphylum Plasmodroma Doflein Protozoen 13 (1901), in part.
Subphylum Rhizoflagellata Grasse Traite Zool. 1, fasc. 1: 133 (1952), not order
Rhizoflagellata Kent (1880).
Further names for the myxomycetes as a phylum are cited below under class
Mycetozoa.
Organisms without photosynthetic pigments, mostly with flagellate stages, the
flagella simple or acroneme, not paired and equal nor solitary and posterior; com-
monly occurring also in amoeboid stages. By Haeckel's original publication, the type
is Amoeba, i.e., Amiba diffluens.
Amoeboid organisms are those whose protoplasts lack walls or shells, or are only
incompletely covered by them, and which thrust forth temporary bodies of protoplasm, called pseudopodia, functional in motion and in predatory nutrition. Pseudopodia are of several types. If massive and blunt they are lobopodia. If fine and
straight, not anastomosing and usually not branching, they are filopodia; or, if they
contain inner filaments, axopodia. If fine, branching, and anastomosing, they are
or standard
rhizopodia.
The
characters of the pseudopodia distinguish the accepted primary groups of
amoeboid organisms. Variations in this character tend to run parallel to variations
in the structure and composition of shells and skeletons: to a considerable extent,
the accepted groups appear natural. This applies to the second, third, and fourth
among the classes treated below. The phylum, on the other hand, is acknowledgedly
artificial. Some of its groups appear to have had their origins (presumably more
origins than one)
among
the chrysomonads; others are of unguessed origin.
1.
Flagellate in the vegetative condition
1.
Amoeboid
2.
Producing rhizopodia; with
2.
1.
Zoomastigoda.
Class
3.
Rhizopoda.
Class
4.
Heliozoa.
Class
2.
Mycetozoa.
Glass
5.
Sarkodina.
shells, these
usually calcareous
2.
Class
in the vegetative condition.
Producing filopodia or axopodia; mostly
with skeletons, these usually siliceous
Producing lobopodia.
flagellate reproductive
3. Producing
cells; mostly macroscopic, subaerial
3. Not as above; without flagellate
stages
Class
1
.
ZOOMASTIGODA Calkins
Subclass Zoomastigina Doflein Lehrb. Prot. ed. 4: 462 (1916).
Class Zoomastigoda Calkins Biol. Prot. 285 (1926).
Class Zooflagellata Grasse Traite Zool. 1, fasc. 1: 574 (1952).
Class Zoomastigophorea Hall Protozoology 170 (1953).
The
158]
Non-pigmented
if
Classification of
flagellates
Lower Organisms
having acroneme or simple flagella; amoeboid stages,
The standard is Bodo. Four orders are to be recog-
they occur, having lobopodia.
nized.
1.
Flagella one or two
1.
Flagella four to eight (in each neuromotor
system,
2.
if
flagella;
Rhizoflagellata.
Order
2.
PoLYMASXiGroA.
more than one).
homologous with
parabasal body commonly abif
present,
Axostyles present, not homologous with
flagella;
parabasal body present, disap-
pearing during mitosis
1.
1.
these are
Axostyles,
sent
2.
Order
Flagella of indefinite large
numbers
Order 3. Trichomonadina.
Order 4. Hypermastigina.
1. Rhizoflagellata [Rhizo-Flagellata] Kent Man. Inf. 1: 220 (1880).
Orders Trypanosomata (the mere plural of a generic name) and FlagellatoPantostomata in part Kent op. cit. 218, 229.
Suborders Monadina in part and Heteromastigoda Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord.
Thierreichs 1: 810, 827 (1884).
Protomastigina Klebs in Zeit. wiss. Zool. 55: 293 (1893).
Order Protomonadina Blochmann Mikr. Tierwelt ed. 2, 1 39 (1895).
Subclasses Pantostomatineae and Protomastigineae Engler in Engler and Prantl
Order
:
Nat. Pflanzenfam.
I Teil,
Abt. la: iv (1900).
Orders Pantostomatales and Protomastigales Engler Syllab. ed. 3: 7 (1903).
Orders Cercomonadinea and Monadidea in part Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 139,
140 (1913).
Orders Pantostomatineae and Protomastigineae Lemmermann in Pascher Siisswasserfl. Deutschland 1: 30, 52 (1914).
Order Rhizomastigina Doflein Lehrb. Prot. ed. 4: 704 (1916).
Orders Pantostomatida and Protomastigida Calkins Biol. Prot. 286, 288 (1926).
Orders Trypanosomidea Grasse, Bodonidea Hollande, and Proteromonadina
Grasse in Grasse Traite Zool. 1, fasc. 1: 602, 669, 694 (1952).
Orders Rhizomastigida and Protomastigida Hall Protozoology 171, 173 (1953).
Non-pigmented flagellates with one flagellum or two unequal flagella, these
simple or acroneme; commonly with amoeboid stages, or amoeboid while bearing
flagella. The type, being the sole genus of Rhizo-Flagellata as originally published, is
Mastigamoeba, i. e., Chaetoproteus Stein.
As the synonymy shows, most authorities have made these organisms two orders,
Pantostomatales (or some such name), amoeboid in the vegetative condition, and
Protomastigina (or the like), not definitely so. Monas, and the choanoflagellates
and Amphimonadaceae, usually included in the latter order, have in the present work
been given places elsewhere. The residue of the Protomastigina are not sharply
different in character from the original Rhizoflagellata, and are accordingly placed
in the same order. The resulting group is not a very numerous one. Some examples
appear to occur naturally as predators in uncontaminatcd waters; the majority have
been found in foul or contaminated waters, or in feces, and are believed to be
naturally cntozoic, cither commensal or parasitic. Further examples are parasites in
blood. A cytological character marking the majority of the goup, but not confined
to it, is the parabasal body (better, perhaps, the kinetoplast; Kirby, 1944). This is a
Phylum Protoplasta
[
159
rather massive extranuclear body regularly present in the cell and distinct both
from the centrosome and the blepharoplast. In the present group, it divides when
the nucleus does. Thus this group, although marked chiefly by characters which are
negative or derived, appears possibly to be natural.
1. Flagella two.
1.
2.
Cells not notably slender
2.
Cells notably slender
Family
Family
2.
Family
Family
4.
1.
CERCOMONADroA.
TRYPANOPLASMroA.
Flagellum one.
2.
Not
2.
Conspicuously amoeboid
regularly markedly
amoeboid
3.
Oicomonadacea.
CHAETOPROXEroA.
Family 1. Cercomonadida [Cercomonadidae] Kent Man. Inf. 1: 249 (1880).
Family Bodonina Butschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1: 827 (1884). Family
5oc?onflccag Senn in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. la: 133 (1900).
Family Bodonidae Doflein Protozoen 73 (1901). Family Cercobodonidae Hollande
1942. Family Proteromonadidae Grasse Traite Zool. 1, fasc. 1: 694 (1952). Nonpigmented flagellates, the bodies not notably slender, with two flagella, one directed
anteriorly, the other trailing. Fischer (1894) found both of the flagella of Bodo to
be acroneme.
In Bodo both flagella are free of the body. There are numerous species, in infusions
or foul or polluted waters, or entozoic in a wide variety of animals, from insects to
men. Prowazekia, Proteromonas, and Pleuromonas are doubtfully c'istinct. Rhynchomonas, from fresh or foul waters, is distingished by a protoplasmic beak in which
the anterior flagellum is imbedded. Cercomonas, of like habitats, has the trailing
flagellum grown fast to the cell membrane; the eel! exhiljit a considerable capacity
:
to
send out lobopodia.
which can lose their flagella and take on the appearance
amoebas have repeatedly been discovered and variously named. So far as
the pseudopodia are lobopodia and the flagella are unequal, these organisms belong
Biflagellate organisms
of ordinary
flagella,
many accounts fail to establish the equality or inequality of the
with the result that the names used in them cannot be applied with confidence.
This
true of various organisms originally
in this family; but
is
named under Pseudospora, Dimastiga-
moeba, and Naegleria. The earliest generic name
as described in Cercobodo Senn, 1910.
definitely applicaple to organisms
Kuhn (1915), and others have described mitosis
examples of this family; the most detailed account is of Bodo Lacertae in
Belar's paper of 1921. The flagella spring from a blepharoplast from which a rhizoplast extends into the nucleus. The chromatin is reticulate, not massed in a karyosome, but no centrosome has been recognized in it when it is not dividing. The
rhizoplast, where it passes through the cytoplasm, is surrounded by stainable Ringkorper. The parabasal body, located on the posterior side of the nucleus, is massive
and often irregular. In division, the blepharoplast divides, each part retaining one
flagellum and generating an additional one. The rhizoplast appears to begin to split,
but presently it and the Ringkorper become invisible. Within the intact nuclear membrane there appears a spindle with evident centrosomes at the poles. The centrosomes
Belar (1914, 1916, 1920, 1921),
in various
come
presently to the inner surface of the nuclear
move
membrane, while the blepharo-
on the outside. Chromosomes duly assemble at
the equator of the spindle and undergo division. Division of the nucleus is completed by constriction of the nuclear membrane; the parabasal body undergoes
constriction; the cell divides by constriction lengthwise. The Ringkorper and the
rhizoplast are apparently regenerated by the blepharoplast.
plasts
to adjacent positions
—
The
160]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
5.
Fig. 30.
Rhizoflagellata
:
a,
Bodo
sp.
x
1,000.
b, c,
Cercomonas longicauda
by Wenyon (1910) in material from a cholera patient; d, the same as
e-h, Cryptobia spp.; e-g, cell and
identified by Hovasse (1937) in swamp water,
division stages of a species from the conger eel after Martin (1910); h, a species
from siphonophores after Keysselitz (1904) x 1,000. i, Phytomonas Donovani after
Franga (1914). j-p, Trypanosoma Lewisi; j, k, forms from the rat after Minchin
(1909); 1-p, forms from the flea Ceratophyllus fasciatus after Minchin & Thompson (1915). q. Division stage of Trypanosoma Brucii after Kiihn & Schuckmann
(1911). r, Chaetoproteus [Mastigamoeba aspera) after Schulze (1875) x 100.
as identified
X 2,000 except
as noted.
Phylum Protoplasta
[161
Bodo edax.
Trypanoplasmida [Trypanoplasmidae] Hartmann and Jollos 1910. Family Cryptobiidae Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 148 (1913). Family Trypanophidae Hollande in Grasse Traite Zool. 1, fasc. 1: 680 (1952). Organisms of essentially the
AlexeiefF (1924) described fusions of pairs of cells of
Family
2.
structure of Cercomonas, but notably slender in adaptation to parasitic life, the
trailing flagellum forming the margin of an undulating membrane on the body.
Parasitic in various invertebrates
The numerous
species
may be
and
in the gut
and blood of
fishes.
included in a single genus Cryptobia Leidy [Try-
panoplasma Laveran and Mesnil; Trypanophis Keysselitz).
According to Martin's (1910) description of a species from the eel Conger niger,
both flagella spring from a blepharoplast ("basal granule") at the anterior end.
As preliminary to division, the blepharoplast and flagella divide, and one blepharoplast migrates to the posterior end of the cell. The nucleus divides by constriction of
the nuclear membrane. There is a prominent parabasal body ("kinetonucleus") which
divides by constriction, as does the
cell, transversely.
Belar (1916) described sexual fusions of differentiated individuals of a species
parasitic in snails.
Family 3. Oicomonadacea [Oicomonadaceae] Senn in Engler and Prantl Nat.
Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt. la: 118 (1900). Family Trypanosomidae Doflein Protozoen 55 (1901). Family Trypanosomatidae Grobben 1904. Family Oicomonadidae
Hartog. Non-pigmented anteriorly uniflagellate organisms, not markedly amoeboid
while in the flagellate condition.
Oikomonas includes organisms
specialization, occurring in
of the character of the family without particular
contaminated water or
soil,
and
as
commensals
in the
intestine of animals.
The bulk
of the family consists of the slender-celled parasites
celled trypanosomes in the broad sense of the word.
From
which may be
the viewpoint of man, these
are the most important flagellates, and they have been the most intensely studied.
Some are known only from the guts of insects; some occur alternatively in insects
and
some
and vertebrates; and some in vertebrates and in inverteand leeches. The range of parasitization is as
though the group had evolved as parasites in insects, and had been carried to
other hosts by the activity of insects and other biting or sucking invertebrates.
Most trypanosomes occur in varied forms. The forms are designated by words
which originated as names of genera and remain in use as such. ( 1 ) The leptomonas
form has an anterior flagellum but no undulating membrane; it resembles a cell of
Oikomonas but is notably slender. (2) The leishmania form has no flagellum; the cell
is rounded up and lives attached to, or inside of, cells of the host. (3) In the crithidia
form, the base of the flagellum is continued as an undulating membrane more or less
to the middle of the cell. (4) In the trypanosoma form, the base of the flagellum is
continued as an undulating membrane to the posterior end of the cell.
plants;
in insects
brates other than insects, as ticks
The accepted genera
are distinguished (artificially, as one
may
suspect) by stages
produced and groups of hosts attacked, as follows:
l.With leptomonas stages in insects and in
Euphorbiaceae, Ascelepiadaceae, and other
plants with milky juice
1.
Confined
2.
2.
Phytomonas.
to invertebrate animals.
Trypanosoma
Trypanosoma
stage
known
stage
unknown;
Herpetomonas.
crithidia
162
The
]
stage
2.
Classification of
Lower Organisms
known
Crithidia.
Trypanosoma and
crithidia
stages un-
known
1.
Leptomonas.
Attacking vertebrate animals.
2.
Trypanosoma
Trypanosoma
stage
stage
known
unknown
Trypanosoma.
Leishmania.
Man has been concerned particularly with Trypanosoma gambiense, the agent of
African sleeping sickness; T. Cruzi, the cause of Chagas' disease; T. Brucii, T. Evansi,
T. equinum, and T. equiperdum, which cause in domestic animals the diseases,
respectively, nagana, surra, mal de caderas, and dourine; Leishmania Donovani and L.
2.
tropica, causing kala azar
and
oriental sore;
and L.
brasiliensis,
causing espundia,
ferida brava, or chicleros' ulcer, usually appearing as a grievous disfigurement of
the features.
Schaudinn (1903), having studied a trypanosome occurring in mosquitoes and in
the owl Athene noctua, described the nucleus as undergoing repeated unequal divisions. It appeared to him that when a cell is to produce a flagellum, one of the
minor nuclei produced by unequal division generates it. Prowazek (1903) described
similar phenomena in a Herpetomonas occurring in flies. These reports led Woodcock
(1906) to apply to the proper nucleus of trj^panosomes the term trophonucleus, and
to the large granule near the base of the flagellum the term kinetonucleus.
There has been much other study of the cytology of trypanosomes (as by Minchin,
1908, 1909; Robertson, 1909; Woodcock, 1910; Minchin and Woodcock, 1910, 1911;
Kiihn and Schuikmann, 1911; Minchin and Thomson, 1915; Schuurmans Stekhoven,
1919). This has not confirmed the foregoing accounts and conclusions, but appears
to have established the following points.
The base of the flagellum is slightly swollen and may be construed as a blepharoplast. Separated from the blepharoplast by a distance of one or two microns there
is a conspicuous parabasal body (the kinetonucleus of Woodcock). Fine strands connecting the blepharoplast, parabasal body, and nucleus, have been observed. Most of
is aggregated in a globular karyosome.
In mitosis, the karyosome breaks up to form a moderate number of chromosomes and
a central granule, evidently a centrosome, which stains more heavily than the chromosomes. It divides before the chromosomes, the daughter centrosomes remaining connected by a fine fiber, the centrodesmose. An obscure spindle forms about the centrodesmose; thi' chromosomes undergo division within the spindle, and the daughter
chromosome assemble about the centrosomes. Mitosis is completed by constriction
the stainable material in the resting nucleus
>
of the nuclear
membrane.
blepharoplast divides at the same time as the nucleus. The flagellum splits
to a short distance and one of the branches breaks loose; one daughter blepharoplast
retains essentially the whole of the original flagellum while the other generates one
The
almost entirely new. The parabasal body undergoes constriction. The cell
cuts in in such fashion as to divide the cell longitudinally. The blepharoplast and the parabasal body persist through the non-flagellate leishmania stage.
Reports that the nucleus may generate these structures, or that one of them may
generate another, were apparently mistaken.
which
is
membrane
Schaudinn described complicated processes by which a trypanosome generates
male and female gametes which duly undergo syngamy. His account is
believed to have resulted from mistaking stages of a sporozoan for those of a trypanosome. Still, the occurrence of syngamy among trypanosomes is inherently probable.
differentiated
Phylum Protoplasta
[
163
Family 4. Cliaetoproteida [Chaetoproteidae] Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 172 (1913).
Family Rhizomastigina Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1: 810 (1884).
Family Rhizomastigaceae Senn in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, Abt.
la: 113 (1900). Family Mastigamoebidae Kudo Protozoology ed. 3: 263 (1946).
Amoeboid organisms bearing one anterior flagellum, either permanently or temporarily.
In polluted
soil
or water, or commensal or pathogenic in animals.
The oldest genus, Chaetoproteus Stein {Mastigamoeba F. E. Schulze, 1875; Dinamoeba Leidy ?) remains poorly known. This organism and Mastigella are described
as fairly large; Craigia is much smaller. Rhizomastix is doubtfully distinct from
Craigia. Early
the family
is
names of
much
this
family appear to refer to Rhizomastix as the type, but
older than the genus, and the
names
are not valid.
Order 2. Polymastigida Calkins Biol. Prot. 292 (1926).
Family Polymastigina Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1: 842 (1884).
Order Polymastigina Blochmann Mikr. Tierwelt ed. 2, 1: 47 (1895).
Subclass Distomatineae Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil,
Abt. la: iv (1900).
Order Distomatinales Engler Syllab. ed. 3: 7 (1903), not based on a generic
name.
Orders Pyrsonymphina, Oxymonadina, Retortomonadina, and Distomata Grasse
Traite Zool. 1: fasc. 1: 788, 801, 824, 963 (1952).
Non-pigmented flagellates with simple or acroneme flagella of definite number,
from four to eight (two in Retortomonas), in the individual neuromotor system, and
accordingly on the individual cell, except when the neuromotor systems are multiplied; not of the definite characters of the following order.
Free-living, chiefly in
commensal or parasitic in animals. Polymastix is presumably the type
group. It was listed with a query in Biitschli's original publication of family
foul waters, or
of the
Polymastigina.
In the generality of Polymastigida, the cells are dorsiventral and have single nuclei
and neuromotor systems. There are derived examples in which the cells are spirally
twisted. There is a group in which the cells are double, having two nuclei and neuromotor systems. In another group there are two or more neuromotor systems, usually
with more than one nucleus; the cells consist of units in a whorled or spiral arrange-
ment, so that as wholes they are of radial symmetry.
The neuromotor system
consists primarily of
( 1 )
the flagella;
(2)
one or more
blepharoplasts from which the flagella spring; (3) one or more rhizoplasts linking
together the parts of the system; and (4) a centrosome located just outside the nuclear
membrane. Furthermore, (5) a parabasal body may be present. (6) An axostyle is a
rod imbedded in the cytoplasm. In Hexamita the axostyles are the proximal ends of
backwardly directed flagella; axostyles occurring in various other genera of the order
appear also to be homologous with flagella.
Nuclear and cell division have been observed in various genera, as in Hexamita by
Swezy (1915); in Streblomastix by Kidder (1929); in Giardia by Kofoid and Christianson (1915) and Kofoid and Swezy (1922); and in O.V);mona^ by Connell (1930).
Cleveland (1947) observed in Saccinobaculus a multiplication of nuclei followed
by their fusion in pairs, and by meiosis in the fusion nuclei: thus there is a .sexual
cycle without fusion of cells. It is not probable that sexual reproduction does not
occur in the generality of the group, but it has not been observed in any others.
The
164]
—
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Fig. 31.
PoLYMASTAcroA a, Polymastix Mclolonthae after Swezy (1916). b,
c, d, Giardia cnterica after Kofoid
Streblomastix Strix x 1,000 after Kidder ( 1929)
:
.
&
Swezy
(1922). Trichomonadina: e, Hcxamastix Tcrmopsidis after Kirby
i' Tricercomitus Termopsidis 2ihtv YJirhy (1930).
(1930).
g, Macrotrichomonas
pulchra after Kirby (1938). h. Trichomonas tenax x 4,000 after Hinshaw (1926).
Pentatrichomonas obliqua after Kirby (1943).
Kirby 1929)
x 2,000 except as noted.
i,
(
.
j,
Snydcrella Tabogae x 500 after
Phylum Protoplasta
[165
In making the clearly natural group of trichomonads a separate order, Kirby ( 1947
removed the majority of the species formerly assigned to this order, and left a miscellany of small isolated families. It seems not expedient to make them several small
orders, as Grasse has done; rather they are to be held together until their respective
relationships
become
evident.
A hint of
Hall has led
in the present
work
to the trans-
fer of family Trimastigida to order
1.
With a
2.
single
Ochromonadalea.
nucleus and neuromotor system.
Cells not spirally twisted, at least not as
wholes and not conspicuously
2.
Entire
conspicuously
cells
Family
1.
TEXRAMiTroA.
Family
2.
Streblomastigida.
Family
3.
Dinenymphida.
spirally
twisted.
3.
3.
With four free
With four or
flagella
eight flagella
proximal ends are grown
cell
1.
With one or
whose
fast to the
membrane
several nuclei
and two or more
neuromotor systems
Family 4. Oxymonadida.
With two nuclei and neuromotor systems
Family 5. Trepomonadida.
Family 1. Tetramitida [Tetramitidae] Kent Man. Inf. 1: 312 (1880). Families
Tetramitina and Polymastigina Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1: 841,
842 (1884). Family Tetramitaceae Senn in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I
Teil, Abt. la: 143 ( 1900) Family Polymastigidae Doflein Protozoen 83 ( 1901 ) Family Chilomastigidae Wenyon (1926). Family Costiidae Kudo Handb. Prot. 153
(1931). Family Retortomonadidae Wenrich 1932. Cells mostly dorsiventral and
with four flagella; these uniform or differentiated; when differentiated, one or two
may trail behind the cell. Axostyles present or absent, parabasal bodies not reported.
Like the order, the family is a miscellany; good authority has made as many as four
families of the few genera. Tetramitus, free-living, unfamiliar. Costia, occurring
usually as sessile parasites on fishes. Polymastix, in insects. Monocercomonoides, in
insects and vertebrates. Chilomastix, in insects and vertebrates, cells marked by a
cytostomal groove into which one of the flagella, shorter than the others, is recurved.
The species which occurs in man (usually, as it appears, as a harmless commensal)
is in most works called C. Mesnili; the correct name is apparently Chilomastix Hominis (Davaine) n. combl. Current authority places next to Chilomonas the biflagellate
Retortomonas, also in insects and vertebrates, and having cells of essentially the
same structure.
1.
.
.
^Kofoid (1920) gave the history involved
in this
combination. Davaine, 1860, de-
Cercomonas Hominis var. A and var. B. The two forms are
not of the same species, and Moquin-Tandon, in the same year, re-named them
respectively C. Davainei and C. obliqua. They are not of the same genus, being respectively a Chilomastix and a Pentatrichomonas, under which genera they have
various names. Kofoid named them respectively Chilomastix davainei and Trichomonas hominis. In so doing, he may be held to have exercised his right to choose a
type in a group in which no type has been designated; but it is arguable on the conscribed the flagellates
trary that an author
to
who
designates a var.
A
designates the type in doing
argument that the new combination here published
the Cercomonas Hominis var. A of Davaine.
on the
basis of this
is
so. It is
applied
The
166]
Family
2.
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Streblomastigida [Streblomastigidae] Kofoid and Swezy
fornia Publ. Zool. 20: 15 (1919).
The
only
known
species
is
in
Univ. Cali-
Strehlornastix Strix, a
slender spirally twisted organism with four anterior flagella, free-swimming or attached in the gut of the termite Termopsis. The significance of the epithet Strix (a
Greek noun meaning screech owl) as applied to this species is not clear.
Family 3. Dinenymphida [Dinenymphidae] Grassi in Atti Accad. Lincei ser. 5.
Rendiconti CI. Sci. 20, 1° Semestre: 730 (1911). Elongate flagellates, the four or
eight anterior flagella adherent to the body and spirally twisted with it, free at their
distal ends. Often beset with spirochaets, which have been mistaken for additional
flagella; the family has been misplaced in order Hypermastigina. Dinenympha and
Pyrsonympha in termites; Saccinohaculus in the wood roach Cryptocercus.
Family 4. Oxymonadida [Oxymonadidae] Kirby in Quart Jour. Micr. Sci. n. s. 72:
380 ( 1928) Flagellates with radially symmetrical bodies including two or more neuromotor systems, entozoic in termites of subfamily Kalotermitinae. Each pear-shaped
cell of Oxymonas has one nucleus and two neuromotor systems (Kofoid and Swezy,
1926). In Microrhopalodina {Proboscoidella) each cell contains a whorl of nuclei,
each with its separate neuromotor system (Kofoid and Swezy, 1926; Kirby, 1928).
These organisms are superficially closely similar to the Calonymphida, from which
Kirby distinguished them.
Family 5. Trepomonadida [Trepomonadidae] Kent Man. Inf. 1: 300 (1880).
Family Hexamitidae Kent op. cit. 318. Distomata Klebs in Zeit. wiss. Zool. 55: 329
(1893). Family Distomataccae Senn in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil,
Abt. la: 148 (1900). Flagellates each with two nuclei and two neuromotor systems.
In most examples, each half-cell is dorsiventral, and the whole isobilateral, with two
cytostomes. Most of the genera, Trepomonas, Gyromonas, Trigonomonas, are freeliving in fresh or foul waters and have been little studied. Hexamita occurs both freeliving and entozoic, in roaches and in all classes of vertebrates; the cells have eight
flagella {Octomitus Prowazek and Urophagus Moroff are synonyms). In Giardia
the half-cells are asymmetric, and the whole cells dorsiventral, with one cytostome.
There are several species, serious pathogens in mammals. The valid name of the
species in man, usually known as G. Lamblia, appears to be G. enterica (Grassi)
Kofoid (1920).
.
Order 3. Trichomonadina Grasse Traite Zool. 1, fasc. 1: 704 (1952).
Order Trichomonadida Kirby in Jour. Parasitol. 33: 215, 224 (1947), preoccupied by family TRiCHOMONADroAE Wenyon (1926).
Flagellates of the general nature of the Polymastigida having in each neuromotor
system one trailing flagellum; axostyle present, rigid, apparently not homologous
with the flagella; parabasal body present, disappearing during mitosis. Entozoic, the
majority of the species, to the number of fully 150, occurring in termites.
The base of the trailing flagellum may be underlain by a cresta, a more or
less
prominent body distinct both from parabasal body and from axostyle. The trailing
flagellum may be grown fast to the cell membrane and converted into an undulating
membrane; in this case it is underlain by a rod called the costa, apparently homologous with the cresta (Kirby, 1931).
Nuclear and cell division have been described in Trichomonas by Kuczynski
(1914), Kofoid and Swezy (1915, 1919; the Trichomitiis described in the latter
year is a Trichomonas) and Hinshaw (1926). The centrosome (or a combined centrosome and blcpharoplast, the centroblcpharoplast of Kofoid and Swezy, 1919) lies
Phylum Protoplasta
outside the nuclear
move
membrane. This
[167
structure divides
apart along the nuclear membrane.
and the daughter structures
They remain connected,
usually until mito-
complete, by a stainable strand, the paradesmose. Definite chromosomes, usually
few in number, and an intranuclear spindle, are formed. Mitosis is completed by constriction of the nuclear membrane. In what appears to be the typical course of cell
sis is
and blepharoplast divide when the centrosome does. Of other
some may remain connected to one blepharoplast
the other; some may disappear. The parts needed to complete a neuro-
division, the rhizoplast
parts of the neuromotor system,
and some to
motor system are regenerated in each daughter cell.
1. With a single nucleus and neuromotor system.
2.
Lacking a
cresta,
costa,
or undulating
membrane
2.
With
a trailing flagellum
whose base
underlain by a cresta
2.
With
a trailing flagellum
the cell
grown
Family
1.
MoNOCERCOMONADroA.
Family
2.
DEVEScoviNroA.
is
fast to
membrane, forming an undula-
membrane underlain by
a costa
Family 3. Trichomonadida.
and neuromotor systems. Family 4. CALONYMPHroA.
Family 1. Monocercomonadida [Monocercomonadidae] Kirby in Jour. Parasitol.
33: 225 (1947). Minute flagellates of the appearance of certain Tetramitida, but
having a firm axostyle, the parabasal body disappearing and a paradesmose forming
between the daughter centrosomes during mitosis; lacking a cresta, costa, or undulating membrane; entozoic in termites and other insects, and in all classes of vertebrates.
Monocercomonas, Hexamastix, Tricercomitus.
Family 2. Devescovinida [Devescovinidae] Doflein Lehrb. Prot. ed. 3: 537 (1911).
Subfamily Devescovininae Kirby in Univ. California Publ. Zool. 36: 215 (1931).
Organisms with three anterior flagella and a larger trailing flagellum underlain by a
cresta; confined to termites of the families Mastotermitidae, Hodotermitidae, and
Kalotermitidae, being most abundant in the last. The cells, usually fairly large, ingest
scraps of wood and are presumed to contribute to the lives of their hosts by digesting
it. Devescovina, Gigantomonas, Macrotrichomonas, Foaina, Parajoenia, Metadevescovina. Spirochaets which share the habitat of these organisms are commonly found
adhering to their cell membranes, and were mistaken for additional flagella in the
original descriptions of some of the genera.
646
Family 3. Trichomonadida [Trichomonadidae] Wenyon Protozoology 1
(1926). Flagellates with three or more flagella directed forward and one trailing, the
proximal part of the latter grown fast to the cell membrane and forming an undulating membrane underlain by a costa. Entozoic in a wide variety of animals. Trichomonas, normally with four anterior flagella, is the most numerous genus. It occurs
in termites, including those of the advanced family Termitidae, in which scarcely
any other flagellates occur; it does not ingest wood, and is not believed to be beneficial to its hosts. It occurs also in all classes of vertebrates. Man harbors Trichomonas
tenax as a commensal in the mouth. T. vaginalis may be a serious pathogen. Pentatrichomonas obliqua (Moquin-Tandon) comb. nov.,l commensal (or pathogenic?)
in the gut has at the anterior end a fifth flagellum separate from the other four
ting
1.
With
several nuclei
.
:
(Kirby,^1943).
icf.
footnote, p. 165.
The
168]
Family
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Calonymphida [Calonymphidae]
Grass! in Atti Accad. Lincei ser. 5,
Semestre: 730 (1911). Flagellates with radially symmetrical bodies including more than two nuclei and neuromotor systems, the latter of
trichomonad type; entozoic in termites of subfamily Kalotermitinae. These flagellates
ingest scraps of wood and are believed to contribute to the nutrition of their hosts.
4.
Rendiconti CI.
Sci. 20, 1°
In Coronympha each
cell
contains one whorl of nuclei each with
its
separate neuro-
motor system (Kirby, 1929). In Stephanonympha, the nuclei and neuromotor systems
are so numerous as to form a spiral band of several cycles in the anterior part of the
cell. In Calonympha, besides numerous neuromotor systems associated with nuclei,
there are others free of any nucleus; in Snyderella, the two types of structures are
independently multiplied.
4. Hypermastigina Grassi in Atti Accad. Lincei ser. 5, Rendiconti CI. Sci.
20, 1° Semestre: 727 (1911).
Order
Order Trichonyynphidea Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 149 (1913).
Order Hypermastigida Calkins Biol. Prot. 29"5 (1926).
Order Lophomonadida Light in Univ. California Publ. Zool. 29: 486 (1927).
Orders Joeniidca, Lophomonadina, Trichonymphina, and Spiratrichonymphina, Grasse Traite Zool. 1, fasc. 1: 837, 851, 862, 916 (1952).
Flagellates, mostly large and of radial symmetry, with single nuclei and indefinitely numerous flagella. Entozoic in roaches and in termites excluding those of
Lophomonas is to be regarded as the type.
Cleveland (1925, 1926) found it possible, by starvation or by exposure to high
pressures of oxygen or high temperatures, to rid insects of all of their intestinal
flagellates or of some of the kinds. When completely freed of flagellates, wood roaches
and termites of the lower families are able to remain alive only for a few weeks. The
family Termitidae.
life of Termopsis is not prolonged by the presence of Streblomastix, and it is prolonged only moderately by the presence of Trichomonas Termopsidis. But if infested
with either Trichonympha Campanula or T. sphaerica, it can survive indefinitely on
a diet of pure cellulose. Both species ingest the ground scraps of wood which reach
the part of the intestine in which they occur;
it is
evident that they serve their hosts
as agents of digestion. Cleveland's observations raise
unanswered questions
as to the
occurrence of fixation of nitrogen; it is known only that termites are quite economical
in their use of nitrogenous compounds available to them.
The Hypermastigina have elaborate neuromotor systems. There is regularly a large
centroblepharoplast. In what appears to be the relatively primitive type of cell division, as in Trichonympha (Kofoid and Swezy, 1919), the neuromotor system of the
mother cell is divided between the daughter cells. In Spirotrichonympha (Cupp,
1930), only the centroblepharoplast divides; the neuromotor system of the mother
cell remains attached to one of the daughter centroblcpharoplasts, while the other
Lophomonas (Kudo, 1926),
neuromotor system of a dividing cell is absorbed
or discarded, with the exception of the centroblcpharoplasts, from which new systems
generates the remaining parts of a complete system. In
and Kofoidia
(Light, 1927), the
develop.
In Trichonympha and Spirotrichonympha the details of nuclear division have
the appearance of meiosis. A double set of chromosomes appears, and the
chromosomes form pairs which are divided in the spindle. It is supposed that this
appearance is produced by a precocious splitting of the chromosomes.
much
Phylum Protoplasta
[
169
In species of Trichonympha, Leptospironympha, and Eucomonympha from the
Cryptocercus, Cleveland (1947, 1948) observed the syngamy of undifferentiated or diflFerentiated gametes; the appearance of the process is as though the egg
ingested the sperm. Syngamy is followed immediately by meiosis. This means that
vegetative individuals are haploid. Barhulanympha achieves without syngamy an al-
wood roach
ternation of haploid and diploid stages. Diploid cells are produced
when
a centro-
with the result that the nucleus remains intact, while
chromosomes appear and divide. Reduction division, by the separation of undivided
chromosomes, occurs when a centroblepharoplast divides at an exceptionally early
stage. Cleveland concluded that the early division of the central body is the event
which primarily distinguishes meiosis from mitosis. It is possible that he has recognized an essential feature of the evolution of the sexual cycle. His words suggest the
blepharoplast
fails to divide,
idea that the sexual cycle
may have
impossibility; the sexual cycle
is
a
originated within the present group. This
is
normal character of nucleate organisms, and
an
is
organisms far more primitive than these.
There are fewer than one hundred known species of Hypermastigina. They are
treated as seven families.
1. Body without segmented appearance.
fully established in nucleate
2.
Flagella distributed generally over the
surface of the body or
its
2.
Flagella in spiral bands
2.
Flagella in tufts.
anterior part.
.
.
.
Family
Family
1.
TRiCHONYMPHroA.
2.
HoLOMASTiGOTororoA.
Family 3. LoPHOMONAoroA.
Family 4. HoPLONYMPHroA.
3. Flagella in four tufts
Family 5. SxAUROjOENnDA.
3. Flagella in many tufts
Family 6. KoForonoA.
1. Body with segmented appearance
Family 7. Teratonymphida.
Family 1. Trichonymphida [Trichonymphidae] Leidy ex Doflein Lehrb. Prot. ed.
3: 537 (1911). The numerous flagella distributed generally over the surface of the
body or its anterior part. Trichonympha {Leidy opsis), Eucomonympha, etc.
Family 2. Holomastigotoidida [Holomastigotoididae] Janicki in Zeit. wiss. Zool.
112: 644 (1915). Family S pirotrichonymphidae Grassi in Mem. Accad. Lincei CI.
Sci. ser. 5, 12: 333 (1917). The numerous flagella arranged in spiral bands. Holo3.
Flagella in a single tuft
3.
Flagella in two tufts
m.astigotoides,
S pirotrichonympha,
etc.
Family 3. Lophomonadida [Lophomonadidae] Kent Man. Inf. 1: 321 (1880).
Family Joeniidae Janicki in Zeit wiss. Zool. 112: 644 (1915). The numerous flagella
assembled in a single anterior tuft. Lophomonas, in cockroaches, all of the flagella
directed forward. Joenia, Joenina, Joenopsis,
etc.,
in termites, the outer flagella
directed backward.
Family
Zool. 29:
4.
Hoplonymphida [Hoplonymphidae] Light in Univ. California Publ.
The flagella assembled in two anterior tufts. Hoplonympha,
138 (1926).
Barhulanympha, etc.
Family 5. Staurojoeninda [Staurojoenindae] Grassi
in Mem. Accad. Lincei CI. Sci.
333 (1917). The flagella assembled in four anterior tufts. Staurojoenina.
Family 6. Kofoidiida [Kofoidiidae] Light in Univ. California Publ. Zool. 29: 485
(1927). The flagella fused at their bases into several bundles. Kofoidia, a single
known species in Kalotermes.
Family 7. Teratonymphida [Teratonymphidae] Koidzumi in Parasitology 13: 303
(1921). Family Cyclonymphidae Reichenow. Elongate and segmented, with a single
ser. 5, 12:
—
The
170]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Fig. 32.
Hypermastigina a-d, Trichonympha Campanula after Kofoid &
Swezy (1919); a, cell x 250; b, division of centroblcpharoplast and formation of
paradesmose, and c and d, earlier and later stages of mitosis x 500. e, f, g, Sperm,
egg, and fertilization of Trichonympha sp. from the roach Cryptocercus after Cleve:
land (1948).
assimilis
(1921).
h,
Hoplonympha Natator x 250
x 250 after Kirby
(1926).
j,
after Light (1926).
Tcratonympha
i,
Staurojoenina
mirabilis after
Koidzumi
Phylum Protoplasta
[171
nucleus in the anterior segment; flagella distributed generally on the surface, most
abundant on an anterior beak. Teratonympha Koidzumi {Cyclonympha Dogiel), a
single
known
species in Reticulitermes.
Class 2.
MYCETOZOA
de Bary
Order Dermatocarpi Persoon Syst. Meth. Fung, xiii (1801), in part.
Suborder Myxogastres Fries Syst. Myc. 3: 3 (1829); suborder Trichospermi Fries
op.
cit. 1
:
xlix (1832), in part.
Suborder MyATomyce^^j Link 1833.
Mycetozoen de Bary in Bot. Zeit. 16: 369 (1858); Zeit. wiss. Zool. 10: 88 (1859).
Stamm Myxomycetes Ylatcktl Gen. Morph. 2: xxvi (1866).
Class Mycetozoa de Bary ex Rostafinski Versuch Systems Mycetozoen 1 (1873).
Division Mycetozoa and classes Myxogasteres and Phytomyxini Engler and Prantl
Nat. Pflanzenfam. IITeil: 1 (1888).
Division Myxothallophyta Engler in Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. I Teil,
Abt.
1:
iii
(1897).
Wettstein Handb.
Stamm Myxophyta
syst. Bot. 1: 49 (1901).
Division Phytosarcodina, Myxothallophyta, or Myxomycetes Engler Syllab. ed. 3:
1 (1903).
Division Myxomycophyta Tippo in Chron. Bot. 7: 205 (1942).
Order Mycetozoida Hall Protozoology 227 (1953).
Organisms whose walled
resting cells
produce
in
germination anteriorly unequally
biflagellate cells; these giving rise to bodies called plasmodia, being multinucleate
bodies of amoeboid character.
1.
Predatory, subaerial, producing macroscopic
spore-bearing
2.
2.
1.
fruits.
Spores produced within the fruits
Spores produced on the surfaces of the
Order
1.
Enteridiea.
fruits
Order
Order
2.
Exosporea
3.
Phytomy.xii>a.
Parasitic, not
producing definite
fruits
Order 1. Enteridiea [Enteridieae] Rostafinski Vers. 3 (1873).
Cohort Endosporeae and orders Anemeae, Heterodermeae, Reticularieae, Ainaurochaeteae, Calcareae, and Calonemeae Rostafinski op. cit.
Order Endosporea Lankester in Enc. Brit. ed. 9, 19: 840 (1885).
Orders Protodermieae and Columniferae Rostafinski ex Berlese in Saccard)
Sylloge7: 328,417 (1888).
Cohorts Amaurosporales and Lamprosporales, with numerous orders with names
in -aceae. Lister Monog. Mycetozoa 21-23 (1894).
Subclass Myxogastres and orders Physaraceae, Stemonitaceae, Cribrariaceae,
Lycogalaceae, and Trichiaceae Macbride North American Slime Molds 20
(1899).
Subsuborder (!) Endosporinei Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 200 (1913).
Orders Physarales, Stemcnitales, Cribrariales, Lycogalales, and Trichiales Macbride op.
cit.
cd. 2 (1922).
Order Liceales Ma. bride and Martin (1934).
Suborder Eumycetozoina Hall Protozoology 230 (1953).
172
The
]
Lower Organisms
Classification of
Predatory Mycetozoa producing macroscopic fruits, these producing internal uniThe type is Lycogala, the sole genus of the order as originally
nucleate spores.
published.
The
fruits of
many examples
are of the appearance of minute puffballs,
and Per-
soon and Fries classified them as puffballs; Fries took note that they are primitus
mucilaginosi and made them a suborder distinct from the proper pufTballs. De Bary
studied the non-reproductive stages; concluded "dass die Myxomyceten nicht dem
Pflanzenreiche angehoren, sondern dass sie Thiere, und zwar der Abtheilung der
Rhizopoden angehorig, sind"; and renamed the group Mycetozoen. This name was
first published in Latin form, in the category of classes, by de Bary's student Rostafinski. Conventional botany continues to list Myxomycetes as a class of
Fungi; conventional zoology makes the group an order of Rhizopoda or Sarcodina.
apparently
The
spores germinate readily in water or appropriate solutions (Jahn, 1905; Gil-
Smith, 1929). Their nuclei usually divide once or twice, during or just
from one to four naked cells.
It is in germinating spores that mitosis is most easily observed. Mitosis takes place
in a clear area, about which some observers have found a persistent nuclear membrane.
The spindle is sharp-pointed. Only a few observers (as Skupienski, 1927) have disbert, 1929;
after germination; thus each spore produces
cerned definite centrosomes. When the one or two divisions associated with germination are complete, the flagella grow forth from the areas of the poles of the mitotic
spindle. All earlier observers described the spores as uniflagellate, but Ellison (1945)
and Elliott (1949) found them biflagellate. The flagella may be apparently equal or
moderately unequal; or one of them may be very brief. Each nucleus remains connected to the base of the flagella by a conical body of clear protoplasm, the Geisselglocke of Jahn (Jahn, 1904; Howard, 1931).
The flagellate cells are not spores, but gametes; they fuse with each other. Skupienski (1917) affirms that they are of two mating types. Fusion is at first by pairs, and
Howard (1931) found that each zygote develops into a plasmodium by itself. All
other observers (de Bary, 1858, 1859; Cienkowski, 1863; Skupienski, 1917, 1927;
Schiinemann, 1930) have found the zygotes to fuse with each other and with further
gametes. The flagella are lost. The nuclei fuse in pairs; those which fail to find
partners are digested.
The cell formed by the fusion of zygotes and gametes is a young plasmodium. The
term was coined by Cienkowski ( 1863, p. 326) "Das Protoplasmanetz der Myxomyceten werde ich mit den Namen Plasmodium bezeichnen." The plasmodium nourishes itself in predatory fashion, on fungus spores, bacteria, and other digestible objects, and grows accordingly. Mitosis occurs simultaneously in all nuclei of the plasmodium, and takes 20 to 40 minutes; it has accordingly only rarely been observed
(Lister, 1893; Howard, 1932). Plasmodia do not ordinarily divide, but grow to great
sizes. They are not very familiar objects because during most of their life they keep to
dark and moist places, chiefly among vegetable remains. Drouth does not kill them;
they can become dry and hard while retaining the capacity to resume activity upon
:
When
an active plasmodium reaches a certain stage, its reand to dry places. A plasmodium in this
stage is conspicuous, being of the form of a network which may be many centimeters
in diameter, in some species brilliantly colored. The whole is a single naked protoplast.
Each Plasmodium proceeds to produce a fruit or fruits. The entire mass may heap
itself up, or it may break up into portions, large or minute. In species whose plas-
the return of moisture.
actions change;
modia break up
it
moves out
into the light
into small fragments,
each of these
may
secrete a
column
of lifeless
Phylum Protoplasta
[173
material, a millimeter or more in height, and ascend upon it. Each separate body of
protoplasm secretes an external wall and begins to undergo cleavage within it. Harper (1900) described the details of the process. All authorities agree that the nuclei
undergo a flare of divisions at this time (Strasburger, 1884; Harper, 1900, 1914;
Bisby, 1914). It is almost certain that there are two flares of division, constituting the
meiotic process, but few authorities have positively affirmed this (Schiinemann,
1930)1. Cleavage is carried to the point of producing uninucleate protoplasts. While
this is taking place, many species secrete a network of hollow tubes or a system of
hollow fibers, called the capillitium, by deposition of lifeless material outside the
cell membranes. In species which produce a true capillitium, all of the uninucleate
protoplasts secrete walls and become spores. Strasburger found the capillitium and
the walls of the spores to consist of impure cellulose; others have found no cellulose.
In many species which do not produce a true capillitium, an analogous structure
called a pseudocapillitium, consisting of solid bodies of various forms, is modelled
from a part of the nucleate protoplasm which is deprived of its reproductive function
and killed. In many species, much calcium carbonate is deposited in the wall, or
both in the wall and in the capillitium or pseudocapillitium.
A small
or of
separate fruit
many
is called a sporangium.
sporangia not completely separate,
A
is
fruit of the form of a large mass,
an aethalium. The spores are re-
leased by collapse of the outer wall.
These organisms are of no known economic importance. There are some forty
genera, between four and five hundred species. As Lister remarked, the same species
occur everywhere: collections from Colombia (Martin, 1938)
Shasta (Cooke, 1949) consist entirely of familiar species.
and from Mount
Rostafinski (1873) arranged the genera in two cohorts, seven orders,
and nineteen
with names in -aceae. His subsequent monograph of the group ( 1875)
was regrettably published in a barbarous language, and is for nomenclatural purposes
a nullity. All later systems are based on Rostafinski's original system. The group being
essentially uniform, it is properly treated as a single order.
tribes, the last
first established by Lankester, mostly under names which
had applied to tribes. Berlese (in Saccardo, 1888) provided a complete
names in -aceae, valid under botanical rules; Poche provided a complete set in
Definite families were
Rostafinski
set of
-idae, valid
list
under zoological
of families; here,
1.
rules. Authorities
somewhat
Capillitium none
have differed moderately as
arbitrarily, fourteen are
(order Cribrariales
to the
maintained.
Mac-
bride).
2.
Producing separate sporangia, pseudocapillitium none.
3.
Sporangia shattering irregularly or
opening through a terminal oper-
culum
3.
like
2.
Family
1
Family
2.
.
Liceacea.
Sporangia opening through numerous pores, the walls becoming sieve-
Fruits
aethalioid,
Cribrariacea.
pseudocapillitium
present.
iWhile the present work was in proof, Wilson and Ross (1955) established the point
that meiosis occurs immediately before the formation of spores.
174
The
]
3.
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Aethalia consisting of more or
less
separate sporangia.
tubular,
Sporangia
opening
through terminal pores
4. Sporangia indistinct, their walls
becoming freely punctured and
converted into a reticulate
pseudocapillitium
3. Aethalia not consisting of distinguishable sporangia
Capillitium present.
2. Fruits without considerable deposits of
calcium carbonate.
3. Spores black or dark,
capillitial
4.
1.
smooth
Macbride).
hairs
4. Fruits
Family
3,
Tubiferida.
Family
4.
Retigulariacea.
Family
5.
Lycogalacttoa.
(order Stemonitales
capilHtium
aethalioid,
poorly defined, without a cen-
Family
tral axis
4. Fruits
of
separate
6.
Amaurochaetacea.
sporangia
with a definite capillitium including a central axis (columella).
Capillitium spreading hor-
5.
from the colu-
izontally
5.
mella
Capillitium
7.
Stemonitea.
Family
8.
Enerthenemea.
Family
9.
Margaritida.
Family
10.
from the summit of
chiefly
the columella
3.
Family
spreading
Spores pallid or yellow (order Trichiales
Macbride).
hairs smooth, unbranched or sparsely branched.
4. Capillitial
5. Capillitial
threads
attached
zontal,
at
hori-
both
ends
5. Capillitial
4.
threads
run-
ning at random, not attached at the ends
Capillitium reticulate, sculptured, but not with spiral bands.
4. Capillitial
or
.Family 11. Arcyriagea.
threads unbranched
sparsely
branched,
sculp-
tured with spiral bands
2.
.
Perichaenacea.
Family
12.
Trighiagea.
Family
13.
Physarea.
Fruits containing considerable deposits
of calcium carbonate (order Physarales
Macbride).
3. Calcium
and
carbonate both in walls
in capillitium
Phylum Protoplasta
3.
Calcium carbonate
in walls
[175
but not
in capillitium
Family
14.
DrovMiACEA.
1. Liceacea [Liceaceae] (Rostafinski)
Lankester in Enc. Brit. ed. 9, 19:
(1885). Tribe Liceaceae Rostafinski Vers. 4 (1873). Order Liceaceae Lister
Monog. Mycetozoa 149 (1894). Family Liceidae Doflein 1909. Family Orcadellidae Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 200 (1913). Family Orcadellaceae Macbride N. Am.
Slime Molds ed. 2: 203 (1922). Sporangia separate, sessile or stalked, without capil-
Family
841
litium or pseudocapillitium, the walls shattering irregularly or opening by
means
of
a terminal operculum. Licea, Orcadella.
Cribrariacea [Cribrariaceae] (Rostafinski) Lankester 1. c. Tribe Cribcit. 5. Order Cribrariaceae Macbride N. Am. Slime Molds
20 (1899). Order Heterodermaceae Lister op. cit. 136. Family Cribrariidae Poche
1. c. The wall of the stalked fruit becoming sieve-like. Cribraria. Dictydium.
Family 3. Tubiferida [Tubiferidae] Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 200 (1913). Order
Tubulinaceae Lister op. cit. 152 (1894). Family Tubulinidae Doflein 1909. Family
Tubiferaceae Macbride in N. Am. Slime Molds ed. 2: 203 (1922). Aethalia consist-
Family
2.
rariaccac Rostafinski op.
ing of tubular sporangia opening through terminal pores. Tubifer
(its
older
name
Tubulina preoccupied), Lindbladia, Alwisia.
Family 4. Reticulariacea [Reticulariaceae] (Rostafinski) Lankester 1. c. Tribes
Dictydiaethaliaceae and Reticulariaceae Rostafinski op. cit. 5, 6. Order Reticulariaceae Lister op. cit. 156. Family Dictydiaethaliidae Poche I.e. Aethalia of indistinct
sporangia whose walls become porous and are converted into a reticulate pseudocapillitium. Reticularia, Dictydiaethallium, etc.
Family 5. Lycogalactida [Lycogalactidae] Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 201 (1913).
Tribe Lycogalaceae de Bary. Order Lycogalaceae Macbride N. Am. Slime Molds 20
(1899). Y di.m.i\y Lycogalaceae Macbride and Martin Myxomycetes (1934). Aethalia
with a pseudocapillitium, not divided into sporangia. Lycogala, the brownish fruits a
few millimeters in diameter clustered on wood, of much the appearance of small
puffballs.
Family 6. Amaurochaetacea [Amaurochaetaceae] (Rostafinski) Berlese in Saccardo Sylloge 7: 401 (1888). Tribe Amaurochaetaceae Rostafinski op. cit. 8. Order
Amaurochaetaceae Lister op. cit. 134. Family Amaurochaetidae Doflein 1909.
Fruits aethalioid with dark spores and a poorly defined capillitium without a central
Amaurochaete.
Family 7. Stemonitea Lankester in Enc. Brit. ed. 9, 19: 841 (1885). Tribes Stemonitaceae and Brefeldiaceae Rostafinski op. cit. 6, 8. Families Stemonitaceae and
Brefeldiaceae Berlese in Saccardo op. cit. 390, 402. Order Stemonitaceae Macbride
N. Am. Slime Molds 20 (1899). Family Stemonitidae Doflein 1909. Families Brefeldiidae and Stemonitidae Poche op. cit. 202. Sporangia with dark spores and a
capillitium of smooth threads spreading from a central axis, the columella. Stemonitis, comm.on, the clustered stalked fruits of the appearance of minuscule dark
bottle-brushes. Brefeldia, Comatricha; Diachea, exceptional in containing much lime
in the stalk and wall.
Family 8. Enerthenemea Lankester 1. c. Tribes Echinosteliaceae and Enerthenemaceae Rostafinski op. cit. 7, 8. Families Echinosteliaceae and Enerthenemaceae
Berlese in Saccardo op. cit. 389, 402. Family Lamprodermaceae Macbride N. Am.
Slime Molds ed. 2: 189 (1922). Like Stemonitea, in which this family has usually
axis.
been included, but the capillitium attached chiefly at the summit of the columella.
Enerthenema, Clastoderma, Lamproderma, Echinostelium.
—
The
176]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Margaritida [Margaritidae] Doflein 1909. Order Margaritaceae Lister
Dianemaceae Macbride N. Am. Slime Molds ed. 2: 237 (1922).
Sporangia with pale or yellow spores and a capillitium of smooth threads attached at
both ends. Dianema, Margarita.
Family 10. Perichaenacea [Perichaenaceae] (Rostafinski) Lankester 1. c. Tribe
Perichaenaceae Rostafinski op. cit. 15. Sporangia with pale or yellow spores and a
capillitium of unattached smooth threads. Perichaena, Ophiotheca.
Family 11. Arcyriacea [Arcyriaceae] (Rostafinski) Lankester 1. c. Tribe Arcyriaceae Rostafinski op. cit. 15. Order Arcyriaceae Lister op. cit. 182. Family Arcyriidae
Doflein 1909. Sporangia with pale or yellow spores and a reticulate capillitium,
usually sculptured, but not with spiral bands. Arcyria, Lachnobolus.
Family 12. Trichiacea [Trichiaceae] (Rostafinski) Berlese in Saccardo Sylloge 7:
437 (1888). Tribe Trichiaceae Rostafinski op. cit. 14. Family Trichinaceae Lankes-
Family
op.
cit.
9.
202. Family
Mycetozoa. a-f, Spore, germination, gametes, syngamy, and zygote of
Fig. 33.
Physarum polycephalum after Howard (1931) x 1,000. g-1, Stages of mitosis in the
Plasmodium of Physarum polycephalum after Howard 1932) x 2,000. m-o. Stages
of mitosis in the plasmodium of Trichia after Lister (1893) x 1,000.
p, Cleavage
in the developing fruit of Physarum polycephalum after Howard (1931) x 1,000.
r-W, fruits of Myceq, Capillitium and spores of Lepidoderma Chailletii x 1,000.
(
toza X 5;
U,
r,
Sternonitis splcndens;
Lepidoderma
Chaillettii; v,
s,
Lycogala cpidcndrum; i, Lcocarpus
notabile; w, Hemitrichia intorta.
Physarum
fragilis;
Phylum Protoplasta
[177
c; the genus Trichina does not belong to this family! Order Trichiaceae MacAm. Slime Molds 20 (1899). Family Trichiidae Doflein 1909. Sporangia
with pale or yellow spores, the capillitium of free threads, unbranched or sparsely
branched, marked with spiral bands. Trichia, Hemitrichia, Oligonema, Calonema.
ter
1.
bride N.
Family 13.
Spumariaceae
Spumariaceae
N. Am. Slime
Physarea Lankester
Rostafinski op.
1.
c.
cit. 9, 13.
Tribes Cienkowskiaceae, Physaraceae, and
Families Cienkowskiaceae , Physaraceae, and
cit. 328, 329, 387. Order Physaraceae Macbride
Molds 20 (1899). Family Physaridae Doflein 1909. Fruits sporangial
Berlese in Saccardo op.
or aethalioid, with capillitium, both wall and capillitium containing considerable
deposits of calcium carbonate. Physarum, with some seventy-five species, is the most
numerous genus of Mycetozoa; the
sessile
little
gray sporangia
may
be spherical or irregular,
or stalked. Fuligo septica produces dirty yellow aethalia reaching several cen-
timeters in diameter on vegetable trash; observed on spent tan bark,
mon name
of flowers of tan. Badhamia, Craterium, Leocarpus,
it has the comChondrioderma,
Spumaria, etc.
Family 14. Didymiacea [Didymiaceae] (Rostafinski) Lankester 1. c. Tribe Didymiaceae Rostafinski op cit. 12. Order Didymiaceae Lister op. cit. 93. Family Didymidae Doflein 1909. Family Didymiidae Poche op. cit. 202. Family Collodermataceae Macbride and Martin Myxomycetes 145 (1934). Sporangia with deposits of
calcium carbonate in the wall and a simple capillitium free of mineral deposits.
Didymium, Leangium, Lepidoderrna, Colloderma.
Order 2. Exosporea (Rostafinski) Lankester in Enc. Brit. ed. 9, 19: 841 (1885).
Cohors Exosporeae Rostafinski Vers. 2 (1873).
OrAtr Ectosporeae Y.ng\tr ?>y\\2ih. 2 (1892).
Order Ceratiomyxaceae (Schroter) Lister Monog. Mycetozoa 25 (1894).
Subsuborder (!) Exosporinei Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 200 (1913).
Organisms of much the character of the Enteridiea, but the spores forming a single
layer on the surface of the fruits. There is a single family with only one well-marked
species.
Family Ceratiomyxacea [Ceratiomyxaceae] Schroter (in Engler and Prantl, 1889).
Ceratiomyxa Schroter [Ceratium Albertini and Schweinitz, 1805, non Schrank, 1793);
C. fruticulosa (O. F. Miiller) Macbride. The fruits are white pillars, sometimes
branched, 1-2
mm.
tall,
Each spore of the single superficial
and ascends upon it before becoming walled.
making the spores 4-nucleate; the chromosome number is
of secreted material.
layer generates a microscopic stalk
Meiosis then takes place,
cut from 16 to 8 (Gilbert, 1935). In germination, the contents of the spore are re-
amoeboid protoplast, whose nuclei divide once; the cell then divides
and these generate flagella (Rostafinski, 1873; Jahn, 1905; Gilbert, 1935).
leased as a single
into eight,
Order
3.
Phytomyxida Calkins
Biol. Prot.
330 (1926).
Class Phytomyxini Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. II Teil:
Phytomyxinae op. cit. I Teil, Abt. 1: iii (1897).
Order Phytomyxinae Campbell Univ. Textb.
Class Plasmodiophorales Engler Syllab. ed. 3:
1
(1889); class
Bot. 71 (1902).
1
(1903).
Mycologia 34: 115 (1942).
Suborder Plasmodia phorina Hall Protozoology 228 (1953).
Order Plasmodiophorales Sparrow
in
Intracellular parasites chiefly of higher plants, attacking also algae, Oomycetes,
beetles, being naked multicellular plasmodia producing walled resting cells,
and
—
—
The
1781
Classification of
Lower Organisms
the walls containing no cellulose; these releasing naked infective colls with paired
unequal simple flagella.
This inconsiderable group was made known by the discovery of Plasmodiophora
Brassicae, the agent of the clubroot disease of cabbage, by Woronin (1878). The
proper place of the group in classification has been a puzzle; some students treat it
as a class of myxomycetes, others as an order of chytrids. The known characters
paired unequal simple flagella; cells naked in the vegetative condition; and non-production of cellulose assure us that this group has nothing to do with proper chytrids,
nor with Oomycetes of chytrid body type. The traditional association with myxomycetes is tenable. Alternatively, the group would not be out of place next to order
Rhizoflagellata (anyone who chooses to put it there should take note that the class
name Phytomyxini is older than Zoomastigoda).
The Plasmodium causes often much hypertrophy of the host tissue. In some forms
the mature plasmodium becomes walled; the protoplast undergoes cleavage into uninucleate portions; these become swimming cells and are released through a discharge
tube. These forms are of much the appearance of Lagenidialea. In the majority of
the group the naked plasmodium undergoes cleavage; the resulting protoplasts become walled; the resulting spores or cysts, released by decay of the host, discharge
their contents as one or two swimming cells. Ledingham ( 1939) and Sparrow ( 1947)
report both types of development as occurring in Polyniyxa. Karling (1944) found
the walls to contain no cellulose. Ellison (1945) found the flagella to be simple.
—
iKyuiU/Tnui wuium/^iiiMiivnirm-
Fig.
34.
Ceratiomyxa
jruticulosa.
a.
Fruits x 5.
b-q, reproductive processes
young spores on the surfaces of the fruit; c, d, the same
raised on stalks; e^ f, heterotypic division; g, homeotypic division; h, the mature spore
ou its stalk; i-n, germination and subsequent processes: the amoeboid protoplast
passes through a "thread stage" before rounding up and dividing into four and then
into eight; o, production of flagcllum; p, "zoospore" (gamete); q, gametes fusing to
initiate the plasmodium. All x 1,000 except Fig. a.
after Gilbert (1935); b,
Phylum Protoplasta
In the growing plasmodium, a nucleus which
is
[179
not dividing contains an endosome
("nucleolus"). During mitosis, which occurs within the intact nuclear membrane,
the endosome becomes elongate, and a ring of chromatin, within which separate
chromosomes have not been distinguished, forms about its middle. The resulting "cruciform" figure resembles some which have been seen in trypanosomes. The nuclear
divisions which occur immediately before cleavage are of a different character: no endosome is seen, but there is a spindle with centrosomes at the poles, and definite
chromosomes are present. The occurrence of these two types of nuclear division has
been noted by every careful observer, Schwartz (1914), Home (1930), Cook (1933),
Ledingham (1939), and Karling (1944). Home was probably correct in supposing
the divisions which precede cleavage to be meiotic. Conjugation of the flagellate cells
of Spongospora has been observed.
There are monographic accounts of the Phytomyxida by Cook ( 1933) and Karling
(1942). The group may be treated as a single family with a dozen genera and about
twenty-five species.
Family Plasmodiophorea [Plasmodiophoreae] Berlese in Saccardo Sylloge 7 464
(1888). Family Plasmodiophoreen Zopf Pilzthiere 129 (1885). Family Plasmodiophoraceae Engler Syllab. 1 (1892). Family Woroninaceae Minden 1911. Families
:
Phytomyxidae and Woroninidae Poche in Arch Prot. 30: 198 (1913). Plasmodiophora, Polymyxa, Spongospora, and Sorosphaera attack land plants; Tetramyxa,
Ligniera, and Sorodiscus, chiefly aquatic seed plants; Woronina and Octomyxa,
Oomycetes; Phagomyxa, brown algae; Sporomyxa (Leger, 1908) and Mycetosporidium, beetles.
Class 3.
RHSZOPODA
Siebold
Order Foraminiferes d' Orbigny in Ann. Sci. Nat. 7: 128, 245 (1826).
Order Foraminifera Zborewski 1834.
Rhizopodes Dujardin in Compt. Rend. 1: 338 (1835).
Class Foraminifera d'Orbigny in de
la
Sagra Hist. Cuba
vol. 8 (1839).
Order Polythalamia Ehrenberg in Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berlin (1838) table 1 1839)
Class Rhizopoda and orders Monosomatia and Polysomata Siebold in Siebold
and Stannius Lehrb. vergl. Anat. 1 3, 11 (1848).
:
(
:
Reticulosa Carpenter 1862.
Stamm Rhizopoda and
Class Acyttaria Haeckel Gen.
Morph.
2: xxvii (1866).
Thalamophora R. Hertwig Hist.Radiolar. 82 (1876).
Class Reticidaria Lankester in Enc. Brit. ed.
9, 19:
845 (1885).
Order Reticulosa Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 203 (1913).
Order Granuloreticulosa de Sacdeleer in Mem. Mus. Roy.
Hist. Nat. Belgique 60:
7 (1934).
Order Foraminiferida Hall Protozoology 250 (1953).
the pseudopodia of the character of rhizopodia, i.e., fine,
branching and anastomosing; producing shells, these usually calcareous; commonly reaching macroscopic dimensions; mostly marine.
The first examples of rhizopodes mentioned by Dujardin were milioles, vorticiales,
and le gromia: the genus Miliola is to be construed as the type. These organisms, the
proper rhizopods, are in general usage called Foraminifera, but that name was orig-
Amoeboid organisms,
freely
inally applied in the categoiy of orders.
The
180]
Fig.
35.
—Life
Myers (1943);
Classification of
Lower Organisms
i.e., Discorbis or Cymbalopora, from
microspheric individuals, in 3 releasing young megalospheric
cycle of "Tretomphalus,"
1-3,
individuals; 4-8 megalospheric individuals; 9-12, gametes
and syngamy.
Phylum
[181
Protoplast a
individual rhizopod originates as a minute amoeboid cell which secretes a
from which the pseudopodia project. In the fresh-water forms, each protoplast,
after moderate growth, divides into two, one of which retains the original shell while
the other secretes a new one. In some of the marine forms, the original protoplast,
The
shell
having a cylindrical or irregular
shell, enlarges this as
of the group, the original shell, called the proloculus,
it
is
grows. In the great majority
of definite size
and form and
has a constricted orifice. When the protoplast reaches a certain stage, it expands, protrudes from the orifice, and secretes an extension of the shell in the form of a second
chamber. In some few examples, the second chamber is the final one, being capable
of indefinite extension. But again in the great majority, the second chamber, although
diff'erent
from the proloculus, resembles
it
in
being definite in form and in having a
constricted orifice. After further development, the protoplast again protrudes through
the orifice and secretes a third chamber, generally of the same form as the second,
though often larger. Repetition of this process produces macroscopically visible
bodies. Even though becoming a centimeter or more in diameter, the individuals
continue to be single cells.
As a result of different patterns of growth, the developed shells are of highly varied
forms, linear, globular, or coiled in one plane; trochoid or rotaloid, that is, helical,
of the form of a low cone; of the form of high cones; or screw-like, with the chambers
in fixed longitudinal rows. The grov/th pattern may change during the life of the
individual. There are apparently degenerate forms, simple or irregular. It is highly
probable that some of the forms have evolved repeatedly.
The shells may be of gelatinous material or of chitin, without or with imbedded
grains of sand. Exceptionally, they are siliceous. They are sometimes of crystallized
calcium carbonate with imbedded grains of sand. In the bulk of the group they consist
of crystallized calcium carbonate without foreign matter, and are of either of two
t>'pes of texture: vitreous, that is, hyaline, and punctured by numerous pores a few
microns in diameter; or porcellanous, white by reflected light and amber by transmitted light, and with no perforations except the proper orifices. In fossil shells, other
textures than these may occur; it is supposed that these are products of modification
during preservation. Some of the textures, like some of the forms, are believed to
have evolved repeatedly.
Most rhizopods occur in two forms which are most readily distinguished by the
size of the proloculi. This was first pointed out by Munier-Calmas, 1880; who,
1885, designated the smaller and larger proloculi reand megaspheres. Lister (1895), by study in culture of Elphidium crispiirn [Polystomella crispa Lamarck), showed that the two forms are alternate generations. He observed that the microspheric cells become multinucleate
during growth, while the megalospheric cells remain uninucleate until just before
reproduction. The reproduction of the megalospheric cells is by release of numerous
jointly with Schlumberger,
spectively microsperes
minute biflagellate cells.
Schaudinn (1902) confirmed much of what Lister had observed.
in describing
He was
nuclear division (except just before the production of the
mistaken
swimming
cells) as non-mitotic; and correct in identifying the swimming cells as gametes.
Winter (1907) observed a similar life cycle in Peneroplis, but described the gametes
as having solitary flagella.
Myers" (1934, 1935, 1936), dealing with Patellina and Spirillina, described the
details of mitosis. This takes place within an intact nuclear membrane, and is completed by its constriction. The spindle is blunt-ended; there is no evidence of centre-
182
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
The chromosomes are numerous, long, and slender; the mitotic figures resemble those of Pyrrhophyta. Reduction of the chromosome number is said to be
effected by a single nuclear division, the last one before the formation of gametes,
which cuts the chromosome number of Patellina from 24 to 12, and that of Spirillina
from 12 to 6. Before they reach this stage, the megalospheric individuals have
gathered themselves in clusters of two or more within cyst walls consisting of secreted
gelatinous matter and scraps from the neighborhood. Gametes from one individual
are unable to unite with each other. The gametes are amoeboid, positively without
flagella. In Discorbis and Cymbalopora, however, Myers (1943) observed the producsomes.
tion of biflagellate gametes.
Le Calvez (1950) has cleared up various questions
raised by earlier studies.
Some
forms, as Discorbis orbicularis, appear to lack a sexual cycle. Patellina and Spirillina
produce amoeboid gametes 40-50[.i in diameter. Most rhizopods produce biflagellate
gametes 1.5-4[i long. Le Calvez found the flagella definitely unequal. In Discorbis
mediterranensis he showed that the megalospheric individuals are of two mating
types. Earlier zoologists, apparently misled by familiarity with the normal life cycle
had identified meiosis as occurring at the time of gametogenesis; it is the
on the contrary, that it occurs in the last two nuclear divisions in the microspheric individuals. The megalospheric and microspheric stages of rhizopods are
respectively haploid and diploid, like the gametophytes and sporophytes of plants.
With the possible exception of some of the one-chambered fresh water forms, the
rhizopods are clearly a natural group. The fresh water forms appear to intergrade
with organisms which Pascher identified as chrysomonads.
The shells of dead rhizopods may under appropriate conditions be preserved
through geologic ages. Natural chalk consists of shells of Textularia mixed with coccf animals,
fact,
Certain forms of limestone consist chiefly of shells of Miliola. Certain fossil
rhizopods have long been known as indicators of division of geologic time. Since about
coliths.
1917,
it
has been found that the whole group offers one of the beautiful illustrations
of evolution as related to geologic time: the shells of rhizopods found under magnification in a particular stratum serve promptly
and
precisely to identify
it.
The
services
of experts on "Foraminifera" have acquired a high
economic value in the petroleum
industry: these experts have found themselves promoted from the status of pure
biologists to that of economic geologists.
Among some eleven hundred genera which have been published, Galloway (1933)
maintains 542. Of the number of species one can only say that it is a matter of
thousands, but probably not
many
Economic micropaleontologists
numbers of forms which are slightly, yet signifiexpedient not to name these, but to identify them by
tens of thousands.
find themselves dealing with great
cantly, distinct.
They
find
it
comparison with available collections.
Some of the marine and fossil forms are similar, on a small scale, to the animal
Nautilus, and Linnaeus placed some of them in that genus. Montfort and Lamarck
treated them as several genera of mollusks. In first distinguishing these organisms as
the order Foraminiferes of class Cephalopodes, d'Orbigny intended to contrast them
with Nautilus, in whose shells a series of chambers arc connected, not by holes (foramina) but by cylindrical tubes. Dujardin ( 1835) found that his Rhizopodes are without definite organs. Their shells enclose a clear semiliquid substance; their apparent
tentacles are merely temporary structures, formed of this substance, thrust forward
in the direction of the movement of the shell and withdrawn as it advances. Dujardin
named this substance sarcode; it is, of course, the same which has since been called
Phylum Protoplasta
protoplasm.
The
effect of his discoveries
was
to
[
183
show that the rhizopods or Foramini-
fera are not mollusks, but one-celled organisms.
Very much taxonomic study has been given to this interesting group. The standard
modern period of practical concern with the group, has been that of
system, in the
Cushman
(1928).
Galloway (1933), attempting to recognize phylogeny and concluding that certain
types of form and texture of shells have evolved repeatedly, has radically revised
Cushman's system and set up a system of thirty-five families. The following survey
of the group is based on Galloway's system. The names applied to the families are
those which he has cited as the oldest, and the groups treated as orders are the blocks
of families which to him appeared natural.
1. Shell one-chambered, or of a proloculus followed by one other chamber, not of a series
of similar chambers
Order 1. Monosomatia.
1.
Shell a series of similar chambers.
2.
Shell porcellanous, imperforate
2.
Not
3.
Not
2.
Miliolidea.
Order
3.
Foraminifera.
Order
4.
GLOBiGERiNroEA.
Order
5.
Nummulitinidea.
specialized as in the following
orders
3.
Order
as above.
Shell hyaline,
perforate,
trochoid,
having
i.e.,
sively larger
chambers
the
typically
succes-
helically ar-
ranged so that all may be seen from
one side and only the last whorl
from the other
3.
Order
1.
Chambers
fundamentally
planispiral shell with specialized
walls containing channels or producing chamberlets
of
the
Monosomatia (Ehrenberg) Siebold
Anat.
1:
11
in Siebold
and Stannius Lehrb.
vergl.
(1848).
Monosomatia Ehrenberg
in Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berhn (1838)
table 1 (1839).
Order Astrorhizidea Lankester in Enc. Brit. ed. 9. 19: 846 (1885).
Order Imperforida Delage and Herouard Traite Zool. 1: 107 (1896).
Order Archi-Monothalamia Calkins Biol. Prot. 354 1926)
Rhizopoda consisting of a single chamber, or of a proloculus followed by one other
:
(
chamber; exceptionally, after passing through a stage of this character, producing
a series of similar chambers.
Family 1. Allogromiida [Allogromiidae] Cash and Wailes. Minute, with one-
chambered chitinous or gelatinous
shells, usually
subglobular; large in fresh water.
Allogromia Rhumbler; Mikrogromia Hertwig, the pseudopods of sister cells retaining
contact so that small colonies are formed; etc.
Family 2. Astrorhizida [Astorhizidae] Brady (1881). Family Astrorhizina Lankester (1885). Family Astrorhizidaceae Lister. Families Rhizamminidae , Saccamminidae,
and Hyperamminidae Cushman.
Shell of agglutinated foreign material, usually
is a central chamber
from which grow elongate arms. In Rhizammina, the shell is tubular, open at both
ends; in Bathysiphon it is a tube closed at one end; in Hyperammina a proloculus is
formed before the extended tube.
elongate, often branched, but not coiled. In Astrorhiza there
The
184]
Classification of
-
Fig.
36
bralina.
lina.
noted.
j,
— Shells
of Rhizopoda.
e, Peneroplis.
Lagena.
k,
1,
a,
^
Lower Organisms
/
m\^^V^//'":^^^^^.^V^\\•\\
Ophthalimidium.
h, c, Triloculina.
d, Verte-
Archaias x 25. g, Nodosaria. h, Dcntilina. i, FlabelNonion. m, n, Rotalia. o, Globigerina. x 50 except as
f,
Phylum Protoplasta
Family
Spirillinidea Reuss 1861. Family Spirillinina Lankester (1885). Family
3.
Silicinidae
Cushman. In
Spirillina, the perforate
planispirally coiled; the family
stages
if
not throughout
life.
Patellina the spirally coiled
Family
185
[
4.
Ammodiscida
is
hyaline one-chambered shell
is
distinguished by a shell of this form in the young
a Jurassic fossil whose shell
is silicified. In
followed by others arranged in a heHx.
[Ammodiscidae] Rhumbler 1895. Like the preceding
Silicina
first
is
chamber
is
family, but the shell consisting of agglutinated foreign matter.
Ammodiscus
etc.
Order 2. Miliolidea Lankester in Enc. Brit. ed. 9, 19: 846 (1885).
Order Flexostylida Calkins Biol. Prot. 355 (1926).
Rhizopoda with imperforate porcellanous shells, a numerous and important group.
Family 1. Miliolida [Miliolidae] d'Orbigny (1839). Families N uhecularina, Miliolina, and Hauerinina Lankester (1885). Fisherinidae Cushman. The genus Cornuspira, known from the carboniferous, differs from Spirillina only in the texture. Evidently evolved from this are genera of planispirally coiled tubes divided into chambers,
and from these others in which the series of chambers becomes straight or irregular,
as in Vertebralina and Tubinella. There is an important block of genera in which each
cycle of chambers is of two members, the second opening at the opposite end of the
body from the first. In O phthalmidium and Pyrgo alternate chambers lie regularly
on opposite sides of a body whose form is that of an elliptic flake. In other genera
of this group successive chambers are not opposite each other, but separated by less
than 180°, so that more than two appear on the outside. In Triloculina three chambers are externally visible. In Miliola Lamarck [Miliolina Lamarck, the latter name
applied to fossil representatives of the same genus) the chambers are 144° apart, so
that five appear on the outside. In many members of the family the apertures are
partially blocked by teeth, single, double, or multiple, or extended as bars clear across.
Family 2. Soritina Ehrenberg (1839). Family Helicosorina Ehrenberg op. cit.
Family Peneroplidea Reuss 1861. Family Peneroplidina Lankester (1885). Family
Peneroplidae Cushman. Family Soritidae Galloway (1933). Specialized derivatives
of the lower Miliolida: planispiral shells in which the chambers become successively
larger, as in Peneroplis, and, by a further development, divided into large numbers
of secondary chambers, as in Archaias, Sorites, and Orbitolites. Spirolina, the shell
coiled in the oldest part, straight in the remainder.
Family 3. Alveolinea Ehrenberg (1839). Family Alveolinida Schultze 1854.
Families Alveolinina and Keramosphaerina Lankester, Alveolinellidae and Keramosphaeridae Cushman. Another group of specialized derivatives, the planispirally coiling chambers broadened and divided into many chamberlets with separate apertures,
more or less globular. Borelis; Fasciolites Parkinson 1811 [Alveod'Orbigny 1826); Alveolinella; Keramosphaera Brody, a rare antarctic form.
The organisms of these last two families resemble, as a parallel development, those
of order Nummulitinidea, from which they are distinguished by the texture.
the entire body
lina
Order 3. Foraminifera Zborewski 1834.
Order Polythalamia and subordinate group Polysomatia Ehrenberg in Abh.
Akad. Wiss. Berlin (1838): table 1 (1839).
Order Polysomatia Siebold in Siebold and Stannius Lehrb. vergl. Anat. 1 11
:
(1848).
Orders Lituolidea, Textularidea, and Lagenidea Lankester
19: 847 (1885).
in Enc. Brit. ed. 9,
The
186]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Order Perforida Delage and Herouard Traite Zool. 1 107 (1896).
Orders Nodosalida and Textulinida Calkins Biol. Prot. 355, 356 (1926).
:
Comparatively unspecialized Rhizopoda, the
shells of various textures,
not porcel-
and if so, usually not vitreous.
Early students, Montfort, Lamarck, and d'Orbigny, were much concerned with
organisms which they called Geophonus, Vorticialis, or Polystornella. These names
represent organisms of much the appearance of Nautilus; all are synonyms of Elphidium Montfort, which is to be considered the type or standard genus of Foraminifera.
Family 1. Endothyrina Lankester (1885). Family Endothyridae Rhumbler 1895.
Fossils, pre-Cambrian to Carboniferous, the calcareous shells granular or fibrous, not
porcellanous or vitreous. Cayeuxina Galloway 1933) includes minute globular shells
solitary or irregularly clustered, described by Cayeux, 1894, from the pre-Cambrian
of Brittany; Matthewina Galloway includes Cambrian fossils of similar character.
Endothyra and Cribrospira are Carboniferous forms, planispirally coiled; Tetrataxis
produced trochoid shells.
Family 2. Nodosinellida [Nodosinellidae] Rhumbler 1895. Shells like those of
the Endothyrina or containing imbedded grains of sand, one-chambered or forming
lanous; not usually of trochoid form,
(
straight or curved, not coiled, rows. Mostly Carboniferous, rare as late as the Eocene.
Archaelagena, Nodosinclla, Nodosaroum, Pedangia, etc.
Family 3. Reophacida [Reophacidae] Cushman 1827. A small group of forms apparently degenerate from the foregoing, the chambers in straight, curved, or irregular
series, walls chitinous or sandy; sometimes parasitic in other rhizopods. Reophax, etc.,
surviving to the present in cold deep water.
Family 4. Trochamminida [Trochamminidae] Schwager 1877. Family Trochamminina Lankester (1885). Family Plocapsilinidae Cushman. Cells planispiral or
trochoid, becoming evolute or irregular; walls with imbedded grains of sand. Pennsylvanian to recent, abundant only in the Cretaceous. Trochamniina, Plocapsilina, etc.
Family 5. Lituolidea Reuss 1861. Family Lituolidae Brady (1881). Families
Lituolina and Loftusiina Lankester. Family Lituolidaceae Lister. Families Loftusiidae and Neusinidae Cushman. Shells spiral or becoming evolute or irregular, with
walls of agglutinated siliceous or calcareous matter, the chambers subdivided as in
order Nummulitinidea. Cyclammina, Lituola, Loftusia, Neusina, etc.; Mississippian
to recent, most abundant in the Cretaceous and at present.
Family 6. Orbitolinida [Orbitolinidae] Martin 1890. Specialized derivatives of
the preceding family, walls agglutinated as in that group, the numerous chambers
forming a conical or nearly circular body. Dictyoconus, Orbitolina, etc. Mesozoic and
Eocene.
Family 7. Ataxophragmidea Schwager 1877. Families Valvulinidae and Vcrneulinidae Cushman 1927. Family Ataxophragmidae Galloway (1933). Having
walls of agglutinated material and allied to the preceding families; chambers of the
tending to form an elongate, screw-like spiral. Valvulina, Ataxophragmium,
etc.; since early Mesozoic, abundant in the present.
Family 8. Textularina Ehrcnberg (1839). Family Textularidac d'Orbigny (1839).
shell
Verneulina,
Family Textulariaccac Lister. Walls more or less agglutinated, the chambers usually
in an elongate spiral with two members to a cycle, so that they form two series, the
body as a whole tending to be wedge-shaped. Textularia, Cuneolina, Vulvulina, etc.;
Ordovician to the present.
Family 9. Nodosarina Ehrcnberg (1839). Family Nodosarida Schultzc 1854.
Family Lagenidae Brady (1881). Family Lagenina Lankester (1885). Family Nodo-
Phylum Protoplasta
[
187
saridae Rhumbler. Family Lagenaceae Lister. Walls calcareous, hyaline, perforate;
chambers planispiral
becoming curved or straight in the majorbecoming reduced to a single slit. A numerous
group, Triassic to the present. Lenticulina Lamarck {Lenticulites Lamarck and
Crist ellaria Lamarck are synonyms) is Naiitilus-Vikt. Hemicristellaria and Vaginulina
resemble the sheath of a dagger; Flabellina and Frondicularia resemble fans; Glandulina is shaped like a jug. Nodosaria is like a row of enlarging beads. Lagena is a onechambered form connected to Nodosaria by transitions, and evidently reduced, not
ity; orifice
in the earliest forms,
ordinarily of radiating
slits,
primitive.
Family
10.
Polymorphinida [Polymorphinidae] d'Orbigny. Families Polymorphin-
ina and Ramulinina Lankester
( 1885). Specialized irregular forms related to the preceding, as indicated by orifices of the same character. Polymorphina, etc., present in
the Mesozoic, abundant in the Cenozoic to the present.
Family
11.
Nonionidea [Noninideae] Reuss 1860. Family Polystomellina Lankester
(1885). Family Hantkeninidae Cushman. Shells mostly nautiloid, that is, planispiral with successively larger chambers, a few of the highest trochoid; walls hyaline,
N
perforate; aperture generally a transverse slit.
onion Montfort {Nonionina d'Orbigny) and Elphidium Montfort [Geophonus Montfort, Vorticialis Lamarck, Polystomella Lamarck, the apparent type of Foraminifera) are simply nautiloid; Hantkenina is ornamented with spines. Jurassic to the present.
Order
4. Globigerinidea Lankester in Enc. Brit. ed. 9, 19: 847 (1885).
Orders Rotalidea and Chilostomellida Lankester 1. c, both names having prev-
ious use in the category of families.
Order Rotalida Calkins Biol. Prot. 356 (1926).
The main body of Rhizopoda with perforate hyaline shells, many-chambered, the
chambers primitively of the trochoid arrangement.
Family 1. Rotalina Ehrenberg (1839). Family Rotalidea Reuss 1861. Family
Rotalidae Brady (1861). Family Rotalina Lankester. Family Rotaliaceae Lister.
Families Globorotaliidae, Anomalinidae and Planorbidinidae Cushman. A numerous
,
family, including unspecialized forms, Globorotalia, Rotalia,
etc., as
well as degen-
and irregular forms, Piano pulvinulina, etc., and moderately specialized ones
with conical or disk-shaped bodies of numerous chambers, Cymbalopora, Planorbuerate
lina, etc. Triassic, rare; Jurassic to the present,
common.
Family 2. Acervulinida Schultze 1854. Family Rupertiidae Cushman. A small
group of degenerate derivatives of the foregoing, the bodies attached, irregular, sometimes reduced to one chamber. Rupertia, Acervulina, etc.. Cretaceous to the present.
Family 3. Tinoporidea Schwager 1877. Family Calcarinidae Cushman. Another
small group derived from Rotalina, the disk-shaped cells with a whorl of prominent
spines. Calcarina, Tinoporus, etc. Cenozoic, to the present.
Family 4. Asterigerinida [Asterigerinidae] d'Orbigny (1839). Two genera, Asterigerina and Amphistegina, diverging from Rotalina in having each chamber divided
two by an oblique wall. Doubtfully in the Cretaceous; Eocene to the present.
Family 5. Chapmaniida [Chapmaniidae] Galloway (1933). The numerous chambers arranged in a low cone whose inside is filled with deposited solid material. Chapmania, Halkyardia, Dictyoconoides. Eocene and Oligocene.
Family 6. Chilostomellida [Chilostomellidae] Brady (1881). Family Chilostomellaceae Lister. A few genera of reduced derivatives of Rotalina with few chambers.
Allomorphina, Chilostomella, Sphaeroidina, etc. Jurassic to the present.
into
188
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Family 7. Orbulinida Schultze 1854. Family Globigerinida Carpenter 1862.
few genera with the chambers mostly few, subglobular, clustered rather than arranged in a definite pattern. Orbulina. Globigerina, abundant, pelagic in all oceans,
the shells abundant in the ooze on the bottom. Pennsylvanian, doubtful; Jurassic, rare;
A
Cretaceous to the present, common.
Family 8. Pegidiida [Pegidiidae] Heron-Allen and Earland 1928. A few genera
much like the Orbulinida but with thinner walls. Pegidia, etc. Oligocene to the
present.
Family
9.
Heterohelicida [Heterohelicidae]
Cushman
1927.
A
numerous group,
the shells screw-like, biseriate, uniseriate, sheath-like or fan-like, the walls often with
exterior ornamentation; paralleling the Nodosarina, but without the radiate orifices.
Heterohelix, Sagrina, Eouvigerina, Pavonina, Plectojrondicidaria, Bolivina,
ina.
Common,
Mucron-
Jurassic to the present.
Family 10. Buliminida Jones 1876. Family Uvellina Ehrenberg (1839), not
based on a generic name. Family Buliminina Lankester (1885). Shells mostly high
spirals, screw-like, often with spines or other external ornamentation, the orifices
various, commonly comma-shaped. Turrilina, Bulimina, Virgulina, etc. Triassic to
the present.
Family
11.
Cassidulinida [Cassidulinidae] d'Orbigny (1839). A small group with
and comma-shaped orifices, evidently derived from the forego-
high-spiralled shells
ing family. Cassidulina, etc. Eocene to the present.
Family 12 Uvigerinida [Uvigerinidae] Galloway and Wissler, 1927. Further varifrom Heterohelicida, the high-spiralled shells with chambers in three rows at
first, varying to biseriate and uniseriate. Uvigerina, Siphonogenerina, etc. Jurassic
to the present, common since the Miocene.
Family 13. Pleurostomellida [Pleurostomellidae] Reuss 1860. An additional
rather small family of the same general character as the few preceding. Pleurostomella, Nodosarella, Daucina, Ellipsoidina, etc. Cretaceous to the present, commonest
in upper Cretaceous and Eocene.
ants
Order 5. Nummulitinidea Lankester in Enc. Brit. ed. 9, 19: 848 (1885).
Rhizopoda with large specialized shells, the walls hyaline, perforate, generally
thickened and traversed by channels and thrown into internal ridges which subdivide
the chambers.
Family 1. Fusulinida [Fusulinidae]
chambers short and broad, numerous, in
Moller
1878.
Carboniferous
fossils,
a planispiral coil, forming bodies
the
which are
usually fusiform or globular. Orobias, Fusidina, Triticina, Verbeekina, etc.
Nummulitida [Nummulitidae] Reuss 1861. Family Camerinidae
1865. Family Nummulinidae Brady (1881). Family Nummulitina Lankester ( 1885). Family Nummulitaceae Lister. Mostly disk-shaped, planispiral,
the walls not highly specialized. Camerina Bruguiere 1792 {Nxunrnulites Lamarck
Family
2.
Meek and Hayden
1801), Operculina, Heterostegina, etc. Jurassic to the present, most abundant in the
Eocene.
Family 3. Orbitoidida [Orbitoididae] Schubert 1920. Similar to the foregoing,
the numerous chambers divided into numerous chamberlcts. A considerable group of
Mcsozoic and Ccnozoic fossils. Orbitoides, Cyclosiphon, etc.
Family 4. Cycloclypeina Lankester (1885). Family Cycloclypeidae Galloway
(1933). Similar to the preceding. A number of Mcsozoic and Ccnozoic genera, most
numerous in the Eocene. Asterocydina. The only living species is Cycloclypeiis Carpenteri Brady.
Phylum Protoplasta
Class 4.
HEUOZOA
[
189
Haeckel
Family Polycystina Ehrenberg in Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1838: 128 (1839).
Rhizopoda radiaria seu Radiolaria J. Miiller in Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berlin (1858)
16 (1859).
Echinocystida Claparede.
Order Radiolaria Haeckel Radiolarien 243 (1862).
Stamm Moneres
for the most part, and classes Heliozoa and Radiolaria, Haeckel
Gen. Morph. 2: xxii, xxviii, xxix (1866).
Subclasses Heliozoa and Radiolaria Biitschli in Brown Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1, 1
Teil: Inhalt (1882).
Class Proteomyxa Lankester in Enc. Brit. ed.
Subclasses Proteomyxiae, Heliozoariae,
Traite Zool.
1: 66, 156,
9, 19:
839 (1885).
and Radiolariae Delage and Herouard
169 (1896).
Class Actinopoda Calkins Biol. Prot. 318 (1926).
Class Actinopodea and orders Helioflagellida, Heliozoida, Radiolarida, and Proteo-
myxida HaU Protozoology 202, 203, 212, 220 (1953).
Subphylum Actinopoda Grasse and Deflandre, and classes Acantharia, Radiolaria,
and Heliozoa Tregouboff in Grasse Traite Zool. 1, fasc. 2: 267, 270, 321, 437
(1953).
Organisms having pseudopodia of the character of filopodia, stiffly radiating, or of
axopodia, stiffly radiating and having inner fibers; often with siliceous skeletons.
Here, not without authority, one combines in one class the three groups which have
been treated as the classes Proteomyxa, Heliozoa, and Radiolaria; and adds further
two families of shelled amoebas.
Cienkowski (1865) listed as "Monaden" the new species or genera Monas amyli,
Colpodella (apparently a chytrid), Pseudospora, and Vampyrella. They are minute
fresh-water amoeboid organisms, in part having flagellate stages. Haeckel (1866)
placed most of them (the Monas under the new generic name Protomonas), together
with his own discoveries Protamoeba and Protogenes, and also the bacteria, in his
Stamm Moneres, i.e., his group of Protista without nuclei. Later (1868) he omitted
the bacteria. Zopf (1885) found several of Haeckel's Moneres to possess nuclei, and
Lankester renamed the group Proteomyxa. Publication of subsequent original observations of these organisms has been scant and scattered; they remain poorly known.
The Heliozoa
as conventionally construed are also
water. Ehrenberg observed
cilia.
some
of
them and took them
mostly inhabitants of fresh
for Infusoria with immobile
There are only a few dozen species of Heliozoa sensu
is no more than a reasonable order.
strict o
(Schaudinn, 1896)
:
the whole group
The Radiolaria (this
marine. Examples were
name
first
also used at this point in its conventional sense) are
observed as floating gelatinous bodies. These were taken
for fragments and remained unnamed until 1834, when Mayen named Physematium
and Sphaerozoum. Fossil skeletons of many examples were described by Ehrenberg
(1839). Huxley (1851) named Thalassicolla and gave an accurate account of its
structure. It was by work on organisms of this group that Haeckel first distinguished
himself (1862).
Haeckel dealt further with
this
group in four important papers (1879, 1882, 1887,
1887-1888). In the last of these, the Radiolaria are a class of four legions, eight sublegions, twenty orders, 85 families, 739 genera, and more than four thousand species.
The
categories,
Haeckel explained, are purely
relative: Radiolaria
would
as well be
.
.
The
190]
Classification of
.
Lower Organisms
a phylum, the legions classes, and so forth. This idea served him as license for confounding the application of many names, by shifting them among the categories, or
by substituting new names for old. All subsequent authors have followed Haeckel's
system of Radiolaria, applying names as best they might.
The class Heliozoa in the extended sense here proposed may be organized as five
orders distinguished as follows:
1.
Cells without a central capsule,
a firm
membrane surrounding
i.e.,
without
the inner part
of the protoplast
1.
Order
1.
Radioflagellata.
Order
2.
Radiolaria.
Order
3.
Acantharia.
Order
4.
Monopylaria.
Order
5.
Ph.'SlEosphaeria.
Cells with a central capsule.
2.
Central capsule of spherical symmetry
or with
three planes of
right angles, punctured
3.
symmetry
at
by many pores.
Pores of the central capsule evenly
distributed; skeleton absent or present,
without spicules which cross the
central capsule or
3.
meet
in
its
center
Pores of the central capsule clustered; skeleton including spicules
which cross the central capsule or
meet in its middle
2.
Central capsule of radial symmetry, with
one opening
2.
Central capsule of isobilateral symmetry,
with one main opening and two minor
ones
225 ( 1880)
1. Radioflagellata Kent Man. Inf. 1
Subdivision or subclass Heliozoa (Haeckel), and orders Aphrothoraca (Hertwig), Chlamydophora (Archer), Desmothoraca (Hertwig and Lesser), and
Order
:
Chalarothoraca (Hertwig and Lesser) Biischli in Bronn Kl.
u.
Ord. Thier-
reichs 1: 261, 320, et seq. (1881, 1882).
Suborder Protoplasta Filosa Leidy in Rept. U.S. Geol. Survey Territories 12:
189(1879).
Class Proteomyxa Lankester ( 1885)
Subclass Proteomyxiae and orders Acystosporidia, Azoosporidia, and Zoosporidia; subclass Heliozoariae and orders Aphrothoracida, Chlamydophorida,
Chalarothoracida, and Desmothoracida Delage and Herouard Traite Zool.
1: 66-72,
156-168 (1896).
Order Heliozoa Doflcin Protozoen 13 1901 )
Orders Vampyrellidea and Chlamydomyxidea Poche
(
in Arch. Prot. 30:
182,
193 (1913).
The proper Heliozoa together with the Proteomyxa: organisms of the character
of the class, lacking central capsules, that is, firm membranes about the inner part of
the protoplasts. Mostly fresh water organisms of spherical .symmetry, commonly without skeletons. The type, being the only genus assigned
Actinomonas.
1. Pscudopodia unspecialized; amoeboid organisms with or without flagellate stages.
to the
order by Kent,
is
Phylum Protoplasta
2.
Without
2.
With
[191
Family
shells
shells;
Pseudosporea.
1.
without known flagellate
stages.
3. Shells
chitinous,
without siliceous
Family
scales
3. Shells
bearing
circular
scales
1.
1.
Pseudopodia slender, with apical knobs
Pseudopodia of the character of typical axopodia, without apical knobs; the cells or their
main bodies
2.
Lagyntoa.
siliceous
Family
Family
3.
4.
Euglyphida.
Vampyrellacea.
Family
5.
AcTiNOMONADroA.
Family
6.
AcTiNOPHRYroA.
Family
7.
Heterophryida.
Family
8.
Acanthocystida.
usually regularly spherical.
2.
Bearing flagella as well as axopodia in
2.
Without
the vegetative condition
flagella
in
the
vegetative
condition.
3.
Cells without a lifeless outer coat
3.
Cells having a gelatinous outer coat
3.
without siliceous spicules
Cells having a gelatinous outer coat
with siliceous spicules
3.
Cells with a hard shell
punctured
by pores
Family 9. Clathrulinida.
Pseudosporea [Pseudosporeae] Berlese in Saccardo Sylloge 7: 460
fl888). Monadineae Zoosporcae Cienkowski in Arch. mikr. Anat. 1: 213 (1865).
Family Pseudosporeen Zopf Pilzthiere 115 (1885). Orders Azoosporidea for the
most part and Zoosporidca Delage and Herouard (1896). Azoosporidae for the most
part and Zoosporidae Doflein Protozoen 40, 41 ( 1901 ) Family Pseudosporidae Poche
Family
1.
.
Arch. Prot. 30: 197 (1913). Amoeboid organisms without shells or skeletons, the
pseudopodia tapering from a broad base to a filamentous termination. Flagellate
stages (with one flagellum or two unequal flagella) occur in Protovionas, Pseudo-
in
and Diplophysalis. In other genera, as Arachnula and Chlamydomyxa, no
known.
Family 2. Lagynida Schultze 1854. Order Gromida Claparede and Lachmann
1859. Family Gromida Carpenter 1862. Family Gromiidae Brady (1881). Families
Monostomina and A.mphistomina Lankester (1885). Amoeboid organisms having
chitinous shells without siliceous scales with a broad orifice through which project
pseudopodia of the character of filopodia. Grom.ia, Lagynis, etc.
Family 3. Euglyphida [Euglyphidae] Wallich 1874. Amoeboid organisms with a
spora.
flagellate stages are
chitinous shell beset with circular siliceous scales, the filopodia projecting through a
broad orifice. Euglypha, Cyphoderia, Campuscus, Trinema, etc.
Family 4. Vampyrellacea [Vampyrellaceae] Zopf Pilzthiere 99 (1885). Monadineae Tetraplasteae Cienkowski op. cit. 218. Family Vampyrelleae Berlese in Saccardo
Sylloge 7: 454 (1888). Family Vampyrellidae Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 182 (1913).
Cells subglobular, slowly creeping, with slender pseudopodia, numerous, densely
packed and stiffly radiating on mature individuals, bearing terminal knobs. Vampyrclla, the cells colored faintly pink by some metabolic by-product, is not unfamiliar
as a predator on freshwater algae cultured under unfavorable conditions.
Family 5. Actinomonadlda [Actinomonadidae] Kent Man. Inf. 1: 226 (1880).
Family Ciliophryidae Poche in Arch Prot. 30: 187 (1913) Family Helioflagellidae
—
192]
The
Classification of
Lower Organisms
I
t)v:
%j^
h
\
37.
Radioflagellata a-f, Diplophysalis stagnalis after Karling (1930);
young cells with one or two flagella; c, active amoeboid form; d, walled cell;
e, iame releasing flagellate cells; f, resting cell,
g. Young cell of Vampyrella x 1,000.
h, Actinosphaerium Eichhornii x 1,000.
Fig.
a, b,
:
Phylum Protoplasta
[
193
Organisms bearing at the same time flagella and typical axopodia. Dimorpha, free-swimming, with two unequal flagella. Actinomonas, Pteridomonas, Ciliophrys, with one flagellum, either free-swimming or attached by a protoplasmic stalk.
Family 6. Actinophryida [Actinophryidae] Glaus 1874. Askeleta Hertwig and
Lesser in Arch. mikr. Anat. 10 Suppl. 164. (1874). Aphrothoraca seu Actinophryidae
Doflein.
Hertwig Org. Radiolar. 142 (1879). Order Aphrothoraca Butschli (1881). Suborder
Aphrothoraca Minchin (1912). Family Camptonematidae Poche in Arch. Prot. 30:
187 (1913). Cells typically spherical, with typical axopodia, having no flagella nor
shells nor skeletons. Actinophrys Sol Ehrenberg and Actinosphaerium Eichhornii
(Ehrenberg) Stein are common in fresh water among algae, living as predators
largely on diatoms; Actinophrys is uninucleate, the cells to 50^ in diameter; Actonois multinucleate, the cells to lOOOjl in diameter. Camptonema is marine.
Mitosis in Actinophrys as described by Schaudinn (1896) occurs within an intact
nuclear membrane which undergoes constriction; the dividing nucleus lies within a
spaerium
body of cytoplasm. Schaudinn and Belar (1923) observed conjugation.
which are usually sister cells but may sometimes be random pairs,
lie within a cyst wall of secreted material. The nucleus of each gamete undergoes
meiosis; at the end of each meiotic division, one of the daughter nuclei is digested;
thus each gamete comes to possess a single haploid nucleus. Syngamy and karyogamy
follow in due course and the zygote becomes walled. An old account of the cytology
of Actinosphaerium by Hertwig is defaced by descriptions of the origin of nuclei from
fragments of nuclei (chromidia), and of nuclear fusions at two separate stages of
spindle-like
Pairs of gametes,
development.
Family 7. Heterophryida [Heterophryidae] Poche in Arch. Pr«it. 30: 189 (1913).
Heliozoa Chtamydophora Archer in Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci. n.s. 16: 348 (1876).
Order Chlamydophora Butschli (1882). Suborder Chlamydophora Minchin (1912).
Family Lithocollidae Poche I.e. The cells or their main bodies spherical with axopodia
projecting through a gelatinous envelope. Heterophrys and Astrodisculus are simply
globular cells. Elaeorhanis and Lithocolla are similar but with grains of sand or diatom shells imbedded in the envelope. Actinolophus is stalked. Sphaerastrum becomes
colonial by incomplete division of the cells.
Family 8. Acanthocystida [Acanthocystidae] Glaus 1874. Chalarothoraca Hertwig and Lesser in Arch. mikr. Anat. 10 Suppl. 193 ( 1874). Chalarothoraca seu Acanthocystidae Hertwig Org. Radiolar. 142. (1879). Order Chalarothoraca Butschli in
Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1: 325 (1882). Suborder Chalarothoraca Minchin
(1912). Resembling the preceding family, but the gelatinous envelope containing
hard bodies, supposedly usually siliceous, of definite form. In Raphidophrys, these
bodies are curved needles; in Pinacocystis, small plates; in Acanthocystis and Pinaciophora, disks bearing a central spine which is in some species forked. The cell of Wagnerella (a marine form, on rocks in bays) consists of a globular head with spines and
axopodia, borne on a protoplasmic stalk attached by a foot; the nucleus lies in the foot.
In these forms the axial filaments of the pseudopodia radiate from a central granule located outside the nucleus (in Wagnerella, in the head). Schaudinn (1896) reported nuclear division in Acanthocystis as being either amitotic or mitotic: the
report of amitosis is of course not to be taken seriously. In the mitotic process, the
central granule acts as a centrosome; the chromosomes are numerous and minute;
the nuclear membrane disappears during the middle stages. Nuclear division may be
followed by division of the cell into two, or may be repeated and followed by production of buds. The buds may lose their pseudopodia and develop paired flagella. It is
.
194
The
]
Classification of
suspected that the flagellate cells
may
Lower Organisms
be gametes.
The
central granule
is
said to
from the nucleus of a bud.
Zuelzer (1909) found in Wagner ella two types of individuals, slender and stout,
supposedly respectively haploid and diploid. In either type the nuclei may become
numerous (and it is said that they sometimes develop from chromidia). The nuclei
may migrate to the head and be released in buds, or they may become distributed
throughout the protoplast, which then breaks up into biflagellate cells. It is supposed
originate by extrusion
that these
may
be gametes, but a fusion of the heads of individuals of the slender
type was observed.
Family 9. Clathrulinida [Clathrulinidae] Glaus 1874. Desmothoraca Hertwig
and Lesser op. cit. 225. Desmothoraca seu Clathrulinidae Hertwig Org. Radiolar.
142 (1879). Order Desmothoraca Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1: 328
(1882). Family Choanocystidae Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 192 (1913). Protoplasts lying within globular shells, apparently of chitin, usually stalked, punctured by numerous pores through which the axopodia project. In reproduction, the protoplast may
divide into two, one of which escapes from the shell and secretes a new one; or it may
divide into many which become unequally biflagellate. Clathrulina, Hedriocystis,
Choanocystis.
Order 2. Radiolaria (J. Miiller) Haeckel Radiolarien 243 (1862).
Rhizopoda radiaria sen Radiolaria J. Miiller in Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1858:
16 (1859).
Orders Thalassicollen, Sphacrozoen, and Peripyleen Hertwig Org. Radiolar. 133
(1879).
*
Orders Pcripylaria, Collodaria, Symbelaria, and Syncollaria Haeckel in Jenaische Zeitschr. 15: 447, 469, 471, 472 (1882).
Legion S pumellaria or Peripylea, with orders Collodaria and Sphaerellaria and
seven suborders, Haeckel in Rept. Voy. Challenger Zool. 18: 5, 9 ( 1887)
Legion Spiimellaria, sublegions Collodaria and Sphaerellaria, and six orders,
Haeckel Radiolarien 2: 87 (1887).
Order Peripylida Delage and Herouard Traite Zool. 1 176 ( 1896).
Suborder Peripylaria Minchin Protozoa 225 (1912).
Order Sphaeridca Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 206 (1913).
Order Peripylea Calkins Biol. Prot. 343 (1926).
Suborder Peripylea Kudo Handb. Protozool. 259 (1931).
Suborder Pen'py/ma Hall Protozoology 218 (1953).
This order and the three which follow, being the Radiolaria as conventionally construed, are unicellular marine organisms with axopodia, having within the protoplast
a layer of organic material, variously punctured and of various types of symmetry,
which separates the inner protoplasm from the outer. The central capsule consists of
this layer (the central capsule membrane) and its contents, including the one or more
nuclei of the cell. Imbedded in the protoplasm there is usually a skeleton, usually siliceous, various in structure and sometimes highly complicated. The outer cytoplasm
is commonly inhabited by symbiotic cryptomonads in the resting condition (yellow
cells, zooxanthellae), and sometimes contains masses of dark material, apparently
debris extruded from the central capsule. The type of Radiolaria is evidently Thalassicolla; this genus was the first one described from living material, and was listed
first by J. Miiller in the original publication of the name.
The order which includes Thalassicolla, and to which the name Radiolaria is here
restricted, is distinguished by uniformly distributed small punctures in the central
:
Phylum Protoplasta
capsule
membrane and by
capsule or meeting in
its
[
195
the absence of skeletal spicules extending across the central
middle. Except during reproduction, each central capsule
contains a single nucleus, but the cells of
many central capsules.
many examples
are coenocytic, containing
several or
Brandt (1885, 1905) observed reproduction particularly as it occurs by the producswimming cells by some of the coenocytic forms. The nucleus divides to produce very many, and the intracapsular cytoplasm divides to produce uninucleate
tion of
flagellate cells. In Collosphaera, all the nuclei are included in these cells.
are of two
The
cells
produced by different individuals, and are supposed to be gametes. In
Sphaerozoum and its allies, some of the nuclei degenerate instead of being included
in the swimming cells, of which two sizes are produced by single individuals. It appears that the swimming cells have characteristically two unequal flagella, though
many are found to have only one, and some produce a third appendage by which
they can attach themselves.
Haeckel listed thirty-two families in his legion Spumellaria. Other authors recogsizes,
nize about a dozen, including the following.
Family ThalassicoUida Haeckel (1882). Thalassicollen J. Miiller (1859). Family
Collida Haeckel (1862); there is no corresponding generic name. Order Collida
Haeckel (1887). Globular forms with a single central capsule, skeleton none or of
numerous small spicules. Thalassicolla, Physematium, Lampoxanthium, etc.
Family Sphaerozoida Haeckel (1882). Family Collozoida Haeckel op. cit. Family
Sphaeroidina Haeckel (1862); there is no corresponding generic name. Coenocytic,
each cell with several nuclei in separate central capsules; skeleton none or of numerous small spicules. Sphaerozoum, the cells globular, to 1 mm. in diameter; Raphidozoum, the cells elongate.
Family CoIIosphaerida Haeckel (1862). Coenocytic, the spherical cell to 1 mm. in
diameter, with several central capsules, each with an individual lattice-like skeleton.
Collosphaera.
Family Haliommatina Ehrenberg 1847. Families Ethmosphaerida, Ommatida,
and Cladococcida Haeckel ( 1862) Family Sphaerida Haeckel ( 1882) Order Sphaeroidea, with six families, Haeckel '(1887). Globular, with small numbers of radiating
main spicules, the main spicules bearing tangential branches which form a globular
network of definite pattern, or, often, two or more concentric networks. Haliomma,
Actinomma, Hexacontium, Cladococcus, and many other genera.
Further families are of the character of the Haliommatina, but with the spherical
symmetry modified by abbreviation or elongation of one or more axes:
Family Spongurida Haeckel (1862). Order Prunoidea, with seven families,
Haeckel (1887). Having one axis elongate. Spongurus, Pipetta, etc.
Family Lithocyclidina Ehrenberg 1847. Family Discida Haeckel (1862). Order
Discoidea, with six families, Haeckel ( 1887) Having one axis shorter than the others.
.
.
.
Lithocyclia, Staurocyclia, Heliodiscus, etc.
Family Larcarida Haeckel (1887). Order Larcoidea, with this and seven other
Haeckel (1887). The skeleton with three unequal axes, or spiral. Cenolar-
families,
cus, etc.
Order 3. Acantharia Haeckel in Jenaische Zeitschr. 15: 465 (1882).
Order Actipyleen Hertwig Org. Radiolar. 133 (1879).
Legion Acantharia or Actipylea, orders Acanthometra and Acanthophracta, and
seven suborders, Haeckel in Rept. Voy. Challenger Zool. vol. 18 (1887).
—
The
196]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
f
0'^^'
*lty
-S^'^v"^
^^
^-'v-^if**^^^^
>o,
Fig. 38.
Radiolaria:
b. Skeleton of
Haliomma
a,
::Q)t^^a
^/-T
motile cells of Collosphaera Huxleyi after Brandt ( 1885).
c, Skeleton of Actinomma
Haeckel ( 1862)
capillaris after
Asteracanthion after Haeckel (1862).
.
d.
Skeleton of
//f/zorfz,?cu5
P/zaco^wcu^ after
Haeckel (1887).
Acantharia: e, Skeleton of Dorataspis costata after Haeckel
Monopylaria: f, Central capsule of Tridictyopus elegans after R. Hertwig
(1387).
h. Skeleton
f 1879)
g, Skeleton of Lithocircus productus after R. Hertwig, op. cit.
of Eucyrtidium carinatum after Haeckel (1862).
Phaeosphaerl^: i. Typical central capsule after R. Hertwig, op. cit.
.
Phylum Protoplasta
[
197
Legion Actipyea or Acantharia, sublegions Acanthometra and Acanthophracta,
and orders Actinellida, Acanthonida, Sphaerophracta, and Prunophracta
Haeckel Radiolarien II Teil (1887).
Order Actipylida Delage and Herouard Traite Zool. 1 204 ( 1896)
Suborder Acantharia Minchin Protozoa 256 (1912).
Order Acanthometrida Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 212 (1913).
Order Actipylea Calkins Biol. Prot. 345 (1926).
Suborder Actipylea Kudo Handb. Protozool. 216 (1931).
Suborder Actipylina Hall Protozoology 216 (1953).
In this group the central capsule membrane has many punctures arranged in
clusters. The skeleton includes radiating spicules; in some examples these extend
through the cell from side to side, passing through the central capsule; in the majority,
their proximal ends meet in the center of the central capsule. In the latter forms,
the number of radiating spicules is twenty, and they are arranged according to a pattern discovered by Johannes Miiller and called Miiller's law; they form five parallel
whorls of four. Usually they bear tangential branches of definite, often highly elaborate, patterns: these may form a globular frame, or two or more concentric frames.
Haeckel, Hertwig, and Brandt found the spicules not to consist of silica. They are
soluble in acids and alkalis, and were reported to be destroyed by heat. They were
supposed, accordingly, to consist of some organic substance; Haeckel named it acanthin. Schewiakoff found them resistant to heat, and Biitschli (1906) analyzed them
and found them to consist of strontium sulfate. This surprising fact has recently been
confirmed by Odum (1951).
The cytoplasm at each point where a spicule passes through the surface is attached
to the spicule by a whorl of minute fibers called myophrisks. The myophrisks are
believed to be contractile, and to have the function of changing the volume, and
hence the density, of the cells, enabling them to sink or float.
:
Young cells contain a single nucleus, eccentric in the central capsule; older ones
have several to many nuclei.
Haeckel Hsted twenty families in his legion Acantharia. Other authors recognize
about a half dozen, including the following.
Family Litholophida Haeckel (1882). Family Astrolophida Haeckel (1887). Spicules numerous, radiating, not arranged according to Miiller's law. Litholophus, Astrolophus, Actinelius, etc.
Family Chiastolida Haeckel (1887). Spicules ten to twenty, extending clear
through the body. Chiastolus, Acanthochiasma.
Family Acanthometrida Haeckel (1862). Acanthometren J. MuUer (1859). Family Acanthonida Haeckel ( 1882). With twenty spicules arranged according to Miiller's
law; they may be branched, but do not form a continuous network. In most examples,
as Acanthometron, Xiphacantha, etc., they are equal; in others, as Amphilonche, two
of the spicules of the equatorial whorl are much longer than the others.
Family Sphaerocapsida Haeckel (1882). Family Dorataspida Haeckel I.e. Order
Sphaerophracta Haeckel (1887). Like the foregoing, but the branches of the radiating spicules forming a globular network, or two or more concentric networks. Dorataspis, Sphaerocapsa, Lychnaspis.
Family Diploconida Haeckel (1862). Order Prunophracta Haeckel (1887). Again
hke the foregoing, but with the eight spicules of the two polar whorls either extended
or abbreviated. Diploconus, Hexaconus.
The
198]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Order 4. Monopylaria Haeckel in Jenaische Zeitschr. 15: 422 (1882)
Order Afowopy/^^n Hertwig Org. Radiolar. 133 (1879).
Legion Nassellaria with orders Plectellaria and Cyrtellaria, and six suborders,
.
Haeckel in Rept. Voy. Challenger Zool. vol. 18 (1887).
Legion Nassellaria with sublegions Plectellaria and Cyrtellaria and orders Nassoidea, Plectoidea, Stephoidea, and Cyrtoidea, Haeckel Radiolarien
Teil
H
(1887).
Order Monopylida Delage and Herouard Traite Zool. 1: 215 (1896).
Suborder Nassellaria Doflein.
Suborder Monopylaria Minchin Protozoa 256 (1912).
Order Mo7zop};/ga Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 218 (1913).
Suborder Monopylea Kudo Handb. Protozool. 261 (1931).
Suborder Monopylina Hall Protozoology 218 (1953).
This order is distinguished by a central membrane with one opening, or with a
single circular field of pores. From this opening or field as a base, there extends into
the central capsule a large conical body (apparently a bundle of protoplasmic fibers)
called the porocone. The skeleton varies from none to highly elaborate; it does not
in any form consist of separate spicules. Its symmetry is dorsiventral, not radial.
These skeletons are well known as microfossils.
In this group, under the name of legion Nassellaria, Haeckel placed twenty-six
families. Other authors recognize about a half dozen.
Family Nassellida Haeckel (1887). Skeleton none. Cystidium.
Family Plectonida Haeckel (1887). Family PlectidaYiztcktl (1882), not based
on a generic name. Skeleton consisting of three arms radiating from a point opposite
the mouth of the central capsule; sometimes with a fourth forming a caltrop.
Triplagia.
Family Stephanida Haeckel (1887). Family Stephida Haeckel (1882), not based
on a generic name. Skeleton including a ring in the sagittal plane, often with a basal
tiipod and with branches and crossbars. Lithocircus, Zygostephanus. This family is
well represented by microfossils as far back as the Cambrian.
Family Eucyrtidina Ehrenberg 1847. Family Polycystina Ehrenberg in Abh.
Akad. Wiss. Berlin ( 1838) 128 ( 1839), not based on a generic name. Families Halicryptina and Lithochytridina Ehrenberg 1847. Family Cyrtida Haeckel (1862).
Order Cyrtoidea, with twelve families, Haeckel (1887). Skeleton a more or less basket-shaped network; the root cyrt- in many of the names is Greek KupTr|, a fishing
basket. Lithocampe, Cryptocalpis, Eucyrtidium, Theoconus, Dictyoconus, and many
other genera. This group is common as Mesozoic and Cenozoic microfossils, occurring
mixed with diatoms and silicoflagellates.
Family Spyridina Ehrenberg 1847. Family Spyrida Haeckel (1882). Order
Spyroidea, with four families, Haeckel (1887). The skeleton divided by sagittal
grooves into two lobes.
Family Cannobotryida Haeckel (1887). Family Botrida Haeckel (1882), not
based on a generic name. Order Botryoidea, with three families, Haeckel ( 1887) The
:
.
skeleton divided by three or
Order
5.
more longitudinal grooves
Phaeosphaeria Haeckel
into as
in Sitzber. Jenaische Gess.
many
lobes.
Med. Naturw. 1879:
156(1879).
Phaeodariae,
with
orders
Phaeoconchia Haeckel op.
Phaeocystia,
cit.
Phaeogromia,
Phaeosphaeria.
and
Phylum Protoplasta
[199
Order Tripyleen Hertwig Org. Radiolar, 133 (1879).
Order Phaeodaria Haeckel in Jenaische Zeitschr. 15: 470 (1882).
Legion Phaeodaria and orders Phaeocystina, Phaeosphaeria, Phaeogromia, and
Phaeoconchia Haeckel in Rept. Voy. Challenger Zool. vol. 18 (1887).
Order Tripylea Doflein.
Suborder Tripylaria Minchin Protozoa 256 (1912).
Suborder Tripylea Kudo Handb. Protozool. 263 (1931).
Suborder Tripylina Hall Protozoology 218 (1953).
In this order, the central capsule is of isobilateral symmetry, having a rather
small main opening (astropyle) at one end and two smaller openings (parapyles)
at the other. The openings are located on projections of the central capsule membrane; inside of each, the protoplasm is so differentiated as to appear to be a conical
bundle of
fibers with the apex at the opening (in contrast to the preceding order, in
which the base of the conical structure is at the opening) A mass of variously colored
bodies, supposedly excreted from the central capsule, lies in the extracapsular cytoplasm about the astroplyle. The skeletons consist in part of organic matter and are
.
not well preserved as fossils.
Borgert (1896, 1900) described nuclear division in Aulacantha. A very large
number of chromosomes, a matter of several hundred, form a plate which splits into
two; the two plates move apart in a body of differentiated cytoplasm, but no definite
spindle, and no centrosomes, were seen. The margins of the plates draw apart faster
than the middles, with the effect that the plates become saucer-shaped, then bowlshaped, and finally globular, after which nuclear membranes form about them. While
the nucleus divides, the central capsule membrane becomes constricted by longitudinal grooves so placed that each daughter central capsule membrane receives
one parapyle and an astropyle formed from half of the original astropyle. The rudi-
ments of additional parapyles are first seen as granules in the intracapsular cytoplasm. Each granule grows slightly and becomes "hat-shaped," and migrates so as
to come into contact with the central capsule membrane at the point appropriate for
the development of
its
second parapyle.
Later, Borgert (1909) described a process in
which the nucleus divides repeatedly,
producing many. The divisions are mitotic, with small numbers of chromosomes,
perhaps twenty; the eventual products become the nuclei of gametes. There are reports, in part illustrated with photographs, of similar processes in family Thalassicollida (Hacker, 1907; Huth, 1913). According to Hollande (in Grasse, 1953) the
small nuclei are those of a parasitic dinoflagellate, Solenodinium. Le Calvez (1935)
found Coelodendrurn to produce zoospores with a pair of unequal simple flagella.
They resemble cells of Cryptomonas or of Bodo.
Haeckel's legion Phaeodaria was of fifteen families. These have been maintained
by the generality of authors.
A. Skeleton none or of distinct spicules; cells usually nearly spherical.
Family Aulacanthida [Aulacanthidae] Haeckel (1879). Aulacantha.
Family Astracanthida [Astracanthidae] Hacker. Spicules more or less thorny at
the distal ends. Aulactinium.
B. Skeleton spherical or of two concentric spheres, with no main opening.
Family Aulosphaerida Haeckel (1862). Aulosphaera.
Family Cannosphaerida [Cannosphaeridae] Haeckel (1879). Cromodromys.
Family Sagosphaerida Haeckel (1887).
C. Skeleton with a distinct main opening, either nearly spherical, radially symmetrical, or distinctly dorsiventral.
—
The
200]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Family Castanellida [Castanellidae] Haeckel (1879). Skeleton nearly globular
with numerous pores. Castanidium.
Family Circoporida [Circoporidae] Haeckel (1879). Like the foregoing, but with
the pores gathered about the bases of radiating spines. Circoporus.
Family Tuscarorida Haeckel (1887). The main pore on an extended neck, the
skeleton accordingly flask-shaped. Tuscarora. Tuscarilla.
D. Shell strongly dorsiventral.
Family Challengerida [Challengeridae]
J.
Murray. Shell
finely
Chal-
pitted.
lengeron.
Family Medusettida Haeckel (1887). Shell smooth or with small
Medu-
spines.
setta.
E. Shell bilaterally divided into two parts.
Family Concharida [Concharidae] Haeckel (1879).
Family Coelodendrida Haeckel (1862). The shell bearing extensive branched
appendages. Coelodendrum.
Class 5.
SARKODINA
(Hertwig and Lesser)
Biitschli
Sarkodina Hertwig and Lesser in Arch. mikr. Anat. 10 Suppl. 43 (1874).
Class Sarkodina Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1, 1 Teil: Inhalt 1882).
Class, subclass, etc., Rhizopoda Auctt.; class, subclass, etc. Sarcodina Auctt.
(
Amoeboid organisms without
flagellate stages, the
pseudopodia of the character
of lobopodia; without skeletons, without or with shells of various materials.
Fig.
39
Chaos Protheus:
a, b, cells
carolinensis by Wilson (1900);
c,
x
25, after the original figures of
Pelomyxa
mitotic figure x 2,000 after Short (1945).
Phylum Protoplasta
[201
Hertwig and Lesser took note that the name Rhizopoda was originally applied to
organisms such as Miliola, which have rhizopodia; they proposed the name Sarkodina for all amoeboid organisms, with Rhizopoda as a subordinate group. Among
examples of Sarkodina which are not Rhizopoda, they listed first Difflugia, which
may accordingly be considered the standard genus.
The Sarkodina as here presented are not assumed to be a natural group. Their
common characters are probably the outcome of degeneration, by which organisms of
diverse evolutionary origins have lost their distinctions.
This assemblage
presence of
shells.
is
obviously and superficially divisible into two by the absence or
The
resulting groups are construed as orders.
Order 1. Nuda Schultze 1854.
Family Amoebaea Ehrenberg Infusionthierchen 125 (1838).
Order Lofco^a Carpenter 1861.
Order Gymnamoebae Haeckel Gen. Morph. 2: xxiv (1866).
Order AmoebinaKtnt Man. Inf. 1: 27 (1880).
Suborder Amoebaea
Biitschli in
Bronn. Kl.
u.
Ord. Thierreichs
1:
176 (1880).
Order Gymnamoebida Delage and Herouard (1896).
Order Chaidea Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 170 (1913).
Subclass Amoebaea and order Amoebida Calkins Biol. Prot. 335, 337 (1926).
Order Amoebaea Kudo Handb. Protozool. 204 (1931).
Sarkodina without shells. The type is the common amoeba, Amiba diffluens.
1 Protoplasts not tending to form pseudoplasmodial communities.
2.
Free-living
2.
1.
Entozoic
3.
Amoebaea.
MAYORELLroA.
TnECAMOEBroA.
4.
Hyalodiscida.
5.
ENDAMOEBroA.
Family
6.
Labyrinthulida.
Family
7.
Guttulinacea.
Family
Family
Family
Family
Family
1.
2.
Protoplasts assembling and acting in unison
in
pseudoplasmodial communities.
2.
Parasitic in plants
2.
Predatory on bacteria, in air on moist
surfaces; mostly producing complicated
fructifications
Amoebaea Ehrenberg
Infusionsthierchen 125 (1838). Family Amoebidae Bronn 1859. Family Chaidae Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 171 (1913). Family
Family
1.
Chaosidae Chatton in Grasse Traite Zool. 1, fasc. 2: 58 (1953). The ordinary freeamoebas. SchaeflFer (1926) limited the family to forms which produce numerous indefinite granular pseudopodia. There has been much confusion as to the identity of the species. There are apparently two species of common large amoebas:
1. Chaos Protheus L. Syst. Nat. ed. 12: 1326 (1767) {Volvox Chaos L. Syst. Nat.
ed. 10: 821. 1758. Vibrio Protheus O. F. Muller Verm. Terr, et Fluv. 1: 45. 1773.
Pelomyxa carolinensis Wilson in American Nat. 34: 535. 1900. Chaos chaos Stiles).
Schaeffcr identified Pelomyxa carolinensis as the original Chaos Protheus L. It is
living
exceptionally large, being macroscopically visible, and
is
multinucleate.
Surely,
sound nomenclature will apply to this species the name which Linnaeus gave it.
2. Amiba [Amoeba] diffluens (O. F. Muller) Ehrenberg Infusionsthierchen 127
(1838) [Proteus diffluens O. F. Muller Animac. Infus. 9. 1786; there is an older genus
202
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
divergens Bory Diet. Class. Hist. Nat. 1: 261. 1822; Amoeba Proteui
appears that MiiUer intended to rename the Chaos Protheus of Linnaeus;
that in 1773 he actually did so; but that in 1786 he applied another new name to a
different organism. Ehrenberg's amended spelling Amoeba, although in general use,
is not valid as that of a generic name; as Schaeffer suggests, the word may be used as
Proteus;
Amiba
Leidy).
It
a
common
noun.
Amiba
diffluens
is
uninucleate; large, but not visible to the naked
eye.
In nuclear division in the common amoebas the nuclear membrane disappears.
There are many chromosomes in a blunt-ended spindle. Short (1945) noted a peculiar twisting of the spindle of Chaos Protheus.
Schaeffer included in the present family three further genera, Trichamoeba Fromentel, Polychaos Schaeffer, and Metachaos Schaeffer. Here, in ignorance of its
relationships, another well-known genus is assigned to this family.
Pelomyxa, typified by P. palustris Greeff 1874) resembles Chaos Protheus in being
exceptionally large, macroscopically visible, and multinucleate. It is definitely different from Chaos Protheus in manner of movement (King and Jahn, 1948) and in
chemical characters (Andressen and Holter, 1949).
Minute amoebas moving by means of a single pseudopodium are called Vahlkamp(
,
They are believed to have swimming stages with paired equal flagella. If so, they
do not belong to the present group, but perhaps to the plant kingdom.
Family 2. Mayorellida [Mayorellidae] Schaeffer in Publ. Carnegie Inst. 345: 47
(1926). Producing numerous brief conical pseudopodia, but moving by a single large
clear one. Mayorella, Pontifex, and several other genera proposed by Schaeffer;
Dactylosphaerium Hertwig and Lesser; Dinamoeba Leidy? The last may be the nonflagellate stage of Chactoproteus Stein.
Family 3. Thecamoebida [Thecamoebidae] Schaeffer op. cit. 83. Amoebas with a
tough pellicle simulating a shell, moving by the outflow of clear protoplasm at the
anterior margin. Thccamocba Fromentel. Rugipes Schaeffer.
Family 4. ''Hyalodiscida [Hyalodiscidae] Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 182 (1913).
Family Cochliopodiidae de Saedeleer in Mein. Mus. Roy. Hist. Nat. Belgique 60: 5
fia.
(1934). Similar to the foregoing but without the tough pellicle. Commonly domeshaped, with a row of small pseudopodia projecting from the margin. Hyalodiscus
and Cochliopodium of Hertwig and Lesser, together with certain genera of Schaeffer.
Family 5. Endamoebida [Endamoebidae] Calkins. Entozoic amoebas.
Endamoeba Leidy is found in cockroaches and termites. The nucleus contains no
karyosome, but many separate granules; in mitosis, definite chromosomes arc formed
(twelve in E. disparita), but there
desmose
is
is
apparently no centrosome; at
least,
no
intra-
seen (Kirby, 1927).
Entamoeba Casagrandi and Barbagello, named at nearly the same time as the foregoing and regrettably similarly, is widely distributed in invertebrate and vertebrate
hosts. E. dysenteriae (Councilman and Lafleur) Craig {Endamoeba histolytica Schaudinn) is a serious pathogen to man, the cause of amoebic dysentery. E. coli and E.
gingivalis are believed to be harmless commensals. The fully mitotic character of
nuclear division in these organisms was established by Kofoid and Swezy ( 1921, 1922,
1925). The nucleus contains a small karyosome and an intranuclear centrosome. Mitosis begins with division of the centrosome into two, which remain connected, as they
draw
apart, by a stainable strand, the intradesmose (the term
The karyosome
is
of
Kofoid and Swczy,
breaks up into chromosomes, six in the species mentioned.
Spindle fibers connecting these to the centrosomes have been seen; Child (1926)
1921).
Phylum Protoplasta
[
203
found that the two halves of the spindle swing apart as the centrosomes move apart
compass being extended. There is no doubt that Endamoeba and
like the legs of a
Entamoeba
are generically distinct.
Endolimax, lodamoeba, and Councilmania occur chiefly in vertebrates and include
species commensal in man. A refined technique is required to discern the characters
by which they are distinguished from Entamoeba. Karyamoebina Kofoid and Swezy
(1924, 1925,) another commensal in man, resembles Vahlkampfia in details of the
mitotic process, and probably does not belong to the present group. Hydramoeba,
usually listed in the present family, is not an entozoic organism, but a predator on
Hydra.
Family 6. Labyrinthulida [Labyrinthuhdae] Haeckel ex Doflein Protozoen 47
(1901). There is a single genus Labyrinthula Cienkowski, and probably only one
species, L. macrocystis, parasitic in green and brown algae and in the marine seed
plant Zostera. The uninucleate cells are spindle-shaped. These cells send out from
one or both ends fine filaments which writhe in the water. The filaments from different cells coil together and produce "tracks" along which the cells glide. The tracks
form a network on which the cells may be scattered or gathered into clusters; or the
cells may abandon their tracks and generate new ones. The nature of the tracks is
not clear. Possibly they are pseudopodia, on which the cells move by absorbing them
at one end while generating them at the other. Young (1943) found Labyrinthula
remarkably indifferent to variations in temperature, reaction, and salinity.
Family 8. Guttnlinacea [Guttulinaceae] Berlese in Saccardo Sylloge 7: 325 (1888)
Tribe Dictyosteliaceae Rostafinski Vers. 4 (1873). Sorophoreen with families Guttulineen and Dictyostcliaceen Zopf Pilzthiere 131-134 (1885). Families Guttulineae
and Dictyosteliaceae Berlese op. cit. 451. Sappiniaceae Olive in Proc. American Acad.
37: 334 (1901). Families Sappiniidae, Guttulinidae , and Dictyostelidae Doflein
1909. Family Acrasidae Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 177 (1913). Suborder Acrasina
Hall Protozoology 228 ( 1953 ) Amoeboid cells predatory on bacteria and other scraps
of organic matter, in air on moist surfaces, commonly on dung. The cells are capable
of assembling and moving and going into a resting stage in unison. These organisms
have generally been included among the Mycetozoa; the resemblance is superficial.
More recently than Olive, Raper (1940) and Bonner (1944) have surveyed the
group and studied the behavior. Three families have been maintained, but one appears
sufiicient to accommodate the seven genera and approximately twenty species.
Cells of Sappinia are binucleate. They do not necessarily assemble in clusters; a
single cell may secrete a stalk, by which it is raised into the air, where it rounds up
and becomes dry. Alternatively, small numbers of cells may assemble and secrete a
common stalk. The dry cells are "pseudospores" they are capable of resuming activity without casting off a wall. Hartmann and Nagler (1908) described a peculiar
sexual process in Sappinia diploidea.
Guttulina and Guttulinopsis produce larger clusters of resting cells than Sappinia
.
:
does; in Guttulina the resting cells are said to be walled spores.
Acrasis produces fruits, solitary or clustered, of the form of uniseriate rows of spores
terminal on stalks consisting of rows of dead
cells.
Distyostelium produces fruits consisting of a column of dead cells bearing a globu-
and Coenenia produce slightly more elaborate
Raper and Bonner saw that the
amoeboid active cells, having devoured the available food, gather into a disk-shaped
mass which may exceed a millimeter in diameter. Wilson (1953) found syngamy,
lar cluster of spores; Polys phondylium
fruits of the
same general
nature. In Dictyostelium,
The
204]
—
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Labyrinthula as a parasite in cells of Ectocarpus Mitchelliae x 1,000
(1944). b. Cell of Labyrinthula x 2,000 after Young (1943).
c, d^ Sappinia pedata, active cell and cyst, x 1,000 after Dangeard ( 1896)
e, f, Sappinia pedata, cluster of pseudospores x 100 and single pseudospore x 1,000 after
Olive (1902). g, h, Guttulina scssilis, cluster of pseudospores x 100 and individual
pseudospores x 1,000 after Olive (1902). i-n, Dictyostelium discoideum x 10 after
Bonner (1944) i, the pseudoplasmodium; j, it heaps itself up; k, falls toward the
Fig. 40.
after
a,
Karling
.
:
o, p. Fruits of
1, m, again heaps itself up and becomes a fruit, n.
Dictyostelium mucoroides; q, of Polysphondylium violaccum; x 10, after Bonner,
light
op.
and creeps;
cit.
Phylum Protoplasta
[
205
karyogamy, and meiosis to occur at this point; the chromosome number (n) is 7. The
disk changes into a column which bends, and then falls, toward the light, and afterward creeps some distance in the same direction. When this has happened, the foremost cells, being those which were originally in the middle of the disk-shaped mass,
pile up again to form a sterile stalk perhaps one millimeter tall; the cells behind them
crawl up the stalk to form the globular mass of spores; the hindmost, being those
which were last to arrive at the disk-shaped mass, remain behind to form a flange
about the base of the stalk.
Lampramoebae Haeckel Gen. Morph. 2: xxiv (1866).
Testacea Schultze 1854, non L. (1758).
Thecamoebae Haeckel.
Conchulina Cash and Hopkinson British Freshw. Rhizop. 1: 37 (1905).
Suborder Testaceolobosa de Saedeleer in Mem. Mus. Roy. Hist. Nat. Belgique
Order 2.
Order
Order
Order
60: 5 (1934).
Order Testacida Hall Protozoology 241 (1953).
Order Testaceolobosa Deflandre in Grasse Traite Zool. 1, fasc. 2: 97 (1953).
Amoeboid organisms without known flagellate stages, bearing shells and producing
lobopodia. Various organisms producing rhizopodia or filopodia, traditionally associated with these, have here been placed among Rhizopoda or Heliozoa,
by de Saedeleer (1934) and Grasse (1953). Deflandre (in Grasse, op.
as suggested
cit.)
distin-
guishes several families beside the following:
1.
Shell without secreted scales of
silica.
Family 1. Arcellina.
Family 2. Difflugiida.
1. Shell with secreted scales of silica
Family 3. NEBELroA.
Family 1. Arcellina Ehrenberg Infusionsthierchen 129 (1838). Family Arcellidae
2.
Shell of uniform secreted material
2.
Shell with
imbedded
grains of sand
Schultze 1876. Arcella, etc.
Family 2. Difflugiida [Difflugiidae] Taranek 1881. Difflugia, etc.
Family 3. Nebelida [Nebelidae] Schouteden 1906. Nebela, the shell beset with
circular siliceous scales; Quadrula, the scales square; etc.
Chapter XI
PHYLUM FUNGILLI
Phylum
7.
FUNGILLI Haeckel
Order Gregarinae Haeckel Gen. Morph. 2: xxv (1866).
Class Sporozoa Leuckart Parasiten der Menschen 1, part 1: 241 (1879).
Phylum FuNGiLLi Haeckel Syst. Phylog. 1: 90 (1894).
Class Sporozoaria Delage and Herouard Traite Zool. 1 254 (1896).
Subphylum Sporozoa Calkins Biol. Prot. 249 (1926).
Essentially unicellular organisms (the cells sometimes becoming multinucleate or
:
multiple, but remaining undifferentiated except in connection with reproduction);
commonly with
a writhing motion; reproduction usually involving complicated sexual
processes and the production of walled cysts (spores); flagella absent except some-
times on the sperms; parasitic in animals.
The
class
Sporozoa
as originally published
groups: (a) the gregarines,
first
by Leuckart included the following
described by Dufour (1826) as
name Gregarina Dufour (1828)
beetles:
the generic
crowds;
(b, c) coccidians
and psorosperms,
worms
parasitic in
refers to their occurrence in
different sorts of parasites discovered in
by J. Miiller and Retzius (1842); and, doubtfully, (d) Miescher's tubes
{Mieschersche Schlduche), being certain abnormal growths in muscles. The cause of
the pebrine disease of silkworms, which Nageli (in Caspary, 1857) had named A^osema Bomhycis, belongs to this group but was not originally included, presumably
because Nageli had considered it to be a schizomycete.
It has subsequently become known that almost every species of the animal kingdom
is parasitized by one or more species of Fungilli. Not all of these parasites, but many,
are serious pathogens. Thus the Fungilli are a very important group and very num-
fishes
erous. The number of species duly
some two or three thousand; this is
registered by
name and
description
surely a small fraction of the
is
apparently
number which
exist.
demonstrated when
Theobald Smith (1893) showed that the Texas fever of cattle, caused by Babesia
bige?7iina, is transmitted by ticks.
All who have classified the Sporozoa or Fungilli have recognized two prime subordinate groups, the first including the gregarines and coccidians, the second including the organisms which were formerly called psorosperms (Myxosporidia or Neosporidia). In addition to the main bodies of these groups, there are certain organisms
which have resisted definite placement and have been assigned sometimes to one of
The
transmission of disease by biting arthropods was
first
main groups, sometimes to the other, and sometimes to additional main groups.
In the present work the two main groups are treated as classes and the groups of
uncertain relationship are included in the first. Clearly, this class is to bear the name
of Sporozoa Leuckart. Schaudinn's famous paper on parasites in the owl (1903) is
apparently authority for the widely entertained opinion that this class is artificial,
representing at least two lines of descent. In fact, the class appears natural with the
the
some of the poorly known groups. The second class is marked
by positive specialized characters and is clearly natural; it is not clearly certain that
the second class is related to the first, and it is accordingly not certain that the phylum
possible exception of
is
natural.
The
classes are distinguished as follows:
Phylum
1.
1.
Fungilli
[
Producing resting cells protected by cell walls
and not containing polar capsules; or not
producing resting cells
Producing resting cells whose walls consist
(at least usually) of modified cells, and
which contain "polar capsules" enclosing
coiled threads
Class
1.
SPOROZOA
Class Sporozoa Leuckart Parasiten der
207
Class
1.
Sporozoa.
Class
2.
Neosporidia.
Leuckart
Menschen
1,
Abt. 1: 241 (1879).
Subclass Gregarinida Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs
1,
Abt. 1: Inhalt
(1882).
Class Sporozoaria and subclass Rhabdogeniae Delage and Herouard Traite Zool.
1: 254, 255 (1896).
Legion Cytosporidia Labbe in Thierreich 5: 3 (1899).
Subclass Telosporidia Schaudinn in Zool. Jahrb. Anat. 13: 281 (1900).
Class Telosporidia Calkins Biol. Prot. 421 (1926).
Class Telosporidca with subclasses Gregarinidia, Coccidia, and Haemosporidia;
and class Acnidosporidea Hall Protozoology 270, 271, 290, 301, 323 (1953).
Sous-emhranchement des Sporozoaires, with classes Gregarinomorpha, Coccidiomorpha, and Sarcosporidia Grasse Traite Zool. 1, fasc. 2: 545 et seq. (1953).
Fungilli which produce resting cells protected by cell walls and not containing
polar capsules; or else do not produce resting cells.
The nature of the organisms included in this class may be made clear by an
example, Goussia Schubergi (Schaudinn) comb. nov. [Coccidium Schubergi Schau-
dinn, 1900).
Goussia is parasitic in centipedes. Infection is by certain spindle-shaped cells which
have a certain power of movement, and which make their way to the interior of cells
of the epithelium of the gut of the host. Each parasitic cell grows and becomes
globular; it becomes multinucleate; when the host cell dies and breaks up, the parasitic cell divides into many spindle-shaped cells which infect other cells of the gut
epithelium.
Alternatively, a sexual process takes place. Some of the parasites emerge into the
gut and do not divide but function as eggs. Others produce numerous cells which
are more slender than the usual infective cells. These become flagellate, each producing two unequal flagella, and function as sperms.
The zygote becomes walled. Its nucleus divides twice. Each of the four resulting
nuclei becomes the nucleus of a walled cyst. The cysts are apparently formed by a
process of free cell formation: not all of the cytoplasm of the zygote is included in
them. In each cyst, two of the spindle-shaped infective cells are produced, again apparently by free cell formation, excluding a part of the cytoplasm. The zygotes, with
their included cysts and infective cells, pass out with the feces of the host. If a centipede eats one of them with its food, the infective cells are released to perform their
function.
No feature of the life cycle described is peculiar to the Sporozoa as contracted
with other nucleate organisms. Nevertheless, largely by the authority of Schaudinn,
specialists in Sporozoa use an extensive system of special terms. A familiarity with
these is necessary to anyone reading about Sporozoa. They include the following:
The
208]
Classification of
Sporozoite, the original infective
Lower Organisms
cell.
Trophozoite, the vegetative individual.
Nucleogony, the multiplication of nuclei.
Plasmotomy, multiplication of cells.
Meront or
schizont, the individual in process of dividing to
produce further infec-
tive cells.
Schizogony or agamogony, the process of dividing to produce infective cells.
Merozoite or agamete, the infective cell produced from a trophozoite.
Gamogony, the production of gametes.
Macrogamete and microgamete mean, of course, egg and sperm; macrogametocyte
and microgametocyte mean the cells which produce them.
Sporoblast or sporont, the zygote or other cell inside of which walled cysts are
produced.
Sporogony, the sexual cycle which produces walled cysts.
Sporulation, the production of walled cysts by asexual processes.
Spore, the walled cyst.
Trophozoite (or schizont) and sporont are regarded as the alternating main stages
in the life cycle of Sporozoa. The point at which meiosis occurs is uncertain. In the
Fig. 41.
—Life cycle
of Goussia Schubergi after
Schaudinn (1900)
:
a, sporozoites;
merozoites; g, young gamctocytes;
h. i, development of egg; j-m, development of sperms; n, fertilization; o, zygote
(sporoblast); p-t, development of spores; u, germination of spores.
b-d, developing trophozoites; e, schizogony;
f,
Phylum
Fungilli
[
209
monocystid gregarines, Muslow (1911) and Calkins and Bowling (1926) described
number immediately before gametogenesis, quite as
in typical animals. They described reduction as accomplished by a single process of
nuclear division; to current cytological theory, this is an impossibility. Dobell and
Jameson (1915), Jameson (1920), and Dobell ( 1925), dealing with organisms of the
same group and also with the coccodian Aggregata, found meiosis to occur immediately after karyogamy. They conclude that all nuclei except those of zygotes are haploid, as among most of the lower plants.
The coccidian group, to which Goussia belongs, is here treated as primitive among
Sporozoa because the sperms of this group are flagellate. The detailed structure of
the flagella is unknown; they appear to resemble those of Bodo and Cryptobia. This
fact conveys the best available hint as to what may have been the evolutionary origin
of the Sporozoa. The majority of Sporozoa, having gametes which are alike or
scarcely differentiated, appear to be derived from forms with markedly differentiated
a reduction of the chromosome
gametes.
The Sporozoa
are classified primarily by whether or not the trophozoites are intraby the occurrence or non-occurrence of asexual reproduction; and by the
production or non-production of spores in the sense in which the term is used in
deaHng with this group, that is, of walled cysts.
cellular;
1.
Sexual reproduction, so far as
it
is
known,
involving oocytes which produce single large
eggs and spermatocytes which produce from
few
to
many
sperms; the organisms multiply-
ing also asexually.
2.
The gametocytes
3.
3.
not attached in pairs.
Producing walled spores
Not producing walled spores.
4. Intracellular in
erythrocytes
Producing macroscopic bodies
in muscle
The gametocytes pairing before gametogenesis; sperms few; with or without
walled spores
Order
1.
Oligosporea.
Order
3.
GYMNOSPORiDnoA.
Order
4.
Dolichocystida.
Order
2.
Polysporea.
Order
Order
5.
8.
Schizogregarinida.
Haplosporidhdea.
Order
6.
Monogystidea.
Order
7.
Polycystidea.
4.
2.
1.
Gametes
tiated,
slightly differentiated or undifferen-
produced by the gametocytes
in
more
or less equal, usually large, numbers.
2.
The organisms
multiplying also asex-
ually.
2.
3.
Spores producing several sporozoites.
3.
Each spore producing one
The organisms
3.
sporozoite.
Cells elongate
parts
.
.
.
.
.
not multiplying asexually.
Cells not elongate
and divided
into
two parts
3.
.
and divided into two
1. OUgosporea Lankester in Enc. Brit. ed. 9, 19: 855 (1885).
Tribe Monosporees and groups Disporees and Tetrasporees Schneider
Zool. Exp. Gen. 9: 387 (1881).
Order
in
Arch.
The
210]
Classification of Loivcr
Organisms
Coccididae, with tribes Monosporea and Oligosporea, Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u.
Ord. Thierreichs 1: 574, 575 (1882).
Order Monosporea Lankester op. cit. 854.
Suborder Coccididae Delage and Herouard Traits Zool. 1 278 1896).
Order Coccidiidia Lahhe in Thierreich 5: 51 (1899).
Order Coccidiomorpha Doflein Protozoen 95 (1901).
Order, suborder, or tribe Eimeridea Leger in Arch. Prot. 22 80 (1911).
Order Eimeriidea, suborders Selenococcidinea and Eimeriinea, and tribe Eimerioidae, Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 237, 238 (1913).
Subclass Coccidiomorpha and order Coccidia Calkins Biol. Prot. 435, 436
(
:
:
(1926).
Suborder Eimeridea Reichenow in Doflein Lehrb. Prot. ed. 5, 3: 921 (1929).
Order Eimeriida Hall Protozoology 297 (1953).
Sporozoa living mostly within epithelial cells of their hosts, multiplying asexually,
the gametocytes not pairing before gametogenesis, the macrogametocytes producing
single eggs and the microgametocytes numerous flagellate sperms, the zygotes usually
producing definite walled spores.
The organisms of the present order and the following are called coccidians.
Schneider ( 1881 ) classified them by the number of spores produced in each sporoblast
(i.e., zygote), either one, two, four, or many. Biitschli and Lankester gave due form
to Schneider's system. As between their names Monosporea and Oligosporea, the one
which included the typical example Eimeria is here chosen in preference to the one
which had page priority. Leger classified these organisms primarily by the number of
sporozoites per zygote, and distinguished eight families. Here, with the authority,
for example, of Reichenow (1929) and Kudo (1931), these are reassembled as one
family to which are appended three others including markedly exceptional or poorly
known
forms.
Family 1. Eimerida [Eimeridae] Minchin 1903. The typical coccidians. In
Eimeria Schneider {Coccidium Leuckart) the zygote produces four firmly-walled
spores each with two sporozoites. The spores are symmetrically ellipsoid and release
the sporozoites through a terminal pore. Species of this genus parasitize many vertebrate hosts, rabbits, sheep, goats, swine, dogs, cats, chickens, turkeys, frogs, and
fishes. Some of the other genera differ from this as follows: Jarrina, attacking birds,
is distinguished by spores bearing the pore at the end of a brief neck. Goussia, in centipedes, has spores whose walls split lengthwise into two valves. The zygote of Isospora, in mammals, including man, produces two spores each with four sporozoites;
that of Caryospora, in snakes, produces one spore with eight sporozoites. Barrouxia,
in various invertebrates, produces from each zygote numerous bivalved spores each
containing one sporozoite.
Family 2. Dobelliida [Dobelliidae] Ikeda. The single known species, Dohcllia binuclcata, occurs in a siphuncuHd worm. It exhibits an exception to the characters
of the order: the male and female gametocytes become attached to each other; the
male gametocyte, however, produces many sperms, as in the generality of the order.
Family 3. Aggregatida [Aggrcgatidae] Labbe in Thierreich 5: 6 ( 1899). This family is distinguished by hetcroocism. In Aggrcgata Ebcrthi, vegetative growth and
multiplication take place in crabs. When these are eaten by squids, the cells either
develop into single eggs or else divide to produce many sperms. The zygote produces
about twenty bivalved spores which pass out with the feces and infect crabs. The
number of sporozoites per spore is variable. There are several other species of Ag-
Phylum
[211
Fungilli
gregata. Various other genera, Merocystis, Hyaloklossia, Myriospora, Caryotropha,
etc., attacking mussels, polychaet worms, and other marine invertebrates, are as-
signed to this family although their life cycles are not fully known.
Family 4. Selenococcidiida [Selenococcidiidae] Poche in Arch. Prot. 30:
238
(1913) includes the single species Selenococcidium intermedium Leger and Dubosq
(1910) in the lobster. The vegetative cell is long and slender, and asexual reproduction
is
regularly by transverse division into eight.
Order
2. Polysporea Lankester in Enc. Brit. ed. 9, 19: 855 (1885).
Tribe Polysporea Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1: 576 (1882).
Suborder Haemosporidae Delage and Herouard Traite Zool. 1 284 ( 1896)
Order Haemosporidiida Labbe in Thierreich 5: 73 (1899).
Order, suborder, or tribe Adeleidea Leger in Arch. Prot. 22: 81 (1911).
Tribe Adeleoidae Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 239 (1913).
Order Adeleida with suborders Adeleina and Haemogregarinina Hall Protozoology 296 (1953).
It is characteristic of this order that pairs of reproductive cells, essentially merozoites, which are to become gametocytes, become attached to each other. The macrogametocyte becomes converted into a single egg; the microgametocyte produces,
:
at least usually, four sperms.
Family 1. Adeleida [Adeleidae] Mesnil in Bull. Inst. Pasteur 1: 480 (1903).
Chiefly in invertebrates, either in the gut epithelium or in the kidneys, testes, or other
organs. Zygote usually producing definite spores, these numerous (commonly twenty
or more), thin-walled, without definite dehiscence mechanism, with two or four
Adelea and Adelina chiefly in centipedes; Klossia and Orcheobius in
sporozoites.
snails; Klossiella in the
kidney of the mouse; Legerella in various arthropods, the zy-
gote not producing spores but numerous sporozoites.
Family 2. Haemogregarinida [Haemogregarinidae] Liihe in Mense Handb. Tropenkrankheiten 3: 205 (1906). Heteroecious, with vegetative multiplication in the
tissues of a vertebrate host. The infection spreads to the erythrocytes of the host, and
blood-sucking invertebrates are infected by these. Sexual reproduction occurs in the
invertebrate host. Production of spores is suppressed; the zygote produces numerous
sporozoites. Haemogregarina Danilewski (1885; Drepanidium Lankester 1882, non
Ehrenberg 1861)
in turtles, frogs, fishes, transmitted
by leeches; Hepatozoon in ro-
dents, Karyolysus in lizards, transmitted by mites.
Order
3.
Gymnosporidiida Labbe
in
Thierreich 5: 77 (1899).
Suborder Gymnosporidae Delage and Herouard Traite Zool. 1: 284 (1896).
Suborder Haemosporidia Doflein Protozoen 121 (1901).
Order Haemosporidia Calkins Biol. Prot. 441 (1926).
Subclass Haemosporidia with orders Plasmodiida and Babesiida Hall Protozoology 301, 302, 306 (1953).
In this order the vegetative cells occur in vertebrates and infect the erythrocytes.
Sexual reproduction, so far as it has been discovered, occurs in blood-sucking arthropods. The gametocytes do not become associated in pairs; the male gametocytes produce numerous spirochaet-like sperms by a process of budding. In the zygote, the
nucleus undergoes a series of divisions, after which numerous naked uninucleate
sporozoites are budded off from the surface. There are no walled spores.
The
212]
Classification of
The name Haemosporidia, commonly
Lower Organisms
applied to this order, appears to belong by
priority to the preceding.
Schaudinn (1903) was disposed to connect this order with the trypanosomes, while
connecting the coccidians with Bodo and Cryptobia. This view has been entertained
by Liihe (inMense, 1906), Woodcock (1909), and Leger (1910). In spite of authority
thus good, it appears far-fetched. The Gymnosporidiida are of the same general nature as the Aggregatida, Adeleida, and Haemogregarinida.
—
a-m. Life cycle of Plasmodium compiled from various sources: a, infecan erythrocyte by a sporozoite; b-e, trophozoites, plasmotomy, and mero-
Fig. 42.
tion of
spermatocyte; g, oocyte; h, production of sperms; i, fertilization; j, k, production of sporozoites in cells of the gut epithelium of the mosquito; 1, sporozoites;
n-q. Stages of division
sporozoites entering the salivary gland of the mosquito,
zoites; f,
m
of cells of Babesia bigemina in erythrocytes of cattle
The Gymnosporidiida
Family
1.
are organized,
somewhat
x 2,000 after Dennis (1930).
arbitrarily, as three families.
Halteridiida [Halteridiidae]Hartmann and Jollos 1910. Family Leu-
Hartmann and Jollos. Family Hacmoproteidae Doflcin. Hacmoproteus
Kruse {Haltcridium Labbc) occurs in reptiles and birds. Vegetative growth and reproduction occur in tissue cells. Some of the merozoites infect erythrocytes, and are
believed to become gametocytes, and to develop no further unless swallowed by some
blood-sucking arthropod. In the best known example, H. Columbae of pigeons
cocytozoidae
Phylum
(Argao, 1908), the alternate host
is
a
fly.
Fungilli
In the gut of the
[
fly,
213
the spermatocytes pro-
duce the elongate sperms as outgrowths. The zygotes make their way into the wall of
the gut of the fly, grow, and produce very numerous sporozoites. These migrate to the
salivary gland, from which they are injected into pigeons.
Leucocytozoon attacks birds; its cells become fairly large in certain blood cells
which become colorless and spindle-shaped.
Family 2. Plasmodida [Plasmodidae] Mesnil in Bull. Inst. Pasteur 1: 480 (1903).
The malaria organisms, differing from Haemoproteus in that they multiply in the
erythrocytes of their hosts. With a few obscure exceptions, the species are construed
as a single genus Plasmodium. Three species attack man; they have perhaps done
mankind more injury than any comparable group of living creatures. Several comparatively poorly known species attack apes and monkeys. The alternate hosts of all
species are mosquitoes of the genus Anopheles.
The vegetative individuals complete their growth within erythrocytes of their hosts
in more or less definite periods of time, and undergo multiple division; the erythrocytes then break up and release the merozoites. The chill and fever of malaria are associated with the destruction of erythrocytes. In the ordinary form of malaria, called
tertian malaria, development requires forty-eight hours, and the chill and fever occur
every other day. Another form, called malignant tertian or tropical malaria, exhibits
the same rhythm; it is distinguished by details of the appearance of the infected
erythrocytes. In the third form of malaria in man, called quartan, development requires 72 hours, and the chill and fever occur every third day.
The course of development in the mosquito is quite like that of Haemoproteus
Columbae
in the
fly.
Some
of the parasites inside the erythrocytes are gametocytes;
each female gametocyte in an erythrocyte swallowed by a mosquito develops into a
single egg, while each male gametocyte buds off several spirochaet-like sperms. The
fertilized eggs are able to move. They break into the epithelium of the gut of the
mosquito, grow into large globes, and become multinucleate; their protoplasts divide
into numerous masses of protoplasm each of which buds off large numbers of sporozo-
The
body cavity of the mosquito, migrate to
and are injected into whatever animal the mosquito may bite.
The scientific names usually applied to the three species which cause human
malaria are not valid by priority. Extensive synonymy is given by Sabrosky and
Usinger, in their application to the International Commission on Zoological Nomenclature for action arbitrarily maintaining the current names (1944), and in the
report by Hemming (1950) of the action of the Commission.
Certain structures in the erythrocytes of malaria patients were first recognized as
parasites by Laveran, 1880, who, in 1881, named them Oscillaria malariae. The
ites.
sporozoites are released into the
the salivary gland,
organism is believed to have been that of malignant tertian or tropical malaria. The
word Plasmodium, properly designating a certain type of body, was applied by Marchiafava and Celli 1885, in the combination Plasmodium malariae, believed also
originally to have designated the agent of malignant tertian malaria. Feletti and
Grassi, 1889, introduced the generic name Haemamoeba, with two species, H. vivax, the agent of tertian malaria, and H. malariae, that of quartan malaria; it is believed that the latter epithet was applied under the misapprehension that this was the
organism which Marchiafava and Celli had named. It appears that Liihe, 1900, is
responsible for the currently used names:
Plasmodium vivax, the organism of tertian malaria;
P. malariae, that of quartan malaria;
The
214]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
P. falciparum, that of malignant tertian.
In order that a great mass of literature may be read without confusion, it is expedient that these names be arbitrarily maintained. The International Commission
of Zoological Nomenclature has duly taken action to this effect.
Family 3. Babesiida [Babesiidae] Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 241 (1913). Family
Theileridae du Toit in Arch. Prot. 39: 94 (1918). Minute intracellular parasites
transmitted by arthropods; sexual reproduction unknown. Theileria Bettencourt et al.
causes a fever of cattle in Africa; the parasites multiply in the tissue cells and spread
to the ery'throcytes,
ton)
is
by which
ticks are infected.
Babesia Stercovici [Piro plasma Pat-
similar, but the parasites multiply in the erythrocytes. B.
bigemina causes
the Texas fever of cattle.
The minute nucleus of Babesia bigemina is largely filled by a single granule, a
karyosome. This is connected by a rhizoplast to an extranuclear granule which has
been identified as a blepharoplast, although no flagellum is present. In nuclear division, as described by Dennis (1930), the blepharoplast divides; the rhizoplast splits;
the nucleus widens, the karyosome becoming a rod; karyosome, nucleus, and cell
undergo constriction. No chromosomes are seen.
If Bartonella bacilliformis, the agent of the disease variously known as verruga
peruana, Oroya fever, or Carrion's disease, is not a bacterium, perhaps it may be
placed in or near
Order
4.
this family.
Dolichocystida Delage and Herouard Traite Zool.
1
:
289 (1896).
Sarcosporidia Balbiani 1882.
Class Sarcosporidia Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs
(1882).
Subclass Sarcocystidca Lankester in Enc. Brit. ed.
9,
1,
Abt.
1
:
Inhalt
19: 855 (1885).
Order Sarcosporidia Doflein Protozoen 214 (1901).
Order Sarcocystidca Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 245 (1913).
Subclass Sarcosporidia Calkins Biol. Prot. 461 (1926).
characters are those of the single family and genus:
The
Family Sarcocystida [Sarcocystidae] Poche
in Arch. Prot. 30: 245
(1913).
Sarcocystis Lankester produces the Mieschersche Schlauche, macroscopically visible
bodies, globular, fusiform, or filiform, of dimensions
up
to several millimeters, in
muscles of animals. The several supposed species, from mice, sheep, swine, deer, etc.,
are not morphologically distinguishable. Miescher observed these things in mice, in
which they are called Sarcocystis Muris; material from swine is called S. Miescheriana.
The visible body is a mass
The mass originates as
host.
of cells, the
whole walled by modified muscle of the
a single cell which divides repeatedly; the ultimate
division products are crescent-shaped uninucleate reproductive cells. Erdmann (1910)
observed the infection of epithelial cells of the gut of mice. Each infective cell grew
and divided into several, v\'hich made their way, or were carried, to the muscles, where
they gave rise to the Mieschersche Schlauche. Crawley (1914, 1916), on the other
hand, found the infective cells to be gametocytes. In cells of the gut epithelium of
may be converted as wholes into eggs, or else may give rise to numerous
elongate sperms. These conflicting observations could be explained by an alternation
the host, they
of sexual
and asexual generations, but the point
is
not established.
Phylum
Fungilli
215
[
Order
5. Schizogregarinida Calkins Biol. Prot. 433 (1926).
Amoebosporidies Schneider.
Amoebosporidia Labbe in Thierreich 5: 120 (1899).
Suborder ^mo^feo^/^oncfm Doflein Protozoan 171 (1901).
^iuhordev Schizocystinea Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 233 (1913).
Suborder Schizogregarinaria Reichenow in Doflein Lehrb. Prot. ed.
(1929).
Orders Archegregarina and Neogregarina Grasse Traite Zool.
665 (1953).
1,
5, 3
fasc. 2:
:
872
622,
The Sporozoa previously considered, particularly those of the first two orders, are
called coccidians; those of the present order and the two which follow are called
gregarines. The latter are characterized (not without exceptions) by inter- instead
of intra-cellular active stages, and by the production of numerous gametes, alike or
not strongly differentiated, from paired scarcely differentiated gametocytes. The
present order includes the gregarines which exhibit asexual reproduction. They are
a rather miscellaneous assemblage.
Family 1. Schizocystida [Schizocystidae] Leger and Duboscq in Arch. Prot. 12:
102 (1908). Family Monoschizae V^eiser in ]our. Protozool. 2: 10 (1955), including
the two following families. In marine worms and other invertebrates. The sporozoites
enlarge in the host and become multinucleate individuals which reproduce freely by
producing uninucleate buds. Some of these buds continue the infection directly;
others become attached in pairs, each pair secreting a common cyst wall. Each of the
individuals in the cyst become multinucleate and buds off numerous uninucleate
gametes. The zygotes become walled spores which are cast out with the feces of the
host, to infect others which ingest them. Each produces eight sporozoites. Schizocystis, Siedleckia.
Family 2. Seleniida [Seleniidae] Brasil in Arch. Prot. 8: 394 (1907). In marine
worms. Vegetative individuals notably long and slender; spores spiny, with four
sporozoites. Selenidiu7n, Meroselenidium.
Family 3. Merogregarinida [Merogregarinidae] Fantham 1908. Family Caulleryellidae Keilin. Merogregarina, Caulleryella, Tipulocystis.
Spirocystida [Spirocystidae] Calkins Biol. Prot. 435 (1925). Family
Duboscq in Arch. Prot. 35: 210 (1915). In earthworms.
Spores containing a solitary sporozoite which escapes through a pore. Spirocystis.
Family 5. Ophryocystida [Ophryocystidae] Leger and Duboscq in Arch. Prot. 12:
102 (1908). Family Amoebosporidiidae Brasil (1907), not based on a generic name.
Family
4.
Spirocystidees Leger and
Family Dischizac Weiser in Jour. Protozool
2: 10 (1955). In Ophryocystis
Schneider
(Leger, 1907), the vegetative individuals, attached to the walls of the Malpighian
grow and become multinucleate and send out branches whose ends
develop into additional individuals. Eventually, different individuals become attached in pairs. Each of these individuals buds off a single uninucleate gamete. The
remaining protoplasm of the gametocytes forms a protective sheath around the zygote,
which becomes a single spore with eight sporozoites.
tubules of beetles,
Order 6. Monocystidea Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1: 574 (1882).
Order Haplocyta Lankester in Enc. Brit. ed. 9, 19: 853 (1885).
Suborder Acephalina Labbe in Thierreich 5 37 1899)
Organisms of the character of gregarines, not multiplying asexually, the vegetative
individuals not elongate and divided into serial parts.
:
(
The
216]
The genus which
are
common
is
best
Classification of
known
The
in earthworms.
is
Lower Organisms
Monocystis Stein, including several species which
grow within epithelial cells of the seminal fun-
cells
and their nuclei reach considerable sizes without dividing. At maturity,
they escape into the seminal vescicles, where they form pairs, each pair secreting a
common cyst wall. The pairing and encystment were observed, more definitely of the
related genus Zygocystis than of Monocystis, by Stein (1848). The nuclei of the
nels; they
Several observers, as Brasil (1905) and Mulsow (1911); also, as
Jameson (1920) and Noble (1938); have observed peculiarities in
the first nuclear division. The peculiarities amount to this, that the large nucleus
breaks up and, for the most part, undergoes dissolution, leaving a small number of
definite chromosomes to undergo normal mitosis in a spindle. Repeated subsequent
divisions are of normal character. The numerous nuclei thus produced become those
of gametes which are budded oflF from the surfaces of the gametocytes. This was first
paired
cells divide.
to related genera,
observed by Wolters (1891). The gametes from the respective paired cells are presumably always of different mating types, and are usually visibly differentiated,
larger and smaller. Each zygote becomes a spindle-shaped walled spore; the enucleate
remainder of the gametocytes provides nourishment during their development. Each
spore produces eight sporozoites.
The number of known species of Monocystidea is of the order of 150. The majority
occur in annelid worms; others attack flatworms, echinoderms, insects, tunicates, and
other invertebrates. Bhatia (1930) distinguished twelve famiHes which are here
merely listed.
A. The two ends of the spore alike.
Family 1. Monocystida [Monocystidae] (Biitschli) Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 236
(1913). Family Monocystiden Stein in Arch. Anat. Phys. 1848: 187 (1848). Monocystidae Biitschli 1882). Monocystis, etc.
Family 2. Rhynchocystida [Rhynchocystidae] Bhatia in Parasitology 22: 158
(
(1930). Rhynchocystis.
Family
3.
Stomatophorida [Stomatophoridae] Bhatia op.
Choanocystis,
Family
Family
Family
Family
Family
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
cit.
159.
Stomatophora,
etc.
Zygocystida [Zygocystidae] Bhatia op. cit. 160. Zygocystis, Pleurocystis.
Akinetocystida [Akinetocystidae] Bhatia op. cit. 160. Akinetocystis.
Syncystida [Syncystidae] Bhatia op. cit. 161. Syncystis.
Diplocystida [Diplocystidae] Bhatia op. cit. 161. Diplocystis, Lankcsteria.
Schaudinellida [Schaudinellidae] Poche in Arch. Prot.' 30: 236 (1913).
Schaudinella.
B.
The ends
of the spores differentiated.
Family 9. Doliocystida [Doliocystidae] Labbe in Thierreich 5: 33 (1899). Family
Lecudinidae Kamm. Lxcndina Mingazzini {Doliocystis Legcr).
Family 10. Urosporida [Urosporidae] Woodcock 1906. Family Choanosporidae
Dogiel. Gonospora; Lithocystis; Urospora, the spores with long tails; Ceratospora;
Pterospora, the spores with longitudinal flanges.
Family
n..s.
11.
Ganymedida [Ganymcdidae]
J. S.
Iluxlcy in Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci.
55: 169 (1910). Ganymcdcs.
Family
12.
Allantocystidae [Allantocystidae] Bhatia op.
cit.
163. Allantocystis.
Order 7. Polycystidea Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thicrreichs 1: 578 (1882).
Order Grcgarinae Haeckel Gen. Morph. 2: xxv (1866), the mere plural of a
generic name.
Phylum
Subclass Gregarinida Biitschli op.
cit.
[217
Fungilli
Inhalt (1882).
Order Septata Lankester in Enc. Brit. ed. 9, 19: 853 (1885).
Order Brachycystida, suborder Gregarinidae, and tribe Cephalina or Folycystina
Delage and Herouard Traite Zool. 1: 255, 256, 269 (1896).
Order Gregarinida Labbe in Thierreich 5: 4 (1899).
^uhordtr Eugregarinaria Doflein Protozoen 160 (1901).
Order Gregarinoidca Minchin (1912).
Suborder Gregarininea and tribe Gregarinoidae Poche
in Arch. Prot. 30:
234
(1913).
Subclass Gregarinida, order Eugregarinida, and suborder Cephalina Calkins Biol.
Prot. 422,
The
428 (1926).
and divided by more
more than two) parts; not
typical gregarines, the vegetative cells elongate
definite constrictions into
two
(or, occasionally,
ducing asexually.
Typical gregarines occur chiefly in
or less
repro-
The vegetative cell consists of an anattachment and a posterior portion (deutomerite), containing the nucleus, lying in the gut cavity of the host. Both parts have
insects.
terior portion (protomerite) serving for
a thick outer layer,
less
commonly
differentiated
upon the protomerite
elaborate knob, the epimerite. Longitudinal
present.
The
cells
fibrils,
presumably
into a
more or
contractile, are
writhe actively.
commonly found in pairs, one member attached to the epithelium of the gut, the other to the posterior end of the first. This arrangement is
produced by active self-placement on the part of the second member. When both are
mature, they take common action to produce a globular cyst. The protoplasts remain
distinct until both have become multinucleate, after which they produce numerous
gametes. In some forms, as Nina, studied by Goodrich (1938), all of the gametes
migrate from one cell, recognizably male, into the other, the female cell; the male
The
individuals are
empty and is compressed or crushed by the growth of the zygotes in the
female cell. The zygotes are spores, usually fusiform, and usually producing sporozoites by eights. In Gregarina and Gamocystis, an inner layer of the cyst wall is so
modelled as to form tubes (sporoducts) running from the surface to the interior.
When the spores are ripe, the sporoducts become extroverted and the spores are extruded through them in uniseriate rows. In connection with this behavior, the spores
cell is left
have flat ends like barrels.
Family 1. Stenophorida [Stenophoridae] Crawley
1903.
Protomerite a
mere
knob. Stenophora.
Gregarinida [Gregarinidae] Greene 1859. Family Gregarinarien Stein
187 (1848). Gregarines which are without epimerites
and are not notably elongate. There are about a dozen genera. Cysts without sporoducts: Hirmocystis, Hyalospora, Cnemidospora. Cysts with sporoducts, the spores
barrel-shaped: Gregarina, Gamocystis. The earliest observations of Sporozoa were by
Dufour ( 1826) who, studying the anatomy of insects, found them in the gut of beetles.
He took them for worms and illustrated an individual with an epimerite, which he
took for a sucker. Later (1828) he applied names, Gregarina conica to the form first
seen, G. ovata to a form without an epimerite found in the forficule, i.e., in an orthopteran. The former does not belong to the genus Gregarina as subsequently construed;
it appears to be a member of the family Actinocephalida. Gregarina ovata should be
regarded as the type of Gregarina, but the genus has usually been interpreted by G.
Family
2.
in Arch. Anat. Phys. 1948:
,
cuneata, which Stein observed in cockroaches.
The
218]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Family 3. Didymophyida [Didymophyidae] Wasilewski 1896. Family Didymophyiden Stein (1848). Like the foregoing, but the cells extremely elongate. Didymophyes.
Family
The
Acanthosporida [Acanthosporidae] Labbe
4.
in Thierreich 5: 27 (1899).
spores with polar or equatorial bristles. Acanthospora.
Stylocephalida [Stylocephalidae] Ellis 1912. Family Stylorhynchidae
30, based on a generic name which is a later homonym. Epimerite
elongate with a small terminal knob. Stylocephalus.
Family 6. Actinocephalida [Actinocephalidae] Wasilewski 1896. Epimerite with
thorns. Numerous genera, Sciadophora, Acanthorhynchus, Actinocephalus, Hoplorhynchus, Pileoccphalus, etc.
Family 7. Menosporida [Menosporidae] Labbe op. cit. 29. Epimerite with a long
Family
Labbe
op.
5.
cit.
branched and bearing appendages. Menospora.
Family 8. Dactylophorida [Dactylophoridae] Wasilewski 1896. Epimerite distally broadened, clinging to the host epithelium by means of numerous filiform prostalk, distally
Dactylophorus, Nina [Pterocephalus), etc.
9. Porosporida [Porosporidae] Labbe op. cit. 7. Heteroecious: in Porospora,
the gregarinoid stage occurs in crabs and the production of spores occurs in mussels.
The spores contain a single sporozoite and open through a pore.
cesses.
Family
Order 8. Haplosporidiidea Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 178 (1913).
Order Aplosporidies Caullery and Mesnil 1899.
Order aplosporidies Caullery and Mesnil in Arch. Zool. Exp. Gen.
H
ser. 4,
4:
104 (1905).
Order Haplosporidia Auctt., the mere plural of a generic name.
Subclass Haplosporidia Hall Protozoology 326 (1953).
Unicellular intracellular parasites, the cells becoming multinucleate and multiplying by fragmentation, producing walled spores which germinate by releasing the
protoplasts as single sporozoites.
The
vegetative body
is
of the type properly called a
plasmodium. The nuclei and
the process of division, described by Granata (1914) are characteristic. The resting
nucleus contains an "axial rod" as well as a nucleolus-like body. In mitosis the axial
rod becomes converted into an intranuclear spindle. Individual chromosomes have
not been seen; the chromatin gathers in a mass about the middle of the spindle (the
figures are curiously diatom-like). The mass of chromatin, the nucleolus-like body,
and the entire nucleus, divide by constriction; the ends of the spindle persist as the
axial rods of the daughter nuclei. Eventually, the plasmodium secretes a thin wall
and the protoplast divides into uninucleate naked cells. Granata found that these
cells are gametes, and that conjugation takes place among gametes produced by the
same plasmodium. The zygotes become walled spores which germinate by casting
off a circular
understood,
operculum and releasing the contents.
we may suppose
If the life cycle
is
correctly
that these organisms are degenerate gregarinos.
In the present state of knowledge,
it
will be as well to treat the typical haplo-
sporidians as a single family:
Family Haplosporidiida [Haplosporidiidae] Caullery and Mesnil in Arch. Zool.
Exp. Gen. ser. 4, 4: 106 (1905). Families Bartramiidae and Coelosporidiidae Caullery and Mesnil op. cit. 107. Characters of the order. Haplosporidium (spores with
appendages at both ends) and Urosporidium (spores with a single appendage) attack
Phylum
chiefly
[219
Fungilli
annelid worms. Bartramia attacks rotifers; Ichthyosporidium
is
a serious
parasite of fishes; Coelosporidium attacks cockroaches.
The
following family, of uncertain position,
may
tentatively be associated with the
Haplosporidiidea
Family Metchnikovellida [Metchnikovellidae] Caullery and Mesnil in Compt.
Rend. Soc. Biol. 77: 527 (1914), Ann. Inst. Pasteur 33: 214 (1919). Secondary
parasites, intracellular in gregarines; cells naked at first, with very minute nuclei,
which become numerous, later converted into walled cysts of characteristic form, the
protoplasts undergoing division into uninucleate infective cells. Mctchnikovella,
Amphiamblys, Amphiacantha.
Class 2.
Myxosporidia Biitschli
Subclass Myxosporidia
NEOSPOR!D!A (Schaudinn)
in Zool. Jahresber. 1880:
Biitschli in
Bronn Kl.
Calkins
162 (1881).
Ord. Thierreichs
u.
1,
Abt.
1
:
Inhalt
(1882).
Subclass Amoebogeniae Delage and Herouard Traite Zool. 1: 291 (1896).
Subclass Neosporidia Schaudinn in Zool. Jahrb. Anat. 13: 281 (1900).
Order Cnidosporidia Doflein Protozoen 177 (1901).
Class Cnidosporidia Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 224 (1913).
Class Neosporidia and subclass Cnidosporidia Calkins Biol. Prot. 445, 448 (1926).
Subphylum Cnidosporidia Grasse Traite Zool. 1, fasc. 1: 129 (1952).
Class Cnidosporidea Hall Protozoology 311 (1953).
Fungilli
whose
resting cells contain polar capsules;
are walled, at least usually,
and, in most examples, release a single infective cell.
As a general rule, the vegetative bodies of Neosporidia are plasmodia, i.e., naked
multinucleate bodies, usually freely capable of asexual reproduction by internal or
by a layer of modified
external budding.
cells;
An entire small plasmodium may become converted into one
may be cut out internally and produced continually. The
spores, or the spores
or two
spores,
two better-known orders, are structures formed from several cells; they
are not homologous with the spores of the proper Sporozoa. In most examples, only
one of the cells involved in the formation of a spore is fertile, and only one infective
protoplast is released on germination. Of the sterile cells, one or more become converted into the structures called polar capsules. These resemble the nematocysts of
they contain a coiled hollow thread capable of swift extroversion.
coelenterates
Extroversion occurs during germination. Its significance is unknown. The presence
at least in the
:
of polar capsules marks the class as a natural group.
Three orders are recognized:
1. Spores covered by two valves formed from
accessory cells
1.
accessory cells
1.
Order
1.
Phaenocystes.
Order
2.
Actinomyxida,
Order
3.
Cryptocystes.
Spores covered by three valves formed from
Spores very minute, with a continuous
brane
mem-
Order 1. Phaenocytes Gurley in Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. 11
Order N^maiocj^^ffrfa Delage and Herouard Traite Zool.
Order Phaenocystida Labbe in Thierreich 5 85 (1899).
:
:
410 (1893).
1:
291 (1896).
The
220]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Order Cnidosporidia Doflein Protozoen 177 (1901).
Order Myxosporidia Calkins Biol. Prot. 449 (1926).
Most species of this order parasitize fishes, living either in internal cavities or in
the tissue cells; fewer than a dozen species are known from miscellaneous other animals, amphibia, reptiles, insects, and worms. Most of these parasites are not
extremely injurious.
The infective protoplast which issues from a spore is, at least usually, binucleate.
The nuclei fuse and the fusion nucleus divides repeatedly as the plasmodium grows.
Fig.
43.— Diagram
of the life cycle of
Myxoceros Blennius
after E.
Noble (1941).
In the examples which are believed to be more primitive, the plasmodia are freely
capable of budding, and the mature plasmodia are rather small and are converted as
wholes into single or paired spores. In the remaining examples, the plasmodia do not
multiply by budding, but produce spores continually.
Noble (1941) described the mitotic process. There is a rather large intranuclear
centrosome, which divides, the daughter centrosomes moving to opposite sides of
the nuclear cavity. Four chromosomes appear; this is apparently constant throughout
The nuclear membrane and the centrosomes disappear. No spindle has
been seen. The chromosomes divide, and the daughter chromosomes move apart and
melt into two masses. The masses swell, a nuclear membrane appears about each,
and a centrosome appears inside of each.
the order.
Phylum
The spore-forming
[221
Fungilli
structure (sporoblast)
is
a protoplast with several nuclei;
it is
whole small plasmodium, or half of one, or a protoplast cut out endogenously within a plasmodium. Two of the nuclei are set apart in cells which become
converted into the valves of the spore. Two or four are set apart in cells which become
converted into polar capsules. Two, of which it is established that they have two
chromosomes each, are the nuclei of the infective protoplast.
In a review of the literature as to Hfe cycles, Noble (1944) remarks as follows. "A
survey of the literature reveals that there is little agreement on the details of nuclear
changes in the Myxosporidia. Some authors maintain that the cycle is mainly haploid,
others have described a diploid cycle. Some reports indicate that there are two reduction divisions and two zygotes in one cycle. When only one zygote is reported the
reduction division in one case occurs just before fertilization, in another case it occurs
just after fertilization. Some authors have maintained that there is no sexual process."
Noble's own conclusions include the following. The organisms are diploid at most
stages. The meiotic divisions are among those by which the sporoblast becomes multinucleate. The two haploid nuclei of the spore, which unite after germination, are
derived from a single diploid nucleus. Authors who have described fusions of protoplasts, or transfers of nuclei from one protoplast to another, have had no evidence
beyond an understandable unwillingness to accept fusions of sister nuclei.
Nearly two hundred species of the present order are listed in the monograph of
either a
Kudo
(1920), who established three suborders.
A. Valves conical, spores biconic (suborder Eurysporea Kudo).
Family 1. Myxoceratida nom. nov. Family Ceratomyxidae Doflein Protozoen 182
(1901), based on a generic name which is a later homonym. Characters of the suborder. Myxoceros nom. nov. [Ccratomyxa Thelohan 1892, non Ceratiomyxa Schroter
ever
names
are
homonymous without being
1889;
if
Some
thirty-five species; the type
is
absolutely identical, these are.)
M. sphaerulosa (Thelohan) comb,
nov.;
studied mitosis in M. Blennius (Noble) comb. nov. Leptotheca, Myxoproteus,
Noble
War-
dia, Mitraspora.
B. Valves hemispherical, spores spherical (suborder Sphaerosporea Kudo)
Family 2. Chloromyxida [Chloromyxidae] Gurley in Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. 1 1
418 (1893). Chloromyxees Thelohan in Bull. Soc. Philomath. Paris ser. 8, 4: 176
(1892). Chloromyxea Braun in Centralbl. Bakt. 14: 739 (1893). With four polar
capsules.
Chloromyxum.
Family S.Sphaerosporida [Sphaerosporidae] Davis 1917. With two polar capSphaerospora, Sinuolinea.
C. Valves saucer- or boat-shaped, spores disk-shaped or fusiform
sules.
(suborder
Platysporea Kudo )
Family 4. Myxidiida [Myxidiidae] Gurley op. cit. 420. Myxidiees Thelohan op.
cit. 175. Myxidiea Braun I.e. Myxidium, Sphaeromyxa, Zschokkella.
Family 5. Coccomyxida [Coccomyxidae] Leger and Hesse 1907. Coccomyxa.
Family 6. Myxosomatida [Myxosomatidae] Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 230 (1913).
Myxosoma, Lentospora.
Family 7. Myxobolida [Myxobolidae] Gurley op. cit. 413. Myxobolees Thelohan
op. cit. 176. Myxobolea Braun I.e. Myxoboliis, Henneguya, Hoferellus.
Order
2.
Actinomyxida
Stole 1911.
This order includes about a dozen parasites in annelid worms. A plasmodial stage
and asexual reproduction are believed not to occur; the infective protoplast grows
222
into
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
an individual whose one or two nuclei remain undivided until the commenceof the ill-understood process by which the complicated spores, with three valves
ment
and three polar capsules, are produced.
Family 1. Tetractinomyxida [Tetractinomyxidae] Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 231
(1913). Family Haploactinomyxidae Granata in Arch. Prot. 50: 205 (1925). Spores
subglobular, with a single binucleate sporozoite. Tetractinomyxon.
Family 2. Synactinomyxida [Synactinomyxidae] Poche I.e. Family Euactinomyxidae Granata I.e. Family Triactinomyxidae Kudo Handb. Protozool. 314 (1931).
Spores producing eight or more sporozoites. S phaeractinomyxon and Neactinomyxon,
the spores subglobular. Synactinomyxon, with two of the valves protruding as considerable horns, the whole horse-shoe shaped. Triactinomyxon and Hexactinomyxon,
all three valves drawn out into long horns, the whole caltrop- or anchor-shaped.
Order
Cryptocystes Gurley in Bull. U.
3.
S.
Fish
Comm.
11
:
409
(
Microsporidies Balbiani 1882.
Order Microsporidiida Labbe in Thierreich 5: 104 (1899).
The parasites of this order attack chiefly arthropods and fishes.
asexually and produce serious epizootics.
The
spores are very minute,
1893).
They multiply
and the
details
which they are formed are unknown. A polar capsule is present in
each spore (those of Telornyxa have two polar capsules). The polar capsules are not
visible in living material, but are revealed by treatment with alkali.
In Kudo's monograph of this order ( 1924) more than 150 species are treated. They
form four families.
Family 1. Glugeida [Glugeidae] Gurley op. cit. 409. Glugeidees Thelohan op. cit.
174. Glugeidea Braun I.e. Family Nosematidae Labbe in Thierreich 5: 104 (1899).
Family Plistophoridae Doflein Protozoen 205 ( 1901 ) Spores oval, ovoid, or pyriform.
Nosema Bombycis Nageli causes the pebrine disease of silkworms; another species of
Nosema causes an epizootic of honeybees. Gliigea attacks several species of fishes.
Gurleya, Thelohania, Duboscquia, Plistophora, etc.
Family 2. Coccosporida [Coccosporidae] Kudo Handb. Protozool. 323 (1931).
Family Cocconemidae Leger and Hesse 1922, based on a generic name which is a
later homonym. Spores globular. Coccospora Slavinae (Leger and Hesse) Kudo, in
of the processes by
,
.
the oligochaet
Family
3.
exceedingly
worm
Slavina.
Mrazekiida [Mrazekiidae] Leger and Hesse 1922. Spores elongate,
minute, resembling bacteria. Mrazekia, Octospora, Spironema,
Toxonema.
Family
4.
Telomyxida [Telomyxidae] Leger and Hesse 1910. Telornyxa glugeibody of the larva of Ephemera vulgata, producing ellipsoid spores
formis, in the fat
with a polar capsule at each end.
Chapter XII
PHYLUM CILIOPHORA
Phylum
CIUOPHORA
8.
Class Infusoires
(Doflein)
nomen phylare novum
Lamarck Phil. Zool. 1: 127 (1809).
Lamarck Anim. sans Verteb. 1: 392 (1815).
Class Infusoria
Isis 1818: 1008 (1818).
Class Polygastrica Ehrenberg Infusionsthierchen p.* (1838).
Class Protozoa Goldfuss in
Hauptgruppe Protozoa, class Infusoria, and order Stomatoda Siebold in Siebold
and Stannius Lehrb. vergl. Anat. 1 3, 10 1848).
Subkingdorn Archezoa Perty Kennt. kl. Lebensf. 22 (1852), not phylum Archezoa
:
(
Haeckel (1894).
Order Ciliata Perty op. cit. 137.
Subphylum Infusoria Haeckel Gen. Morph.
2: Ixxviii (1866).
Phylum Infusoria Haeckel Syst. Phylog. 1: 90 (1894).
Subphylum Ciliophora Doflein Protozoen 227 (1901).
Dependent organisms, mostly predatory, unicellular but mostly of complicated
structure; swimming by means of cilia at least at some stage of life; mostly with
nuclei of two types in each
Vorticella, the only genus
cell.
named by
Linnaeus,
is
to
be considered the type.
These organisms are the typical examples of the accepted groups Infusoria and
Protozoa. The name Infusoria, referring to creatures which appear in infusions, is
said to have been introduced by Ledermiiller, 1763, or Wrisberg, 1764. As a scientific
name
it
has status from
its
Protozoa, applied to a class in
original publication by Goldfuss,
of Infusoria. In treating the group as a
name, and takes up
The
as such the
Lamarck (1815). The name
is a later synonym
phylum, one finds it necessary to apply a new
application to a class by
its
name which
essential point in the definition of the
Doflein applied to
phylum
is
the
as a
it
word
cilia.
subphylum.
Cilia are cell-
being smaller in proportion to the
cell which bears them, more numerous, and distributed generally on the surface. In
Loeffler's classic investigation (1889), they were found to bear solitary terminal ap-
organs of the same nature as
flagella, differing in
pendages; by subsequent terminology, they are acroneme. Doflein appears to have
been mistaken in emphasizing the difference between flagella and cilia; there is no
fundamental difference. A verbal distinction, nevertheless, is expedient: the applica-
term ciHum is to be restricted to two things, (a) the swimming organelles
and (b) moving fibrils protruding abundantly from certain epitheHal cells of animals. Botanical usage, which treats cilium and flagellum as synonyms,
is unsound. The structures which in botany have been called cilia are definitely
tion of the
of the Ciliophora,
flagella.
The
cells of
Ciliophora reach moderately large
sizes;
those
of the classroom
example Paramaecium attain a length of 0.25 mm. and are perceptible to the naked
eye. The cells of some of the Ciliophora are the most highly compHcated of all individual cells. In addition to the cilia, the cell organs which require discussion are the
pellicle, neuromotor fibrils, trichocysts, structures involved in nutrition, contractile
vacuoles, and nuclei.
The cell has a firm ectoplasm or pellicle which gives it a definite form. The cilia
spring from basal granules imbedded in the pellicle. In simpler examples, the cilia
224
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
are essentially uniform and uniformly distributed on the surface. Other examples
upon part or all of the surface, but bear a variety of strucMembranelles are triangular appendages conciHa; undulating membranes represent long rows; cirri represent
are without separate cilia
tures
which
consist of coalescent cilia.
sisting of brief
tufts.
rows of
The organisms
of class Tentaculifera bear cilia only in the juvenile condition.
At maturity they bear extensible tubular structures called
which they capture free-swimming ciUates and absorb their
The
and
tentacles,
basal granules of the cilia are linked together by a system of
fibrils
make up
by means of
contents.
fibrils;
the cilia
the neuromotor apparatus. This term was coined by Sharp, in his
study of Diplodinium (1914). The neuromotor fibrils form a highly elaborate network, not connected with the nucleus, as in flagellates, but to a central structure,
apparently regulative, called the motorium. The motorium of Diplodinium is a massive
body near the anterior end; that of the
tintinnids
is
fairly large in
proportion to
the cells (Campbell, 1926, 1927); that of Paramaecium, presumably a comparatively
primitive organism, is a minute body lying near the dorsal side of the cytopharynx
(Lund, 1933).
Imbedded in the pellicle, in addition to the neuromotor fibrils, there are certain
minute ellipsoid bodies called trichocysts. These, when the cell is irritated, discharge
their contents in the form of elongate rods or threads. Their mechanism and effect
are not understood.
In most Ciliophora, each cell has a mouth and gullet; or better, since these struchomologous with those of animals, a cytostome and cytopharynx. The
tures are not
cytopharynx is a more or less funnel-shaped impression in the cell. It is bounded
by ciliate pellicle; its outer opening is the cytostome; it is closed at the inner
end by a layer of cell membrane directly over fluid cytoplasm. Prey, chiefly bacteria
and small algae, encountered by the organism as it swims, is swept into the cytopharynx by the action of the cilia. When a certain mass of prey has accumulated,
the cell membrane at the inner end of the cytopharynx becomes impressed and undergoes constriction, enclosing the prey in a food vacuole. The material in the food
vacuole undergoes digestion; while this is taking place, movement of the cytoplasm
laterally
carries the vacuole along a definite circuitous course through the interior of the cell.
After some time, the vacuole arrives at a certain point on the pellicle, the anus or
cytoproct, where it discharges its contents and disappears by bursting through the
pellicle.
In freshwater species, each cell contains one or more contractile vacuoles which
appear at definite points and disappear periodically by discharge of their contents
to the exterior. Associated with the proper contractile vacuoles, there may be systems
of "canals" which are in fact additional contractile vacuoles. These structures have
been much studied; there are notable accounts by Day (1930) and Mac Lennan
(1933). When a vacuole has disappeared by discharge, it reappears as one or more
minute vacuoles in the same area: minute bodies of gelled protoplasm turn into sol,
and then become lifeless liquid. The discharge of a "canal" into the proper convacuole occurs by dissolution of the bounding membranes of gelled protoplasm where the two are in contact, followed by contraction of the membrane of the
canal. The proper contractile vacuole discharges by essentially the same mechanism. Its membrane meets and becomes fused with the bounding membrane of the
cell, generally at the end of a brief channel through the pellicle; the combined memtractile
brane breaks, and the membrane of the vacuole contracts.
Phylum Ciliophora
Earlier biologists supposed
225
the contractile vacuole is an excretory mechanism.
purely hydrostatic, to rid the cell of the water which
constantly entering by osmosis. Marine Ciliophora have no contractile vacuoles.
More
is
[
In
probably,
function
its
tliat
is
many members of the
family Opalinoea each cell has many similar nuclei. These
from time to time, by mitosis. Cell division takes place independently of
nuclear division, by transverse constriction, when a certain size has been reached.
divide,
In the generaHty of Ciliophora, each
cell has one or more nuclei of each of two
which are conspicuous, and micronuclei, discerned with difficulty.
Cell division occurs by transverse constriction and is necessarily associated with
nuclear division. The macronucleus becomes elongate and divides by constriction
without any formation of chromosomes; in other words, amitotically. The micronucleus also becomes elongate and divides by constriction. Early observers supposed
this process also to be amitotic. Actually, there appear within the intact nuclear
membrane a spindle and a definite number of chromosomes. Reichenow (editing
Doflein, 1927) compiled the following diploid counts:
types, macronuclei,
Stentor coeruleus
28
Didinium nasutum
16
Chilodon uncinatus
4
Carche Slum poly pinum
16
Turner (1930) found 8 in Euplotes Patella. Thus the chromosome numbers of
Cihophora appear usually to be small powers of 2.
The chromosomes duly undergo division, the daughter chromosomes going to different ends of the nuclear cavity. The nucleus becomes greatly elongate and its membrane presses in from the sides and cuts it in two. Turner observed in the axis of the
spindle of Euplotes a rather small endosome which becomes elongate and undergoes
constriction while the
chromosomes are forming.
Opalina has a sexual process in which the multinucleate cells divide into many
uninucleate gametes. These are sexually differentiated, larger and smaller; they
duly unite in pairs and the zygotes grow and become ordinary multinucleate
individuals.
In the generality of Ciliophora, early observers discovered a sexual process in
cells, apparently undifferentiated, join in pairs but maintain their individ-
which the
uality.
The
uniting cells
Paramaecium, by
become attached
their ventral or
to each other in definite positions: in
mouth-bearing surfaces; in Euplotes, by the left
halves of their broad ventral surfaces; in the ophryoscolecids and various other groups,
by their anterior ends. They remain attached, while continuing to swim, for several
hours, during which an exchange of nuclei takes place, and then resume their separate
life. Calkins (1926) was disposed, contrary to historical usage, to confine application
of the term conjugation to this exceptional form of syngamy.
The nuclear details of conjugation were described by Maupas (1889) and Richard
Hertwig (1889), whose observations have repeatedly been confirmed. When a pair
have joined, their macronuclei divide several times; the ultimate fragments are
digested and disappear. The micronuclei also divide, concurrently in both conjugants, a fixed number of times, in Paramaecium three, in Euplotes four. These divisions include a meiotic process. Most of the haploid nuclei produced are digested;
as a general rule, only one survives to undergo the final division, which is mitotic,
producing in each conjugant two genetically identical haploid nuclei. By this time
a cytoplasmic connection has been established between the conjugants. In Paramaecium, the spindles of the mitotic final nuclear divisions extend through this connection,
226
The
]
when
Classification of
Lower Organisms
complete each protoplast contains two haploid nuclei of difsame result is attained, apparently, by the migration
of one nucleus of each pair. Karyogamy takes place in each conjugant. The cytoplasmic connection is broken and the conjugants separate from each other. During
several subsequent hours, the zygote nucleus undergoes a characteristic number of
divisions, three in Paramaecium. Among the nuclei produced, one usually enlarges
and becomes a macronucleus; others, of the number characteristic of the form, survive
as micronuclei; the remainder are digested.
In Vorticella and its allies, syngamy consists of the complete fusion of a smaller
swimming individual with a larger one attached by a stalk. The nuclear processes
are believed to be essentially as in other ciliates. The reproduction of the Tentaculifera has not been much studied, but here also the nuclear changes are as in the
generahty of ciliates (Noble, 1932).
so that
mitosis
is
ferent origin. In other ciliates the
The
possibility of conjugation
is
limited by the occurrence of mating types. Certain
had suggested the existence of these; the definite discovery was by
Sonneborn, in Paramaecium Aurelia (1937). Results of further study are available
in a symposium edited by Jennings (1940) and in a review by Kimball (1943). To
early observations
current knowledge, then:
Paramaecium caudatum includes four mating types divided into two groups; types
and II conjugate with each other, and types III and IV with each other, but the
two groups are mutually sterile.
Paramaecium Aurelia includes eight mutually sterile groups, each of two mutually
fertile mating types.
Paraviaecium Bursaria includes three mutually sterile groups. The first group is
of four types, each self-sterile but able to conjugate with any other; the second group
is of eight such types, and the third again of four.
Paramaecium. multimicronucleatum is without mating types; any race can conjuI
gate with any other
Euplotes Patella includes
with any other.
The
six
heredity of mating types
dclian heredity. In
mating types
is
one group; each can conjugate
all in
not understood. It
Paramaecium Bursaria group
I,
is
not a matter of simple
Men-
the progeny of a cell of a given
mating type may include after conjugation either two or all four of the mating types.
The mating type of a line becomes fixed in connection with the first or second cell
division after conjugation, at the time that macronuclei are being differentiated; it
is accordingly believed that something in the macronuclei fixes the mating types.
So far as mating types are present, pure lines of ciliates cannot conjugate. Early
attempts to maintain pure cultures failed by death after intervals of some months.
These observations led to speculations that the vitality of protoplasm is limited, and
that sexual reproduction restores it. Woodruff, however, proved it possible to maintain
Parflmagau?n ^urc/m indefinitely without conjugation: he reported (1926) a culture
so maintained for sixteen years, an estimated eleven thousand generations.
The cultures are not thus persistent without nuclear change. At intervals, the macronuclei break up and dissolve, and are replaced by new ones formed by division of the
micronuclei. Woodruff and Erdmann (1914) applied to this process of replacement
term cndomixis. It is not possible that this process is the genetic equivakaryogamy. It is, presumably, the physiological equivalent of conjugation in
of nuclei the
lent of
its
feature of providing
new macronuclei.
Phylum Ciliophora
[
227
Diller (1936) observed in P. Aurelia a different manner of replacement of nuclei,
by autogamy. In this process, the nuclei of a solitary cell go through the preliminaries
of conjugation; two haploid nuclei, sister products of one act of mitosis, unite to form
a zygote nucleus; and this divides in the usual manner to produce micronuclei and
macronuclei. Wichtermann (1939, 1940) observed that two cells, joined as in conjugation, may simultaneously undergo autogamy instead of exchanging nuclei.
In the normal conjugation of ciliates, the gamete nuclei produced in each cell,
being
duced
sister
products of mitosis, are genetically identical; and the zygote nuclei pro-
after interchange are also genetically identical with each other.
Autogamy
is
believed to produce diploid nuclei which are completely homozygous. Thus the sexual
processes of the ciliates tend strongly to limit the variability of the progeny. This is a
peculiar and surprising feature of the group.
The ciliates have attracted experimental study, beyond what has already been
implied, of various functions, including nutrition, inheritance of acquired characters,
and regeneration after injury.
Hall and his associates (1940-1945) have shown that Colpidiinn campylum and
Tetraphymena Geleii (the latter is in their earlier papers called Glaucoma piriformis)
require thiamin and probably riboflavin. Nutritional requirements, rather than such
an entity as vitality, are presumably responsible for the limited life of early attempted
pure cultures. As to minerals, the same scholars demonstrated the necessity of Ca and
Fe: others have demonstrated the necessity of K, Mg, and P.
It has been observed of certain cultures in which the rate of division has been increased by exposure to high temperature that they would continue to divide abnormally rapidly when returned to normal temperatures. The peculiarity disappeared in
individuals which conjugated. By refrigeration or by application of chemicals, there
have been produced "monsters," individuals of abnormal structure, which have reproduced themselves through many generations, and have proved capable eventually of
giving rise to normal individuals. Jollos (1913) designated as Dauermodifikationen,
They are actually
is, enduring changes, modifications of the type described.
acquired characters which can be inherited within limits. It is evident that they are
determined by macronuclei or by cytoplasm, and that they are not in conflict with
the principle that the truly enduring heredity of nucleate organisms Hes in nuclei
that
which divide mitotically.
Balamuth (1940) reviewed the literature of experimental mutilation of Protozoa
and gave a bibliography of 173 titles. Most of the experiments have been performed
on ciliates. The conclusions from them include these, that regeneration of parts artificially cut away takes place with different degrees of facility in different groups,
and that it is effected, if at all, by the same mechanism by which the parts are produced after division or excystment. The less elaborate ciliates, as Opalina and
killed by mutilation, since this allows the fluid inner
cytoplasm to escape. In Stentor, injury to the crown of membranelles results in the
appearance of a new crown of membranelles on the side of the body, followed by its
migration to the injured area. In Stylonychia and Euplotes, destruction of one cirrus
is followed by the appearance, in a certain area of the surface, of the primordia of a
complete set of cirri; the original cirri are absorbed, and the new ones migrate along
Paramaecimn, are usually
the surface to their proper stations. The regulation of regeneration is explained, as
are various other phenomena, in a review by Weisz (1954).
Micronuclei are necessary for unlimited hfe and for sexual reproduction, but not
for regeneration
and
a long period of Hfe.
Schwartz kept a culture of Stentor alive
228
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
without micronuclei for more than a year. Macronuclear material is necessary for
regeneration, but any fragment of a macronucleus is sufficient. This is a very significant observation. It means that all the factors controlling the vegetative structure and
behavior of a cell can be spread out and intermingled in all parts of a body of considerable size; it furnishes an analogy to the state of affairs which may be supposed
to exist in bacteria.
The Ciliophora are treated as two classes, Infusoria and Tentaculifera. Hartog
(1909) estimated the number of known species of the former as about five hundred.
This number would have included practically all of the fresh-water species known up
to the present. Entozoic and marine species were known, but hundreds of species of
these ecological groups have subsequently been discovered. Including some two
hundred species of Tentaculifera, the phylum Ciliophora appears to be of about
twelve hundred
known
species.
Class
Class Ciliata Haeckel Gen.
1.
INFUSORIA Lamarck
Morph.
2: Ixxviii (1866).
Class Ciliatea Hall Protozoology 333 (1953).
Further synonymy essentially as of the name of the phylum.
Ciliophora lacking tentacles, bearing cilia or modified cilia in the mature condition.
Stein (1867) provided four orders of Infusoria. These orders are surely natural.
Subsequent authors have proposed many modifications of Stein's system, and many
of these are surely sound; but among groups proposed as additional orders, only the
opahnids are positively entitled to this status.
1. Nuclei all alike, commonly numerous.
Order 1. Opalinalea.
1. Nuclei diflferentiated into macronuclei and
micronuclei.
2.
Without
a spiral band of membranelles
about the cytostome
With a spiral band of membranelles or
cilia about the cytostome.
or
2.
cilia
3.
The
4.
Not
The
Holotricha.
Order
3.
Heterotricha.
Order
Order
4.
Hypotricha.
Stomatoda.
of the character of the fol-
Flattened, cirri and most cilia
confined to the ventral surface
3.
2.
spiral sinistrorse.
lowing order
4.
Order
spiral dextrorse
Order
5.
1. Opalinalea nom. nov.
Suborder Opalininea Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 250 (1913).
Protociliata Metcalf in Anat. Record 14: 89 (1918) and Jour. Washington Acad.
Sci. 8: 431 (1918).
Subclass Protociliata Kudo Handb. Protozool. 335 (1931).
Order Opalinida Hall Protozoology 113 (1953), preoccupied by family Opalinidae Claus.
Nuclei not differentiated into two types; cilia abundant, undifferentiated; sexual
reproduction by the complete union of differentiated minute uninucleate gametes.
Commensal in the gut of amphibia and fishes.
The group has been treated monographically by Metcalf (1923). A single family
is
usually recognized.
Phylum Ciliophora
[
229
Family Opalinoea Pritchard 1842. Family Opalinaea Siebold in Siebold and
Stannius Lehrb. vergl. Anat 1: 10 (1848). Family Opalinina Stein Org. Inf. 2: 169
(1867). Family Opalinidae Glaus 1874. Family Protoopalinidae Metcalf 1940.
There are about 150 known species of four approximately equally numerous genera:
Protoopalina Metcalf, cylindrical, with one or two nuclei which are always found in
a stage of mitosis; Zelleriella Metcalf, similar, the cells flattened; Cepedia Metcalf,
cylindrical, with many nuclei; Opalina Purkinje and Valentin, flattened and
m.ultinucleate.
169 ( 1867)
2. Holotricha Stein Org. Inf. 2
Orders Gymnostomata and Trichostomata, and suborder Aspirotricha Biitschli
in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1: 1674 (1889).
Suborder Hymenostomata Hickson 1903.
Orders Gymnostomataceae and Aspirotrichaceae Hartog in Cambridge Nat.
Order
:
Hist. 1: 137 (1909).
Order Holotricha with suborders Anoplophryinea, Gymnostomata, and Hymenostomata Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 250-255 (1913).
Order Holotrichida Calkins Biol. Prot. 376 (1926).
Infusoria with differentiated macronuclei and micronuclei, with simple cilia distributed generally over the surface of the body, not having membranelles in a spiral
band about the cytostome.
This group is the mass of the more primitive typical Infusoria, of numerous families, not all of which are to be listed here. Arrangements of the families in other
groups than the three here maintained have been proposed and are presumably more
nearly natural.
Cytostome anterior. Suborder Gymnostomata (Biitschli) Poche. Suborder
Gym.no stom,ina Hall.
Family Enchelia Ehrenberg Infusionsthierchen 298 (1838). Family Enchelina
Stein Org. Inf. 2: 169 (1867). Family Enchelyidae Kent. Families Holophryidae and
Cyclodinidae Schouteden. Family Didiniidae Poche. Comparatively unspecialized
forms, radially symmetrical or nearly so. Enchelis O. F. Miiller; Holophrya, Chaenia,
Prorodon; Ichthiophthirius, becoming parasitic in the skins of fishes; Lacryviaria,
the cytostome at the end of an extensible proboscis; Didinium, barrel-shaped, with
the cilia confined to two belts, having an extensible proboscis by means of which it
seizes other Infusoria and through which it swallows them.
Family Colepina Ehrenberg op. cit. 316 includes the single genus Coleps. The cells
look like hand grenades of World War I: they are approximately barrel-shaped (the
axis more or less curved), the pellicle forming hardened quadrangular plates between
which the cilia project. The anterior cytostome can be opened widely to ingest other
a.
Infusoria.
b. Cytostome lateral. Suborder Aspirotricha Biitschli.
Family Parameciina Perty (1852). Family Paramoecidae Grobben. Paramaecium
[Hill] O. F. Miiller Verm. Terr. Fluv. 1: 54 (1773). The name is variously spelled;
the spelling here used is Miiller's in what is believed to be the first publication under
binomial nomenclature.
Family Colpodaea Ehrenberg Infusionsthierchen 345 (1838). Family Colpodidae
Glaus 1879. Family Ophryoglenidae Kent 1882. Small forms, oval, bean-shaped,
or flattened. Ophryoglena, Glaucoma, Colpoda, Tetrahymena, and many others.
.
230
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Family Cyclidina Ehrenberg op. cit. 244. Family Pleuronemidae Kent. Family
Pleuronemina Biitschli (1889). Similar, with a conspicuous undulating membrane
along one side. Cyclidium and many other genera.
Family Urocentrina Claparede and Lachmann Etudes Inf. 1 134 ( 1858) Family
Urocentridae Schouteden. Urocentrum, the single genus, top-shaped, with cilia confined to two belts and a tail-like tuft, constantly whirling in the water.
Family Trachelina Ehrenberg op. cit. 319. Family Tracheliidae Kent. Having an
.
:
anterior proboscis, the
Loxodes,
mouth
at
the base of this. Trachelius, Dileptus, Lionotus,
etc.
Family Chlamydodontida [Chlamydodontidae] Glaus 1874. Family Chlamydodonta Stein, the mere plural of a generic name. Family Chilodontida Biitschli. Family Nassulidae Schouteden. Flattened. The cytopharynx surrounded by longitudinal
rods, apparently of hardened protein, collectively forming a conical basket, enclosed
except when the cytostome is open for ingestion. Chilodon, Chlamydodon, Nassula.
c. Cytostome lacking; parasitic, mostly in invertebrates. Suborder AnoplophryINEA Poche; suborder Astomina Hall.
Family Anoplophryida [Anoplophryidae] and seven other
Cepede, 1910.
families, all
named by
3. Heterotricha Stein Org. Inf. 2: 169 (1867).
Suborder Spirotricka, sections Heterotricha and Oligotricha Biitschli in Bronn
Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1 1674 ( 1889).
Section Chonotricha Wallengren in Acta Univ. Lund 31, part 2, no. 7 48 ( 1895)
Order Oligotricha Doflein Protozoen 240 (1901).
Orders Heterotrichaceae and Oligotrichaceae Hartog in Cambridge Nat. Hist.
Order
:
:
1:
137 (1909).
Orders Heterotrichida and Oligotrichida Calkins Biol. Prot. 386, 388 (1926).
Suborder Entodiniomorpha Reichenow in Doflein Lehrb. Prot. ed. 5, 3: 1195
(1929); Order Chonotricha Reichenow op. cit. 1211; suborder Ctenostomata
Kahl ex Reichenow
op.
cit.
1024.
Orders Spirotrichida and Chonotrichida Hall Protozoology 380, 411 (1953).
Infusoria having a sinistrorsc spiral band of cilia about the cytostome, these cilia
united (except in family Spirochonina) in triangular-attenuate membranellcs; not
having the body flattened and the cilia or cirri confined to the ventral surface.
The peristomal apparatus of this order is an evidently derived character, so peculiar as to appear to have evolved only once: in short, the order appears natural. There
are numerous subordinate groups. Several of these, of
character, have been segregated as additional orders;
many
it is
species or of exceptional
by an arbitrary decision
that they are here treated as suborders.
Comparatively unspecialized examples. Suborder Spirotricha Biitschli.
Suborders Hctcrolrichina and Oligolrichina Flail.
Family Plagiotomina Biitschli op. cit. 1719 (1889). Family Plagiotomidae Poche
(1913). Peristomal area narrow and elongate, extending from the anterior end to a
cyto.^tome located near the middle of one side. Blepharisyna. Spirostomum.
Family Bursarina Stein Org. Inf. 2: 169, 295 (1867). Family Bursariidae Kent.
Cytostome seated in a deep pit in one side of the body. Bursaria. Balantidium, parasitic in the gut of Amphibia and mammals; B. coli, a serious pathogen in man.
Family Stentorina Stein op. cit. 169, 217. Family Stentoridae Claus. Peristomal
a.
area anterior, more or
less transverse. Stcntor, sessile
and obconic,
familiar. Follicu-
Phylum alio phor
[231
Una, the posterior end seated in a chitinous lorica, the peristomal area broadly ex-
panded
as two wings.
Family Halterina Claparede and Lachmann Etudes Inf. 1: 367 (1858). Family
Halteriidae Claus. Halteria, subglobular, with a single whorl of long cilia; familiar in
infusions, recognizable by the motion of the cells, alternately revolving slowly and
snapping violently from place to place.
b. Loricate, free-swimming. Suborder Tintinnoinea Kofoid and Campbell.
Suborder Tintinnina Hall.
Family Tintinnodea Claparede and Lachmann Etudes Inf. 1: (1858). Family
Tintinnidae Claus. Peristomal membranelles elongate and ciliate, the cylindrical or
conical body attached in and retractile into the lorica; characteristically with two
macronuclei and two micronuclei. Mostly marine. Kofoid and Campbell, who monographed the group ( 1929) found it possible to distinguish the natural and subordinate
groups entirely by the structure of the lorica. They divided the former single family
into twelve and recognized more than three hundred species.
c. Laterally flattened, with a tough membrane and few cilia and membranelles.
Suborder Ctenostomata Kahl. Suborder Ctenostomina Hall.
Family Ctenostomida [Ctenostomidae] Lauterborn in Zeit. wiss. Zool. 90: 665
(1908). Kahl (1932) monographed the group and found twenty-five species, which
he arranged in six genera and three families.
d. Cylindrical, entozoic, with no ciliation except the membranelles. Suborder
Entodiniomorpha Reichenow. Suborder Entodiniornorphina Hall.
Family Ophryoscolecina Stein Org. Inf. 2: 168 (1867). Family Ophryoscolecidae
Claus. Becker (1932) reviewed previous studies of this group, examples of which
were first mentioned by Gruby and Delafond, 1843. He noted 71 species, of the
genera Entodinium, Diplodinium, Ophryoscolex, Epidinium, etc. (the genera were
first named by Stein) in the domestic ox; and 52 {Didesmis, Paraisotricha, Spirodinium, Cycloposthium, etc.) in the horse. Dogiel (1927) monographed the family, but
it is certain that large numbers of species remain to be discovered in wild animals,
oxen and others.
The barrel-shaped cells are about 0.1-0.25 mm. long. The cytostome is anterior,
surrounded by the usual spiral band of membranelles; this may be broken up into
several partial files, and there may be belts or clusters of membranelles on other parts
of the body. The posterior end is drawn out into processes, one, few, or many, ob,
scure or prominent, horn-like or fringe-like. Internally, beside contractile vacuoles
and a neuromotor apparatus including a large motorium, there are characteristic
skeletal plates. These consist of minute cylindrical bodies imbedded in an amorphous
matrix, the whole staining with iodine and consisting supposedly of some polysaccharide carbohydrate.
Animals are infected by eating food contaminated with the saliva of others. The
may be present in the rumen in numbers from one thousand to three million
per cc. It has been supposed that they are symbiotic, benefitting their hosts by carrying on useful syntheses, or perhaps merely by controlling numbers of bacteria in the
rumen. There is no good evidence for these ideas: the probability is, that they are
harmless commensals.
e. Cylindrical or obconic, sessile, cilia of the peristomal band separate, body
otherwise naked. Suborder Chonotricha (Wallengren) subordo novus.
Family Spirochonina Stein Org. Inf. 2: 168 (1867). Family Spirochonidae Grobciliates
—
The
232
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Infusoria, order Hypotricha: a, Aspidisca x 800. b, Stylonychia
Euplotes x 400. d-n, Euplotes Patella after Turner (1930); d-h, stages
of mitosis x 2,000, i, conjugating cells x 400; j, k, polar and equatorial views of the
heterotypic division in a conjugant x 2,000; 1, early anaphase of the homeotypic
division x 2,000; m, first division of the zygote nucleus x 2,000; n, a cell after conjugation X 400, the macronucleus breaking up, the zygote nucleus divided into four,
of which one is to become a macronucleus, one a micronucleus, and two are to
Fig. 44.
X 400.
C,
undergo
dissolution.
Phylum Ciliophora
ben. Spirochona
marine, best
[
233
and a few other genera, attached to aquatic animals, fresh-water or
the crustacean Gammarus.
known from
4. Hypotricha Stein Org. Inf. 2
168 ( 1867)
Section Hypotricha Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1: 1674 (1889).
Order
:
Order Hypotrichaceae Hartog in Cambridge Nat. Hist.
Order Hypotrichida Calkins Biol. Prot. 389 (1926).
1:
137 (1909).
Suborder Hypotricha Kudo Man. Protozool. ed. 3: 668 (1946).
Suborder Hypotrichina Hall Protozoology 381 ( 1953 )
Flattened Infusoria bearing a band of membranelles crossing the upper surface
near the anterior end from right to left and continued rearward on the lower surface
beside the cytostome, along which lie also undulating membranes; mostly bearing
cirri, which are confined to the lower surface, as are most free cilia, if these are
present.
This group
ceding order.
is
evidently natural, and evidently a specialized offshoot from the pre-
It
might reasonably be treated
as a subordinate
group of the preceding
Kudo, and Hall have done so. There are comparatively few species.
Several are familiar in infusions and have been much studied.
Family 1. Peritromina Stein Org. Inf. 2: 168 (1867). Family Peritromidae Kent.
Cilia abundant on the lower surface, cirri none. Peritromus.
Family 2. UrostyUda [Urostylidae] Calkins Biol. Prot. 390 (1926). As above, but
with frontal and sometimes also anal cirri. Numerous genera, Urostyla, Uroleptus,
Epiclintes, Stilotricha; Kerona O. F. Miiller, an ectoparasite on the animal Hydra.
Family 3. Oxytrichina Ehrenberg Infusionsthierchen 362 (1838). Family Oxytrichidae Kent. Family Pleurotrichidae Biitschli. Cirri present; cilia in one or two marginal rows, few or absent on the ventral surface. Oxtricha, Stylonychia, Pleurotricha,
order; Biitschli,
Euplotes, etc.
Order
5.
Stomatoda Siebold
in Siebold
and Stannius Lehrb.
vergl. Anat. 1:
10
(1848).
Order Ciliata Perty Kennt. kl. Lebensf. 137 (1852).
Order Peritricha Stein Org. Inf. 2: 168 (1867),
Section Peritricha Biitschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1: 1674 (1889).
Order Peritrichaceae Hartog in Cambridge Nat. Hist. 1: 138 (1909).
Order Peritrichida Calkins Biol. Prot. 395 (1926).
Infusoria having a dextrorse spiral band of membranelles about the cytostome,
which can in most examples be concealed and protected by contraction of the body;
free-swimming only in the immature condition, at maturity attached and without
separate cilia; syngamy occurring by the complete union of a smaller swimming individual with a larger attached one. Vorticella
names Stomatoda and
is
the apparent type of the old ordinal
which are accordingly held to belong to this order.
Family Vorticellina Ehrenberg Infusionsthierchen 259 (1838). Family Vaginifera
Perty (1852). Family Vorticellidae Fromentel 1874. Vorticella L., a familiar microscopic organism in material from ponds and ditches, consists of solitary bell-shaped
cells on contractile stalks. Carchesium and Zoothamnium are similar organisms in
colonies. Ophrydium, Epistylis, etc., consist of similar colonies of non-contractile
cells. Cothurnia and Vaginicola are solitary stalkless cells having conical loricae into
which they can withdraw themselves.
Ciliata,
—
The
234]
Fig. 45
Lower Organisms
Tokophyra Lemnarum after A. Noble (1932) a, representative individswimming bud; d, conjugation; e, feeding on a cell of Euplotes;
tentacles, feeding, expanded, and contracted,
g x 2,000, all others x 400.
ual; b, budding; c,
t, cyst; g,
Classification of
:
Phylum Ciliophora
235
[
Family Urceolarina Perty (1852). Family Trichodinidae Glaus. Family Urceolaridae Kudo. Urceolaria, Trichodina, etc., disk- or barrel-shaped cells attached on
or in aquatic animals by means of a whorl of hard hooks.
Class 2.
TENTACULIFERA (Huxley) Kent
Order lufusoires suceurs and group Acinetina Claparede and Lachmann Etudes
Inf. 1: 377,381 (1858).
Class Acinetae Haeckel Gen.
Morph. 2: Ixxix (1866), the mere plural of a generic
name.
Tentaculifera Huxley Man. Anat. Invert. 100 (1877).
Glass Tentaculifera with orders Suctoria and Acinetaria Kent Man. Inf. 1 36
:
(1880).
Class Acinetaria and order Suctoria Lankester in Enc. Brit. ed. 9, 19: 865 ( 1885).
Subclass Suctoria Butschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1: 1842 (1889).
Class Acinetoidea Poche in Arch. Prot. 30: 263 (1913).
Class Sudor ea Hall Protozoology 413 (1953).
Organisms swimming by means of cilia while immature, at maturity lacking cilia
and usually attached, provided with tentacles by which they capture and paralyze
their prey and absorb food. Acineta is the type genus.
These organisms are rather unfamiliar. They occur both in fresh water and in salt,
and prey chiefly upon Infusoria. There are differentiated macronuclei and micromacronucleus may extend to all
Asexual reproduction is by budding, often endogenous. Conjugation occurs
either between attached individuals or between an attached individual and a swimming bud. The fact that one individual may bend past another to conjugate with a
third indicates the presence of mating types. Conjugating individuals exhibit pregamic
and postgamic nuclear divisions quite as among Infusoria (Noble, 1932). The group
is undoubtedly derived from Infusoria; whether from something of the nature of
Didinium, Vorticella, or Spirochona remains uncertain.
Collin (1912) accounted for about 170 species and recognized eight families. One
of these families has subsequently been transferred to order Holotricha. The remainder may be construed as a single order:
nuclei; in branching or colonial individuals, a single
parts.
Order Suctoria Kent (1880). Lankester chose
which Kent published at the same time.
a.
this as
between two ordinal names
Individuals subglobular, usually stalked, their tentacles essentially uniform.
Family 1. Podophryina Butschli in Bronn Kl. u. Ord. Thierreichs 1 1926 (1889).
Family Podophryidae, Rousseau and Schouteden 1907. Buds produced exogenously.
Podophrya, Sphaerophrya, naked; Urnula, loricate.
Family 2. Acinetida [Acinetidae] Glaus 1874. Acinetina Claparede and Lachmann (1858). Family Acinetina Biitschli (1889). Bodies with a thin pellicle, with or
without loricae; budding endogenous. Acineta, Tokophrya, etc.
Family 3. Discophryida [Discophryidae] Collin in Arch. Zool. Exp. Gen. 51: 364
(1912). Body with a firm pellicle, budding endogenous. Discophrya, etc.
:
b.
Individuals branching or colonial.
4. Dendrosomida [Dendrosomidae] Kent Man. Inf. 2: 215 (1882). Family
Dendrosomina BiitschU (1889). Family Dendrosomatidae Poche (1913). Dendro-
Family
soma,
etc.
236
The
]
Family
5.
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Ophryodendrida [Ophryodendridae] Kent
Ophryodendron, etc.
Dendrocometida [Dendrocometidae] Kent
I.e.
Family Ophryodendrina
I.e.
Family Dendrocometina
Biitschli (1889).
Family
6.
Biitschli (1889).
c.
With
Family
7.
Dendrocometes, Stylocometes.
differentiated tentacles for piercing
Ephelotida [Ephelotidae] Kent.
and sucking.
Family Ephelotina Sand 1899.
I.e.
Marine, individuals subglobular, stalked. Ephelota, naked; Podocyathus, loricate.
With this peculiar and highly evolved group, the here-proposed classification of
organisms which lack the distinctive characters both of plants and of animals is
concluded.
List of
LIST
N omenclatural Novelties
[
237
OF NOMENCLATURAL NOVELTIES
Page
P'amily Kurthiacea fam. nov
Family Pasteurellacea nom. nov
Family Chromatiacea nomen familiare novum
Family Rhodobacillacea nom. nov
Family Chlorobiacea nom. nov
Order Sphaerotilalea nom nov
Lagenocystis, nom. nov., and L. radicicola, comb, nov
Family Dinamoebidina nom nov
Phylum Opisthokonta phylum novum
Chilomastix hominis comb, nov
Pentatrichomonas obliqua comb, nov
Goussia Schubergi comb, nov
Family Myxoceratida and Myxoceros, nomina nova; M. sphaerulosa and
M. Blennius, combinationes novae
21
22
31
31
31
33
82
101
110
165
167
207
221
Phylum Ciliophora nomen phylare novum
Order Opalinalea nom. nov
223
228
Suborder Chonotricha subordo novus
231
:
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adanson, Michel. Families des plantes. Paris. 1763.
Agardh, Carolus A. Synopsis algarum Scandinaviae, adjecta dispositione universali
algarum. Lund. 1817.
Systema algarum. Lund. 1824.
Agardh, Jacob Georg. Species genera et ordines algarum ... 3 vols. Lund. 1848-1901.
Agassiz, Louis. Contributions to the natural history of the United States of America.
.
4
vols. Boston.
Ajello, Libero.
I.
1857-1862.
cytological
and nutritional study of Polychytrium aggregatum.
Cytology. American Jour. Bot. 35: 1-11. 1948.
Notes sur quelques protistes copricoles. Arch. Prot. 50: 27-49. 1924.
Alexeieff, A.
Allen,
A
Ruth
F.
A
cytological study of heterothallism in Puccinia graminis. Jour.
Agr. Res. 40: 585-614. 1930.
Allman, George. Notes on Noctiluca. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci. n. s. 12: 326-332. 1872.
Andresen, N., and H. Holter. The genera of amoebae. Science 110: 114-115. 1949.
Angst, Laura. The gametophyte of Soranthera ulvoidea. Publ. Puget Sound Biol. Sta.
5: 159-163.
19^^26.
The
.
holdfast of Soranthera ulvoidea. Publ. Puget
Sound
Biol. Sta. 5
267-275. 1927.
Anigstein, Ludwik. Untersuchungen iiber die Morphologie
tsia
Melophagi Noller. Arch.
Archer, William.
und Biologic der Ricket-
Prot. 57: 209-246. 1927.
Resume of recent contributions to our knowledge of "Freshwater
L Heliozoa. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci. n. s. 16: 283-309, 347-376.
Rhizopoda." Part
1876.
Areschoug, John Erh. Enumeratio phvcearum in maribus Scandinaviae crescentium.
Act. Reg. Soc. Sci. Upsala ser. 2,' 13: 223-382. 1847; 14: 385-454. 1850.
Argao, Henrique de Beaurepaire. Uber den Entwicklungsgang und die t)bertragung
von Haemoproteus columbae. Arch. Prot. 12: 154-167. 1908.
Aschersbn, Paul. Flora der Provinz Brandenburg der Altmark und des Herzogthums
Magdeburg. Berlin. 1864.
Atkinson, George F. Phylogeny and relationships in the Ascomycetes. Ann. Missouri
Bot. Gard.'2: 315-376! 1915.
Baker, Woolford B. Studies in the
Biol. Bull. 51: 321-362. 1926.
life
history of Euglena.
L Euglena
agilis,
Carter.
Balamuth, William. Regeneration in Protozoa: a problem in morphogenesis. Quart.
Rev. Biol. 15: 290-337. 1940.
Barkley, Fred A. Keys to the phyla of organisms. Missoula, Montana. 1939.
Un Esbozo de clasification de los organismos. Rev. Fac. Nal. Agron.
Medellin 10: 83-103. 1949.
Barrett, J. T. Development and sexuality in some species of Olpidiopsis, (Comu)
Fischer. Ann. Bot. 26: 209-238. 1912.
Gottingcn. 1830.
Bartling, Fr. Th. Ordines naturales plantarum
.
.
de Bary, Anton. Ueber die Myxomyceten. Bot.
.
.
Zeit. 16: 357-358, 361-364, 365-369.
1858.
.
und
Bericht iiber die Fortschritte der Algenkunde in den Jahren 1855, 1856,
1857. Bot. Zeit. 16, Beilagen 55-99. 1858.
Die Mycctozoen. Zeit. wiss. Zool. 10: 88-175. 1859.
.
and M. Woronin. Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Chytridieen. Bcrichte Verhandl. naturf. Gess. Freiburg 3, Heft 2: 22-55. 1864.
-.
Bibliography
.
Review
[
of Baranetsky, J. Beitrag zur Kenntniss
239
des selbststandigen
Lebens der Flechtengonidien. Bot. Zeit. 26: 196-198. 1868.
-. Vergleichende
Morphologic und Biologic dcr Pilze Mycetozoen und
Bacterien. Leipzig. 1884.
Tatum. Ncurospora. II. Methods of producing and detecting
mutations concerned with nutritional requirements. American Jour. Bot. 32:
Beadle, G. W., and E. L.
678-686. 1945.
The present status of problems relating to the ciliates of
ruminants and Equidae. Quart. Rev. Biol. 7: 282-297. 1932.
Beijerinck, Martinus W. Die Bacterien der Papilionaceen-Knollchen. Bot. Zeil. 46:
Becker, Elery Ronald.
725-735, 741-750, 757-771, 781-790, 797-804. 1888.
.
Ueber
oligonitrophile Mikroben. Ceutralbl. Bakt. Abt.
2,
7:
561-582.
1901.
Belar, Karl.
Bau und Vermehrung von Prowazekia josephi
n. sp.
Arch. Prot. 35:
103-118. 1914.
.
Protozoenstudien
I.
.
Protozoenstudien
II.
.
Die Kernteilung von Prowazekia. Arch. Prot. 41
.
Arch. Prot. 36: 13-51. 1915.
Arch. Prot. 36: 241-302. 1916.
308-320. 1920.
Protozoenstudien III. Arch. Prot. 43: 431-462. 1921.
:
Untersuchungen an Actinophrys sol Ehrenberg. I. Die Morphologic des
Formwechsels. Arch. Prot. 46: 1-96. 1923.
Berdan, Helen. Revision of the genus Ancylistes. Mycologia 30: 396-415. 1938.
Bergey, David H., and others. Bergey's manual of determinative bacteriology. Baltimore. 1923. Second edition, 1925; third edition, 1930; fourth edition, 1934;
.
fifth edition,
1938-1939; sixth edition, 1948.
Der Organismus der
Cilioflagellaten. Morph. Jahrb. 7: 177-288. 1882.
Bernard, Francis. Role des flagellees dans la transparence marine en Mediteranee.
Bull. Soc. Hist. Nat. Afrique du Nord 38: 74-79. 1947.
Bersa, Egon. t)ber das Vorkommen von kohlensaurem Kalk in einer Gruppe von
Schwefelbakterien. Sitzber. Akad. Wiss. Wien Math.-nat. Kl., Abt. I, 129:
231-259. 1920.
Bergh, R.
S.
G. Die Geschlechtliche Fortpflanzung der eigentlichen Phaeosporeen.
Neapel 2: 401-413. 1881.
Bessey, Charles E. The structure and classification of the lower green algae. Trans.
Berthold,
Mittheil. zool. Stat.
AmericanMicr. Soc. 36: 121-136. 1905.
.
A
Bessey, Ernst A.
synopsis of plant phyla. Univ. Nebraska Studies 7: 275-373. 1907.
Morphology and taxonomy
of the Fungi. Philadelphia
and Toronto.
1950.
Edwin M., and Samuel L. Meyer. Heterothallism and segregation of sexes in
Ascobolus geophilus. American Jour. Bot. 26: 617-619. 1939.
Bewley, W. F., and H. B. Hutchinson. On the changes through which the nodule
organism (Ps. radicicola) passes under cultural conditions. Jour. Agr. Sci. 10:
Betts,
144-162. 1920.
Bhatia, B. L. Synopsis of the genera and classification of haplocyte gregarines. Parasitology 22: 156-167. 1930.
Bisby,
Guy R. Some
ment
observations on the formation of the capillitium and the develop-
of Physarella mirabilis Peck
Bot. 1: 274-288. 1914.
and Stemonitis fusca Roth. American Jour.
240
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Blakeslee, Albert Francis. Zygospore formation a sexual process. Science n.
s.
19:
864-866. 1904.
Sexual reproduction in the Mucorineae. Proc. American Acad. 40:
.
205-319. 1904.
Zygospore germinations in the Mucorineae. Ann. Myc. 4: 1-28. 1906.
Die mikroskopische Tierwelt des Siisswassers. Abt. I. Protozoa. 2d ed,
Blochmann,
F.
Hamburg. 1895.
Bodman, Sister Mary
Cecilia. Morphology and cytology of Guepinia Spathularia.
MycologiaSO: 635-652. 1938.
Bohlin, Knut. Zur Morphologic und Biologic einzelliger Algen. Ofvers kgl. vetensk.Akad. Forhandl. 54: 507-529. 1897.
Utkast till de grona algernas och arkegoniaternas fylogeni. Upsala. 1901.
Bolsche, Wilhelm. Haeckel, his life and work. Translated by Joseph McCabe. Phila.
delphia. 1906.
Bonner, John T. A descriptive study of the development of the slime mold Dictyostelium discoideum. American Jour. Bot. 31: 175-182. 1944.
Borgert, Adolf. t)ber die Dictyochiden, insbesondere iiber Distephanus speculum;
sowie Studien an Phaeodarien. Zeit. wiss. Zool. 51: 629-676. 1891.
Fortpflanzungsverhaltnisse bei tripyleen Radiolarien (Phaeodarien).
.
Verhandl. deutschen zool. Gess. 1896: 192-195.
-.
Untersuchungen iiber die Fortpflanzung der tripyleen Radiolarien,
speciell von Aulacantha scolymantha H. I. Theil. Zool. Jahrb. Anat, 14: 203-276.
1900.
Untersuchungen iiber die Fortpflanzung der tripyleen Radiolarien,
von Aulacantha scolymantha H. II. Teil. Arch. Prot. 14: 134-263. 1909.
Bornet, Ed., and Gustave Thuret. Recherches sur la fecondation des floridees. Ann.
-.
speziell
Sci.
Nat. Bot.
.
Bot. ser.
ser. 5, 7:
137-166. 1867.
and Cr. Flahault. Revision des nostocacees
7,
3:
heterocystes.
Ann.
323-381. 1886; 4: 343-373. 1886; 5: 51-129. 1887; 7:
Sci.
Nat.
177-262.
1888.
Bory de Saint-Vincent (editor). Dictionnaire classique
d'histoire naturelle. 17 vols.
Paris. 1822-1831.
Brady, Henry B. Notes on some of the reticularian Rhizopoda of the "Challenger"
expedition. Part III. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci. n. s. 21: 31-71. 1881.
Report on the Foraminifera dredged by H. M. S. Challenger, during the
years 1873-1876. Rep. Sci. Results Voy. Challenger Zool. 9: i-xxi, 1-814. 1884.
Flora und Fauna des Golfes von
Brandt, K. Die kolonienbildenden Radiolarien
.
.
Neapel 13:
.
i-viii,
.
,
1-276. 1885.
Zur Systematik der kolonienbildenden Radiolarien. Zool. Jahrb. Suppl.
8: 311-352. 1905.
Brasil,
Louis. Recherches sur la reproduction des gr6garines monocystidees. Arch.
Zool. Exp. Gen.
s6r. 4, 3:
17-38. 1905.
Nouvelles recherches sur la reproduction des gregarines monocystidees.
Arch. Zool. Exp. Gen. s6r. 4, 4: 69-99. 1905.
Recherches sur le cycle 6volutif des Seleniidae, gregarines parasites
d'annelides polychetes. Arch. Prot. 8: 370-397. 1907.
Braun, Alexander. t)bor Chytridium, eine Gattung einzelliger Schmarotzergewachse
auf Algen und Infusoricn. Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1855: 21-83. 1856.
Braun, M. Review of Thelohan (1892). Ccntralbl. Bakt. 14: 737-739. 1893.
.
Bibliography
[241
Brown, William H. The development of the ascocarp of Lachnea
scutellata. Bot.
Gaz.
52: 275-305. 1911.
.
The development
of
Pyronema confluens
var.
igneum. American Jour.
Bot. 2: 289-298. 1915.
Buchanan, R. E. Studies in the nomenclature and classification of bacteria 11. The
primary subdivisions of the Schizomycetes. Jour. Bact. 2: 155-164. 1917.
III. The famiUes of the Eubacteriales. Jour. Bact. 2: 347•
350. 1917.
.
•
VIII.
The subgroups and genera
of the Actinomycetales.
Jour. Bact. 3: 403-406. 1918.
General systematic bacteriology. Baltimore. 1925.
St. John-Brooks, and Robert S. Breed. International bacteriological code of nomenclature. Jour. Bact. 55: 287-306. 1948.
BuUer, A. H. R. Some observations on the spore discharge of the higher fungi. Proc.
Intcrnat. Congr. PI. Sci. Ithaca 2: 1627-1628. 1929.
Burkholder, P. R. Movement in the Cyanophyceae. Quart. Rev. Biol. 9: 438-459.
.
,
Ralph
1934.
Butler, E. J. On Allomyces, a new aquatic fungus.
Butler, Ellys T., William J. Robbins, and B. O.
Ann. Bot. 25: 1023-1035. 191 1.
Dodge. Biotin and the growth of
Neurospora. Science 94: 262-263. 1941.
O. Protozoa. Zool. Jahresber. 1880, Abt. 1: 122-173. 1881.
Protozoa, in Dr. H. G. Bronn's Klassen und Ordnungen des ThierReichs 1: i-xviii, 1-2035. 1880-1889.
Ueber den Bau der Bacterien und verwandter Organismen. Leipzig.
Biitschli,
.
.
1890.
.
Ueber
die chemische
Natur der Skeletsubstanz der Acantharia. Zool
Anz. 30: 784-789. 1906.
Calkins, Gary N. Mitosis in Noctiluca miliaris and its bearing on the nuclear relations
of the Protozoa and Metazoa. Jour. Morph. 15: 711-772. 1899.
The biology of the Protozoa. Philadelphia and New York. 1926.
and Rachel C. Bowling. Gametic meiosis in Monocystis. Biol. Bull. 51
.
385-399. 1926.
le Calvez, J. Flagellispores
du
radiolaire
Coelodendrum ramosissimum (Haeckel).
Arch. Zool. Exp. Gen. 77, notes 99-103. 1935.
Recherches sur les foraminiferes II. Place de la meiose et sexualite.
Arch. Zool. Exp. Gen. 87: 211-243. 1950.
Cameron, Frank. Potash from kelp. United States Dept. Agr. Office of the Secretary
.
Rept. 100: 1-122. 1915.
Campbell, Arthur Shackleton. The cytology of Tintinnopsis nucula (Fol) Laackmann
Univ. California Publ. Zool. 29: 179-236. 1926.
Univ. California
Studies on the marine ciliate Favella (Jorgensen)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Publ. Zool. 29: 429-452. 1927.
Campbell, Douglas H. A university text-book of botany. New York. 1902.
Paris. 1813.
de CandoUe, Augustin Pyrame. Theorie elementaire de la botanique
Cantino, Edward C. The vitamin nutrition of an isolate of Blastocladia Pringsheimii.
.
.
.
American Jour. Bot. 35: 238-242. 1948.
.
The
physiology of the aquatic phycomycete, Blastocladia Pringsheimii,
its nutrition and metabolism. American Jour Bot. 36: 95-112.
with emphasis on
1949.
242
The
]
Garter, P. W.,
I.
M.
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Heilbron, and B. Lythgoe.
London B
algal classes. Proc. Roy. Soc.
The lipochromes and
sterols of the
128: 82-109. 1939.
Cash, James, and others. The British freshwater Rhizopoda and Heliozoa. 5 vols.
London. 1905-1921.
Caspary, Rob. Bericht iiber die Verhandlungen der botanischen Sektion der 33.
Versammlung deutscher Naturforscher und Aerzte, gehalten in Bonn vom 18.
bis 24. September 1857. Bot. Zeit. 15: 749-776, 784-792. 1857.
Castle, Edward S. The structure of the cell walls of Aspergillus and the theory of
cellulose particles. American Jour. Bot. 32: 148-151. 1945.
Caullery, Maurice, and Felix Mesnil. Recherches sur les haplosporidies. Arch. Zool.
Exp. Gen.
ser. 4,
101-181. 1905.
4:
and
.
Sur
les
Metchnikovellidae
et autres protistes parasites
des gr6garines d'annelides. Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 77: 527-532. 1914.
Metchnikovellidae et autres protistes parasites des
and
.
gregarines d'annehdes. Ann. Inst. Pasteur 33: 209-240. 1919.
Chadefaud, M. Les protistes trichocytiferes ou progastreades. Ann.
Protistol.
5:
323-343. 1936.
Chatton, £douard. Les blastodinides, ordre nouveau de dinoflagelees parasites.
Compt. Rend. 143: 981-985. 1906.
Les cnidocystes du peridinien Polykrikos schwartzi Biitschli. Arch. Zool.
.
Exp. Gen. 54: 157-194. 1914.
Les peridiniens parasites. Morphologic, reproduction, ethologie. Arch.
Zool. Exp. Gen. 59: 1-475. 1920.
Child, Horace J. Studies on the ingestion of leucocytes, and on mitosis, in Endamoeba
gingivalis. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 28: 251-284. 1926.
Christman, A. H. Sexual reproduction in the rusts. Bot. Gaz. 39: 267-275. 1905.
Cienkowski, L. Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der Myxomyceten. Jahrb. wiss. Bot
—
3: 325-337. 1863.
Das Plasmodium. Jahrb.
.
wiss. Bot. 3: 400-441. 1863.
Beitrage zur Kenntniss der
.
Monaden. Arch. mikr. Anat.
1
:
203-232.
1865.
Claparede, fidouard, and Johannes Lachmann, fitudes sur
podes. 2 vols. Geneva. 1858-1861.
Clements, Frederic E.
The genera
intestine of
of Fungi. Minneapolis. 1909.
The genera of Fungi. New York. 1931.
The method by which Trichonympha campanula, a protozoon in the
termites, ingests solid particles of wood for food. Biol. Bull. 48:
and Cornelius
Cleveland, L. R.
les infusoires et les rhizo-
L. Shear.
282-288. 1925.
.
The
ability of termites to live
perhaps indefinitely on a diet of pure
cellulose. Biol. Bull. 48: 289-293. 1925.
The
effects of
termite, Termopsis,
Symbiosis
oxygenation and starvation on the symbiosis between the
its intestinal flagellates. Biol. Bull. 48: 309-326. 1925.
and
among animals with
intestinal flagellates. Quart. Rev. Biol.
Sex produced
in the
special reference to termites
1:
and
their
51-60. 1926.
protozoa of Cryptocercus by molting. Science 105;
16-17. 1947.
The
and evolution of meiosis. Science 105: 287-289. 1947.
Month. 67: 173-177. 1948.
Hilda B. The life history and cytology of Sphacelaria bipinnata Sauv. Univ.
.
An
Clint,
origin
ideal partnership. Sci.
Liverpool Publ. Hartley Bot. Lab. 3: 1-23. 1927.
Bibliography
[
Cohn, Ferdinand. Beitrage zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der Infusorien
II.
243
Ueber den
Encystirungsprocess der Infusorien. Zeit. wiss. Zool. 4: 253-281. 1953.
Conspectus familiarum Cryptogamarum secundum methodum naturalem dispositarum. Hedwigia 11: 17-20. 1872.
-.
Untersuchungen iiber Bacterien. Beitr. Biol. Pfl. 1, Heft 2: 127-224.
.
1872.
Untersuchungen
iiber Bacterien II. Beitr. Biol. Pfl.
1,
Heft 3: 141-207.
1875.
The Saprolegniaceae with notes on other water molds.
North Carolina. 1923.
Collin, Bernard. £tude monographique sur les acinetiens II. Morphologic, physiologic, systematique. Arch. Zool. Exp. Gen. 51: 1-457. 1912.
Colson, Barbara. The cytology and development of Phyllactinia corylea Lev. Ann.
Coker, William Chambers.
Chapel
Hill,
Bot. n.s. 2: 381-402. 1938.
Committee on Medical Research, Washington, and the Medical Research Council,
London. Chemistry of penicillin. Science 102: 627-629. 1945.
GrinConard, Henry S. Plants of Iowa, being a fifth edition of the Grinnell Flora
nell, Iowa. 1939.
Conn, H. J., and Gladys E. Wolfe. The flagellation of bacteria. Science 87 283-284.
.
.
.
:
1938.
Taxonomic
.
relationships of certain non-spore-forming rods in
soil.
Jour.
Bact. 36: 320-321. 1938.
The morphology and life cycle of Oxymonas dimorpha sp. nov.,
from Neotermes simplicicornis (Banks). Univ. California Publ. Zool. 36: 51-66.
Connell, Frank H.
1930.
Conrad, Walter. Recherches sur
les flagellates
de nos eaux saumatres. Arch. Prot. 56:
167-231. 1926.
Cook, W. R. Ivimey.
A
monograph
of the Plasmodiophorales. Arch. Prot. 80:
179-
254. 1933.
Cooke,
Wm.
Bridge.
A nomenclatorial survey of the genera
of pore fungi. Lloydia 3
81-104. 1940.
Myxomycetes of Mount Shasta. Madrofio 10: 55-62. 1949.
Copeland, Edwin Bingham. What is a plant? Science n. s. 65: 388-390. 1927.
Copeland, Herbert F. The kingdoms of organisms. Quart. Rev. Biol. 13: 384-420.
.
1938.
.
.
Progress report on basic classification. American Nat. 81 340-361. 1947.
Spirodiscus Ehrenberg identified as Ophiocytium Nageli. Science 119:
:
338. 1954.
Observations on Prasiola mexicana .... Madrono 13: 138-140. 1955.
Cotner, F. B. The development of the zoospores in the Oomycetes at optimum temperatures and the cytology of their active stages. American Jour. Bot. 17: 511.
546. 1930.
.
Cytological study of the zoospores of Blastocladia. Bot. Gaz. 89: 295-
309. 1930.
Couch, John N. The development of the sexual organs of Leptolegnia caudata.
American Jour. Bot. 19: 584-599. 1932.
Observations on cilia of aquatic Phycomycetes. Science 88: 476. 1938.
A new Conidiobolus with sexual reproduction. American Jour. Bot. 26:
.
.
119-130. 1939.
244
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
The structure and action of the cilia in some aquatic Phycomycetes.
American Jour. Bot. 28: 704-713. 1941.
and Alma J. Whiffen. Observations on the genus Blastocladiella. American Jour. Bot. 29: 582-591. 1942.
Crawley, Howard. The evolution of Sarcocystis maris in the intestinal cells of the
mouse (preliminary note). Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 66: 432-436. 1914.
The sexual evolution of Sarcocystis niuris. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 68: 2-43. 1916.
.
Cupp, Easter E. Spirotrichonympha polygyra
sp. nov. from Neotermes simplicicornis
Banks. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 33: 351-378. 1930.
Cushman, Joseph A. Foraminifera. Their classification and economic use. Sharon,
'
Massachussetts. 1928.
un nouveau rapprochement a
Cuvier, Georges. Sur
posent
Dangeard,
le
P.-A., et Sappin-TrouflFy. Uredinees.
Recherches sur
.
etablir entre les classes qui
com-
regne animal. Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris 19: 73-84. 1812.
la
Le Botaniste
3:
119-125. 1893.
reproduction sexuelle des champignons. Le Botaniste
3: 221-281. 1893.
La reproduction sexuelle des ascomycetes. Le Botaniste 4: 21-58. 1894.
La truffe. Recherches sur son dcveloppement, sa structure, sa reproducsexuelle. Le Botaniste 4: 63-87. 1894.
Contributions a I'etude des acrasiees. Le Botaniste 5: 1-20. 1896.
Recherches sur la structure du Polyphagus Euglenae Nowak. Le Botan.
tion
.
iste 7:
213-261. 1900.
L'origine du perithese chez les ascomycetes.
Le Botaniste
10:
1-385.
1907.
£tudes sur
Le
le
dcveloppement
et la stracture
des organismes inferieurs.
Botaniste 11: 1-311. 1910.
Dangeard, Pierre. Recherches sur
les
Bangia
et les
Porphyra. Le Botaniste 18:
183-
244. 1927.
Danilewski, B. Die Hamatozocn der Kaltbliiter. Arch. mikr. Anat. 24: 588-598. 1885.
Davis, Bradley Moore. The fertilization of Albugo Candida. Bot. Gaz. 29: 297-311.
1900.
Oogenesis in Saprolegnia. Bot. Gaz. 35: 233-249, 320-349. 1903.
Day, Howard Calvin. Studies on the contractile vacuole in Spirostomum and Paramecium. Physiol. Zool. 3: 56-71. 1930.
Deflandre, Georges. Sur la structure des flagellcs. Ann. Protistol. 4: 31-54. 1934.
Delage, Yves, and Edgard Herouard. Traite de zoologie concrete, vols. 1, 2, 5, 8.
.
Paris. 1896-1901.
DeLamater, Edward
sis
D.,
and Mary Elizabeth Hunter. Preliminary report of true mitomegatherium. American Jour. Bot. 38: 659-
in the vegetative cell of Bacillus
662. 1951.
,
Sidney Yaverbaum, and Lucille Schwartz.
The
nuclear cytology of
American Jour. Bot. 40: 475-492. 1953.
Dennis, Emery Westervelt. The morphology and binary fission of Babesia bigemina of
Texas cattle fever. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 33: 179-192. 1930.
Diesing, K. M. Revision der Prothclminthen. Abtheilung: Mastigophoren. Sitzber.
Akad. Wiss. Wien Math.-nat. CI. 52, Abt. I: 287-401. 1866.
Diller, William F. Nuclear reorganization processes in Paramecium aurelia, with descriptions of autogamy and 'hemixis.' Jour. Morph. 59: 11-67. 1936.
Eremascus
albus.
Bibliography
Dobell, Clifford.
The
structure
and
life
[
history of
Copromonas
245
subtilis nov. gen. et
nov. spec: a contribution to our knowledge of flagellates. Quart. Jour. Micr.
Sci. n.
s.
52: 75-120. 1908.
On
.
Cristispira veneris nov. spec,
the spirochaets. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci. n.
and the
s.
affinities
and
classification of
56: 507-541. 1911.
and A, Pringle Jameson. The chromosome cycle in coccidia and greRoy. Soc London B 89: 83-94. 1915.
The life-history and chromosome cycle of Aggregata eberthi [Protozoa:
garines. Proc.
Sporozoa: Coccidia]. Parasitology 17: 1-136. 1925.
B. O. Nuclear phenomena associated with heterothallism and homothallism
in the ascomycete Neurospora. Jour. Agr. Res. 35: 289-305, 1937.
Some problems in the genetics of the Fungi. Science 90: 379-385. 1939.
Doflein, Franz. Die Protozoen als Parasiten und Krankheitserreger
Jena. 1901.
Lehrbuch der Protozoenkunde. [The work of 1901 is construed as the
Dodge,
.
.
.
.
.
first
Third edition, 1911; fourth
Eduard Reichenow, 1927-1929.
edition.] Jena.
vised by
edition, 1916; fifth edition, re-
Rhizochrysis. Zool. Anz. 47: 153-158. 1916.
.
Beitrage zur Kenntnis von Bau und Teilung der Protozoenkeme. Zool.
Anz. 49: 289-306. 1918.
Untersuchungen iiber Chrysomonadinen. Arch. Prot. 44: 149-213. 1922.
Dogiel, V. A. Monographic der Familie Ophryoscolecidae Teil I. Arch. Prot. 59:
.
1-288. 1927.
Drechsler, Charles.
Morphology
of the genus Actinomyces. Bot. Gaz.
67:
65-83,
147-168. 1919.
•
.
Some
conidial Phycomycetes destructive to terricolous amoebae.
My-
cologia 27: 6-40. 1935.
Some non-catenulate conidial Phycomycetes preying on terricolous
amoebae. Mycologia 27: 176-205. 1935.
-.
New Zoopagaceae destructive to soil rhizopods. Mycologia 29: 229.
249. 1937.
Drew, Kathleen M. The organization and inter-relationships of the carposporophytes
of living Florideae. Phytomorphology 4: 55-69. 1954.
Duboscq, O., and O. Tuzet. L'ovogenese, la fecondation et les premiers stades du
developpement des eponges calcaires. Arch. Zool. Exp. Gen. 79: 157-316. 1937.
Dufour, Leon. Recherches anatomiques sur les carabiques et sur plusieurs autres
insectes coleopteres. Ann. Sci. Nat. 8: 5-54. 1826.
Note sur la gregarine, nouveau genre de ver qui vit en troupeau dans les
intestins de divers insectes. Ann. Sci. Nat. 13: 366-368. 1828.
Dujardin, Felix. Observations sur les rhizopodes et les infusoires. Compt. Rend. 1
—
.
338-340. 1835.
.
Recherches sur
les
organismes inferieurs. Ann.
Sci.
Nat. Zool.
ser. 2,
4:
343-377. 1835.
Histoire naturelle des zoophytes. Infusoires. Paris. 1841.
Eckstein, Gustav. Noguchi.
New
York and London. 1931.
Edgerton, C. W. Plus and minus strains in the genus Glomerella. American Jour.
Bot. 1: 244-254. 1914.
Editorial Board of the monograph on the chemistry of penicillin. The chemical study
of penicillin: a brief history. Science 105: 653-659. 1947.
246
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Ehrenberg, Christian Gottfried. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Organisation der Infusorien und ihrer geograpliischen Verbreitung, besonders in Siberian. Abh. Akad.
Wiss. Berlin 1830: 1-88. 1832.
Die Infusionsthierchen
.
als
volkommene Organismen. Ein
Blick in das tiefe
organische Leben der Natur. Leipzig. 1838.
t)ber die Bildung der Kreidefelsen und des Kreidemengels durch unsichtbare Organismen. Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1838: 59-147. 1939.
Eidam, Eduard. Basidiobolus, eine neue Gattung der Entomophthoraceen.
Pfl.
Beitr. Biol.
181-251. 1886.
4:
Month. 58: 405-409. 1944.
Eugene W. The swarm-cells of Myxomycetes. Mycologia 41
Elder, Albert L. Penicillin. Sci.
Elliott,
141-170. 1949.
:
David. Iron bacteria. New York. 1916.
Ellison, Bernard R. Flagellar studies on zoospores of some members of the Mycetozoa,
Plasmodiophorales, and Chytridiales. Mycologia 37: 444-459. 1945.
Emerson, Ralph. Life cycles in the Blastocladiales. Trans. British Myc. Soc. 23: 123.
Ellis,
1939.
An experimental study of the
Lloydia4: 77-144.1941.
.
cycles
life
and taxonomy of Allomyces.
and Edward C. Cantino. The isolation, growth, and metaboHsm of
American Jour. Bot. 35: 157-171. 1948.
and Charles M. Wilson. The significance of meiosis in Allomyces. Sci-
Blastocladia in pure culture.
ence 110: 86-88. 1949.
Enderlein, Giinther. Grundelemente der vergleichenden Morphologic und Biologic
der Bakterien. Sitzber. Gess. naturf. Freunde Berlin 1916: 403-406. 1916.
.
Ein neues Bakteriensystem auf vergleichend morphologischer GrundFreunde Berlin 1917: 309-319. 1917.
BerHn and Leipzig. 1925.
Bakterien-Cyklogenie
Genera plantarum secundum ordines naturales disposita. Vienna. 1836-
lage. Sitzber. Gess. naturf.
-.
EndHcher,
.
S.
.
.
1840.
Engelmann, Th. W. Die Purpurbacterien und
ihre
Bcziehungen zum Licht. Bot. Zeit.
46: 661-669, 677-689, 693-701, 709-720. 1888.
Engler, Adolf, and K. Prantl. Die Natiirlichen Pflanzenfamilicn. 20 vols. Leipzig.
1889-1909.
Syllabus der Vorlesungen iibcr specielle und mcdicinisch-pharmaceuBerlin. 1892.
Botanik
Das PflanzenUbersicht iiber die GliederunGT dcs "Pflanzenrcich"
.
tisch
.
.
.
.
.
reich Heft
1
.
.
v-vii. 1900.
:
[The syllabus of 1892 is construed
Syllabus der Pflanzenfamilicn
Third edition, 1903; ninth and tenth edition, with E. Gilg,
.
.
.
as the first edition.]
1924.
Entz, Geza.
Uber
die mitotische Tielung
von Ccratium hirundinclla. Arch.
Prot. 43:
415-430. 1921.
Erdmann, Rhoda. Die Entwicklung der
Sarcocystis muris in dor Muskulatur. Sitzber.
Gess. naturf. Freunde Berlin 1910: 377-387. 1910.
David G. Ueber Kerntheilung und Befruchtung bci Basidiobolus ranarum
Eidam. Jahrb. wiss. Bot. 30: 285-296. 1897.
Falkcnberg, P. Die Befruchtung und dor Generationswechsel von Cutlcria. Mittheil.
zool. Stat. Neapel 1: 420-447. 1879.
Fairchild,
Bibliography
Farmer,
Bretland, and J. LI. Williams.
J.
On
247
[
fertilization
and segmentation of the
spore in Fucus. Ann. Bot. 10: 479-487. 1896.
Faull, J. H. The morphology, biology
Internat. Congr. PI. Sci. Ithaca ^2:
and phylogeny
of the Pucciniastreae. Proc.
1735-1745. 1929.
A note on the flagellation of Phytophthora infestans (Mont.)
de Bary. Science 120: 71-72. 1954.
Ferris, Virginia Rogers.
Fischer, Alfred.
Ueber
die Geisseln einiger Flagellaten. Jahrb. wiss. Bot. 26:
187-
235. 1894.
Untersuchungen iiber Bakterien. Jahrb. wiss. Bot. 27: 1-163. 1895.
Harry M. The cytology of Eocronartium muscicola. American Jour. Bot.
.
Fitzpatrick,
5: 397-419. 1918.
Hideo Noguchi. A biographical sketch. Science 69: 653-660. 1929.
Bohuslav. Tiber den inneren Bau von Vacuolaria viridis (Dangeard) Senn.
Arch. Prot. 84: 242-250. 1935.
Flexner, Simon.
Fott,
Fournier, Eugene (editor). Actes du Congres International de Botanique tenu a Paris
en aout"l867. Paris. 1867.
La flagellose des euphorbes. Arch. Prot. 34: 108-132. 1914.
Franck, James, and Walter E. Loomis. Photosynthesis in plants. Ames, Iowa. 1949.
Frank, B. Ueber die Parasiten in den Wurzelanschwellungen der Papilionaceen. Bot.
Zeit. 37: 377-388, 393-400. 1879.
Franga, Carlos.
Ueber die auf Wurzelsymbiose beruhende Ernahrung gewisser Biiume
durch unterirdische Pilze. Ber. deutschen bot. Gess. 3: 128-145. 1885.
Fries, Elias. Systema mycologicum, sistens Fungorum ordines, genera et species, hue
usque cognitas ... 3 vols. Lund. 1821-1832.
Epicrisis systematis mycologici, seu synopsis Hymenomycetum. Lund.
.
.
1836-1838.
Hymenomycetes europaei
altera.
sive epicriseos systematis mycologici editio
Upsala. 1874.
Fritsch, F. E.
The
structure
and reproduction of the
algae. 2 vols.
Cambridge. 1935,
1945.
C, G. B. Rigg, and W. C. Crandall. The size of kelps on the Pacific Coast
North America. Bot. Gaz. 60: 473-482. 1915.
Galloway, J. J. A manual of Foraminifera. Bloomington, Indiana. 1933.
Gams, Helmut. Die Protochlorinae als autotrophe Vorfahren von Pilzen and Tieren ?
Frye, T.
of
Mikroscopie 2: 383-387. 1947.
Gardner, Nathaniel Lyon. Cytological studies in Cyanophyceae. Univ. California
Publ. Bot. 2: 237-296. 1906.
Gaumann,
Ernst. Vergleichende
Morphologic der
Pilze. Jena. 1926.
W. Dodge. New York and London. 1928.
Gay, Frederick P. The unsolved problems of leprosy. Science
tion
English transla-
by C.
81: 283-285. 1935.
Der Zellbau von Glaucocystis Nostochinearum und Gloeochaete
Wittrockiana und die Chromatophoren-symbiosetheorie von Mereschkowsky.
Geitler, Lothar.
Arch. Prot. 47: 1-24. 1923.
.
Die reduktionsteilung und Copulation von Cymbella lanceolata. Arch.
Prot. 58: 465-507. 1927.
-.
Somatische Teilung, Reduktionsteilung, Copulation und Parthenogenese
bei Cocconeis placentula. Arch. Prot. 59: 506-549. 1927.
-.
Porphyridium sordidum
76: 595-604. 1932.
n. sp. eine
neue Siisswasserbangiale. Arch. Prot.
248
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Gicklhorn, Josef. Notiz iiber den durch Chromulina smaragdina nov. spec, bedingten
Smaragdglanz des Wasserspiegels. Arch. Prot. 44: 219-226. 1922.
Frank A. Factors influencing the germination of myxomycetous spores.
American Jour. Bot. 16: 280-286. 1929.^
Spore germination in the Myxomycetes: a comparative study of spore
germination by families. American Jour. Bot. 16: 421-432. 1929.
Gilbert, Henry C. Critical events in the life history of Ceratiomyxa. American Jour.
Gilbert,
.
Bot. 22: 52-74. 1935.
Ueber die Classification der Zoophyten. Isis 1818: 1008-1013. 1818.
Gomont, Maurice. Monographic des oscillariees (nostochacees homocytees). Ann.
Goldfuss, August.
Sci. Bot. sen 7, 15: 263-368. 1892.
Goodrich, Helen Pixell. Nina: a remarkable gregarine. Quart. Jour. Micr.
Sci. n.
s.
81: 107-126. 1938.
C
Die Cytologic von Noctiluca miliaris im Lichte der neueren
den Kernbau der Protisten. Arch. Prot. 39: 147-208. 1918.
Granata, Leopoldo. Richerche sul ciclo evolutive di Haplosporidium limnodrili
van Goor, A.
Theorien
J.
iiber
Granata. Arch. Prot. 35: 47-79. 1914.
.
Gh
attinomissidi.
Morphologia
—sviluppo —sistematica.
Arch.
Prot.
50: 139-212. 1925.
Grasse, Pierre P. (Editor). Traite de Zoologie. Anatomic, systematique, biologic.
Paris, vols.
Grassi, B.,
and
1
A
—
.
1952
Foa.
Rcndiconti CI.
—
.
Intomo
Sci. 20, 1°
ai
protozoi dei termitidi. Atti Accad. Lincei
Flagellati viventi nei termitidi.
.
ser. 5,
Semestre: 725-741. 1911.
Mem.
Accad. Lincei CI.
12:
Sci. ser. 5,
231-394. 1917.
Richard. Pelomyxa palustris (Pclobius), ein amobenartiger Organismus des
Wassers. Arch. mikr. Anat. 10: 51-73. 1874.
Greville, Robert Kaye. Algae Britannicae, or descriptions of the marine and other
GreeflF,
siissen
inarticulated plants of the British Islands belonging to the order Algae
Edinburgh and London. 1830.
Gross, J. Sporenbildung bei Cristispira. Arch.
Gross, Catherine.
Gurley, R. R.
On
The
.
.
.
Prot. 29: 279-292. 1913.
cytology of Vaucheria. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 64: 1-15. 1937.
the classification of the Myxosporidia, a group of protozoan para-
sites infesting fishes. Bull.
United States Fish
Comm.
11: 407-420. 1893.
Haeckel, Ernst Heinrich. Die Radiolarien (Rhizopoda radiaria). Ein Monographic.
4 vols. Berlin. 1862-1888.
.
.
.
.
Generelle Morphologic. 2 vols. Berlin. 1866.
Monographic der Moneren. Jenaische Zeitschr. 4: 64-137. 1868.
Die Kalkschwamme. Eine Monographic ... 3 vols. Berlin. 1872.
Ueber die Phaeodarien, cine ncuc Gruppe kieselschaligcr mariner Rhiz-
opoden. Sitzber. Jenaische Gess. Med. u. Naturw. 1879: 151-157. 1879.
Entwurf eines Radiolarien-Systems auf Grund von Studien der Challenger-Radiolarien. Jenaische Zeitschr. 15: 418-472. 1882.
Report on the Radiolaria collected by H. M.
years 1873-1876. Rept. Voy. Challenger Zool. 18:
S.
i-viii,
Challenger during the
1-1803, plates 1-140.
1887.
Systematische Phylogcnie. 3 vols. Berlin. 1894-1896.
Hacker, V. t)ber Chromosomen- und Sporenbildung bei Radiolarien. Verhandl.
deutschen zool. Gess. 1907: 74-84. 1907.
Bibliography
Hall, Richard P.
Morphology and binary
fission of
[
Menoidium incurvum
249
(Fres.)
Klebs. Univ. CaUfornia Publ. Zool. 20: 447-476. 1923.
Binary fission in Oxyrrhis marina Dujardin. Univ. California Publ. Zool.
.
26: 281-324. 1925.
Mitosis in Ceratium hirundinella O. F. M., with notes on nuclear
in encysted forms and the question of sexual reproduction. Univ.
phenomena
California Publ. Zool. 28: 29-64. 1925.
and WiUiam N. Powell. Morphology and binary fission of Peranema
trichophorum (Ehrbg.) Stein. Biol. Bull. 54: 36-64. 1928.
and Theodore Louis Jahn. On the comparative cytology of certain
euglenid flagellates and the systematic position of the famiHes Euglenidae Stein
and Astasiidae Biitschli. Trans. American Micr. Soc. 48: 388-405. 1929.
The method of ingestion in Peranema trichophorum and its bearing on
the pharyngeal-rod ("Staborgan") problem in the Euglenida. Arch. Prot. 81:
308-317, 1933.
A
note on the flagellar apparatus of Peranema trichophorum and the
Peranemidae Stein. Trans. American Micr. Soc. 53: 237-244.
status of the family
1934.
.
A
note on behavior of chromosomes in Euglena. Trans. American Micr.
Soc. 56: 288-290. 1937.
in
and H. W. Schoenborn. Studies on the question of autotrophic nutrition
Chlorogonium euchlorum, Euglena anabaena, and Euglena deses. Arch. Prot.
90: 259-271. 1938.
trophic nature of the plant-like flagellates. Quart. Rev. Biol. 14:
The
1-12. 1939.
The
trophic nature of Euglena viridis. Arch. Zool. Exp. Gen. 80: notes
61-67. 1939.
and H. W. Schoenborn. Selective
effects of inorganic culture
media on
bacteria-free strains of Euglena. Arch. Prot. 93: 72-80. 1939.
The question of autotrophic nutrition in Euglena
and
.
graciUs. Physiol. Zool. 12:
and
of the ciliate,
76-84. 1939.
and old medium on growth
Colpidium campylum. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 43: 128-133.
J.
B. Loefer. Effects of culture filtrates
1940.
Vitamin deficiency as one explanation for inhibition of protozoan
growth by conditioned medium. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 47: 306-308. 1941.
and A. Schottenfeld. Maximal density and phases of death in populations of
Glaucoma
piriformis. Physiol. Zool. 14: 384-393. 1941.
Incomplete proteins as nitrogen sources, and their relation to vitamin
requirements in Colpidium campylum. Physiol. Zool. 15: 95-107. 1942.
and W. B. Cosgrove. The question of the synthesis of thiamin by the
ciliate.
Glaucoma
piriformis. Biol. Bull. 86: 31-40. 1944.
Comparative
effects of certain
vitamins on populations of
piriformis. Physiol. Zool. 17: 200-209. 1944.
and W. B. Cosgrove. Mineral deficiency as a factor limiting
the ciHate
Tetrahymena
geleii. Physiol.
Glaucoma
growth of
Zool. 18: 425-430. 1945.
Protozoology. New York. 1953.
Hanatschek, Herta. Der Phasenwechsel bei der Gattung Vaucheria. Arch. Prot. 78:
497-513. 1932.
250
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Hansen, H. N., and William C. Snyder. The dual phenomenon and sex
in
Hypomyces
American Jour. Bot. 30: 419-422. 1943.
Hanson, Anne Marie. A morphological, developmental, and cytological study of four
saprophytic chytrids. IV. Phlyctorhiza endogena gen. nov., sp. nov. American
solani
cucurbitae.
f.
Jour. Bot. 33: 732-739. 1946.
Harper, Robert A. Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Kerntheilung und Sporenbildung im
Ascus. Ber. deutschen bot. Gess. 13: (67) - (78). 1895.
Die Entwicklung des Peritheciums bei Sphaerotheca Castagnei. Ber
deutschen bot. Gess. 13: 475-481. 1895.
Kerntheilung und freie Zellbildung im Ascus. Jahrb. wiss. Bot. 30:
.
249-284. 1897.
.
Cell division in sporangia and asci. Ann. Bot. 13: 467-525. 1899.
.
Sexual reproduction in Pyronema confluens and the morphology of the
ascocarp. Ann. Bot. 14: 321-400. 1900.
Cell and nuclear division in Fuligo varians. Bot. Gaz. 30: 217-251. 1900.
.
Cleavage
in
Didymium melanospermum
(Pers.)
Macbr. American
Jour. Bot. 1: 127-144. 1914.
Hartmann, Max, and K. Nagler. Copulation bei Amoeba diploidea n. sp. mit Selbststandigbleiben der Gametenkerne wahrend des ganzen Lebenszyklus. Sitzber.
Gess. naturf. Freunde Berlin 1908: 112-125. 1908.
S. von Prowazek. Arch. Prot. 36: i-xii. 1915.
Hartog, Marcus. Protozoa, in Harmer, S. F., and A. E. Shipley. The Cambridge
.
Natural History 1: 3-162. 1909.
Harvey, William Henry. A manual of the British algae
London. 1841.
Haskins, R. H. Cellulose as a substratum for saprophytic chytrids. American Jour.
.
.
.
Bot. 26: 635-639. 1939.
Hatch, Winslow R. Gametogenesis
in
Allomyces arbuscula. Ann. Bot. 49: 623-649.
1935.
Haupt, Arthur W. Cell structure and
cell division in the
Cyanophyceae. Bot. Gaz.
75: 170-190. 1923.
Structure and development in Zonaria Farlowii. American Jour. Bot.
.
19: 239-254. 1932.
Heald, F. D., and R. C. Walton.
The
expulsion of ascospores from the perithecia of
the chestnut blight fungus, Endothia parasitica (Murr.) And.
American Jour.
Bot. 1: 499-521. 1914.
Hein,
Illo.
Studies on the mycelium of Psalliota campestris. American Jour. Bot. 17:
197-211. 1930.
.
Studies on morphogenesis in Agaricus (Psalliota) campestris. American
Jour. Bot. 17: 882-915. 1930.
Francis. The official record of the proceedings of the International Commission on Zoological Nomenclature at their session held in Paris in July, 1948.
Bull. Zool. Nomencl. 4: 1-648. 1950.
Hemming,
.
Zoological nomenclature: decisions taken by the Fourteenth Interna-
tional Congress of Zoology,
Copenhagen, August, 1953. Science 119: 131-133.
1954.
Henrici, Arthur T. Morphologic variation and the rate of growth of bacteria. Springfield
and Baltimore. 1928.
and Delia Johnson. Stalked
bacteria, a
new order
of Schizomycetes.
Jour. Bact. 29: 3-4. 1935.
and
a
new order
.
Studies of freshwater bacteria II. Stalked bacteria,
of Schizomycetes. Jour. Bact. 30: 61-94. 1935.
[251
Bibliography
Hertwig, Richard, and E. Lesser. Ueber Rhizopoden und denselben nahestandende
Organismen. Morphologische Studien. Arch. mikr. Anat. 10, Suppl. 35-243. 1874.
Zur Histologic der Radiolarien.
Ueber Leptodiscus medusoides,
.
.
Leipzig. 1876.
eine neue den Noctiluceen verwandte
Flagellate. Jenaische Zeitschr. 11: 307-323. 1877.
Der organismus der Radiolarien. Jena. 1879.
Ueber die Conjugation der Infusorien. Abh. Kgl. Bayerischen Akad.
.
-.
Wiss. Math.-phys CI. 17: 151-233. 1889.
life history and physiology of CyHnAmerican Jour. Bot. 1: 145-173. 1914.
Morphology and life history of some Ascomycetes with special reference
the presence and function of spermatia IL American Jour. Bot. 16: 287-296.
Higgins,
Bascombe
Britt.
drosporium on stone
Contribution to the
fruits.
.
to
1929.
Higgins, E. Marion.
A
cyto logical investigation of Stypocaulon scoparium (L.) Kiitz.,
with especial reference to the unilocular sporangia. Ann. Bot. 45: 345-353. 1931.
Hillier, James, Stuart Mudd, and Andrew G. Smith. Internal structure and nuclei in
cells of Escherichia coli as shown by improved electron microscopic techniques.
Jour. Bact. 57: 319-338. 1949.
Hinshaw, H. Corwin. On the morphology and mitosis of Trichomonas buccalis
(Goodey) Kofoid. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 29: 159-174. 1926.
Hirsch, Hilde E. The cytogenetics of sex in Hypomyces solani var. cucurbitae. American Jour. Bot. 36: 113-121.1949.
Hofeneder, Heinrich. t)ber eine neue kolonienbildende Chrysomonadine. Arch. Prot.
29: 293-307. 1913.
Hofmeister, Wilhelm, Anton de Bary, Th. Irmisch, and Julius Sachs. Handbuch der
physiologischen Botanik. 4 vols. Leipzig. 1865-1877.
Hogg, John. On the distinction of a plant and an animal, and on a fourth kingdom of
nature. Edinburgh New Philos. Jour. n. s. 12: 216-225. 1860.
Hollenberg, George
J.
Culture studies of marine algae.
L
Eisenia arborea.
American
Jour. Bot. 26: 34-41. 1939.
Home, A. S. Nuclear division in the Plasmodiophorales. Ann. Bot. 44: 199-231. 1930.
Hovasse, Raymond. Contribution a I'ctude de I'appareil de Golgi des flagelles libres:
I'existence d'un corps parabasal chez
Cercomonas longicauda Duj. Arch. Zool.
Exp. Gen. 79, notes 43-46. 1937.
Howard, Frank L. The life histoiy of Physarum polycephalum. American Jour. Bot.
18: 116-133. 1931.
.
Nuclear division
in
plasmodia of Physarum. Ann. Bot. 46: 461-477.
1932.
Hutchinson, Henry Brougham, and James Clayton. On the decomposition of cellulose
by an aerobic organism (Spirochaeta cytophaga, n. sp.). Jour. Agr. Sci. 9: 143173. 1919.
Huth, Walther. Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der Thalassicollen. Arch. Prot. 30:
1-
124. 1913.
Huxley, Julian
S.
On Ganymedes
n.
s.
a gregarine from
(Thompson). Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci.
anaspidis (nov. gen., nov. sp.)
the digestive tract of Anaspides tasmaniae
:
55: 155-175. 1910.
Thomas Henry. Zoological notes and observations made on board H. M. S.
Rattlesnake. H. Upon Thalassicolla, a new zoophyte. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser.
Huxley,
2,8: 433-442. 1851.
252
The
]
A
.
manual
Lower Organisms
Classification of
anatomy
of the
of invertebrated animals.
London. 1877.
Ischikawa, C. Vorlaufige Mittheilungen iiber die Conjugationserscheinungen bei den
Noctiluceen. Zool. Anz. 14: 12-14. 1891.
Ishikawa, Matsuharu. Cytological studies on Porphyra tenera Kjellm.
Tokyo 35: 206-218. 1921.
Iyengar,
M. O.
I.
Bot.
Mag.
and R. Subrahmanyan. On reduction division and auxospore formMeneghiniana Kiitz. Jour. Indian Bot. Soc. 21: 231-237.
P.,
ation in Cyclotella
1942.
and
.
On
reduction division and auxospore formation in
Cyclotella Meneghiniana Kiitz. Jour. Indian Bot. Soc. 23:
125-152. 1944.
Jahn, Eduard. Myxomycetenstudien. 3. Kernteilung und Geisselbildung bei den
Schwarmern von Stemonitis flaccida Lister. Ber. deutschen bot. Gess. 22 84-92.
:
1904.
.
Myxomycetenstudien.
4.
Die Keimung der Sporen. Ber. deutschen
bot.
Gess. 23: 489-497. 1905.
Beitrage zur botanischen Protistologie.
1.
Die Polyangiden. Leipzig.
1924.
The
Jahn, Theodore Louis.
euglenoid flagellates. Quart. Rev. Biol. 21:
246-274.
1946.
James-Clark, H. [Preliminary abstract of the following.] Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist.
11:
16. 1866.
.
On
the Spongiae Ciliatae as Infusoria Flagellata; or, observations on
the structure, animality, and relationship of Leucosolenia botryoides, Bower-
bank. Mem. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. 1 305-340. 1868.
Jameson, A. Pringle. The chromosome cycle of gregarines, with special reference
:
Diplocystis schneideri Kunstler. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci. n.
Janicki, C.
Zur Kenntnis des Parabasalapparats
s.
to
64: 207-266. 1920.
bei parasitischen Flagellaten. Biol.
Centralbl. 31: 321-330. 1911.
.
Untersuchungen an parasitischen Flagellaten.
II. Teil.
Devescovina, Parajoenia, Stephanonympha, Calonympha.
apparat.
—Uber Kernkonstitution und
Die Gattungen
—Uber den Parabasal-
Kernteilung. Zeit. wiss. Zool. 112: 573-
691. 1915.
M. Sonneborn, A. C. Giese, L. C. Gilman, and R. F.
Kimball. Mating types and their interactions in the ciliate infusoria. Biol. Symp.
Jennings, H. S. (editor), T.
1:
117-188. 1940.
Johns, Robert M., and R. K. Benjamin. Sexual reproduction in Gonapodya. Mycologia 46: 201-208. 1954.
JoUos, Victor. Experimentelle Unterschungen an Infusorien. Biol. Centralbl. 33:
222-236. 1913.
Jones, George Neville.
On
the
number
of species of plants. Sci.
Month. 72: 289-294.
1951.
Edwin O., and I. S. Falk (editors) The newer knowledge of bacteriology and
immunology. Chicago. 1928.
Juel, H. O. Uebcr Zellinhalt, Befruchtung und Sporenbildung bei Dipodascus. Flora
Jordan,
.
91: 47-55. 1902.
Kahl, A. Ctenostomata (Lauterborn) n. subordo. Vierte Unterordnung der Heterotricha. Arch. Prot. 77: 231-304. 1932.
Kampter, Erwin. Die Coccolithineen der Siidwestkiiste von Istrien. Ann. Naturhist.
Staatsmus.
Wien
51
:
54-149. 1940.
Bibliography
[
253
Tiyoiti. On the gametophytes of some Japanese species of Laminariales. Sci.
Papers Inst. Alg. Res. Hokkaido Imp. Univ. 1 221-260. 1936; 2: 87-111. 1938.
Kanouse, Bessie Bernice. A monographic study of special groups of the water molds
Kanda,
:
American Jour. Bot. 14: 278-306. 1927.
monographic study of special groups of the water molds II. Leptomitaceae and Pythiomorphaceae. American Jour Bot. 14: 335-357. 1927.
Karhng, John S. A preliminary descriptive study of a parasitic monad in cells of
American Characeae. American Jour. Bot. 17: 928-937. 1930.
Studies in the Chytridiales VI. The occurrence and life history of a
new species of Cladochytrium in cells of Eriocaulon septangulare. American
I.
Blastocladiaceae.
.
A
.
Jour. Bot. 18: 526-557. 1931.
The cytology of the Chytridiales with special reference to Cladochytrium repHcatum. Mem. Torrey Bot. Club 19, no. 1: 1-92. 1937.
A new fungus with anteriorly uniciliate zoospores: Hyphochytrium
.
.
catenoides.
.
.
American Jour. Bot. 26: 512-519. 1939.
The Plasmodiophorales
New York. 1942.
Parasitism among the chytrids. American Jour. Bot. 29: 24-35. 1942.
The life history of Anisolpidium Ectocarpii gen. nov. et sp. nov., and
.
.
.
a synopsis and classification of other fungi with anteriorly uniflagellate zoospores.
American Jour. Bot. 30: 637-648. 1943.
Phagomyxa algarum n. gen., n. sp., an unusual parasite with plasmodiophoralean and proteomyxean characteristics. American Jour. Bot. 31: 38-52.
.
1944.
American Jour. Bot. 31: 391-397. 1944.
and Chytriomyces, two new
chitinophyllic operculate genera. American Jour. Bot. 32: 362-369. 1945.
Keratinophilic chytrids. I. Rhizophidium keratinophilum n. sp., a
saprophyte isolated on human hair, and its parasite, Phlyctidium mycetophagum
n. sp. American Jour. Bot. 33: 751-757. 1946.
Keratinophilic chytrids. II. Phlyctorhiza variabilis n. sp. American
.
.
Brazilian anisochytrids.
Brazilian chytrids. VI. Rhopalophlyctis
Jour. Bot. 34: 27-32. 1947.
An Olpidium
parasite of
AUomyces. American Jour. Bot. 35: 503-510.
1948.
Karsten, G. Die Auxosporenbildung der Gattungen Cocconeis, Surirella, und Cymatopleura. Flora 87: 253-283. 19^00.
.
Die
sogenannte
"Mikrosporen"
der
Planktondiatomeen
weitere Entwicklung, beobachtet an Corethron Valdiviae
bot. Gess. 22:
544-554.
n. sp. Ber.
und
ihre
deutschen
1904.
Keene, Mary Lucille. Cytological studies of the zygospores of Sporodinia grandis.
Ann. Bot. 28: 455-470. 1914.
Studies of zygospore formation in Phycomyces nitens Kunze. Trans.
Wisconsin Acad. 19: 1195-1220. 1919.
Keitt, G. W., and M. H. Langford. Venturia inaequalis (Cke.) Wint. I. A ground.
work
American Jour. Bot. 28: 805-820. 1941.
Mycotrophy in plants. Waltham, Massachussctts. 1950.
Kent, WiUiarn Saville. A manual of the Infusoria: including a description of all
known flagellate, ciliate, and tentaculiferous Protozoa. British and foreign, and
an account of the organization and affinities of the sponges. 3 vols. London.
for genetic studies.
Kelley, Arthur P.
1880-1882.
Keuten, Jacob. Die Kerntheilung von Euglcna
60: 215-235. 1895.
viridis
Ehrenberg. Zeitfl wiss. Zool.
254
The
]
Keysselitz, G.
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Uber Trypanophis grobbeni (Trypanosoma grobbeni Poche). Arch.
Prot. 3: 367-375. 1904.
Kidder, George W. Streblomastix strix, morphology and mitosis. Univ. California
Publ. Zool.33: 109-124. 1929.
Kimball, Richard F. Mating types in the
ciliate Infusoria.
Quart. Rev. Biol. 18:
30-45. 1943.
King, Robert
L.,
and Theodore Louis Jahn. Concerning the genera
of amebas. Science
107: 293-294. 1948.
Kirby, Harold, Jr. The intestinal flagellates of the termite, Cryptotermes hermsi
Kirby. Univ. Calif. Publ. Zool. 29: 103-120. 1926.
Studies on some amoebae from the termite Mirotermes, with notes on
some other Protozoa from the Termitidae. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci. n. s. 71 189.
:
222. 1927.
A species of Proboscoidella from Kalotermes (Cryptotermes) dudleyi
Banks, a termite of Central America, with remarks on the oxymonad flagellates.
Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci. n. s. 72: 355-386. 1928.
.
Snyderella and Coronympha, two
.
lates
from
new genera
of multinucleate flagel-
termites. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 31: 417-432. 1929.
-.
Trichomonad flagellates from termites I. Tricercomitus gen. nov., and
Hexamastix Alexeieff. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 33: 393-444. 1930.
Trichomonad flagellates from termites II. Eutrichomastix, and the
subfamily Trichomonadinae. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 36: 171-262. 1931.
Host-parasite relationships in the distribution of Protozoa in termites.
Univ. California Publ. Zool. 41 189-212. 1937.
The devescovinid flagellates Caduceia theobromae Franga, Pseudodevescovina ramosa new species, and Macrotrichomonas pulchra Grassi. Univ. Cali:
fornia Publ. Zool. 43: 1-40. 1939.
Observations on a trichomonad from the intestine of man. Jour, Parasitol.
29: 422-423. 1943.
Jour.
Some observations on cytology and morphogenesis in flagellate protozoa.
Morph. 75: 361-421. 1944.
-.
Flagellate and host relationships of trichomonad flagellates. Jour.
Parasitol. 33 214-228. 1947.
Klebs, Georg. Flagellatenstudien. Zeit. wiss. Zool. 55: 265-351, 353-445. 1893.
:
Knasyi, Georges.
The
cell structure
and
cell division of Bacillus subtilis. Jour. Bact.
19: 113-115. 1930.
Elements of bacterial cytology. Ithaca, New York, 1944.
Kniep, H. AUomyces javanicus n. sp., ein anisogamer Phycomycet mit Planogameten.
Ber. deutschen bot. Gess. 47: 199-212. 1929.
Knight, Margery. Studies in the Ectocarpaccae. I. The life-history and cytology of
^Phylaiella litoralis, Kjellm. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh 53: 343-360. 1923.
Studies in the Ectocarpaccae. It. The life-history and cytology of
Ectocarpus siliculosus, Dillw. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh 56: 307-332. 1929.
Kofoid, Charles Atwood. New species of dinoflagcllates. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool.
.
.
Harvard 50: 163-207. 1907.
and Elizabeth Bohn Christianson.
On binary and multiple fission in
Giardia muris (Grassi). Univ. California Publ. Zool. 16: 30-54. 1915.
and Olive Swezy. Mitosis in Trichomonas. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 1 315:
321. 1915.
Bibliography
and
blomastix
255
[
Studies on the parasites of the termites I. On Strepolymastigote flagellate with a linear plasmodial phase. Univ.
.
strix, a
California Publ. Zool. 20: 1-20. 1919.
and
Studies on the parasites of the termites II.
.
On
Tri-
chomitus termitidis, a polymastigote flagellate with a highly developed neuromotor system. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 20: 21-40. 1919.
and
Studies on the parasites of the termites III. On Trichonympha campanula sp. nov. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 20: 41-98. 1919.
and
Studies on the parasites of the termites IV. On
Leidyopsis sphaerica gen. nov., sp. nov. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 20: 99-116.
.
.
1919.
A critical review of the nomenclature of human intestinal flagellates,
Cercomonas, Chilomastix, Trichomonas, Tetratrichomonas, and Giardia. Univ.
.
California Publ. Zool. 20: 145-168. 1920.
On
and Olive Swezy.
mania
lafleuri,
the free, encysted,
amoeba
a parasitic
of the
human
and budding
intestine.
stages of CouncilUniv. California Publ.
Zool. 20: 169-198. 1921.
and
The
.
Univ. California 5:
and
.
symmetry
dinoflagellates.
Mem.
Mitosis and fission in the active and encysted phases
of Giardia enterica (Grassi) of
bilateral
unarmored
free-living
1-562. 1921.
i-viii,
man, with
a discussion of the
method
of origin of
in the polymastigote flagellates. Univ. California Publ. Zool.
20: 199-234. 1922.
and
row
.
Mitosis in
Endamoeba
The
.
life
cycle of the Protozoa. Science n.
and Olive Swezy. Karyamoeba
intestinal tract.
Endamoeba
s.
57: 397-408. 1923.
new amoeba from
the
human
chromosomes and type of
mitosis
falcata, a
Univ. California Publ. Zool. 26: 221-242. 1924.
and
in
dysenteriae in the bone mar-
in arthritis deformans. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 20: 301-307. 1922.
.
On
the
number
of
dystenteriae. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 26: 331-352. 1925.
Karyamoebina substituted for Karyamoeba, with a
occurrence in man. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 26: 435-436. 1925.
On Oxymonas, a flagellate with an extensile and
and
and
note on
.
its
.
retractile proboscis
from Kalotermes from
British Guiana. Univ. California
Publ. Zool. 28: 285-300. 1926.
A conspectus of the marine and freshbelonging to the suborder Tintinnoinea, with descriptions of new
species principally from the Agassiz expedition to the eastern tropical Pacific
1904-1905. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 34: 1-403. 1929.
Koidzumi, Makoto. Studies on the intestinal Protozoa found in the termites of Japan.
and Arthur Shackleton Campbell.
water
ciliata
Parasitiology 13: 235-309. 1921.
Kolk. Laura A. A comparison of the filamentous iron organisms, Clonothrix fusca
Roze and Crenthrix polyspora Cohn. American Jour. Bot. 25: 11-17. 1938.
Kukzynski, Max H. Untersuchungen an Trichomonaden. Arch. Prot. 33: 119-204.
1914.
Kudo, Richard R. Studies on Myxosporidia. Illinois Biol. Monogr. 5: 239-506. 1920.
A biological and taxonomic study of the Microsporidia. Illinois Biol.
Monogr. 9: 77-344. 1924.
.
256
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Observations on Lophomonas blattarum, a flagellate inhabiting the
colon of the cockroach, Blatta orientaHs. Arch. Prot. 53: 191-214. 1926.
Handbook of protozoology. Springfield and Baltimore. 1931. Third
.
edition. 1946.
W. von Schuckmann. Uber den Bau und die Teilungserschinungen
von Trypanosoma brucei (Plimmer u. Bradford). Sitzber. heidelberger Akad.
Wiss., Math.-nat. Kl., 1911, Abh. 11: 1-21. 1911.
Uber Bau, Teilung und Encystierung von Bobo edax Klebs. Arch. Prot.
Kiihn, Alfred, and
.
35: 212-255. 1915.
Kunieda, Hiroshi. On the development of the sexual organs and embryogeny in
Sargassum Horneri Ag. Jour. Coll. Agr. Tokyo Imp. Univ. 9: 383-396. 1928.
Kiitzing, Friedrich Traugott. Phycologia generalis oder Anatomic, Physiologic und
Systemkunde der Tange. Leipzig. 1843.
Phycologia germanica, d. i. Deutschland's Algen
Nordhausen. 1845.
Kylin, Harald. Uber den Bau der Spermatozoiden der Fucaceen. Ber. deutschen bot.
.
.
.
.
Gess. 34: 194-201. 1916.
.
Uber den Generationswechsel
bei
Laminaria
digitata.
Svensk Bot.
Tidskr. 10: 551-561. 1916.
.
Uber
die
Keimung
der Florideensporen. Arkiv for Bot. 14, no. 22: 1-25.
1917.
Studien iiber die Entwicklungsgeschichte der Florideen. Kgl. Svenska
Vetensk.-Akad. Handl. 63, no. 11: 1-139. 1923.
Studien iiber Delesseriaceen. Kgl. Fysiog. Sallsk. Handl. n. f. 35, no. 6:
.
1-111. 1924.
The marine red algae in the vicinity of the biological station at Friday
Harbor, Wash. Kgl. Fysiog. Sallsk. Handl. n. f. 36, no. 9: 1-87. 1925.
Entwicklungsgeschichtliche Florideenstudien. Kgl. Fysiog.
Sallsk.
Handl. n. f. 39, no. 4: 1-127. 1928.
.
Uber
Handl.
n.
.
f.
die Entwicklungsgeschichte
der Florideen. Kgl. Fysiog. Sallsk.
41, no. 6: 1-104. 1930.
Some
physiological remarks on the relationship of the Bangiales. Bot.
Notiser 1930: 417-420. 1930.
.
Die Florideenordnung Gigartinales. Kgl. Fysiog.
Sallsk.
Handl.
n.
f.
43, no. 8: 1-88. 1932.
Ueber die Entwicklungsgeschichte der Phaeophyceen. Kgl. Fysiog.
Handl. n. f. 44, no. 7: 1-102. 1933.
Zur Kenntniss der Entwicklungsgeschichte einiger Phaeophyceen. Kgl.
Fysiog. Sallsk. Handl. n. f. 45, no. 9: 1-18. 1934.
-.
Uber Rhodomonas, Platymonas, und Prasinocladus. Kgl. Fysiog. Sallsk.
Sallsk.
.
Forhandl.
5, no.
Uber
22: 1-13. 1935.
eine marine Porphyridium-Art. Kgl. Fysiog. Sallsk. Forhandl. 7,
no. 10: 1-5. 1937.
Bermcrkungen
iiber die
Entwicklungsgeschichte einiger Phaeophyceen.
Kgl. Fysiog. Sallsk. Handl. n. f. 48, no. 1 1-34. 1937.
Zur Biochemie der Rhodophyceen. Kgl. Fysiog. Sallsk. Forhandl. 13,
:
no. 6: 1-13. 1943.
Zur Biochemie der Cyanophyceen. Kgl.
no. 7: 1-14. 1943.
Fysiog. Sallsk. Forhandl. 13,
Bibliography
[
257
Labbe, Alphonse. Sporozoa. Thierreich Lief. 5: i-xx, 1-180. 1899.
de Lamarck, J.-B.-P.-A. Philosophic Zoologique ... 2 vols. Paris. 1809.
.
Lamouroux,
Histoire naturelle des
animaux
sans vertebres. 7 vols. Paris. 1815-1822.
V. F. Essai sur les genres de la famille des thalassiophytes non articulees. Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris 20: 21-47, 115-139, 267-293. 1813.
Lander, Caroline A. Spore formation in Scleroderma lycoperdoides. Bot. Gaz. 95:
J.
330-337. 1933.
Lanjouw,
and
code of botanical nomanclature. Utrecht. 1952.
ranarum, the cell-parasite of the frog's blood and
spleen (Gaule's Wurmschen). Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci. n. s. 22: 53-65. 1882.
Protozoa, in Encyclopedia Britannica ed. 9, 19: 830-866. 1885.
Lauterborn, Robert. Untersuchungen iiber Bau, Kernteilung, und Bewegung der
Diatomen. Leipzig. 1896.
J.,
others. International
Lankester, E. Ray.
On Drepanidium
.
.
Protozoen-Studien. V. Teil. Zur Kenntnis einiger Rhizopoden und Infudem Gebiete des Oberrheins. Zeit. wiss. Zool. 90: 645-669. 1908.
sorien aus
Lebour, Marie V. The dinoflagellates of northern seas. Plymouth, England. 1925.
Lederberg, Joshua, and E. L. Tatum. Sex in bacteria: genetic studies, 1945-1952.
Science 118: 169-175. 1953.
Ledingham, G. A. Studies on Polymyxa graminis, n. gen. n. sp., a plasmodiophoraceous parasite on wheat. Canadian Jour. Res. 17 C: 38-51. 1939.
van Leeuwenhoeck, Antony. Observations communicated to the publisher in a Dutch
letter of the 9th of Octob. 1676. here English'd: Concerning little animals by
him observed in rain, well, sea, and snow-water; as also in water wherein pepper
hath lain infused. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. London 12: 821-831. 1677.
Leger, Louis. Les schizogregarines des tracheates. L Le genre Ophryocystis.
Arch.
Prot. 8: 159-202. 1907.
and O. Duboscq. L'evolution schizogonique de Aggregata (Eucoccidium) eberthi (Labbe). Arch. Prot. 12: 44-108. 1908.
Mycetozoairs endoparasites des insectes. L Sporomyxa scauri nov. gen.
nov. spec. Arch. Prot. 12: 109-130. 1908.
and O. Duboscq. Selenococcidium intermedium L6g. et Dub. et la systematique des sporozoaires. Arch. Zool. Exp. Gen. ser. 5, 5: 187-238. 1910.
Caryospora simplex, coccidie monosporee, et la classifiaction des coccidies. Arch. Prot. 22: 71-88. 1911.
and O. Duboscq. £tude sur Spirocystis nidula Leg. et Dub. schizogregarine du Lumbriculus variegatus Miill. Arch. Prot. 35: 199-211. 1915.
Leidy, Joseph. Fresh-water rhizopods of North America. Rept. U. S. Geol. Surv. Territories, vol. 12. 1879.
Lemmermann,
E. Silicoflagellatae. Ber. deutschen bot. Gess. 19: 247-271. 1901.
Leuckart, Rudolf. Die Parasiten der Menschen und die von ihnen herriihrenden
Krankheiten. vol. 1. [no more were issued]. Leipzig and Heidelberg. 1879-1901.
The
and development of lamellae in Agaricus campestris and
American Jour. Bot. 9: 509-533. 1922.
Lewis, Charles E. The basidium of Amanita bisporigera. Bot. Gaz. 41 348-352. 1906.
Lewis, Ivey F., and Conway Zirkle. Cytology and systematic position of Porphyridium
cruentum Naegeli. American Jour. Bot. 7: 333-340. 1920.
and Hilah F. Bryan. A new protophyte from the Dry Tortugas. AmeriLevine, Michael.
origin
in certain species of Coprinus.
:
can Jour. Bot. 28: 343-348. 1941.
:
258
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
On Hoplonympha natator gen. nov. sp. nov. a non-xylophagous hypermastigote from the termite, Kalotermes simphcicornis Banks, characterized by
biradial symmetry and a highly developed pellicle. Univ. California Publ. Zool.
Light, Sol F.
29: 123-140. 1926.
.
Kofoidia, a
new
flagellate,
from a CaHfornia
termite. Univ. California
Publ. Zool. 29: 467-492. 1927.
Linder, David H. Evolution of the Basidiomycetes and
of the basidium. Mycologia 32: 419-447. 1940.
its
relation to the terminology
Linnaeus, Carolus. Systema naturae sive regna
classes, ordines, genera,
Tenth
1907].
&
tria naturae systematice proposita per
Leyden. 1735 [Facsimile reprint. Stockholm.
Stockholm. 1758. Twelfth edition. 3 vols. Stock-
species.
edition. 2 vols.
holm. 1766-1768.
.
Species plantarum ... 2 vols. Stockholm. 1753.
.
Genera plantarum
.
.
.
6th ed. Stockholm. 1764.
On
Lister, Arthur.
the division of nuclei in the Mycetozoa. Jour. Linnaean Soc. Bot,
29: 529-542. 1893.
.
A
monograph
of the Mycetozoa being a descriptive catalogue of the
herbarium of the British Museum. London. 1894.
Contributions to the life-history of the Foraminifera. Phil. Trans. Roy.
species in the
Lister, J. J.
Soc.
London B
ihrer
186: 401-453. 1895.
Eine neue Methode
Loeffler, F.
Wimperhaare und
zum Farbung
der Mikroorganismen, in besonderen
Geisseln. Centralbl. Bakt. 6: 209-224. 1889.
Lohman, H. Die Coccolithophoridae,
eine
Monographic der Coccolithen bildenden
Flagellaten. Arch. Prot. 1: 89-165. 1902.
Lohnis,
-—
F.,
and N. R. Smith. Life
cycles of the bacteria. Jour. Agr. Res. 6: 675-702.
1916.
•
and
.
Studies upon the
life
cycles of the bacteria
— Part
Hfe history of Azotobacter. Jour. Agr. Res. 23: 401-432. 1923.
Longest, Pauline Moser. Structure of the cilia in Ectocarpus Mitchelliae and
decorticatum. Jour. Elisha Mitchell Soc. 62: 249-252. 1946.
Lucas, George Blanchard. Genetics of Glomerella. IV. Nuclear
ascus. American Jour. Bot. 33: 802-806. 1946.
II:
Codium
phenomena
in the
Lund, Everett Eugene. A correlation of the silverline and neuromotor systems of
Paramoecium. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 39: 35-76. 1933.
Luther, A. Ueber Chlorosaccus, eine neue Gattung der Siisswasseralgen, nebst einigen
Bemerkungen zur Systematik verwandter Algen. Bihang till kgl. Svenska Vetensk.-Akad. Handl. 24, Afd. Ill, no. 13: 1-22. 1899.
,
Luttrell, E. S.
Taxonomy
of the Pyrenomycetes. Univ. Missouri Studies 24 (no. 3)
1-120. 1951.
Copenhagen. 1819.
Lyngbye, Hans Christian. Tentamcn hydrographiae Danicac
Macbride, Thomas H. The North American slime-molds. New York and London.
.
.
.
1899. Second edition. 1922.
and G. W. Martin. The Myxomycetes.
MacLennan, Ronald
F.
oscolecidae, ciliates
The
New
York. 1934.
pulsatory cycle of the contractile vacuoles in the Ophry-
from the stomach of
cattle.
Univ. California Publ. Zool. 39:
205-250. 1933.
Dublin. 1836.
Mackay, James Townscnd. Flora Hibernica
Manton, I. The fine structure of plant cilia. Symp. Soc. Exp. Biol.
Martin, C. H. Observations on Trypanoplasma congeri. Part I.
.
.
.
6: 306-319. 1952.
—The
the active form. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci.
n.
s.
55: 485-496. 1910.
division of
Bibliography
M. The morphology and
Martin, Ella
[
259
cytology of Taphrina deformans. American
Jour. Bot. 27: 743-751. 1940.
Martin, G.
W. Morphology of Conidiobolus villosus. Bot. Gaz. 80: 311-318. 1925.
The genus Protodontia. Mycologia 24: 508-511. 1932.
Three new heterobasidiomycetes. Mycologia 26: 261-265. 1934.
Atractobasidium, a new genus of Tremellaceae. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club
.
.
.
62: 339-343. 1935.
A
.
new
type of heterobasidiomycete. Jour. Washington Acad. Sci. 27:
112-114. 1937.
New
or noteworthy Fungi from
Panama and Colombia.
I.
Mycologia
II.
Mycologia
29: 618-625. 1937.
New
.
or noteworthy Fungi from
Panama and Colombia.
30: 431-441. 1938.
.
Myxomycetes from Colombia. Trans. American Micr.
.
The morphology
Soc. 57: 123-126.
1938.
of the basidium.
American Jour. Bot. 25: 682-685.
1938.
New
or noteworthy Fungi from
Panama and Colombia.
III.
Mycologia
31: 239-249. 1939.
New
or noteworthy Fungi from
Panama and Colombia. IV. Mycologia
31: 507-518. 1939.
—-—
Notes on Iowa Fungi. VIII. Proc. Iowa Acad.
.
The genus
.
"Lycogalopsis."
De
Sci.
46: 89-95. 1939.
Lilloa 4: 69-73. 1939.
Notes on Iowa Fungi. IX. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 49: 145-152. 1942.
New or noteworthy tropical Fungi II. Lloydia 5: 158-164. 1942.
The generic name Auricularia. American Midi. Nat. 30: 77-82. 1943.
The numbers of Fungi. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 58: 175-178. 1951.
Matthews, Velma Dare. Studies on the genus Pythium. Chapel Hill, North Carolina.
.
.
.
1931.
Maupas, E. La rajeunissement karyogamique ches
les cilies.
Arch. Zool. Exp. Gen.
149-517. 1889.
ser. 2, 7:
McClintock, Barbara. Neurospora. I. Preliminary observations of the chromosomes
of Neurospora crassa. American Jour. Bot. 32: 671-678. 1945.
McKay, Hazel Hayden. The life history of Pterygophora californica Ruprecht. Univ.
California Publ. Bot. 17: 111-148. 1933.
McNab, W.
R.
On
—
Woroninaceae II. The cytology of Olpidiopsis
Torrey Bot. Club 68: 75-99. 1941.
the classification of the vegetable kingdom. Jour, of Bot. 15: 340-
McLarty, D. A. Studies
Achlyae sp. nov. (ad
in the
int.). Bull.
344. 1877.
Mense, Carl (editor). Handbuch der Tropenkrankheiten. 3 vols. Leipzig. 1905-1906.
473-480.
Mesnil, Felix. Les travaux recents sur les coccidies. Bull. Inst. Pasteur 1
:
1903.
Metcalf,
Maynard M. Opalina and
the origin of the Ciliata. Anat. Rec. 14: 88-89.
1918.
.
Sci. 8:
Opalina and the origin of the
The
i-vii,
ciliate Infusoria. Jour.
Washington Acad.
427-431. 1919.
opalinid ciliate infusorians. United States Nat. Mus. Bull. 120:
1-484. 1923.
Minchin, Edward Alfred. Investigations on the development of trypanosomes in the
tsetse-flies and other Diptera. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci. n. s. 52: 159-260. 1908.
260
The
]
.
The
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Trypanosoma
structure of
nique. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci. n.
s.
lewisi in relation to microscopical tech-
53: 755-808. 1909.
and H. M. Woodcock. Observations on certain blood-parasites of
occurring at Rovigno. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci. n. s. 55: 113-154. 1910.
Observations on the trypanosome of the
and
.
little
(Athene noctua) with remarks on the other protozoan parasites occurring
bird. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci. n.
.
An
s.
London. 1912.
D. Thomson. The rat-trypanosome, Trypanosoma lewisi,
the rat-flea, Ceratophyllus fasciatus. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci. n.
lation to
owl
in this
57: 141-185. 1911.
introduction to the study of the Protozoa
and
fishes
.
.
.
in re-
J.
s.
60:
463-692. 1915.
Mary B. Houlahan. Neurospora. IV. A temperature-sensimutant. American Jour. Bot. 33: 31-35. 1946.
Miwa, Tomoo. Biochemische Studien iiber die Zellmembran von Braun- und Rotal-
Mitchell, Herschel K., and
tive riboflavineless
gen. Japanese Jour. Bot. 11: 41-127. 1940.
Molisch, Hans. Die Purpurbakterien nach neuen Untersuchungen. Jena. 1907.
Moreau, Femand. Recherches sur la reproduction des Mucorinees et de quelques
Le Botaniste
autres Thallophytes.
Mme.
Moreau,
Les phenomenes de
F.
13:
1-136. 1913.
la sexualite
chez
les
uredinees.
Le Botaniste
13: 145-284. 1914.
Mottier, David
M. Das Centrosom
bei Dictyota. Ber. deutschen bot. Gess. 16:
123-
Dictyota dichotoma. Ann. Bot. 14:
163-
128. 1898.
.
Nuclear and
cell division in
192. 1900.
and A. Retzius. Ueber parasitische Bildung. Arch. Anat. Physiol.
1842: 193-212. 1842.
Uber die Thalassicollen, Polycystinen und Acanthometren des Mittel-
Miiller, Johannes,
.
meeres. Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1858: 1-62. 1859.
Miiller,
Otho
Vermium
Fredericus.
sorium helminthicorum
et
terrestrium et fluviatilum seu animalium infu-
testaceorum, non marinorum, succincta historia. 2
Copenhagen and Leipzig. 1773, 1774.
Copenhagen. 1786.
Animacula infusoria fluviatilia et marina
Otto. Durchbrechung der Zellwand in ihren Beziehungen zur Ortsbewegung
vols.
.
Miiller,
.
.
.
der Bacillariaceen. Ber. deutschen bot. Gess. 7: 169-180. 1889.
Die Ortsbewegung der Bacillariaceen IIL Ber. deutschen bot. Gess. 14:
.
54-64. 1896.
Mulsow, Karl. Uber Fortpflanzungserscheinungen
bei Monocystis rostrata n. sp. Arch.
Prot. 22: 20-55. 1911.
Myers, Earl H.
The
life
cycle of Patellina corrugata, a foraminifera. Science 79:
436-437. 1934.
.
The
life
history of Patellina corrugata Williamson a foraminifer. Bull.
Scrips Inst., Tech.
The
life
ser. 3:
genesis, systematics
ser. 3,
355-392. 1935.
cycle of Spirillina vivipara Ehrenberg, with notes
and
on morpho-
distribution of the Foraminifera. Jour. Roy. Micr. Soc.
56: 120-146. 1936.
Biology, ecology, and morphogenesis of a pelagic foraminifer. Stanford
Univ. Publ. Biol. Sci. 9: 1-40. 1943.
Myers, Margrct E. The life history of the brown alga, Egregia Menziesii. Univ.
-.
California Publ. Bot. 14: 225-246. 1928.
Bibliography
Nabel, Kurt. Uber die
Membran
[261
der niederer Pilze, besonders von Rhizidiomyces bi-
vellatus nov. spez. Arch. Mikrobiol. 10: 515-541. 1939.
Nageli, Carl. Gattungen einzelliger Algen physiologisch
Zurich. 1849.
und systematisch
bearbeitet.
On Tokophrya lemnarum Stein (Suctoria) with an account of its
budding and conjugation. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 37: 477-520. 1932.
Noble, Elmer R. The life cycle of Zygosoma globosum sp. nov. a gregarine parasite
Noble, Alden E.
of Urechis caupo. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 43: 41-66. 1938.
.
Jour.
Nuclear cycles
in the life history of the
Morph. 69: 455-479.
-.
protozoan genus Ceratomyxa.
1941.
Life cycles in the Myxosporidia. Quart. Rev. Biol. 19: 213-235. 1944.
Raymond C. Shanor, Evelyn B. Tilden, and Joseph R. Tyler. Phlebotomus and Oroya fever and verruga peruana. Science 68: 493-496. 1928.
Nowakowski, Leon. Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Chytridiaceen. IL Polyphagus EugleNoguchi, Hideo,
nae, eine Chytridiacee mit geschlechtlicher Fortpflanzung. Beitr. Biol.
Pfl.
2:
201-219. 1876.
Odum, Howard
T. Notes on the strontium content of sea water, celestite radiolaria,
and strontianite snail shells. Science 114: 211-213. 1951.
Olive, Edgar W. A preliminary enumeration of the Sorophoreae. Proc. American
Acad. 37: 333-344. 1901.
.
Monograph
of the Acrasieae. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. 30: 451-513.
1902.
.
Mitotic division of the nuclei of the Cyanophyceae. Beih. bot. Centralbl.
18: 9-44. 1904.
Cytological studies on the Entomophthoreae. Bot. Gaz. 41:
192-208,
229-261. 1906.
Karyogamy and meiosis in the rust Coleosporium Vemoniae. American Jour. Bot. 36: 41-54. 1949.
Oltmanns, Friedrich. Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der Florideen. Bot. Zeit. 56: 99-
Olive, Lindsay S.
140. 1898.
.
Morphologic und Biologic der Algen.
2 vols. Jena, 1904, 1905.
Second
edition. 3 vols. 1922, 1923.
Oparin, Alexander Ivanovitch. The origin of life. Translated by Sergius Morgulis.
New York. 1938.
d'Orbigny, Alcide Dessalines. Tableau methodique de la classe des cephalopodes.
Ann. Sci. Nat. 7: 96-169, 245-314. 1826.
Foraminiferes. in R. de la Sagra. Histoire
de I'ile de Cuba, vol. 8.
.
.
.
.
Paris. 1839.
Orla-Jensen, S. Die Hauptlinien des natiirlichen Bakteriensystems. Centralbl. Bakt.
Abt. 2, 22: 305-346. 1909.
Overholts, L. O. Research methods in the taxonomy of the Hymenomycetes. Proc.
Internat. Congr. PI. Sci. Ithaca 2: 1688-1712. 1929.
Owen, Richard. Palaeontology, or
a systematic
summary
of extinct animals
and
their
geological relations. Edinburgh. 1860. Second edition. 1861.
Papenfuss, George F. Structure and taxonomy of Taenioma, including a discussion of
the phylogeny of the Ceramiales. Madrofio 7: 193-214. 1944.
.
Review of the Acrochaetium-Rhodochorton complex
Univ. California Publ. Bot. 18: 299-334. 1945.
of the red algae.
262
The
]
.
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Proposed names for the phyla of algae. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 73
:
217-
218. 1946.
.
Extension of the brown algal order Dictyosiphonales to include the
Punctariales. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club. 74: 398-402. 1947.
Park, William Hallock,
Anne Wessels Williams, and Charles Krumweide. Pathogenic
8th ed. Philadelphia and New York. 1924.
Zur Gliederung der Heterokonten. Hedwigia 53: 6-22. 1912.
and others. Die Siisswasser-Flora Deutschlands, Osterreichs und der
microorganisms
.
.
.
Pascher, Adolf.
Schweiz. 15 Hefte. Jena. 1913-1936.
t)ber Flagellaten und Algen. Ber. deutschen bot. Gess. 32:
1914.
136-160.
—
—
t)ber eine neue Amobe
Dinamoeba (varians) mit dinoflagellatenSchwarmern. Arch. Prot. 36: 118-136. 1916.
Fusionsplasmodien bei Flagellaten und ihre Bedeutung fiir die Ableitung der Rhizopoden von den Flagellaten. Arch. Prot. 37: 31-64. 1916.
Die braune Algenreihe Chrysophyceen. Arch. Prot. 52: 489-564. 1925.
Eine Chrysomonade mit gestielten und verzweigten Kolonien. Arch.
.
artigen
.
Prot. 57: 319-330. 1927.
Eine eigenartige rhizopodiale Flagellate. Arch. Prot. 63: 227-240. 1928.
Zur Verwandtschaft der Monadaceae mit den Chrysomonaden: eine
gehausebewohnende, farblose Chrysomonade. Ann. Protistol. 2: 157-168. 1930.
Uber die Verfestigung des Propoplasten im Gehause einer neuen Euglenine (Klebsiella). Arch. Prot. 73: 315-322. 1931.
Systematische Ubersicht iiber die mit Flagellaten in Zusammenhang
stehenden Algenreihen und Versuch einer Einrichtung dieser Algenstamme in
.
die
Stamme
des Pflanzenreiches. Beih. bot. Cebtralbl. 48, Abt. 2: 317-332. 1931.
Ober die Verbreitung endogener bezw. endoplasmatisch gebildeter
Sporen bei den Algen. Beih. bot. Centralbl. 49, Abt. 1 293-308. 1932.
:
"Ober
drei
auffallend konvergente zu verschiedenen Algenreihen ge-
horende epiphytische Gattungen. Beih.
bot. Centralbl. 49, Abt.
Persoon, Christiaan Hendrik. Synopsis methodica
Perty, Maximilian.
Petersen,
Hennig
Zur Kenntniss
Filer.
kleinster
Fungorum
Lebensformen
.
.
.
1
:
549-568. 1932,
Gottingen. 1801.
Bern. 1852.
.
.
.
Studien over Ferskvands-Phycomyceter. Bot. Tidsskr. 29:
345-440. 1909.
Petersen, Jobs. Boye. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Flagellatengeisseln. Bot. Tidsskr. 40:
373-389. 1929.
Poche, Franz. Das System der Protozoa. Arch. Prot. 30: 125-321. 1913.
Pratje, Andre. Noctiluca miliaris Suriray. Beitrage zur Morphologic, Physiologic und
Cytologic. I. Morphologic und Physiologic (Beobachtungen an der Icbenden
Zelle). Arch. Prot. 42: 1-98. 1921.
Prevot, Andre-Romain. £tudes de systematique bactcriennc. Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot.
ser. 10,
15: 23-260. 1933.
Pribram, Ernst.
A
contribution to the classification of microorganisms. Jour. Bact.
18: 361-394. 1929.
Pringshcim, N. Ubcr die Befruchtung der Algen. Monatsber. Akad. Wiss. Berlin
1855: 133-165. 1855.
Prowazek, Stanislas. Die Entwicklung von Herpetomonas. Arb. kaiserl. Gesundhritsamtc20: 440-452. 1903.
Rabenhorst, Ludwig. Dcutschland's Kryptogamcn-Flora ... 2 vols. Leipzig. 1844,
1847.
Bibliography
———
[
263
Kryptogamen-Flora von Sachsen, der Ober Lausik, Thiiringen und
-
.
Nordbohmen ...
2 vols. Leipzig. 1863, 1870.
and others. Dr. L. Rabenhorst's Kryptogamen-Flora von Deutschland,
Oesterreich und der Schweiz
[construed as second edition of the work of
.
.
.
1844-1847.] 14 vols. Leipzig. 1879-1944.
Raper, John R. Tetrapolar sexuality. Quart. Rev. Biol. 28: 233-259. 1953.
Raper, Kenneth B. The communal nature of the fruiting process in the Acrasieae.
American Jour.
53:
Ritchie,
Bot. 27: 436-448. 1940.
H. L. Mitosis and
Ratcliffe,
cell division in
Euglena spirogyra Ehrenberg.
Biol. Bull.
109-122. 1927.
Don.
A fixation study of Russula
emetica. American Jour. Bot. 28
:
582-588.
1941.
Robertson, Muriel. Further notes on a trypanosome found in the alimentary tract of
Pontobdella muricata. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci. n. s. 54: 119-139. 1909.
Robinow, C.
B
F.
A study of the nuclear apparatus
of bacteria. Proc. Roy. Soc.
London
130: 299-324. 1942.
.
Cytological observations on bacteria. Proc. 6th Internat. Congr. Exp.
Cytol. 204-207. 1949.
Rosenberg, Marie. Die geschlechtliche Fortpflanzung von Botrydium granulatum
Grev. Oesterreichische Bot. Zeit. 79: 289-296. 1930.
Rosebury, Theodor, Richard W. Linton, and Leon Buchbinder. A comparative study
of dental aciduric organisms and Lactobacillus acidophilus. Jour. Bact. 18: 395412. 1929.
Rosenvinge, L. Kolderup. The marine algae of Denmark. Vol. 1. Rhodophyceae.
Mem. Acad. Roy. Sci. Lett. Danemark ser. 7, Sciences vol. 7. 1909-1931.
On mobility in the reproductive cells of the Rhodophyceae. Bot. Tidsskr. 40: 72-80. 1927.
.
von Rostafinski, Joseph Thomas. Versuch eines Systems der Mycetozoen. Strassburg.
1873.
Sluzovvce (Mycetozoa) Monographia. Paris. 1875.
Rothmaler, Werner. Uber das natiirliche System der Organismen.
.
Biol. Zentralbl.
67: 242-250. 1948.
Ruprecht,
F. J.
Reise, vol.
Tange des ochotskischen Meeres.
1,
in A.
T. von Middendorf. Sibirische
part 2: 193-435. 1851.
Ryan, Francis J., G. W. Beadle, and E. L. Tatum. The tube method of measuring
the growth rate of Neurospora. American Jour. Bot. 30: 784-799. 1943.
Sabrosky, Curtis W., and Robert L. Usinger. Nomenclature of the human malaria
parasites. Science 100:
Saccardo, P. A. Sylloge
190-192. 1944.
Fungorum omnium hucusque cognitorum ... 25
vols.
Padua.
1882-1931.
Sachs, Julius. Lehrbuch der Botanik. 4th ed. Leipzig. 1874. English translation by
Alfred W. Bennett and W. T. Thistleton-Dyer. Oxford. 1875.
Mem. Mus. Roy. Hist.
de Saedeleer, Henri. Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Rhizopoden
Nat. Belgique 60: 1-112. 1934.
Salvin, S. B. Factors controlling sporangial type in Thraustotheca Primoachlya and
Dictyuchus. American Jour. Bot. 29: 97-104. 1942.
Sartoris, George B. Studies in the life history and physiology of certain smuts. Amer.
ican Jour. Bot.
1 1
:
617-647. 1924.
.
.
264
The
]
M.
Sauvageau,
C. Sur
le
Classification of
developpement
Lower Organisms
et la biologic
d'une laminaire (Saccorhiza
bulbosa). Compt. Rend. 160: 445-448. 1915.
.
Sur
la sexualite
heterogamique d'une laminaire (Saccorhiza bulbosa).
Compt. Rend. 161 796-799. 1915.
Sur un nouveau type d'alternance de generations chez les algues brunes;
les Sporochnales. Compt. Rend. 182: 361-364. 1926.
Savile, D. B. O. Nuclear structure and behavior in species of the Uredinales. Ameri:
can Jour. Bot. 26: 585-609. 1939.
Asa Arthur. Taxonomy of the amebas with descriptions of thirty-nine new
marine and freshwater species. Carnegie Inst. Publ. 345: 1-116. 1926.
SchaflFner, John H. The classification of plants. IV. Ohio Naturalist 9: 446-455. 1909.
Schaudinn, Fritz. Heliozoa. Thierreich Probelief. 1-24. 1896.
l)ber den Zeugungskreis von Paramoeba eilhardi n. g. n. sp. Sitzber.
Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1896: 31-41. 1896.
-.
Uber die Copulation von Actinophrys sol Ehrbg. Sitzber. Akad. Wiss.
Schaeffer,
:
.
Berlin 1896: 83-89. 1896.
-.
Ueber das Centralkorn der Heliozoen, ein Beitrag zur CentrosomenVerhandl. deutscher zool. Gess. 1896: 113-130. 1896.
-.
Untersuchungen iiber den Generationswechsel bei Coccidien. Zool.
Jahrb. Abt. Anat. 13: 197-292. 1900.
Untersuchungen iiber die Fortpflanzung einiger Rhizopoden. Arb.
kaiserl. Gesundheitsamte 19: 547-576. 1902.
Generations- und Wirtswechsel bei Trypanosoma und Spirochaete. Arb.
kaiserl. Gersundheitsamte 20: 387-439. 1903.
and Erich Hoffmann. Vorlaufiger Bericht iiber das Vorkommen von
Spirochaeten in syphilitischen Krankheitsprodukten und bei Papillomen. Arb.
kaiserl. Gesundheitsamte 22: 527-534. 1905.
frage.
•
.
Scherffel, A. Phaeocystis globosa nov. spec, nebst einigen
Beobachtungen
iiber die
Phylogenie niederer, insbesonderer brauner Organismen. Wiss. Meeresunters.
n. f. 4, Abt. Heligoland: 1-29. 1900.
.
Kleiner Beitrag zur Phylogenie einiger Gruppen niederer Organismen.
Bot. Zeit. 59: 143-158. 1901.
-.
Endophytische Phycomyceten-Parasiten der Bacillariaceen und einige
neue Monaden. Arch. Prot. 52: 1-141. 1925.
-.
Zur Sexuahtat der Chytridineen. Arch. Prot. 53: 1-58. 1925.
Schiller, Jos. Die planktonischen Vegetationen des adriatischen Meeres. A. Die
Coccolithophoriden-Vegetationen in den Jahren 1911-14. Arch. Prot. 51: 1-130.
1925.
.
Uber Fortpflanzung,
geissellosse
Coccolithophoraccen nebst Mitteilung
Gattungen und die Nomenklatur der
Copulation bei Dinobryon. Arch.
iiber
Prot. 53: 326-342. 1926.
Schmidt, Matthias. Makrochemische Untersuchungen iiber das Vorkommen von
Chitin bei Mikroorganismen. Arch. Mikrobiol. 7: 241-260. 1936.
Schmitz, Fr. Untersuchungen iiber die Bcfruchtung der Florideen. Sitzber. kgl.
preussischen Akad. Wiss. 1883: 215-258. 1883.
Systematische t)bersicht der bishcr bekannten Gattungen der Florideen.
.
Flora 72: 435-456. 1889.
Schneider, Aime. Sur les psorospermes oviformes ou coccidies. Arch. Zool. Exp. Gen.
9: 387-404. 1881.
Bibliography
[
265
and spore-formation in the ascus of Peziza domiciliana.
American Jour. Bot. 14: 307-322. 1927.
Schultze, Max. Die Bewegung der Diatomen. Arch. mikr. Anat. 1
376-402. 1865.
Schulze, Franz Eilhard. Rhizopodenstudien V. Arch. mikr. Anat. 11: 583-596. 1875.
Schiinemann, Erich. Untersuchungen liber die Sexualitat der Myxomyceten. Planta
Schultz, E. S. Nuclear division
:
9: 644-672. 1930.
Schuurmans Stekhoven,
J. H. Jr. Die Teilung der Trypanosoma brucei Plimmer u.
Bradford. Arch. Prot. 40: 158-180. 1919.''
Schwartz, E. J. The Plasmodiophoraceae and their relationship to the Mycetozoa and
Chytridieae. Ann. Bot. 28: 227-240. 1914.
Schwendener,
S.
Ueber
die Beziehung zwischen Algen
und Flechtengonidien.
Bot.
Zeit. 26: 289-292. 1868.
Setchell,
William Albert. Parasitic Florideae,
I.
Univ. California Publ. Bot. 6: 1-34.
1914.
and Nathaniel Lyon Gardner. The marine algae of the Pacific Coast of
North America. Univ. California Publ. Bot. 8, parts 1-3. 1919-1925.
and
Phycological contributions I. Univ. California Publ.
.
Bot. 7: 279-324. 1920.
.
The
coral reef
Tokyo 323-329.
problem
in the Pacific. Proc.
3d Pan-Pacific
Sci.
Congr.
1926.
Sharp, Robert G. Diplodinium ecaudatum with an account of its neuromotor apparatus. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 13: 43-122. 1914.
Shear, C. L., and B. O. Dodge. Life histories and heterothallism of the red breadmold fungi of the Monilia sitophila group. Jour. Agr. Res. 34: 1019- 1042. 1927.
Short, Robert B. Spindle twisting in the giant Amoeba. Science 102: 484. 1945.
von Siebold, C. Th., and H. Stannius. Lehrbuch der vergleichenden Anatomic. Berlin, vol. 1.
1848. vol.
A
Simons, Etoile B.
2.
1846.
morphological study of Sargassum filipendula. Bot. Gaz. 41
161-182. 1906.
Sisler,
Frederick D., and Claude E. ZoBell. Nitrogen fixation by sulfate-reducing
bacteria indicated by nitrogen/argon ratios. Science 113: 511-512. 1951.
Sjostedt, L. G. Floridean studies. Kgl. Fysiog. Sallsk. Handl. n.
f.
37, no. 4:
1-95.
1926.
Skupienski, Frangois-Xavier. Sur la sexualite chez
Compt. Rend. 165: 118-121.
.
mium
Sur
le
les
champignons myxomycetes.
1917.
cycle evolutif chez
un espece de myxomycete endospore, Didy-
difforme (Duby). fitude cytologique. Compt. Rend. 184: 1341-1344. 1927.
Smith, Arlo
L The comparative
histology of
some
of the Laminariales.
American
Jour. Bot. 26: 571-585. 1939.
Smith, Ernest C. Some phases of spore germination of Myxomycetes. American Jour.
Bot. 16: 645-650. 1929.
Smith, Gilbert Morgan. A preliminary list of algae found in Wisconsin lakes. Trans.
Wisconsin Acad. 18: 531-565. 1916.
.
A
second
list
of algae found in Wisconsin lakes. Trans. Wisconsin Acad.
19: 614-653. 1918.
Phytoplankton of the inland lakes of Wisconsin. Wisconsin Geol. and
Nat. Hist. Survey Bull. 57, part 1: 1-243. 1920; part 2: 1-227. 1924.
The fresh-water algae of the United States. New York and London.
.
1933.
Second
edition. 1950.
266
The
]
Lower Organisms
Cryptogamic botany. 2 vols. New York and London. 1938.
Marine algae of the Monterey Peninsula, California. Stanford Univer-
.
.
sity.
Classification of
1944.
(editor). Manual of phycology. Waltham, Massachusetts. 1951.
Smith, Theobald. Investigation of infectious diseases of domesticated animals.
United States Dept. Agr. Bur. Anim. Ind. Ann. Reports 8 and 9: 45-70. 1893.
Snyder, William C, and H. N. Hansen. The species concept in Fusarium with refer-
ence to section Martiella. American Jour. Bot. 28: 738-742. 1941.
and
The species concept in Fusarium with reference to
Discolor and other sections. American Jour. Bot. 32: 657-666. 1945.
.
Solms-Laubach, Herman. Note sur le Janczewskia, nouvelle floridee parasite du
Chondria obtusa. Mem. Soc. Nat. Sci. Nat. Cherbourg 21: 209-224. 1877.
Sonneborn, T. M. Sex, sex inheritance and sex determination in Paramecium aurelia.
Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 23: 378-395. 1937.
Sparrow, Frederick K., Jr. A classification of aquatic Phycomycetes. Mycologia 34:
113-116. 1942.
Aquatic Phycomycetes. Ann Arbor. 1943.
Observations on chytridiaceous parasites of phanerogams. I. Physoderma Menyanthis de Bary. American Jour. Bot. 33: 112-118. 1946.
-.
Observations on chytridiaceous parasites of phanerogams. H. A preliminary study of the occurrence of ephemeral sporangia in the Physoderma disease
.
.
American Jour. Bot. 34: 94-97. 1947.
Observations on chytridiaceous parasites of phanerogams. HI. Physoderma Claytoniana and an associated parasite. American Jour. Bot. 34: 325-329.
of maize.
1947.
Sprague, T. A. Standard-species.
Springer,
Martha
E.
A
Kew
Bull. 1926: 96-100. 1926.
morphologic study of the genus Monoblepharella. American
Jour. Bot. 32: 259-269. 1945.
Stakman, Elvin C. The nature and importance of physiologic specialization
in phyto-
pathogenic fungi. Science 105: 627-632. 1947.
Plant diseases are shifty enemies. American Scientist 35: 321-350. 1947.
Stanier, Roger Y., and C. B. van Niel. The main outlines of bacterial classification.
Jour. Bact. 42: 437-466. 1941.
Stein, Friedrich. Ueber die Natur der Gregarinen. Arch. Anat. Phys. 1848: 182-223.
.
1848.
Der Organismus der Infusionsthicre. 3 vols. Leipzig. 1859-1883.
Steinecke, Fritz. Die Phylogenie der Algophyten. Schr. konigsberger Gelehrt. Gess.
.
8: 127-297. 1931.
Stevens, Edith. Cytological features of the life history of
virginianae. Bot. Gaz. 89: 394-401. 1930.
Stevens, Frank Lincoln.
The compound oosphere
of
Gymnosporangium
Albugo
Bliti.
Juniperi-
Bot. Gaz. 28: 149-
176,225-245. 1899.
.
Gamctogenesis and
fertilization in
Albugo. Bot. Gaz. 32: 77-98, 157-
169,238-261. 1901.
.
Studies in the fertilization of Phycomycetes. Bot. Gaz. 34: 420-425.
1902.
and A. C. Stevens. Mitosis of the primary nucleus
in
Synchytrium deci-
piens. Bot. Gaz. 35: 405-415. 1903.
Stokes,
John H. Schaudinn: a biographical appreciation. Science 74: 502-506. 1931.
Bibliography
Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der Sporangien von Trichia
Strasburger, Eduard.
267
[
fallax.
Bot. Zeit. 42: 305-316, 321-326. 1884.
.
Kerntheilung und Befruchtung bei Fucus. Jahrb.
wiss. Bot. 30:
351-
374. 1897.
Hugh Edwin, and
Strickland,
others. Series of propositions for rendering the
clature of zoology uniform
and permanent. Rept. 12th meeting
nomen-
British Assoc.
1842: 106-121. 1843.
Subrahmanyan, R.
On somatic
division, reduction division,
sex differentiation in Navicula halophila (Grun.)
Iyengar Commemoration
Svedelius, Nils.
An
auxospore-formation and
CI. Jour. Indian Bot. Soc.
Volume 239-266. 1947.
evaluation of the structural evidences for genetic relationships
:
in plants: algae. Proc. Intemat. Congr. PI. Sci. Ithaca 1: 457-471. 1929.
.
Zytologisch-Entwicklungsgeschichtliche Studien iiber Galaxaura, eine
diplobiontische Nemalionales-Gattung.
13, no. 4:
ser. 4,
Nova Acta Reg.
Soc. Sci. Upsaliensis
1-154. 1942.
Zur Kenntnis der Cytologic von Bacillus maximus buccalis
(MiUer). Centralbl. Bakt. Abt. 2, 16: 617-628, 673-681. 1906.
Note on the cytology of Calothrix fusca. Quart. Jour. Micr, Sci. n. s.
Swellengrebel, N. H.
.
54: 623-629. 1910.
Swezy, OUve. Binary and multiple
fission in
Hexamitus. Univ. California Publ. Zool.
16: 71-88. 1915.
-.
The genera Monocercomonas and
Polymastix. Univ. California Publ.
Zool. 16: 127-138. 1916.
Swingle,
and
Deane B. Formation of the spores in the sporangia of Rhizopus
Phycomyces nitens. United States Dept. Agr. Bur. PI. Ind. Bull.
of
1903.
Swingle, Walter T. Zur Kenntniss der Kern-
und Zelltheilung
bei
nigricans
37: 1-40.
den Sphacelaria-
ceen. Jahrb. wiss. Bot. 30: 297-350. 1897.
Tatum,
E. L.,
and T. T.
Bell.
Neurospora. III. Biosynthesis of thiamin. American
Jour. Bot. 33: 15-20. 1946.
and Joshua Lederberg. Gene recombination
in the bacterium Esche-
richia coli. Jour. Bact. 53: 673-684. 1947.
R. W. Barratt, Nils Fries, and David Bonner. Biochemical mutant
Neurospora produced by physical and chemical treatment. American
strains of
Jour. Bot. 37: 38-46. 1950.
Taylor, William Randolph. Recent studies of Phaeophyceae and their bearing on
classification. Bot. Gaz. 74: 431-441. 1922.
Thaxter, Roland. On the Myxobacteriaceae, a new order of Schizomycetes. Bot. Gaz.
17: 389-406. 1892.
Contributions from the Cryptogamic Laboratory of Harvard University.
XL. New or peculiar Zygomycetes. 2. Syncephalastrum and Syncephalis. Bot.
.
Gaz. 24: 1-15. 1897.
Contributions toward a monograph of the Laboulbeniaceae. Mem.
American Acad. 12: 187-429. 1896; 13: 217-469. 1908; 14: 311-426. 1924; 15:
427-580. 1926; 16: 1-435. 1931.
Theissen, F. Hemisphaeriales. Ann.
Thelohan,
Myc.
11: 468-469. 1913.
P. Observations sur les myxosporidies et essai
organismes. Bull. Soc. Philomath. Paris
Thom,
Charles, and Margaret B. Church.
ser. 8, 4:
The
de
classification
165-178. 1892.
Aspergilli. Baltimore. 1926.
de ces
:
268
The
]
Lower Organisms
Classification of
and Kenneth B. Raper. A manual of the
Thomas, R. C. Composition of fungus hyphae I. The
Aspergilli. Baltimore. 1945.
Fusaria.
American Jour. Bot.
15: 537-547.1928.
Thompson, R. H. Immobile Dinophyceae.
I.
New
records and a
can Jour. Bot. 36: 301-308. 1949.
Thuret, Gustave.Recherches sur les zoospores des algues. Ann.
new
Sci.
species.
Ameri-
Nat. Bot.
ser. 3,
14: 214-260. 1850.
Recherches sur
.
les
antheridies
la
fecondation des fucacees suivies d'observations sur
des algues.
Ann.
Sci.
Nat. Bot.
ser.
4,
2:
197-214.
1854;
3: 5-28. 1855.
Essai de classification des nostochinees. Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot.
.
ser.
6,
1
372-382. 1875.
van Tieghem, Ph. Sur
la classification des
basidiomycetes. Jour, de Bot. 7: 77-87.
1893.
Tilden, Josephine E.
A
The
.
Tippo, Oswald.
A
based on evolutionary development,
pigmentation. Bot. Gaz. 95: 59-77. 1933.
classification of algae
with special reference
to
algae and their
modern
life relations.
Minneapolis. 1935.
kingdom. Chron. Bot. 7: 203-
classification of the plant
206. 1942.
du Toit, P. J. Zur Systematik der Piroplasmen. Arch. Prot. 39: 84-104. 1918.
de Toni, J. B. Sylloge Algarum. 5 vols. Padua. 1889-1924.
Tseng, C. K. UtiHzation of seaweeds. Sci. Month. 59: 37-46. 1944.
The terminology of seaweed colloids. Science 101: 597-602. 1945.
Tulasne, L.-R., and C. Tulasne. Memoire sur les ustilaginees comparees aux uredin6es. Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. ser. 3, 7: 12-127. 1847.
Tulasne, R., and R. Vendrely. Demonstration of bacterial nuclei with ribonuclease.
Nature 160: 225-226. 1947.
Turner, John P. Division and conjugation in Euplotes patella Ehrenberg with special reference to nuclear phenomena. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 33: 193-258.
.
1930.
triehla,
Vladimir. Die Stellung der Gattung Cyathomonas From, im System der
Flagellaten. Ber. deutschen bot. Gess. 29: 284-292. 1911.
C, and
Vanterpool, T.
The
G. A. Ledingham. Studies on "browning" root rot of cereals I.
Lagena radicicola n. gen.; n. sp., with root injury in wheat.
association of
Canadian Jour. Res. 2: 171-194. 1930.
Vlk, Vladimir. t)ber die Struktur der Heterokontengeisseln. Beih. bot. Centralbl. 49,
Abt. 1: 214-220. 1931.
t)ber die Geisselstrukutur der Saprolegnieenschwarmer. Arch. Prot.
.
92: 157-160. 1939.
Vokes, Margaret Martin. Nuclear division and development of sterigmata in Coprinus
atramentarius. Bot. Gaz. 91: 194-205. 1931.
Vuillemin, Paul. Remarques sur les affinites des basidiomycetes. Jour, de Bot. 7: 164174. 1893.
Wager, Harold. The
life-story
and cytology
of Polyphagus Euglenae.
Ann. Bot.
^27: 173-202. 1913.
Walker, Leva B. Studies on Ascoidea rubescens— II. Cytological observations. Mycologia27: 102-127.1935.
Wallengren, Hans. Studier ofver ciliata infusorier II. Acta Univ. Lundensis 31, part
2, no. 7:
1-72. 1895.
Bibliography
[
269
Wehmeyer, Lewis E. A biologic and phylogenetic study of the stromatic Sphaeriales.
American Jour. Bot. 13: 575-645. 1926.
Weimer, J. L. Some observations on the spore discharge of Pleurage curvicoUa
(Wint.) Kuntze. American Jour. Bot. 7: 75-77. 1920.
Weiser, Jaroslav.
A new classification of the Schizogregarina. Jour.
Protozool. 2
:
6-12.
1955.
Weisz, Paul B. Morphogenesis in protozoa. Quart. Rev. Biol. 29: 207-229. 1954.
Wenyon, Charles Morley. Some observations on a flagellate of the genus Cercomonas.
Quart. Jour. Micr.
Sci. n.
Protozoology.
.
A
s.
55: 241-260. 1910.
manual
for medical
men, veterinarians, and
zoologists.
2 vols. London. 1926.
West, G. S. A treatise on the British freshwater algae. Cambridge. 1904.
von Wettstein, Richard. Handbuch der systematischen Botanik. 2 vols. Leipzig and
Wien. 1901-1908.
Whelden, Roy M. Cytological studies in the Tremellaceae II. Exidia. Mycologia 27:
41-57. 1935.
Wichterman, Ralph. Cytogamy: a new sexual process in joined pairs of Paramecium
caudatum. Nature 144: 123-124. 1939.
Cytogamy: a sexual process occurring in living joined pairs of Paramecium caudatum and its relation to other sexual phenomena. Jour. Morph. 66
.
423-451. 1940.
Williams, A. E., and R. H. Burris. Nitrogen fixation by blue-green algae and their
nitrogenous composition. American Jour. Bot. 39: 340-342. 1952.
WiUiams, J. Lloyd. Reproduction in Dictyota dichotoma. Ann. Bot. 12 559-560. 1898.
:
Willstatter, Richard,
und
and Arthur
Stoll.
Untersuchungen
iiber Chlorophyll.
Methoden
Ergebnisse. Berlin. 1913.
Wilson, C.
M.
Cytological study of the
life
history of Dictyostelium.
American Jour.
Bot. 40: 714-718. 1953.
and Ian K. Ross. Meiosis
in the
myxomycetes. American Jour. Bot. 42
743-749. 1955.
Wilson, Harriet L. Gracilariophila, a
new
parasite
on Gracilaria confervoides. Univ.
California Publ. Bot. 4: 75-84. 1910.
Wilson, H. V. Notes on a species of Pelomyxa. American Nat. 34: 535-550. 1900.
Wilson, Thomas B., and John Cassin. On a third kingdom of organized beings. Proc.
Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 1863: 113-121. 1864.
Winogradsky, Sergius. Ueber Schwefelbacterien. Bot. Zeit. 45: 489-507, 513-523,
529-539, 545-559, 569-576, 585-594, 606-610. 1887.
Recherches sur les organismes de la nitrification. Ann. Inst. Pasteur 4:
213-231, 257-275, 760-771. 1890.
.
Clostridium Pastorianum, seine Morphologic und seine Eigenschaften
als
Buttersaureferment. Centralbl. Bakt. Abt.
2,
9: 43-54, 107-112. 1902.
Jean Broadhurst, R. E. Buchanan, Charles Krumweide Jr., L. A.
Rogers, and George H. Smith. The families and genera of bacteria. Jour. Bact.
Winslow, C.-E.
A.,
2: 505-566. 1917.
Winter, F. W. Zur Kenntnis der Thalamophoren. Arch. Prot. 10: 1-113. 1907.
Wolters, Max. Die Conjugation und Sporenbildung bei Gregarinen. Arch. mikr. Anat.
37: 99-138. 1891.
Woodcock, H. M. The haemoflagellates: a review of present knowledge relating to
the trypanosomes and allied forms. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci. n. s. 50: 151-331.
1906.
:
270
The
]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
-.
On the occurrence of nuclear dimorphism in a Haheridium parasitic in
the chaffinch, and the probable connection of this parasite with a trypanosome.
Quart. Jour. Micr.
Sci. n.
finch (Fringilla coelebs)
Sci. n.
s.
53: 339-349. 1909.
Studies on avian haematoprotozoa.
-.
s.
I.
On
certain parasites of the chaf-
and the redpoll (Linota rufescens). Quart. Jour. Micr.
55: 641-740. 1910.
Woodruff, Lorande Loss, and Rhoda Erdmann. A normal periodic reorganization
process without cell fusion in Paramaecium. Jour. Exp. Zool. 17: 425-520. 1914.
Eleven thousand generations of Paramoecium. Quart. Rev. Biol. 1
.
436-438. 1926.
Woronin, M. Plasmodiophora Brassicae, Urheber der Kohlpflanzen-Hemie. Jahrb.
wiss. Bot. 11: 548-574. 1878.
Yamanouchi, Shigeo. The
life
history of Polysiphonia violacea. Bot. Gaz. 41: 425-
433. 1906.
.
The
.
Mitosis in Fucus. Bot. Gaz. 47: 173-197. 1909.
.
The
life
history of Polysiphonia violacea. Bot. Gaz. 42: 401-449. 1906.
Hfe history of Cutleria. Bot. Gaz. 54: 441-502. 1912.
Young, Edward Lorraine, IIL Studies on Labyrinthula. The etiologic agent of the
wasting disease of eel-grass. Amreican Jour. Bot. 30: 586-593. 1943.
Zederbauer, E. Geschlechtliche und ungeschlechtliche Fortpflanzung von Ceratium
hirundinella. Ber. deutschen bot. Gess. 22: 1-8. 1904.
Ziegler, A.
W.
Meiosis in the Saprolegniaceae. American Jour. Bot. 40: 60-66. 1953.
The term "pillbox" for describing diatoms. Chron. Bot. 6: 389.
ZoBell, Claude E.
1941.
Zopf, Wilhelm. Die Pilzthiere oder Schleimpilze. Breslau. 1885.
Zur Morphologic und Biologic der niederen Pilzthiere (Monadinen),
.
zugleich ein Beitrag zur Phytopathologie. Leipzig. 1885.
Zuelzer, Margarethe.
Bau und Entwicklung von Wagnerella
Prot. 17: 135-202. 1909.
borealis Mereschk. Arch.
INDEX
OF NAMES OF ORGANISMS AND GROUPS
Absidia, 123, 124
Acantharia, 189, 190, 195, 196, 197
Actiniscea, 61, 62
Actinisceae, 62
Acanthochiasma, 197
Actinocephalida, 217, 218
Actinocephalidae, 218
Actinocephalus, 218
Actinolophus, 193
Actinomma, 195
Actinomma Asteracanthion, 196
Acanthocystida, 191, 193
Acanthocystidae, 193
Acanthocystis, 193
Acanthometra, 195, 197
Acanthometren, 197
Acanthometrida, 197
Acanthometron, 197
Acanthonida, 197
Acanthophracta, 195, 197
Acanthorhynchus, 218
Acanthospora, 218
Acanthosporida, 218
Acanthosporidae, 218
Acaulopage, 124
Acephalina, 215
Acervulina, 187
Acervulinida, 187
Acetobacter aceti, 24
Acetobacteriacea, 20, 24
Acetobacteriaceae, 24
Achlya, 70, 79
Achlya caroliniana, 78
Achlyogeton, 118
Achlyogetonacea, 115, 117
Achlyogetonaceae, 117
Achnanthea, 76
Achnantheae, 76
Achnanthes, 76
Achnanthaceac, 76
Achromatiacea, 33
Achromatiaceae, 33
Achromatium, 33
Achromatium oxaliferum, 32, 33
Achromobacter, 22
Achromobacteriacea, 19, 21
Achromobacteriaceae, 2
Acineta, 235
Acinetae, 235
Acinetaria, 235
Acinetida, 235
Acinetidae, 235
Acinetina, 235
Acinetoidea, 235
Acnidosporidea, 207
Acrasidae, 203
Acrasina, 203
Acrasis, 203
Acrita, 37
Acrochaetiacea, 47
Acrochaetiaceae, 47
Acrochaetium, 47
Actinelius, 197
Actinollida, 197
Actinomonadida, J 91
Actinomonadidae, 191
Actinomonas, 190, 193
Actinomyces Bovis, 25
Actinomycetaceae, 25
Actinomycetalea, 18, 24
Actinomycetales, 24
Actinomyxida, 219, 221
Actinophryida, 191, 193
Actinophryidae, 193
Actinophrys, 193
Actinophrys Sol, 193
Actinopoda, 189
Actinopodea, 189
Actinosphaerium, 193
Actinosphaerium Eichhornii, 192, 193
Actipylea, 195, 197
Actipyleen, 195
Actipylida, 197
Actipylina, 197
Acystosporidia, 190
Acyttaria, 179
Adelea, 211
Adeleida, 211,212
Adeleidae, 211
Adeleidea, 211
Adeleina, 21
Adeleoidae, 21
Adelina, 211
Adinida,_98, 99
Adiniferidea, 96, 98
Aecidium, 147
Aerobacter aerogenes, 22
Agaricacea, 151, 153
Agaricaceae, 150, 151
Agaricales, 150
Agaricini, 151
Agaricus campestris, 119, 145,
Agarics, 152
Aggregata, 209
Ae;gregata Eberthi, 210
Aggregatida, 210, 212
Aggregatidae, 210
Aglaozonia, 88
Agrobacterium, 23
Agrobactcrium tumefaciens, 23
Agrostis, 148
Agyriales, 137
'
152, 153
The
272]
Classification of
Amoebina, 201
Amoebodiniaceae, 101
Amoebogeniae, 219
Amoebosporidia, 215
Amoebosporidies, 215
Amoebosporidiidae, 215
Agyrium, 137
Ahnfeldtia, 49
Akinetocystida, 216
Akinetocystidae, 216
Akinetocystis, 216
Akinetosporeae, 86
Albuginacea, 80, 81
Albuginaccae, 81
Albugo, 80, 81
Albugo Bliti, 80
Albugo Tragopogonis, 80
Alcaligenes fecalis, 22
Aleuria rutilans, 136
Algae, 9, 10, 69, 113, 118, 120, 177, 224
Algae, blue-green, 2, 3, 12, 13, 14, 17, 30,
37,41, 117, 118
Algae, brown, 39, 69, 53, 179, 203
Algae, green, 38, 41, 53, 69, 82, 117, 118,
128, 203
Algae, red, 37, 39, 41, 82, 128, 140
Algae Zoosporeae, 86
Algen, 29, 120
Allantocystida, 216
Allantocystidae, 216
Allan tocystis, 216
Allogromia, 183
Allogromiida, 183
Allogromiidae, 183
Allomorphina, 187
Allomyces, 111, 112, 113, 118
Allomyces anomalus, 116
Allomyces Arbuscula, 112, 115
Allomyces cystogenes, 112
Allomyces javanicus, 112, 114
Almond, 141
Alveolina, 185
Alveolinea, 185
Alveolinella, 185
Alveolinellidae, 185
Alveolinida, 185
Alveolinina, 185
Alternaria, 142
Alwisia, 175
Amanita muscaria, 152
Amaurochaetacea, 174, 175
Amaurochaetaceae, 175
Amaurochaete, 175
Amaurochacteae, 171
Amaurochaetidae, 175
Amaurosporales, 171
diffluens, 37, 157, 201
divergcns, 202
Ammodiscida, 185
Ammodiscidae, 185
Ammodiscus, 185
Ammodochidae, 62
Amoeba, 71, 118, 124,
Amoeba
Proteus, 202
Amorbaca, 201
Amocbida, 10,201
Amocbidac, 10, 201
Amorphoctista, 37
Amorphozoa, 37
Amphibia, 220
Amphiacantha, 219
Amphiamblys, 219
Amphidinium, 101
Amphilonche, 197
Amphilothida, 103
Amphimonadaceae, 61, 158
Amphimonadidae, 61
Amphisolenia, 103
Amphisolenia laticincta, 104
Amphistegina, 187
Amphistomina, 191
Anabaena, 35
Anabaena
Anabaena
circinnalis, 13
inaequalis, 32
Ancylistales, 81
Ancylistes, 125
Ancylistinaeae, 81
Anemeae, 171
Angiococcus, 28
Angiogastres, 152
Angiospermeae, 82, 91
Animacule, 18
Animal kingdom, Animalia. Animals,
10,'
157, 189, 201
1, 2,
68, 95, 111, 113, 159, 163,
167, 206, 214, 220, 223, 231, 233, 235
Anisochytridiales, 69
Anisochytrids, 57
4,
6,
Anisolpidiaceae, 69
Amanita, 152
Amiba
Amiba
Lower Organisms
Anisoplidium, 69
Anisolpidium Ectocarpii, 70
Anisonema, 109
Anisonema truncatun, 108
Anisonemida, 105, 108
Anisonemidae, 108
Anisonemina, 108
Anomalinidae, 187
Anopheles, 213
Anoplophryida, 230
Anoplophryinca, 229, 230
Anthophysis, 59
Anucleobionta, 6, 12
Ape, 213
Aphanizomenon, 35
Aphanomycopsis, 81
Aphrothoraca, 190, 193
Aphrothoracida, 190
Aplanosporeao, 86
Aplosporidics, 218
Apodachlya, 79
Apodachlyclla, 79
Apodinidae, 102
Apodinium, 102
Appcndiculatae, 73
[273
Index
Apple, 139, 148
Araceae, 67
Arachnula, 191
Araiospora, 79
Arcella, 205
Arcellidae, 205
ArcelHna, 205
Archaelagena, 186
Archaias, 184, 185
Archangiacea, 28
Archangiaceae, 28
Archangium, 28
Archegregarina, 215
Archephyta, 17
Archezoa (of Haeckel), 17
Archezoa (of Perty}, 223
Archi-Monothalamia, 183
Archimycetae, 110
Archimycetes, 110, 111
Archiplastidea, 18, 29
Archiplastideae, 30
Arcyria, 176
Arcyriacea, 174, 176
Arcyriaceae, 176
Arcyriidae, 176
Arthropods, 211, 212, 222
Arthrospira, 35
Asclepiadaceae, 161
Ascobolacea, 135
Ascochyta, 141
Ascocorticium, 137, 145
Ascocyclus, 88
Ascoidea, 130
Ascoidea rubescens, 127
Ascoideaceae, 130
Ascomvcetae, 125
Ascomycetes, 120, 125, 140, 142, 145
Ascomyceten, 125
Ascosporeae, 125
Askcleta, 193
Aspergillus, 130, 131
Aspergilliales, 130
Aspidisca, 232
Asplrotricha, 229
Aspirotrichaceae, 229
Astasia, 96, 107
Astasiaceae, 107
Astasiaca, 96, 105, 107
Astasiidae, 107
Astasiina, 107
Asterigerina, 187
Asterigerinida, 187
Asterigerinidae, 187
Asterocyclina, 188
Asterocystis, 43
Asterophlyctis, 1 1
Astoma, 94, 96, 105
Astoinaticae, 74
Astomina, 230
Astracanthida, 199
Astracanthidae, 199
Astrodisculus, 193
Astrolophida, 197
Astrolophus, 197
Astrorhiza, 183
Astrorhizida, 183
Astrorhizidaceae, 183
Astrorhizidae, 183
Astrorhizidea, 183
Astrorhizina, 183
Ataxophragmidae, 186
Ataxophragmidea, 186
Ataxophragmium, 186
Athene noctua, 162
Aulacantha, 199
Aulacanthida, 199
Aulacanthidae, 199
Aulactinium, 199
Aulosphaera, 199
Aulosphaerida, 199
Auricularia, l46
Auricularia Auricula, 146
Auriculariacea, 146, 148
Auriculariaceae, 146
Auriculariales, 146
Auriculariineae, 145, 146
Auricularineae, 146
Autobasidiomycetes, 146
Aves, 6
Axonoblasteae, 51
Azoosporidae, 191
Azoosporidca, 191
Azoosporidia, 190
Azotobacter, 14
Azotobacter Chroococcum, 23
Azotobacteriacca, 19, 23
Azotobacteriaceae, 23
Babesia, 214
Babesia bigemina, 206, 212, 214
Babesiida, 211, 214
Babesiidae, 214
Bacillacea, 19, 21
Bacillacei, 21
Bacillaria, 69, 75
Bacillariacea, 1 1, 55, 65, 69, 72
Eacillariaceae, 71
Bacillariales, 53, 71
Bacillarieae, 71
Bacillarioideae, 71
Bacillariophyceae, 71
Bacillariophyta, 71
Bacillus, 21
Bacillus alvei, 21
Bacillus Amylobacter, 21
Bacillus anthracis, 21
Bacillus, colon, 22
Bacillus, gas, 22
Bacillus Radicicola, 23
Bacillus, Shiga, 22
Bacillus subtilis, 18, 21
Bacteria, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 12, 13, 14, 17, 18,
30, 38, 118, 119, 189, 222, 224, 231
1
The
274]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Bacteriaceae, 21
Bacteriophyta, 17
Bacteroides, 22
Blastodinida, 100, 102
Blastodinidae, 102
Blastodinides, 102
Badhamia, 177
Balantidium, 230
Blastodinium, 102
Blastosporaceae, 44
Blepharisma, 230
Blue grass, 148
Blue-green algae, see Algae, Blue-green
Bodo, 159, 160, 199, 209, 212
Bodo edax, 161
Bodo Lacertae, 159
Bodonaceae, 159
Bodonidac, 159
Bodonidca, 158
Bodonina, 159
Boletus, 151
Bolivina, 188
Borelis, 185
Borrelia, 29
Borrelia recurrentis, 28, 29
Borrelia Vincenti, 29
Botrida, 198
Botrydiaceae, 67
Botrydiales, 63
Botrydiopsis, 66
Botrydium, 65, 67
Botryococcacea, 65, 66
Botryococcaceae, 66
Botryococcus, 66
Botryoglossum, 52
Botryoidca, 198
Botrytis, 140, 142
Bovista, 155
Braadrudosphaeridae, 60
Brachycystida, 217
Brefcldia, 175
Brefeldiaceae. 175
Brefeldiidae, 175
Brehmiella, 59
Brehmiella chrysohydra, 54
Brown algae, see Algae, Brown
Brucella, 22
Bulgariacea, 135
Bulimina, 188
Buliminida, 188
Buliniinina, 188
Bumilleria, 66, 73
Balantidium
coli,
230
Bangia, 43
Bangia fuscopurpurea, 43
Bangiacea, 41
Bangiaceae, 41, 43
Bangialea, 40, 41, 52
Bangiales, 41
Bangieae, 41
Bangiineae, 41
Bangioideae, 41
Barbulanympha, 169
Barley, 6
Barrouxia, 210
Bartonella bacilliformis, 21, 214
Bartonellaceae, 20
Bartramia, 219
Bartramiidae, 218
Basidiobolacea, 125
Basidiobolaceae, 125
Basidiobolus, 119, 121
Basidiobolus ranarum, 125
Basidiomycetae, 142
Basidiomyceten, 142
Basidiomycetes, 121, 127, 128, 141, 142,
145
Basidiosporeae, 142
Bathysiphon, 183
Batrachospermaceae, 47
Batrachospermum, 47
Bdellospora, 124
Beetles, 177, 215, 217
Beggiatoa, 24, 30, 31, 32, 35
Beggiatoacea, 34, 35
Beggiatoaceae, 35
Bicoecaceae, 67
Bicoecidea, 67
Bicoekida, 67
Bicosoeca, 67
Biddulphia, 74
Biddulphiaceae, 74
Biddulphica, 74
Biddulphicac, 74
Biflagcllatae, 76
Bikoecidae, 67
Bikoccina, 67
Birds, 6, 210. 212, 213
Bitunicatae, 129
Blakeslcca, 124
Blastocaulis, 26, 27
Blastocladia, 112, 113
Blastocladiarca, 110, 112
Blastocladiaceae, 112
Blastocladialcs, 1 1
Blastocladiclla, 112, 113
Blastocladiclla cystogena, 115
Blastocladiineae, 111
Blastodcrma, 130
Bursaria, 230
Bursariidae, 230
Bursarina, 230
1 78
Calcaroae, 1 71
Calcarina, 187
Calcarinidae, 187
Calciconus, 60
Galciconus vitrcus, 56
Cabbage,
Calrisolcnia. 60
Calcisolonidae, 60
Callocolax, 50
Callophyllis, 50
[275
Index
Calonectria, 142
Calonema, 177
Calonemeae, 171
Calonympha, 168
Calonymphida, 166, 167, 168
Calonymphidae, 168
Calothrix, 36
Calvatia, 155
Calyptosphaera, 60
Calyptosphaera insignis, 56
Camerina, 188
Camerinidae, 188
Camptonema, 193
Camptonematidae, 193
Campuscus, 191
Candida, 142
Cannobotryida, 198
Cannopilus, 63
Cannosphaerida, 199
Cannosphaeridae, 199
Cantharellales, 150
Carageen, 49
Carboxidomonas, 24
Carchesium, 233
Carcheslum polypinum, 225
Carpomitra, 88
Carpomycetae, 119
Carpophyceae, 40
Carposporeen, 128
Caryococcus, 21
Caryospora, 210
Caryotropha, 211
Cassidulina, 188
Cassidulinida, 188
Cassidulinidae, 188
Castanellida, 200
Castanellidae, 200
Castanidium, 200
Cat, 6, 210
Catenariopsis, 69
Catenochytridium, 118
Cattle, 206, 214
Caulleryella, 215
CauUeryellidae, 215
Caulobacter, 26, 27
Caulobacter vibrioides, 26
Caulobacteriacea, 27
Caulobacteriaceae, 27
Caulobacterialea, 18, 25, 26
Caulobacteriales, 25
Cayeuxina, 186
Cellulomonas, 22
Cenolarcus, 195
Centipedes, 207, 210, 211
Centricae, 73, 74
Cepedia, 229
Cephalina, 217
Cephalopodes, 182
Cephalothamnium, 59
Cephalothamnium Cyclopum, 54
Cephalotrichinae, 18
Ceramiales, 51
Ceramiea, 51, 52
Ceramieae, 51
Ceratiidae, 103
Ceratiomyxa, 177, 221
Ceratiomyxa fruticulosa, 177, 178
Ceratiomyxacea, 177
Ceratiomyxaceae, 177
Ceratium (dinoflagellate), 103
Ceratium ( myxomycete ) 177
Ceratium Hirundinella, 103
Ceratomyxa, 221
Ceratomyxidae, 221
Ceratophyllus fasciatus, 160
Ceratospora, 216
Cercobodo, 159
Cercobodonidae, 159
Cercomonadida, 159
Cercomonadidae, 159
Cercomonadinea, 158
Cercomonas, 159, 161
Cercomonas Davainei, 165
Cercomonas Hominis, 165
Cercomonas longicauda, 160
Cercomonas obliqua, 165
Cercospora, 138, 139, 142
Chaenia, 229
Chaetangieae, 47
Chaetoceraceae, 74
Chaetoceros, 74
Chaetocladiaceae, 124
Chaetocladium, 123, 124
Chaetoproteida, 159, 163
Chaetoproteidae, 163
Chaetoproteus, 158, 160, 163, 202
Chaidae, 201
Chaidea, 201
Chalarothoraca, 190, 193
Chalarothoracida, 190
Challengerida, 200
Challengeridae, 200
Challengeron, 200
Chamaesiphon, 35, 36
Chamaesiphon incrustans, 32
Chamaesiphonacea, 34, 35
Chamaesiphonaceae, 33, 35
,
Champia, 51
Champiea, 51
Champieae, 51
Chantransia, 47
Chantransiaceae, 47
Chaos Protheus, 200, 201, 202
Chaosidae, 201
Chapmania, 187
Chapmaniida, 187
Chapmaniidae, 187
Characiopsis, 66
Characiopsis gibba, 64
Chestnut, 139
Chiastolida, 197
Chiastolus, 197
Chicken, 210
Chilodon, 230
1
The
276
Classification of
Chilodon uncinatus, 225
Chilodontida, 230
Chilomastigidae, 165
Chilomastix, 165
Chilomastix davainei, 165
Chilomastix Hominis, 165, 237
Chilomastix Mesnili, 165
Chilomonadaceac, 98
Chilomonas, 94, 109
Chilomonas Paramaecium, 97
Chilostomella, 187
Chilostomellida, 187
Chilostomellidae, 187
Chlamydodon, 230
Chlamydodonta, 230
Chlamydodontida, 230
Chlamydodontidae, 230
Chlamydomonas, 61, 111
Chlamydomyxa, 191
Chlamydomyxidea, 190
Chlamydophora, 190, 193
Chlamydophorida, 190
Chlamydothrix ochracea, 32, 36
Chlamydotrichacea, 34
Chlamydotrichaceae, 36
Chlamydozoaceae, 20
Chloramoeba, 66
Chloramoeba heteromorpha, 64
Chloramoebacca, 65, 66
Chloramoebaceae, 66
Chloramoebidac, 66
Chlorarachnidae, 66
Chlorobacteriaceae, 31
Chlorobacterium, 33
Chlorobiacea, 31, 237
Chlorobium, 31
Chlorobotrydiaceae, 66
Chlorochromonas, 66
Chlorochytridion,
1 1
Chloromonadaceae, 109
Chloromonadales, 63, 105
Chloromonadida, 105
Chloromonadidae, 109
Chloromonadina, 63, 96, 105
Chloromonadinae, 94, 105
Chloromonadineae, 105
Chloromonads, 94
Chloromyxea, 221
Chloromyxees, 221
Chloromyxida, 221
(^hloromyxidac, 221
Chloromyxum, 221
Chlorosaccacca, 65
Chlorosaccaceac, 65
Chlorosaccus, 55, 65, 66
Chlorosaccus fluidus, 64
Chlorotheciacea, 65, 66
Chlorothcciaceae, 66
Choancphoraccac, 124
Choano-Flagellata, 67
Choanocystidac, 194
Choanocystis, 194, 216
Lower Organisms
Choanoflagellata, 57, 61, 67, 68
Choanoflagcllates, 57, 158
Choanosporidae, 216
Chondria, 52
Chondrieae, 51
Chondrioderma, 177
Chondrococcus, 28
Chondromyces, 28
Chondromyces aurantiacus, 26
Chondromyces crocatus, 26
Chondrus, 51
Chondrus
crispus, 49
Chonotricha, 230, 231, 237
Chonotrichida, 230
Chordariacea, 88
Chordariaceae, 87
Chordariales, 87
Chordarieae, 87
Chromatiacea, 31, 237
Chromatiaceae, 31
Chromatium, 31
Chromobacterium, 22
Chromomonas, 98
Chromulina, 61, 62
Chromulina Pascheri, 56
Chromulinaceae, 62
Chromulinales, 61
Chromulinidae, 62
Chroococcacea, 33
Chroococcaceae, 33
Chroococcales, 33
Chroococcus, 32, 33
Chrysamoeba, 63
Chrysamoebida, 62, 63
Chrysamoebidae, 63
Chrysapsis, 62
Chrysarachniaceae, 63
Chrysarachnion, 63
Chrysidella, 98
Chrysocapsa, 59
Chrysocapsa paludosa, 54
Chrysocapsacea, 58, 59
Chrysocapsaceae, 59
Chrysocapsales, 61
Chrysocapsidae, 59
Chrysocapsina, 61
Chrysocapsinae, 61
Chrysocapsineae, 55, 61
Chrysochromulina, 58
Chrysococcus, 62
Chrysocrinus, 63
Chrysodcndron, 59
Chrysomonadaceae, 59
Chrysomonadales, 61
Chrysomonadida, 61
Chrysoinonadidao, 62
Chrysomonadina, 59, 61, 62
Chrysomonadinae, 61
Chrysomonadinca, 57
Chrysoinonadincac, 55, 57, 61
Chrysonionads, 53, 83
Chrysomonas, 62
Index
Chrysophaeum, 109
Chrysophyceae, 53, 55, 95
Chrysophycophyta, 53
Chrysophyta, 53
Chrysopyxis, 60
Chrysosphaera, 62
Chrysosphaeracea, 61, 62
Chrysosphaeraceae, 62
Chrysosphaerales, 61
Chrysosphaerella, 62
Chrysosphaerineae, 55, 61
Chrysospora, 62
Chrysothylakion, 63
Chrysotrichaceae, 60
Chrysotrichales, 61
Chrysotrichineae, 55, 61
Chytridiacea, 117, 118
Chytridiaceae, 110, 118
Chytridiales, 113
Chytridieae, 110
Chytridieen, 110, 118
Chytridiineae, 110
Chytridinae, 110
Chytridinea, 111, 113, 116
Chytridineae, 110, 113
Chytridium, 69, 110, 113, 118
Chytridium Olla, 110
Chytrids, 76, 110, 111, 119, 121, 125, 130,
178
Chytriodinium, 102
Cienkowskiaccae, 177
Ciliata, 223, 228, 233
Ciliatea, 228
Cilio-flasrellata, 94
Cilioflagellata, 96, 102
Giliophora, 39, 223, 237
Ciliophryidae, 191
Ciliophrys, 193
Circoporida, 200
Circoporidae, 200
Circoporus, 200
Cladochytriacea, 115, 117
Cladochytriaceae, 117
Cladochytrium, 110, 117
Cladococcida, 195
Cladococcus, 195
Cladopyxida, 103
Cladosporium, 142
Cladothrix dichotoma, 33
Clastoderma, 175
Clathracea, 155
Clathraceae, 155
Clathrochloris, 31
Clathrulina, 194
Clathrulinida, 191, 194
Clathrulinidae, 194
Claudea, 51
Clavaria, 151
Clavariacea, 151
Clavariaceae, 151
Clavariei, 151
Clavati, 150
Claviceps purpurea, 139
Clonothrix fusca, 32, 36
Closterium, 125
Clostridium, 21
Clostridium botulinum, 21
Clostridium butyricum, 21
Clostridium Pastorianum, 21
Clostridium septicum, 21
Clostridium tetani, 21
Cnemidospora, 21
Cnidosporidea, 219
Cnidosporidia, 219, 220
Coccaceac, 20
Coccidia, 207, 210
Coccidians, 260, 209, 210, 212, 215
Coccididae, 210
Coccidiidea, 210
Coccidiomorpha, 207, 210
Coccidium, 210
Coccidium Schubergi, 207
Coccogonales, 33
Coccogonea, 31, 32, 33
Coccogoneae, 33
Coccolithaceae, 60
Coccolithidae, 60
Cocclithina, 60
Coccolithophora, 60
Coccolithophoridae, 55, 60
Coccolithus, 60
Coccomyces, 134
Coccomyxa, 221
Coccomyxida, 221
Coccomyxidae, 221
Cocconeidaceae, 76
Cocconeis, 72, 73, 76
Cocconemaceae, 75
Cocconemidae, 222
Coccosphaera, 60
Coccospora Slavinae, 222
Coccosporida, 222
Coccosporidae, 222
Coccus, 20
Cochliodinium, 101
Cochliopodiidae, 202
Cochliopodium, 202
Cochlonema, 124
Cockroach, 169,217,219
Codonoecina, 67
Codonosiga, 67
Codonosigidae, 67
Codosiga, 67
Coeloblastca, 46
Coeloblasteae, 51
Coclodendrida, 200
Coelodendrum, 199, 200
Coelomonadina, 105, 109
Coelosphaerium, 33
Coelosporidiidae, 218
Coelosporidium, 219
Coenenia, 203
Coffee, 148
Colaciacea, 105
[277
278]
The
Classification of
Colaciaceae, 105
Colaciidae, 105
Colacium, 105
Colacium Arbuscula, 106
Coleosporiacea, 148
Coleosporiaceae, 148
Coleosporium, 143
Coleosporium Vernoniae, 143
Colepina, 229
Coleps, 229
Colletotrichum, 139, 140
Collida, 195
Collodaria, 194
Colloderma, 177
Collodermataceae, 177
CoUosphaera, 195
Collosphaera Huxleyi, 196
Collosphaerida, 195
Collozoida, 195
Colpidium campylum, 227
Colpoda, 229
Colpodaea, 229
Colpodella, 189
Colpodidae, 229
Columniferae, 171
Comatricha, 175
Completoria, 125
Compsopogon, 44
Compsopogonacea, 41, 44
Compsopogonaceae, 44
Concharida, 200
Concharidae, 200
Conchulina, 205
Conferva, 66
Confervaceae, 66
Confervales, 63
Confervoidea, 63
Conger
niger, 161
Conidiobolus, 125
Coniferinae, 9
Conifers, 148
Coniomycetes, 140
Conjugatae, 117
Conradiella, 62
Coprinus, 143, 152
Coprinus atramentarias, 153
Copromonas subtilis, 108
Cora, 151
Corallinaceae, 50
Corallinea, 50
Corallineae, 50
Cordyceps, 139
Coreocolax, 50
Corethron, 74
Cormobionta, 6
Cornuspira, 185
Coronympha, 168
Corticiiun, 151
Corynebacteriacea, 19, 20
Coryncbacteriaceae, 20
Corynebacteriidae, 20
Coryncbactcrium, 20, 21
Lower Organisms
Corynebacterium diphtheriae, 20
Coryneum, 141
Coryneum
Beijerinckii, 141
Coscinodiscaceae, 74
Coscinodiscea, 74
Coscinodiscus, 74
Costia, 165
Costiidae, 165
Cothurnia, 233
Councilmania, 203
Crab, 218
Craigia, 163
Craspedomonadaceae, 67
Craspedomonadina, 67
Craspedotella, 102
Craterellus, 151
Craterium, 177
Crenothrix polyspora, 32, 36
Crenotrichacca, 35, 36
Crenotrichaceae, 36
Cribraria, 175
Cribrariacea, 173, 175
Cribrariaceae, 171, 175
Cribrariales, 171, 173
Cribrariidae, 175
Cribrospira, 186
Cristellaria, 187
Cristispira, 29
Cristispira Veneris,
26
Crithidia, 162
Cromodromys, 199
Cronartiacea, 148
Cronartiaceae, 148
Cronartium, 148
Cronartium
ribicola, 148
Cryptobia, 160, 161,209,212
Cryptobiidae, 161
Cryptocalpis, 198
Cryptocapsales, 97
Cryptocapsineae, 95
Cryptocercus, 166, 169, 170
Cryptochrysis, 98
Cryptococcacea, 97, 98
Cryptococcaceae, 98
Cryptococcalcs, 96, 97
Cryptococcineae, 95
Cryptococcus, 98, 130
Cryptocystes, 219, 222
Cryptomonadaceae, 98
Cryptomonadalca, 96
Cryptomonadalcs, 96
Cryptomonadida, 97
Cryptomonadidae, 98
Cryptomonadina, 96, 97, 98
Cryptonionadinae, 96
Cryptonionadincae, 95, 96
Crvptomonads, 94, 194
Cryptomonas, 97,98, 199
Cryptoncnicac, 50
Cryptonemiales, 50
Cryptoncniinae, 50
Cryptophyceae, 94, 96
Index
Cryptospermea, 46, 47
Cryptospermeae, 47
Ctenomyces, 131
Ctenostomata, 230, 231
Ctenostomida, 231
Ctenostomina, 231
Cumagloia, 47
Cuneolina, 186
Cunninghamella, 124
Cup fungi, 134
Cupulata, 129, 134, 137, 145
Cupulati, 134
Currants, 148
Cutleria, 88
Cutlcriacea, 88
Cutlerialea, 85, 88
Cutleriales, 88
Cyanomonas, 98
Cyanophyceae, 29
Cyanophyta, 17, 30
Cyathoxnonas, 97, 98
Cyathus, 155
Cyclammina, 186
Gyclidina, 230
Cyclidium, 230
Cycloclypeidae, 188
Cycloclypeina, 188
Cycloclypeus Carpenter!, 188
Cyclodinidae, 229
Cyclonexis, 59
Cyclonympha, 171
Cyclonymphidae, 169
Cycloposthium, 231
Gyclosiphon, 188
Cyclosporales, 91
Cyclosporeae, 82, 91
Cyclotella, 72, 73, 74
Cylindrospermum, 35
Cylindrospermum majus, 32
Cylindrosporium Pruni, 134
Cymbalopora, 180, 182, 187
Cymbella, 72, 73, 75
Cymbellea, 75
Cymbelleae, 75
Cyphoderia, 191
Cyrtellaria, 198
Cyrtida, 198
Cyrtoidea, 198
Cyrtophora, 62, 63
Cystidium, 198
Cystobasidium, 147
Cystobasidium sebaceum, 145
Cystochytrium, 69
Cystoflagellata, 94, 96, 99
Cytophaga Hutchinsonii,
Cytophagacea, 28
Cytophagaceae, 28
Cytosporidia, 207
Cyttariacea, 135
26, 28
[279
Dacryomitra, 150
Dacryomyces, 150
Dacryomycetacea, 150
Dacryomycetaceae, 150
Dacryomycetalea, 146, 150
Dacryomycetales, 150
Dacryomycetineae, 150
Dactylophorida, 218
Dactylophoridae, 218
Dactylophorus, 218
Dactylosphaerium, 202
Daedalea, 151
Daldinia, 139
Dallingeria, 58
Dasyea, 51
Daucina, 188
Deer, 214
Delacroixia, 125
Delesseria, 51
Delesseria sinuosa,
Delesseriea, 51
49
Dematiaceae, 142
Dematiea, 142
Dematieae, 142
Dematiei, 141
Dendrocometes, 236
Dendrocometida, 236
Dendrocometidae, 236
Dendrocometina, 236
Dendromonadina, 59
Dendromonas, 59
Dendromonas
virgaria,
54
Dendrosoma, 235
Dendrosomatidae, 235
Dendrosomida, 235
Dendrosomidae, 235
Dendrosomina, 235
Dentilina, 184
Derepyxis, 60
Dermateacea, 135
Dermatocarpa, 146, 152
Dermatocarpi, 152, 171
Dermocarpa, 36
Dermocarpa
protea, 32
Dermocentor, 20
Desmarestia, 88, 89
Desmarestiacea, 88
Desmarestales, 87
Desmobacteriales, 33
Desmocapsa, 99
Desmocapsales, 98, 99
Desmocapsineae, 95, 99
Desmokontae, 94, 98, 99
Desmomastix, 99
Desmomonadales, 98, 99
Desmomonadineae, 95, 99
Desmothoraca, 190, 194
Desmothoracida, 190
Desmotrichum, 88
Deuteromycetes, 140
Deutschlandiaceae, 60
Devescovina, 167
280
The
Classification of
Devescovinida, 167
Devescovinidae, 167
Devescovininae, 167
Diachea, 175
Dianema, 176
Dianemaceae, 176
Diaporthe, 139
Diatoma, 75
Diatomaceae, 69, 75
Diatomea, 53, 69, 71, 74
Diatomeae, 53, 69, 71, 74
Diatoms, 53, 71,83, 117, 118
Diatrype, 139
Dictydiaethaliaceae, 175
1 75
Dictydiaethalium, 175
Dictydium, 175
Dictyocha, 63
Dictyocha Fibula, 56
Dictyochaceae, 62
Dictyochidae, 62
Dictyoconoides, 187
Dictyoconus, 186, 198
Dictyophora, 155
Dictyosiphonales, 89, 91
Dictydiaethaliidae,
Dictyosteliaceae, 203
Dictyosteliaceen, 203
Dictyostelidae, 203
Dictyostelium, 203
Dictyostclium discoideum, 204
Dictyostelium mucoroides, 204
Dictyota, 87
Dictyotacea, 87
Dictyotaceae, 86, 87
Dictyotales, 82, 86
Dictyotea, 85, 86
Dictyotcae, 82, 86
Dictyuchus, 78, 79
Didesmis, 231
Didiniidae, 229
Didinium, 229, 235'
Didinium nasutum, 225
Didymiacea, 175, 177
Didymiaceae, 177
Didymidae, 177
Didymiidae, 177
Didymium, 177
Didymohelix ferruglnea, 27
Didymophyes, 218
Didymophyida, 218
Didymophyidac, 218
Difflugia, 201, 205
DIfflugiida, 205
Difflugiidae, 205
Dilcptus, 230
Dimastigamocba, 159
Dimorpha, 193
Dimychota, 17
Dinamocba (dinoflagellate), 101
Dinamocba (amoeba), 16, 202
Dinamocbidina, 100, 101, 237
varians, 101, 104
Dinamocbidium
Lower Organisms
Dinastridium, 100
Dinenympha, 166
Dinenymphida, 165, 166
Dinenymphidae, 166
Dinifera, 102
Diniferidea, 103
Dinobryaceae, 60
Dinobryina, 58, 60
Dinobryon, 58, 60
Dinocapsaceae, 100
Dinocapsales, 99, 100
Dinocapsina, 99
Dinocapsineae, 95, 99
Dinococcales, 99, 100
Dinococcina, 99
Dinococcineae, 96, 100
Dinoclonium, 100
Dinocloniaceae, 100
Dinoflagellata, 94, 102
Dinoflagellatae, 94, 95
Dinoflagellates, 94, 199
Dinoflagellida, 103
Dinophyceae, 94, 103
Dinophysida, 103
Dinophysis, 103
Dinothrix, 100
Dinotrichales, 99, 100
Dinotrichineae, 96, 99
Dioxys, 66
Dioxys Incus, 64
Diplococcus, 20
Diplococcus pneumoniae, 20
Diploconida, 197
Diploconus, 197
Diplocystida, 216
Diplocystidae, 216
Diplocystis, 216
Diplodia, 141
Diplodinium, 224, 231
Diplomita, 60
Diplophlyctis, 117
Diplophysalis, 191
Diplophysalis stagnalis, 192
Dipodascus, 130
Dipodascus albidus, 132
Discellacea, 141
Discellaceae, 141
Dischizae, 21 5
Discida, 195
Disciformia, 73
Discoasteridac, 60
Dificoidca, 195
Discolichenes, 134
Discomycetes, 133, 134
Discophrya, 235
Discophryida, 235
Discophryidae, 235
Discorbis, 180, 182
Discorbis mcditerrancnsis, 182
Discorbis orbicularis, 182
Discosphacra, 60
Disporees, 209
Index
Distephanus, 63
Distephanus Speculum, 56
Distigma, 107
Distomata, 163
Distomataceae, 166
Distomatinales, 163
Distomatineae, 163
Ditripodiidae, 62
Doassansia, 149
Dobellia binucleata, 210
Dobeliida, 210
Dobelliidae, 210
Do?, 210
Dolichocystida, 209, 214
Doliocystida, 216
Doliocystidae, 216
Doliocystis, 216
Dorataspida, 197
Dorataspis, 197
Dorataspis costata, 196
Dothideaceae, 137
Dothideales, 137, 138, 139, 140, 141
Drepanidium, 211
Duboscqia, 222
Dudresnaya purpurifera, 49
Dumontieae, 50
[281
Elphidium, 186, 187
Elphidium crispum, 181
Elvella, 135
Empusa, 125
Enchelia, 229
Enchelina, 229
Enchelis, 229
Enchelyidae, 229
Endamoeba, 202, 203
Endamoeba
Endamoeba
202
202
Endamoebida, 201, 202
Endamoebidae, 202
Endocochlus, 124
Endogonacea, 123, 124
Endogonaceae, 124
Endogone, 123, 124
Endogonei, 124
Endoiimax, 203
Endomyces, 130
Endomycetacea, 130
Endomycetaceae, 130
Endomycetalea, 129
Endomycetalcs, 129
Endosporea, 171
Endosporeae, 171
disparita,
histolytica,
Endosporinei, 171
Earth
star,
155
Earthworm, 215, 216
Eberthella, 22
Eberthella typhi, 22
Ebriaceae, 55, 62
Ebriidae, 62
Ebriopsidae, 62
Echinocystida, 189
Echinoderms, 216
Echinosteliaceae, 175
Echinostelium, 175
Ectocarpales, 86
Ectocarpea, 86
Ectocarpeae, 86
Ectocarpineae, 86
Ectocarpus, 70, 83, 86, 87
Ectocarpus Mitchelliae, 204
Ectocarpus siliculosus, 83
Ectosporeae, 177
Ectrogella, 81
Ectrogellacea, 81
Ectrogellaceae, 81
Eel, 161
Egregia Menziesii, 90, 91
Eimeria, 210
Eimerida, 210
Eimeridae, 210
Eimeridea, 210
Eimcriidea, 210
Eimeriinea, 210
Eimerioidae, 210
Elaeorhanis, 193
Elaphomyces, 131
Ellipsoidina, 188
Endothia parasitica, 139
Endothyra, 186
Endothyridae, 186
Endothyrina, 186
Enerthenema, 175
Enerthenemaceae, 175
Enerthenemea, 174, 175
Entamoeba, 202, 203
Entamoeba coli, 202
Entamoeba
Entamoeba
dystenteriae, 202
gingivalis,
202
Enteridiea, 171
Enteridieae, 171
Enterobacteriaceae, 21
Entodiniomorpha, 230, 231
Entodiniomorphina, 231
Entodinium, 231
Entomophthora, 125
Entomophthoracea, 124
Entomophthoraceae, 124
Entomophthorales, 124
Entomophthorinea, 121, 124
Entomophthorineae, 124
Entophlycis, 113, 117
Entophysalidales, 33
Entosiphon sulcatum, 108
Eocronartium, 143, 147
Eocronartium muscicola, 145
Eouvigerina, 188
Ephelota, 236
Ephelotida, 236
Ephelotidae, 236
Ephelotina, 236
Ephemera vulgata, 222
Epiblasteae, 50
The
282]
Classification of
Eunotiaceae, 75
Eunotiea, 75
Eunotieae, 75
Euphorbiaceae, 161
Euplotes, 227, 232, 233, 234
Euplotes Patella, 225, 226, 232
Eupodiscales, 73
Eurotium, 131
Epichrysis, 56, 62
Epiclintes, 233
Epidinium, 231
Epipyxis, 60
Epipyxis utriculus, 54
233
Eremascus, 130
Epistylis,
Eremascus albidus, 127
Eremospermeae, 77
Eurychasma, 81
Erica, 9
Ericae, 9
Erysiphe, 127, 132, 133
Erysiphe graminis, 132
Erysiphea, 133
Erysipheae, 133
Erythrocladia, 44
Erythropsis, 101
Erythrotrichia, 44
Erythrotrichia carnea, 44
Erythrotrichiaceae, 44
Erwina, 22
Erwinia amylovora, 22
Escherichia
coli, 14, 15,
Lower Organisms
22
Ethmosphaerida, 195
Euactinomyxidae, 222
Euasci, 130
Eubacteria, 18, 25
Eur)'chasmidium, 81
Eurysporea, 221
Eutreptia, 105
Excipula, 141
Excipulaceae, 141
Exidia, 143
Exoascalea, 129, 137
Exoascales, 137
Exoascus, 137
Exobasidiacea, 151
Exobasidiaceae, 151
Exobasidiales, 1 50
Exobasidiineae, 150
Exobasidium, 151
Exosporea, 171, 177
Exosporeae, 177
Exosporinei, 177
Exuviaella, 99
Eubacteriales, 18
Eubasidii, 145
Euchrysomonadina, 61
Euchrysomonadinae, 61
Eucomonympha, 169
Fasciolites, 185
Fauchea, 51
Faucheocolax, 51
Eucyrtidina, 198
Felis Catus, 6
Eucyrtidium, 198
Eucyrtidium carinatum, 196
Eudesme, 88
Ferns, 125, 148
Euflorideae, 44
Euglena, 38, 94, 107, 116, 117, 125
Euglena acus, 106
Euglena Spirogyra, 106, 107
Euglena
viridis, 106
Euglenaceae, 105
Englenales, 105
Euglenamorpha, 105
Euglenida, 105
Euglenids, 94, 106
Euglenina, 105
Euglcninae, 94, 105
Euglenineae, 96, 105
Euglenocapsineae, 96
Euglcnoidina, 96, 105
Euglenophycophyta, 94
Euglenophyta, 94
Euglypha, 191
Euglyphida, 191
Euglyphidae, 191
Eugregarinaria, 217
Eugregarinida, 217
Eumycetes, 119
Eumycctozoina, 171
Eumycophyta, 119
Eunotia, 75
Filicineae,
1
Fisherinidae, 185
Fishes, 165, 210, 211, 219. 220, 222
Flabellina, 184, 187
Flagellata, 6, 55, 94, 96, 105
Flagellatae, 94
Flagellates, 10, 53, 55, 76, 94, 118
Flagellato-Eustomata, 105
Flagellato-Pantostomata, 158
Flatworms, 216
Flavobacterium, 22
Flea, 160
Flexostylida, 185
Floridea, 47, 50,51
Florideae, 6, 40, 44, 51
Floridees, 40, 51
Floridineae, 44
Flowers of tan, 177
Fly,
213
Foaina, 167
Folliculina,
230
Fomcs, 151
Foraminifera, 179, 182, 183, 185
Foraminiferes, 179, 182
Foraminiferida, 179
Forficule, 217
Fragilaria, 75
Fragilariaceae, 75
Index
[283
Fragilariea, 75
Fragilarieae, 75
Frogs, 125, 210, 211
Glenodinium, 94, 103
Globigerina, 184, 188
Globigerinida, 188
Frondicularia, 187
Fucaceae, 91
Fucales, 91
Fucea, 91
Fuceae, 91
Fucineae, 91
Fucacees, 82
Fucoidea, 83, 86, 91
Globigerinidea, 183, 187
Globorotalia, 187
Globorotaliidae, 187
Gloeocapsa, 33
Gloeochaete, 33
Gloeochrysis, 62
Gloeodiniaceae, 100
Fucoideae, 53, 82
Fucus, 53, 91, 93
Fucus vesciculosus, 93
Fuligo septica, 177
Fungi, 39, 69, 76, 110, 119, 146, 150, 172
Fungi, bird's-nest, 155
Fungi imperfecti, 140
Fungilli, 39, 206
Furcellariea, 46, 50
Furcellarieae, 50
Fusarium, 142
Fusiformis, 29
Fusobacterium, 29
Fusulina, 188
Fusulinida, 188
Fusulinidae, 188
Galaxaura, 47
Galera tenera, 153
Gallionella, 27
Gallowaya, 148
Gammarus, 233
Gamocystis, 217
Ganymedes, 216
Ganymedida, 216
Ganymedidae, 216
Gasteromycetes, 152
Gastrobionta, 6
Gastrocarpeae, 50
Geaster, 155
Gelidiaceae, 49
Gelidialea, 46, 49, 50
Gelidiales, 49
Gelidieae, 49
Gelidium, 50, 51
Geophonus, 186, 187
Geoglossacea, 135
Giardia, 163, 166
Giardia enterica, 164, 166
Giardia Lamblia, 166
Gibberella, 142
Gigantomonas, 167
Gigartina mammilosa, 49
Gigartinales, 47
Gigartineae, 47
Gigartininae, 47
Glandulina, 187
Glaucocystis, 33
Glaucoma, 229
Glaucoma
pyriformis, 227
Gloeodinium, 100
Gloeosporium, 139, 140, 141
Gloeotrichia, 36
Gloiophycea, 31, 32, 33
Gloiophyceae, 29, 33
Glomerella, 126, 127, 139, 140
Glomerella cingulata, 139
Glugea, 222
Glugeida, 222
Glugeidae, 222
Glugeidea, 222
Glugeidees, 222
Goat, 210
Gomphonema, 72, 75
Gomphonemaceae, 75
Gomphonemea, 75
Gomphonemeae, 75
Gomphosphaeria, 33
Gonapodiaceae, 112
Gonapodiineae, 112
Gonapodya, 112
Goniaulax, 103
Gonimophyllum, 52
Goniodoma, 103
Goniostomum, 109
Goniotrichaceae, 43
Goniotrichopsis, 43
Goniotrichum, 43
Gonococcus, 20
Gonospora, 216
Gooseberries, 146
Goussia, 209, 210
Goussia Schubergi, 207, 208, 237
Gracilaria, 49
Grains, 149
Granuloreticulosa, 179
Graphidiacea, 134
Graphidiaceae, 134
Graphidiales, 133
Grasses, 149
Green algae, see Algae,
Green
Gregarina, 206, 217
Gregarina conica, 217
Gregarina cuneata, 217
Gregarina ovata, 217
Gregarinae, 206, 216
Gregarinarien, 217
Gregarines 206, 209, 215, 219
Gregarinida, 207, 217
Gregarinidae, 217
Gregarinidia, 207
Gregarininea, 217
1
1
The
284]
Classification of
Gregarinoidae, 217
Gregarinoidea, 217
Gregarinomorpha, 207
Gromia, 179, 191
Gromida, 191
Guepinia, 150
Guepinia apathularia, 145
Gurleya, 222
Guttulina, 203
Guttulina sessilis, 204
GuttuHnacea, 201, 203
Guttulinaceae, 203
GuttuHneae, 203
Guttulineen, 203
Guttulinidae, 203
Guttulinopsis, 203
Gymnamoebae, 201
Gymnamoebida, 201
Gymnascales, 130
Gymnoascaceae, 130
Gymnoascus, 131
Gymnocraspedidae, 67
Gymnodiniacea, 99, 100
Gymnodiniaceae, 100
Gymnodlniales, 99
Gymnodinida, 100
Gymnodinidae, 100
Gymnodiniidae, 100
Gymnodinina, 99
Gymnodinioidae, 99
Gymnodinium, 100
Gymnodinium Lunula, 101, 104
Gymnodinium striatum, 104
Gymnogongrus, 49
Gymnosporangium, 143, 148
Gymnosporidae, 211
Gymnosporidiida, 209, 211
Gymnostomata, 229
Gymnostomataceae, 229
Gymnostomina, 229
Gyrodinium, 101
Gyromonas, 166
Gyrophragmium, 152
Gyrosigma, 75
Haemamoeba, 213
Hacmamoeba
Haemamoeba
malariac, 213
vivax, 213
Hacmogregarina, 2 1
Haemogregarinida, 211, 212
Haemogregarinidac, 211
Haemogrcgarinina, 2 1
Haemoproteidae, 212
Haemoproteus, 213
Haemoproteus Columbae, 212, 213
Hacmosporidae, 211
Hacmosporidia, 207, 211, 212
Hacmosporidiida, 211
Haliarchnion, 49
Halicryptina, 198
Haliomma, 195
Lower Organisms
Haliomma
capillaris,
196
Haliommatina, 195
Halkyardia, 187
Halopappaceae, 60
Halopappus, 60
Halosphaeraceae, 66
Halteria, 231
Halteridiida, 212
Halteridiidae, 212
Halteridium, 212
Halteriidae, 231
Halterina, 231
Hantkenina, 187
Hantkeninidae, 187
Hantschia, 75
Haploactinomyxidae, 222
Haplobacteriacei, 18
Haplocyta, 215
Haplodinium, 99
Haplospora, 87
Haplosporangium, 124
Haplosporangium
lignicola, 122
Haplosporidia, 218
Haplosporidies, 218
Haplosporidiida, 218
Haplosporidiidae, 218
Haplosporidiidea, 209, 218
Haplosporidium, 218
Haplostichinae, 82
Haplozoonidae, 102
Hauerinina, 185
Hedriocystis, 194
Helicosorina, 185
Heliodiscus, 195
Heliodiscus Phacodiscus, 196
Heliolithae, 58
Helioflagellida, 189
Helioflagellidae, 191
Heliozoa, 63, 157, 189, 190, 205
Heliozoariae, 189, 190
Heliozoida, 189
Helminthocladeae, 47
Helminthosporium, 142
Helotiacea, 135
Helvellacea, 135
Helvellales, 134
Helvellineae, 134
Hemiascales, 130
Hemiasceae, 130
Hemiasci, 129
Hemiascineae, 130
Hemibasidii, 145, 149
Hcmicristcllaria, 187
Hemicyclomorpha, 18
Hcmidinium, 101
Hemileia vastatrix, 148
Hemisphaeriaceae, 134
Hcmisphaeriales, 133
Hemitrichia, 177
Hemitrichia intorta, 176
Hemophilus, 22
Henneguya, 221
Index
Hepatozoon, 211
Herpetomonas, 161, 162
Heterocapsaceae, 65
Heterocapsales, 63
Heterocapsineae, 55, 63
Heterocarpea, 41, 44, 52
Heterocarpeae, 40, 44
Heterochlorida, 63
Heterochloridaceae, 66
Heterochloridae, 66
Heterochloridales, 63
Heterochloridea, 63
Heterochloridineae, 55, 63
Heterochromonas, 59
Heterococcales, 63
Heterococcineae, 55, 63
Heterodermaceae, 175
Heterodermeae, 171
Heterogeneratae, 82
Heterohelicida, 188
Heterohelicidae, 188
Heterohelix, 188
Heterokonta, 11, 55, 83
Heterokontae, 53, 55, 63
Heteromastigoda, 158
Heteromonadina, 59
Heteronema, 109
Heteronemidae, 108
Heterophryida, 191, 193
Heterophryidae, 193
Heterophrys, 193
Heterosiphonales, 63
Heterosiphoneae, 55, 63
Heterostegina, 188
Heterotricha, 228, 230
Heterotrichaceae, 230
Heterotrichales, 63
Heterotrichida, 230
Heterotrichina, 230
Heterotrichineae, 55, 63
Hexacontium, 195
Hexaconus, 197
Hexactinomyxon, 222
Hexamastix, 167
Hexamastix Termopsidis, 164
Hexamita, 163, 166
Hexamitidae, 166
Hirmocystis, 217
Hodotermitidae, 167
Hoferellus, 221
Holocyclomorpha, 18
Holomastigotoides, 169
Holomastigotoidida, 169
Holomastigotoididae, 169
Holophrya, 229
Holophryidae, 229
Holotricha, 228, 229
Holotrichida, 229
Homalogonata, 69
Homo
sapiens, 6
Honey bees, 222
Hoplonympha, 169
[285
Hoplonympha
natator, 170
Hoplonymphida, 169
Hoplonymphidae, 169
Hoplorhynchus, 218
Hordeum
vulgare, 6
Hormogonales, 34
Hormogoneae, 34
Horse, 231
Hyalobryon, 60
Hyalodiscida, 201, 202
Hyalodiscidae, 202
Hyalodiscus, 202
Hyaloklossia, 211
Hyaloria, 149
Hyalospora, 217
Hydnacea, 151
Hydnaceae, 151
Hydnangiacea, 155
Hydnangiaceae, 155
Hydnei, 151
Hydnum, 151
Hydra, 203, 233
Hydramoeba, 203
Hydrocoleum, 35
Hydrogenomonas, 24
Hydruracea, 61, 62
Hydruraceae, 62
Hydruridae, 62
Hydrurina, 62
Hydrurus, 61
Hydrurus foetidus, 56, 62
Hyella, 36
Hymenogastraceae, 155
Hymenogastrales, 152
Hymenogastrea, 155
Hymenogastrei, 155
Hymenogastrineae, 152
Hymenomonadacea, 58, 60
Hymenomonadaceae, 60
Hymenomonadidae, 60
Hymenornonas, 60
Hymenomycetales, 150
Hymenomycetes, 150
Hymenomycetineae, 150
Hymenothecii, 150
Hymenostomata, 229
Hyperammina, 183
Hyperamminidae, 183
Hypermastigida, 168
Hypermastigina, 158, 166, 168
Hyphochytriacea, 69
Hyphochytriaceae, 69, 117
Hyphochytrialea, 57, 61, 69, 70,
Hyphochytriales, 69
Hyphochytrium, 69, 117
Hyphochytrium catenoides, 70
Hyphomycetes, 121, 140, 141
Hypnodiniaceae, 100
Hypocreaceae, 137
Hypocreales, 137, 138, 139, 142
Hypodermia, 146, 147
Hypodermii, 147
1
11
The
286]
Classification of
Hypomyces, 142
Hypomyces Solani
var. Cucurbitae,
126,
127
Hypotricha, 228, 232, 233
Hypotrichaceae, 233
Hypotrichida, 233
Hypotrichina, 233
Hysterangiacea, 155
Hysterangiaceae, 155
Hysteriacea, 134
Hysteriaceae, 133, 134
Hysteriales, 133, 141
Hysteriineae, 133, 134
Hysterophyta, 119
Ichthyophthirius, 229
Ichthyosporidium, 219
Imperforida, 183
Infusoires, 223
Infusoires suceurs, 235
Infusoria, 2, 37, 95, 118, 223, 228, 232,
235
Inoperculata, 135
Inophyta, 39, 119
Insects, 69, 113, 117, 118, 124, 125, 155,
159, 161, 165, 167, 216, 217, 220
Invertebrates, 161, 210, 211, 215, 216
lodamoeba, 203
Irish moss, 49
Irpex, 151
Isoachlya, 79
Isocarpeae, 69
Isochrysidaceae, 59
Isochrysidae, 59
Isochrysidales, 57
Isogeneratae, 82
Isospora, 210
Janczewskia, 52
Jarrina, 210
Joenia, 169
Joeniidae, 169
Joeniidea, 168
Jocnina, 169
Joenopsis, 169
Jola, 147
Junipers, 148
Kalotermes, 169
Kalotermitidae, 167
Kalotcrmitinac, 166, 168
Karyamocbina, 203
Karyolysus, 2 1
Kelps, 82, 83, 89, 90
Keramosphaera, 185
Keramosphacridac, 185
Keramosphaerina, 185
Kerona, 233
Klebsiella (bacterium), 7, 22
1
Lower Organisms
Klebsiella pneumoniae, 22
Klebsiella (flagellate), 7
Klebsiella alligata, 106
Klossia, 211
Klossiella, 211
Kofoidia, 168, 169
Kofoidiida, 169
Kofoidiidae, 169
Kurthia, 21
Kurthiacea, 19, 21, 237
Laboulbenia, 140
Laboulbenia Guerinii, 140
Laboulbenia Rougetii, 140
Laboulbeniaceae, 140
Laboulbenialea, 129, 140
Laboulbeniales, 140
Laboulbenieae, 140
Laboulbeniineae, 140
Laboulbeniomycetes, 140
Labyrinthula, 203, 204
Labyrinthula macrocystis, 203
Labyrinthulida, 201, 203
Labyrinthulidae, 203
Lachnea scutellata, 127, 136
Lachnobolus, 176
Lacrymaria, 229
Lactobacillaceae, 20
Lactobacillus, 20
Lactobacteriaceae, 20
Lagena (oomycete), 82
Lagena (rhizopod), 82, 184, 187
Lagenaceae, 187
Lagenidae, 186
Lagenidea, 185
Lagenidiacca, 81, 82
Lagenidiaceae, 82
Lagenidialea, 76, 81, 111, 118
Lagenidiales, 81
Lagenidium, 82
Lagenina, 186
Lagenocystis, 82, 237
Lagenocystis radicicola, 82, 237
Lagynida, 191
Lagynion, 63
Lagynis, 191
Laminaria, 91
Laminaria yczoensis, 92
Laminariaccae, 89
Laminariales, 89
Laminariea, 85, 89
Laminarieae, 89
Lampoxanthium, 195
Lampramocbac, 205
Ivamprodernia, 1 75
Lamprodermaceae, 1 75
Lamprospora Iciocarpa, 136
Lamprosporalcs, 171
Lankestcria, 216
Larcarida, 195
Larcoidea, 195
Index
Latrostium, 69
Laurencia, 52
Leangium, 177
Lithocampe, 198
Leathesia, 88
Lecudina, 216
Lecudinidae, 216
Leeches, 161, 211
Legerella, 211
Leidyopsis, 169
Leishmania, 162
Leishmania brasiliensis, 162
Leishmania Donovani, 162
Leishmania tropica, 162
Lemanea, 47
Lemna, 69
Lenticulina, 187
Lenticulites, 187
Lentospora, 221
Lenzites, 151
Leocarpus, 177
Leocarpus fragilis, 176
Lepidoderma, 177
Lepidoderma
Chailletii,
176
Lepochromulina, 62
Leptodiscida, 100, 102
Leptodiscidae, 102
Leptodiscus, 102
Leptolegnia, 79
Leptomitaceae, 79
Leptomi tales, 77
Leptomitea, 77, 79
Leptomiteae, 79
Leptomitus, 79
Leptomonas, 162
Leptospira, 29
Leptospira icteroides, 29
Leptospira icterohaemorrhagiae, 29
Leptospironympha, 169
Leptostromatacea, 141
Leptostromataceae, 141
Leptotheca, 221
Leptothrix, 27
Leptothrix ochracea, 27, 36
Leptotrichacea, 27
Leptotrichaceae, 20
Leptotrichacei, 20, 27
Leptotrichia, 20
Leucocytozoidae, 212
Leucocytozoon, 213
Leuvenia, 66
Liagora tetrasporifera, 47, 49
Licea, 175
Liceacea, 173, 175
Liceaceae, 175
Liceales, 171
Liceidae, 175
Lichenes, 119
Lichens, 119, 120
Ligniera, 179
Lindbladia, 175
Lionotus, 230
Listeria, 21
[287
Lithochytridina, 198
Lithocircus, 198
Lithocircus productus, 196
Lithocolla, 193
Lithocollidae, 193
Lithocyclia, 195
Lithocyclidina, 195
Lithocystis,
216
Litholophida, 197
Litholophus, 197
Lituola, 186
Lituolidaceae, 186
Lituolidae, 186
Lituolidea, 185, 186
Lituolina, 186
Liverworts, 10
Lizards, 211
Lobosa, 201
Loborhiza, 117
Lobster, 211
Loftusia, 186
Loftusiidae, 186
Loftusiina, 186
Lophomonadidae, 169
Lophomonadida, 168, 169
Lophomonadina, 168
Lophomonas, 168, 169
Loxodes, 230
Lychnaspis, 197
Lycogala, 172, 175
Lycogala epidendrum, 1 76
Lycogalaceae, 171, 175
Lycogactida, 174, 175
Lycogalactidae, 175
Lycogalales, 171
Lycogalopsis, 155
Lycogalopsis Solmsii, 145
Lycoperdacea, 155
Lycoperdaceae, 155
Lycoperdales, 152
Lycoperdineae, 152
Lycoperdon, 155
Lyngbya, 13, 35
Lytothecii, 152
Macrocystis pyrifera, 90, 91
Macromastix, 58
Macrotrichomonas, 167
Macrotrichomonas pulchra, 164
Maize, 6
Mallomonadidae, 62
Mallomonadinea, 61, 62
Mallomonas, 61, 62
Mallomonas roseola, 56
Mammals, 166, 210
Man, Mankind, Men,
213,230
Margarita, 176
Margaritaceae, 176
Margaritida, 174, 176
6,
159, 165,
210,
7
7 5
288]
1
The
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Margaritidae, 176
Massospora, 124, 125
Mastigamoeba, 158, 163
Mastigamoeba aspera, 160
Mastigamoebidae, 163
Mastigella, 163
Mastigophora, 6, 55, 94, 95
Mastotermitidae, 167
Matthewina, 186
Mayorella, 202
Mayorellida, 201, 202
Mayorellidae, 202
Medusetta, 200
Medusettida, 200
Megachytriaceae, 118
Megachytrium, 118
Melampsora, 143
Melampsoracea, 148
Melampsoraceae, 148
Melanconiacea, 141
Melanconiaceae, 141
Melanconialea, 141
Melanconiales, 141
Microcoleus, 35
Microglena, 62
Micromycopsis, 117
Micropeltidacea, 134
Micropeltidaceae, 134
Microrhopalodina, 166
Microsphaera, 132, 133
Microsphaera alni, 133
Microsporidia, 222
Microsporidies, 222
Microthyriacea, 134, 141
Microthyriaceae, 134
Microthytriales, 133
Miescher's tubes, 206
Mieschersche Schlauche, 206, 214
Mikrogromia, 183
Miliola, 182, 185, 201
Melanophycea, 11, 55, 82
Melanophyceae, 82
Melanospermeae, 82
Melitangium, 28
Mischococcacea, 65, 66
Mischococcaceae, 66
Mischococcus, 66
Mites, 211
Mitraspora, 221
Mitrati, 134
Molds, 142
Molds, water, 77
Mollisiacea, 135
Monaden, 189
Monades, 59
Monadidae, 59, 60
Monadidea, 158
Monadina, 57, 58, 59, 158
Melosira, 72, 73, 74
Melosiraceae, 74
Melosireae, 74
Meningococcus, 20
Menoidium, 103, 107, 109
Menoidium incurvum, 108
Menospora, 218
Menosporida, 218
Menosporidae, 218
Meridiea, 75
Meridieae, 75
Meridion, 75
Meridionaceae, 75
Merismopedia, 33
Merocystis, 211
Merogregarina, 215
Merogregarinida, 215
Merogregarinidae, 2 1
Merolpidiaceae, 1 1
Meroselenidium, 215
Mesocaena, 63
Mesogloia, 88
Mesogloiacca, 88
Metachaos, 202
Metadevescovina, 167
Metaphyta, 6
Metasporeae, 1 1
Metazoa, 6
Metchnikovclla, 219
Metchnikovellida, 219
Mctchnikovellidae, 219
Methanomonas, 24
Micrococcacea, 19, 20
Micrococcaceae, 20
Micrococcus, 20
Milioles, 179
Miliolida, 185
Miliolidae, 185
Miliolidea, 183, 185
Miliolina, 185
Mindeniella, 79
Monadineae Tetraplasteae, 191
Monadineae Zoosporeae, 191
Monads, collared, 38
Monas, 38, 54, 59, 60, 158
Monas
Monas
amyli, 189
Okenii, 31
Monascus, 131
Monera, 6, 12
Moneres,
12,
189
Monilia, 135, 140, 142
Monilia sitophila, 139
Moniliacea, 142
Moniliaceae, 142
Moniliales, 141
Monkeys, 213
Monoblepharella, 112
Monoblepharella Taylori, 114
Monoblcpharidacca, 112
Monoblcpharidaceae, 112
Monoblepharidalea, 111, 114
Monoblepharidales, 1 1
Monoblcpharideae, 110
Monoblcpharidineae, 110, 111
Monoblepharis, 111, 112
Monocercomonadida, 167
Index
Monocercomonadidae, 167
Monocercomonas, 167
Monocercomonoides, 165
Monocilia, 66
Monociliaceae, 66
Monocystid gregarines, 209
Monocystida, 216
Monocystidae, 216
Monocystidea, 209, 215'
Monocystiden, 216
Monolpidiaceae, 118
Monomychota, 17
Monopylaria, 190, 196, 198
Monopylea, 198
Monopyleen, 198
Monopylida, 198
Monopylina, 198
Monoschizae. 215
Monosiga, 67, 68
Monosomatia, 179, 183
Monosporea, 210
Monosporees, 209
Monostomina, 191
Morchella, 135
Morchella conica, 136
Mortierella, 124
Mortierellacea, 123, 124
Mortierellaceae, 124
Mosquitoes, 162, 213
Moss, Irish, 49
Mosses, 10
Mouse, Mice, 211,214
Mrazekia, 222
Mrazekiida, 222
Mrazekiidae, 222
Mucedinaceae, 142
Mucedineae, 142
Mucedines, 129, 130, 135
Mucor, 121, 123
Mucor Mucedo, 121, 123
Mucoracea, 123
Mucoraceae, 123
Mucorales, 121
Mucorina, 121, 128
Mucorineae, 121
Mucorini, 121
Mucronina, 188
Mushrooms, 145, 151
Mussels, 211,218
Mutinus, 155
Mycetalia, 119
Mycetoideum, Regnum, 119
Mycetosporidium, 179
Mycetozoa, 119, 157, 171, 176, 203
Mycetozoen, 171, 172
Mycetozoida, 171
Mychota, 1,4,6,8, 10, 12
Mycobacteriacea, 25
Mycobacteriaceae, 25
Mycobacterium, 25
Mycobacterium leprae, 25
Mycobacterium tuberculosis, 25
Mycochytridinae, 113
Mycoderma mesentericum, 24
Mycophyceae, 77
Mycophyta, 119
Mycoporacea, 139
Mycosphaerella, 139
Mycosphaerella personata, 138
Myrioblepharis, 112
Myriogloiacea, 88
Myrionema, 89
Myrionematacea, 88
Myriospora, 2 1
Myxidiea, 221
Myxidiees, 221
Myxidiida, 221
Myxidiidae, 221
M>Tcidium, 221
Myxobacter, 28
Myxobacteria, 12, 14
Myxobacteriacea, 28
Myxobacteriaceae, 27, 28
Myxobacter iales, 27
Myxobactralea, 26, 27
Myxobactrales, 27
Myxobolea, 221
Myxobolees, 221
Myxobolida, 221
Myxobolidae, 221
Myxobolus, 221
Myxoceratida, 221, 237
Myxoceros, 221, 237
Myxoceros Blennius, 220, 221, 237
Myxoceros sphaerulosa, 221, 237
Myxochloridae, 66
Myxochrysidaceae, 63
Myxochrysidae, 63
Myxochrysis, 63
Myxochytridinae, 113
Myxococcacea, 28
Myxococcaceae, 28
Myxococcus, 28
Myxococcus coralloides, 26
Myxocystoda, 99
Myxogastres, 171
Myxomycetes, 10, 157, 171, 172, 178
Myxomyceten, 172
Myxomycidium flavum, 143
Myxomycophyta, 171
Myxophyceae, 17, 29, 30
Myxophykea, 29
Myxophyta, 171
Myxoproteus, 221
Myxoschizomycetae, 27
Myxoschizomycetes, 18, 27
Myxosoma, 221
Myxosomatida, 221
Myxosomatidae, 221
Myxosporidia, 206, 219, 220
Myxothallophyta, 171
Myzocytium, 82
[289
290]
The
Classification of
Naegelliella, 62
Naegelliellaceae, 62
Naegelliellidae, 62
Naegleria. 159
Najadea, 60
Nassellaria, 198
Nassellida, 198
Nassoidea, 198
Nassula, 230
Nassulidae, 230
Nautilus, 182, 186, 187
Navicula, 72, 73, 75
Naviculaceae, 75
Naviculales, 74
Naviculea, 75
Naviculeae, 75
Neactinomvxon, 222
Nebela, 205
Nebelida, 205
Nebelidae, 205
Nectria, 141, 142
Nectria cinnabarina, 139
Nectrioidaceac, 141
Nectrioideae, 141
Neisseria gonorrhoeae, 20
Neisseria intracellularis, 20
Neiseria meningitidis, 20
Neisseria Weichselbaumii, 20
Neisseriacea, 19, 20
Neisseriaceae, 20
Neisseriacees, 20
Nemalion, 47
Nemalion multifidum, 49
Nemalionales, 47
Nemalioninae, 47
Nemastomatales, 47
Nematochrysidaceae, 60
Nematochrysis, 61
Nematocystida, 219
Nematodes, 113, 118, 124
Nematothecia, 141
Nematothecii, 141
Neogregarina, 215
Neosporidia, 206, 207, 219
Nephroselmidacea, 98
Nephrosclmidaceae, 98
Nephrosclmidae, 98
Nephroselmis, 98
Nereocystis, 89
Nereocystis Luetkeana, 90, 91
Neurospora, 139, 140
Neurospora crassa, 127
Neusinidae, 186
Neusina, 186
Nevskia, 27
Nidularia, 155
Nidulariaceae, 155
Nidularialcs, 152
Nidularica, 155
Nidularici, 155
Nidulariincae, 152
Nina, 217,218
Lower Organisms
Nitrobacter, 24
Nitrobacter Winogradskyi, 24
Nitrobacteriacea, 20, 24
Nitrobacteriaceae, 24
Nitromonas, 24
Nitrosococcus, 24
Nitrosococcus nitrosus, 24
Nitrosomonas europaea, 24
Nitrosomonas javanensis, 24
Nitzschia, 75
Nitzschiacea, 75
Nitzschiaceae, 75
Noctiluca, 95, 99, 102
Noctiluca miliaris, 102
Nectiluca scintillans, 102, 104
Noctilucae, 94, 99
Noctilucida, 100, 102
Noctilucidae, 102
Nodosalida, 186
Nodosarella, 188
Nodosaria, 184, 187
Nodosarida, 186
Nodosaridae, 186
Nodosarina, 186, 188
Nodosaroum, 186
Nodosinella, 186
Nodosinellida, 186
Nodosinellidae, 186
Nonion, 184, 187
Nonionidea, 187
Nonionideae, 187
Nonionina, 187
Nosema, 222
Noscma bombycis, 206, 222
Nosematidae, 222
Nostoc, 35
Nostocacea, 34, 35
Nostocaceae, 35
Nostochineae, 33
Nowakowskiella, 118
Nowakowskiellacea, 117, 118
Nowakowskiellaceae, 118
Nubecularina, 185
Nucleophaga, 118
Nuda, 201
Nummulitaceae, 188
Nummulites, 188
Nummulitida, 188
Nummulinidae, 188
Nunmiulitina, 188
Nummulitinidea, 183, 185, 188
Oats, 148
Ochromonadaceae, 59, 60
Ochromonadalea, 54, 56,
57, 61, 64, 67,
85, 165
Ochromonadales, 57
Ochromonadidae, 59
Ochromonas, 58, 59, 60
Ochromonas granulans, 54
Octomitus, 166
[291
Index
Octomyxa, 179
Orbitolinidae, 186
Octospora, 222
Orbitolites, 185
Oicomonadacea, 159, 161
Oicomonadaceae, 161
Oicomonadidae, 161
Orbulina, 188
Orbulinida, 188
Orcadella, 175
Orcadellaceae, 175
Orcadellidae, 175
Orcheobius, 211
Orobias, 188
Ortholithinae, 58
Orthopteran, 217
Orthosporeae, 117
Oscillaria malariae, 213
Oscillatoria, 30, 35, 36
Oidium, 142
Oikomonas, 161
Oligochaet worms, 222
Oligonema, 177
Oligosporea, 209, 210
Oligotricha, 230
Oligotrichaceae, 230
Oligotrichida, 230
Oligotrichina, 230
Olpidiacea, 115, 118
Olpidiaceae, 118
Olpidopsidacea, 81
Olpidiopsidaceae, 81
Olpidiopsis, 81
Olpidium, 113, 118
Olpidium Allomycetos, 116
Ommatida, 195
Onygena, l31
Oodinidae, 102
Oomycetes, 11, 53, 55, 65, 76, 78, 111,
118, 119, 121, 125, 127, 177, 178, 179
Oosporeae, 77
Opalina, 225, 227, 229
Opalinalea, 228, 237
Opalinida, 228
Opalinidae, 228, 229
Opalinina, 229
Opalininea, 228
Opalinoea, 225, 229
Operculata, 135
Operculina, 188
Ophiocytiaceae, 66
Ophiocytium, 66
Ophiocytium parvulum, 66
Ophiotheca, 176
Ophrydium, 233
Ophryocystis, 215
Ophryocystida, 2 1 5
Ophryocystidae, 215
Ophryodendrida, 236
Ophryodendridae, 236
Ophryodendrina, 236
Ophryodendron, 236
Ophryoglena, 229
Ophryoglenidae, 229
Ophryoscolecidae, 231
Ophryoscolecids, 225
Ophryoscolccina, 231
Ophryoscolex, 231
Ophthalmidium, 184, 185
Opisthokonta, 39, 110, 121, 237
Opistokonten, 111
Orbitoides, 188
Orbitoidida, 188
Orbitoididae, 188
Orbitolina, 186
Orbitolinida, 186
Oscillatoria Princeps, 13
Oscillatoria splendida, 32
Oscillatoriacea, 34, 35
Oscillatoriaceae, 35
Owl, 162
Ox, Oxen, 162, 231
Oxymonadida, 165, 166
Oxymonadidae, 166
Oxymonadina, 163
Oxymonas, 163, 166
Oxyphysis, 103
Oxyrrhis, 101_
Oxyrrhis marina, 101
Oxytocum, 103
Oxytricha, 233
Oxytrichidae, 233
Oxytrichina, 233
Pacinia, 23
Pacinia cholerae-asiaticae, 23
Padina, 87
Palatinella, 62
Pantostomatales, 158
Pantostomatida, 158
Pantostomatineae, 158
Paradinida, 98
Pardinidae, 98
Paradinium Pouchetii, 97, 98
Paraisotricha, 231
Parajoenia, 167
Paramaecium, 223, 224, 225, 226, 227,
229
Paramaecium
Paramaecium
Paramaecium
Paramaecium
Aurelia, 226, 227
Bursaria, 226
caudatum, 226
multimicronucleatum, 226
Parameciina, 229
Paramoeba Eilhardi, 98
Paramoebida, 98
Paramoebidae, 98
Paramoecidae, 229
Parasitella, 123
Parvobacteriaceae, 22
Pasteurella avicida, 22
Pasteurella pestis, 22
Pasteurellacea, 19, 22, 23, 237
Pasteuria, 26, 27
The
292]
Classification of
Patellariacea, 135
Patellina, 181, 182, 185
Patouillardina, 149
Patouillardina cinerea, 145
Pavonina, 188
Peach, 137
Pectobacterium, 23
Pectobacterium carotovorum, 23
Pedangia, 186
Pedilomonas, 111
_
Pedinella, 62, 63
Pegidia, 188
Pegidiida, 188
Pegidiidae, 188
Pelodictyon, 31
Pelomyxa, 202
Pelomyxa
Pelomyxa
carolinensis, 200, 201
palustris, 202
Peneroplidae, 185
Peneroplidea, 185
PeneropHdina, 185
Peneroplis, 181, 184, 185
Penicillium, 130, 131
Penicillium notatum, 25, 131
Pennatae, 74
Penta trichomonas, 165
Pentatrichomonas obliqua, 164, 167, 237
Peranema, 108, 109
Peranema trichophorum, 108
Peranemaceae, 108
Peranemina, 108
Perforida, 186
Periblasteae, 47
Lower Organisms
Peritromus, 233
Peronospora, 81
Peronosporacea, 80, 81
Peronosporaceae, 81
Peronosporales, 80
Peronosporina, 76, 80
Peronosporinae, 80
Peronosporineae, 80
Peziza, 127, 135
Peziza domiciliana, 127
Pezizacea, 135
Pezizales,
134
Pezizineae, 134
Pestallozia, 141
Pfeiflferella mallei, 22
Phacidiaceae, 133, 134
Phacidiacei, 133
Phacidialea, 129, 133, 135
Phacidiales, 133
Phacidiea, 134, 141
Phacidieae, 134
Phacidiineae, 133, 134
Phacus, 94, 106, 107
Phaenocystes, 219
Phaenocystida, 219
Phaeocapsa, 98
Phaeocapsaceae, 98
Phaeocapsales, 96
Phaeococcus, 98
Phaeoconchia, 198, 199
Phaeocystia, 198
Phaeocystina, 199
Phaeocystis, 58
Perichaena, 176
Perichaenacea, 174, 176
Perichaonaceae, 176
Peridinaca, 102, 103
Peridinea, 96
Peridineae, 94, 96, 103
Peridiniaceae, 103
Peridiniales, 102
Peridinidae, 103
Peridiriina, 103
Peridinioidae, 103
Peridinium, 94, 103
Peridinium cinctum, 104
Perionella, 66
Phaeocystis globosa, 54
Phaeodaria, 199
Phacodariae, 198
Pcripylaria, 194
Pcripylea, 194
Peripyleen, 194
Peripylida, 194
Peripylina, 194
Perisporia, 131
Porisporiacea, 129, 131
Perisporiaceae, 131
Perisporialcs, 131
Peritricha, 233
Peritrichaceae, 233
Peritrichida, 233
Peritrichinae, 18
Phaeothamnion, 61
Phaeothamnionacea, 58, 60
Phaeothamnionaccae, 60
Phaeozoosporea, 85, 86, 87
Phaeozoosporeac, 86
Phagomyxa, 179
Phalanastrriaccae, 67
Phalanastcriidae, 67
Phalanasterium, 67
Phalanasterium digitatum, 68
Pcritromidae, 233
Peritromina, 233
Phaeodermatium, 63
Phaeogromia, 198, 199
Phaeophyceae, 53, 82, 95
Phacophycophyta, 53
Phaeophyta, 39, 53
Phaeoplakaceae, 98
Phaeoplax, 98
Phaeosphaera, 59
Phacosphaeria, 190, 196, 198, 199
Phaeosporales, 86
Phaeosporcae, 82, 86
Phallaccae, 155
Phallales, 152
Phallineac, 152
Phalloidca, 155
Phalloidei, 155
Index
[293
Phallus, 155
Pines, 148
Phlebotomus, 21
Phleospora, 139
Pinnularia, 72, 75
Pipetta, 195
Phlyctidiacea, 115, 117
Phlyctidiaceae, 117
Piptocephalidacea, 123, 124
Piptocephalidaceae, 124
Piptocephalis, 123, 124
Piroplasma, 214
Phlyctidium, 117
Phlyctorhiza, 117
Phoma, 141
Phomaceae, 141
Phomales, 141
Phomatacea, 141
Phomataceae, 141
Phomatalea, 141
Phomatales, 141
Phormidium,
32, 35
Phraginidium, 147, 148
Phragmidium violaceum, 147
Phycochromaceae, 29
Phycomyces, 123, 124
Phycomyces nitens, 122
Phycomyceten, 76
Phycomycetes, 76
Phycomycophyta, 76
Phyllactinia, 132, 133
Phyllactinia corylea, 127
Phyliophora, 49
Phyllosiphon, 67
Phyllosiphonacea, 67
Phyllosiphinaceae, 67
Physaraceae, 171, 177
Fhysaraks, 171, 174
Physarea, 174, 177
Physaridae, 177
Physarum, 177
Physarum notabile, 176
Physarum polycephalum, 176
Physematium, 189, 195
Physoderma, 115, 117
Physodermataceae, 117
Physomonas, 59
Phytodiniacea, 99, 100
Phytodiniaceae, 100
Phytodinidae, 100
Phytodinium, 100
Phytomastigophorea, 55
Phytomonas (bacterium), 7, 23
Phytomonas (flagellate), 7, 161
Phytomonas Donovani, 160
Phytomyxida, 111, 171, 177
Phytomyxidae, 179
Phytomyxinae, 177
Phytomyxini, 177
Phytophthora, 80
Phytophthora infestans, 81
Phytosarcodina, 171
Phytozoidea, 94, 105
Pigeon, 212
Pileati, 150
Pileocephalus, 218
Pilobolus, 121, 124
Pinaciophora, 193
Pinacocystis, 193
Pisces,
1
Plagiotomidae, 230
Plagiotomina, 230
Planopulvinulina, 187
Planorbulina, 187
Planorbulinidae, 187
Plant kingdom, Plantae, Plants, 1,2, 4, 6,
8, 10, 24, 38, 61, 67, 95, 113, 117, 118,
130, 137, 148, 151, 161, 177, 179, 202
Plasmodida, 213
Plasmodidae, 213
Plasmodiida, 211
Plasmodiophora, 179
Plasmodiophora Brassicae, 178
Plasmodiophoraceae, 1 79
Plasmodiophorales, 177
Plasmodiophorea, 179
Plasmodiophoreae, 179
Plasmodiophoreen, 179
Plasmodiophorina, 177
Plasmodium, 212, 213
Plasmodium falciparum, 214
Plasmodium malariae, 213
Plasmodium vivax, 213
Plasmodroma, 157
Plasmopara
viticola, 81
Platychrysis, 58
Platygloea, 147
Platynoblasteae, 51
Platysporea, 221
Plectascales, 130
Plectascineae, 130
Plectellaria,
198
Plectida, 198
Plectobasidiales, 152
Plectobasidiineae, 152
Plectofrondicularia, 188
Plectoidea, 198
Plectonema, 36
Plectonida, 198
Pleurage curvicolla, 128
Pleurocapsa, 36
Pleurocapsacea, 35, 36
Pleurocapsaceae, 36
Pleuromonas (dinoflagellate), 99
Pleuromonas (zoomastigote), 159
Pleuronemidae, 230
Pleurosigma, 75
Pleurostomella, 188
Pleurostomellida, 188
Pleurostomellidae, 188
Pleurotricha, 233
Pleurotrichidae, 233
Pleurotus, 152
Pleurotus ostreatus, 152
294]
The
Classification of
Plistophora, 222
Plistophoridae, 222
Plocapsilina, 186
Plocapsilinidae, 186
Plowrightia morbosa, 140
Pneumobacilliis, 22
Podangium, 28
Podaxacea, 152
Podaxaceae, 152
Podaxon, 152
Podocyathus, 236
Podophrya, 235
Podophyridae, 235
Podophryina, 235
Podosphaera, 132, 133
Polyangiaceae, 28
Polyangidae, 27
Polyangium, 28
Polychaos, 202
Polychytrium, 117
Polycystidea, 209, 216
Polycystina (of Ehrenberg), 189, 198
Polycystina (of Delage and Herouard),
217
Polydinida, 101
Polygastrica, 223
Polykrikida, 100, 101
Polykrikos, 101
Polymastigida, 158, 163, 164
Polymastigidae, 165
Polymastigina, 158, 163, 165
Polymastix, 163, 165
Polymastix melolonthae, 164
Polymorphina, 187
Polymorphinida, 187
Polymorphinidae, 187
Polymorphinina, 187
Polymyxa, 178, 179
Polyphagaceae, 117
Polyphagus, 111, 117
Polyphagus Euglcnae, 116, 117
Polyporacea, 151
Polyporaceae, 151
Polyporales, 150
Polyporei, 151
Polyporus, 151
Polysiphonia nigrescens, 49
Polysiphonia violacea, 45, 46
Polysiphonieae, 51
Polysomatia, 179, 185
Polysphondylium, 203
Polysphondylium violaceum, 204
Polysporea, 209,211
Polystichinae, 82
Polystictus, 151
Polystomclla, 186, 187
Polystomella crispa, 181
Polystomellina, 187
Polythalamia, 179, 185
Polytoma, 61
Pontifex, 202
Pontisma, 81
Lower Organisms
Pontosphaera, 60
Pontosphaeraceae, 60
Porospora, 218
Porosporida, 218
Porosporidae, 218
Porphyra, 43
Porphyra laciniata, 42
Porphyra tenera, 42, 43
Porphyra umbilicaris, 42, 43
Porphyraceae, 43
Porphyrea, 41, 43
Porphyreae, 43
Porphyridiacea, 41
Porphyridiaceae, 41
Porphyridiales, 4l
Porphyridium, 3, 40
Porphyridium cruentum, 41
Postelsia palmaeformis, 90, 91
Poteriochromonas, 60
Poteriodendron, 67
Poteriodendron petiolatum, 68
Pouchetia, 101
Pouchetiida, 100, 101
Pouchetiidae, 101
Prasiola, 3, 40, 44
Prasiolaceae, 44
Primalia, 37
Primigenium, Regnum, 37
Proboscoidella, 166
Progastreades, 94, 95
Pronoctiluca, 101
Prorocentraceae, 99
Prorocentrales, 99
Proroccntridae, 99
Proroccntrina, 99
Prorocentrinea, 98
Prorocentrinen, 99
Prorocentrum, 99
Prorodon, 229
Protamoeba, 189
Proteomyxa, 189, 190
Proteomyxiae, 189, 190
Proteomyxida, 189
Proteromonadidae, 159
Protcromonadina, 158
Proteromonas, 159
Proterospongia Haeckcli, 68
Proteus diffluens, 201
Proteus vulgaris, 22
Protista, 4, 6, 37, 189
Protistcs trichocystiferes, 94, 95
Protoascineac, 130
Protobasidiomycetes, 145, 146, 150
Protobionta, 6, 37
Protochrysis, 98
Protociliata, 228
Protoctista, 1, 4,6,8,
10,37
Protodennieae, 171
Protodinifcr, 101
Protodiniferida, 100, 101
Protodiniferidae, 101
Protodiscineae, 137
[295
Index
Protodontia Uda, 145
Protoflorideae, 41
Protogenes, 189
Protomastigales, 158
Protomastigida, 158
Protomastigina, 158
Protomastigineae, 158
Protomonas, 189, 191
Protomonadina, 158
Protomyces, 130
Protoopalina, 229
Protoopalinidae, 229
Protophyta, 6, 12, 18
Protoplasta, 39, 111, 157
Protoplasta filosa, l90
Protopsis, 101
Protozoa, 6, 12, 29, 37, 39, 223
Prowazekia, 159
Prunoidea, 195
Prunophracta, 197
Prymnesiidae, 58
Prymneslum, 58
Pseudomonas, 23
Pseudomonas aeruginosa, 23
Pseudospora, 159, 189, 191
Pseudosporea, 19l
Pseudosporeae, 191
Pseudosporeen, 191
Pseudosporidae, 191
Pseudotetraedron, 66
Pseudotetraedron neglectum, 64
Psorosperms, 206
Psychodiere, Regne, 37
Psychodies, 37
Pteridomonas, 193
Pterocephalus, 218
Pterospora, 216
Ptychodiscida, 103
Puccinia, 143, 147, 148
Puccinia graminis, 147, 148
Puccinia Malvacearum, 148
Pucciniaceae, 148
Pucciniales, 147
Puffballs, 155, 172
Punctariales, 89
Pycnospermeae, 82, 89
86
Pyrenomycetales, 138
Pyrenomycetes, 137
Pyrenomycetineae, 137
Pyrgo, 185
Pyrocystis, 100
Pylaiella,
137
Pyronema confluens var. igneum, 127
Pyronemacea, 135
Pyrrhophycophyta, 94
Pyrrhophyta, 39, 94, 182
Pyrsonympha, 166
Pyrsonymphina, 163
Pythiacea, 80
Pyronema, 127, 134,
Pythiaceae, 80
135,_
Quadrula, 205
Rabbit, 210
Raciborskya, 100
Radaisia, 36
Radioflagellata, 190
Radiolaria, 189, 190, 194, 196
Radiolariae, 189
Radiolarida, 189
Ralfsia, 87, 89
Ralfsiacea, 88
Ramularia, 139
Ramulinina, 187
Raphidophrys, 193
Raphidozoum, 195
Rat, 160
Ravenelia, 148
Red
algae, see Algae,
Red
Regne Psychodiere, 37
Regnum Mycetoideum, 119
Regnum
Primigenium, 37
Reophacida, 186
Reophacidae, 186
Reophax, 186
Reptiles, 212, 220
Reticularia, 175, 179
Reticulariacea, 174, 175
Reticulariaceae, 175
Reticularieae, 171
Reticulitermes, 171
Reticulosa, 179
Retortomonadidae, 165
Retortomonadina, 163
Retortomonas, 163, 165
Rhabdogeniae, 207
Rhabdosphaera, 60
Rhipidiacea, 77, 79
Rhipidiaceae, 79
Rhipidium, 79
Rhizammina, 183
Rhizamminidae, 183
Rhizaster, 63
Rhizidiacea, 115, 117
Rhizidiaceae, 117
Rhizidiomyces, 69
Rhizidiomyces apophysatus, 70
Rhizidiomycetaceae, 69
Rhizidium, 113, 117
Rhizinacea, 135
Rhizo-Flagellata, 158
Rhizobiacea, 19, 22, 23
Rhizobiaceae, 22
Rhizobium, 23
Rhizobium Leguminosarum, 23
Rhizochloridaceae, 66
Rhizochloridae, 66
Rliizochloridales, 63
Rhizochloridea, 63
Rhizochloridineae, 55, 63
Rhizochloris, 66
Rhizochrysidaceae, 63
The
296]
Classification
Rodents, 211
Roesia, 69
157, 158, 160, 178, 192
Rhizomastigaceae, 163
Rhizomastigida, 158
Rhizomastigina, 158, 163
Rhizomastix, 163
Rhizopoda, 6, 63, 157, 172, 179, 184, 200,
Rhizoflagellata,
radiaria, 189,
194
Rhizopods, 179
Rhizopodes, 179
Rhizopogonacea, 155
Rhizopogonaceae, 155
Rhizopus, 121
Rhizopus nigricans, 122, 124
Rhizosolenia, 74
Rhizosoleniacea, 74
Rhizosoleniaceae, 74
Rhodobacillacea, 31, 237
Rhodobacillus, 31
Rhodobacteria, 30, 31
Rhodobacteriaceae, 31
Rhodochaetacea, 41, 43
Rhodochaetaceae, 43
Rhodochaete, 43
Rhodochorton, 47
Rhodomelaceae, 51
Rhodomeleae, 51
Rhodomonas, 98
Rhodomonas
baltica, 97
Rhodophyceac, 6, 40
Rhodophycophyta, 40
Rhodophyllis, 49
Rhodophyta, 39, 40, 44
Rhodopseudomonas, 31
Rhodospermeae, 40
Rhodospirillum, 31
Rhodymcniacea, 51
Rhodymeniaceae, 51
Rhodymeniales, 51
Rhodymcnieae, 51
Rhodymeninae, 51
Rhoicosphenia, 76
Rhoicosphenia curvata, 72
Rhopalodia, 75
Rhynchocystida, 216
Rhynchocystidae, 216
Rhynchocystis, 216
Rhynchomonas, 159
Rickettsia Mclophagi, 21
Rickettsia Prowazekii, 21
Rickettsia Rickettsii, 21
Rickettsiacea, 19, 20, 118
Lower Organisms
Rickettsiaceae, 20
Rivularia, 36
Rivulariacea, 34, 36
Rivulariaceae, 36
Roach, 166, 168,170
Rhizochrysidae, 63
Rhizochrysidina, 61
Rhizochrysidinae, 61
Rhizochrysidineae, 55
Rhizochrysis, 61, 63
Rhizochrysis Scherffeli, 56
Rhizocryptineae, 95
Rhizoctonia, 142
Rhizodiniales, 99, 101
Rhizodininae, 95, 99
205
Rhizopoda
of
Rosaceae, 148
Rotalia, 184, 187
Rotaliaceae, 187
Rotalida, 187
Rotalidae, 187
Rotalidea, 187
Rotalina, 187
Rotifers, 113, 118,
Rozella, 118
219
Rugipes, 202
Rupertia, 187
Rupertiidae, 187
Russula, 143
Russula emetica, 145
Rusts, 145, 147
Rye, 148
Saccamminidae, 183
Saccharomyces cerevisiae, 130
Saccharomycetacea, 130
Saccharomycetaceae, 130
Saccharomycetes, 130
Saccinobaculus, 163, 166
Sagosphaerida, 199
Sagrina, 188
Salmonella, 22
Salpingoeca, 67
Salpingoeca ampullacea, 68
Salpingoeca Clarkii, 68
Salpingoecidae, 67
Sappinia, 203
Sappinia diploidea, 203
Sappinia pedata, 204
Sappiniaceae, 203
Sappiniidae, 203
Saprolegnia, 76, 79
Saprolegnia ferax, 78
Saprolegnia mixta, 78
Saprolegniaceae, 77
Saprolegniales, 77
Saprolegniea, 77
Saprolegnicae, 77
Saprolcgniineae, 77
Saprolegnina, 77
Saprolegninae, 77
Sapromyces, 79
Saprospira, 29
Sarcina, 20
Sarcocystida, 214
Sarcocystidae, 214
Sarcocystidca, 214
Sarcocystis, 214
Sarcocystis Miescheriana,
Sarcocystis Muris, 214
214
Index
Sarcodina, 6, 172, 200
Sarcosporidia, 207, 214
Sargassaceae, 91
Sargassea, 92
Sargasseae, 92
[297
Serratia, 22
Siderocapsa, 27
Sideromonas, 27
Siedleckia, 215
Silicina, 185
Sargassum, 93
Sargassum Horneri, 93
Silicoflagellata, 55, 56, 57, 61, 62, 64, 67,
157,200
Schaudinella, 216
Schaudinellida, 216
SchaudinelHdae, 216
Schinzia Leguminosarum, 23
Schizocystida, 215
Schizocystidae, 215
Schizocystinea, 215
Schizocystis, 215
Silicoflagellatae, 55,
Silicoflagellidae, 62
Silicoflagellina, 61
Saricodina, 63,
Schizodinium, 102
Schizogoniacea, 41, 44
Schizogoniaceae, 44
Schizogonium, 44
Schizogregarinaria, 215
Schizogregarinida. 209, 215
Schizomycetae, 17, 18
Schizomycetes, 18, 206
Schizomycophyta, 17
Schizophyta, 12, 18
Schizophytae, 12
Schizosporea, 18
Schlauche, Mieschersche, 206, 214
Sciadiaceae, 66
Sciadophora, 218
Sclerocarpa, 129, 133, 135, 137, 145
Sclerocarpi, 137
Scleroderma, 143
Sclerodermataceae, 155
Sclerodermatales, 152
Sclerodermea, 155
Sclerodermei, 155
Sclerotinia, 140
Sclerotinia cinerea, 135, 136
Scytomonas pusilla, 108
Scytonema, 36
Scytonematacea, 34, 35
Scytonemataceae, 35
Sebacina, 149
Sebacina sublilacina, 145
Sebdenia, 49
Selenidium, 215
Seleniida, 215
Seleniidae, 215
Selenococcidiida, 211
Selenococcidiidae, 211
Sclenococcidinea, 210
Selenococcidium intermedium, 211
Sennia, 97, 98
Sepedonei, 141
Septata, 217
Septobasidium, 147
Septoria, 139, 141
Sheep, 210, 214
Shigella, 22
Shigella dysenteriae, 22
69
62
Silkworms, 206, 222
Sinuolinea, 221
Siphonaria, 117
Siphonogenerina, 188
Siphonomycetae, 77
Siphonophyceae, 55
Siphonotestales, 62
Sirolpidiacea, 81
Sirolpidiaceae, 81
Sirolpidium, 81
Sirosiphon, 36
Sirosiphonacea, 34, 36
Sirosiphonaceae, 36
Slavina, 222
Smuts, 145, 149
Snails,
161,211
Snakes, 210
Snyderella, 168
Snyderella Tabogae, 164
Solenodinium, l99
Sorangiacea, 28
Sorangiaceae, 28
Sorangium, 28
Soranthera, 89
Sorites, 185
Soritidae, 185
Soritina, 185
Sorodiscus, 179
Sorophoreen, 203
Sorosphaera, 179
Sphacelaria, 86
Sphacelarialea, 85, 86
Sphacelariales, 86
Sphacelariea, 86
Sphacelarieae, 86
Sphaeractinomyxon, 222
Sphaerastrum, 193
Sphaerellaria, 194
Sphaeria, 138, 141
Sphaeria Scirpi, 128
Sphaeriaceae, 137
Sphaeriales, 137, 138, 139, 141
Sphaerida, 195
Sphaeridea, 194
Sphaerioidaceae, 141
Sphaerioideae, 141
Sphaerita, 118
Sphaerobolacea, 155
Sphaerobolaceae, 155
Sphaerobolus, 155
Sphaerocapsa, 197
Sphaerocapsida, 197
The
298]
Classification of
Sphaerocladia, 112, 113
Sphaerococcales, 47
Sphaerococcoidea, 46, 47, 50
Sphaerococcoideae, 47
Sphaeroeca, 67
Sphaeroidea, 195
Sphaeroidina (genus of Rhizopoda), 187
Sphaeroidina (family of Radiolaria), 195
Sphaeromyxa, 221
Sphaerophracta, 197
Sphaerophrya, 235
Sphaeropsidales, 141
Sphaeropsideae, 141
Sphaerospora, 221
Sphaerosporida, 221
Sphaerosporidae, 221
Sphaerosporea, 221
Sphaerotheca, 127, 133
Sphaerotheca pannosa, 133
Sphaerotilacea, 33
Sphaerotilaceae, 33
Sphaerotilalea, 30, 33, 237
Sphaerotilus, 30
Sphaerotilus natans, 33
Sphaerozoen, 194
Sphaerozoida, 195
Lower Organisms
Spirulina, 35
Sponges, 37, 67
Spongocarpeae, 50
Spongospora, 179
Spongurida, 195
Spongurus, 195
Sporobolomyces, 145
Sporochnales, 87
Sporochnea, 88
Sporochnoidea, 85, 87, 89
Sporochnoideae, 87
Sporochnus, 93
Sporodinia, 124
Sporochytriaceae, 117
Sporomyxa, 179
Sporozoa, 111, 206, 207, 219
Sporozoans, 21, 162
Sporozoaires, 207
Sporozoaria, 206, 207
Spumaria, 177
Spumariaceae, 177
Spumellaria, 194, 195
Spyrida, 198
Spyridieae, 51
Spyridina, 198
Spyroidea, 198
Sphaerozoum, 189, 195
Squamarieae, 50
Spirillacea, 19, 23
Spirillaceae, 23
Squids, 210
Staphylococcus, 20
Staurocyclia, 195
Staurojoenina, 169
SpirilHna, 181, 182, 185
Spirillinidea, 185
Spirillinina, 185
Spirillum, 24
Spirochaeta, 29
Spirochaeta cytophaga, 26, 27
Spirochaeta plicatilis, 28, 29
Spirochaetacea, 29
Spirochaetaceae, 29
Spirochaetae, 27
Spirochactalea, 28
Spirochaetales, 28
Spirochaets, 12, 14, 166, 167
Spirochona, 233, 235
Spirochonidae, 231
Spirochonina, 230, 231
Spirocystida, 215
Spirocystidae, 215
Spirocystidces, 215
Spirocystis,
215
Spirodinium, 231
Spirodiscus, 66
Spirodiscus fulvus, 64, 66
Spirogyrales, 121
Spirolina, 185
Spironema, 222
Spirophyllum, 27
Spirostomum, 230
Spirotricha, 230
Spirotrichida, 230
Spirotrichonympha, 168, 169
Spirotrichonymphidae, 169
Spirotrichonymyjhina, 168
Staurojoenina assimilis, 170
Staurojoeninida, 169
Staurojoeninidae, 169
Stelangium, 28
Stemonitaceae, 171, 175
Stemonitales, 171, 174
Stemonitea, 174, 175
Stemonitidae, 175
Stemonitis, 175
Stemonitis splendens, 176
Stenophora, 217
Stenophorida, 21 7
Stenophoridae, 217
Stentor, 227, 230
Stentor coeruleus, 225
Stentoridae, 230
Stcntorina, 230
Stephanida, 198
Stephanonympha, 168
Stephida, 198
Stephoidea, 198
Stereotestales, 62
Stereum, 151
Stictaceac, 134
Stictea, 134
Sticteac, 134
Stictidaceac, 134
Stictideae, 133
Stigonema, 36
Stigoncmataceae, 36
Stiibaceae, 142
Index
Stilbeae, 142
Stilbellacea, 142
Stilbellaceae, 142
Stilbosporei, 141
Stilbum, 142
Stilophora, 88
Stilotricha,
60
Stomaticae, 74
Stomatoda, 223, 228, 233
Stomatophora, 216
Stomatophorida, 216
Stomatophoridae, 216
Streblomastigida, 165, 166
Streblomastigidae, 166
Streblomastix, 163, 168
Streblomastix Strix, 164, 166
Streblonema, 86
Streptococcus, 20
Streptomyces, 25
Streptomycetaceae, 25
Streptothrix, 25
Striatae, 74
Stylobryon, 60
Stylocephalida, 218
Stylocephalidae, 218
Stylocephalus, 218
Stylochrysalis,
59
Stylocometes, 236
Stylodinium, 100
Stylonychia, 227, 232, 233
Stylopage, 124
Stylopyxis,
Syncryptaceae, 59
Syncryptida, 58, 59
Syncryptidae, 59
Syncystida, 216
Syncystidae, 216
Syncystis,
233
Stipitochloridae, 66
Stipitococcacea, 65, 66
Stipitococcaceae, 66
Stipitococcus, 66
Stokesiella,
[299
60
Stylorhynchidae, 218
Stypocaulon, 83, 84, 86
Suctorea, 235
Suctoria, 235
Surirella, 71, 73, 75
Surirella saxonica, 72, 73
Surirellaceae, 75
Surirellea, 75
Surirelleae, 75
Swine, 210, 214
Symbelaria, 194
Symploca Muscorum, 13
Synactinomyxida, 222
Synactinomyxidae, 222
Synactinomyxon, 222
Synchytriacea, 115, 117
Synchytriaceae, 117
Synchtrium, 117
Syncephalastrum, 124
Syncephalastrum racemosum, 122
Syncephalis, 123, 124
Syncephalis nodosa, 122
Syncephalis pycnosperma, 122
Syncollaria, 194
Syncrypta, 59
216
Syndinidae, 102
Synedra, 72, 75
Syntamiidae, 86
Synura, 55, 59
Synura Uvella, 54
Synuraceae, 59
Syracosphaera, 60
Syracosphaera Quadricornu, 56
Syracosphaeraceae, 60
Syracosphaeridae, 60
Syracosphaerinae, 57, 60
Tabellaria, 75
Tabellariaceae, 75
Tabellariea, 75
Tabellarieae, 75
Taphrina, 127, 137
Taphrina aurea, 137
Taphrina deformans, 127, 136, 137
Teliosporeae, 142
Telomyxa, 222
Telomyxa
glugeiformis, 222
Telomyxlda, 222
Telomyxidae, 222
Telosporidea, 207
Telosporidia, 207
Tentaculifera, 224, 228, 235
Teratonympha, 171
Teratonympha
mirabilis,
170
Teratonymphida, 169
Teratonymphidae, 169
Termites, 166, 167, 168, 169
Termitidae, 168
Termopsis, 166, 168
Testacea, 205
Testacida, 205
Testaceolobosa, 205
Tetractinomyxida, 222
Tetractinomyxidae, 222
Tetractinomyxon, 222
Tetradinium, 100
Tetradinium javanicum, 104
Tetrahymena, 229
Tetrahymena Geleii, 227
Tetramitaceae, 165
Tetramitida, 165
Tetramitidae, 165
Tetramitina, 165
Tetramitus, 165
Tetramyxa, 179
Tetrasporeae, 82, 86
Tetrasporees, 209
Tetrataxis, 186
Textularia, 182, 186
Textulariaceae, 186
The
300]
Classification of
Lower Organisms
Toadstools, 151
Textularidae, 186
Textularidea, 185
Textularlna, 186
Textulinida, 186
Tokophrya, 235
Tokophrya Lemnarum, 234
Thalamophora, 179
Thalassicolla, 189, 194, 195
Thalassicollen, 194, 195
Thalassicollida, 195, 199
Thallochrysidacea, 62, 63
Tolypothrix, 35, 36
Torula, 130
Torulopsis, 130
Toxonema, 222
Thallochrysidaceae, 63
Tracheliidae, 230
Trachelina, 230
Trachelius, 230
Thallochrysis, 63
Trachelomonas, 94, 106, 107
Thamnidium, 124
Transchelia, 143
Tremella, 149
Tremella Auricula, 146
Tremellacea, 149
Tremellaceae, 149
Tremellales, 149
Tremellina, 146, 149, 150
Tremellineae, 146, 149
Tremellinei, 149
Tremellini, 149
Tremellodendron, 149
Trepomonadida, 165, 166
Trepomonadidae, 166
Trepomonas, 166
Treponema, 29
Thaumatomastix, 109
Thaumatomonadidae, 109
Thaumatonema, 109
Thaumatonemidae, 109
Thecamoeba, 202
Thecamoebae, 205
Thecamoebida, 201, 202
Thecamoebidae, 202
Theileria, 214
Theileridae, 214
Thelephora, 151
Thelephoracea, 151
Thelephoraceae, 151
Thelephorei, 151
Thelohania, 222
Theoconus, 198
Thiere, 172
Thiobacillus, 24
Thiobacteria, 30, 31,
Thiorhodaceae, 31
Treponema
Treponema
Treponema
Treponema
35
Thioploca, 35
Thiospira, 24, 31
Thiospirillum, 31
Thiothrix, 35
Thoracosphaeraceae, 60
Thoracosphaeridae, 60
Thorea, 47
Thraustochytriacea, 81, 82
Thraustochytriaceae, 82
Thraustochytrium proliferum, 82
Thraustotheca, 79
Ticks, 161, 206
Tilletia,
149
Tilletia Tritici, 145
Tilletiacea, 149
Tilletiaceae, 149
Tilopteridales, 86
Tilopteridca, 87
Tilopterideae, 87
Tilopteris, 87
Timothy, 148
Tinoporidea, 187
Tinoporus, 187
Tintinnidac, 231
Tintinnids, 224
Tintinnina, 231
Tintinnodea, 231
Tintinnoinea, 231
Tipulocystis, 215
Toads, 125
macrodentium, 29
microdentium, 29
pallidum, 28, 29
pertenue, 29
Treponematacea, 29
Treponemataceae, 29
Tretomphalus, 180
Triactinomyxon, 222
Triactinomyxidae, 222
Tribonema, 65, 66, 73, 95
Tribonema bombycina, 64
Tribonematacea, 65, 66
Tribonemataceae, 66
Triceratium, 74
Tricercomitus, 167
Tricercomitus Termopsidis, 164
Trichamoeba, 202
Trichia, 176, 177
Trichiacea, 174, 176
Trichiaceae, 171, 176
Trichiales, 171, 174
Trichiidae, 177
Trichina, 177
Trichinaceae, 1 76
Trichoblasteae, 51
Trichocystiferes, Protistes, 94, 95
Trichodina, 235
Trichodinidae, 235
Trichomitus, 166
Trichomonadida, 166, 167
Trichomonadidae, 166, 167
Trichomonadina, 158, 164, 166
Trichomonads, 165
Trichomonas, 166, 167
Trichomonas hominis, 165
Trichomonas tenax, 164, 167
[301
Index
Trichomonas Termopsidis, 168
Trichomonas vaginalis, 167
Trichonympha, 168, 169, 170
Trichonympha Campanula, 168, 170
Trichonympha sphaerica, l68
Trichonymphida, 169
Trichonymphidae, 169
Trichonymphidea, 168
Trichonymphina, 168
Trichophyton, 142
Trichospermi, 152, 171
Trichostomata, 229
Tridictyopus elegans, 196
Trigonomonas, 166
Triioculina, 184, 185
Trimastigaceae, 58
Trimastigida, 58, 165
Trimastigidae, 58
Trimastix, 58
Trinema, 191
Triplagia, 198
Triposolenia, 103
Triposolenia Ambulatrix, 104
Tripylaria, 199
Tripylea, l99
Tripyleen, 199
Tripylina, 199
Triticina, 188
Trochammina, 186
Trochamminida, 186
Trochamminidae, 186
Trochamminina, 186
Truffles, 135
Tryblidacea, 134
Tryblidaceae, 134
Tryblidieae, l33
Trypanophidae, 161
Trypanophis, 161
Trypanoplasma, 161
Trypanoplasmida, 159, 161
Trypanoplasmidae, 161
Trypanosoma, 162
Trypanosoma Brucii, 160, 162
Trypanosoma Cruzi, 162
Trypanosoma equinum, 162
Trypanosoma equiperdum, 162
Trypanosoma Evansi, 162
Trypanosoma gambiense, 162
Trypanosoma Lewisi, 160
Trypanosomata, 158
Trypanosomatidae, 161
Trypanosomes, 161, 212
Trypanosomidae, 161
Trypanosomidea, 158
Tuberacea, 135
Tuberaceae, 134
Tuberales, 134
Tuberculariaceae, 141
Tuberculariea, l4l
Tubercularieae, 141
Tubercularini, 141
Tuberineae, 134
Tubifer, 175
Tubiferaceae, 175
Tubiferida, 174, 175
Tubiferidae, 175
Tubinella, 185
Tubulina, 175
Tubulinaceae, 175
Tubulinidae, 175
Tuburcinia, 149
Tulasnella, 149, 150
Tulasnella sphaerospora, 145
Tulasnellales, 149
Tulostoma, 155
Tulostomataceae, 155
Tulostomea, 155
Tulostomei, 155
Tunicates, 216
Turillina, 188
Turkeys, 210
Turtles, 211
Tuscarilla,
200
Tuscarora, 200
Tuscarorida, 200
24
24
Uncinula, 132, 133
Uniflagellatae, 110
Urceolaria, 235
Urceolaridae, 235
Urceolarina, 235
Urceolus, 109
Uredinacea, 148
Uredinaceae, 148
Uredinales, 145, 147
Uredineae, 147
Ulvina
aceti,
Umbina
aceti,
Uredinees, 147
Uredo, 147
Uredo
linearis, 147
Urnula, 235
Urocentridae, 230
Urocentrina, 230
Urocentrum, 230
Uroglena, 59
Uroglenopsis, 59
Uroieptus, 233
Uromyces, 143
Urophagus, 166
Urophlyctis, 117
Urospora, 216
Urosporida, 216
Urosporidae, 216
Urosporidium, 218
Urostyla, 233
Urostylida, 233
Urostylidae, 233
Ustilaginacea, 149
Ustilaginaceae, 149
Ustilaginales, 149
Ustilaginea, 146, 149
Ustilagineae, 149
302]
The
Classification of
Ustilago, 149
Ustilago Heufleri, 145
Ustilago Hordei, 145
Uterini, 134, 137
Uvella, 59
Uvellina, 188
Uvigerina, 188
Uvigerinlda, 188
Uvigerinidae, 188
Vacuolaria, 65, 109
Vacuolaria viridis, 108
Vacuolariaceae, 109
Vaginicola, 233
Vaginifera, 233
Vaginulina, 187
Vahlkampfia, 202, 203
Valsa, 139
Valvulina, 186
Valvulinidae, 186
Vampyrella, 118, 189, 191, 192
Vampyrellacea, 191
Vampyrellaceae, 191
Vampyrelleae, 191
Vampyrellidae, 191
Vampyrellidea, 190
Vaucheria, 67, 76
Vaucheria Gardner!, 64
Vaucheria sessilis, 64
Vaucheriacea, 57, 63, 64
Vaucheriaceae, 63, 67
Vaucheriales, 63
Vaucherioideae, 55
Venturia, 139
Venturia inaequalis, 139
Verbeekina, 188
Vermes, 9
Verneulina, 186
Verneulinidae, 186
Veronica, 69
Verrucariacea, 139
Vertebralina, 184, 185
Vertebrates, 161, 165, 166, 167, 210, 211
Vibrio, 23
Vibrio Protheus, 201
Virgulina, 188
Volvox Chaos, 201
Vorticclla, 223, 226, 233, 235
Vorticellidae, 233
Vorticellina, 233
Vorticialcs, 179
Vorticialis, 186, 187
Vulvulina, 186
Wagnerella, 193, 194
Wardia, 221
Lower Organisms
Water molds, 77
Whales, 71
Wheat, 148
Wood
roach, 166, 169
Worms, 215, 217, 220
Worms, annelid, 216, 219, 221
Worms, oligochaet, 222
Worms, polychaet, 211
Worms, siphunculid, 210
Woronina, 179
Woroninaceae, 179
Woroninidae, 179
Wrangelieae, 47
Xanthomonadina, 63
Xanthomonas, 23
Xenococcus, 36
Xiphacantha, 197
Xylaria, 139
Zanardinia, 88
Zea Mays, 6
Zelleriella, 229
Zonaria, 87
Zooflagellata, 157
Zoomastigina, 157
Zoomastigoda, 157, 178
Zoomastigophorea, 157
Zoopagacea, 123, 124
Zoopagaceae, 124
Zoopagales, 121
Zoopage, 124
Zoophagus, 81
Zoosporidae, 191
Zoosporidea, 191
Zoosporidia, 190
Zoothamnium, 233
Zooxanthellae, 194
Zostera, 203
Zschokkella, 221
Zygochytrium, 118
Zygocystis, 216
Zygocystida, 216
Zygocystidae, 216
Zygomyceteae, 121
Zygomyceten, 121
Zygomycetes, 76, 1 18, 120, 121, 122, 127,
141
Zygophyceac, 53
Zygophyta, 53
Zygorhynchus, 124
Zygostephanus, 198
Zythiacea, 141
Zythiaceac, 141